TCS CLI 8.4.2.7 Oct-01-2012

FTOS Command Line
Reference Guide
FTOS 8.4.2.7
E-Series TeraScale, C-Series,
S-Series (S50/S25)
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.

2012 Dell Force10. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
2012 Dell Inc.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell(TM), the Dell logo, Dell Boomi(TM), Dell Precision(TM) , OptiPlex(TM), Latitude(TM), PowerEdge(TM),
PowerVault(TM), PowerConnect(TM), OpenManage(TM), EqualLogic(TM), Compellent(TM), KACE(TM), FlexAddress(TM),
Force10(TM) and Vostro(TM) are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel(R), Pentium(R), Xeon(R), Core(R) and Celeron(R) are registered trademarks
of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. AMD(R) is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron(TM), AMD Phenom(TM) and
AMD Sempron(TM) are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft(R), Windows(R), Windows Server(R), Internet Explorer(R),
MS-DOS(R), Windows Vista(R) and Active Directory(R) are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries. Red Hat(R) and Red Hat(R)Enterprise Linux(R) are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries. Novell(R) and SUSE(R) are registered trademarks of Novell Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Oracle(R) is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Citrix(R), Xen(R), XenServer(R) and XenMotion(R) are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. VMware(R), Virtual SMP(R),
vMotion(R), vCenter(R) and vSphere(R) are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. in the United States or other countries.
IBM(R) is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
October 2012
1 Preface
About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Information Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2 CLI Basics
Accessing the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Multiple Configuration Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Navigating the Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Obtaining Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using the Keyword No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Filtering show Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Displaying All Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Filtering Command Output Multiple Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Command Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
EXEC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
EXEC Privilege Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
CONFIGURATION Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
INTERFACE Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
LINE Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
TRACE-LIST Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
MAC ACCESS LIST Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
IP ACCESS LIST Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
ROUTE-MAP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
PREFIX-LIST Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
AS-PATH ACL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
IP COMMUNITY LIST Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
REDIRECT-LIST Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
SPANNING TREE Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Per-VLAN SPANNING TREE Plus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
RAPID SPANNING TREE Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
PROTOCOL GVRP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
ROUTER OSPF Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
ROUTER RIP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
ROUTER ISIS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
ROUTER BGP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Determining the Chassis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
3 File Management
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Basic File Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
| 3
Upgrading the C-Series FPGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
www.dell.com | support.dell.com
4 BOOT_USER Mode
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
5 Control and Monitoring

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
6 802.1ag
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7 802.3ah
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8 802.1X
Important Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
9 Access Control Lists (ACL)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Commands Common to all ACL Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Common IP ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Standard IP ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Extended IP ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Common MAC Access List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Standard MAC ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Extended MAC ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
IP Prefix List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Route Map Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
AS-Path Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
IP Community List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
10 ACL VLAN Group

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
11 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4 |
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
BGPv4 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
MBGP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
13 Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
CAM Profile Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
CAM IPv4flow Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
CAM Layer 2 ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
14 Configuration Rollback
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
15 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Commands to Configure Secure DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
16 Equal Cost Multi-Path

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
17 Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
18 FTOS Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
19 FTOS Service Agent

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
| 5
20 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
21 High Availability (HA)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
22 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
IGMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
IGMP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Important Points to Remember for IGMP Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
23 Interfaces
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Basic Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Port Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
UDP Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
24 IPv4 Routing
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
25 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
IPv6 ACL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
IPv6 Route Map Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
26 IPv6 Basics
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
6 |
27 IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
IPv6 BGP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733
IPv6 MBGP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795
28 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
29 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
30 Layer 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
MAC Addressing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .867
Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887
31 Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
LLDP-MED Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .906
32 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
MLD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
MLD Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .922
33 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
34 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
35 Multicast
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
IPv4 Multicast Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .953
IPv6 Multicast Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .970
| 7
36 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
37 Object Tracking
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
IPv4 Object Tracking Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .985
IPv6 Object Tracking Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .999
38 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1005
OSPFv2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1005
OSPFv3 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1063
39 Policy-based Routing (PBR)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1085
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
40 PIM-Dense Mode (PIM-DM)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1095
IPv4 PIM-Dense Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1095
41 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1097
IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1097
IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1120
42 PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1131
IPv4 PIM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1131
IPv4 PIM-Source Specific Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1131
IPv6 PIM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1133
IPv6 PIM-Source Specific Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1133
43 Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1135
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
44 Port Monitoring
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1141
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
8 |
Important Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1142
45 Private VLAN (PVLAN)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1155
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
Private VLAN Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1155
46 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1165
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
47 Quality of Service (QoS)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1179
Global Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1179
Per-Port QoS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1180
Policy-Based QoS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1188
Important Points to Remembermulticast-bandwidth option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1201
Queue-Level Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1224
48 Router Information Protocol (RIP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1235
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
49 Remote Monitoring (RMON)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1253
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
50 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1265
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
51 Security
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1277
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
AAA Accounting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1277
Authorization and Privilege Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1280
Authentication and Password Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1284
RADIUS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1295
TACACS+ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1300
Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1303
| 9
SSH Server and SCP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1310
Trace List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1322

Secure DHCP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1332
52 Service Provider Bridging

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1337
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
53 sFlow
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1343
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
54 SNMP and Syslog

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1355
SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1355
Syslog Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1371
55 SONET
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1383
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
56 S-Series Stacking Commands

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1401
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
57 Storm Control
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1409
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
58 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1417
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
59 Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1429
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
10 |
60 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1445
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
61 VLAN Stacking
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1455
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
62 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1465
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
63 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1475
IPv4 VRRP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1475
IPv6 VRRP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1489
64 C-Series Diagnostics and Debugging

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1495
Inter-process Communication Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1495
RPM Management Port Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1501
Data Path Debugging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1503
Interface Troubleshooting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1506
Advanced ASIC Debugging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1510
ACL and System-Flow Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1514
Interface Management Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1516
Layer 2 Debug Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1518
Trace Logging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1519
Offline Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1525
PoE Hardware Status Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1527
Buffer Tuning Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1528
65 E-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1535
Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1535
Hardware Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1558
| 11
66 S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Buffer Tuning Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1577
Hardware Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1582
A ICMP Message Types
B SNMP Traps
C Index
D Command Index
12 |
1
Preface
About this Guide

This book provides information on the FTOS Command Line Interface (CLI). It includes some
information on the protocols and features found in FTOS and on the Dell Force10 systems supported
by FTOS (C-Series c, E-Series e, and S-Series s).
This chapter includes:

Objectives
Audience
Conventions
Related Documents
Objectives
This document is intended as a reference guide for the FTOS command line interface (CLI) commands,
with detailed syntax statements, along with usage information and sample output.
For details on when to use the commands, refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide. That guide contains
an Appendix with a list of the RFCs and MIBs (management information base files) supported.
Audience
This document is intended for system administrators who are responsible for configuring or
maintaining networks. This guide assumes you are knowledgeable in Layer 2 and Layer 3 networking
technologies.
Conventions
This document uses the following conventions to describe command syntax:
Convention Description
keyword Keywords are in bold and should be entered in the CLI as listed.
parameter Parameters are in italics and require a number or word to be entered in the CLI.
Preface | 13
{X} Keywords and parameters within braces must be entered in the CLI.
[X] Keywords and parameters within brackets are optional.
x|y Keywords and parameters separated by bar require you to choose one.
x||y Keywords and parameters separated by a double bar enables you to choose any or all of them.
Information Symbols
Table 1-1 describes symbols contained in this guide.
Table 1-1. Information Symbols
Symbol Brief Description
c C-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the C-Series.
e E-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the E-Series TeraScale AND
E-Series ExaScale.
et E-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the E-Series TeraScale platform
TeraScale only.
s S-Series This symbol indicates that the selected feature is supported on the S-Series.
Related Documents
For more information about the system, refer to the following documents:
FTOS Configuration Guide

Installation and maintenance guides for your system
Release Notes for your system and FTOS version
14 | Preface
2
CLI Basics
This chapter describes the command structure and command modes. FTOS commands are in a
text-based interface that allows you to use launch commands, change the command modes, and
configure interfaces and protocols.
This chapter covers the following topics:

Accessing the Command Line
Multiple Configuration Users
Navigating the Command Line Interface
Obtaining Help
Using the Keyword No
Filtering show Commands
Command Modes
Accessing the Command Line

When the system boots successfully, you are positioned on the command line in the EXEC mode and
not prompted to log in. You can access the commands through a serial console port or a Telnet session.
When you Telnet into the switch, you are prompted to enter a login name and password.
Figure 2-1 is an example of a successful Telnet login session.

Figure 2-1. Login Example
telnet 172.31.1.53
Trying 172.31.1.53...
Connected to 172.31.1.53.
Escape character is '^]'.
Login: username
Password:
FTOS>
Once you log into the switch, the prompt provides you with current command-level information (refer
to Table 2-1).
CLI Basics | 15
Multiple Configuration Users
When a user enters the CONFIGURATION mode and another user(s) is already in that configuration
mode, generates an alert warning message similar to the following:
Figure 2-2. Configuration Mode User Alert
FTOS#conf
% Warning: The following users are currently configuring the system:
User "" on line console0

User "admin" on line vty0 ( 123.12.1.123 )
User "Irene" on line vty3 ( 123.12.1.321 )
FTOS(conf)#FTOS#
When another user enters the CONFIGURATION mode, FTOS adds a message similar to the
following, where the user in this case is admin on vty2:
% Warning: User admin on line vty2 172.16.1.210 is in configuration
Navigating the Command Line Interface

The Command Line Interface (CLI) prompt displayed by FTOS is comprised of:
hostname the initial part of the prompt, FTOS by default. You can change it with the
hostname command, as described in hostname.
The second part of the prompt, reflecting the current CLI mode, as shown in Table 2-1.
The CLI prompt changes as you move up and down the levels of the command structure. Table 2-1
lists the prompts and their corresponding command levels, called modes. Starting with the
CONFIGURATION mode, the command prompt adds modifiers to further identify the mode. The
command modes are explained in Command Modes.
Note: Some of the following modes are not available on C-Series or S-Series.
Table 2-1. Command Prompt and Corresponding Command Mode
Prompt CLI Command Mode

FTOS> EXEC
FTOS# EXEC Privilege
FTOS(conf)# CONFIGURATION
16 | CLI Basics
Table 2-1. Command Prompt and Corresponding Command Mode
Prompt CLI Command Mode

FTOS(conf-if)#12 INTERFACE
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-lo-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-nu-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-po-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-vl-0)#
FTOS(conf-if-so-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-ma-0/0)#
FTOS(conf-if-range)#
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# IP ACCESS LIST
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#
FTOS(config-line-aux)# LINE
FTOS(config-line-console)#
FTOS(config-line-vty)#
FTOS(config-ext-macl)# MAC ACCESS LIST
FTOS(config-std-macl)#
FTOS(config-mon-sess)# MONITOR SESSION
FTOS(config-span)# STP
FTOS(config-mstp)# MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE
FTOS(config-pvst)# Per-VLAN SPANNING TREE Plus
FTOS(config-rstp)# RAPID SPANNING TREE
FTOS(config-gvrp)# PROTOCOL GVRP
FTOS(config-route-map)# ROUTE-MAP
FTOS(conf-nprefixl)# PREFIX-LIST
FTOS(conf-router_rip)# ROUTER RIP
FTOS(conf-redirect-list)# REDIRECT
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)# ROUTER BGP
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)# ROUTER OSPF
FTOS(conf-router_isis)# ROUTER ISIS
FTOS(conf-trace-acl)# TRACE-LIST
Obtaining Help
As soon as you are in a command mode there are several ways to access help.
To obtain a list of keywords at any command mode, do the following:
Enter a ? at the prompt or after a keyword. There must always be a space before the ?.
To obtain a list of keywords with a brief functional description, do the following:
Enter help at the prompt.
To obtain a list of available options, do the following:
CLI Basics | 17
Type a keyword followed by a space and a ?
Type a partial keyword followed by a ?

A display of keywords beginning with the partial keyword is listed.
Figure 2-3 illustrates the results of entering ip ? at the prompt.
Figure 2-3. Partial Keyword Example

FTOS(conf)#ip ?
access-list Named access-list
as-path BGP autonomous system path filter
community-list Add a community list entry
domain-list Domain name to complete unqualified host name
domain-lookup Enable IP Domain Name System hostname translation
domain-name Define the default domain name
fib FIB configuration commands
ftp FTP configuration commands
host Add an entry to the ip hostname table
max-frag-count Max. fragmented packets allowed in IP re-assembly
multicast-routing Enable IP multicast forwarding
name-server Specify addess of name server to use
pim Protocol Independent Multicast
prefix-list Build a prefix list
radius Interface configuration for RADIUS
redirect-list Named redirect-list
route Establish static routes
scp SCP configuration commands
source-route Process packets with source routing header options
ssh SSH configuration commands
tacacs Interface configuration for TACACS+
telnet Specify telnet options
tftp TFTP configuration commands
trace-group Named trace-list
trace-list Named trace-list
FTOS(conf)#ip
When entering commands, you can take advantage of the following timesaving features:
The commands are not case sensitive.
You can enter partial (truncated) command keywords. For example, you can enter int gig int
interface for the interface gigabitethernet interface command.
Use the TAB key to complete keywords in commands.
Use the up arrow key to display the last enabled command.
Use either the Backspace key or the Delete key to erase the previous character.
18 | CLI Basics
Use the left and right arrow keys to navigate left or right in the FTOS command line. Table 2-2
defines the key combinations valid at the FTOS command line.
Table 2-2. Short-cut Keys and their Actions
Key
Combination Action
CNTL-A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line.
CNTL-B Moves the cursor back one character.
CNTL-D Deletes character at cursor.
CNTL-E Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
CNTL-F Moves the cursor forward one character.
CNTL-I Completes a keyword.
CNTL-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line.
CNTL-L Re-enters the previous command.
CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with Ctrl-P
or the up arrow key
CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command
CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command.
CNTL-U Deletes the line.
CNTL-W Deletes the previous word.
CNTL-X Deletes the line.
CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs.
Esc B Moves the cursor back one word.
Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word.
Esc D Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the word.
Using the Keyword No

To disable, delete, or return to default values, use the no form of the commands. For most commands,
if you type the keyword no in front of the command, you will disable that command or delete it from
the running configuration. In this document, the no form of the command is discussed in the Command
Syntax portion of the command description.
Filtering show Commands

You can filter the display output of a show command to find specific information, to display certain
information only, or to begin the command output at the first instance of a regular expression or phrase.
When you execute a show command, followed by a pipe ( | ) and one of the parameters listed below
and a regular expression, the resulting output either excludes or includes those parameters, as defined
by the parameter:
display display additional configuration information
CLI Basics | 19
except display only text that does not match the pattern (or regular expression)
find search for the first occurrence of a pattern

grep display text that matches a pattern
no-more do not paginate the display output
save - copy output to a file for future use
Note: FTOS accepts a space before or after the pipe, no space before or after the pipe, or any
combination. For example:
FTOS#command | grep gigabit |except regular-expression | find
regular-expression
The grep command option has an ignore-case sub-option that makes the search case-insensitive.
For example, the commands:
show run | grep Ethernet would return a search result with instances containing a capitalized
Ethernet, such as interface GigabitEthernet 0/0.
show run | grep ethernet would not return the search result, above, because it only searches
for instances containing a non-capitalized ethernet.
Executing the command show run | grep Ethernet ignore-case would return instances
containing both Ethernet and ethernet.
Displaying All Output

To display the output all at once (not one screen at a time), use the no-more after the pipe. This is
similar to the terminal length screen-length command except that the no-more option affects the
output of just the specified command.For example:
FTOS#show running-config | no-more
Filtering Command Output Multiple Times

You can filter a single command output multiple times. Place the save option as the last filter. For
example:
FTOS# command | grep regular-expression | except regular-expression | grep

other-regular-expression | find regular-expression | no-more | save
Command Modes
To navigate to various CLI modes, you need to use specific commands to launch each mode.
Navigation to these modes is discussed in the following sections.
Note: Some of the following modes are not available on C-Series or S-Series.
20 | CLI Basics
EXEC Mode
When you initially log in to the switch, by default, you are logged into the EXEC mode. This mode
allows you to view settings and to enter the EXEC Privilege mode to configure the device. While you
are in the EXEC mode, the > prompt is displayed following the hostname prompt, as described
above. which is FTOS by default. You can change it with the hostname command. See the
command hostname. Each mode prompt is preceded by the hostname.
EXEC Privilege Mode

The enable command accesses the EXEC Privilege mode. If an administrator has configured an
Enable password, you will be prompted to enter it here.
The EXEC Privilege mode allows you to access all commands accessible in EXEC mode, plus other
commands, such as to clear ARP entries and IP addresses. In addition, you can access the
CONFIGURATION mode to configure interfaces, routes, and protocols on the switch. While you are
logged in to the EXEC Privilege mode, the # prompt is displayed.
CONFIGURATION Mode
In the EXEC Privilege mode, use the configure command to enter the CONFIGURATION mode and
configure routing protocols and access interfaces.
To enter the CONFIGURATION mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the EXEC Privilege mode.
2. Enter the configure command. The prompt changes to include (conf).
From this mode, you can enter INTERFACE by using the interface command.
INTERFACE Mode
Use the INTERFACE mode to configure interfaces or IP services on those interfaces. An interface can
be physical (for example, a Gigabit Ethernet port) or virtual (for example, the Null interface).
To enter INTERFACE mode:

1. Verify that you are logged into the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the interface command followed by an interface type and interface number that is available
on the switch.
3. The prompt changes to include the designated interface and slot/port number, as outlined in
Table 2-3.
Table 2-3. Interface prompts
Prompt Interface Type

FTOS(conf-if)# INTERFACE mode
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/0)# Gigabit Ethernet interface followed by slot/port information
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/0)# Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface followed by slot/port information
FTOS(conf-if-lo-0)# Loopback interface number.
CLI Basics | 21
Table 2-3. Interface prompts
Prompt Interface Type

FTOS(conf-if-nu-0)# Null Interface followed by zero
FTOS(conf-if-po-0)# Port-channel interface number
FTOS(conf-if-vl-0)# VLAN Interface followed by VLAN number (range 1 to 4094)
FTOS(conf-if-so-0/0)# SONET interface followed by slot/port information.
FTOS(conf-if-ma-0/0)# Management Ethernet interface followed by slot/port information
FTOS(conf-if-range)# Designated interface range (used for bulk configuration; see interface range).
LINE Mode
Use the LINE mode to configure console or virtual terminal parameters.
To enter LINE mode:

1. Verify that you are logged in to the CONFIGURATION mode.
2. Enter the line command. You must include the keywords console or vty and their line number
available on the switch.The prompt changes to include (config-line-console) or (config-line-vty).
You can exit this mode by using the exit command.
TRACE-LIST Mode
When in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the trace-list command to enter the TRACE-LIST mode
and configure a Trace list.
2. Enter the ip trace-list command. You must include the name of the Trace list. The prompt
change to include (conf-trace-acl).
You can exit this mode by using the exit command.
MAC ACCESS LIST Mode

While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the mac access-list standard or mac access-list
extended command to enter the MAC ACCESS LIST mode and configure either standard or
extended access control lists (ACL).
To enter MAC ACCESS LIST mode:

2. Use the mac access-list standard or mac access-list extended command. You must
include a name for the ACL.The prompt changes to include (conf-std-macl) or (conf-ext-macl).
You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.
22 | CLI Basics
IP ACCESS LIST Mode
While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the ip access-list standard or ip access-list
extended command to enter the IP ACCESS LIST mode and configure either standard or extended
access control lists (ACL).
To enter IP ACCESS LIST mode:

2. Use the ip access-list standard or ip access-list extended command. You must include a
name for the ACL.The prompt changes to include (conf-std-nacl) or (conf-ext-nacl).
ROUTE-MAP Mode
While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the route-map command to enter the ROUTE-MAP
mode and configure a route map.
To enter ROUTE-MAP mode:

2. Use the route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] command. The prompt
changes to include (route-map).
PREFIX-LIST Mode
While in the CONFIGURATION mode, use the ip prefix-list command to enter the PREFIX-LIST
mode and configure a prefix list.
To enter PREFIX-LIST mode:

2. Enter the ip prefix-list command. You must include a name for the prefix list.The prompt
changes to include (conf-nprefixl).
AS-PATH ACL Mode

Use the AS-PATH ACL mode to configure an AS-PATH Access Control List (ACL) on the E-Series.
See Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).
To enter AS-PATH ACL mode:

2. Enter the ip as-path access-list command. You must include a name for the AS-PATH
ACL.The prompt changes to include (config-as-path).
CLI Basics | 23
IP COMMUNITY LIST Mode
Use the IP COMMUNITY LIST mode to configure an IP Community ACL on the E-Series. See
Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).
To enter IP COMMUNITY LIST mode:

2. Enter the ip community-list command. You must include a name for the Community list.The
prompt changes to include (config-community-list).
REDIRECT-LIST Mode
Use the REDIRECT-LIST mode to configure a Redirect list on the E-Series, as described in
Chapter 39, Policy-based Routing (PBR).
To enter REDIRECT-LIST mode:

2. Use the ip redirect-list command. You must include a name for the Redirect-list.The prompt
changes to include (conf-redirect-list).
SPANNING TREE Mode

Use the STP mode to enable and configure the Spanning Tree protocol, as described in Chapter 58,
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
To enter STP mode:

2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree stp-id command.
Per-VLAN SPANNING TREE Plus Mode

Use PVST+ mode to enable and configure the Per-VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST+) protocol, as
described in Chapter 46, Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+).
Note: The protocol is PVST+, but the plus sign is dropped at the CLI prompt
To enter PVST+ mode:

2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree pvst command.
24 | CLI Basics
RAPID SPANNING TREE Mode
Use PVST+ mode to enable and configure the RSTP protocol, as described in Chapter 50, Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
To enter RSTP mode:

2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree rstp command.
MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Mode

Use MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode to enable and configure the Multiple Spanning Tree
protocol, as described in Chapter 34, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).
To enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode:

2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree mstp command.
PROTOCOL GVRP Mode

Use the PROTOCOL GVRP mode to enable and configure GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
(GVRP), as described in Chapter 20, GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP).
To enter PROTOCOL GVRP mode:

2. Enter the protocol gvrp command syntax.
ROUTER OSPF Mode

Use the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure OSPF, as described in Chapter 38, Open Shortest Path
First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3).
To enter ROUTER OSPF mode:

2. Use the router ospf {process-id} command.The prompt changes to include
(conf-router_ospf-id).
You can switch to the INTERFACE mode by using the interface command or you can switch to the
ROUTER RIP mode by using the router rip command.
CLI Basics | 25
ROUTER RIP Mode
Use the ROUTER RIP mode to configure RIP on the C-Series or E-Series, as described in Chapter 48,
Router Information Protocol (RIP).
To enter ROUTER RIP mode:

2. Enter the router rip command.The prompt changes to include (conf-router_rip).
ROUTER OSPF mode by using the router ospf command.
ROUTER ISIS Mode

Use the ROUTER ISIS mode to configure ISIS on the E-Series, as described in Intermediate System to
Intermediate System (IS-IS).
To enter ROUTER ISIS mode:

2. Enter the router isis [tag] command.The prompt changes to include (conf-router_isis).
ROUTER RIP mode by using the router rip command.
ROUTER BGP Mode

Use the ROUTER BGP mode to configure BGP on the C-Series or E-Series, as described in
Chapter 12, Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4).
To enter ROUTER BGP mode:

2. Enter the router bgp as-number command.The prompt changes to include (conf-router_bgp).
Determining the Chassis Mode

The chassis mode in FTOS determines which hardware is being supported in an E-Series chassis. The
chassis mode is programmed into an EEPROM on the backplane of the chassis and the change takes
place only after the chassis is rebooted. Configuring the appropriate chassis mode enables the system
to use all the ports on the card and recognize all software features.
26 | CLI Basics
3
File Management
Overview
This chapter contains commands needed to manage the configuration files and includes other file
management commands found in FTOS. This chapter contains these sections:
Basic File Management Commands
Upgrading the C-Series FPGA
Basic File Management Commands

The commands included in this chapter are:
boot config
boot host
boot network
boot system
boot system gateway
cd
change bootflash-image
copy
copy (Streamline Upgrade)
copy running-config startup-config
delete
dir
download alt-boot-image
download alt-full-image
download alt-system-image
format (C-Series and E-Series)
format flash (S-Series)
logging coredump
logging coredump server
pwd
rename
boot system
show bootvar
show file
File Management | 27
show file-systems
show linecard
show os-version
show running-config
show startup-config
show version
upgrade (E-Series version)
upgrade (C-Series version)
upgrade (S-Series management unit) on page 55
upgrade fpga-image
boot config
ce Set the location and name of the configuration file that is loaded at system start-up (or reload) instead
of the default startup-configuration.
Syntax boot config {remote-first | rpm0 file-url | rpm1 file-url}
Parameters
remote-first Enter the keywords remote-first to attempt to load the boot configuration files from a
remote location.
rpm0 Enter the keywords rpm0 first to specify the local boot configuration file for RPM 0.
rpm1 Enter the keywords rpm1 first to specify the local boot configuration file for RPM 1.
file-url Enter the location information:
For a file on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
For a file on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.
Defaults Not configured.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION
Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series
History
E-Series original Command
Usage To display these changes in the show bootvar command output, you must save the running
Information configuration to the startup configuration (copy running-config startup-config or write).
Dell FTOS strongly recommends using local files for configuration (RPM0 or RPM1 flash or slot0).
When you specify a file as the boot config file, it is listed in the boot variables (bootvar) as LOCAL
CONFIG FILE. If you do not specify a boot config file, then the startup-configuration is used, although
the bootvar shows LOCAL CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist. When you specify a boot
config file, the switch reloads with that config file, rather than the startup-config. Note that if you
specify a local config file which is not present in the specified location, then the startup-configuration
is loaded.
The write memory command always saves the running-configuration to the file labeled
startup-configuration. When using a LOCAL CONFIG FILE other than the startup-config, use the copy
command to save any running-configuration changes to that local file.
28 | File Management
Output for show bootvar with no boot configuration configured
FTOS#show bootvar
PRIMARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
SECONDARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.6.1.0.bin
DEFAULT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.5.1.0.bin
LOCAL CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY HOST CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
PRIMARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
SECONDARY NETWORK CONFIG FILE = variable does not exist
CURRENT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 1 = flash://startup-config
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 2 = variable does not exist
CONFIG LOAD PREFERENCE = local first
BOOT INTERFACE GATEWAY IP ADDRESS = variable does not exist
Output for show bootvar with boot configuration configured

FTOS#show bootvar
PRIMARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
SECONDARY IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.6.1.0.bin
DEFAULT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-7.5.1.0.bin
CURRENT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-EF-8.2.1.0.bin
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 1 = flash://CustomerA.cfg
Related
Commands
show bootvar Display the variable settings for the E-Series boot parameters.
boot host
ce Set the location of the configuration file from a remote host.
Syntax boot host {primary | secondary} remote-url
Parameters
primary Enter the keywords primary to attempt to load the primary host configuration files.
secondary Enter the keywords secondary to attempt to load the secondary host configuration files.
remote-url Enter the following location keywords and information:
For a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
For a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath
Command
History
Information configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command).
Related
Commands
boot network
ce Set the location of the configuration file in a remote network.
Syntax boot network {primary | secondary} remote-url
Parameters
primary Enter the keywords primary to attempt to load the primary network configuration files.
secondary Enter the keywords secondary to attempt to load the secondary network configuration
files.
remote-url Enter the following location keywords and information:
Defaults None
Command
History
Information configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command).
Related
Commands
boot system
ce Tell the system where to access the FTOS image used to boot the system.
Syntax boot system {rpm0 | rpm1} (default | primary | secondary} file-url
Parameters
rpm0 Enter the keyword rpm0 to configure boot parameters for RPM0.
rpm1 Enter the keyword rpm1 to configure boot parameters for RPM1.
default After entering rpm0 or rpm1, enter the keyword default to specify the parameters to
be used if those specified by primary or secondary fail. The default location should
always be the internal flash device (flash:), so that you can be sure that a verified image is
available there.
primary After entering rpm0 or rpm1, enter the keyword primary to configure the boot
parameters used in the first attempt to boot FTOS.
secondary After entering rpm0 or rpm1, enter the keyword secondary to configure boot
parameters used if the primary operating system boot selection is not available.
file-url To boot from a file:
on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.
on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath
Command
History
Information configuration to the startup configuration (using the copy command) and reload system.
Related
change bootflash-image Change the primary, secondary, or default boot image configuration.
Commands
boot system gateway Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management
subnet.
boot system gateway

ce Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management subnet.
Syntax boot system gateway ip-address
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format.
Usage Saving the address to the startup configuration file preserves the address in NVRAM in case the startup
Information configuration file is deleted.
Command
History
Related
change bootflash-image Change the primary, secondary, or default boot image configuration.
Commands
cd
ces Change to a different working directory.
Syntax cd directory
Parameters
directory (OPTONAL) Enter one of the following:

flash: (internal Flash) or any sub-directory
slot0: (external Flash) or any sub-directory (C-Series and E-Series only)
Command Modes EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
History
change bootflash-image
ce Change boot flash image from which to boot.
Syntax change bootflash-image {cp | linecard linecard-slot | rp}
Parameters
cp Enter the keyword cp to change the bootflash image on the Control
Processor on the RPM.
linecard linecard-slot Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number to change the
bootflash image on a specific line card.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200; 0 on 6 on the E600, and 0 to 5 on the
E300.
rp Enter the keyword rp to change the bootflash image on the RPM Route
Processor.
Command
History
Usage A system message appears stating that the bootflash image has been changed. You must reload the
Information system before the system can switch to the new bootflash image.
copy
ces Copy one file to another location. FTOS supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing for FTP, TFTP, and SCP
(in the hostip field).
Syntax copy source-file-url destination-file-url
Parameters
file-url Enter the following location keywords and information:
To copy a file from the internal FLASH, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
To copy a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/filepath
To copy a file from the internal FLASH on RPM0, enter rpm0flash://filepath
To copy a file from the external FLASH on RPM0, enter rpm0slot0://filepath
To copy a file from the internal FLASH on RPM1, enter rpm1flash://filepath
To copy a file from the external FLASH on RPM1, enter rpm1slot0://filepath
To copy the running configuration, enter the keyword running-config.
To copy the startup configuration, enter the keyword startup-config.
To copy using Secure Copy (SCP), enter the keyword scp: (If scp: is entered in the
source position, then enter the target URL;
If scp: is entered in the target position, first enter the source URL; see below for
examples.)
To copy a file on the external FLASH, enter slot0:// followed by the filename.
To copy a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath
ExaScale only
To copy a file from a USB drive on RPM0, enter rpm0usbflash://filepath
To copy a file from an external USB drive, enter usbflash://filepath
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added IPv6 addressing support for FTP, TFTP, and SCP.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added usbflash and rpm0usbflash commands on E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series and added SSH port number to SCP prompt sequence on all
systems.
Usage FTOS supports a maximum of 100 files, at the root directory level, on both the internal and external
Information Flash.
The usbflash and rpm0usbflash commands are supported on E-Series ExaScale platform only.
Refer to the FTOS Release Notes for a list of approved USB vendors.
When copying a file to a remote location (for example, using Secure Copy (SCP)), enter only the
keywords and FTOS prompts you for the rest of the information.
For example, when using SCP, you can enter copy running-config scp:
The running-config is the source, and the target is specified in the ensuing prompts. FTOS prompts
you to enter any required information, as needed for the named destinationremote destination,
destination filename, user ID and password, etc.
When you use the copy running-config startup-config command to copy the running
configuration (the startup configuration file amended by any configuration changes made since the
system was started) to the startup configuration file, FTOS creates a backup file on the internal flash of
the startup configuration.
FTOS supports copying the running-configuration to a TFTP server or to an FTP server:
copy running-config tftp:
copy running-config ftp:
Command Example: copy running-config scp:

FTOS#copy running-config scp:/
Address or name of remote host []: 10.10.10.1
Destination file name [startup-config]? old_running
User name to login remote host? sburgess
Password to login remote host? dilling
In this example copy scp: flash: specifying SCP in the first position indicates that the target is
to be specified in the ensuing prompts. Entering flash: in the second position means that the target is
the internal Flash. In this example the source is on a secure server running SSH, so the user is prompted
for the UDP port of the SSH server on the remote host.
Using scp to copy from an SSH Server

FTOS#copy scp: flash:
Address or name of remote host []: 10.11.199.134
Port number of the server [22]: 99
Source file name []: test.cfg
User name to login remote host: admin
Password to login remote host:
Destination file name [test.cfg]: test1.cfg
Related
cd Change working directory.
Commands
copy (Streamline Upgrade)

ce Copy a system image to a local file and update the boot profile.
Syntax copy source-url target-url [boot-image [synchronize-rpm [external]]]
Parameters
source-url Enter the source file in url format. The source file is a valid Dell Force10 release
image. Image validation is automatic.
target-url Enter the local target file in url format.
boot-image Enter the keyword boot-image to designate this copy command as a streamline
update.
synchronize-rpm Enter the keyword synchronize-rpm to copy the new image file to the peer
RPM.
external Enter the keyword external to designate the target device on the peer RPM as
external flash (instead of the default internal flash).
Default: Internal Flash
Defaults No default behavior
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added IPv6 addressing support for FTP, TFTP, and SCP.
History
Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced
Usage In this streamline copy command, the source image is copied to the primary RPM and then, if
Information specified, to the standby RPM. After the copy is complete, the new image file path on each RPM is
automatically configured as the primary image path for the next boot. The current system image (the
one from which the RPM booted) is automatically configured as the secondary image path.
FTOS supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing for FTP, TFTP, and SCP.
Note: The keywords boot-image, synchronize-rpm, and external can be used on the
Primary RPM only.
copy running-config startup-config

ce Copy running configuration to the startup configuration.
Syntax copy running-config startup-config {duplicate}
Command
History
Usage This command is useful for quickly making a changed configuration on one chassis available on
Information external flash in order to move it to another chassis.
When you use the copy running-config startup-config duplicate command to copy the running
configuration to the startup configuration, FTOS creates a backup file on the internal flash of the
startup configuration.
delete
ces Delete a file from the flash. Once deleted, files cannot be restored.
Syntax delete flash-url [no-confirm]
Parameters
flash-url Enter the following location and keywords:
For a file or directory on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename or
directory name.
For a file or directory on the external Flash, enter slot0:// followed by the filename or
directory name.
no-confirm (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-confirm to specify that FTOS does not require user
input for each file prior to deletion.
Command
History
dir
ces Display the files in a file system. The default is the current directory.
Syntax dir [filename | directory name:]
Parameters
filename | directory name: (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following:
For a file or directory on the internal Flash, enter flash://
followed by the filename or directory name.
For a file or directory on the external Flash, enter slot0://
followed by the filename or directory name:
Command
History
Example Command Example dir for the Internal Flash

FTOS#dir
Directory of flash:
1 -rwx 6478482 May 13 101 16:54:34 E1200.BIN
flash: 64077824 bytes total (57454592 bytes free)

FTOS#
Related
cd Change working directory.
Commands
download alt-boot-image
ce Download an alternate boot image to the chassis.
Syntax download alt-boot-image file-url
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from E-Series and C-Series
History
Usage Starting with FTOS 7.7.1.0, the functions of this command are incorporated into the upgrade
Information command.
For software upgrade details, see the FTOS Release Notes.
Related
Commands upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions.
upgrade (C-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions.
download alt-full-image
e Download an alternate FTOS image to the chassis.
Syntax download alt-full-image file-url
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed form E-Series
History
Related
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions
Commands
download alt-system-image
e Download an alternate system image (not the boot flash or boot selector image) to the chassis.
Syntax download alt-system-image file-url
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from E-Series
History
Related
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector versions
Commands
format (C-Series and E-Series)

ce Erase all existing files and reformat a file system. Once the file system is formatted, files cannot be
restored.
Syntax format filesystem: [dosFs1.0 | dosFs2.0]
Parameters
filesystem: Enter one of the following:
To reformat the internal Flash, enter flash:
To reformat the external Flash, enter slot0:
dosFs1.0 Enter the keyword dosFs1.0 to format in DOS 1.0 (the default)
dosFs2.0 Enter the keyword dosFs2.0 to format in DOS 2.0
Default DOS 1.0 (dosFs1.0)
Command
History
Usage When you format flash:

Information
1 The startup-config is erased.
2 All cacheboot data files are erased and you must reconfigure cacheboot to regain it.
3 All generated SSH keys are erased and you must recreate them.
4 All archived configuration files are erased.
5 All trace logs, crash logs, core dumps, and call-home logs are erased.
6 In-service Process patches are erased.
After reformatting is complete, three empty directories are automatically created on flash:
CRASH_LOG_DIR, TRACE_LOG_DIR and NVTRACE_LOG_DIR.
Note: Version option is available on LC-ED-RPM only. LC-EE3-RPM, LC-EF-RPM, and

LC-EF3-RPM supports DOS 2.0 only.
Related
Commands show file Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem.
show file-systems Display information about the file systems on the system.
format flash (S-Series)

s Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal flash memory. Once the filesystem is
formatted, files cannot be restored.
Syntax format flash:
Default flash memory
Command
History
Usage You must include the colon (:) when entering this command.
Information
Caution: This command deletes all files, including the startup configuration file. So, after executing
this command, consider saving the running config as the startup config (use the write memory
command or copy run start).
Related
Commands copy Copy the current configuration to either the startup-configuration file or the
terminal.
show file Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem.
logging coredump
ce Enable coredump.
Syntax logging coredump {cp | linecard {number | all} | rps}
Parameters
cp Enable coredump for the CP.
linecard Enable coredump for a linecard.
rps Enable coredump for RP 1 and 2.
Defaults The kernal coredump is enabled by default for RP 1 and 2 on E-Series. The kernel coredump for CP
and application coredump are disabled on all systems by default.
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Restructured command to accommodate core dumps for CP. Introduced on C-Series and
History
S-Series
Version 6.5.1.0 Application coredump naming convention enhanced to include application.
Usage The Kernel core dump can be large and may take up to 5 to 30 minutes to upload. FTOS does not
Information overwrite application core dumps so you should delete them as necessary to conserve space on the
flash; if the flash is out of memory, the coredump is aborted. On the S-Series, if the FTP server is not
reachable, the application coredump is aborted. FTOS completes the coredump process and wait until
the upload is complete before rebooting the system.
Related
Commands logging coredump server Designate a sever to upload kernel core-dumps.
logging coredump server

ces Designate a server to upload core dumps.
Syntax logging coredump server {ipv4-address | ipv6-address} username name password [type]
password
Parameters
{ipv4-address | Enter the server IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X).
ipv6-address}
name Enter a username to access the target server.
type Enter the password type:

Enter 0 to enter an unencrypted password.
Enter 7 to enter a password that has already been encrypted using a Type
7 hashing algorithm.
password Enter a password to access the target server.
Defaults Crash kernel files are uploaded to flash by default.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6.
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Restructured command to accommodate core dumps for CP. Introduced on C-Series and
S-Series.
Usage Since flash space may be limited, using this command ensures your entire crash kernel files are
Information uploaded successfully and completely. Only a single coredump server can be configured.
Configuration of a new coredump server will over-write any previously configured server.
Note: You must disable logging coredump before you designate a new server destination for
your core dumps.
Related
Commands logging coredump Disable the kernel coredump
pwd
ce Display the current working directory.
Syntax pwd
Command
History
Example Command Example: pwd

FTOS#pwd
flash:
FTOS#
Related
cd Change directory.
Commands
rename
ces Rename a file in the local file system.
Syntax rename url url
Parameters
url Enter the following keywords and a filename:
Command
History
show boot system

ce Displays information about boot images currently configured on the system.
Syntax show boot system {all | linecard [slot | all] | rpm}
Parameters
all Enter this keyword to display boot image information for all linecards and
RPMs.
linecard Enter this keyword to display boot image information for the specified line
card(s) on the system.
rpm Enter this keyword to display boot image information for all RPMs on the
system.
Defaults No default values or behavior
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series
History
Example
FTOS#show boot system all
Current system image information in the system:

=============================================
Type Boot Type A B

----------------------------------------------------------------
CP DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
RP1 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
linecard 0 is not present.
linecard 1 DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
linecard 2 DOWNLOAD BOOT 4.7.5.387 6.5.1.8
linecard 5 is not present.
Peer RPM:
=============================================
Type Boot Type A B

----------------------------------------------------------------
CP DOWNLOAD BOOT invalid invalid
show bootvar
ce Display the variable settings for the E-Series boot parameters.
Syntax show bootvar
Command
History
Example Command Output example: show bootvar
FTOS#show bootvar
PRIMARY IMAGE FILE = ftp://box:password@10.31.1.205//home/5.3.1/5.3.1.0/FTOS-ED-RPM1-5.3.1.0.bin
SECONDARY IMAGE FILE = variable does not exist
DEFAULT IMAGE FILE = flash://FTOS-ED-5.3.1.0.bin
CURRENT IMAGE FILE = ftp://box:password@10.31.1.205//home/5.3.1/5.3.1.0/FTOS-ED-RPM1-5.3.1.0.bin
CURRENT CONFIG FILE 1 = flash://startup-config
FTOS#
Related
boot config Set the location of configuration files on local devices.
Commands
boot host Set the location of configuration files from the remote host.
boot network Set the location of configuration files from a remote network.
boot system Set the location of FTOS image files.
boot system gateway Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management subnet.
show file
ces Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem.
Syntax show file filesystem
Parameters
filesystem Enter one of the following:
flash: for the internal Flash
slot0: for the external Flash
Command
History
Example Command output example (Partial): show file
FTOS#show file flash://startup-config

!
boot system rpm0 primary ftp://test:server@10.16.1.144//home/images/
E1200_405-3.1.2b1.86.bin
boot system rpm0 secondary flash://FTOS-ED-6.1.1.0.bin
boot system rpm0 default ftp://:@/\
!
redundancy auto-synchronize persistent-data
redundancy primary rpm0
!
hostname E1200-20
!
enable password 7 94849d8482d5c3
!
username test password 7 93e1e7e2ef
!
enable restricted 7 948a9d848cd5c3
!
protocol spanning-tree 0
bridge-priority 8192
rapid-root-failover enable
!
interface GigabitEthernet 0/0
no ip address
shutdown
Related
Commands format (C-Series and E-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat a filesystem on the E-Series or
C-Series platform.
format flash (S-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal
flash memory on and S-Series.
show file-systems
ces Display information about the file systems on the system.
Syntax show file-systems
Command
History
Example Command Output example: show file-system

FTOS#show file-systems
Size(b) Free(b) Feature Type Flags Prefixes
63938560 51646464 dosFs2.0 MMC rw flash:
63938560 18092032 dosFs1.0 MMC rw slot0:
- - - network rw ftp:
- - - network rw tftp:
- - - network rw scp:
FTOS#
show file-systems Command Output Fields
Field Description
size(b) Lists the size in bytes of the storage location. If the location is remote, no
size is listed.
Free(b) Lists the available size in bytes of the storage location. If the location is
remote, no size is listed.
Feature Displays the formatted DOS version of the device.
Type Displays the type of storage. If the location is remote, the word
network is listed.
Flags Displays the access available to the storage location. The following letters
indicate the level of access:
r = read access
w = write access
Prefixes Displays the name of the storage location.
Related
Commands format (C-Series and E-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat a filesystem.
format flash (S-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal
flash memory.
show sfm Display the current SFM status.
show linecard
ce View the current linecard status.
Syntax show linecard [number | all | boot-information]
Parameters
number Enter a number to view information on that linecard.
Range: 0 to 6.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all
present linecards.
boot-information (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword boot-information to view cache boot
information of all line cards in table format.
Command
History
Example Command output example (E-Series): show linecard boot-information

FTOS#show linecard boot-information
-- Line cards --
Serial Booted Next Cache
Boot
# Status CurType number from boot boot
flash
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------
0 -
1 -
2 -
3 online E48TF FX000032632 4.7.7.171 4.7.7.171 A: invalid B:
invalid A: 2.3.2.1 [b] B: 2.3.2.1
4 -
5 -
6 -
FTOS#
show os-version
ces Display the release and software image version information of the image file specified or, optionally,
the image loaded on the RPM (C-Series and E-Series only).
Syntax show os-version [file-url]
Parameters
file-url (OPTIONAL) Enter the following location keywords and information:
Note: ftp and tftp are the only S-Series options.
Command

History
Usage
Information Note: A filepath that contains a dot ( . ) is not supported.
Example Command output example (E-Series): show os-version

FTOS#show os-version
RELEASE IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Platform Version Size ReleaseTime
E-series: EF 7.5.1.0 27676168 Aug 15 2007 10:06:21
TARGET IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Type Version Target checksum
runtime 7.5.1.0 control processor passed
runtime 7.5.1.0 route processor passed
runtime 7.5.1.0 terascale linecard passed
boot flash 2.4.1.1 control processor passed
boot flash 2.4.1.1 route processor passed
boot flash 2.3.1.3 terascale linecard passed
boot selector 2.4.1.1 control processor passed
boot selector 2.4.1.1 route processor passed
boot selector 2.3.1.3 terascale linecard passed
FTOS#
Example Command output example (C-Series): show os-version

FTOS#show os-version
RELEASE IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Platform Version Size ReleaseTime
C-series: CB 7.5.1.0 23734363 Aug 18 2007 11:49:51
TARGET IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Type Version Target checksum
runtime 7.5.1.0 control processor passed
runtime 7.5.1.0 linecard passed
boot flash 2.7.0.1 control processor passed
boot flash 1.0.0.40 linecard passed
boot selector 2.7.0.1 control processor passed
boot selector 1.0.0.40 linecard passed
FPGA IMAGE INFORMATION :

---------------------------------------------------------------------
Card Version Release Date
Primary RPM 4.1 May 02 2007
Secondary RPM 4.1 May 02 2007
LC0 3.2 May 02 2007
LC5 3.2 May 02 2007
LC6 2.2 May 02 2007
FTOS#
show running-config
ces Display the current configuration and display changes from the default values.
Syntax show running-config [entity] [configured] [status]
Parameters
entity (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the keywords listed below to display that entitys
current (non-default) configuration. Note that, if nothing is configured for
that entity, nothing is displayed and the prompt returns:
aaa for the current AAA configuration
acl for the current ACL configuration
arp for the current static ARP configuration
as-path for the current AS-path configuration
bgp for the current BGP configuration
boot for the current boot configuration
cam-profile for the current CAM profile in the configuration.
class-map for the current class-map configuration
community-list for the current community-list configuration
fefd for the current FEFD configuration
ftp for the current FTP configuration
fvrp for the current FVRP configuration
host for the current host configuration
hardware-monitor for hardware-monitor action-on-error settings
igmp for the current IGMP configuration
interface for the current interface configuration
isis for the current ISIS configuration
line for the current line configuration
load-balance for the current port-channel load-balance configuration
logging for the current logging configuration
mac for the current MAC ACL configuration
mac-address-table for the current MAC configuration
management-route for the current Management port forwarding
configuration
mroute for the current Mroutes configuration
ntp for the current NTP configuration
ospf for the current OSPF configuration
pim for the current PIM configuration
policy-map-input for the current input policy map configuration
policy-map-output for the current output policy map configuration
prefix-list for the current prefix-list configuration
privilege for the current privilege configuration
radius for the current RADIUS configuration
redirect-list for the current redirect-list configuration
redundancy for the current RPM redundancy configuration
resolve for the current DNS configuration
rip for the current RIP configuration
route-map for the current route map configuration
snmp for the current SNMP configuration

spanning-tree for the current spanning tree configuration
static for the current static route configuration
tacacs+ for the current TACACS+ configuration
tftp for the current TFTP configuration
trace-group for the current trace-group configuration
trace-list for the current trace-list configuration
users for the current users configuration
wred-profile for the current wred-profile configuration
configured (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configuration to display line card
interfaces with non-default configurations only.
status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the checksum for the
running configuration and the start-up configuration.
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Added hardware-monitor option
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to include last configuration change and start-up last updated (date and time)
and who made the change
Version 6.5.4.0 Added status option
Example Command output example (partial): show running-config

FTOS#show running-config
Current Configuration ...
! Version 7.4.1.0
! Last configuration change at Tue Apr 10 17:43:38 2007 by admin
! Startup-config last updated at Thu Mar 29 02:35:08 2007 by default
!
boot system rpm0 primary flash://FTOS-EF-7.4.1.0.bin
boot system rpm0 secondary flash://FTOS-EF-6.3.1.2.bin
boot system rpm0 default flash://FTOS-EF-6.5.1.8.bin
!
...
Example Command output example: show running-config

FTOS#show running-config status
running-config checksum 0xB4B9BF03
startup-config checksum 0x8803620F
FTOS#
Usage The status option enables you to display the size and checksum of the running configuration and the
Information startup configuration.
show sfm
ce View the current SFM status.
Syntax show sfm [number [brief] | all]
Parameters
number Enter a number to view information on that SFM.
Range: 0 to 8.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all present SFMs.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a list with SFM status.
Note: The brief option is not available on C-Series.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
E-Series Example Command output example (Partial) on E-Series: show sfm

FTOS#show sfm
Switch Fabric State: up
-- SFM card 0 --
Status : active
Card Type : SFM - Switch Fabric Module
Up Time : 37 min, 24 sec
Temperature : 49C
Power Status : PEM0: absent or down PEM1: up
Serial Number : 0018102
Part Number : 7520012900 Rev 02
Vendor Id : 02
Date Code : 06182004
Country Code : 01
show sfm Command Output Fields
Field Description
Switch Fabric State: States that the Switch Fabric is up (8 SFMs are online and operating).
Status Displays the SFMs active status.
Card Type States the type of SFM.
Up Time Displays the number of hours and minutes since the RPMs last reboot.
Temperature Displays the temperature of the RPM.
Minor alarm status if temperature is over 65 C.
Power Status Displays power status: absent, down, or up
Serial Num Displays the line card serial number.
Part Num Displays the line card part number.
Vendor ID Displays an internal code, which specifies the manufacturing vendor.
Date Code Displays the line cards manufacturing date.
Country Code Displays the country of origin.
01 = USA
Command output example: show sfm all
FTOS#show sfm all
-- Switch Fabric Modules --

Slot Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active
1 active
2 active
3 active
4 active
5 active
6 active
7 active
8 active
FTOS#
show startup-config
ces Display the startup configuration.
Syntax show startup-config
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to include last configuration change and start-up last updated (date and time)
and who made the change.
Example Command output example (partial): show startup-config

FTOS#show startup-config
! Version 7.4.1.0
! Last configuration change at Thu Mar 29 02:16:07 2007 by default
! Startup-config last updated at Thu Mar 29 02:35:08 2007 by default
!
!
...
Related
show running-config Display current (running) configuration.
Commands
show version
ces Display the current FTOS version information on the system.
Syntax show version
Command
History
E-Series Example Command output example on E-Series: show version

FTOS#show version
Force10 Networks Real Time Operating System Software
Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0
Force10 Application Software Version: 5.3.1.0
Copyright (c) 1999-2004 by Force10 Networks, Inc.
Build Time: Sun May 9 00:57:03 PT 2004
Build Path: /local/local0/Release/5-4-1/SW/Bsp/Diag
Force10 uptime is 1 days, 3 hours, 16 minutes
System image file is "/home/5.3.1/5.3.1.0/FTOS-ED-RPM1-5.3.1.0.bin"
Chassis Type: E1200

Control Processor: IBM PowerPC 405GP (Rev D) with 268435456 bytes of memory.
Route Processor 1: IBM PowerPC 405GP (Rev D) with 536870912 bytes of memory.
Route Processor 2: IBM PowerPC 405GP (Rev D) with 536870912 bytes of memory.
128K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.
1 Route Processor Module

9 Switch Fabric Module
1 24-port GE line card with SFP optics (EE)
1 12-port GE Flex line card with SFP optics (EE)
1 2-port OC48c line card with SR optics (EC)
2 24-port GE line card with SX optics (EB)
1 2-port 10GE WAN PHY line card with 10Km (1310nm) optics (EE)
1 12-port GE Flex line card with SFP optics (EC)
1 2-port 10GE LAN PHY line card with 10Km (1310nm) optics (ED)
1 12-port OC12c/3c PoS line card with IR optics (EC)
1 24-port GE line card with SFP optics (ED)
1 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
120 GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
14 SONET network interface(s)
4 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
FTOS#
show version Command Fields
Lines beginning with Description

FTOS Network... Name of the operating system
FTOS Operating... OS version number
FTOS Application... Software version
Copyright (c)... Copyright information
Build Time... Software builds date stamp
Build Path... Location of the software build files loaded on the system
FTOS uptime is... Amount of time the system has been up
System image... Image file name
Chassis Type: Chassis type (E1200, E600, E600i, E300, C300, C150)
Control Processor:... Control processor information and amount of memory on processor.
Route Processor 1:... E-Series route processor 1 information and the amount of memory on that
processor.
Route Processor 2:... E-Series route processor 2 information and the amount of memory on that
processor.
show version Command Fields

128K bytes... Amount and type of memory on system.
1 Route Processor... Hardware configuration of the system, including the number and type of
physical interfaces available.
S-Series Example Command output example on an S50V: show version

FTOS#show version
Force10 Application Software Version: E7-8-1-13
Build Time: Mon Nov 24 18:59:27 2008
Build Path: /sites/sjc/work/sw/build/build2/Release/E7-8-1/SW/SRC
Force10 uptime is 1 minute(s)
System Type: S50V
Control Processor: MPC8451E with 252739584 bytes of memory.
32M bytes of boot flash memory.
1 48-port E/FE/GE with POE (SB)

FTOS#
upgrade (E-Series version)

e Upgrade the bootflash, boot selector, or system image on a processor.
Syntax upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image} {all | linecard

linecard-slot | rpm} {booted | file-url}
Parameters
bootflash-image Enter the keyword bootflash-image to upgrade the bootflash image.
bootselector-image Enter the keyword bootselector-image to upgrade the boot selector
image.
Use with TAC supervision only.
system-image Enter the keyword system-image to upgrade the cache boot image.
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade the bootflash/boot selector image on all
processors in the E-Series. This keyword does not upgrade the bootflash on
the standby RPM.
linecard linecard-slot Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number to change the
bootflash image on a specific line card.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200; 0 to 6 for the E600; 0 to 5 on the
E300
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to upgrade the bootflash/boot selector image on all
processors on the RPM.
booted Enter this keyword to upgrade using the image packed with the currently
running FTOS image.
file-url Enter the following location keywords and information to upgrade using an
FTOS image other than the one currently running:
Enter the transfer method and file location:
flash://filename
ftp://userid:password@hostip/filepath
slot0://filename
tftp://hostip/filepath
Defaults No configuration or default values
Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed alt-bootflash-image, alt-bootselector-image,
alt-system-image options, rp1, rp2, and cp options.
Usage A system message appears stating the Bootflash upgrade status. Reload the system to boot from the
Information upgraded boot images.
Once the URL is specified, the same downloaded image can be used for upgrading an individual RPM,
line cards, SFM FPGA, and system-image for cache-boot without specifying the file-url again using
the command upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image} {all |
linecard linecard-slot | rpm}. After 20 minutes, the cached memory is released and returned for
general use, but the URL is maintained and you do not have to specify it for subsequent upgrades.
Related
Commands upgrade fpga-image Upgrade the FPGA version in the specified E-Series SFM.
boot system Display configured boot image information
upgrade (C-Series version)

c Upgrade the bootflash or boot selector image on a processor.
Syntax upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image}

{all | linecard {number | all} | rpm} [booted | file-url | repair]
Parameters
bootflash-image Enter the keyword bootflash-image to upgrade the bootflash image.
bootselector-image Enter the keyword bootselector-image to upgrade the boot selector
image. Use with TAC supervision only.
system-image Enter the keyword system-image to upgrade the system image. Use
with TAC supervision only.
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade the bootflash or boot selector image on
all processors. This keyword does not upgrade the bootflash on the standby
RPM.
Enter the keyword all after the keyword linecard to upgrade the
bootflash or boot selector image on all linecards.
linecard number
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to upgrade the system image of a selector image
on all processors on the RPM.
repair Enter this keyword to upgrade a line card newly inserted into an already
upgraded chassis. This option is only available with the system-image
keyword.
booted Upgrade the bootflash or bootselector image using the currently running
FTOS image.
file-url Enter the following location keywords and information to upgrade using an
FTOS image other than the one currently running:
To specify an FTOS image on the internal flash, enter flash://
file-path/filename.
To specify an FTOS image on an FTP server, enter ftp://
user:password@hostip/filepath
To specify an FTOS image on the external flash on the primary RPM,
slot0://file-path/filename
To copy a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath/
filename
Defaults FTOS uses the boot flash image that was packed with it if no URL is specified.
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced system-image option
History
Usage A system message appears stating the Bootflash upgrade status. Reload the system to boot from the
Information upgraded boot images.
Once the URL is specified, the same downloaded image can be used for upgrading an individual RPM,
line cards, SFM FPGA, and system-image for cache-boot without specifying the file-url again using
the command upgrade {bootflash-image | bootselector-image | system-image} {all |
linecard linecard-slot | rpm}. After 20 minutes, the cached memory is released and returned for
general use, but the URL is maintained and you do not have to specify it for subsequent upgrades.
Related
Commands upgrade fpga-image Upgrade the FPGA version in the specified E-Series SFM.
boot system Display configured boot image information
upgrade (S-Series management unit)
s Upgrade the bootflash image or system image of the S-Series management unit.
Syntax upgrade {boot | system} {ftp: | scp: | tftp:} file-url
Parameters
boot Enter this keyword to change the boot image.
system Enter this keyword to change the system image.
ftp: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this
form: //userid:password@hostip/filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
scp: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this
form: //userid:password@hostip/filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
tftp: After entering this keyword you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this
form: //hostlocation/filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence.
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Added support for TFTP and SCP.
History
Usage You must reload FTOS after executing this command. Use the command upgrade system stack-unit
Information (S-Series stack member) on page 242 to copy FTOS from the management unit to one or more stack
members.
FTOS#upgrade system ?
ftp: Copy from remote file system (ftp://userid:password@hostip/filepath)
scp: Copy from remote file system (scp://userid:password@hostip/filepath)
tftp: Copy from remote file system (tftp://hostip/filepath)
FTOS#$pgrade system ftp://username:password@10.11.1.1/FTOS-SB-7.7.1.0.bin
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Erasing Sseries ImageUpgrade Table of Contents, please wait
.!..................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................!
12946259 bytes successfully copied
FTOS#reload
upgrade fpga-image
e This command only be used on systems with SFM3 modules (and only when required by the upgrade
procedure in the release notes). Upgrade the FPGA version in the specified E-Series SFM3 and
automatically initiate an automatic reset to complete the version upgrade.
Syntax upgrade fpga-image {sfm} {all | id} [booted | flash:// | ftp: |slot0: | tftp]
Parameters
sfm Enter the keyword sfm to upgrade the FPGA on the SFMs.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to upgrade all processors on the RPM.
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade the FPGA on all the SFMs.
id Enter the keyword id to upgrade the FPGA on all a specific SFM.
Enter the path to the upgrade source. Entering <CR> updates the FPGA from the flash.
Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added rpm option
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
Example Command example: upgrade sfm autoreset

FTOS#upgrade sfm 1 autoreset
SFM1: upgrade in progress
!!! !!! !!!
SFM1: upgrade complete
SFM1 is active. Resetting it might temporarily impact traffic.
Proceed with reset [confirm yes/no]: yes
FTOS#
Related
show sfm Display the SFM status.
Commands
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the E-Series.
Usage
0 On E-Series ExaScale, you cannot upgrade SFMs using this command when Cache Boot is configured.
Information If you attempt an upgrade, you must reload the chassis to recover.
Upgrading the C-Series FPGA

These commands are for upgrading the FPGA for C-Series RPMs and line cards.
restore fpga-imagee
upgrade fpga-image
restore fpga-image
c Copy the backup C-Series FPGA image to the primary FPGA image.
Syntax restore fpga-image {rpm | linecard} number
Parameters
rpm Enter rpm to upgrade an RPM FPGA.
linecard Enter linecard to upgrade a line card FPGA.
number Enter the line card or RPM slot number.
C-Series Line Card Range: 0-7, RPM Range: 0-1
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Renamed keyword primary-fpga-flash to fpga-image.
Example Command example: restore fpga-image

FTOS#restore fpga-image linecard 4
Current FPGA information in the system:

=======================================
Card FPGA Name Current Version New Version

------------------------------------------------------------------------
LC4 48 Port 1G LCM FPGA A: 3.6 restore
***********************************************************************
* Warning - Upgrading FPGA is inherently risky and should *
* only be attempted when necessary. A failure at this upgrade may *
* cause a board RMA. Proceed with caution ! *
***********************************************************************
Restore fpga image for linecard 4 [yes/no]: yes
FPGA restore in progress. Please do NOT power off the card.

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Upgrade result :
================
Linecard 4 FPGA restore successful.
Usage Reset the card using the power-cycle option after restoring the FPGA command.
Information
Related
reset Reset a card.
Commands
upgrade fpga-image
c Upgrade the primary FPGA image.
Syntax upgrade fpga-image {rpm {number | all}| linecard {number | all} [system-fpga | link-fpga]
| all} {booted | file-url}
Parameters
rpm number Enter rpm followed by the RPM slot number to upgrade an RPM FPGA
Range: 0-1
linecard number Enter linecard followed by the line card slot number to upgrade a
linecard FPGA.
Range: 0-7 on the C300, 0-3 on the C150
all Enter the keyword all to upgrade all RPM and linecard FPGAs. Enter the
keyword all after the keyword rpm to upgrade all FPGAs on all RPMs.
Enter the keyword all after the keyword linecard to upgrade all FPGAs
on all linecards.
system-fpga (OPTIONAL) Enter system-fpga to upgrade only the system FPGA on a

fiber linecard. Contact the Dell Force10 TAC before using this keyword.
link-fpga (OPTIONAL) Enter link-fpga to upgrade only the link FPGA on a fiber
linecard. Contact the Dell Force10 TAC before using this keyword.
booted Upgrade the FPGA image using the currently running FTOS image.
file-url Enter the following location keywords and information to upgrade the
FPGA using an FTOS image other than the one currently running:
To specify an FTOS image on the internal flash, enter flash://
file-path/filename.
To specify an FTOS image on an FTP server, enter ftp://
user:password@hostip/filepath
To specify an FTOS image on the external flash on the primary RPM,
slot0://file-path/filename
To copy a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath/
filename
Defaults None.
Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Renamed the primary-fpga-flash keyword to fpga-image. Added support for
upgrading using a remote FTOS image.
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for the all keyword
Example Command example: upgrade fpga-image

FTOS#conf
Force10(conf)# upgrade primary-fpga-flash rpm
Proceed to upgrade primary fpga flash for rpm 0 [confirm yes/no]: yes
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
FTOS#
Usage Reset the card using the power-cycle option after restoring the FPGA command.
Information
Related
Commands
reset Reset a line card or RPM.
restore fpga-image This command copies the backup FPGA image to the primary FPGA image.
4
BOOT_USER Mode
Overview
Most of the commands in this chapter are in Configuration mode, except for format, which is in the
BOOT_ADMIN mode. The exception to this is that on the Dell Force10 S50 platform. On the S50, the
commands are accessed from the BOOT_USER mode. Command support on Dell Force10 platforms is
indicated by the characters that appear below each command heading:
c = C-Series
e = E-Series
s = S-Series
To access the BOOT_USER mode, boot your Dell Force10 platform.When the prompt, Hit any key
to break into BOOT_USER modeappears, press a key.
Commands
boot change
boot messages
boot selection
boot zero
default-gateway
delete
dir
enable
format
ignore enable-password
ignore startup-config
interface management ethernet ip address
interface management ethernet mac-address
interface management ethernet port
interface management port config
reload
rename
restore factory-defaults
save
show boot selection
show bootflash
BOOT_USER Mode | 59
show bootvar
show default-gateway
show interface management ethernet
Note: You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.
Note: The question mark (?) key to get help does not work in this mode. Instead, enter help.
boot change
c es Change the primary, secondary, or default FTOS boot configuration.
Syntax boot change {primary | secondary | default}
Parameters
primary Enter the keyword primary to configure the boot parameters used in the first attempt
to boot FTOS.
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to configure boot parameters used if the primary
operating system boot selection is not available.
default Enter the keyword default to configure boot parameters used if the secondary
operating system boot parameter selection is not available. The default location should
always be the internal flash device (flash:), and a verified image should be stored there.
Command Modes BOOT_USER
Command
History
Usage After entering the boot change keywords and selecting among parameters, above, press Enter. The
Information software prompts you to enter the following:
The boot device (ftp, tftp, flash, slot0) (Note: tftp and flash are the only options available for the
S-Series), image file name, IP address of the server containing the image, username and password
(only for FTP)
Note: When you enter a new parameter that extends beyond 80 characters, you cannot use the
Backspace key to correct any mistakes. If you make a mistake, you must re-enter the
parameter.
Note: The IP address of the designated download port must be set before you execute this
command. Otherwise, an error message will alert you that the configuration cannot proceed.
See the command interface management ethernet ip address.
Figure 4-1 shows the first field after you enter boot change primary. At this point:
Press Enter to accept the information already configured, or
Change that information. To do so, press the . (period) key and enter new information. After you
enter the information, press Enter.
60 | BOOT_USER Mode
Figure 4-1. First Field in the boot change Command
BOOT_USER # boot change primary
'.' = clear field; '-' = clear non-essential field
boot device : ftp
Figure 4-2 shows the completed command:
Figure 4-2. Completed boot change Command Example

BOOT_USER # boot change primary
'.' = clear field; '-' = go to previous field
boot device : ftp

file name : tt/latestlabel
Server IP address : 10.16.1.209
username : amsterdam
password : ******
BOOT_USER #
In the runtime CLI of C-Series and E-Series, use the boot system command to change the boot
image file and location.
To view the current boot configuration, use the show bootvar command.
Related
boot system Set the location of FTOS image files.
Commands
boot zero Remove the primary, secondary, or default boot image configuration.
show boot selection Display the current Boot Flash image selected.
show bootvar Display boot configuration information.
boot messages
ce Limit the number of messages seen during system boot-up.
Syntax boot messages {disable | enable}
Parameters
disable Enter the keyword disable to display fewer messages during boot-up.
enable Enter the keyword enable to display all messages during boot-up.
Defaults enable (that is, all messages are displayed during boot up)
boot selection
ce Specify the boot flash partition in the internal Flash from which to boot the system.
Syntax boot selection [a | b]
BOOT_USER Mode | 61
Parameters
a Enter the keyword a to select the boot code in partition A.

b Enter the keyword b to select the boot code in partition B.
Defaults None.
Usage To view the current boot flash image, enter the show boot selection command.
Information
Related
Commands boot change Change the primary, secondary or default boot image configuration
boot zero
ces Erase the configured primary, secondary, or default boot image parameters. If all three parameters are
erased, the S-Series switch will boot from its internal Flash.
Syntax boot zero {primary | secondary | default}
Parameters
primary Enter the keyword primary to configure the boot parameters used in the first attempt
to boot the system.
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to configure boot parameters used if the primary
operating system boot selection is not available.
default Enter the keyword default to configure boot parameters used if the secondary
operating system boot parameter selection is not available. The default parameters
always reside on the internal flash device (flash:).
Command
History
Usage This command reverses changes made with the boot change command.
Information
62 | BOOT_USER Mode
Figure 4-3. Completed boot zero Command Example
BOOT_USER # boot zero primary
BOOT_USER # boot zero secondary
BOOT_USER # boot zero default
BOOT_USER # show bootvar
PRIMARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS:

========================================
No Operating System boot parameters specified!
SECONDARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS:

==========================================
DEFAULT OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS:

========================================
BOOT_USER #
Related
default-gateway
c es Assign an IP address as the default gateway for the system.
Syntax [no] default-gateway ip-address
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the gateway router in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Command
History
Usage Use the show default-gateway command to view the current default gateway.
Information
Related
show default-gateway Change the primary, secondary or default boot image configuration
Commands
delete
ce Erase a file on the internal or external Flash.
Syntax delete file-url
Parameters
file-url Enter the location keywords and information:
BOOT_USER Mode | 63
dir
ce Display files in a directory
Syntax dir file-url
Parameters
Usage The maximum number of files allowed on an MMC card (internal or external flash) is 100 files.
Information
Example Figure 4-4. dir Command Example

BOOT_USER # dir flash:
Displaying files in flash:
size date time name
-------- ------ ------ --------
8681647 MAR-21-2004 11:08:50 E1200-3.1.a3.78.bin
4905 MAR-17-2004 18:16:34 nimule
1182431 FEB-29-2004 22:08:14 dohuk
8807825 MAR-30-2004 12:49:14 E1200-3.1.0.309.bin
1182431 FEB-24-2004 22:52:00 t1
14729 MAR-14-2004 17:55:26 erbil
1182431 MAR-10-2004 10:57:30 vW
6858 MAR-07-2004 09:52:58 RPM0CP1
1182431 MAR-22-2004 12:17:34 tunis
7819238 MAR-22-2004 12:23:14 E1200-3.1.0.316.bin
8989646 MAR-17-2004 15:13:06 E1200-3.1.0.390.bin.dos2
14517 MAR-30-2004 09:48:44 RPM0CPlog1
14506 MAR-30-2004 09:49:34 RPM0CPlog2
BOOT_USER #
enable
ce Change the privilege level of user access to FTOS commands.
Syntax enable {user | admin}
Parameters
admin Used only by Dell Force10 TAC personnel.
user Used only by Dell Force10 TAC personnel.
64 | BOOT_USER Mode
Usage Only Dell Force10 TAC staff use this command.
Information
format
ce Format the internal or external flash memory.
Syntax format file-url
Parameters
Command Modes BOOT_ADMIN
Usage The maximum number of files allowed on an MMC card (internal or external flash) is 100 files.
Information
Related
Commands format (C-Series and E-Series) Erase all existing files and reformat a filesystem (EXEC Privilege
mode).
ignore enable-password
c es Reload the system software without the enable password configured. This command is hidden on the
C-Series and E-Series, so it is not listed when you enter ? or help in this mode.
Syntax ignore enable-password
Command
History
Usage When you enter the reload command and the system reboots, you will not be prompted for a password
Information to enter the EXEC Privilege mode (normally you are required to enter the enable command.)
If your console or Telnet session expires after you used the ignore enable-password command,
you are prompted for an enable password when you re-establish the session.
Related
Commands reload Exit from this mode and reload FTOS.
show running-config Display the current configuration and the changes from the default values.
BOOT_USER Mode | 65
ignore startup-config
s During a reload, do not load the startup-config file.
Syntax ignore startup-config
Defaults disabled
Command
History
Usage This command might be used if a the user has authentication procedures in the startup-config other
Information than the enable-password setting.
interface management ethernet ip address

ces Assign an IP address to the Management Ethernet interface.
Syntax [no] interface management ethernet ip address ip-address mask

To delete the IP address on the C-Series and E-Series (not on S-Series), enter no interface
management ethernet ip address.
Parameters
ip-address mask Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask in /
prefix-length format (/x).
Command
History
Usage In the runtime CLI of the C-Series and E-Series (not on S-Series), use the ip address command in the
Information INTERFACE mode to change the Management interfaces IP address.
If there is a mac address programmed in the eeprom, the show interface management ethernet
command gets the mac address from there and displays it. If there is no mac address programmed, the
following is used by default - 00:10:18:00:00:01.
To view the current IP address configured on the Management interface, enter the show interfaces
management ethernet command.
Related
Commands ip address Assign a primary and secondary IP address to the interface.
show default-gateway Display the IP address configured for the default gateway.
show interface Display the IP address configured for the Management interface.
management ethernet
66 | BOOT_USER Mode
interface management ethernet mac-address
s Assign a MAC address to the Management Ethernet interface.
Syntax interface management ethernet mac-address mac-address
Parameters
mac-address Enter a MAC address in standard format (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx).
Command
History
Usage Use this command to assign a MAC address if FTOS cannot find a default MAC address.
Information
Related
Commands
show default-gateway Display the IP address configured for the default gateway.
show interface management Display the IP address configured for the Management interface.
ethernet
interface management ethernet port

s Assign a port to be the Management Ethernet interface.
Syntax interface management ethernet port portID
Parameters
portID Enter an S-Series port ID as an integer.
Range: 1 to 48
Command
History
Usage Assign any copper port to be the Management Ethernet interface.

Information
Related
Commands
show interface management ethernet Display the IP address configured for the Management
interface.
interface management port config

ce Configure speed, duplex, and negotiation settings for the management interface.
Syntax interface management port config {half-duplex | full-duplex | 10m | 100m |

auto-negotiation | no auto-negotiation | show}
BOOT_USER Mode | 67
Parameters
half-duplex Enter the keyword half-duplex to set the Management interface to half-duplex
mode.
full-duplex Enter the keyword full-duplex to set the Management interface to full-duplex
mode.
10m Enter the keyword 10m to set the speed on the Management interface to 10 Mb/
s.
100m Enter the keyword 100m to set the speed of the Management interface to 100
Mb/s.
auto-negotiation Enter the keyword auto-negotiation to enable negotiation on the
Management interface.
no auto-negotiation Enter the keyword no auto-negotiation to disable auto-negotiation on the
show Enter the keyword show to display the settings on the Management interface.
Defaults full duplex; auto-negotiation
Usage This command is only available in Boot Flash version 2.0.0.21 and higher.
Information
Related
Commands
show default-gateway Display the IP address configured for the default
gateway.
show interface management ethernet Display the IP address configured for the Management
interface.
reload
c es Exit from this mode and reload FTOS.
Syntax reload
Command
History
Related
Commands
save Save configurations created in BOOT_USER mode (BLI).
rename
ce Rename a file.
Syntax rename file-url
68 | BOOT_USER Mode
Parameters
Defaults None.
restore factory-defaults
s Erase all NVRAM sectors, EEPROM sectors, and user boot configurations.
Syntax restore factory-defaults
Command
History
save
s Save configurations created in BOOT_USER mode (BLI).
Command
History
Usage A basic difference between S-Series and other Dell Force10 platforms is that, on the S-Series, FTOS
Information does not save configurations into NVRAM while the user enters them in the BLI. Instead, the
configurations are saved in a software cache and are written into NVRAM only on the execution of this
save command or of the reload command.
Related
Commands
reload Exit from this mode and reload FTOS.
write Save the running configuration to the startup configuration file.
show boot selection

ce Display the current FTOS boot image.
Syntax show boot selection
BOOT_USER Mode | 69
Example Figure 4-5. show boot selection Command Example
BOOT_USER # show boot selection
ROM BOOTSTRAP SELECTOR PARMETERS:

================================
Current ROM bootstrap selection set to Bootflash partition B.
Last ROM bootstrap occurred from Bootflash partition B.
BOOT_USER #
Related
boot selection Change the boot flash image on the internal Flash.
show bootflash
ce Display information on the boot flash.
Syntax show bootflash
Example Figure 4-6. show bootflash Command Example

BOOT_USER # show bootflash
GENERAL BOOTFLASH INFO

======================
Bootflash Partition A:
Force10 Networks System Boot
Copyright 1999-2004 Force10 Networks, Inc.
ROM Header Version 1.0
Engineering CP_IMG_BOOT, BSP Release 2.0.0.19, Checksum 0x39303030
Created Mon Mar 20 10:56:53 US/Pacific 2004 by xxx on Unknown host
Bootflash Partition B:
Engineering CP_IMG_BOOT, BSP Release 2.0.0.19, Checksum 0x36313031
Created Mon Mar 6 18:15:10 2004 by xxx on hostname
Boot Selector Partition:

Official CP_IMG_BOOT_SELECTOR, BSP Release 2.0.0.15, Checksum 0x30314348
Created Mon Jan 21 17:15:47 US/Pacific 2004 by xxx on Unknown host
BOOT_USER #
show bootvar
c es Display boot configuration information.
Syntax show bootvar
70 | BOOT_USER Mode
Command
History
Example Figure 4-7. show bootvar Command Example

BOOT_USER # show bootvar
PRIMARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS:

========================================
boot device : ftp
file name : tt/latestlabel
Management Ethernet IP address : 10.16.1.181/24
Server IP address : 10.16.1.209
username : amsterdam
password : ******
SECONDARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS:

==========================================
boot device : flash
file name : /E1200-3.1.1.3.bin
DEFAULT OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS:

========================================
boot device : flash
file name : /E1200-3.1.1.2.bin
BOOT_USER #
Related
Commands
boot change Change the primary, secondary or default boot image configuration.
boot zero Erase the configured primary, secondary, or default boot image parameters.
show default-gateway
c es Display the IP address configured for the default gateway.
Syntax show default-gateway
Command Mode BOOT_USER
Command
History
Example Figure 4-8. show default-gateway Command Example

BOOT_USER # show default-gateway
Gateway IP address: 10.1.1.1
BOOT_USER #
Related
Commands
default-gateway Configure the IP address for the default gateway.
interface management ethernet ip address Assign an IP address to the Management Ethernet
interface.
BOOT_USER Mode | 71
show interface management ethernet
c es Display the IP address configured for the Management interface.
Syntax show interface management ethernet
Command
History
Example Figure 4-9. show interface management ethernet Command Example

BOOT_USER # show interfaces management ethernet
Management ethernet IP address: 10.16.1.181/24
BOOT_USER #
On the S-Series, the output of this command includes the MAC address and port number of the
assigned management port.
Example Figure 4-10. show interface management ethernet Command Example

BOOT_USER # show interface management ethernet
Management ethernet IP address: 10.16.1.181/24

Management ethernet MAC address: 00:01:e8:43:13:16
Management ethernet port number: 1
BOOT_USER #
Related
Commands
interface management ethernet ip address Assign an IP address to the Management Ethernet
interface.
interface management port config Configure speed, duplex, and negotiation settings for the
management interface.
72 | BOOT_USER Mode
5
Control and Monitoring
Overview
This chapter contains the following commands to configure and monitor the system, including Telnet,
FTP, and TFTP as they apply to platforms c e s.
Commands
audible cut-off send

banner exec service timestamps
banner login show alarms
banner motd show chassis
cam-audit linecard show command-history
clear alarms show command-tree
clear command history show console lp
clear line show cpu-traffic-stats
configure show debugging
debug cpu-traffic-stats show environment (C-Series and E-Series)
debug ftpserver show environment (S-Series)
disable show inventory (C-Series and E-Series)
do show inventory (S-Series)
enable show linecard
enable xfp-power-updates show linecard boot-information
end show memory (C-Series and E-Series)
epoch show memory (S-Series)
exec-banner show processes cpu (C-Series and E-Series)
exec-timeout show processes cpu (S-Series)
exit show processes ipc flow-control
ftp-server topdir show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series)
ftp-server username show processes memory (S-Series)
hostname show rpm
ip ftp password show software ifm
Control and Monitoring | 73

ip ftp source-interface show switch links

ip ftp username show system (S-Series)
ip telnet server enable show tech-support (C-Series and E-Series)
ip telnet source-interface show tech-support (S-Series)
ip tftp source-interface ssh-peer-rpm
line telnet
linecard telnet-peer-rpm
module power-off terminal length
motd-banner terminal xml
ping traceroute
power-off undebug all
power-on upload trace-log
reload virtual-ip
reset write
rpm <slot> location-led
audible cut-off
e Turn off an audible alarm.
Syntax audible cut-off
banner exec
ces Configure a message that is displayed when a user enters the EXEC mode.
Syntax banner exec c line c
Parameters
c Enter the keywords banner exec, and then enter a character delineator, represented
here by the letter c, and press ENTER.
line Enter a text string for your banner message ending the message with your delineator.
In the example below, the delineator is a percent character (%); the banner message is
testing, testing.
Defaults No banner is displayed.
Command
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale
History
74 | Control and Monitoring

Usage Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that is displayed when the user
Information accesses the EXEC mode. The exec-banner command toggles that display.
Example
FTOS(conf)#banner exec ?
LINE c banner-text c, where 'c' is a delimiting character
FTOS(conf)#banner exec %
Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.
This is the banner%
FTOS(conf)#end
FTOS#exit
4d21h5m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user on line
console
This is the banner
FTOS con0 now available
Press RETURN to get started.

4d21h6m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user on line
console
This is the banner

FTOS>
Related
banner login Sets a banner for login connections to the system.
Commands
banner motd Sets a Message of the Day banner.
exec-banner Enable the display of a text string when the user enters the EXEC mode.
line Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system.
banner login
ces Set a banner to be displayed when logging on to the system.
Syntax banner login {keyboard-interactive | no keyboard-interactive} [c line c]
Parameters
keyboard-interactive Enter this keyword to require a carriage return (CR) to get the message banner
prompt.
c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. In Figure 5-1,
the % character is the delineator character.
line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your
delineator.
In the example in Figure 5-1, the delineator is a percent character (%).
Ranges:
maximum of 50 lines
up to 255 characters per line
Defaults No banner is configured and the CR is required when creating a banner.

Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced keyboard-interactive keyword
Usage A login banner message is displayed only in EXEC Privilege mode after entering the enable
Information command followed by the password. These banners are not displayed to users in EXEC mode.
Related
banner exec Sets a banner to be displayed when you enter EXEC Privilege mode.
Commands
banner motd Sets a Message of the Day banner.
Example Figure 5-1. Command Example: banner login

FTOS(conf)#banner login ?
keyboard-interactive Press enter key to get prompt
LINE c banner-text c, where 'c' is a delimiting character
FTOS(conf)#no banner login ?
keyboard-interactive Prompt will be displayed by default
<cr>
FTOS(conf)#banner login keyboard-interactive
Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.

This is the banner%
FTOS(conf)#end
FTOS#exit
13d21h9m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user on line

console
This is the banner
FTOS con0 now available

13d21h10m: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user on line
console
This is the banner

FTOS>
banner motd
ces Set a Message of the Day (MOTD) banner.
Syntax banner motd c line c
Parameters
c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. In the above figures, the %
character is the delineator character.
line Enter a text string for your message of the day banner message ending the message with your
delineator.
In the example figures above, the delineator is a percent character (%).
Defaults No banner is configured.

Command
History
Usage A MOTD banner message is displayed only in EXEC Privilege mode after entering the enable
Information command followed by the password. These banners are not displayed to users in EXEC (non-privilege)
mode.
Related
banner exec Sets a banner to be displayed when you enter the EXEC Privilege mode.
Commands
banner login Sets a banner to be displayed after successful login to the system.
cam-audit linecard
e Enable audit of the IPv4 forwarding table on all line cards.
Syntax cam-audit linecard all ipv4-fib interval time-in-minutes
Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to enable CAM audit on all line cards.
ipv4-fib Enter the keyword ipv4-fib to designate the CAM audit on the IPv4
forwarding entries.
interval time-in-minutes Enter the keyword interval followed by the frequency in minutes of the
CAM audit.
Range: 5 to 1440 minutes (24 hours)
Default: 60 minutes
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage Enables periodic audits of software and hardware copies of the IPv4 forwarding table.
Information
clear alarms
ces Clear alarms on the system.
Syntax clear alarms
Command
History


Usage This command clear alarms that are no longer active. If an alarm situation is still active, it is seen in the
Information system output.
clear command history

ces Clear the command history log.
Syntax clear command history
Command
History
Related
Commands
show command-history Display a buffered log of all commands entered by all users along with a
time stamp.
clear line
ces Reset a terminal line.
Syntax clear line {line-number | aux 0 | console 0 | vty number}
Parameters
line-number Enter a number for one of the 12 terminal lines on the system.
Range: 0 to 11.
aux 0 Enter the keywords aux 0 to reset the Auxiliary port.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series only.
console 0 Enter the keyword console 0 to reset the Console port.
vty number Enter the keyword vty followed by a number to clear a Terminal line.
Range: 0 to 9
Command
History

configure
ces Enter the CONFIGURATION mode from the EXEC Privilege mode.
Syntax configure [terminal]
Parameters
terminal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword terminal to specify that you are configuring from the
terminal.
Command
History
Example Figure 5-2. Command Example: configure

FTOS#configure
FTOS(conf)#
debug cpu-traffic-stats
ces Enable the collection of CPU traffic statistics.
Syntax debug cpu-traffic-stats
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage This command enables (and disables) the collection of CPU traffic statistics from the time this
Information command is executed (not from system boot). However, excessive traffic received by a CPU will
automatically trigger (turn on) the collection of CPU traffic statics. The following message is an
indication that collection of CPU traffic is automatically turned on. Use the show cpu-traffic-stats to
view the traffic statistics.
Excessive traffic is received by CPU and traffic will be rate controlled.
Note: This command must be enabled before the show cpu-traffic-stats command will display
traffic statistics. Dell Force10 recommends that you disable debugging (no debug
cpu-traffic-stats) once troubleshooting is complete.
Related
show cpu-traffic-stats Display cpu traffic statistics
Commands

debug ftpserver
ces View transactions during an FTP session when a user is logged into the FTP server.
Syntax debug ftpserver
Command
History
disable
ce Return to the EXEC mode.
Syntax disable [level]
Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of the FTOS.
Range: 0 to 15.
Default: 1
Defaults 1
Command
History
do
ces Allows the execution of most EXEC-level commands from all CONFIGURATION levels without
returning to the EXEC level.
Syntax do command
Parameters
command Enter an EXEC-level command.

INTERFACE

Command
History
Usage The following commands are not supported by the do command:

Information
enable
disable
exit
config
Example Figure 5-3. Command Example: do

FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#do clear counters
Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm]
FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#do clear logging
Clear logging buffer [confirm]
FTOS(conf-if-te-5/0)#do reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: n
enable
ces Enter the EXEC Privilege mode or any other privilege level configured. After entering this command,
you may need to enter a password.
Syntax enable [level]
Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of FTOS.
Range: 0 to 15.
Default: 15
Defaults 15
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Usage Users entering the EXEC Privilege mode or any other configured privilege level can access
Information configuration commands. To protect against unauthorized access, use the enable password command to
configure a password for the enable command at a specific privilege level. If no privilege level is
specified, the default is privilege level 15.
Related
enable password Configure a password for the enable command and to access a privilege level.
Commands

enable xfp-power-updates
ces Enable XFP power updates for SNMP.
Syntax enable xfp-power-updates interval seconds

To disable XFP power updates, use the no enable xfp-power-updates command.
Parameters
interval seconds Enter the keyword interval followed by the polling interval in seconds.
Range: 120 to 6000 seconds
Default: 300 seconds (5 minutes)
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage The chassis MIB contain the entry chSysXfpRecvPower in the chSysPortTable table. Periodically, IFA
Information polls the XFP power for each of the ports, and sends the values to IFM where it is cached. The default
interval for the polling is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Use this command to enable the polling and to
configure the polling frequency.
end
ces Return to the EXEC Privilege mode from other command modes (for example, the
CONFIGURATION or ROUTER OSPF modes).
Syntax end
Command Modes CONFIGURATION, SPANNING TREE, MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE, LINE, INTERFACE,
TRACE-LIST, VRRP, ACCESS-LIST, PREFIX-LIST, AS-PATH ACL, COMMUNITY-LIST,
ROUTER OSPF, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER ISIS, ROUTER BGP
Command
History
Related
exit Return to the lower command mode.
Commands

epoch
e Set the epoch scheduling time for the chassis.
Syntax epoch {2.4 |3.2 | 10.4}
Parameters
2.4 Enter the keyword 2.4 to set the epoch to 2.4 micro-seconds and lower the latency.
This option is available on the E600i and E1200i E-Series ExaScale systems only.
3.2 Enter the keyword 3.2 to set the epoch to 3.2 micro-seconds and lower the latency.
This option is available on the E600/E600i and E1200/E1200i only. ExaScale does not supports
this setting with FTOS 8.3.1.0 and later.
10.4 Enter the keyword 10.4 to set the epoch to 10.4 micro-seconds.
This is the default setting and is available on the E300, E600/E600i, and E1200.
Defaults 10.4
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Added 2.4 micro-seconds option. ExaScale supports only 10.4 microseconds and 2.4
History
microseconds with FTOS 8.3.1.0 and later.
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale E600i
Version 6.2.1.1 Support for E300 introduced (10.4 only)
Version 6.1.1.0 Values changed as described above
Usage You save the configuration and reload the chassis for the changes to the epoch command setting to
Information take affect.
When using 10 SFMs in an ExaScale chassis, the 10.4 and 2.4 settings are both line rate. Additionally,
the 2.4 setting has a lower latency.
When using 9 SFMs in an ExaScale chassis, the 10.4 setting is line rate; the 2.4 setting reduces
throughput. Dell Force10 recommends using the 10.4 setting when the system has 9 SFMs.
Using 8 SFMs in an ExaScale chassis reduces throughput at any epoch setting.
Note: The E300 supports only the 10.4 epoch setting. The E-Series TeraScale E600/E600i and
the E1200/E1200i systems support the 10.4 and the 3.2 epoch settings.
Note: For E-Series ExaScale, the 2.4 setting is supported on FTOS version 8.3.1.0 and later.
The 10.4 setting is supported on all ExaScale FTOS versions. The 3.2 setting is only
supported on FTOS versions 8.2.1.0 and earlier.

exec-banner
ces Enable the display of a text string when the user enters the EXEC mode.
Syntax exec-banner
Defaults Enabled on all lines (if configured, the banner appears).
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Usage Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that is displayed when the user
accesses the EXEC mode. This command toggles that display.
Related
banner exec Configure a banner to display when entering the EXEC mode.
Commands
line Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system.
exec-timeout
ce s Set a time interval the system will wait for input on a line before disconnecting the session.
Syntax exec-timeout minutes [seconds]

To return to default settings, enter no exec-timeout.
Parameters
minutes Enter the number of minutes of inactivity on the system before disconnecting the current
session.
Range: 0 to 35791
Default: 10 minutes for console line; 30 minutes for VTY line.
seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of seconds
Range: 0 to 2147483
Default: 0 seconds
Defaults 10 minutes for console line; 30 minutes for VTY lines; 0 seconds
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Usage To remove the time interval, enter exec-timeout 0 0.

Information

Example Figure 5-4. FTOS time-out display
FTOS con0 is now available

FTOS>
exit
ce s Return to the lower command mode.
Syntax exit
Command Modes EXEC Privilege, CONFIGURATION, LINE, INTERFACE, TRACE-LIST, PROTOCOL GVRP,
SPANNING TREE, MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE, MAC ACCESS LIST, ACCESS-LIST,
AS-PATH ACL, COMMUNITY-LIST, PREFIX-LIST, ROUTER OSPF, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER
ISIS, ROUTER BGP
Command
History
Related
end Return to the EXEC Privilege command mode.
Commands
ftp-server enable
ces Enable FTP server functions on the system.
Syntax ftp-server enable
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History

Example Figure 5-5. Example of Logging on to an FTP Server
morpheus% ftp 10.31.1.111

Connected to 10.31.1.111.
220 FTOS (1.0) FTP server ready
Name (10.31.1.111:dch): dch
331 Password required
Password:
230 User logged in
ftp> pwd
257 Current directory is "flash:"
ftp> dir
200 Port set okay
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection
size date time name
-------- ------ ------ --------
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgtimg
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 diagnostic
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 other
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgt
226 Transfer complete
329 bytes received in 0.018 seconds (17.95 Kbytes/s)
ftp>
Related
ftp-server topdir Set the directory to be used for incoming FTP connections to the E-Series.
Commands
ftp-server username Set a username and password for incoming FTP connections to the E-Series.
ftp-server topdir
ces Specify the top-level directory to be accessed when an incoming FTP connection request is made.
Syntax ftp-server topdir directory
Parameters
directory Enter the directory path.
Defaults The internal flash is the default directory.
Command
History
Usage After you enable FTP server functions with the ftp-server enable command, Dell Force10 recommends
Information that you specify a top-level directory path. Without a top-level directory path specified, the FTOS
directs users to the flash directory when they log in to the FTP server.
Related
ftp-server enable Enables FTP server functions on the E-Series.
Commands
ftp-server username Set a username and password for incoming FTP connections to the E-Series.

ftp-server username
ces Create a user name and associated password for incoming FTP server sessions.
Syntax ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password
Parameters
username Enter a text string up to 40 characters long as the user name.
password password Enter the keyword password followed by a string up to 40 characters long as
the password.
Without specifying an encryption type, the password is unencrypted.
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) After the keyword password enter one of the following
numbers:
0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password
7 (seven) for hidden text password.
Defaults Not enabled.
Command
History
hostname
ces Set the host name of the system.
Syntax hostname name
Parameters
name Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long.
Defaults FTOS
Command
History
Usage The hostname is used in the prompt.

Information

ip ftp password
ces Specify a password for outgoing FTP connections.
Syntax ip ftp password [encryption-type] password
Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers:
0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password
7 (seven) for hidden text password
password Enter a string up to 40 characters as the password.
Command
History
Usage The password is listed in the configuration file; you can view the password by entering the show
Information running-config ftp command.
The password configured by the ip ftp password command is used when you use the ftp: parameter in
the copy command.
Related
copy Copy files.
Commands
ip ftp username Set the user name for FTP sessions.

ip ftp source-interface
ces Specify an interfaces IP address as the source IP address for FTP connections.
Syntax ip ftp source-interface interface
Parameters
interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
by the slot/port information.
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed
For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16383.
For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
C-Series and S-Series: 1-128
E-Series: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 to 512 for ExaScale
For SONET interface types, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
followed by the slot/port information.
For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Defaults The IP address on the system that is closest to the Telnet address is used in the outgoing packets.
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094)
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series
Related
copy Copy files from and to the switch.
Commands
ip ftp username
ces Assign a user name for outgoing FTP connection requests.
Syntax ip ftp username username
Parameters
username Enter a text string as the user name up to 40 characters long.
Defaults No user name is configured.
Command
History


Usage You must also configure a password with the ip ftp password command.
Information
Related
ip ftp password Set the password for FTP connections.
Commands
ip telnet server enable

ces Enable the Telnet server on the switch.
Syntax ip telnet server enable

To disable the Telnet server, execute the no ip telnet server enable command.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Related
Commands
ip ssh server Enable SSH server on the system.
ip telnet source-interface
ces Set an interfaces IP address as the source address in outgoing packets for Telnet sessions.
Syntax ip telnet source-interface interface
Parameters
For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
the slot/port information.
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the
slot/port information.
For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from zero
(0) to 16383.
For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by slot/port information.
For a Port Channel, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed
For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.

Command
History
Related
telnet Telnet to another device.
Commands
ip tftp source-interface
ces Assign an interfaces IP address in outgoing packets for TFTP traffic.
Syntax ip tftp source-interface interface
Parameters
For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from zero
(0) to 16383.
For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by slot/port information.
Command
History

line
ces Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system. This command accesses LINE
mode, where you can set the access conditions for the designated line.
Syntax line {aux 0 | console 0 | vty number [end-number]}
Parameters
aux 0 Enter the keyword aux 0 to configure the auxiliary terminal connection.
console 0 Enter the keyword console 0 to configure the console port.
The console option for the S-Series is <0-0>.
vty number Enter the keyword vty followed by a number from 0 to 9 to configure a virtual terminal
line for Telnet sessions.
The system supports 10 Telnet sessions.
end-number (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 9 as the last virtual terminal line to configure.
You can configure multiple lines at one time.
Defaults Not configured
Command
History
Usage You cannot delete a terminal connection.

Information
Related
access-class Restrict incoming connections to a particular IP address in an IP access control list (ACL).
Commands
password Specify a password for users on terminal lines.
show linecard Display the line card(s) status.
linecard
ce Pre-configure a line card in a currently empty slot of the system or a different line card type for the slot.
Syntax linecard number card-type
Parameters
number Enter the number of the slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E6001, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
card-type Enter the line card ID (see the Supported Hardware section in the Release Notes).

Command
History
Figure 5-6. Command Example: show linecard on C-Series
FTOS#show linecard 0
-- Line card 0 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : E48VB - 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interfaces and PoE (CB)
Current Type : E48VB - 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interfaces and PoE (CB)
Hardware Rev : 2.0
Num Ports : 48
FTOS Version : 8-4-2-399
Jumbo Capable : yes
POE Capable : yes
Boot Flash : A: 1.0.0.40 B: 2.6.0.2 [booted]
FPGA Flash : A: 3.2
Memory Size : 268435456 bytes
Temperature : 39C
Power Status : AC
Voltage : ok
Serial Number : FX000008104
Vendor Id : 04
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : US-0YK2JY-76991-1BA-8104
PPID Revision : 002
Service Tag : SRVCTG2
Expr Svc Code : 626 351 582 90
Auto Reboot : enabled
FTOS#
Usage Use this command only for empty slots or a slot where you have hot-swapped a different line card type.
Information Before inserting a card of a different type into the pre-configured slot, execute the no linecard
number command. The following screenshot shows the current supported C-Series line cards, along
with their card types (card-type IDs).

Figure 5-7. Command Example: show linecard on E-Series
-- Line card 0 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : E48VB - 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interfaces and PoE (CB)
Current Type : E48VB - 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interfaces and PoE (CB)
Hardware Rev : 2.0
Num Ports : 48
Jumbo Capable : yes
POE Capable : yes
FPGA Flash : A: 3.2
Temperature : 39C
Power Status : AC
Voltage : ok
Vendor Id : 04
Country Code : 01
PPID Revision : 002
Expr Svc Code : 626 351 582 90
FTOS#
Note: It is advisable to shut down interfaces on a line card that you are hot-swapping.
Related
Commands

module power-off
ce Turn off power to a line card at next reboot.
Syntax module power-off linecard number
Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword line card followed by the line card slot number
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
Command
History
motd-banner
ces Enable a Message of the Day (MOTD) banner to appear when you log in to the system.
Syntax motd-banner
Defaults Enabled on all lines.
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
ping
ces Test connectivity between the system and another device by sending echo requests and waiting for
replies.
Syntax ping [vrf <id>] [host | ip-address | ipv6-address] [count {number | continuous}] [datagram-size]
[timeout] [source (ip src-ipv4-address) | interface] [tos] [df-bit (y|n)] [validate-reply (y|n)] [pattern
pattern] [sweep-min-size] [sweep-max-size] [sweep-interval] [ointerface (ip src-ipv4-address) |
interface]

Parameter
vrf (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the VRF Instance name of the device to which
you are testing connectivity.
host (OPTIONAL) Enter the host name of the devices to which you are testing
connectivity.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv4 address of the device to which you are testing
connectivity. The address must be in the dotted decimal format.
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) E-Series only Enter the IPv6 address, in the x:x:x:x::x format, to
which you are testing connectivity.
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros
count Enter the number of echo packets to be sent.
number: 1- 2147483647
Continuous: transmit echo request continuously
Default: 5
datagram size Enter the ICMP datagram size.
Range: 36 - 15360 bytes
Default: 100
timeout Enter the interval to wait for an echo reply before timing out.
Range: 0 -3600 seconds
Default: 2 seconds
source Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 source ip address or the source interface. For IPv6
addresses, you may enter global addresses only.
Enter the IP address in A.B.C.D format

For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1-128
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 to 512 for
ExaScale.
E-Series only For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed
by slot/port information.
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
tos (IPv4 only) Enter the type of service required.
Range: 0-255
Default: 0
df-bit (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for the don't fragment bit in IPv4 header
N: Do not set the don't fragment bit
Y: Do set don't fragment bit
Default is No.
validate-reply (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for reply validation.
N: Do not validate reply data
Y: Do validate reply data
Default is No.

pattern pattern (IPv4 only) Enter the IPv4 data pattern.
Range: 0-FFFF
Default: 0xABCD
sweep-min-size Enter the minimum size of datagram in sweep range.
Range: 52-15359 bytes
sweep-max-size Enter the maximum size of datagram in sweep range.
Range: 53-15359 bytes
sweep-interval Enter the incremental value for sweep size.
1-15308 seconds
ointerface (IPv4 only) Enter the outgoing interface for multicast packets.
Enter the IP address in A.B.C.D format
E-Series: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 to 512 for
ExaScale
E-Series only For the SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed
by slot/port information.
For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
Defaults See parameters above.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 IPv6 pinging available on management interface.
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced extended ping options.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv6)
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced support for C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 address on E-Series

Usage When you enter the ping command without specifying an IP/IPv6 address (Extended Ping), you are
Information prompted for a target IP/IPv6 address, a repeat count, a datagram size (up to 1500 bytes), a timeout in
seconds, and for Extended Commands. See Appendix , for information on the ICMP message codes
that return from a ping command.
Figure 5-8. Command Example: ping (IPv4)
FTOS#ping 172.31.1.255
Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 172.31.1.255, timeout is 2 seconds:

Reply to request 1 from 172.31.1.208 0 ms
:
:
FTOS#
Figure 5-9. Command Example: ping (IPv6)

FTOS#ping 100::1
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 100::1, timeout is 2 seconds:

!!!!!
Success rate is 100.0 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 0/0/0 (ms)
FTOS#
power-off
ce Turn off power to a selected line card or the standby (extra) Switch Fabric Module (SFM).
Syntax power-off {linecard number | sfm sfm-slot-id}
Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard and a number for the line card slot number.
C-Series Range: 0 to 7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
sfm sfm-slot-id Enter the keyword sfm by the slot number of the SFM to which you want to turn
off power.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History

Related
power-on Power on a line card or standby SFM.
Commands
power-on
ce Turn on power to a line card or the standby (extra) Switch Fabric Module (SFM).
Syntax power-on {linecard number | sfm sfm-slot-id}
Parameters
C-Series Range: 0-7
E300.
sfm standby Enter the keyword sfm followed by the slot number of the SFM to power on.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
power-off Power off a line card or standby SFM.
Commands
reload
ces Reboot FTOS.
Syntax reload
Command
History
Usage If there is a change in the configuration, FTOS will prompt you to save the new configuration. Or you
Information can save your running configuration with the copy running-config command.
Related
reset Reset a line card, RPM, a standby SFM (EtherScale only), or a failed SFM
Commands
(TeraScale and ExaScale).
reset stack-unit Reset any designated stack member except the management unit

reset
ce Reset a line card, RPM, a standby SFM (EtherScale only), or a failed SFM (TeraScale only).
Syntax reset {linecard number [hard | power-cycle] | rpm number [hard | power-cycle ] | sfm slot
number | standby}
Parameters
(Optional) Add the keyword hard or power-cycle (power-cycle is C-Series
only) to power cycle the line card.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on E300
hard Enter the keyword hard to power cycle the line card.
power-cycle Enter the keyword power-cycle after upgrading a C-Series FPGA to cause the
FPGA to be reprogrammed based on the contents of the FPGA PROM.
Note: This option is supported on C-Series only.
rpm number Enter the keyword rpm followed by a number for the RPM slot number.
(Optional) Add the keyword hard or power-cycle (C-Series only) to power
cycle the RPM.
Range: 0 to 1
sfm standby Enter the keyword sfm standby to reset the standby SFM.
Note: This option is supported on E-Series EtherScale only.
sfm slot number Enter the keyword sfm followed by the failed or powered-off SFM slot number.
Note: Supported on E-Series only
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage The command reset without any options is a soft reset, which means FTOS boots the line card from
Information its runtime image. The hard option reloads the FTOS image on the line card. Use the power-cycle
after upgrading an FPGA.
When a soft reset is issued on a line card (reset linecard number), FTOS boots the line card from its
runtime image. Only when you enter reset linecard number hard is the software image reloaded on
the line card.
Related
reload Reboots the system.
Commands
restore fpga-image Copy the backup C-Series FPGA image to the primary FPGA image.
rpm <slot> location-led

ex Toggle the location LED on/off on the E-Series ExaScale RPM (LC-EH-RPM).
Syntax rpm slot number location-led [on | off]

Parameters
rpm slot number Enter the slot number
E1200i: 0-13
E600i: 0-6
on |off Toggles the LED on the RPM on or off.
Defaults OFF
Command Modes EXEC
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
History
Usage The LED setting is not saved through power cycles.

Information
send
ces Send messages to one or all terminal line users.
Syntax send [*] | [line ] | [aux] | [console] | [vty]
Parameters
* Enter the asterisk character * to send a message to all tty lines.
line Send a message to a specific line.
Range: 0 to 11
aux Enter the keyword aux to send a message to an Auxiliary line.
console Enter the keyword console to send a message to the Primary terminal line.
vty Enter the keyword vty to send a message to the Virtual terminal
Defaults No default behavior or values
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Usage Messages can contain an unlimited number of lines, however each line is limited to 255 characters. To
Information move to the next line, use the <CR>. To send the message use CTR-Z, to abort a message use CTR-C.

service timestamps
ces Add time stamps to debug and log messages. This command adds either the uptime or the current time
and date.
Syntax service timestamps [debug | log] [datetime [localtime] [msec] [show-timezone] | uptime]
Parameters
debug (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword debug to add timestamps to debug messages.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to add timestamps to log messages with
severity 0 to 6.
datetime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword datetime to have the current time and date added
to the message.
localtime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword localtime to include the localtime in the
timestamp.
msec (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword msec to include milliseconds in the timestamp.
show-timezone (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword show-timezone to include the time zone
information in the timestamp.
uptime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword uptime to have the timestamp based on time
elapsed since system reboot.
Command
History
Usage If you do not specify parameters and enter service timestamps, it appears as service
Information timestamps debug uptime in the running-configuration.
Use the show running-config command to view the current options set for the service timestamps
command.
show alarms
ces View alarms for the RPM, SFMs, line cards and fan trays.
Syntax show alarms [threshold]
Parameters
threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword threshold to display the temperature thresholds set for
the line cards, RPM, and SFMs.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
History
E-Series Example Figure 5-10. Command Example: show alarms on E-Series

FTOS# show alarms
-- Minor Alarms --
Alarm Type Duration
----------------------------------------------------
RPM 0 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
SFM 0 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 37 min
line card 1 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 36 min
line card 4 PEM A failed or rmvd 7 hr, 36 min
only 8 SFMs in chassis 7 hr, 35 min
-- Major Alarms --
Alarm Type Duration
----------------------------------------------------
No major alarms
FTOS#
show chassis
ce View the configuration and status of modules in the system. Use this command to determine the
chassis mode.
Syntax show chassis [brief]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a summary of the show chassis output.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 5-11. Command Example: show chassis brief on C-Series
FTOS#show chassis
-- Manufacturing Info --
Chassis Type : C150
Chassis Mode : 1.0
Chassis MAC : 00:01:e8:51:a7:e3
Serial Number : TY000002776
Part Number : 7520036800
Vendor Id : 04
Country Code : 01
Product Rev : 03
Piece Part ID : US-021R1D-76991-1ba-2776
PPID Revision : 001
Service Tag : srvctg1
Expr Svc Code : 626 351 582 89
FTOS#
Example Figure 5-12. Command Example: show chassis brief on E-Series

FTOS#show chassis brief
-- Manufacturing Info --
Chassis Type : E1200
Chassis Mode : TeraScale
Chassis Epoch : 10.4 micro-seconds
Chassis MAC : 00:01:e8:55:55:55
Part Number : 7520004200
Vendor Id : 04
Country Code : 01
Product Rev : 01
Piece Part ID : US-0RVY43-76991-82b-0456
PPID Revision : 1b2
Service Tag : svctgCH
Expr Svc Code : 628 458 864 65
FTOS#

Related
Commands show linecard View line card status
show rpm View Route Processor Module status.
show sfm View Switch Fabric Module status.
show command-history
ces Display a buffered log of all commands entered by all users along with a time stamp.
Syntax show command-history
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage One trace log message is generated for each command. No password information is saved to this file. A
Information command-history trace log is saved to a file upon an RPM failover. This file can be analyzed by the
Dell Force10 TAC to help identify the root cause of an RPM failover.
Example Figure 5-13. Command Example: show command-history

FTOS#show command-history
[11/20 15:47:22]: CMD-(CLI):[service password-encryption]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:22]: CMD-(CLI):[service password-encryption hostname Force10]by
default from console
- Repeated 3 times.
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[service timestamps log datetime]by default from
console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[hostname Force10]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[enable password 7 ******]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[username admin password 7 ******]by default from
console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[enable restricted 7 ******]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[protocol spanning-tree rstp]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[protocol spanning-tree pvst]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no disable]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[interface gigabitethernet 0/1]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[ip address 1.1.1.1 /24]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[ip access-group abc in]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no ip address]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[ip address 5.5.5.1 /24]by default from console
[11/20 15:47:23]: CMD-(CLI):[no shutdown]by default from console
[11/20 21:17:35]: CMD-(CLI):[line console 0]by default from console
[11/20 21:17:36]: CMD-(CLI):[exec-timeout 0]by default from console
[11/20 21:17:36]: CMD-(CLI):[exit]by default from console
[11/20 21:19:25]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console
FTOS#

Related
Commands clear command history Clear the command history log.
show command-tree
ces Display the entire CLI command tree, and optionally, display the utilization count for each commands
and its options.
Syntax show command-tree [count | no]
Parameters
count Display the command tree with a usage counter for each command.
no Display all of the commands that may be preceded by the keyword no, which is the
keyword used to remove a command from the running-configuration.
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage Reload the system to reset the command-tree counters.

Information
Example FTOS#show command-tree count

!
Enable privilege mode:
enable command usage:3

<0-15> option usage: 0
exit command usage:1
show command-tree command usage:9

count option usage: 3
show version command usage:1

!
Global configuration mode:
aaa authentication enable command usage:1

WORD option usage: 1
default option usage: 0
enable option usage: 0
line option usage: 0
none option usage: 0
radius option usage: 1
tacacs+ option usage: 0
show console lp
ce View the buffered boot-up log of a line card.
Syntax show console lp number

Parameters
number Enter the line card slot number.
Range: 07 for the C300
Range: 013 for the E1200
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
Information Caution: Use this command only when you are working directly with a technical support
representative to troubleshoot a problem. Do not use this command unless a technical
support representative instructs you to do so.
show cpu-traffic-stats
ces View the CPU traffic statistics.
Syntax show cpu-traffic-stats [port number | all | cp | linecard {all | slot# } | rp1 | rp2 ]
Parameters
port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the port number to display traffic statistics on that port only.
Range: 1 to 1568
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to display traffic statistics on all the interfaces
receiving traffic, sorted based on traffic.
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to display traffic statistics on the specified
CPU.
linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by either all or the slot
number to display traffic statistics on the designated line card.
Note: This option is supported on C-Series only.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to display traffic statistics on the RP1.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to display traffic statistics on the RP2.
Defaults all
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History

E-Series Example Figure 5-14. Command Example: show cpu-traffic-stats on the E-Series
FTOS#show cpu-traffic-stats
Processor : CP
--------------
Received 100% traffic on GigabitEthernet 8/2 Total packets:100
LLC:0, SNAP:0, IP:100, ARP:0, other:0
Unicast:100, Multicast:0, Broadcast:0
Processor : RP1
---------------

Processor : RP2
---------------
No CPU traffic statistics.
FTOS#
Usage Traffic statistics are sorted on a per-interface basis; the interface receiving the most traffic is displayed
Information first. All CPU and port information is displayed unless a specific port or CPU is specified. Traffic
information is displayed for router ports only; not for management interfaces. The traffic statistics are
collected only after the debug cpu-traffic-stats command is executed; not from the system bootup.
Note: After debugging is complete, use the no debug cpu-traffic-stats command to shut off
traffic statistics collection.
Related
debug cpu-traffic-stats Enable CPU traffic statistics for debugging
Commands
show debugging
ces View a list of all enabled debugging processes.
Syntax show debugging
Command
History

Example Figure 5-15. Command Example: show debugging
FTOS#show debug
Generic IP:
IP packet debugging is on for
ManagementEthernet 0/0
Port-channel 1-2
Port-channel 5
GigabitEthernet 4/0-3,5-6,10-11,20
GigabitEthernet 5/0-1,5-6,10-11,15,17,19,21
ICMP packet debugging is on for
GigabitEthernet 5/0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16
FTOS#
show environment (C-Series and E-Series)

ce View the system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).
Syntax show environment [all | fan | linecard | linecard-voltage | PEM | RPM | SFM]
Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to view all components.
fan Enter the keyword fan to view information on the fans. The output of this
command is chassis dependent. See Figure 5-12, Figure 5-13, and Figure 5-14 for
a comparison of output.
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to view only information on line cards
linecard-voltage Enter the keyword linecard-voltage to view line card voltage information.
PEM Enter the keyword pem to view only information on power entry modules.
RPM Enter the keyword rpm to view only information on RPMs.
SFM Enter the keyword sfm to view only information on SFMs.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added temperature information for C-Series fans (Figure 5-18)
Usage Fan speed is controlled by temperatures measured at the sensor located on the fan itself. The fan
Information temperatures shown with this command may not accurately reflect the temperature and fan speed.
Refer to your hardware installation guide for fan speed and temperature information.

Examples Figure 5-16. Command Example: show environment for the E1200
FTOS#show environment
-- Fan Status --
Tray Status Temp Volt Speed PEM0 PEM1 Fan1 Fan2 Fan3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 up < 50C 12-16V low/2100-2700 RPM up up up up up
4 up < 50C 16-20V med/2700-3200 RPM up up up up up
-- Power Entry Modules --
Bay Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 absent or down
1 up
-- Line Card Environment Status --

Slot Status Temp PEM0 PEM1 Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 not present
1 not present
2 not present
3 not present
4 not present
5 not present
6 not present
7 not present
8 not present
9 not present
10 not present
11 booting 53C down up ok
12 not present
13 not present
-- RPM Environment Status --

Slot Status Temp PEM0 PEM1 Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active 48C down up ok
1 not present
-- SFM Environment Status --

Slot Status Temp PEM0 PEM1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active 49C up up
1 active 47C up up
2 active 46C up up
3 active 48C up up
4 active 52C up up
5 active 50C up up
6 active 47C up up
7 active 48C up up
8 active 47C up up
FTOS#
Figure 5-17. Command Example: show environment fan on the E600

FTOS#show environment fan
-- Fan Status --
Status Temp Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Serial Num Version
------------------------------------------------------------------
up 29C 6000 RPM 7500 RPM 7500 RPM 0.0
FTOS#

Figure 5-18. Command Example: show environment fan on the C300
FTOS#show env fan
-- Fan Status --
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Tray 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------
FanNumber Speed Status
0 4170 up
1 4140 up
2 3870 up
3 4140 up
4 3870 up
5 3810 up
FTOS#
show environment (S-Series)

s View S-Series system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).
Syntax show environment [all | fan | stack-unit unit-id | pem]
Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to view all components.
fan Enter the keyword fan to view information on the fans. The output of this
command is chassis dependent.
stack-unit unit-id Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the unit-id to display information
on a specific stack member. Range: 0 to 1.
pem Enter the keyword pem to view only information on power entry modules.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 The output of the show environment fan command for S-Series is changed to
display fan speeds instead of just showing the fan status as up or down.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series. S-Series options and output differ from the
C-Series/E-Series version.
Usage Figure 5-19 shows the output of the show environment fan command as it appears prior to FTOS
Information 7.8.1.0.

Example Figure 5-19. Command Example: show environment all on the S-Series
FTOS#show environment all
-- Fan Status --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit TrayStatus Fan0 Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Fan4 Fan5
0 up up up up up up up
-- Power Supplies --
Unit Bay Status Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 up AC
0 1 absent
-- Unit Environment Status --

Unit Status Temp Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0* online 50C ok
* Management Unit
-- Fan Status --
Unit Status Speed Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Fan4 Fan5 Fan6 Serial Num Version
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 up high up up up up up up 1234 1
Example Figure 5-20. Command Example: show environment fan on the S-Series
FTOS#show environment fan
-- Fan Status --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Example Figure 5-21. Command Example: show environment pem on the S-Series
FTOS#show environment pem
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 up AC
0 1 absent
Example Figure 5-22. Command Example: show environment stack-unit on the S-Series
FTOS#show environment stack-unit 0
-- Unit Environment Status --

Unit Status Temp Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0* online 49C ok
* Management Unit

show inventory (C-Series and E-Series)
ce Display the chassis type, components (including media), FTOS version including hardware
identification numbers and configured protocols.
Syntax show inventory [media slot]
Parameters
media slot (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media followed by the slot number.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Output expanded to include SFP+ media in C-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Vendor field removed from output of show inventory media.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and expanded to include transceiver media
Version 6.2.1.0 Expanded to include Software Protocol Configured field on E-Series
Usage The show inventory media command provides some details about installed pluggable media (SFP,
Information XFP), as shown in Figure 5-25. Use the show interfaces command to get more details about
installed pluggable media.
The display output might include a double asterisk (**) next to the SFMs, for example:
...
0 CC-E-SFM ** 0004875 7490007411 A
1 CC-E-SFM ** 0004889 7490007411 A
...
The double asterisk generally indicates the SFMs frequency capabilities, indicating either that they are
operating at 125 MHz or that the frequency capability, which is stored in an EPROM, cannot be
determined.
If there are no fiber ports in the line card, then just the header under show inventory media will be
displayed. If there are fiber ports but no optics inserted, then the output will display Media not present
or accessible.C300 Example

Figure 5-23. Example output of show inventory for C300 (C-Series)
FTOS#sh inventory
Chassis Type : C150
Chassis Mode : 1.0
Software Version : E8-4-2-399
Slot Item Serial Number Part Number Rev Piece Part ID Rev
Svc Tag Exprs Svc Code
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C150 TY000002776 7520036800 03 US-021R1D-76991-1BA-2776
001 SRVCTG1 626 351 582 89
0 LC-CB-GE-48V FX000008104 7520029400 03 US-0YK2JY-76991-1BA-8104
002 SRVCTG2 626 351 582 90
1 LC-CB-GE-48V FX000010094 7520029401 01 N/A N/
A N/A N/A
2 LC-CB-10GE-4P FX000020945 7520030304 02 N/A N/
A N/A N/A
3 LC-CB-10GE-8P FX000013637 7520030400 02 N/A N/
A N/A N/A
0 LC-CB-RPM FX000037575 7520029307 02 US-0T4VKT-76991-1BA-7575
002 SRVCTG9 626 351 582 97
0 CC-C-1200W-AC N/A N/A N/A N/A N/
A N/A N/A
A N/A N/A
A N/A N/A
0 CC-C150-FAN FX000026033 7520033800 03 N/A N/
A N/A N/A
* - standby

E-Series Example Figure 5-24. Example output of show inventory for E-Series
FTOS#show inventory
Chassis Type : E1200
Chassis Mode : TeraScale
Slot Item Serial Number Part Number Rev Piece Part ID Rev Svc Tag
Exprs Svc Code
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------
E1200 FX000003180 7520004200 01 US-0RVY43-76991-82B-0456 1B2 SVCTGCH
628 458 864 65
0 LC-EF-GE-48T FX000031361 7520016601 01 US-0YK2JY-76991-1BA-1361 001 SRVCTG3
626 351 582 91
0 LC-PIC0 0032176 7490073803 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 LC-PIC1 0032176 7490073803 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 LC-EF-10GE-4P L8FM125900030 7520063001 B N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 LC-PIC0 N3FM124P01014 7490094700 03 N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 LC-PIC1 N3FM124P01022 7490094700 03 N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 LC-EF-1GE-48P 0027190 7520016401 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 LC-PIC0 0031730 7490072904 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 LC-PIC1 0031785 7490072904 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
5 LC-EG-OC48-4P 0065522 7520021400 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
5 LC-PIC0 0027573 6000040200 04 N/A N/A N/A N/A
5 LC-PIC1 0027574 6000040200 04 N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 LC-EG-OC48-4P 0065514 7490083601 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 LC-PIC0 0027584 7490086600 00 N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 LC-PIC1 0027582 7490086600 00 N/A N/A N/A N/A
8 LC-EF-GE-48T 0043676 7520016602 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
8 LC-PIC0 0043857 7490073804 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
8 LC-PIC1 0043857 7490073804 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
13 LC-EF-GE-90M 0044255 7520016701 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
13 LC-PIC0 0044762 7490070802 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
13 LC-PIC1 0044762 7490070802 02 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 LC-EF-RPM FX000040917 7520017200 01 US-0RVY43-76991-82B-0456 1B2 SVCTGCH
628 458 864 65
0 CC-E-SFM ** FX000003528 7490007409 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
1 CC-E-SFM 0045946 7520018300 C N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 CC-E-SFM ** E000000003566 7490007409 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
3 CC-E-SFM ** 0046015 7520018300 C N/A N/A N/A N/A
4 CC-E-SFM ** 0006811 7520003700 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A
5 CC-E-SFM ** 0003522 7490007411 A N/A N/A N/A N/A
7 CC-E-SFM ** E000000003567 7490007409 01 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 CC-E1200-PWR-DC N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1 CC-E1200-PWR-DC N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 CC-E1200-FAN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
* - standby

Example Figure 5-25. Example output of show inventory media slot (partial)
FTOS#show inventory media 3

Slot Port Type Media Serial Number F10Qualified
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
...
3 11 SFP 1000BASE-SX U9600L0 Yes
...
Example Figure 5-26. Example Output of show inventory media

FTOS#show inventory media
Slot Port Type Media Serial Number F10Qualified
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 SFP 1000BASE-SX P11BWXZ Yes
1 1 SFP 1000BASE-LX H833612 Yes
1 2 SFP 1000BASE-SX B342232075 Yes
1 3 SFP 1000BASE-SX P6F02U2 Yes
1 4 SFP 1000BASE-SX AMGX367 Yes
1 5 SFP 1000BASE-SX B320210155 Yes
1 6 SFP 1000BASE-SX B342232168 Yes
1 7 SFP 1000BASE-SX H11VJ8F Yes
1 8 SFP 1000BASE-SX AJUR367 Yes
1 9 SFP 1000BASE-SX AJLH367 Yes
1 10 Media not present or accessible
1 11 Media not present or accessible
1 12 SFP 1000BASE-SX P11DCP3 Yes
!----------------- output truncated -----------------!
Related
Commands
show interfaces Display a specific interface configuration.
show interfaces Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The
transceiver output also displays the transceivers serial number.
show inventory (S-Series)

s Display the S-Series switch type, components (including media), FTOS version including hardware
identification numbers and configured protocols.
Syntax show inventory [media slot]
Parameters
media slot (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media followed by the stack ID of the stack member
for which you want to display pluggable media inventory.
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for S-Series. S-Series output differs from
History
E-Series.
Usage If there are no fiber ports in the unit, then just the header under show inventory media will be
displayed. If there are fiber ports but no optics inserted, then the output will display Media not present
or accessible.

Example Figure 5-27. Example output of show inventory for S-Series
FTOS#show inventory
System Type : S50N
System Mode : 1.0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------
* 2 S50-01-GE-48T-AC DL257430183 7590005600 B CN-0RVY43-28298-82B-0456
1B2 SVCTGCH 628 458 864 65
2 S50-01-12G-2S N/A N/A N/A N/A N/
A N/A N/A
2 S50-PWR-AC N/A N/A N/A N/A N/
A N/A N/A
2 S50-FAN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/
A N/A N/A
* - Management Unit
Related
show interfaces interface configuration.
Commands
show interfaces Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The
transceiver output also displays the transceivers serial number.
show linecard
ce Display the line card(s) status.
Syntax show linecard [number [brief] | all]
Parameters
number (OPTIONAL) Enter a slot number to view information on the line card in that slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all present line
cards.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of line card
information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

E-Series Example Figure 5-28. Command Example: show linecard on E-Series
-- Line card 0 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : E48TF - 48-port 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ-45
interfaces (EF)
Current Type : E48TF - 48-port 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ-45
interfaces (EF)
Hardware Rev : Base - 1.1 PP0 - 1.1 PP1 - 1.1
Num Ports : 48
Jumbo Capable : yes
Boot Flash : A: 2.3.2.1 [booted] B: 2.3.2.1
Temperature : 44C
Voltage : ok
Vendor Id : 04
Country Code : 01
PPID Revision : 001
Expr Svc Code : 626 351 582 91
Auto Reboot : enabled\
FTOS#

C-Series Figure 5-29. Command Example: show linecard on C-Series
Example
-- Line card 11 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Current Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Hardware Rev : Base - 1.0 PP0 - n/a PP1 - n/a
Num Ports : 48
Up Time : 12 hr, 37 min
FTOS Version : 6.2.1.x
Jumbo Capable : yes
Temperature : 49C
Voltage : ok
Serial Number :
Part Number : Rev
Vendor Id :
Date Code :
Country Code :
PPID Revision : 002
Expr Svc Code : 626 351 582 90
FTOS#

Table 5-1 list the definitions of the fields shown in Figure 5-28.
Table 5-1. Descriptions for show linecard output
Field Description
Line card Displays the line card slot number (only listed in show linecard all
command output).
Status Displays the line cards status.
Next Boot Displays whether the line card is to be brought online at the next system
reload.
Required Type Displays the line card type configured for the slot.
The Required Type and Current Type must match. Use the linecard
command to reconfigure the line card type if they do not match.
Current Type Displays the line card type installed in the slot.
The Required Type and Current Type must match. Use the linecard
command to reconfigure the line card type if they do not match.
Hardware Rev Displays the chip set revision.
Num Ports Displays the number of ports in the line card.
Up Time Displays the number of hours and minutes the card is online.
FTOS Version Displays the operating software version.
Jumbo Capable Displays Yes or No indicating if the line card can support Jumbo frames.
This field does not state whether the chassis is operating in EtherScale or
TeraScale mode.
Boot Flash Ver Displays the two possible Bootflash versions. The [Booted] keyword next
to the version states which version was used at system boot.
Memory Size List the memory of the line card processor.
Temperature Displays the temperature of the line card.
Power Status Lists the type of power modules used in the chassis:
AC = AC power supply
DC = DC Power Entry Module (PEM)
Voltage Displays OK if the line voltage is within range.
Serial Number Displays the line card serial number.

Figure 5-30. Command Example: show linecard brief
FTOS#show linecard 11 brief
-- Line card 11 --
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Current Type : E48PF - 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
Hardware Rev : Base - 1.0 PP0 - n/a PP1 - n/a
Num Ports : 48
Up Time : 11 hr, 24 min
FTOS Version : 6.1.1.0
Jumbo Capable : yes
FTOS#
Related
Commands linecard Pre-configure a line card in a currently empty slot of the system or a different line card
type for the slot.
show interfaces Display information on all interfaces on a specific line card.
linecard
show chassis View information on all elements of the system.
show rpm View information on the RPM.
show sfm View information on the SFM.
show linecard boot-information

e View the line card status and boot information.
Syntax show linecard boot-information
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 5-31. Command Example: show linecard boot-information
FTOS#show linecard boot-information
-- Line cards --
Serial Booted Next Cache Boot
# Status CurType number from boot boot flash
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 online EXW4PF 012345 B: 6.5.1.4 6.5.1.4 A: invalid B: 6.5.1.4 A: 2.3.0.8 [b] B: invalid
1 -
2 online E48TF 0031318 6.5.1.4 6.5.1.4 A: invalid B: 6.5.1.4 A: 2.3.0.6 B: 2.3.0.8 [b]
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
FTOS#

Table 5-2 defines the fields in Figure 5-31.
Table 5-2. Descriptions for show linecard boot-information output
Field Description
# Displays the line card slot numbers, beginning with slot 0. The
number of slots listed is dependent on your chassis:
E-Series: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on
a E300.
Status Indicates if a line card is online, offline, or booting. If a line card is
not detected in the slot, a hyphen ( - ) is displayed.
CurType Displays the line card identification number, for example
EXW4PF.
Serial number Displays the line card serial number.
Booted from Indicates whether the line card cache booted or system booted. In
addition, the image with which the line card booted is also
displayed. If the line card cache booted, then the output is A: or B:
followed by the image in the flash partition (A: 6.5.1.4 or B:
6.5.1.4).
If the line card system booted, then display is the current FTOS
version number (6.5.1.4).
Next boot Indicates if the next line card boot is a cache boot or system boot
and which image will be used in the boot.
Cache boot Displays the system image in cache boot flash partition A: and B:
for the line card. If the cache boot does not contain a valid image,
invalid is displayed.
Boot flash Displays the two possible Boot flash versions. The [b] next to the
version number is the current boot flash, that is the image used in
the last boot.
Usage The display area of this command uses the maximum 80 character length. If your display area is not set
Information to 80 characters, the display will wrap.
Related
Commands show linecard View the line card status
upgrade (E-Series version) Upgrade the boot flash, boot selector, or system image
download alt-boot-image Download an alternate boot image to the chassis
download alt-full-image Download an alternate FTOS image to the chassis
download alt-system-image Download an alternate system image to the chassis
show memory (C-Series and E-Series)

ce View current memory usage on the system.
Syntax show memory [cp | lp slot-number | rp1 | rp2]

Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view information on the Control Processor on
the RPM.
lp slot-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp and the slot number to view information on the
line-card processor in that slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E300.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view information on Route Processor 1 on
the RPM.
Note: This option is supported on the E-Series only.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view information on Route Processor 2 on the
RPM.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The output for show memory displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system. The Sysdlp
Information is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on C-Series and E-Series' LP.
In FTOS Release 7.4.1.0 and higher, the total counter size (for all 3 CPUs) in show memory (C-Series
and E-Series) and show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series) will differ based on which FTOS
processes are counted.
In the show memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to the size
of the application processes.
In the show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to
the size of the application processes plus the size of the system processes.
E-Series Example Figure 5-32. Command Example: show memory on E-Series

FTOS#show memory
Statistics On CP Processor
===========================
Total(b) Used(b) Free(b) Lowest(b) Largest(b)
452689184 64837834 387851350 387805590 371426976
Statistics On RP1 Processor
===========================
629145600 4079544 625066056 625066056 0
Statistics On RP2 Processor
===========================
510209568 47294716 462914852 462617968 446275376
FTOS#

Table 5-3 defines the fields displayed in Figure 5-32.
Table 5-3. Descriptions for show memory output
Field Description
Lowest Displays the memory usage the system went to in the lifetime of the system. Indirectly, it
indicates the maximum usage in the lifetime of the system: Total minus Lowest.
Largest The current largest available. This relates to block size and is not related to the amount of
memory on the system.
show memory (S-Series)

s View current memory usage on the S-Series switch.
Syntax show memory [stack-unit 0-7]
Parameters
stack-unit 0-7 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack unit ID of the
S-Series stack member to display memory information on the designated stack
member.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for the S-Series
History
Usage The output for show memory displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system. The Sysdlp
Information is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the S-Series CPU.
Example Figure 5-33. Command Example: show memory on S-Series

FTOS#show memory stack-unit 0
Statistics On Unit 0 Processor
===========================
268435456 4010354 264425102 264375410 264425102
show processes cpu (C-Series and E-Series)

ce View CPU usage information based on processes running in the system.
Syntax show processes cpu [cp | rp1 | rp2] [lp [linecard-number [1-99] | all | summary]
Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view CPU usage of the Control
Processor.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view CPU usage of the Route
Processor 1.

rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view CPU usage of the Route
Processor 2.
lp linecard [1-99] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp followed by the line card number to
display the CPU usage of that line card.
The optional 1-99 variable sets the number of tasks to display in order of
the highest CPU usage in the past five (5) seconds.
lp all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp all to view CPU utilization on all
active line cards.
lp summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp summary to view a summary of the
line card CPU utilization.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified: Added the lp all option
Version 6.5.1.0 Modified: The granularity of the output for rp1 and rp2 is changed. The the output is
now at the process level, so process-specific statistics are displayed.
Example 1 Figure 5-34. Command Example: show processes cpu (Partial)
FTOS#show processes cpu

CPU Statistics On CP Processor
===============================
CPU utilization for five seconds: 4%/2%; one minute: 2%; five minutes: 2%
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process
0xd02e4e8 1498633 89918 16666 3.00% 2.67% 2.67% 0 KP
0xd9d4c70 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tLogTask
0xd9cd200 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 soc_dpc
0xd9bf588 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tARL
0xd9bd2f8 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tBCMlink
0xd9bb0e0 700 42 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tBcmTask
0xd9798d0 106683 6401 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tNetTask
0xd3368a0 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tWdbTask
0xd3329b0 166 10 16600 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tWdtTask
0xd32a8c8 102500 6150 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 tme
0xd16b1d8 12050 723 16666 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ipc
0xd1680c8 33 2 16500 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 irc
0xd156008 116 7 16571 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 RpmAvailMgr
0xd153ab0 216 13 16615 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ev
-more-

Example 2 Figure 5-35. Command Example: show processes cpu rp1
FTOS#show processes cpu rp1
0x0000007c 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ospf

0x00000077 460 46 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 dsm
0x00000074 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ipm1
0x0000006e 180 18 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 rtm
0x0000006b 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 rip
0x00000068 120 12 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 acl
0x00000064 690 69 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysd1
0x00000062 20 2 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysmon
0x00000024 880 88 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sshd
0x00000022 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 inetd
0x00000020 2580 258 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000013 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000006 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sh
0x00000005 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 aiodoned
0x00000004 840 84 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ioflush
0x00000003 250 25 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 reaper
0x00000002 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pagedaemon
0x00000001 160 16 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 init
0x00000000 700 70 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 swapper
0x00000088 260 26 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bgp
Example 3 Figure 5-36. Command Example: show processes cpu rp2
FTOS#show processes cpu rp2
0x00000090 140 14 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 vrrp

0x0000008d 120 12 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 fvrp
0x00000088 360 36 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 xstp
0x00000084 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 span
0x00000083 180 18 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pim
0x00000080 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 igmp
0x0000007b 130 13 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ipm2
0x00000078 700 70 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mrtm
0x00000074 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 l2mgr
0x00000070 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 l2pm
0x0000006c 80 8 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 arpm
0x00000068 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 acl2
0x00000064 750 75 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysd2
0x00000062 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sysmon
0x00000024 880 88 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sshd
0x00000022 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 inetd
0x00000020 2250 225 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000013 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
0x00000006 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sh
0x00000005 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 aiodoned
0x00000004 960 96 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ioflush
0x00000003 140 14 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 reaper
0x00000002 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pagedaemon
0x00000001 160 16 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 init
0x00000000 700 70 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 swapper
0x00000098 140 14 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 msdp
Usage The CPU utilization for the last five seconds as shown in Figure 5-34 is 4%/2%. The first number (4%)
Information is the CPU utilization for the last five seconds. The second number (2%) indicates the percent of CPU
time spent at the interrupt level.

show processes cpu (S-Series)
s Display CPU usage information based on processes running in an S-Series.
Syntax show processes cpu [management-unit 1-99 [details] | stack-unit 0-7 | summary | ipc |
memory [stack-unit 0-7]]
Parameters
management-unit1-99 (OPTIONAL) Display processes running in the control processor. The
[details] 1-99 variable sets the number of tasks to display in order of the highest
CPU usage in the past five (5) seconds. Add the details keyword to
display all running processes (except sysdlp). See Example 3.
stack-unit 0-7 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack
member ID (Range 0 to 7).
As an option of show processes cpu, this option displays CPU usage
for the designated stack member. See Example 2.
Or, as an option of memory, this option limits the output of memory
statistics to the designated stack member. See Example 5.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary view of
CPU usage for all members of the stack. See Example 1.
ipc (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipc to display inter-process
communication statistics.
memory (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword memory to display memory statistics.
See Example 4.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added management-unit [details] keywords.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series
Example 1 Figure 5-37. Command Example: show processes cpu summary on S-Series
FTOS#show processes cpu summary
CPU utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min

-------------------------------------------
Unit0 0% 0% 0%
CPU utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min

-------------------------------------------
Unit1* 1% 0% 0%
Unit2 0% 0% 0%
Unit3 0% 0% 0%
* Mgmt Unit

Example 2 Figure 5-38. Command Example: show processes cpu management-unit on S-Series
FTOS#show processes cpu management-unit 0
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY
Process
272 20 2 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
topoDPC
271 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmNHOP
270 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmDISC
269 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmATP-RX
268 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmATP-TX
267 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmSTACK
266 380 38 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.08% 0
bcmRX
265 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmLINK.0
264 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmXGS3AsyncTX
263 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmTX
262 160 16 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmCNTR.0
260 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
bcmDPC
253 10690 1069 10000 0.00% 10.00% 2.97% 0
sysd
251 2380 238 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.50% 0
kfldintr
58 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0
sh
36 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 13 5 3 1
!-------- output truncated -------------!

Example 3 Figure 5-39. Command Example: show processes cpu stack-unit on S-Series
FTOS#show processes cpu stack-unit 0
CPU Statistics On Unit0 Processor

===============================
52 8260 826 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.22% 0 sysd
124 1160 116 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.12% 0 KernLrnAgMv
116 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 xstp
109 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 span
108 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pim
103 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 igmp
100 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mrtm
96 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 l2mgr
92 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 l2pm
86 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 arpm
83 40 4 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ospf
80 100 10 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 dsm
74 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 rtm
70 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 rip
68 120 12 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ipm1
64 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 acl
63 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmLINK.1
62 290 29 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmCNTR.1
61 50 5 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmRX
60 40 4 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmLINK.0
59 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmXGS3AsyncTX
58 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmTX
57 340 34 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmCNTR.0
55 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 bcmDPC
117 60 6 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 frrp
28 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 inetd
21 450 45 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
18 130 13 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 mount_mfs
11 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 syslogd
6 30 3 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 sh
5 10 1 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 aiodoned
4 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 ioflush
3 20 2 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 reaper
2 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 pagedaemon
1 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 init
0 10 1 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 swapper

Example 4 Figure 5-40. Command Example: show processes memory on S-Series
FTOS#show processes memory
Memory Statistics On Unit 0 Processor (bytes)

==========================================
start
Total : 160231424, MaxUsed : 130596864 [09/19/2007 03:11:17]
CurrentUsed: 130596864, CurrentFree: 29634560
SharedUsed : 14261872, SharedFree : 6709672
PID Process ResSize Size Allocs Frees Max Current
124 KernLrnAgMv 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
117 frrp 5677056 217088 87650 0 87650 87650
116 xstp 7585792 1536000 551812 49692 518684 502120
109 span 5709824 221184 55386 0 55386 55386
108 pim 5869568 720896 12300 0 12300 12300
103 igmp 5513216 327680 18236 16564 18236 1672
100 mrtm 6905856 516096 72846 0 72846 72846
96 l2mgr 6107136 491520 254858 115948 172038 138910
92 l2pm 5607424 221184 667578 579740 120966 87838
86 arpm 5353472 208896 54528 16564 54528 37964
83 ospf 4210688 475136 0 0 0 0
80 dsm 6057984 552960 22838 0 22838 22838
74 rtm 6311936 577536 574792 298152 376024 276640
70 rip 5001216 249856 528 0 528 528
68 ipm1 5292032 339968 67224 0 67224 67224
64 acl 5607424 544768 140086 66256 123522 73830
63 bcmLINK.1 40410880 0 0 0 0 0
62 bcmCNTR.1 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
61 bcmRX 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
60 bcmLINK.0 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
59 bcmXGS3AsyncTX 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
58 bcmTX 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
57 bcmCNTR.0 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
55 bcmDPC 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
52 sysd 44650496 22876160 3930856 1358248 2589172 2572608
28 inetd 876544 69632 0 0 0 0
21 mount_mfs 22642688 1953792 0 0 0 0
!----output truncated ------------------!
Example 5 Figure 5-41. Command Example: show processes memory stack-unit on S-Series
FTOS#show processes memory stack-unit 0
Memory Statistics On Unit 0 Processor (bytes)

==========================================
start
Total : 160231424, MaxUsed : 130596864 [09/19/2007 03:11:17]
124 KernLrnAgMv 140410880 0 0 0 0 0
117 frrp 5677056 217088 87650 0 87650 87650
116 xstp 7585792 1536000 551812 49692 518684 502120
109 span 5709824 221184 55386 0 55386 55386
108 pim 5869568 720896 12300 0 12300 12300
103 igmp 5513216 327680 18236 16564 18236 1672
100 mrtm 6905856 516096 72846 0 72846 72846
96 l2mgr 6107136 491520 254858 115948 172038 138910
92 l2pm 5607424 221184 667578 579740 120966 87838
86 arpm 5353472 208896 54528 16564 54528 37964
83 ospf 4210688 475136 0 0 0 0
80 dsm 6057984 552960 22838 0 22838 22838
74 rtm 6311936 577536 574792 298152 376024 276640
70 rip 5001216 249856 528 0 528 528
68 ipm1 5292032 339968 67224 0 67224 67224
!----output truncated ------------------!
Related
Commands show hardware layer2 acl Display Layer 2 ACL data for the selected stack member and stack
member port-pipe.
show hardware layer3 Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack
member port-pipe.
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of
the designated component of the designated stack member.

show hardware system-flow Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack
member port-pipe.
show interfaces stack-unit Display information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series stack member.
show processes memory Display CPU usage information based on processes running in an S-Series
(S-Series)
show processes ipc flow-control

ces Display the Single Window Protocol Queue (SWPQ) statistics.
Syntax show processes ipc flow-control [cp | rp1 | rp2 | lp linecard-number]
Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view the Control Processors SWPQ
statistics.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view the Control Processors SWPQ
statistics on Route Processor 1.*
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view the Control Processors SWPQ
statistics on Route Processor 2.*
lp linecard-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp followed by the line card number to view the
Control Processors SWPQ statistics on the specified line card.*
* In the S-Series, this command supports only the cp keyword, not the rp1, rp2, and lp options. See
Figure 5-46.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example 1 Figure 5-42. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control from C-Series
FTOS# show processes ipc flow-control cp
Q Statistics on CP Processor
TxProcess RxProcess Cur High Time Retr Msg Ack Aval Max
Len Mark Out ies Sent Rcvd Retra Retra
ACL0 RTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 DIFFSERV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 IGMP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 ACL20 0 1 0 0 2 2 50 50
CFG0 CFGDATASYNC0 0 2 0 0 7 7 255 255
DHCP0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 9 9 25 25
DHCP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
RTM0 ARPMGR0 0 1 0 0 1 1 136 136
ACL20 IGMP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 50
LACP0 IFMGR0 0 2 0 0 4 4 25 25
ARPMGR0 MRTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
ACL20 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 50
MACMGR0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 1 1 25 25
TCLASSMGR0 ARPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
IFMGR0 IPMGR2 0 6 0 0 44 44 8 8
!--------------------------output truncated ---------------------------------!
Example 2 Figure 5-43. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control rp from E-Series
FTOS# show processes ipc flow-control cp
DHCP0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 6 6 25 25
DHCP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
IFMGR0 FEFD0 0 3 0 0 27 27 8 8
IFMGR0 IPMGR0 0 6 0 0 44 44 8 8
IFMGR0 SNMP0 0 1 0 0 16 16 8 8
IFMGR0 SFL_CP0 0 4 0 0 31 31 8 8
IFMGR0 EVENTTERMLOG0 0 1 0 0 6 6 8 8
IFMGR0 PORTMIRR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 8
IFMGR0 DHCP0 0 1 0 0 6 6 8 8
IFMGR0 TCLASSMGR0 0 2 0 0 13 13 8 8
IFMGR0 VRRP0 0 3 0 0 25 25 8 8
IFMGR0 MRTM0 0 2 0 0 21 21 8 8
TCLASSMGR0 ARPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
IFMGR0 IPMGR2 0 6 0 0 44 44 8 8
!--------------------------output truncated ---------------------------------!

Table 5-4 list the definitions of the fields shown in Figure 5-42 and Figure 5-43.
Table 5-4. Description of show processes ipc flow-control cp output
Field Description
Source QID /Tx Process Source Service Identifier
Destination QID/Rx Process Destination Service Identifier
Cur Len Current number of messages enqueued
High Mark Highest number of packets in the queue at any point of time
#of to / Timeout Timeout count
#of Retr /Retries Number of retransmissions
#msg Sent/Msg Sent/ Number of messages sent
#msg Ackd/Ack Rcvd Number of messages acknowledged
Retr /Available Retra Number of retries left
Total/ Max Retra Number of retries allowed
Example 2 Figure 5-44. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control rp

FTOS# show processes ipc flow-control rp2
[qid] Source->Dest Cur High #of #of #msg #msg Retr total
Len Mark to Retr Sent Ackd
--------------------------------------------------------------------
[1] unknown2->unknown2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3
[2] l2pm0->spanMgr0 0 2 0 0 2298 2298 25 25
[3] fvrp0->macMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[4] l2pm0->fvrp0 0 2 0 0 1905 1905 25 25
[5] fvrp0->l2pm0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[6] stp0->l2pm0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[7] spanMgr0->macMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[8] spanMgr0->ipMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
FTOS#
Example 3 Figure 5-45. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control lp
FTOS#show processes ipc flow-control lp 10

Q Statistics on LP 10
TxProcess RxProcess Cur High Time Retries Msg Ack Aval Max
Len Mark Out Sent Rcvd Retra Retra
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ACL_AGENT10 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
ACL_AGENT10 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
FRRPAGT10 FRRP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 30
IFAGT10 IFMGR0 0 1 0 0 1 1 8 8
LPDMACAGENT10 MACMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
FTOS#

Example 4 Figure 5-46. Command Example: show processes ipc flow-control on S-Series
FTOS#show processes ipc flow-control

ACL0 RTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 DIFFSERV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 IGMP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
ACL0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10
LACP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
RTM0 ARPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 136 136
MACMGR0 ACL0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
ARPMGR0 MRTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
DHCP0 ACL0 0 1 0 0 1 1 25 25
DHCP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
L2PM0 SPANMGR0 0 2 0 0 14 14 25 25
ARPMGR0 FIBAGT0 0 1 0 0 1 1 100 100
SPANMGR0 MACMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
SPANMGR0 IPMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
SPANMGR0 L2PM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
STP0 L2PM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
RTM0 FIBAGT0 0 2 0 0 4 4 255 255
L2PM0 STP0 0 5 0 0 5 5 25 25
ACL_AGENT0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
ACL_AGENT0 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
FRRP0 L2PM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
L2PM0 FRRP0 0 1 0 0 13 13 25 25
ACL0 ACL_AGENT0 0 4 0 0 7 7 90 90
ACL0 MACAGENT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 90
IFMGR0 EVENTTERMLOG0 0 1 0 0 1 1 8 8
IFMGR0 SNMP0 0 1 0 0 1 1 8 8
IFMGR0 IPMGR0 0 7 0 0 9 9 8 8
IFMGR0 DIFFSERV0 0 2 0 0 3 3 8 8
DIFFSERV0 ACL_AGENT0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100
!---------------output truncated --------------------------!
Usage The Single Window Protocol (SWP) provides flow control-based reliable communication between the
Information sending and receiving software tasks.
Important Points to Remember

A sending task enqueues messages into the SWP queue3 for a receiving task and waits for an
acknowledgement.
If no response is received within a defined period of time, the SWP timeout mechanism resubmits
the message at the head of the FIFO queue.
After retrying a defined number of times, the following timeout message is generated:
SWP-2-NOMORETIMEOUT
In the display output in Figure 5-46, a retry (Retries) value of zero indicates that the SWP
mechanism reached the maximum number of retransmissions without an acknowledgement.
show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series)

ce View memory usage information based on processes running in the system.
Syntax show processes memory [cp | lp slot-number {lp all | lp summary} | rp1 | rp2]

Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view memory usage of the Control Processor.
lp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp and the slot number to view information on the
slot-number line-card processor in that slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E300.
lp all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp all to view CP memory usage on all active line
cards.
lp summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp summary to view a summary of the line card
CP memory usage.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view memory usage of the Route Processor 1.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view memory usage of the Route Processor 2.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Added lp all and lp summary options
Version 6.5.1.0 For rp1 and rp2 only, the output displays memory consumption of all the processes
including a summary (see Figure 5-48 and Figure 5-49.
Usage The output for show process memory displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of
Information the system. The Sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on C-Series and E-Series'
CP.
In FTOS Release 7.4.1.0 and higher, the total counter size (for all 3 CPUs) in show memory and
show processes memory will differ based on which FTOS processes are counted.
In the show memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to the size
of the application processes.
In the show processes memory (C-Series and E-Series) display output, the memory size is equal to
the size of the application processes plus the size of the system processes.

Example Figure 5-47. Command Example: show processes memory (partial)
FTOS#show processes memory

Memory Statistics On CP Processor (bytes)
==========================================
Total: 452689184, MaxUsed: 64886986, CurrentUsed: 64873866, Current
TaskName TotalAllocated TotalFreed MaxHeld CurrentHolding
tRootTask 39083408 1395840 38143920 37687568
tARL 64 0 64 64
tBcmTask 256 0 256 256
tPortmapd 18560 0 18560 18560
tShell 3440 0 3440 3440
tPingTmo0 0 1088 0 0
tExcTask 0 592864 0 0
tme 4002494 192 4002302 4002302
ipc 34060 192 34060 33868
irc 943436 0 943436 943436
RpmAvailMgr 9376 32 9344 9344
ev 133188 0 133188 133188
evterm 26752 0 26752 26752
evhdlr 2528 8064 2528 0
dlm 7556256 7366960 1239104 189296
dla 416 0 416 416
tsm 15136 0 15136 15136
fmg 766560 0 766560 766560
fileProc 416 0 416 416
sysAdmTsk 42028 0 42028 42028
Example Figure 5-48. Command Example: show processes memory rp1
FTOS#show processes memory rp1
Total : 954650624, MaxUsed : 114135040 [3/8/2006 15:1:42]

124 ospf 3215360 425984 0 0 0 0

119 dsm 7749632 1859584 797026 0 797026 797026
114 ipm1 3821568 229376 297324 0 297324 297324
112 rtm 4722688 421888 925008 0 925008 925008
107 rip 3731456 253952 198216 0 198216 198216
104 acl 4734976 430080 1127524 0 1127524 1127524
100 sysd1 11636736 2019328 965798 0 965798 965798
98 sysmon 528384 94208 0 0 0 0
36 sshd 1286144 430080 0 0 0 0
34 inetd 663552 98304 0 0 0 0
32 mount_mfs 42397696 2514944 0 0 0 0
19 mount_mfs 364544 2449408 0 0 0 0
6 sh 446464 737280 0 0 0 0
5 aiodoned 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
4 ioflush 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
3 reaper 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
2 pagedaemon 76529664 0 0 0 0 0
1 init 139264 2375680 0 0 0 0
0 swapper 76529664 0 0 0 0 0

Example Figure 5-49. Command Example: show processes memory rp2
FTOS#show processes memory rp2
Total : 953700352, MaxUsed : 149417984 [3/8/2006 12:33:6]

145 vrrp 3870720 266240 297324 0 297324 297324

141 fvrp 4472832 204800 797010 0 797010 797010
138 xstp 10764288 7155712 367534 0 367534 367534
133 span 4136960 167936 565810 0 565810 565810
132 pim 6664192 516096 2812528 0 2812528 2812528
128 igmp 4112384 344064 627684 0 627684 627684
124 ipm2 3923968 237568 363396 0 363396 363396
120 mrtm 25567232 593920 697790 0 697790 697790
116 l2mgr 4579328 520192 830098 0 830098 830098
112 l2pm 3874816 225280 367446 32948 367446 334498
108 arpm 3702784 208896 268420 0 268420 268420
104 acl2 3485696 94208 132144 0 132144 132144
100 sysd2 11657216 1679360 998834 0 998834 998834
98 sysmon 528384 94208 0 0 0 0
36 sshd 1286144 430080 0 0 0 0
34 inetd 663552 98304 0 0 0 0
32 mount_mfs 41791488 2514944 0 0 0 0
19 mount_mfs 364544 2449408 0 0 0 0
6 sh 446464 737280 0 0 0 0
5 aiodoned 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
4 ioflush 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
3 reaper 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
2 pagedaemon 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
1 init 139264 2375680 0 0 0 0
0 swapper 76967936 0 0 0 0 0
FTOS#
Table 5-5 defines the fields that appear in the show processes memory output.
Table 5-5. Descriptions of show processes memory rp1/rp2 output
Field Description
Total: Total system memory available
MaxUsed: Total maximum memory used ever (history indicated with time stamp)
CurrentUsed: Total memory currently in use
CurrentFree: Total system memory available
SharedUsed: Total used shared memory
SharedFree: Total free shared memory
PID Process ID
Process Process Name
ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory
Size Process test, stack, and data size
Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated
Frees Total dynamic memory freed
Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated
Current Current dynamic memory in use

show processes memory (S-Series)
s Display memory usage information based on processes running in the S-Series system.
Syntax show processes memory {management-unit | stack unit {07 | all | summary}}
Parameters
management-unit Enter the keyword management-unit for CPU memory usage of the stack
management unit.
stack unit 07 Enter the keyword stack unit followed by a stack unit ID of the member unit
for which to display memory usage on the forwarding processor.
all Enter the keyword all for detailed memory usage on all stack members.
summary Enter the keyword summary for a brief summary of memory availability and
usage on all stack members.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added management-unit option
History
Usage The output for show process memory displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of
Information the system. The Sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on S-Series CP.
For S-Series, the output of show memory and this command will differ based on which FTOS
processes are counted.
In the show memory display output, the memory size is equal to the size of the application
processes.
In the output of this command, the memory size is equal to the size of the application processes
plus the size of the system processes.
Example Figure 5-50. Command Example: show processes memory on S-Series
FTOS#show processes memory stack-unit 0

Total: 268435456, MaxUsed: 2420244, CurrentUsed: 2420244, CurrentFree:
266015212
TaskName TotalAllocated TotalFreed MaxHeld CurrentHolding
tme 435406 397536 54434 37870
ipc 16652 0 16652 16652
timerMgr 33304 0 33304 33304
sysAdmTsk 33216 0 33216 33216
tFib4 1943960 0 1943960 1943960
aclAgent 90770 16564 74206 74206
ifagt_1 21318 16564 21318 4754
dsagt 6504 0 6504 6504
MacAgent 269778 0 269778 269778

Example Figure 5-51. Command Example: show processes memory management-unit
FTOS#show processes management-unit
Total : 151937024, MaxUsed : 111800320 [2/25/2008 4:18:53]


337 KernLrnAgMv 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
331 vrrp 5189632 249856 50572 0 50572 50572
323 frrp 5206016 241664 369238 0 369238 369238
322 xstp 7430144 2928640 38328 0 38328 38328
321 pim 5267456 823296 62168 0 62168 62168
314 igmp 4960256 380928 18588 16564 18588 2024
313 mrtm 6742016 1130496 72758 0 72758 72758
308 l2mgr 5607424 552960 735214 380972 619266 354242
301 l2pm 5001216 167936 1429522 1176044 286606 253478
298 arpm 4628480 217088 71092 33128 71092 37964
294 ospf 5468160 503808 724204 662560 78208 61644
288 dsm 6778880 1159168 39490 16564 39490 22926
287 rtm 5713920 602112 442280 198768 376024 243512
284 rip 4562944 258048 528 0 528 528
281 lacp 4673536 266240 221060 0 221060 221060
277 ipm1 4837376 380928 83788 0 83788 83788
273 acl 5005312 512000 239564 149076 123616 90488
272 topoDPC 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
271 bcmNHOP 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
270 bcmDISC 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
269 bcmATP-RX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
268 bcmATP-TX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
267 bcmSTACK 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
266 bcmRX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
265 bcmLINK.0 117927936 0 0 0 0 0
!----------- output truncated --------------!
Table 5-6 defines the fields that appear in the show processes memory output. .:
Table 5-6. Descriptions of show processes memory output
Field Description
Total: Total system memory available
MaxUsed: Total maximum memory used ever (history indicated with time stamp)
CurrentUsed: Total memory currently in use
CurrentFree: Total system memory available
SharedUsed: Total used shared memory
SharedFree: Total free shared memory
PID Process ID
Process Process Name
ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory
Size Process test, stack, and data size
Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated
Frees Total dynamic memory freed
Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated
Current Current dynamic memory in use

show processes switch-utilization
e Show switch fabric utilization.
Syntax show processes switch-utilization
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 5-52. Command Example: show processes switch-utilization

FTOS#show processes switch-utilization
Switch fabric utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min
------------------------------------------------------
3% 3% 3%
Usage An asterisk ( * ) in the output indicates a legacy card that is not support by the show processes
Information switch-utilization command.
show rpm
ce Show the current RPM status.
Syntax show rpm [number [brief] | all]
Parameters
number (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 1 for the RPM.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view a table with information on all present RPMs.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of RPM information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

E-Series Example Figure 5-53. Command Example: show rpm on E-Series
FTOS#show rpm 0
-- RPM card 0 --
Status : active
Next Boot : online
Card Type : RPM - Route Processor Module (LC-EF-RPM)
Hardware Rev : 2.2i
Num Ports : 1
Last Restart : reset by user
Jumbo Capable : yes
CP Boot Flash : A: 2.4.2.2 [booted] B: 2.4.2.2
RP1 Boot Flash: A: 2.4.2.2 B: 2.4.2.2 [booted]
RP2 Boot Flash: A: 2.4.2.2 B: 2.4.2.2 [booted]
CP Mem Size : 536870912 bytes
RP1 Mem Size : 1073741824 bytes
RP2 Mem Size : 1073741824 bytes
MMC Mem Size : 511680512 bytes
External MMC : n/a
Temperature : 46C
Voltage : ok
Vendor Id : 04
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : US-0RVY43-76991-82B-0456
PPID Revision : 1B2
Service Tag : SVCTGCH
Expr Svc Code : 628 458 864 65
FTOS#

C-Series Figure 5-54. Command Example: show rpm on C-Series
Example
FTOS#show rpm 0
-- RPM card 0 --
Status : active
Next Boot : online
Card Type : RPM - Route Processor Module (LC-CB-RPM)
Hardware Rev : 2.0
Num Ports : 1
Last Restart : reset by user
Jumbo Capable : yes
CP Boot Flash : A: 2.7.1.1 [booted] B: 2.7.1.1
CP FPGA Flash : A: 5.0
CP Mem Size : 1073741824 bytes
MMC Mem Size : 511467520 bytes
External MMC : n/a
Temperature : 43C
Power Status : AC
Voltage : ok
Vendor Id : Y
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : US-0T4VKT-76991-1BA-7575
PPID Revision : 002
Expr Svc Code : 626 351 582 97

Table 5-7. Descriptions of show rpm output
Field Description
Status Displays the RPMs status.
Next Boot Displays whether the RPM is to be brought online at the next system reload.
Card Type Displays the RPM catalog number.
Hardware Rev Displays theE-Series chipset hardware revision level: 1.0 (non-Jumbo); 1.5
(Jumbo-enabled); 2.0 (or above is TeraScale).
Num Ports Displays the number of active ports.
Up Time Displays the number of hours and minutes since the RPMs last reboot.

Table 5-7. Descriptions of show rpm output (continued)
Field Description
Last Restart States the reason for the last RPM reboot.
C-Series possible values:
normal power-cycle (reset power-cycle command)
reset by master (peer RPM reset by master RPM)
over temperature shutdown
power supply failed
E-Series possible values:
normal power-cycle (insufficient power, normal power cycle)
reset by user (automatic failover, software reload of both RPMs, or
master RPM resetting peer)
force-failover (redundancy force-failover command)
FTOS Version Displays the operating software version.
Jumbo Capable Displays a Yes or No indicating if the RPM is capable of sending and receiving
Jumbo frames.
This field does not indicate if the chassis is in Jumbo mode; for that
determination, use the show chassis brief command.
CP Boot Flash Displays the two possible Boot Flash versions for the Control Processor. The
[Booted] keyword next to the version states which version was used at system
boot.
RP1 Boot Flash Displays the two possible Boot Flash versions for the Routing Processor 1. The
boot.
RP2 Boot Flash Displays the two possible Boot Flash versions for the Routing Processor 2. The
boot.
CP Mem Size Displays the memory of the Control Processor.
RP1 Mem Size Displays the memory of the Routing Processor 1.
PR2 Mem Size Displays the memory of the Routing Processor 2.
Temperature Displays the temperature of the RPM.
Power Status Lists the status of the power modules in the chassis.
Voltage Displays the power rails for the line card.
Serial Num Displays the line card serial number.
Country Code Displays the country of origin.
01 = USA
Related
Commands show chassis View information on all elements of the system.
show linecard View information on a line card.
show sfm View information on the SFM.

show software ifm
cs Display interface management (IFM) data.
Syntax show software ifm {clients [summary] | ifagt number | ifcb interface | stack-unit unit-ID |
trace-flags}
Parameters
clients Enter the keyword clients to display IFM client information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display brief information about IFM
clients.
ifagt number Enter the keyword ifagt followed by the number of an interface agent to display
software pipe and IPC statistics.
ifcb interface Enter the keyword ifcb followed by one of the following interface IDs followed by the
slot/port information to display interface control block information for that interface:
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet.
number:
ExaScale.
For a 10G Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet.
C-Series options also include:
fastethernet for a Fast Ethernet interface
loopback for a Loopback interface
managementethernet for a Management Ethernet interface
null for a Null interface
vlan for a VLAN interface (Range: 1 to 4094, 1 to 2094 for ExaScale)
stack-unit Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack member number to display IFM
unit-ID information for that unit.
Range: 0 to 1
Note: This option is only available on S-Series.
trace-flags Enter the keyword trace-flags to display IFM information for internal trace flags.
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series and S-Series
History

S-Series Example Figure 5-55. Command Example: show software ifm clients summary on S-Series
FTOS#show software ifm clients summary
ClntType Inst svcMask subSvcMask tlvSvcMask tlvSubSvc swp
IPM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x90ff71f3 0x021e0e81 31
RTM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800010ff 0x01930000 43
VRRP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x803330f3 0x00400000 39
L2PM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x87ff79ff 0x0e032200 45
ACL 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x867f50c3 0x000f0218 44
OSPF 0 0x00000dfa 0x00400098 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
PIM 0 0x000000f3 0x00030000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
IGMP 0 0x000e027f 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
SNMP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800302c0 0x00000002 30
EVTTERM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800002c0 0x00000000 29
MRTM 0 0x00000000 0x00000200 0x81f7103f 0x00000000 38
DSM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x80771003 0x00000000 32
LACP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x8000383f 0x00000000 35
DHCP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800000c2 0x0000c000 37
V6RAD 0 0x00000433 0x00030000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
Unidentified Client0 0x006e0002 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0
FTOS#
show switch links

c View the switch fabric backplane or internal status.
Syntax show switch links {backplane | internal}
Parameters
backplane Enter the keyword backplane to view a table with information on the link status of
the switch fabric backplane for both SFMs.
internal Enter the keyword internal to view a table with information on the internal status of
the switch fabric modules.
Defaults None
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History

Example Figure 5-56. Command Example: show switch links backplane
FTOS# show switch links backplane
Switch fabric backplane link status:
SFM0 Links Status SFM1 Links Status

LC SlotID Port0 | Port1 | Port2 | Port3 | Port4 | Port5 | Port6 |
Port7
0 up up up up down down down down

1 not present
2 not present
3 not present
4 not present
5 not present
6 up up up up down down down down
7 not present
up - Both ends of the link are up

down - Both ends of the link are down
up / down - SFM side up and LC side down
down / up - SFM side down and LC side up
FTOS#
show system (S-Series)

s Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.
Syntax show system [brief | stack-unit unit-id]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of system
information.
stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack member ID for
information on that stack member. Range: 0 to 7.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Modified output: Boot Flash field will display code level for boot code 2.8.1.1 and newer,
History
while older boot codes are displayed as "Present".
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified output: Added Master Priority field.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series switches
Usage Figure 5-57 shows the output from the show system brief command.
Figure 5-58 shows the output from the show system stack-unit command.

Example Figure 5-57. Command Example: show system brief
FTOS#show system brief
Stack MAC : 0:1:e8:d6:4:70
-- Stack Info --
Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Member not present
1 Standby online S50V S50V 7.7.1.0 52
2 Mgmt online S50V S50V 7.7.1.0 52
-- Module Info --
Unit Module No Status Module Type Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 online S50-01-10GE-2P 2
1 1 online S50-01-24G-2S 1
2 0 online S50-01-10GE-2P 2
2 1 online S50-01-24G-2S 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 up AC
1 1 absent
2 0 up AC
2 1 absent
-- Fan Status --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FTOS#

Example Figure 5-58. Command Example: show system stack-unit 2
FTOS#show system stack-unit 2

-- Unit 2 --
Unit Type : Management Unit
Status : online
Next Boot : online
Required Type : S50N - 48-port E/FE/GE (SB)
Current Type : S50N - 48-port E/FE/GE (SB)
Master priority : 0
Hardware Rev : 2.0
Num Ports : 52
Jumbo Capable : yes
POE Capable : no
Boot Flash : 2.8.1.2
Temperature : 52C
Voltage : ok
Serial Number : DL257430183
Part Number : 7590005600 Rev B
Vendor Id : 07
Country Code : 01
Piece Part ID : CN-0RVY43-28298-82B-0456
PPID Revision : 1B2
Service Tag : SVCTGCH
Expr Svc Code : 628 458 864 65
Burned In MAC : 00:01:e8:50:5c:a6
No Of MACs : 3
-- Module 0 --
Status : not present
-- Module 1 --
Status : online
Module Type : S50-01-12G-2S - 2-port 12G Stacking (SB)
Num Ports : 2
Hot Pluggable : no
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 0 up AC
2 1 absent
-- Fan Status --
Unit TrayStatus Speed Fan0 Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Fan4 Fan5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 up low up up up up up up
FTOS#

Related
show version Display the FTOS version.
Commands
show processes memory Display memory usage based on running processes.
(S-Series)
show system stack-ports Display information about the stack ports on all switches in the S-Series
stack.
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane and management plane input and output statistics of a
particular stack member.
stack-unit priority Configure the ability of an S-Series switch to become the management unit
of a stack.
show tech-support (C-Series and E-Series)

ce Display, or save to a file, a collection of data from other show commands, the information necessary
for Dell Force10 technical support to perform troubleshooting.
Syntax show tech-support [linecard 0-6 | page] | {display | except | find | grep | no-more | save}
Parameters
linecard 0-6 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the linecard number to view
information relating to a specific linecard.
page (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword page to view 24 lines of text at a time.
Press the SPACE BAR to view the next 24 lines.
Press the ENTER key to view the next line of text.
display, except, If you use the pipe command ( | ), then enter one of these keywords to filter command
find, grep, output. Refer to Chapter 2, CLI Basics for details on filtering commands.
no-more
save Enter the save keyword (following the pipe) to save the command output.
flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )
slot0: Save to local file system (slot0://filename (max 20 chars) )
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced save to file options
Version 6.5.4.0 Show clock included in display on E-Series

C-Series Figure 5-59. Command Example: show tech-support (partial) on C-Series
Example
FTOS#show tech-support page
----------------------------------- show version -------------------------------

Force10 Application Software Version: FTOS 7.5.1.0
Build Time: Tue Sep 12 15:39:17 IST 2006
Build Path: /sites/maa/work/sw//C-SERIES/SW/SRC
Force10 uptime is 18 minutes
System image file is "/work/sw/IMAGES/Chassis/C300-ODC-2/FTOS-CS.bin"
Chassis Type: C300

Control Processor: IBM PowerPC 750FX (Rev D2.2) with 1073741824 bytes of memory.
1 Route Processor/Switch Fabric Module

2 48-port GE 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ45 interface (CB)
----------------------------------- show HA information -------------------
-- RPM Status --
------------------------------------------------
RPM Slot ID: 0
RPM Redundancy Role: Primary
RPM State: Active
RPM SW Version: CS-1-1-317
Link to Peer: Down
Peer RPM: not present
-- RPM Redundancy Configuration --

------------------------------------------------
Primary RPM: rpm0
Auto Data Sync: Full
Failover Type: Hot Failover
Auto reboot RPM: Disabled
Auto failover limit: 3 times in 60 minutes
...more----

E-Series Example Figure 5-60. Command Example: show tech-support save (partial) on E-Series
FTOS#show tech-support ?
linecard Line card
page Page through output
| Pipe through a command
<cr>
FTOS#show tech-support linecard 3 | ?

display Display additional information
except Show only text that does not match a pattern
find Search for the first occurrence of a pattern
grep Show only text that matches a pattern
no-more Don't paginate output
save Save output to a file
FTOS#show tech-support linecard 3 | save ?

flash: Save to local file system (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )
slot0: Save to local file system (slot0://filename (max 20 chars) )
FTOS#show tech-support linecard 3 | save flash://LauraSave

Start saving show command report .......
FTOS#dir
Directory of flash:
1 drwx 32768 Jan 01 1980 00:00:00 +00:00 .

2 drwx 512 Aug 22 2008 14:21:13 +00:00 ..
3 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 TRACE_LOG_DIR
4 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 CRASH_LOG_DIR
5 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 NVTRACE_LOG_DIR
6 drwx 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 CORE_DUMP_DIR
7 d--- 8192 Mar 30 1919 10:31:04 +00:00 ADMIN_DIR
8 -rwx 33059550 Jul 11 2007 17:49:46 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.4.2.0.bin
9 drwx 8192 Jan 01 1980 00:18:28 +00:00 diag
10 -rwx 29555751 May 12 2008 17:29:42 +00:00 FTOS-EF-4.7.6.0.bin
11 -rwx 27959813 Apr 04 2008 15:05:12 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.5.1.0.bin
12 -rwx 4693 May 12 2008 17:24:36 +00:00 config051508
13 -rwx 29922288 Jan 11 2008 14:58:36 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.6.1.0.bin
14 -rwx 6497 Aug 22 2008 14:18:56 +00:00 startup-config
15 -rwx 5832 Jul 25 2008 11:13:36 +00:00 startup-config.bak
16 -rwx 29947358 Jul 25 2008 11:04:26 +00:00 FTOS-EF-7.6.1.2.bin
17 -rwx 10375 Aug 25 2008 10:55:18 +00:00 LauraSave

FTOS#
Usage Without the linecard or page option, the command output is continuous, use CTRL-Z to interrupt
Information the command output.
The save option works with other filtering commands. This allows you to save specific information of
a show command. The save entry should always be the last option.
For example: FTOS#show tech-support | grep regular-expression | except regular-expression | find

regular-expression | save flash://result
This display output is an accumulation of the same information that is displayed when you execute one
of the following show commands:
show cam-profile
show cam-ipv4flow
show chassis
show clock
show environment
show file-system
show interface

show inventory
show ip management-route
show ip protocols
show ip route summary
show processes cpu
show processes memory
show redundancy
show rpm
show running-conf
show sfm
show version
Related
Commands
show environment (C-Series Display system component status.
and E-Series)
(C-Series and E-Series)
show tech-support (S-Series)

s Display a collection of data from other show commands, necessary for Dell Force10technical support
to perform troubleshooting on S-Series switches.
Syntax show tech-support [stack-unit unit-id | page]
Parameters
stack-unit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit to view CPU memory usage for the stack
member designated by unit-id. Range: 0 to 7
page (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword page to view 24 lines of text at a time.
Press the SPACE BAR to view the next 24 lines.
Press the ENTER key to view the next line of text.
When using the pipe command ( | ), enter one of these keywords to filter command output.
Refer to Chapter 2, CLI Basics for details on filtering commands.
save Enter the save keyword to save the command output.
flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced save to file options
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Expanded to support S-Series switches

S-Series Figure 5-61. Command Example: show tech-support save (partial) on S-Series
Examples
FTOS#show tech-support ?
page Page through output
stack-unit Unit Number
<cr>
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 ?
<cr>
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | ?
except Show only text that does not match a pattern
find Search for the first occurrence of a pattern
grep Show only text that matches a pattern
no-more Don't paginate output
save Save output to a file
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save ?

flash: Save to local file system (flash://filename (max 20 chars) )
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save flash://LauraSave

Start saving show command report .......
FTOS#
FTOS#dir
Directory of flash:
1 drw- 16384 Jan 01 1980 00:00:00 +00:00 .

2 drwx 1536 Jul 13 1996 02:38:06 +00:00 ..
3 d--- 512 Nov 20 2007 15:46:44 +00:00 ADMIN_DIR
4 -rw- 7124 Jul 13 1996 02:33:04 +00:00 startup-config
5 -rw- 3303 Feb 14 2008 22:01:16 +00:00 startup-config.oldChassis
6 -rw- 6561 May 17 1996 04:10:54 +00:00 startup-config.bak
7 -rw- 6539 May 29 1996 10:35:42 +00:00 test.cfg
8 -rw- 276 Jul 15 1996 23:11:14 +00:00 LauraSave

FTOS#

Figure 5-62. Command Example: show tech-support (partial) on S-Series
FTOS#show tech-support stack-unit 0
----------------------------------- show version -------------------------------

Force10 Application Software Version: FTOS 7.6.1.0
Build Time: Tue Sep 12 15:39:17 IST 2006
Build Path: /sites/maa/work/sw/purushothaman/cser-latest/depot/main/Dev/Cyclone/
Force10 uptime is 18 minutes
System Type: S50N

Control Processor: MPC8451E with 255545344 bytes of memory.
32M bytes of Boot-Flash memory.
1 48-port E/FE/GE (SB)

------------------------------------ show clock -------------------------------

12:03:01.695 UTC Wed Nov 21 2007
----------------------------------- show running-config ------------------------

! Version E_MAIN4.7.5.414
! Last configuration change at Wed Nov 21 11:42:19 2007 by default
!
service timestamps log datetime
!
hostname FTOS
!
enable password 7 xxxxxxxx
!
username admin password 7 xxxxxxxx
!
enable restricted 7 xxxxxxxx
!
no ip address
shutdown
!
no ip address
shutdown
!
!------------- output truncated -----------------!
Usage Without the page or stack-unit option, the command output is continuous, use Ctrl-z to interrupt
Information the command output.
The save option works with other filtering commands. This allows you to save specific information of
a show command. The save entry should always be the last option.
For example: FTOS#show tech-support |grep regular-expression |except regular-expression | find

regular-expression | save flash://result
This display output is an accumulation of the same information that is displayed when you execute one
of the following show commands:
show cam
show clock
show environment
show file
show interfaces
show inventory

show ip protocols
show processes cpu
show redundancy
show running-conf
show version
Related
Commands show version Display the FTOS version.
show system (S-Series) Display the current switch status.
show environment (S-Series) Display system component status.
show processes memory (S-Series) Display memory usage based on running processes.
ssh-peer-rpm
ce Open an SSH connection to the peer RPM.
Syntax ssh-peer-rpm [-l username]
Parameters
-l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l followed by your user name.
Default: The user name associated with the terminal
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage This command is not available when the peer RPMs are running different FTOS releases.
Information
telnet
ces Connect through Telnet to a server. The Telnet client and server in FTOS support IPv4 and IPv6
connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router, or a connection can be initiated
from the router.
Syntax telnet {host | ip-address | ipv6-address prefix-length | vrf vrf instance name} [/
source-interface]

Parameters
host Enter the name of a server.

ip-address Enter the IPv4 address in dotted decimal format of the server.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in
prefix-length the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF Instance
name.
source-interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords /source-interface followed by the
interface information to include the interfaces IP address.
Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a
number from zero (0) to 16383.
For the Null interface, enter the keyword null followed by 0.
For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by
a number:
ExaScale.
For SONET interface types, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1
to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
History Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv6)
Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094)
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and added support for IPv6 address on E-Series only
Usage Telnet to link-local addresses is not supported.

Information
telnet-peer-rpm
ce Open a Telnet connection to the peer RPM.
Syntax telnet-peer-rpm
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage Opening a telnet connection from the Standby RPM to an Active RPM follows the authentication
Information procedure configured in the chassis. However, opening a telnet connection from the Active RPM into
the Standby RPM requires local authentication.
Configuring an ACL on a VTY line will block a Telnet session using the telnet-peer-rpm command
in the standby to active RPM direction only. Such an ACL will not block an internal Telnet session in
the active RPM to standby RPM direction.

terminal length
ces Configure the number of lines displayed on the terminal screen.
Syntax terminal length screen-length

To return to the default values, enter terminal no length.
Parameters
screen-length Enter a number of lines. Entering zero will cause the terminal to display without
pausing.
Range: 0 to 512.
Default: 24 lines.
Defaults 24 lines
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
terminal xml
ce Enable XML mode in Telnet and SSH client sessions.
Syntax terminal xml

To exit the XML mode, enter terminal no xml.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 6.5.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
Usage This command enables the XML input mode where you can either cut and paste XML requests or enter
Information the XML requests line-by-line. For more information on using the XML feature, refer to the XML
chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.

traceroute
ces View a packets path to a specific device.
Syntax traceroute {host | vrf instance | ip-address | ipv6-address}
Parameters
host Enter the name of device.
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF Instance name.
ip-address Enter the IP address of the device in dotted decimal format.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address, in the x:x:x:x::x format, to which you are testing connectivity.
Defaults Timeout = 5 seconds; Probe count = 3; 30 hops max; 40 byte packet size; UDP port = 33434
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 IPv6 trace routing available on management interface.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale with IPv6
Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale (IPv4 only)
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF.
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for S-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 address on E-Series
Usage When you enter the traceroute command without specifying an IP address (Extended Traceroute),
Information you are prompted for a target and source IP address, timeout in seconds (default is 5), a probe count
(default is 3), minimum TTL (default is 1), maximum TTL (default is 30), and port number (default is
33434). To keep the default setting for those parameters, press the ENTER key.
For the source IP address option, you may enter IPv6 global addresses only (link-local addresses are
not supported).
For IPv6, you are prompted for a minimum hop count (default is 1) and a maximum hop count (default
is 64).

Example Figure 5-63. Command Example: traceroute (IPv4)
FTOS#traceroute www.force10networks.com
Translating "www.force10networks.com"...domain server (10.11.0.1) [OK]

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tracing the route to www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3

1 10.11.199.190 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 002.000 ms
2 gwegress-sjc-02.force10networks.com (10.11.30.126) 005.000 ms 001.000 ms 001.000 ms
3 fw-sjc-01.force10networks.com (10.11.127.254) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms
4 www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms
FTOS#
Figure 5-64 contains examples of the IPv6 traceroute command with both a compressed IPv6 address
and uncompressed address.
Example Figure 5-64. Command Example: traceroute (IPv6)

FTOS#traceroute 100::1
-----------------------------------------------------------
Tracing the route to 100::1, 64 hops max, 60 byte packets
-----------------------------------------------------------
Hops Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3
1 100::1 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms
FTOS#traceroute 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tracing the route to 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b, 64 hops max, 60 byte packets
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hops Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3
1 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b
000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms
FTOS#
Related
Commands ping Test connectivity to a device.

undebug all
ces Disable all debug operations on the system.
Syntax undebug all
Command
History
upload trace-log
ce Upload trace log files from the three CPUs (cp, rp1, and rp2)
Syntax upload trace-log {cp {cmd-history | hw-trace | sw-trace}| rp1 {cmd-history | hw-trace |
sw-trace}| rp2 {cmd-history | hw-trace | sw-trace}}
Parameters
cp | rp1 | rp2 Enter the keyword cp | rp1 | rp2 to upload the trace log from that CPU.
cmd-history (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cmd-history to upload the CPUs command
history.
hw-trace (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword hw-trace to upload the CPUs hardware trace.
sw-trace (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword sw-trace to upload the CPUs software trace.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and expanded to support command history, hardware trace, and
software trace logs
Usage The log information is uploaded to flash:/TRACE_LOG_DIR

Information

virtual-ip
ce Configure a virtual IP address for the active management interface. Virtual addresses can be
configured both for IPv4 and IPv6 independently.
Syntax virtual-ip {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}
Parameters
{ipv4-address | Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::) of the active
ipv6-address} management interface.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 addressing.
History
Usage Both IPv4 and IPv6 virtual address can be configured simultaneously, but only one of each. Each time
Information this command is issued it will replace the previously configured address of the same family, IPv4 or
IPv6. The no virtual-ip command now takes an address/prefix-length argument, so that the desired
address only is removed. If no virtual-ip is entered without any specified address, then both IPv4 and
IPv6 virtual addresses are removed.
Example Figure 5-65. Command Example: virtual ip (IPv4 and IPv6)
FTOS#virtual-ip 10.11.197.99/16
FTOS#virtual-ip fdaa:bbbb:cccc:1004::60/64
write
ces Copy the current configuration to either the startup-configuration file or the terminal.
Syntax write {memory | terminal}
Parameters
memory Enter the keyword memory to copy the current running configuration to the startup
configuration file. This command is similar to the copy running-config
startup-config command.
terminal Enter the keyword terminal to copy the current running configuration to the terminal. This
command is similar to the show running-config command.
Command
History

Related
Commands
save Save configurations created in BOOT_USER mode (BLI).
Usage The write memory command saves the running-configuration to the file labeled
Information startup-configuration. When using a LOCAL CONFIG FILE other than the startup-config not named
startup-configuration (for example, you used a specific file during the boot config command) the
running-config is not saved to that file; use the copy command to save any running-configuration
changes to that local file.

164
|
Control and Monitoring
6
802.1ag
Overview
802.1ag is available only on platform: s
Commands
This chapter contains the following commands:
ccm disable
ccm transmit-interval
clear ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
database hold-time
disable
domain
ethernet cfm
ethernet cfm mep
ethernet cfm mip
mep cross-check
mep cross-check enable
mep cross-check start-delay
ping ethernet
show ethernet cfm domain
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote
show ethernet cfm mipbd
show ethernet cfm statistics
show ethernet cfm port-statistics
show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
service
traceroute cache hold-time
traceroute cache size
traceroute ethernet
802.1ag | 165
ccm disable
s Disable CCM.
Syntax ccm disable
Enter no ccm disable to enable CCM.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes ECFM DOMAIN
Command
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810.
History
ccm transmit-interval
s Configure the transmit interval (mandatory). The interval specified applies to all MEPs in the domain.
Syntax ccm transmit-interval seconds
Parameters
seconds Enter a transmit interval.
Range: 1,10,60,600
Defaults 10 seconds
Command
History
clear ethernet cfm traceroute-cache

s Delete all Link Trace Cache entries.
Syntax clear ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
Defaults None
Command
History
database hold-time
s Set the amount of time that data from a missing MEP is kept in the Continuity Check Database.
166 | 802.1ag
Syntax database hold-time minutes
Parameters
minutes Enter a hold-time.
Range: 100-65535 minutes
Defaults 100 minutes
Command
History
disable
s Disable Ethernet CFM without stopping the CFM process.
Syntax disable
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes ETHERNET CFM
Command
History
domain
s Create maintenance domain.
Syntax domain name md-level number
Parameters
name Name the maintenance domain.
md-level number Enter a maintenance domain level.
Range: 0-7
Defaults None
Command
History
ethernet cfm
s Spawn the CFM process. No CFM configuration is allowed until the CFM process is spawned.
802.1ag | 167
Syntax ethernet cfm
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
ethernet cfm mep

s Create an MEP.
Syntax ethernet cfm mep {up-mep | down-mep} domain {name | level} ma-name name mepid
mep-id
Parameters
[up-mep | down-mep] Specify whether the MEP is up or down facing.
Up-MEP: monitors the forwarding path internal to an bridge on the
customer or provider edge; on Dell Force10 systems the internal forwarding
path is effectively the switch fabric and forwarding engine.
Down-MEP: monitors the forwarding path external another bridge.
domain [name | level] Enter this keyword followed by the domain name or domain level.
ma-name name Enter this keyword followed by the name of the maintenance association.
mepid mep-id Enter an MEP ID.
Range: 1-8191
Defaults None
Command Modes INTERFACE
Command
History
ethernet cfm mip

s Create an MIP.
Syntax ethernet cfm mip domain {name | level} ma-name name
Parameters
ma-name name Enter this keyword followed by the name of the maintenance association.
Defaults None
168 | 802.1ag
Command
History
mep cross-check
s Enable cross-checking for an MEP.
Syntax mep cross-check mep-id
Parameters
mep-id Enter the MEP ID
Range: 1-8191
Defaults None
Command
History
mep cross-check enable

s Enable cross-checking.
Syntax mep cross-check enable {port | vlan-id}
Parameters
port Down service with no VLAN association.
vlan-id Enter the VLAN to apply the cross-check.
Defaults None
Command
History
mep cross-check start-delay

s Configure the amount of time the system waits for a remote MEP to come up before the cross-check
operation is started.
Syntax mep cross-check start-delay number
Parameters
start-delay number Enter a start-delay in seconds.
Range: 3-100 seconds
Defaults 3 ccms
802.1ag | 169
Command
History
ping ethernet
s Send a Loopback message.
Syntax ping ethernet domain [name l level] ma-name m a-name remote {dest-mep-id | mac-addr
mac-address} source {src-mep-id | port interface}
Parameters
name | level Enter the domain name or level.
ma-name Enter the keyword followed by the maintenance association name.
ma-name
dest-mep-id Enter the MEP ID that will be the target of the ping.
mac-addr Enter the keyword followed by the MAC address that will be the target of the ping.
mac-address
src-mep-id Enter the MEP ID that will originate the ping.
port interface Enter the keyword followed by the interface that will originate the ping.
Defaults None
Command
History
show ethernet cfm domain

s Display maintenance domain information.
Syntax show ethernet cfm domain [name | level | brief]
Parameters
name | level Enter the maintenance domain name or level.
brief Enter this keyword to display a summary output.
Defaults None
Command
History
170 | 802.1ag
Example FTOS# show ethernet cfm domain
Domain Name: customer

Level: 7
Total Service: 1
Services
MA-Name VLAN CC-Int X-CHK Status
My_MA 200 10s enabled
Domain Name: My_Domain

Level: 6
Total Service: 1
Services
MA-Name VLAN CC-Int X-CHK Status
Your_MA 100 10s enabled
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local

s Display configured MEPs and MIPs.
Syntax show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local [mep | mip]
Parameters
mep Enter this keyword to display configured MEPs.
mip Enter this keyword to display configured MIPs.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local mip

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MPID Domain Name Level Type Port CCM-Status
MA Name VLAN Dir MAC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 service1 4 MIP Gi 0/5 Disabled

My_MA 3333 DOWN 00:01:e8:0b:c6:36
0 service1 4 MIP Gi 0/5 Disabled

Your_MA 3333 UP 00:01:e8:0b:c6:36
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote

s Display the MEP Database.
Syntax show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail [active | domain {level | name} |
expired | waiting]
Parameters
active Enter this keyword to display only the MEPs in active state.
802.1ag | 171
expired Enter this keyword to view MEP entries that have expired due to
connectivity failure.
waiting Enter this keyword to display MEP entries waiting for response.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail
MAC Address: 00:01:e8:58:68:78

Domain Name: cfm0
MA Name: test0
Level: 7
VLAN: 10
MP ID: 900
Sender Chassis ID: FTOS
MEP Interface status: Up
MEP Port status: Forwarding
Receive RDI: FALSE
MP Status: Active
show ethernet cfm mipbd

s Display the MIP Database.
Syntax show ethernet cfm mipdb
Defaults None
Command
History
show ethernet cfm statistics

s Display MEP statistics.
Syntax show ethernet cfm statistics [domain {name | level} vlan-id vlan-id mpid mpid]
Parameters
domain Enter this keyword to display statistics for a particular domain.
name | level Enter the domain name or level.
vlan-id vlan-id Enter this keyword followed by a VLAN ID.
mpid mpid Enter this keyword followed by a maintenance point ID.
Defaults None
172 | 802.1ag
Command
History
Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm statistics
Domain Name: Customer

Domain Level: 7
MA Name: My_MA
MPID: 300
CCMs:
Transmitted: 1503 RcvdSeqErrors: 0
LTRs:
Unexpected Rcvd: 0
LBRs:
Received: 0 Rcvd Out Of Order: 0
Received Bad MSDU: 0
Transmitted: 0
show ethernet cfm port-statistics

s Display CFM statistics by port.
Syntax show ethernet cfm port-statistics [interface type slot/port]
Parameters
interface type Enter this keyword followed by the interface type.
slot/port Enter the slot and port numbers for the port.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm port-statistics interface gigabitethernet 0/5

Port statistics for port: Gi 0/5
==================================
RX Statistics
=============
Total CFM Pkts 75394 CCM Pkts 75394
LBM Pkts 0 LTM Pkts 0
LBR Pkts 0 LTR Pkts 0
Bad CFM Pkts 0 CFM Pkts Discarded 0
CFM Pkts forwarded 102417
TX Statistics
=============
Total CFM Pkts 10303 CCM Pkts 0
LBM Pkts 0 LTM Pkts 3
LBR Pkts 0 LTR Pkts 0
show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache

s Display the Link Trace Cache.
802.1ag | 173
Syntax show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS#show ethernet cfm traceroute-cache
Traceroute to 00:01:e8:52:4a:f8 on Domain Customer2, Level 7, MA name Test2 with VLAN

2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hops Host IngressMAC Ingr Action Relay Action
Next Host Egress MAC Egress Action FWD Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 00:00:00:01:e8:53:4a:f8 00:01:e8:52:4a:f8 IngOK RlyHit

00:00:00:01:e8:52:4a:f8 Terminal MEP
service
s Create maintenance association.
Syntax service name vlan vlan-id
Parameters
name Enter a maintenance association name.
vlan vlan-id Enter this keyword followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1-4094
Defaults None
Command
History
traceroute cache hold-time

s Set the amount of time a trace result is cached.
Syntax traceroute cache hold-time minutes
Parameters
minutes Enter a hold-time.
Range: 10-65535 minutes
Defaults 100 minutes
174 | 802.1ag
Command
History
traceroute cache size

s Set the size of the Link Trace Cache.
Syntax traceroute cache size entries
Parameters
entries Enter the number of entries the Link Trace Cache can hold.
Range: 1 - 4095 entries
Defaults 100 entries
Command
History
traceroute ethernet
s Send a Linktrace message to an MEP.
Syntax traceroute ethernet domain [name | level] ma-name ma-name remote {mep-id mep-id | mac-addr
mac-address}
Parameters
domain name | Enter the keyword followed by the domain name or level.
level
ma-name ma-name Enter the keyword followed by the maintenance association name.
mepid mep-id Enter the MEP ID that will be the trace target.
mac-addr Enter the MAC address of the trace target.
mac-address
Defaults None
Command
History
802.1ag | 175
176
|
802.1ag
7
802.3ah
Overview
802.3ah is available only on platform: s
Commands
clear ethernet oam statistics

ethernet oam (enable/disable)
ethernet oam (parameters)
ethernet oam event-log size
ethernet oam link-monitor frame
ethernet oam link-monitor frame-seconds
ethernet oam link-monitor high-threshold action
ethernet oam link-monitor on
ethernet oam link-monitor supported
ethernet oam link-monitor symbol-period
ethernet oam mode
ethernet oam remote-failure
ethernet oam remote-loopback
ethernet oam remote-loopback (interface)
ethernet oam timeout
show ethernet oam discovery
show ethernet oam status
show ethernet oam statistics
show ethernet oam summary
802.3ah | 177
clear ethernet oam statistics
s Clear Link Layer OAM statistics.
Syntax clear ethernet oam statistics interface interface
Parameters
interface Enter the interface for which you want to clear statistics, for example gig 0/1.
Parameters None
Defaults None
Command
History
ethernet oam (enable/disable)

s Enable Ethernet OAM.
Syntax ethernet oam
Parameters None
Defaults Disabled
Command Mode INTERFACE
Command
History
ethernet oam (parameters)

s Specify a the maximum or minimum number of OAMPDUs to be sent per second.
Syntax ethernet oam {max-rate value | min-rate value}
Parameters
max-rate value | Enter a maximum or minimum rate in OAMPDU/second.
min-rate value Range: 1-10
Defaults 10
Command
History
178 | 802.3ah
ethernet oam event-log size
s Specify the size of the event log.
Syntax ethernet oam event-log size entries
Parameters
entries Enter the number of entries for the log size.
Range: 0 to 200.
Default: 50.
Defaults 50
Command Mode CONFIGURATION
Command
History
ethernet oam link-monitor frame

s Set the frame error thresholds and window.
Syntax ethernet oam link-monitor frame threshold {high {frames | none} | low frames
| window frames}
Parameters
high {frames | none} Specify the high threshold value for frame errors, or disable the high
threshold.
Range: 1-65535
Default: None
low frames Specify the low threshold for frame errors.
Range: 0-65535
Default: 1
window frames Specify the time period for frame errors per millisecond condition.
Range: 10-600 milliseconds
Default: 100 milliseconds
Defaults As above
Command
History
ethernet oam link-monitor frame-seconds

s Set the frame-error seconds per time period thresholds and window.
Syntax ethernet oam link-monitor frame-seconds threshold {high {milliseconds | none} | low milliseconds
| window milliseconds}
802.3ah | 179
Parameters
high {milliseconds | none} Specify the high threshold value for frame error seconds per time
period, or disable the high threshold.
Range: 1-900
Default: None
low milliseconds Specify the low threshold for frame error seconds per time period.
Range: 1-900
Default: 1
window milliseconds Specify the time period for error second per time period condition.
Range: 100-900, in multiples of 100
Defaults As above
Command
History
ethernet oam link-monitor high-threshold action

s Disable an interface when the high threshold is exceeded for any of the monitored error conditions.
Syntax ethernet oam link-monitor high-threshold action error-disable-interface
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
ethernet oam link-monitor on

s Start link performance monitoring on an interface. To stop link monitoring, enter the no ethernet oam
link-monitor on command.
Link monitoring is started on an interface by default when you enable Ethernet OAM with the ethernet
oam command.
Syntax ethernet oam link-monitor on
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
180 | 802.3ah
ethernet oam link-monitor supported
s Enable support for link performance monitoring on an interface. To disable support for link
monitoring, enter the no ethernet oam link-monitor supported command.
Support for link monitoring is enabled on an interface by default when you enable Ethernet OAM with
the ethernet oam command.
Syntax ethernet oam link-monitor supported
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
ethernet oam link-monitor symbol-period

s Set the symbol error thresholds and window.
Syntax ethernet oam link-monitor symbol-period threshold {high {symbols | none} | low symbols
| window symbols}
Parameters
high {symbols | none} Specify the high threshold value for symbol errors, or disable the high
threshold.
Range: 1-65535
Default: None
low symbols Specify the low threshold for symbol errors.
Range: 0-65535
Default: 10
window symbols Specify the time period for symbol errors per second condition.
Range: 1-65535 (times 1,000,000 symbols)
Default: 10 (10,000,000 symbols)
Defaults As above
Command
History
ethernet oam mode

s Set the transmission mode to active or passive.
Syntax ethernet oam mode {active | passive}
Parameters
active | Choose either active or passive mode for the interface.
passive
802.3ah | 181
Defaults Active
Command
History
ethernet oam remote-failure

s Block or disable an interface when a particular critical link event occurs.
Syntax ethernet oam remote-failure {critical-event | dying-gasp | link-fault} action {error-block-interface

| error-disable-interface}
Parameters
critical-event An unspecified critical event occurred.
dying-gasp An unrecoverable local failure condition occurred.
link-fault A fault occurred in the receive direction of the local peer.
error-block-interface Block the interface if the specified fault occurs.
error-disable-interface Disable the interface if the specified fault occurs.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
ethernet oam remote-loopback

s Start or stop loopback operation on a local interface with a remote peer.
Syntax ethernet oam remote-loopback {start | stop} interface interface
Parameters
start | stop Start or stop a loopback operation with a remote peer.
interface interface Specify the interface on which remote-loopback starts/stops, for example
gigabitethernet 0/1.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
182 | 802.3ah
ethernet oam remote-loopback (interface)
s Enable support for OAM loopback on an interface and configure a timeout value.
Syntax ethernet oam remote-loopback {supported | timeout seconds}
Parameters
supported Start or stop a loopback operation on a peer.
timeout seconds Specify the number of seconds that the local peer waits to receive a returned frame
before considering a remote peer to be non-operational. Valid values are from 1 to
10.
Defaults None
Command
History
ethernet oam timeout

s Specify the amount of time that the system waits to receive an OAMPDU from a peer before
considering it non-operational.
Syntax ethernet oam timeout value
Parameters
value Enter a timeout value in seconds.
Range: 2-30 seconds
Defaults 5 seconds
Command
History
show ethernet oam discovery

s Display the OAM discovery status.
Syntax show ethernet oam discovery interface interface
Parameters
interface Enter the interface for which you want to display status, for example gig 0/1.
Defaults None
Command
History Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on S-Series
802.3ah | 183
Example FTOS# show ethernet oam discovery interface <interface-name>
Local client
__________
Administrative configurations:
Mode:active
Unidirection:not supported
Link monitor:supported (on)
Remote loopback:not supported
MIB retrieval:not supported
Mtu size:1500
Operational status:
Port status:operational
Loopback status:no loopback
PDU permission:any
PDU revision:1
Remote client
___________
MAC address:0030.88fe.87de
Vendor(OUI):0x00 0x00 0x0C
Administrative configurations:
Mode:active
Unidirection:not supported
Link monitor:supported
Remote loopback:not supported
MIB retrieval:not supported
Mtu size:1500
show ethernet oam statistics

s Display Link Layer OAM statistics per interface.
Syntax show ethernet oam statistics interface interface
Parameters
interface Enter the interface for which you want to display statistics, for example gig 0/1.
Defaults None
Command
History
184 | 802.3ah
Example FTOS# show ethernet oam statistics interface <interface-name>
<interface-name>
Counters:
_________
Information OAMPDU Tx: 3439489
Information OAMPDU Rx: 9489
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Tx: 0
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU x: 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Tx: 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Rx: 0
Loopback Control OAMPDU Tx: 0
Loopback Control OAMPDU Rx: 2
Variable Request OAMPDU Tx: 0
Variable Request OAMPDU Rx: 0
Variable Response OAMPDU Tx: 0
Variable Response OAMPDU Rx: 0
Force10 OAMPDU Tx:: 10
Force10 OAMPDU Rx:: 21
Unsupported OAMPDU Tx:: 0
Unsupported OAMPDU Rx:0
Frame Lost due to OAM:0
Local Faults:
0 Link Fault Records
0 Dying Gasp Records
Total dying Gasps:: 2
Time Stamp: 00:40:23
Total dying Gasps:: 1
Time Stamp: 00:41:23
0 Critical Event Records
Remote Faults:
_________
0 Link Fault Records
0 Dying Gasp Records
0 Critical Event Records
Local Event Logs:

_____________
0 Errored Symbol Period Records
0 Errored Frame Records
0 Errored Frame Period Records
0 Errored Frame Second Records
Remote Event Logs:

_____________
0 Errored Symbol Period Records
0 Errored Frame Records
0 Errored Frame Period Records
0 Errored Frame Second Records
802.3ah | 185
show ethernet oam status
s Display Link Layer OAM status per interface.
Syntax show ethernet oam status interface interface
Parameters
interface Enter the interface for which you want to display status, for example gig 0/1.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS# show ethernet oam status interface <interface-name>
Output Format :
<interface-name>
General
______
Mode:active
PDU max rate:10 packets per second
PDU min rate:1 packet per second
Link timeout:5 seconds
High threshold action:no action
Link Monitoring
____________
Status supported (on)
Symbol Period Error

Window:1 million symbols
Low threshold:1 error symbol(s)
High threshold:none
Frame Error
Window:1 million symbols
High threshold:none
Frame Period Error
Window:1 x 100,000 frames
High threshold:none
Frame Seconds Error
Window:600 x 100 milliseconds
Low threshold:1 error second(s)
High threshold:none
186 | 802.3ah
show ethernet oam summary
s Display Link Layer OAM sessions.
Syntax show ethernet oam summary
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS# show ethernet oam summary
Output format :
Symbols:* - Master Loopback State, # - Slave Loopback State

Capability codes:L - Link Monitor, R - Remote Loopback
U - Unidirection,V - Variable Retrieval
LocalRemote
InterfaceMAC AddressOUIModeCapability
Gi6/1/10023.84ac.b8000000DactiveL R
802.3ah | 187
188
|
802.3ah
8
802.1X
The 802.1X Port Authentication commands are:
debug dot1x
dot1x auth-type mab-only
dot1x authentication (Interface)
dot1x auth-fail-vlan
dot1x auth-server
dot1x guest-vlan
dot1x host-mode
dot1x mac-auth-bypass
dot1x max-eap-req
dot1x max-supplicants
dot1x port-control
dot1x quiet-period
dot1x reauthentication
dot1x reauth-max
dot1x server-timeout
dot1x supplicant-timeout
dot1x tx-period
show dot1x cos-mapping interface
show dot1x interface
An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the
authentication, only EAPOL (Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN) traffic is allowed through
the port to which a client is connected. Once authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through
the port.
FTOS supports RADIUS and Active Directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.

FTOS limits network access for certain users by using VLAN assignments. 802.1X with VLAN
assignment has these characteristics when configured on the switch and the RADIUS server.
802.1X is supported on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series.
802.1X is not supported on the LAG or the channel members of a LAG.
If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1X authorization is disabled, the port is
configured in its access VLAN after successful authentication.
If 802.1X authorization is enabled but the VLAN information from the RADIUS server is not
valid, the port returns to the unauthorized state and remains in the configured access VLAN. This
prevents ports from appearing unexpectedly in an inappropriate VLAN due to a configuration
error. Configuration errors create an entry in Syslog.
802.1X | 189
If 802.1X authorization is enabled and all information from the RADIUS server is valid, the port is
placed in the specified VLAN after authentication.

If port security is enabled on an 802.1X port with VLAN assignment, the port is placed in the
RADIUS server assigned VLAN.
If 802.1X is disabled on the port, it is returned to the configured access VLAN.
When the port is in the force authorized, force unauthorized, or shutdown state, it is placed in the
configured access VLAN.
If an 802.1X port is authenticated and put in the RADIUS server assigned VLAN, any change to
the port access VLAN configuration will not take effect.
The 802.1X with VLAN assignment feature is not supported on trunk ports, dynamic ports, or
with dynamic-access port assignment through a VLAN membership.
debug dot1x
cs Display 802.1X debugging information.
Syntax debug dot1x [all | errors | packets | state-machine] [interface interface]
Parameters
all Enable all 802.1X debug messages.
errors Display information about all 802.1X errors.
packets Display information about all 802.1X packets.
state-machine Display information about all 802.1X packets.
interface interface Restricts the debugging information to an interface.
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series
History
190 | 802.1X
dot1x auth-type mab-only
cs Use only the host MAC address to authenticate a device with MAC authentication bypass (MAB).
Syntax dot1x auth-type mab-only
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series
History
Usage The prerequisites for enabling MAB-only authentication on a port are:

Information
802.1X authentication must be enabled globally on the switch and on the port (dot1x
authentication command).
MAC authentication bypass must be enabled on the port (dot1x mac-auth-bypass command).
In MAB-only authentication mode, a port authenticates using the host MAC address even though
802.1xauthentication is enabled. If the MAB-only authentication fails, the host is placed in the guest
VLAN (if configured).
To disable MAB-only authentication on a port, enter the no dot1x auth-type mab-only command.
Related
Commands
dot1x authentication (Configuration)

ces Enable dot1x globally; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.
Syntax dot1x authentication

To disable dot1x on an globally, use the no dot1x authentication command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
Commands
802.1X | 191
ces Enable dot1x on an interface; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.

To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
Commands
ces Configure a authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication.
Syntax dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts number]

To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id
[max-attempts number] command.
Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier.
Range: 1 to 4094
max-attempts number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-attempts followed number of
attempts desired before authentication fails.
Range: 1 to 5
Default: 3
Defaults 3 attempts
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port)
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series and S-Series
History
Usage If the host responds to 802.1X with an incorrect login/password, the login fails. The switch will
Information attempt to authenticate again until the maximum attempts configured is reached. If the authentication
fails after all allowed attempts, the interface is moved to the authentication failed VLAN.
Once the authentication VLAN is assigned, the port-state must be toggled to restart authentication.
Authentication will occur at the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).
Related
dot1x port-control
Commands
dot1x guest-vlan
192 | 802.1X
dot1x auth-server
ces Configure the authentication server to RADIUS.
Syntax dot1x auth-server radius
Command
History
dot1x guest-vlan
ces Configure a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable.
Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id

To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series
History
Usage 802.1X authentication is enabled when an interface is connected to the switch. If the host fails to
Information respond within a designated amount of time, the authenticator places the port in the guest VLAN.
If a device does not respond within 30 seconds, it is assumed that the device is not 802.1X capable.
Therefore, a guest VLAN is allocated to the interface and authentication, for the device, will occur at
the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).
If the host fails authentication for the designated amount of times, the authenticator places the port in
authentication failed VLAN (dot1x auth-fail-vlan).
Note: Layer 3 portion of guest VLAN and authentication fail VLANs can be created
regardless if the VLAN is assigned to an interface or not. Once an interface is assigned a guest
VLAN (which has an IP address), then routing through the guest VLAN is the same as any
other traffic. However, interface may join/leave a VLAN dynamically.
Related
Commands
802.1X | 193
dot1x host-mode
c e ts Enable single-host or multi-host authentication.
Syntax dot1x host-mode {single-host | multi-host | multi-auth}
Parameters
single-host Enable single-host authentication.
multi-host Enable multi-host authentication.
multi-auth Enable multi-supplicant authentication.
Defaults single-host
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 The multi-auth option was introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
History
Version 8.3.2.0 The single-host and multi-host options were introduced on the C-Series,
E-Series TeraScale, and S-Series
Usage Single-host mode authenticates only one host per authenticator port, and drops all other traffic on
Information the port.
Multi-host mode authenticates the first host to respond to an Identity Request, and then permits all
other traffic on the port.
Multi-supplicant mode authenticates every device attempting to connect to the network on through
the authenticator port.
Related
Commands
cs Enable MAC authentication bypass. If 802.1X times out because the host did not respond to the
Identity Request frame, FTOS attempts to authenticate the host based on its MAC address.
Syntax dot1x mac-auth-bypass
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage To disable MAC authentication bypass on a port, enter the no dot1x mac-auth-bypass command.
Information
Related
dot1x auth-type
Commands
mab-only
194 | 802.1X
dot1x max-eap-req
ces Configure the maximum number of times an EAP (Extensive Authentication Protocol) request is
transmitted before the session times out.
Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command.
Parameters
number Enter the number of times an EAP request is transmitted before a session time-out.
Range: 1 to 10
Default: 2
Defaults 2
Command
History
dot1x max-supplicants
c e ts Restrict the number of supplicants that can be authenticated and permitted to access the network
through the port. This configuration is only takes effect in multi-auth mode.
Syntax dot1x max-supplicants number
Parameters
number Enter the number of supplicants that can be authenticated on a single port in
multi-auth mode.
Range: 1-128
Default: 128
Defaults 128 hosts can be authenticated on a single authenticator port.
Command
History
Related
dot1x host-mode
Commands
dot1x port-control
ces Enable port control on an interface.
Syntax dot1x port-control {force-authorized | auto | force-unauthorized}
802.1X | 195
Parameters
force-authorized Enter the keyword force-authorized to forcibly authorize a port.

auto Enter the keyword auto to authorize a port based on the 802.1X operation
result.
force-unauthorized Enter the keyword force-unauthorized to forcibly de-authorize a port.
Command
History
Usage The authenticator performs authentication only when port-control is set to auto.
Information
dot1x quiet-period
ces Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a
client.
Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds

To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
ces Enable periodic re-authentication of the client.
Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds]

To disable periodic re-authentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command.
196 | 802.1X
Parameters
interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval followed by the interval time, in seconds,
after which re-authentication will be initiated.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 3600 (1 hour)
Defaults 3600 seconds (1 hour)
Command
History
dot1x reauth-max
ces Configure the maximum number of times a port can re-authenticate before the port becomes
unauthorized.
Syntax dot1x reauth-max number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command.
Parameters
number Enter the permitted number of re-authentications.
Range: 1 - 10
Default: 2
Defaults 2
Command
History
802.1X | 197
ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time out.
Syntax dot1x server-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x server-timeout command.
Parameters
seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds.
Range: 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant. Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
Usage When you configure the dot1x server-timeout value, you must take into account the communication
Information medium used to communicate with an authentication server and the number of RADIUS servers
configured. Ideally, the dot1x server-timeout value (in seconds) is based on the configured
RADIUS-server timeout and retransmit values and calculated according to the following formula:
dot1x server-timeout seconds > (radius-server retransmit seconds + 1) * radius-server timeout seconds
Where the default values are as follows: dot1x server-timeout (30 seconds), radius-server retransmit
(3 seconds), and radius-server timeout (5 seconds).
For example:
FTOS(conf)#radius-server host 10.11.197.105 timeout 6
FTOS(conf)#radius-server host 10.11.197.105 retransmit 4
FTOS(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 2/23
FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/23)#dot1x server-timeout 40
198 | 802.1X
ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time out.
Syntax dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x supplicant-timeout command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant.
Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
dot1x tx-period
ces Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs are transmitted by the Authenticator PAE.
Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
802.1X | 199
show dot1x cos-mapping interface
cs Display the CoS priority-mapping table provided by the RADIUS server and applied to authenticated
supplicants on an 802.1X-enabled port.
Syntax show dot1x cos-mapping interface interface [mac-address mac-address]
Parameters
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the
For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword
mac-address (Optional) MAC address of an 802.1X-authenticated supplicant.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC privilege
Command
History
Usage Enter a supplicants MAC address using the mac-address option to display CoS mapping
Information information only for the specified supplicant.
You can display the CoS mapping information applied to traffic from authenticated supplicants on
802.1X-enabled ports that are in single-host, multi-host, and multi-supplicant authentication modes.
Example Figure 8-1. show dot1x cos-mapping interface Command Example

FTOS#show dot1x cos-mapping interface gigabitehternet 2/21
802.1p CoS re-map table on Gi 2/21:

----------------------------------
Dot1p Remapped Dot1p
0 7
1 6
2 5
3 4
4 3
5 2
6 1
7 0
FTOS#show dot1x cos-mapping int g 2/21 mac-address 00:00:01:00:07:00
802.1p CoS re-map table on Gi 2/21:

----------------------------------
802.1p CoS re-map table for Supplicant: 00:00:01:00:07:00
Dot1p Remapped Dot1p

0 7
1 6
2 5
3 4
4 3
5 2
6 1
7 0
200 | 802.1X
ces Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface.
Syntax show dot1x interface interface [mac-address mac-address]
Parameters
mac-address (Optional) MAC address of a supplicant.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC privilege
Command
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced mac-address option on the C-Series and S-Series
Usage C-Series and S-Series only: Enter a supplicants MAC address using the mac-address option to
Information display information only on the 802.1X-enabled port to which the supplicant is connected.
If 802.1X multi-supplicant authentication is enabled on a port, additional 802.1X configuration details

(port authentication status, untagged VLAN ID, authentication PAE state, and backend state) are
displayed for each supplicant as shown in Figure 8-4.
Example Figure 8-2. show dot1x interface Command Example

FTOS#show dot1x int Gi 2/32
802.1x information on Gi 2/32:

-----------------------------
Dot1x Status: Enable
Port Control: AUTO
Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED
Re-Authentication: Disable
Untagged VLAN id: None
Guest VLAN: Enable
Guest VLAN id: 10
Auth-Fail VLAN: Enable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: 11
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: 3
Tx Period: 30 seconds
Quiet Period: 60 seconds
ReAuth Max: 2
Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds
Server Timeout: 30 seconds
Re-Auth Interval: 3600 seconds
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST
Auth PAE State: Initialize

Backend State: Initialize
FTOS#
802.1X | 201
Figure 8-3. show dot1x interface mac-address Command Example
FTOS#show dot1x interface gig 2/21 mac-address 00:00:01:00:07:00

-----------------------------
Port Control: AUTO
Guest VLAN: Disable
Guest VLAN id: NONE
Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE
Mac-Auth-Bypass: Enable
Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Disable
ReAuth Max: 1
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Host Mode: MULTI_AUTH
Max-Supplicants: 128
Port status and State info for Supplicant: 00:00:01:00:07:00
Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED(MAC-AUTH-BYPASS)

Untagged VLAN id: 4094
Auth PAE State: Authenticated
Backend State: Idle
FTOS#
202 | 802.1X
Figure 8-4. show dot1x interface (with Multi-Supplicant Authentication enabled)
Example
FTOS#show dot1x interface g 0/21

-----------------------------
Port Control: AUTO
Guest VLAN: Enable
Guest VLAN id: 100
Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE
Mac-Auth-Bypass: Disable
Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Disable
ReAuth Max: 3
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Host Mode: MULTI_AUTH
Max-Supplicants: 128
Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED

Backend State: Idle
Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED

Backend State: Idle
Port Auth Status: AUTHORIZED(GUEST-VLAN)

Backend State: Idle
802.1X | 203
204
|
802.1X
9
Access Control Lists (ACL)
Overview
Access Control Lists (ACLs) are supported on platforms c e s
FTOS supports the following types of Access Control List (ACL), IP prefix list, and route map:
Commands Common to all ACL Types
Common IP ACL Commands
Standard IP ACL Commands
Extended IP ACL Commands
Common MAC Access List Commands
Standard MAC ACL Commands
Extended MAC ACL Commands
IP Prefix List Commands
Route Map Commands
AS-Path Commands
IP Community List Commands
Note: For ACL commands used in the Trace function, see the section Trace List Commands
in the chapter Security.
Note: For IPv6 ACL commands, see Chapter 25, IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs).
Commands Common to all ACL Types

The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode-specific options.
Some commands may use similar names, but require different options to support the different ACL
types (for example, deny).
description
remark
show config
Access Control Lists (ACL) | 205

description
ces Configure a short text string describing the ACL.
Syntax description text
Parameters
text Enter a text string up to 80 characters long.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST

CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD
CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED
Command
History
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced on E-Series
remark
ces Enter a description for an ACL entry.
Syntax remark [remark-number] [description]
Parameters
remark-number Enter the remark number. Note that the same sequence number can be used
for the remark and an ACL rule.
Range: 0 to 4294967290
description Enter a description of up to 80 characters.

Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for C-Series
pre-Version 6.4.1.0 Introduced for E-Series
Usage The remark command is available in each ACL mode. You can configure up to 4294967290 remarks
Information in a given ACL.
206 | Access Control Lists (ACL)

The following example shows the use of the remark command twice within the
CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST mode. Here, the same sequence number was used
for the remark and for an associated ACL rule. The remark will precede the rule in the running-config
because it is assumed that the remark is for the rule with the same sequence number, or the group of
rules that follow the remark.
Example Figure 9-1. Command Example: remark

FTOS(config-std-nacl)#remark 10 Deny rest of the traffic
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc.
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#show config
!
ip access-list standard test
remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc.
seq 5 permit 1.1.1.0/24
remark 10 Deny rest of the traffic
seq 10 Deny any
Related
show config Display the current ACL configuration.
Commands
show config
ces Display the current ACL configuration.
Syntax show config

Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Support added for C-Series
Example Figure 9-2. Command Example: show config

FTOS(config-ext-nacl)#show conf
!
ip access-list extended patches
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)#
Common IP ACL Commands

The following commands are available within both IP ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not
have mode-specific options. When an access-list (ACL) is created without any rule and then applied to
an interface, ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit.

c and s platforms support Ingress IP ACLs only.
The following commands allow you to clear, display, and assign IP ACL configurations.
access-class
clear counters ip access-group
ip access-group
show ip access-lists
show ip accounting access-list
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types.
access-class
ces Apply a standard ACL to a terminal line.
Syntax access-class access-list-name
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured Standard ACL, up to 140 characters.
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up
to 16 characters long.
pre-Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced
clear counters ip access-group

ces
Erase all counters maintained for access lists.
Syntax clear counters ip access-group [access-list-name]
Parameters
access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured access-list, up to 140 characters.
Command
History

ip access-group
ces Assign an IP access list (IP ACL) to an interface.
Syntax ip access-group access-list-name {in | out} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters.
in Enter the keyword in to apply the ACL to incoming traffic.
out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic.
Note: Available only on 12-port 1-Gigabit Ethernet FLEX line card. Refer to your
line card documentation for specifications. Not available on S-Series.
implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action
of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does not
match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the ID numbers of the
VLANs.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094)
Command
History
Usage You can assign one ACL (standard or extended ACL) to an interface.
Information
Note: This command is supported on the loopback interfaces of EE3, and EF series RPMs. It
is not supported on loopback interfaces ED series RPM, or on C-Series or S-Series loopback
interfaces.
When you apply an ACL that filters IGMP traffic, all IGMP traffic is redirected to the CPUs and
soft-forwarded, if required, in the following scenarios:
on a Layer 2 interface - if a Layer 3 ACL is applied to the interface.
on a Layer 3 port or on a Layer 2/Layer 3 port
Related
ip access-list standard Configure a standard ACL.
Commands
ip access-list extended Configure an extended ACL.

show ip access-lists
ces Display all of the IP ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface,
and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed.
Syntax show ip access-lists [access-list-name] [interface interface] [in |out]
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the one of the following keywords
and slot/port or number information:
For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed
by a number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 - 512 for ExaScale.
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
in | out Identify whether ACL is applied on ingress or egress side.
Command
\

History
show ip accounting access-list

ces Display the IP access-lists created on the switch and the sequence of filters.
Syntax show ip accounting {access-list access-list-name | cam_count} interface interface
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of the ACL to be displayed.
cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type and slot/port or
number information:
by a number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 to 512
for ExaScale.
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 9-3. Command Example: show ip accounting access-lists

FTOS#show ip accounting access FILTER1 interface gig 1/6
Extended IP access list FILTER1
seq 5 deny ip any 191.1.0.0 /16 count (0x00 packets)
seq 10 deny ip any 191.2.0.0 /16 order 4
seq 15 deny ip any 191.3.0.0 /16
seq 20 deny ip any 191.4.0.0 /16
seq 25 deny ip any 191.5.0.0 /16
Table 9-1 defines the information in Figure 9-3.
Table 9-1. show ip accounting access-lists Command Example Field
Field Description
Extended IP... Displays the name of the IP ACL.
seq 5... Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the
filter, the number of packets or bytes processed by the filter is displayed at
the end of the line.
order 4 Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry.
Standard IP ACL Commands

When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an
implicit permit.
The commands needed to configure a Standard IP ACL are:

deny
ip access-list standard
permit
resequence access-list
resequence prefix-list ipv4
seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands.

deny
ces Configure a filter to drop packets with a certain IP address.
Syntax deny {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order]
[monitor] [fragments]
To remove this filter, you have two choices:

Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filters sequence number
or
Use the no deny {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.
Parameters
source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the
packet was sent.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask,
when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous
(discontiguous).
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address
only.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the
log.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order of priority for
the ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order
numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by
default(255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic
that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be
applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section Flow-based
Monitoring in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Add DSCP value for ACL matching.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs.
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the Quality of
Information Service chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.
When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets details.
The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See the Chapter 44, Port
Monitoring.
The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte
options, only bytes are incremented.
Note: When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously, byte counters
may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.
Related
ip access-list standard Configure a standard ACL.
Commands
permit Configure a permit filter.
ip access-list standard
ces Create a standard IP access list (IP ACL) to filter based on IP address.
Syntax ip access-list standard access-list-name
Parameters
access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the ACL name.
Defaults All IP access lists contain an implicit deny any, that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.
Usage FTOS supports one ingress and one egress IP ACL per interface.
Information
Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.
The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.

Example Figure 9-4. Command Example: ip access-list standard
FTOS(conf)#ip access-list standard TestList

Related
ip access-list extended Create an extended access list.
Commands
show config Display the current configuration.
permit
ces Configure a filter to permit packets from a specific source IP address to leave the switch.
Syntax permit {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order]
[monitor]

or
Use the no permit {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.
Parameters
source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the
packet was sent.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask,
when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address
or hostname.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dscp to match to the IP DSCP values.
log.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL
entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower
order numbers have a higher priority)
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule
will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section
Flow-based Monitoring in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Configuration Guide.

Command
History
Version 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.
packets details.
The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 44, Port
Monitoring.
Related
deny Assign a IP ACL filter to deny IP packets.
Commands
ip access-list standard Create a standard ACL.
ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing access-list.
Syntax resequence access-list {ipv4 | ipv6 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum

Step-to-Increment}
Parameters
ipv4 | ipv6 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4, or mac to identify the access list type to
resequence.
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list.
StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence.
Range: 0 - 4294967290
Step-to-Increment Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Range: 1 - 4294967290
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
are up to 16 characters long.
Usage When all sequence numbers have been exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning new sequence
Information number to entries of an existing access-list.
Related
resequence prefix-list ipv4 Resequence a prefix list
Commands

ces Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing prefix list.
Syntax resequence prefix-list ipv4 {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-increment}
Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters long.
Range: 0 65535
Range: 1 65535
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Information number to entries of an existing prefix list.
Related
resequence access-list Resequence an access-list
Commands

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count
[byte] | log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]
Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this
condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this
criteria.
source Enter a IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the
packet was received.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The
mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or
non-contiguous.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP
address or hostname.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the
filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in
the log.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order for the ACL
entry.
default (255).
Command
History

Usage The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. See Chapter 44, Port
Information Monitoring.
The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies:
The seq sequence-number is applicable only in an ACL group.
The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via QoS policy
framework.
The order option takes precedence over the seq sequence-number.
If sequence-number is not configured, then rules with the same order value are ordered
according to their configuration order.
If the sequence-number is configured, then the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for
rules with the same order.
packets details.
Related
deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to forward packets.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the
filter.
Extended IP ACL Commands

When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an
implicit permit.
The following commands configure extended IP ACLs, which in addition to the IP address also
examine the packets protocol type.
deny
deny arp
deny ether-type
deny icmp
deny tcp
deny udp
ip access-list extended
permit
permit arp

permit ether-type
permit icmp
permit tcp
permit udp
seq arp
seq ether-type
seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands.
deny
ces Configure a filter that drops IP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

or
Use the no deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address}
{destination mask | any | host ip-address} command.
Parameters
ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword ip
specifies that the access list will deny all IP protocols.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to deny based on the protocol identified in the IP
protocol header.
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when
specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
address.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
filter.
the log.

order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the
ACL entry.
default (255).
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST
Command
History
packets details.
Monitoring.
Related
deny tcp Assign a filter to deny TCP packets.
Commands
deny udp Assign a filter to deny UDP packets.
ip access-list extended Create an extended ACL.

deny arp
e Configure an egress filter that drops ARP packets on egress ACL supported line cards (see your line
card documentation).
Syntax deny arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {ip-address | any |
opcode code-number} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
To remove this filter, use one of the following:

or
Use the no deny arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id
{ip-address | any | opcode code-number} command.
Parameters
destination-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-address-mask For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the
interface.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic
associated with a specific VLAN.
To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) as the target IP
address of the ARP.
opcode code-number Enter the keyword opcode followed by the number of the ARP opcode.
Range: 1 to 23.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by
the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the
filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the
information kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for
the ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest;
lower order numbers have a higher priority)
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest
order by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing
the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating
the rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the
section Flow-based Monitoring in the Port Monitoring chapter of the
FTOS Configuration Guide.

Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Added monitor option
Monitoring.
packets details.
You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP (Layer 3) filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether-type
(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs (ARP and Ether-type) to Layer 2 interfaces only.
deny ether-type
e Configure an egress filter that drops specified types of Ethernet packets on egress ACL supported line
cards (see your line card documentation).
Syntax deny ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any}

vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} [count [byte] | log] [order]
[monitor]

or
Use the no deny ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address
mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any}
command.
Parameters
protocol-type-number Enter a number from 600 to FFFF as the specific Ethernet type traffic to
drop.
match.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the
interface.

vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic
associated with a specific VLAN.
source-mac-address Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
match.
the filter.
filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the
information kept in an ACL log file.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for
the ACL entry.
Range: 0-254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest;
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest
order by default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing
the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating
the rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the
section Flow-based Monitoring in the Port Monitoring chapter of the
Command
History
packets details.
Monitoring.

(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs (ARP and Ether-type) to Layer 2 interfaces only.
deny icmp
e Configure a filter to drop all or specific ICMP messages.
Syntax deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address}
[dscp] [message-type] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

or
Use the no deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
host ip-address} command.
Parameters
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in
A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address to specify a host IP address.
dscp Enter this keyword to deny a packet based on DSCP value.
Range: 0-63
message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type (ICMP message types are
listed in Table 9-2).
Range: 0 to 255 for ICMP type; 0 to 255 for ICMP code
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in
an ACL log file.
entry.
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by default
(255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that
you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be applied to
the monitored interface. For details, see the section Flow-based Monitoring in the
Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added dscp keyword.
packets details.
Monitoring.
Table 9-2 lists the keywords displayed in the CLI help and their corresponding ICMP Message Type
Name.
Table 9-2. ICMP Message Type Keywords
Keyword ICMP Message Type Name

administratively-prohibited Administratively prohibited
alternate-address Alternate host address
conversion-error Datagram conversion error
dod-host-prohibited Host prohibited
dod-net-prohibited Net prohibited
echo Echo
echo-reply Echo reply
general-parameter-problem Parameter problem
host-isolated Host isolated
host-precedence-unreachable Host unreachable for precedence
host-redirect Host redirect
host-tos-redirect Host redirect for TOS
host-tos-unreachable Host unreachable for TOS
host-unknown Host unknown
host-unreachable Host unreachable
information-reply Information replies
information-request Information requests


mask-reply Mask replies
mask-request Mask requests
mobile-redirect Mobile host redirect
net-redirect Network redirect
net-tos-redirect Network redirect for TOS
net-tos-unreachable Network unreachable for TOS
net-unreachable Network unreachable
network-unknown Network unknown
no-room-for-option Parameter required but no room
option-missing Parameter required but not present
packet-too-big Fragmentation needed and DF set
parameter-problem All parameter problems
port-unreachable Port unreachable
precedence-unreachable Precedence cutoff
protocol-unreachable Protocol unreachable
reassembly-timeout Reassembly timeout
redirect All redirects
router-advertisement Router discovery advertisements
router-solicitation Router discovery solicitations
source-quench Source quenches
source-route-failed Source route failed
time-exceeded All time exceeded
timestamp-reply Timestamp replies
timestamp-request Timestamp requests
traceroute Traceroute
ttl-exceeded TTL exceeded
unreachable All unreachables
deny tcp
ces Configure a filter that drops TCP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [dscp] [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

or

Use the no deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.
Parameters
address.
Range: 0-63
bit Enter a flag or combination of bits:
ack: acknowledgement field
fin: finish (no more data from the user)
psh: push function
rst: reset the connection
syn: synchronize sequence numbers
urg: urgent field
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand:
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port
command parameter.
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the
range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535.
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers:
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
filter.
the log. Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
ACL entry.
default (255).

Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated
established keyword.
packets details.
Monitoring.
Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (gt,
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit
mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.

For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 uses 8 entries in the CAM:
Rule# Data Mask From To #Covered
1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
But an ACL rule with TCP port lt 1023 takes only one entry in the CAM:

1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024
Related
deny Assign a filter to deny IP traffic.
Commands
deny udp Assign a filter to deny UDP traffic.
deny udp
ces Configure a filter to drop UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any
| host ip-address} [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

or
Use the no deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
Parameters
Range: 0-63


eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
range = inclusive range of ports
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if
using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
entry.
default (255).
Command
History
packets details.

Monitoring.
For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 will use 8 entries in the CAM:
1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024
Related
deny Assign a deny filter for IP traffic.
Commands
deny tcp Assign a deny filter for TCP traffic.
ip access-list extended
ces Name (or select) an extended IP access list (IP ACL) based on IP addresses or protocols.
Syntax ip access-list extended access-list-name

To delete an access list, use the no ip access-list extended access-list-name command.
Parameters
access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the access list name.
Defaults All access lists contain an implicit deny any; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.

Command

History
Version 7.8.1.0 Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
Usage The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
Information for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.
Example Figure 9-5. Command Example: ip access-list extended

FTOS(conf)#ip access-list extended TESTListEXTEND
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)#
Related
ip access-list standard Configure a standard IP access list.
Commands
permit
ces Configure a filter to pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax permit {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

or
Parameters
specifies that the access list will permit all IP protocols.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to permit based on the protocol identified in the
IP protocol header.
address.
filter.

the log.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DSCP values.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order of priority
for the ACL entry.
default (255).
Command
History
packets details.
Monitoring.
Related
Commands
permit tcp Assign a permit filter for TCP packets.
permit udp Assign a permit filter for UDP packets.

permit arp
e Configure a filter that forwards ARP packets meeting this criteria.This command is supported only on
12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to your line card documentation for specifications.
Syntax permit arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {ip-address |

any | opcode code-number} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor] [fragments]

or
Use the no permit arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id
{ip-address | any | opcode code-number} command.
Parameters
match.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask, therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only
allows entries that match exactly.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the interface.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated
with a specific VLAN.
address of the ARP.
Range: 1 to 16.
filter.
filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information
kept in an ACL log file.
ACL entry.
default (255).
traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the
rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For details, see the section

Command
History
packets details.
Monitoring.
You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP filters in an ACL configured with ARP filters.
permit ether-type
e Configure a filter that allows traffic with specified types of Ethernet packets. This command is
supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to your line card documentation for
specifications.
Syntax permit ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask |

any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} [count [byte] | log]
[order] [monitor]

or
Use the no permit ether-type protocol-type-number {destination-mac-address
mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any}
command.
Parameters
protocol-type-number Enter a number from 600 to FFF as the specific Ethernet type traffic to drop.
match.
allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows
entries that match exactly.
interface.

match.
filter.
ACL entry.
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order
by default (255).
Command
History
packets details.
The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Chapter 44, Port Monitoring.
You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP filters in an ACL configured with ARP filters.

permit icmp
e Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages.
Syntax permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} [dscp] [message-type] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor] [fragments]
or
Use the no permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
Parameters
Range: 0-63
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in
an ACL log file.
entry.
Default: If the order keyword is not used, the ACLs have the lowest order by default
(255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring
interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter
operation.
Command
History

packets details.
permit tcp
ces Configure a filter to pass TCP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] {destination mask
| any | host ip-address} [bit] [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

or
Use the no permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
Parameters
psh: push function
urg: urgent field
Range: 0-63

eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two port for the port
parameter.)
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range
logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535.
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
entry.
default (255).
Command
History
established keyword.

Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the Quality of Service
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.
packets details.
1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024
Related
Commands
permit Assign a permit filter for IP packets.

permit udp
ces Configure a filter to pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
[fragments]

or
Use the no permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
Parameters
Range: 0-63
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
parameter.)
Range: 0 to 65535
entry.
default (255).
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that
you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule will be applied to
the monitored interface. For details, see the section Flow-based Monitoring in the
Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.

Command
History
Usage The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. See the Quality of Service
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information.
packets details.
1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024

Related
ip access-list extended Configure an extended ACL.
Commands
Syntax resequence access-list {ipv4 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum

Step-to-Increment}
Parameters
ipv4 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4, or mac to identify the access list type to resequence.
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters.
Range: 0 - 4294967290
Range: 1 - 4294967290
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands


Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters long.
Range: 0 65535
Range: 1 65535
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands
seq arp
e Configure an egress filter with a sequence number that filters ARP packets meeting this criteria. This
command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to your line card
documentation for specifications.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask |

any} vlan vlan-id {ip-address | any | opcode code-number} [count [byte] | log] [order]
[monitor]
To remove this filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.
Parameters
deny Enter the keyword deny to drop all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
permit Enter the keyword permit to forward all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
match.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the interface.

address of the ARP.
Range: 1 to 16.
filter.
ACL entry.
by default (255).
Command
History
Usage The monitor option is relevant in the context of the flow-based monitoring feature only. See
Information Chapter 44, Port Monitoring.
packets details.
framework.


(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs to interfaces in Layer 2 mode.
seq ether-type
e Configure an egress filter with a specific sequence number that filters traffic with specified types of
Ethernet packets. This command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics; refer to
your line card documentation for specifications.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} ether-type protocol-type-number

{destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {source-mac-address
mac-address-mask | any} [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor]
Parameters
deny Enter the keyword deny to drop all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
permit Enter the keyword permit to forward all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
protocol-type-number Enter a number from 600 to FFFF as the specific Ethernet type traffic to drop.
match.
interface.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1 to 2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1 to 4094)
match.
filter.

ACL entry.
Range: 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest;
by default (255).
Command
History
packets details.
framework.
(Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 filters to interfaces in Layer 2 mode.

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the
filter.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ip-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp}

{source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator
port [port]] [count [byte] | log] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments]
Parameters
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this
criteria.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to filter based on the protocol identified in the IP
protocol header.
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an ICMP access list filter.
ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword ip specifies
that the access list will permit all IP protocols.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a TCP access list filter.
udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a UDP access list filter.
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operands:
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
parameter.)
Range: 0 to 65535
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP

log. Supported on Jumbo-enabled line cards only.
entry.
default (255).
Command
History
established keyword
packets details.
framework.

If the sequence-number is configured, then the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules
with the same order.
Related
Commands
Common MAC Access List Commands

The following commands are available within both MAC ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do
not have mode-specific options.
c and s platforms support Ingress MAC ACLs only.
The following commands allow you to clear, display and assign MAC ACL configurations.
clear counters mac access-group
mac access-group
show mac access-lists
show mac accounting access-list
clear counters mac access-group

ces Clear counters for all or a specific MAC ACL.
Syntax clear counters mac access-group [mac-list-name]
Parameters
mac-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured MAC access list.
Command
History

mac access-group
ces Apply a MAC ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface.
Syntax mac access-group access-list-name {in [vlan vlan-range] | out}
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters.
vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed a range of VLANs. Note that this
option is available only with the in keyword option.
Range: 1 to 4094, 1 to 2094 for ExaScale (can used IDs 1 to 4094)
in Enter the keyword in to configure the ACL to filter incoming traffic.
out Enter the keyword out to configure the ACL to filter outgoing traffic. Not
available on S-Series.
Defaults No default behavior or configuration
Command
History
16 characters long.
Usage You can assign one ACL (standard or extended) to an interface.

Information
Related
mac access-list standard Configure a standard MAC ACL.
Commands
mac access-list extended Configure an extended MAC ACL.
show mac access-lists

ces Display all of the Layer 2 ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an
interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed.
Syntax show mac access-lists [access-list-name] [interface interface] [in | out]

Parameters

by a number:
C-Series and S-Series Range: 1 to 128
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 to 512 for ExaScale.
port information.
in | out Identify whether ACL is applied on ingress or egress side.
Command
\

History
show mac accounting access-list

ces Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured).
Syntax show mac accounting access-list access-list-name interface interface in | out
Parameters
by a number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 to
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
in | out Identify whether ACL is applied ay Ingress (in) or egress (out) side.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
16 characters long.

Example Figure 9-6. Command Example: show mac accounting access-list
FTOS#show mac accounting access-list mac-ext interface po 1

Extended mac access-list mac-ext on GigabitEthernet 0/11
seq 5 permit host 00:00:00:00:00:11 host 00:00:00:00:00:19 count (393794576 packets)
seq 10 deny host 00:00:00:00:00:21 host 00:00:00:00:00:29 count (89076777 packets)
seq 25 permit any any count (0 packets)
Extended mac access-list mac-ext on GigabitEthernet 0/12
seq 5 permit host 00:00:00:00:00:11 host 00:00:00:00:00:19 count (57589834 packets)
seq 25 permit any any count (0 packets)
FTOS#
Usage The ACL hit counters in this command increment the counters for each matching rule, not just the first
Information matching rule.
Related
show mac accounting destination Display destination counters for Layer 2 traffic (available on
Commands
physical interfaces only).
Standard MAC ACL Commands

When an access-list is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects
implicit permit.
The following commands configure standard MAC ACLs:
deny
mac access-list standard
permit
seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List
Commands.
deny
ces Configure a filter to drop packets with a the MAC address specified.
Syntax deny {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log]

[monitor]
or

Use the no deny {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.
Parameters
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the
filter.
mac-source-address Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-source-address-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If
no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in
other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed
by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by
the filter.
log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to log the
packets.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which
you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored interface.
For details, see the section Flow-based Monitoring in the Port
Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD
Command
History
Usage When you use the log option, CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on
Information how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these
packets details.
Related
permit Configure a MAC address filter to pass packets.
Commands
seq Configure a MAC address filter with a specified sequence number.

mac access-list standard
ces Name a new or existing MAC access control list (MAC ACL) and enter the MAC ACCESS LIST
mode to configure a standard MAC ACL. See Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common
MAC Access List Commands.
Syntax mac access-list standard mac-list-name
Parameters
mac-list-name Enter a text string as the name of the standard MAC access list (140 character
maximum).
Command
History
16 characters long.
Usage FTOS supports one ingress and one egress MAC ACL per interface.
Information
The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. Refer to your line card documentation
for detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL.
C-Series and S-Series support ingress ACLs only.
Example Figure 9-7. Command Example: mac-access-list standard

FTOS(conf)#mac-access-list access-list standard TestMAC
FTOS(config-std-macl)#?
deny Specify packets to reject
description List description
exit Exit from access-list configuration mode
no Negate a command or set its defaults
permit Specify packets to forward
remark Specify access-list entry remark
seq Sequence numbers
show Show Standard ACL configuration
permit
ces Configure a filter to forward packets from a specific source MAC address.
Syntax permit {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] | [log]

[monitor]

or
Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.
Parameters
any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets received with a MAC
address.
no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other
words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
by the filter.
the filter.
packets.
Command
History
packets details.
Related
deny Configure a MAC ACL filter to drop packets.
Commands
seq Configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number.

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in a MAC access list while creating the filter.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | mac-source-address

[mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log] [monitor]
Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number between 0 and 65535.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting
this condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets
meeting this criteria.
any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets.
no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other
words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
by the filter.
the filter.
packets.
Command
History
packets details.
Related
Commands

Extended MAC ACL Commands
implicit permit.
The following commands configure Extended MAC ACLs.

deny
mac access-list extended
permit
seq
Note: See also Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List
Commands.
deny
ces Configure a filter to drop packets that match the filter criteria.
Syntax deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} {any | host

mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype-operator]
[count [byte]] [log] [monitor]

or
Use the no deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address
mac-source-address-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address
mac-destination-address-mask} command.
Parameters
any Enter the keyword any to drop all packets.
host mac-address Enter the keyword host followed by a MAC address to drop
packets with that host address.
mac-source-address Enter the source MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-source-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
mac-destination-address Enter the destination MAC address and mask in
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
mac-destination-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must match.

ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of
the following Ethertypes:
ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format.
llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format.
snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets
processed by the filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes
packets.
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in
which you are creating the rule will be applied to the
monitored interface. For details, see the section Flow-based
Monitoring in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED
Command
History
packets details.
Related
permit Configure a filter to forward based on MAC addresses.
Commands
seq Configure a filter with specific sequence numbers.
mac access-list extended

ces Name a new or existing extended MAC access control list (extended MAC ACL).
Syntax mac access-list extended access-list-name
Parameters
access-list-name Enter a text string as the MAC access list name, up to 140 characters.
Defaults No default configuration

Command
History
16 characters long.
Example Figure 9-8. Command Example: mac-access-list extended

FTOS(conf)#mac-access-list access-list extended TestMATExt
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#remark 5 IPv4
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#remark 15 ARP
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#remark 25 IPv6
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#seq 40 permit any any count bytes
FTOS(config-ext-macl)#exit
FTOS(conf)#do show mac accounting access-list snickers interface g0/47 in
Extended mac access-list snickers on GigabitEthernet 0/47

seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes (559851886 packets 191402152148
bytes)
seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes (74481486 packets 5031686754
bytes)
seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes (7751519 packets 797843521 bytes)
Related
mac access-list standard Configure a standard MAC access list.
Commands
show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if
configured).
permit
ces Configure a filter to pass packets matching the criteria specified.
Syntax permit {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} {any |

host mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype
operator] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

or
Use the no permit {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address
mac-source-address-mask} {any | mac-destination-address
mac-destination-address-mask} command.

Parameters
any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets.
host Enter the keyword host followed by a MAC address to
forward packets with that host address.
mac-source-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
mac-destination-address Enter the destination MAC address and mask in
mac-destination-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the
following Ethertypes:
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes
packets.
describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in
which you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored
interface. For details, see the section Flow-based Monitoring
in the Port Monitoring chapter of the FTOS Configuration
Guide.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED
Command
History
packets details.

Related
deny Configure a filter to drop traffic based on the MAC address.

Commands
seq Configure a filter with specific sequence numbers.
seq
ces Configure a filter with a specific sequence number.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address

mac-source-address-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address
mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype operator] [count [byte]] [log] [monitor]
Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number as the filter sequence number.
Range: zero (0) to 65535.
deny Enter the keyword deny to drop any traffic matching this filter.
permit Enter the keyword permit to forward any traffic matching this filter.
any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets.
host mac-address Enter the keyword host followed by a MAC address to filter packets
with that host address.
mac-source-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
mac-destination-address Enter the destination MAC address and mask in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn
format.
mac-destination-address-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the
following Ethertypes:
by the filter.
the filter.
packets.
you are creating the rule will be applied to the monitored interface. For
details, see the section Flow-based Monitoring in the Port

Command
History
packets details.
Related
deny Configure a filter to drop traffic.
Commands
permit Configure a filter to forward traffic.
IP Prefix List Commands

implicit permit.
Use these commands to configure or enable IP prefix lists.
clear ip prefix-list
deny
ip prefix-list
permit
seq
show config
show ip prefix-list detail
show ip prefix-list summary
clear ip prefix-list
ces Reset the number of times traffic met the conditions (hit counters) of the configured prefix lists.
Syntax clear ip prefix-list [prefix-name]
Parameters
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the configured prefix list to clear only counters for that
prefix list, up to 140 characters long.

Command

History
16 characters long.
Default Clears hit counters for all prefix lists unless a prefix list is specified.
Related
ip prefix-list Configure a prefix list.
Commands
deny
ces Configure a filter to drop packets meeting the criteria specified.
Syntax deny ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length]
Parameters
ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/
8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0.
ge min-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge followed by the minimum prefix
length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
le max-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le followed by the maximum prefix
Command Modes PREFIX-LIST
Command
History
Usage Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5.
Information
If the options ge or le are not used, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered.
Related
permit Configure a filter to pass packets.
Commands
seq Configure a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number.

ip prefix-list
ces Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.
Syntax ip prefix-list prefix-name
Parameters
prefix-name Enter a string up to 16 characters long as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters
long.
Command
History
16 characters long.
Usage Prefix lists redistribute OSPF and RIP routes meeting specific criteria. For related RIP commands
Information supported on C-Series and E-Series, see Chapter 48, Router Information Protocol (RIP). For related
OSPF commands supported on all three platforms, see Chapter 38, Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2
and OSPFv3).
Related
show ip route list Display IP routes in an IP prefix list.
Commands
show ip prefix-list summary Display a summary of the configured prefix lists.
permit
ces Configure a filter that passes packets meeting the criteria specified.
Syntax permit ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length]
Parameters
ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/8
means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0.
ge min-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge followed by the minimum prefix
le max-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le followed by the maximum prefix length,
which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
Command
History

Usage Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5.
Information
If the options ge or le are not used, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered.
Related
Commands
seq Configure a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number.
seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in a prefix list while configuring the filter.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any} | [ip-prefix /nn {ge min-prefix-length} {le
max-prefix-length}] | [bitmask number]
Parameters
sequence-number Enter a number.
Range: 1 to 4294967294.
condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting
this condition.
any (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword any to match any packets.
ip-prefix /nn (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example,
35.0.0.0/8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0.
ge min-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge followed by the minimum prefix length,
le max-prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le followed by the maximum prefix length,
bitmask number Enter the keyword bitmask followed by a bit mask number in dotted
decimal format.
Command
History
Version 6.3.1.0 Added bit mask option
Usage If the options ge or le are not used, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered.
Information
Related
Commands
permit Configure a filter to pass packets.

show config
ces Display the current PREFIX-LIST configurations.
Syntax show config
Command
History

FTOS(conf-nprefixl)#show config
!
ip prefix-list snickers
FTOS(conf-nprefixl)#
show ip prefix-list detail

ces Display details of the configured prefix lists.
Syntax show ip prefix-list detail [prefix-name]
Parameters
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
16 characters long.

Example Figure 9-10. Command Example: show ip prefix-list detail
FTOS#show ip prefix-list detail

Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf
ip prefix-list filter_in:
count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10
seq 5 deny 1.102.0.0/16 le 32 (hit count: 0)
seq 6 deny 2.1.0.0/16 ge 23 (hit count: 0)
seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 0)
ip prefix-list filter_ospf:
seq 5 deny 100.100.1.0/24 (hit count: 5)
seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 132)
FTOS#
show ip prefix-list summary

ces Display a summary of the configured prefix lists.
Syntax show ip prefix-list summary [prefix-name]
Parameters
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters long.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
16 characters long.
Example Figure 9-11. Command Example: show ip prefix-list summary

FTOS#show ip prefix summary
Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: test
ip prefix-list test:
ip prefix-list test1:
FTOS#

Route Map Commands
implicit permit.
The following commands allow you to configure route maps and their redistribution criteria.
continue
description
match as-path
match community
match interface
match ip address
match ip next-hop
match ip route-source
match metric
match origin
match route-type
match tag
route-map
set as-path
set automatic-tag
set comm-list delete
set community
set level
set local-preference
set metric
set metric-type
set next-hop
set origin
set tag
set weight
show config
show route-map
continue
ces Configure a route-map to go to a route-map entry with a higher sequence number.
Syntax continue [sequence-number]
Parameters
sequence-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the route map sequence number.
Range: 1 - 65535
Default: no sequence number
Defaults Not Configured

Command Modes ROUTE-MAP
Command
History
Usage The continue feature allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the
Information sequence number). If the sequence number is not specified, the continue feature simply moves to
the next sequence number (also known as an implied continue). If a match clause exists, the continue
feature executes only after a successful match occurs. If there are no successful matches, continue is
ignored.
Match clause with Continue clause

The continue feature can exist without a match clause. A continue clause without a match clause
executes and jumps to the specified route-map entry.
With a match clause and a continue clause, the match clause executes first and the continue clause next
in a specified route map entry. The continue clause launches only after a successful match. The
behavior is:
A successful match with a continue clausethe route map executes the set clauses and then goes
to the specified route map entry upon execution of the continue clause.
If the next route map entry contains a continue clause, the route map will execute the continue
clause if a successful match occurs.
If the next route map entry does not contain a continue clause, the route map evaluates normally. If
a match does not does not occur, the route map does not continue and will fall through to the next
sequence number, if one exists.
Set clause with Continue clause

If the route-map entry contains sets with the continue clause, then set actions is performed first
followed by the continue clause jump to the specified route map entry.
If a set actions occurs in the first route map entry and then the same set action occurs with a
different value in a subsequent route map entry, the last set of actions overrides the previous set of
actions with the same set command.
If set community additive and set as-path prepend are configure, the communities and AS
numbers are prepended.
Related
set community Specify a COMMUNITY attribute
Commands
set as-path Configure a filter to modify the AS path
description
ces Add a description to this route map.
Syntax description {description}

Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the route map (80 characters maximum).
Command
History
Related
route-map Enable a route map
Commands
match as-path
ces Configure a filter to match routes that have a certain AS number in their BGP path.
Syntax match as-path as-path-name
Parameters
as-path-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH ACL, up to 140 characters.
Command
History
16 characters long.
Related
set as-path Add information to the BGP AS_PATH attribute.
Commands
match community
ces Configure a filter to match routes that have a certain COMMUNITY attribute in their BGP path.
Syntax match community community-list-name [exact]
Parameters
community-list-name Enter the name of a configured community list.
exact (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords exact to process only those routes with this
community list name.

Command

History
Related
ip community-list Configure an Community Access list.
Commands
set community Specify a COMMUNITY attribute.
neighbor send-community Send COMMUNITY attribute to peer or peer group.
match interface
ces Configure a filter to match routes whose next hop is on the interface specified.
Syntax match interface interface

To remove a match, use the no match interface interface command.
Parameters
For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/port
information.
For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/
port information.
For the loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from zero (0)
to 16383.
For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale and 1 to 512 for ExaScale.
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by
For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094, 1-2094 for
ExaScale (can used IDs 1-4094).
Command
History
Related
match ip address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
Commands
match ip next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
match ip route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match metric Redistribute routes that match a specific metric.

match route-type Redistribute routes that match a route type.
match tag Redistribute routes that match a specific tag.
match ip address
ces Configure a filter to match routes based on IP addresses specified in an access list.
Syntax match ip address prefix-list-name
Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters.
Command
History
16 characters long.
Related
match interface Redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Commands
match ip next-hop
ces Configure a filter to match based on the next-hop IP addresses specified in an IP access list or IP prefix
list.
Syntax match ip next-hop {access-list | prefix-list prefix-list-name}
Parameters
prefix-list Enter the keywords prefix-list followed by the name of configured prefix
prefix-list-name list.

Command

History
16 characters long.
Related
Commands
match ip route-source
ces Configure a filter to match based on the routes advertised by routes specified in IP access lists or IP
prefix lists.
Syntax match ip route-source {access-list | prefix-list prefix-list-name}
Parameters
prefix-list-name list, up 10 140 characters.
Command
History
16 characters long.
Related
Commands

match metric
ces Configure a filter to match on a specified value.
Syntax match metric metric-value
Parameters
metric-value Enter a value to match.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Command
History
Related
Commands
match origin
ces Configure a filter to match routes based on the value found in the BGP path ORIGIN attribute.
Syntax match origin {egp | igp | incomplete}
Parameters
egp Enter the keyword egp to match routes originating outside the AS.
igp Enter the keyword igp to match routes originating within the same AS.
incomplete Enter the keyword incomplete to match routes with incomplete routing
information.
Command
History

match route-type
ces Configure a filter to match routes based on the how the route is defined.
Syntax match route-type {external [type-1 | type-2] | internal | level-1 | level-2 | local}
Parameters
external [type-1| type-2] Enter the keyword external followed by either type-1 or type-2 to
match only on OSPF Type 1 routes or OSPF Type 2 routes.
internal Enter the keyword internal to match only on routes generated within
OSPF areas.
level-1 Enter the keyword level-1 to match IS-IS Level 1 routes.
level-2 Enter the keyword level-2 to match IS-IS Level 2 routes.
local Enter the keyword local to match only on routes generated within the
switch.
Command
History
Related
Commands
match tag Redistribute routes that match a tag.
match tag
ces Configure a filter to redistribute only routes that match a specified tag value.
Syntax match tag tag-value
Parameters
tag-value Enter a value as the tag on which to match.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Command
History

Related
Commands
route-map
ces Enable a route map statement and configure its action and sequence number. This command also places
you in the ROUTE-MAP mode.
Syntax route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number]
Parameters
map-name Enter a text string of up to 140 characters to name the route map for easy
identification.
permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permit to set the route map default as permit.
If no keyword is specified, the default is permit.
deny (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword deny to set the route map default as deny.
sequence-number (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to identify the route map for editing and sequencing
with other route maps. You are prompted for a sequence number if there are
multiple instances of the route map.
Range: 1 to 65535.
If no keyword (permit or deny) is defined for the route map, the permit action is the default.
Command
History
16 characters long.
\
Example Figure 9-12. Command Example: route-map

FTOS(conf)#route-map dempsey
FTOS(config-route-map)#
Usage Use caution when you delete route maps because if you do not specify a sequence number, all route
Information maps with the same map-name are deleted when you use no route-map map-name command.

Related
Commands
set as-path
ces Configure a filter to modify the AS path for BGP routes.
Syntax set as-path prepend as-number [... as-number]
Parameters
prepend as-number Enter the keyword prepend followed by up to eight AS numbers to be
inserted into the BGP path information.
Range: 1 to 65535
Command
History
Usage You can prepend up to eight AS numbers to a BGP route.

Information
This command influences best path selection in BGP by inserting a tag or AS number into the
AS_PATH attribute.
Related
match as-path Redistribute routes that match an AS-PATH attribute.
Commands
ip as-path access-list Configure an AS-PATH access list.
neighbor filter-list Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
show ip community-lists Display configured IP Community access lists.
set automatic-tag
ces Configure a filter to automatically compute the tag value of the route.
Syntax set automatic-tag
To return to the default, enter no set automatic-tag.
Command
History

Related
set level Specify the OSPF area for route redistribution.
Commands
set metric Specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes.
set metric-type Specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes.
set tag Specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes.
set comm-list delete

ces Configure a filter to remove the specified community list from the BGP routes COMMUNITY
attribute.
Syntax set comm-list community-list-name delete
Parameters
community-list-name Enter the name of an established Community list, up to 140 characters.
Command
History
16 characters long.
Usage The community list used in the set comm-list delete command must be configured so that each
Information filter contains only one community. For example, the filter deny 100:12 is acceptable, but the
filter deny 120:13 140:33 results in an error.
If the set comm-list delete command and the set community command are configured in the
same route map sequence, then the deletion command (set comm-list delete) is processed before
the insertion command (set community).
Related
ip community-list Configure community access list.
Commands
match community Redistribute routes that match the COMMUNITY attribute.
set community Specify a COMMUNITY attribute.

set community
ces Allows you to assign a BGP COMMUNITY attribute.
Syntax set community {community-number | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} [additive]

To delete a BGP COMMUNITY attribute assignment, use the no set community
{community-number | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} command.
Parameters
community-number Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2
bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system.
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to drop all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute
of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community
attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers.
no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must not
be advertised to other BGP peers.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to drop all routes containing the well-known
community attribute of NO_EXPORT.
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be
advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary.
none Enter the keywords none to remove the community attribute from routes meeting
the route map criteria.
additive (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword additive add the communities to already existing
communities.
Command
History
Related
ip community-list Configure a Community access list.
Commands
match community Redistribute routes that match a BGP COMMUNITY attribute.
neighbor send-community Assign the COMMUNITY attribute.
show ip bgp community Display BGP community groups.
show ip community-lists Display configured Community access lists.

set level
ces Configure a filter to specify the IS-IS level or OSPF area to which matched routes are redistributed.
Syntax set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area}
Parameters
backbone Enter the keyword backbone to redistribute matched routes to the OSPF backbone area
(area 0.0.0.0).
level-1 Enter the keyword level-1 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 1.
level-1-2 Enter the keyword level-1-2 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 1 and Level 2.
level-2 Enter the keyword level-2 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 2.
stub-area Enter the keyword stub to redistributed matched routes to OSPF stub areas.
Command
History
Related
set automatic-tag Compute the tag value of the route.
Commands
set metric-type Specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes.
ces Configure a filter to set the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for routers within the local autonomous
system.
Syntax set local-preference value
Parameters
value Enter a number as the LOCAL_PREF attribute value.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Command
History

Usage The set local-preference command changes the LOCAL_PREF attribute for routes meeting the
Information route map criteria. To change the LOCAL_PREF for all routes, use the bgp default
local-preference command.
Related
bgp default local-preference Change default LOCAL_PREF attribute for all routes.
Commands
set metric
ces Configure a filter to assign a new metric to redistributed routes.
Syntax set metric [+ | -] metric-value

To delete a setting, enter no set metric.
Parameters
+ (OPTIONAL) Enter + to add a metric-value to the redistributed routes.
- (OPTIONAL) Enter - to subtract a metric-value from the redistributed routes.
metric-value Enter a number as the new metric value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295
Command
History
Related
Commands
set metric-type Specify the route type assigned to redistributed routes.
set metric-type
ces Configure a filter to assign a new route type for routes redistributed to OSPF.
Syntax set metric-type {internal | external | type-1 | type-2}
Parameters
internal Enter the keyword internal to assign the Interior Gateway Protocol metric of the next
hop as the routes BGP MULTI_EXIT_DES (MED) value.
external Enter the keyword external to assign the IS-IS external metric.
type-1 Enter the keyword type-1 to assign the OSPF Type 1 metric.
type-2 Enter the keyword type-2 to assign the OSPF Type 2 metric.

Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Implemented internal keyword
Related
Commands
set next-hop
ces Configure a filter to specify an IP address as the next hop.
Syntax set next-hop ip-address
Parameters
ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format.
Command
History
Usage If the set next-hop command is configured, its configuration takes precedence over the neighbor
Information next-hop-self command in the ROUTER BGP mode.
If you configure the set next-hop command with the interfaces (either Loopback or physical) IP
address, the software declares the route unreachable.
Related
Commands
neighbor next-hop-self Configure the routers as the next hop for a BGP neighbor.

set origin
ces Configure a filter to manipulate the BGP ORIGIN attribute.
Syntax set origin {igp | egp | incomplete}
Parameters
egp Enter the keyword egp to set routes originating from outside the local AS.
igp Enter the keyword igp to set routes originating within the same AS.
incomplete Enter the keyword incomplete to set routes with incomplete routing information.
Command
History
set tag
ces Configure a filter to specify a tag for redistributed routes.
Syntax set tag tag-value
Parameters
tag-value Enter a number as the tag.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Command
History
Related
Commands
set metric-type Specify the route type assigned to redistributed routes.

set weight
ces Configure a filter to add a non-RFC compliant attribute to the BGP route to assist with route selection.
Syntax set weight weight
Parameters
weight Enter a number as the weight to be used by the route meeting the route map specification.
Routes with a higher weight are preferred when there are multiple routes to the same
destination.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: router-originated = 32768; all other routes = 0
Defaults router-originated = 32768; all other routes = 0
Command
History
Usage If you do not use the set weight command, router-originated paths have a weight attribute of 32768
Information and all other paths have a weight attribute of zero.
show config
ces Display the current route map configuration.
Syntax show config
Command
History

FTOS(config-route-map)#show config
!
route-map hopper permit 10
FTOS(config-route-map)#
show route-map
ces Display the current route map configurations.
Syntax show route-map [map-name]

Parameters
map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured route map, up to 140 characters.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
16 characters long.
Example Figure 9-14. Command Example: show route-map

FTOS#show route-map
route-map firpo, permit, sequence 10
Match clauses:
Set clauses:
tag 34
FTOS#
Related
route-map Configure a route map.
Commands
AS-Path Commands
This feature is supported on E-Series only, as indicated by this character under each command heading:
e
The following commands configure AS-Path ACLs.
deny
ip as-path access-list
permit
show config
show ip as-path-access-lists

deny
e Create a filter to drop routes that match the routes AS-PATH attribute. Use regular expressions to
identify which routes are affected by the filter.
Syntax deny as-regular-expression
Parameters
as-regular-expression Enter a regular expression to match BGP AS-PATH attributes.
Use one or a combination of the following:
. = (period) matches on any single character, including white space
* = (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more
sequences)
+ = (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more
sequences)
? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences).
You must enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the
? regular expression.
[ ] = (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
^ = (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used
at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT
the characters specified.)
$ = (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string.
_ = (underscore) matches a comma (,), left brace ({), right brace (}), left
parenthesis, right parenthesis, the beginning of the input string, the end
of the input string, or a space.
| = (pipe) matches either character.
Command Modes AS-PATH ACL
Usage The regular expression must match part of the ASCII-text in the AS-PATH attribute of the BGP route.
Information
Command
History
ip as-path access-list
e Enter the AS-PATH ACL mode and configure an access control list based on the BGP AS_PATH
attribute.
Syntax ip as-path access-list as-path-name
Parameters
as-path-name Enter the access-list name, up to 140 characters.

Example Figure 9-15. Command Example: ip as-path access-list
FTOS(conf)#ip as-path access-list TestPath

FTOS(config-as-path)#
Usage Use the match as-path or neighbor filter-list commands to apply the AS-PATH ACL to BGP
Information routes.
Command
History
16 characters long.
Related
match as-path Match on routes contain a specific AS-PATH.
Commands
neighbor filter-list Configure filter based on AS-PATH information.
permit
e Create a filter to forward BGP routes that match the routes AS-PATH attributes. Use regular
expressions to identify which routes are affected by this filter.
Syntax permit as-regular-expression
Parameters
as-regular-expression Enter a regular expression to match BGP AS-PATH attributes.
Use one or a combination of the following:
* = (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences)
+ = (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences)
? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences). You
must enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
[] = (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
^ = (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters
specified.)
parenthesis, right parenthesis, the beginning of the input string, the end of the
input string, or a space.
Command Modes AS-PATH ACL
Command
History

show config
e Display the current configuration.
Syntax show config
Command Mode AS-PATH ACL
Command
History
Example Figure 9-16. Command Example: show config (AS-PATH ACL)

FTOS(config-as-path)#show config
!
ip as-path access-list snickers
deny .3
FTOS(config-as-path)#
show ip as-path-access-lists
e Display the all AS-PATH access lists configured on the E-Series.
Syntax show ip as-path-access-lists
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 9-17. Command Example: show ip as-path-access-lists
FTOS#show ip as-path-access-lists
ip as-path access-list 1
permit ^$
permit ^$.*$$
deny .*
ip as-path access-list 91
permit ^$
deny .*
permit ^$.*$$
FTOS#
IP Community List Commands

IP Community List commands are supported on E-Series only, as indicated by this character under
each command heading: e
The commands in this section are:

deny

ip community-list
permit
show config
show ip community-lists
deny
e Create a filter to drop routes matching a BGP COMMUNITY number.
Syntax deny {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | quote-regexp

regular-expressions-list | regexp regular-expression}
Parameters
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to drop all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of
NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
regexp Enter the keyword regexp followed by a regular expression. Use one or a
regular-expression combination of the following:
? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences). You must
enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
specified.)
Command Modes COMMUNITY-LIST
Command
History

ip community-list
e Enter COMMUNITY-LIST mode and create an IP community-list for BGP.
Syntax ip community-list comm-list-name

To delete a community-list, use the no ip community-list comm-list-name command.
Parameters
comm-list-name Enter a text string as the name of the community-list, up to 140 characters.
Example Figure 9-18. Command Example: ip community-list

FTOS(conf)#ip community-list TestComList
FTOS(config-community-list)#
Command
History
16 characters long.
permit
e Configure a filter to forward routes that match the routes COMMUNITY attribute.
Syntax permit {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | quote-regexp

regular-expressions-list | regexp regular-expression}
Parameters
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to drop all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of
NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.

regexp Enter the keyword regexp followed by a regular expression. Use one or a
regular-expression combination of the following:
? = (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences). You must
enter an escape sequence (CNTL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
specified.)
Command Modes COMMUNITY-LIST
Command
History
show config
e Display the non-default information in the current configuration.
Syntax show config
Command Mode COMMUNITY-LIST
Command
History
Example Figure 9-19. Command Example: show config (COMMUNITY-LIST

FTOS(config-std-community-list)#show config
!
ip community-list standard patches
deny 45:1
permit no-export
FTOS(config-std-community-list)#

show ip community-lists
e Display configured IP community lists in alphabetic order.
Syntax show ip community-lists [name]
Parameters
name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the standard or extended IP community list, up to 140
characters.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
16 characters long.
Example Figure 9-20. Command Example: show ip community-lists

FTOS#show ip community-lists
ip community-list standard 1
deny 701:20
deny 702:20
deny 703:20
deny 704:20
deny 705:20
deny 14551:20
deny 701:112
deny 702:112
deny 703:112
deny 704:112
deny 705:112
deny 14551:112
deny 701:666
deny 702:666
deny 703:666
deny 704:666
deny 705:666
deny 14551:666
FTOS#

294
|
Access Control Lists (ACL)
10
ACL VLAN Group
Overview
The ACL VLAN Group feature is available only on the E-Series, as indicated by this symbol under
each command heading: e
Since VLAN ACLs exist as multiple ACLs in the CAM, the size of the ACLs can be limited in the
CAM. The ACL VLAN Group feature permits you to group VLANs and apply ACLs to the group so
that ACLs exist as a single ACL in the CAM.
Note: This feature is supported on IPv4 only and can only be used with the ipv4-egacl-16k
CAM Profile with the acl-group microcode. See Chapter 13, Content Addressable Memory
(CAM).
Commands
The ACL VLAN Group commands are:
acl-vlan-group
description
ip access-group
member vlan
show acl-vlan-group
show config
show running config acl-vlan-group
See other VLAN commands in Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).
acl-vlan-group
e Create an ACL VLAN group
Syntax acl-vlan-group {group name}
Parameters
group name Specify the name of the ACL VLAN group (maximum 140 characters).
ACL VLAN Group | 295

Command
History
characters long.
Usage You can have up to 8 different ACL VLAN groups at any given time.
Information
Related
show acl-vlan-group Display the ACL VLAN groups
Commands
description
e Add a description to the ACL VLAN group.
Syntax description description
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the ACL VLAN group (80 characters maximum).
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp)
Command
History
Related
show acl-vlan-group Display the ACL VLAN groups
Commands
ip access-group
e Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group.
Syntax ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit
Parameters
group name Enter the name of the ACL VLAN group where you want the egress IP
ACLs applied, up to 140 characters.
Command
History
characters long.
Usage Note: Only an egress IP ACL can be applied on an ACL VLAN group.
Information
Related
acl-vlan-group Create an ACL VLAN Group and name
Commands
296 | ACL VLAN Group

member vlan
e Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group.
Syntax member vlan {VLAN-range}
Parameters
VLAN-range Enter the comma separated VLAN ID set. For example, 1-10,400-410,500
Command
History
Usage At a maximum, there can be only 32 VLAN members in all ACL VLAN groups. A VLAN can belong
Information to only one group at any given time.
Related
show acl-vlan-group Display the ACL VLAN Groups
Commands
show acl-vlan-group
e Display all the ACL VLAN Groups or display a specific ACL VLAN Group, identified by name.
Syntax show acl-vlan-group {group name | detail}
Parameters
group name (Optional) Display only the ACL VLAN Group that is specified, up to 140
characters.
detail Display information in a line-by-line format to display the names in
their entirety.
Note: Without the detail option, the output is displayed in a table
style and information may be truncated.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
characters long.
Usage Notes When an ACL-VLAN-Group name or the Access List Group Name contains more than 30 characters,
the name will be truncated in the show acl-vlan-group command output.
Examples Figure 10-1 shows the table style display used with the show acl-vlan-group command. Note that
some group names and some access list names are truncated.

Figure 10-1. Command Example: show acl-vlan-group
FTOS#show acl-vlan-group
Group Name Egress IP Acl Vlan Members
TestGroupSeventeenTwenty SpecialAccessOnlyExperts 100,200,300
CustomerNumberIdentifica AnyEmployeeCustomerEleve 2-10,99
HostGroup Group5 1,1000
FTOS#
Truncated Group and Access List Names
Figure 10-2 shows the table style display when using the show acl-vlan-group group-name option.
Note that the access list name is truncated.
Figure 10-2. Command Example: show acl-vlan-group group-name

FTOS#show acl-vlan-group TestGroupSeventeenTwenty
Group Name Egress IP Acl Vlan Members
TestGroupSeventeenTwenty SpecialAccessOnlyExperts 100,200,300
FTOS#
Truncated Access List Name
Figure 10-2 shows the line-by-line style display when using the show acl-vlan-group detail option.
Note that no group or access list names are truncated
Figure 10-3. Command Example: show acl-vlan-group detail

FTOS#show acl-vlan-group detail
Group Name :
TestGroupSeventeenTwenty
Egress IP Acl :
SpecialAccessOnlyExpertsAllowed
Vlan Members :
100,200,300
Group Name :
CustomerNumberIdentificationEleven
Egress IP Acl :
AnyEmployeeCustomerElevenGrantedAccess
Vlan Members :
2-10,99
Group Name :
HostGroup
Egress IP Acl :
Group5
Vlan Members :
1,1000
FTOS#
show acl-vlan-group detail

e Display all the ACL VLAN Groups or display a specific ACL VLAN Group by name. The output is
show in a line-by-line format to display the names in their entirety.
Syntax show acl-vlan-group detail
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage Notes The output for this command is shown in a line-by-line format. This allows the ACL-VLAN-Group
names (or the Access List Group Names) to display in their entirety.
Example Figure 10-4. Command Example: show acl-clan-group

FTOS(conf-acl-vl-grp)#show config
!
acl-vlan-group group1
description Acl Vlan Group1
member vlan 1-10,400-410,500
ip access-group acl1 out implicit-permit
FTOS#
show config
e Display the current configuration of the ACL VLAN group.
Syntax show config
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 10-5. show config Command Example

FTOS(conf-acl-vl-grp)#show config
!
member vlan 1-10,400-410,500
FTOS#
show running config acl-vlan-group

e Display the running configuration of all or a given ACL VLAN Group.
Syntax show running config acl-vlan-group group name
Parameters
group name Display only the ACL VLAN Group that is specified. The group name can
be up to 140 characters
Command Modes EXEC

Command
History
characters long.
Example Figure 10-6. show running-config acl-vlan-group Command Example Output

FTOS#show running-config acl-vlan-group
!
member vlan 1-10,400-410,500
!
member vlan 20
ip access-group acl2 out
FTOS#
FTOS#show running-config acl-vlan-group group1

!
member vlan 1-10,400-410,500
FTOS#

11
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)
Overview
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path
failure detection. The FTOS implementation is based on the standards specified in the IETF Draft
draft-ietf-bfd-base-03 and supports BFD on all Layer 3 physical interfaces including VLAN interfaces
and port-channels.
BFD is supported on the C-Series and E-Series, where indicated by the c and e characters under
command headings.
BFD is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.2.1.0 and later.
Commands
bfd all-neighbors
bfd disable
bfd enable (Configuration)
bfd enable (Interface)
bfd interval
bfd neighbor
bfd protocol-liveness
clear bfd counters
debug bfd
ip route bfd
isis bfd all-neighbors
neighbor bfd
neighbor bfd disable
show bfd counters
show bfd neighbors
vrrp bfd
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) | 301

bfd all-neighbors
Enable BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by Layer 3 protocols IS-IS, OSPF, or BGP on
ce
router interfaces, and (optionally) reconfigure the default timer values.
Syntax bfd all-neighbors [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]
Parameters
interval milliseconds (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to specify non-default BFD session
parameters beginning with the transmission interval.
Range:50-1000
Default:100
min_rx milliseconds Enter this keyword to specify the minimum rate at which the local system
would like to receive control packets from the remote system.
Range:50-100
Default:100
multiplier value Enter this keyword to specify the number of packets that must be missed in
order to declare a session down.
Range:3-50
Default:3
role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes:
ActiveThe active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can
be active for the same session.
PassiveThe passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds
to a request for session initialization from the active system.
Default: Active
Defaults See Parameters
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF

ROUTER BGP
ROUTER ISIS (Not available on C-Series)
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 BFD for BGP was introduced on the C-Series and E-Series TeraScale.
History
Version 8.3.8.0 BFD for BGP was introduced on the S4810.
Version 8.4.1.3 BFD for BGP was introduced on the E-Series ExaScale.
Version 8.2.1.0 BFD for OSPF and ISIS introduced on the E-Series ExaScale.
Version 7.6.1.0 BFD for OSPF introduced on the C-Series.
Version 7.5.1.0 BFD for ISIS introduced on the E-Series.
Version 7.4.1.0 BFD for OSPF introduced on the E-Series.
Usage All neighbors inherit the timer values configured with the bfd all-neighbors command except in the
Information following cases:
Timer values configured with the isis bfd all-neighbors command in INTERFACE mode override
timer values configured with the bfd all-neighbors command. Likewise, using the no bfd
all-neighbors command does not disable BFD on an interface if BFD is explicitly enabled using
the command isis bfd all-neighbors.
302 | Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)

Neighbors that have been explicitly enabled or disabled for a BFD session with the bfd neighbor or
neighbor bfd disable commands in ROUTER BGP mode do not inherit the global BFD enable/
disable values configured with the bfd all-neighbors command or configured for the peer group to
which a neighbor belongs. The neighbors inherit only the global timer values (configured with the
bfd all-neighbors command).
Related
show bfd neighbors Display BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface.
Commands
bfd neighbor Explicitly enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.
neighbor bfd disable Explicitly disable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.
bfd disable
ce Disable BFD on all interfaces.
Syntax bfd disable

Re-enable BFD using the command no bfd disable.
Defaults BFD is disabled by default.
Command Modes INTERFACE VRRP
Command
History
bfd enable (Configuration)

ce Enable BFD on all interfaces.
Syntax bfd enable

Disable BFD using the no bfd enable command.
Defaults BFD is disabled by default.
Command
History

bfd enable (Interface)
ce Enable BFD on an interface.
Syntax bfd enable
Defaults BFD is enabled on all interfaces when you enable BFD from CONFIGURATION mode.
Command
History
bfd interval
ce Specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval.
Syntax bfd interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}
Parameters
interval milliseconds Enter this keyword to specify non-default BFD session parameters
beginning with the transmission interval.
Range:50-1000
Default:100
Range:50-100
Default:100
Range:3-50
Default:3
Default: Active
Command
History Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale

Example Figure 11-1. bfd interval Command Example
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/3)#bfd interval 250 min_rx 300 multiplier 4 role passive
bfd neighbor
ce Establish a BFD session with a neighbor.
Syntax bfd neighbor ip-address
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for VLAN and port-channel interfaces on E-Series.
Related
Commands
bfd protocol-liveness
e Enable the BFD protocol liveness feature.
Syntax bfd protocol-liveness
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage Protocol Liveness is a feature that notifies the BFD Manager when a client protocol (e.g OSPF, ISIS) is
Information disabled. When a client is disabled, all BFD sessions for that protocol are torn down. Neighbors on the
remote system receive an Admin Down control packet and are placed in the Down state. Peer routers
might take corrective action by choosing alternative paths for the routes that originally pointed to this
router.

clear bfd counters
ce Clear all BFD counters, or counters for a particular interface.
Syntax clear bfd counters [interface]
Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet
information.
For a port-channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale, and 1 to 512 for
ExaScale
For VLAN interfaces, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094. For ExaScale VLAN interfaces, the range is 1-2730 (VLAN IDs can be
0-4093).
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for VLAN and port-channel interfaces on E-Series
Related
show bfd counters Display BFD counter information.
Commands

debug bfd
ce Enable BFD debugging.
Syntax debug bfd {detail | event | packet} {all | interface} [mode] [count number]
Parameters
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display detailed information about BFD packets.
event (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display information about BFD state. The mode
option is not available with this option.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to display brief information about control
packets.
all Enter this keyword to enable debugging on all interfaces. The count option is not
available with this option.
information.
For a port-channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale, and 1 to 512 for
ExaScale
For VLAN interfaces, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094. For ExaScale VLAN interfaces, the range is 1-2730 (VLAN IDs can be
0-4093).
mode (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following debug transmission modes:
Enter the keyword both to display information for both received and sent packets.
Enter the keyword rx to display information for received packets.
Enter the keyword tx to display information for sent packets.
Default: both
count number (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword followed by the number of debug messages to
display.
Range: 1-65534
Default: Infinitethat is, if a count number is not specified an infinite number of
debug messages will display.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for VLAN and port-channel interfaces on E-Series
Usage Since BFD can potentially transmit 20 packets per interface, debugging information should be
Information restricted.

ip route bfd
ce Enable BFD for all neighbors configured through static routes.
Syntax ip route bfd [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]
Parameters
Range:50-1000
Default:100
Range:50-100
Default:100
Range:3-50
Default:3
Default: Active
Command
History
Related
Commands
isis bfd all-neighbors

e Enable BFD on all IS-IS neighbors discovered on an interface.
Syntax isis bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active
| passive}]]
Parameters
disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface.
Range:50-1000
Default:100

Range:50-100
Default:100
Range:3-50
Default:3
Default: Active
Command
History
Usage This command provides the flexibility to fine tune the timer values based on individual interface needs
Information when ISIS BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode. Any timer values specified with this
command override timers set using the command bfd all-neighbors. Using the no form of this command
will not disable BFD if BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode.
Use the keyword disable to disable BFD on a specific interface while BFD is configured in from
CONFIGURATION mode.
neighbor bfd
Explicitly enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.
ce
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the BGP neighbor that you want to explicitly enable for
BFD sessions in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group that you want to explicitly enable for BFD
sessions.
Defaults None
Command Modes ROUTER BGP
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series TeraScale.
History
Version 8.4.1.3 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale.

Usage When you enable a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor or peer group using the bfd neighbor
Information command, the default BFD session parameters are used (interval: 100 milliseconds, min_rx: 100
milliseconds, multiplier: 3 packets, and role: active) if no parameters have been specified with the bfd
all-neighbors command.
When you explicitly enable a BGP neighbor for a BFD session with the bfd neighbor command:
The neighbor does not inherit the global BFD enable values configured with the bfd all-neighbors
command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs.
The neighbor only inherits the global timer values configured with the bfd all-neighbors command:
interval, min_rx, and multiplier.
Related
bfd all-neighbors Enable BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by Layer 3 protocols.
Commands
neighbor bfd disable Explicitly disable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.
neighbor bfd disable

Explicitly disable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.
ce
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the BGP neighbor that you want to explicitly disable for
BFD sessions in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group that you want to explicitly disable for BFD
sessions.
Defaults None
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series TeraScale.
History
Usage When you explicitly disable a BGP neighbor for a BFD session with the neighbor bfd disable
Information command, the neighbor does not inherit the global BFD values configured with the bfd all-neighbors
command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs.
When you remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor by entering
the no neighbor bfd disable command, the BGP neighbor uses the BFD session parameters globally
configured with the bfd all-neighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor
belongs.
Related
bfd all-neighbors Enable BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by Layer 3 protocols.
Commands
bfd neighbor Explicitly enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.

show bfd counters
Display BFD counter information.
ce
Syntax show bfd counters [bgp | isis | ospf | vrrp | static-route] [interface]
Parameters
gigabitethernet followed by the slot/port information.
tengigabitethernet followed by the slot/port information.
port information.
For a port-channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
followed by a number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale, and 1 to
512 for ExaScale
For VLAN interfaces, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number
from 1 to 4094. For ExaScale VLAN interfaces, the range is 1-2730
(VLAN IDs can be 0-4093).
bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display counter information for BFD
sessions established with BGP neighbors.
isis (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display counter information for BFD
sessions established with ISIS neighbors. This option is not available on
C-Series.
ospf (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display counter information for BFD
sessions established with OSPF neighbors.
static-route (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display counter information for BFD
sessions established with ISIS neighbors.
vrrp (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display counter information for BFD
sessions established with VRRP neighbors.
Defaults None
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 Added support for BFD for BGP on the C-Series and E-Series TeraScale.
History
Version 8.3.7.0 Added support for BFD for BGP on the S4810.
Version 8.4.1.3 Added support for BFD for BGP on the E-Series ExaScale.
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for BFD for VLAN and port-channel interfaces, ISIS, and VRRP
on E-Series.
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced BFD on physical ports, static routes, and OSPF on E-Series.

Example Figure 11-2. show bfd counters Command Example
FTOS#show bfd counters
Interface Tx Rx
GigabitEthernet 1/3 522 625
FTOS#
show bfd neighbors

Display BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface.
ce
Syntax show bfd neighbors interface [detail]
Parameters
gigabitethernet followed by the slot/port information.
port information.
For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale, and 1 to
512 for ExaScale
For VLAN interfaces, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number
from 1 to 4094. For ExaScale VLAN interfaces, the range is 1-2730
(VLAN IDs can be 0-4093).
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed information about
BFD neighbors.
Defaults None
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 Added support for BFD for BGP on the C-Series and E-Series TeraScale.
History
Version 8.4.1.3 Added support for BFD for BGP on the E-Series ExaScale.
Version 7.5.1.0 Added BFD on VLAN and port-channel interfaces on E-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced BFD on physical ports on E-Series

Example Figure 11-3. show bfd neighbors Command
FTOS#show bfd neighbors
* - Active session role

Ad Dn - Admin Down
C - CLI
I - ISIS
O - OSPF
R - Static Route (RTM)
LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients

* 10.1.3.2 10.1.3.1 Gi 1/3 Up 300 250 3 C
FTOS#
Example Figure 11-4. show bfd neighbors detail Command Example

FTOS#show bfd neighbors detail
Session Discriminator: 1
Neighbor Discriminator: 1
Local Addr: 10.1.3.2
Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:02:15:0e
Remote Addr: 10.1.3.1
Remote MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:27:2b:f1
Int: GigabitEthernet 1/3
State: Up
Configured parameters:
TX: 100ms, RX: 100ms, Multiplier: 3
Neighbor parameters:
Actual parameters:
Role: Active
Delete session on Down: False
Client Registered: CLI
Uptime: 00:02:04
Statistics:
Number of packets received from neighbor: 376
Number of packets sent to neighbor: 314
Number of state changes: 2
Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0
Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 6
FTOS#
Related
bfd neighbor Establish a BFD session with a neighbor.
Commands
bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by the IS-IS protocol
or OSPF protocol out of all interfaces.

vrrp bfd
ce Establish a VRRP BFD session.
Syntax vrrp bfd {all-neighbors | neighbor ip-address} [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier
value role {active | passive}]
Parameters
all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all BFD neighbors on an interface.
neighbor ip-address Enter the IP address of the BFD neighbor.
Range:50-1000
Default:100
Range:50-100
Default:100
multiplier Enter this keyword to specify the number of packets that must be missed in
Range:3-50
Default:3
Default: Active
Defaults See Parameters.
Command
History

12
Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)
Overview
BGPv4 is supported as shown in the following table.
FTOS version Platform support

8.1.1.0 E-Series ExaScale
ex
7.8.1.0 S-Series
s
7.7.1.0. C-Series
c
pre-7.7.1.0 E-Series TeraScale
et
For detailed information on configuring BGP, refer to the BGP chapter in the FTOS Configuration
Guide.
This chapter contains the following sections:

BGPv4 Commands
MBGP Commands
BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360)
BGPv4 Commands
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing
information within and between Autonomous Systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports
Classless InterDomain Routing (CIDR) and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two
routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically
send messages to update those routing tables.
Note: FTOS Version 7.7.1 supports 2-Byte (16-bit) and 4-Byte (32-bit) format for Autonomous System Numbers
(ASNs), where the 2-Byte format is 1-65535, the 4-Byte format is 1-4294967295.
Note: FTOS Version 8.3.1.0 supports Dotted format as well as the Traditional Plain format for AS Numbers. The
dot format is displayed when using the show ip bgp commands. To determine the comparable dot format for an
ASN from a traditional format, use ASN/65536. ASN%65536.
For more information about using the 2 or 4-Byte format, refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide.
Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) | 315

The following commands enable you to configure and enable BGP.
address-family
aggregate-address
bgp always-compare-med
bgp asnotation
bgp bestpath as-path ignore
bgp bestpath med confed
bgp bestpath med missing-as-best
bgp bestpath router-id ignore
bgp client-to-client reflection
bgp cluster-id
bgp confederation identifier
bgp confederation peers
bgp dampening
bgp default local-preference
bgp enforce-first-as
bgp fast-external-fallover
bgp four-octet-as-support
bgp graceful-restart
bgp log-neighbor-changes
bgp non-deterministic-med
bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop
bgp regex-eval-optz-disable
bgp retain-ibgp-nexthop
bgp router-id
bgp soft-reconfig-backup
capture bgp-pdu neighbor
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size
clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft
clear ip bgp dampening
clear ip bgp flap-statistics
debug ip bgp
debug ip bgp dampening
debug ip bgp events
debug ip bgp keepalives
debug ip bgp notifications
debug ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft-reconfiguration
debug ip bgp updates
default-metric
description
distance bgp
maximum-paths
neighbor activate
neighbor advertisement-interval
neighbor advertisement-start
neighbor allowas-in
316 | Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)

neighbor default-originate
neighbor description
neighbor distribute-list
neighbor ebgp-multihop
neighbor fall-over
neighbor filter-list
neighbor graceful-restart
neighbor local-as
neighbor maximum-prefix
neighbor next-hop-self
neighbor password
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers)
neighbor peer-group (creating group)
neighbor peer-group passive
neighbor remote-as
neighbor remove-private-as
neighbor route-map
neighbor route-reflector-client
neighbor send-community
neighbor shutdown
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound
neighbor timers
neighbor update-source
neighbor weight
network
network backdoor
redistribute
redistribute isis
redistribute ospf
router bgp
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor
show config
show ip bgp
show ip bgp cluster-list
show ip bgp community
show ip bgp community-list
show ip bgp dampened-paths
show ip bgp detail
show ip bgp extcommunity-list
show ip bgp filter-list
show ip bgp flap-statistics
show ip bgp inconsistent-as
show ip bgp neighbors
show ip bgp next-hop
show ip bgp paths
show ip bgp paths as-path

show ip bgp paths community
show ip bgp peer-group

show ip bgp regexp
show ip bgp summary
show running-config bgp
timers bgp
address-family
ces Enable the IPv4 multicast or the IPv6 address family.
Syntax address-family [ipv4 multicast| ipv6unicast]
Parameters
ipv4 multicast Enter BGPv4 multicast mode.
ipv6 unicast Enter BGPv6 mode.
Command
.

History
aggregate-address
ces Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.
Syntax aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map

map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name]
Parameters
ip-address mask Enter the IP address and mask of the route to be the aggregate address. Enter the IP
address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) and mask in /prefix format (/x).
advertise-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate route.
as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword as-set to generate path attribute information and
include it in the aggregate.
AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included
in the aggregated route.
attribute-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords attribute-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to modify attributes of the aggregate, excluding AS_PATH
and NEXT_HOP attributes.
summary-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary-only to advertise only the aggregate
address. Specific routes will not be advertised.
suppress-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords suppress-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to identify which more-specific routes in the aggregate are
suppressed.

Command Modes ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY
ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY IPv6
Usage At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the
Information configured aggregate to become active.
Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate, if routes within the aggregate are constantly
changing as the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH.
In route maps used in the suppress-map parameter, routes meeting the deny clause are not
suppress; in other words, they are allowed. The opposite is true: routes meeting the permit clause are
suppressed.
If the route is injected via the network command, that route will still appear in the routing table if the
summary-only parameter is configured in the aggregate-address command.
The summary-only parameter suppresses all advertisements. If you want to suppress advertisements to
only specific neighbors, use the neighbor distribute-list command.
In the show ip bgp command, aggregates contain an a in the first column and routes suppressed by
the aggregate contain an s in the first column.
Command
.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series

History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced support on C-Series
ces Enables you to enable comparison of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attributes in the paths from
different external ASs.
Syntax bgp always-compare-med

To disable comparison of MED, enter no bgp always-compare-med.
Defaults Disabled (that is, the software only compares MEDs from neighbors within the same AS).
Usage Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route
Information
If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft * command to recompute the best
path.
Command
.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced command

History

bgp asnotation
ces Enables you to implement a method for AS Number representation in the CLI.
Syntax bgp asnotation [asplain | asdot+ | asdot]

To disable a dot or dot+ representation and return to ASPLAIN, enter no bgp asnotation.
Defaults asplain
Usage You must enable bgp four-octet-as-support before enabling this feature. If you disable
Information four-octet-support after using dot or dot+ format, the AS Numbers revert to asplain text.
When you apply an asnotation, it is reflected in the running-configuration. If you change the notation
type, the running-config is updated dynamically and the new notation is shown.
Related
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process
Commands
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced Dynamic Application of AS Notation changes
History
Example Figure 12-1. Dynamic changes of the bgp asnotation command in the running config
(conf)#router bgp 1
(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asdot
(conf-router_bgp)#ex
(conf)#do show run | grep bgp
router bgp 1
bgp asnotation asdot
(conf)#router bgp 1
(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asdot+
(conf)#do show run | grep bgp

router bgp 1
bgp asnotation asdot+
(conf)#router bgp 1
(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asplain
(conf)#do show run |grep bgp
router bgp 1
(conf)#

ces Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations.
Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore

To return to the default, enter no bgp bestpath as-path ignore.
Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best).
Usage If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft * command to recompute the best
Information path.
Command
History

ces Enable MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute comparison on paths learned from BGP confederations.
Syntax bgp bestpath med confed
To disable MED comparison on BGP confederation paths, enter no bgp bestpath med confed.
Defaults Disabled
Usage The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers. If
Information you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft * command to recompute the best path.
Command
History

ces During path selection, indicate preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over
those paths with an advertised MED attribute.
Syntax bgp bestpath med missing-as-best

To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath med missing-as-best command.
Defaults Disabled

Usage The MED is a 4-Byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as
Information 4294967295. This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0. During the path selection, paths
with a lower MED are preferred over those with a higher MED.
Command
History
bgp bestpath router-id ignore

ces Do not compare router-id information for external paths during best path selection.
Syntax bgp bestpath router-id ignore

To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath router-id ignore command.
Defaults Disabled
Usage Configuring this option will retain the current best-path. When the session is subsequently reset, the
Information oldest received path will be chosen as the best-path.
Command
History

ces Enables you to enable route reflection between clients in a cluster.
Syntax bgp client-to-client reflection

To disable client-to-client reflection, enter no bgp client-to-client reflection.
Defaults Enabled when a route reflector is configured.
Usage Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed.
Information
Related
bgp cluster-id Assign ID to a BGP cluster with two or more route reflectors.
Commands
neighbor route-reflector-client Configure a route reflector and clients.
Command
History

bgp cluster-id
ces Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector.
Syntax bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number}

To delete a cluster ID, use the no bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address as the route reflector cluster ID.
number Enter a route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295.
Usage When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflectors router ID.
Information For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors and you assign a cluster ID
with the bgp cluster-id command. Without a cluster ID, the route reflector cannot recognize route
updates from the other route reflectors within the cluster.
The default format for displaying the cluster-id is dotted decimal, but if you enter the cluster-id as an
integer, it will be displayed as an integer.
Related
bgp client-to-client reflection Enable route reflection between route reflector and clients.
Commands
show ip bgp cluster-list View paths with a cluster ID.
Command
History

ces Configure an identifier for a BGP confederation.
Syntax bgp confederation identifier as-number

To delete a BGP confederation identifier, use the no bgp confederation identifier as-number
command.
Parameters
as-number Enter the AS number.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
Usage You must configure your system to accept 4-Byte formats before entering a 4-Byte AS Number. All
Information the routers in the Confederation must be 4 or 2-Byte identified routers. You cannot mix them.

The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each
autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. The
next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved throughout the confederation.
FTOS accepts confederation EBGP peers without a LOCAL_PREF attribute. The software sends
AS_CONFED_SET and accepts AS_CONFED_SET and AS_CONF_SEQ.
Related
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process.
Commands
Command
History
Added support for 4-Byte format

ces Specify the Autonomous Systems (ASs) that belong to the BGP confederation.
Syntax bgp confederation peers as-number [...as-number]

To return to the default, enter no bgp confederation peers.
Parameters
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
...as-number (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 confederation numbers.
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
Usage All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them.
Information
The Autonomous Systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each
Autonomous System is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other Autonomous Systems.
After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation, recycle the peers to update
their configuration.
Related
bgp confederation identifier Configure a confederation ID.
Commands
Command
History
Added support for 4-Byte format

bgp dampening
ces Enable BGP route dampening and configure the dampening parameters.
Syntax bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name]

To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress
max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
half-life (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is
decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty
is decreased by half after the half-life period expires.
Range: 1 to 45.
Default: 15 minutes
reuse (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the reuse value, which is compared to the
flapping routes Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse
value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed).
Range: 1 to 20000.
Default: 750
suppress (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the suppress value, which is compared to
the flapping routes Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the
suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is
suppressed).
Range: 1 to 20000.
Default: 2000
max-suppress-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the maximum number of minutes a route can be
suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 60 minutes.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
configured route map.
Only match commands in the configured route map are supported.
Defaults Disabled.
Command Modes ROUTER-BGP-ADDRESS FAMILY
Usage If you enter bgp dampening, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and
Information max-suppress-time are applied. The parameters are position-dependent, therefore, if you configure one
parameter, you must configure the parameters in the order they appear in the CLI.
Related
show ip bgp dampened-paths View the BGP paths
Commands
Command
History

ces Change the default local preference value for routes exchanged between internal BGP peers.
Syntax bgp default local-preference value

To return to the default value, enter no bgp default local-preference.
Parameters
value Enter a number to assign to routes as the degree of preference for those routes. When
routes are compared, the higher the degree of preference or local preference value, the
more the route is preferred.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Default: 100
Defaults 100
Usage The bgp default local-preference command setting is applied by all routers within the AS. To set the
Information local preference for a specific route, use the set local-preference command in the ROUTE-MAP mode.
Related
set local-preference Assign a local preference value for a specific route.
Commands
Command
History
ces Disable (or enable) enforce-first-as check for updates received from EBGP peers.
Syntax bgp enforce-first-as
To turn off the default, use the no bgp enforce-first-as command.
Defaults Enabled
Usage This is enabled by default, that is for all updates received from EBGP peers, BGP ensures that the first
Information AS of the first AS segment is always the AS of the peer. If not, the update is dropped and a counter is
incremented. Use the show ip bgp neighbors command to view the failed enforce-first-as check
counter.
If enforce-first-as is disabled, it can be viewed via the show ip protocols command.
Related
show ip bgp neighbors View the information exchanged by BGP neighbors
Commands
show ip protocols View Information on routing protocols.
Command
History

ces Enable the fast external fallover feature, which immediately resets the BGP session if a link to a
directly connected external peer fails.
Syntax bgp fast-external-fallover
To disable fast external fallover, enter no bgp fast-external-fallover.
Defaults Enabled.
Usage The bgp fast-external-fallover command appears in the show config command output.
Information
Command
History
ces Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process.
Syntax bgp four-octet-as-support
To disable fast external fallover, enter no bgp four-octet-as-support.
Defaults Disabled (supports 2-Byte format)
Usage Routers supporting 4-Byte ASNs advertise that function in the OPEN message. The behavior of a
Information 4-Byte router will be slightly different depending on whether it is speaking to a 2-Byte router or a
4-Byte router.
When creating Confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be 4 or 2 byte identified
routers. You cannot mix them.
Where the 2-Byte format is 1-65535, the 4-Byte format is 1-4294967295. Both formats are accepted,
and the advertisements will reflect the entered format.
Command
History
Introduced support on C-Series

ces Enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor, a BGP node, or designate a local router to support graceful
restart as a receiver only.
Syntax bgp graceful-restart [restart-time seconds] [stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only]

To return to the default, enter the no bgp graceful-restart command.
Parameters
restart-time seconds Enter the keyword restart-time followed by the maximum number of
seconds needed to restart and bring-up all the peers.
Default: 120 seconds
stale-path-time seconds Enter the keyword stale-path-time followed by the maximum
number of seconds to wait before restarting a peers stale paths.
Default: 360 seconds.
role receiver-only Enter the keyword role receiver-only to designate the local router to
support graceful restart as a receiver only.
Defaults as above
Command Modes ROUTER-BGP
Usage This feature is advertised to BGP neighbors through a capability advertisement. In receiver only mode,
Information BGP saves the advertised routes of peers that support this capability when they restart.
BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise it is disabled.
Graceful-restart applies to all neighbors with established adjacency.
Command
History
ces Enable logging of BGP neighbor resets.
Syntax bgp log-neighbor-changes

To disable logging, enter no bgp log-neighbor-changes.
Defaults Enabled.
Usage Use the show logging command in the EXEC mode to view BGP neighbor resets.
Information
The bgp log-neighbor-changes command appears in the show config command output.
Related
show logging View logging settings and system messages logged to the system.
Commands

Command
History
ces Compare MEDs of paths from different Autonomous Systems.
Syntax bgp non-deterministic-med
To return to the default, enter no bgp non-deterministic-med.
Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs will not have their MEDs
compared).
Usage In non-deterministic mode, paths are compared in the order in which they arrive. This method can lead
Information to FTOS choosing different best paths from a set of paths, depending on the order in which they are
received from the neighbors since MED may or may not get compared between adjacent paths. In
deterministic mode (no bgp non-deterministic-med), FTOS compares MED between adjacent
paths within an AS group since all paths in the AS group are from the same AS.
When you change the path selection from deterministic to non-deterministic, the path selection for
existing paths remains deterministic until you enter clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft command to clear
existing paths.
Command
History
ces Enable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP.
Syntax bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop
To disable next-hop resolution, use the no bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop command.
Defaults Enabled
Usage This command is a knob to disable BGP next-hop resolution via BGP learned routes. During the
Information next-hop resolution, only the first route that the next-hop resolves through is verified for the routes
protocol source and is checked if the route is learned from BGP or not.
The clear ip bgp command is required for this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database
consistent. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command.

Related
Commands
clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for IPv4 routes without resetting the TCP
connection; that is, perform BGP soft reconfiguration.
Command
History
ces Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP.
Syntax bgp regex-eval-optz-disable
To re-enable optimization engine, use the no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable command.
Defaults Enabled by default
Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp)
Usage BGP uses regular expressions (regex) to filter route information. In particular, the use of regular
Information expressions to filter routes based on AS-PATHs and communities is quite common. In a large scale
configuration, filtering millions of routes based on regular expressions can be quite CPU intensive, as a
regular expression evaluation involves generation and evaluation of complex finite state machines.
BGP policies, containing regular expressions to match as-path and communities, tend to use a lot of
CPU processing time, which in turn affects the BGP routing convergence. Additionally, the show bgp
commands, which are filtered through regular expressions, use up CPU cycles particularly with large
databases. The Regex Engine Performance Enhancement feature optimizes the CPU usage by caching
and reusing regular expression evaluation results. This caching and reuse may be at the expensive of
RP1 processor memory.
Related
show ip protocols View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the E-Series.
Commands
Command
History

Example Figure 12-2. Command Example: no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable
(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable
(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip protocols
Routing Protocol is "ospf 22222"
Router ID is 2.2.2.2
Area Routing for Networks
51 10.10.10.0/00
Routing Protocol is "bgp 1"

Cluster Id is set to 10.10.10.0
Router Id is set to 10.10.10.0
Fast-external-fallover enabled
Regular expression evaluation optimization enabled
Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH
For Address Family IPv4 Unicast
BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0
Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200
(conf-router_bgp)#
bgp retain-ibgp-nexthop
ces BGP does not update the NEXT_HOP attribute if it is a Route-Reflector. Use this command to retain
the NEXT_HOP attribute when advertising to internal BGP peer.
Syntax bgp retain-ibgp-nexthop
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series TeraScale, C-Series, and S-Series.
History
Version 8.3.1.2 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale.
bgp router-id
ces Assign a user-given ID to a BGP router.
Syntax bgp router-id ip-address

To delete a user-assigned IP address, enter no bgp router-id.
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor.
Defaults The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or, if no Loopback interfaces are
configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router.
Usage Peering sessions are reset when you change the router ID of a BGP router.
Information

Command

History
ces Use this command only when route-refresh is not negotiated between peers to avoid having a peer
resend BGP updates.
Syntax bgp soft-reconfig-backup
To return to the default setting, use the no bgp soft-reconfig-backup command.
Defaults Off
Usage When soft-reconfiguration is enabled for a neighbor and the clear ip bgp soft in is executed, the
Information update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the
replay and update process is triggered only if route-refresh request is not negotiated with the peer. If
the request is indeed negotiated (upon execution of clear ip bgp soft in), then BGP sends a
route-refresh request to the neighbor and receives all of the peers updates.
Related
clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft Activate inbound policies for IPv4 routes without resetting the BGP TCP
Commands
in session.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv4 multicast and IPv6 unicast address families
History
capture bgp-pdu neighbor

ces Enable capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet.
Syntax capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv4-address direction {both | rx | tx}

To disable capture of the IPv4 BGP neighbor packet, use the no capture bgp-pdu neighbor
ipv4-address command.
Parameters
ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address of the target BGP neighbor.
direction {both | rx | tx} Enter the keyword direction and a direction either rx for
inbound, tx for outbound, or both.

Related
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Specify a size for the capture buffer.
Commands
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information
Command
History

ces Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
Syntax capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size 100-102400000
Parameters
100-102400000 Enter a size for the capture buffer.
Defaults 40960000 bytes.
Related
capture bgp-pdu neighbor Enable capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet.
Commands
capture bgp-pdu neighbor (ipv6) Enable capture of an IPv6 BGP neighbor packet.
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv6 address on the
E-Series.
Command
History

ces Clear and reapply policies for IPv4 routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is, perform BGP
soft reconfiguration.
Syntax clear ip bgp {* | as-number | ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighbor-addr | peer-group name}

[ipv4 unicast] soft [in | out]
Parameters
* Clear and reapply policies for all BGP sessions.
as-number Clear and reapply policies for all neighbors belonging to the AS.
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
ipv4-neighbor-addr | Clear and reapply policies for a neighbor.
ipv6-neighbor-addr
peer-group name Clear and reapply policies for all BGP routers in the specified peer group.
ipv4 unicast Clear and reapply policies for all IPv4 unicast routes.

in Reapply only inbound policies. Note: If you enter soft, without an in or

out option, both inbound and outbound policies are reset.
out Reapply only outbound policies. Note: If you enter soft, without an in or
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added BGP Soft Reconfiguration support for IPv4 unicast and IPv6 routes
History
clear ip bgp peer-group

ces Reset a peer-groups BGP sessions.
Syntax clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group.
Command
History

ces Clear information on route dampening and return suppressed route to active state.
Syntax clear ip bgp dampening [ip-address mask]
Parameters
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask
in slash format (/x) to clear dampening information only that BGP neighbor.
Usage After you enter this command, the software deletes history routes and returns suppressed routes to
Information active state.
Command
History

ces Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap.
Syntax clear ip bgp flap-statistics [ip-address mask | filter-list as-path-name | regexp

regular-expression]
Parameters
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask
in slash format (/x) to reset only that prefix.
filter-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a
as-path-name configured AS-PATH list.
regexp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp followed by regular expressions. Use
regular-expression one or a combination of the following:
. = (period) any single character (including a white space)
* = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences)
+ = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences)
? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences). You
must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
[ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns.
( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element
{ } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count
^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the
beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the
characters specified.
$ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.
Usage If you enter clear ip bgp flap-statistics without any parameters, all statistics are cleared.
Information
Related
show debugging View enabled debugging operations.
Commands
show ip bgp flap-statistics View BGP flap statistics.
undebug all Disable all debugging operations.
Command
History
debug ip bgp
ces Display all information on BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and updates.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] [in | out]
To disable all BGP debugging, enter no debug ip bgp.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.

peer-group Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the peer group.
peer-group-name
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP
routes.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound
BGP routes.
Usage To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters
Information in the debugging command. The in and out parameters cancel each other; for example, if you enter
debug ip bgp in and then enter debug ip bgp out, you will not see information on the incoming
routes.
Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP.
Related
debug ip bgp events View information about BGP events.
Commands
debug ip bgp keepalives View information about BGP keepalives.
debug ip bgp notifications View information about BGP notifications.
debug ip bgp updates View information about BGP updates.
Command
History

ces Display information on routes being dampened.
Syntax debug ip bgp dampening [in | out]
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp dampening.
Parameters
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound dampened routes.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound dampened routes.
Usage Enter no debug ip bgp command to remove all configured debug commands for BGP.
Information
Related
Commands
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP dampened routes.

Command
History
debug ip bgp events

ces Display information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out]
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name]

events command.
Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the
peer-group-name peer group.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only events on inbound BGP
messages.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only events on outbound BGP
messages.
Information
Command
History

ces Display information about BGP keepalive messages.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalives [in | out]

keepalives [in | out] command.
Parameters
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound keepalive messages.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound keepalive
messages.

Information
Command
History

ces Enables you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out]

notifications [in | out] command.
Parameters
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view BGP notifications received from
neighbors.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view BGP notifications sent to
neighbors.
Information
Command
History

ces Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv4 unicast routes.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv4 unicast

soft-reconfiguration
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address |

peer-group-name] ipv4 unicast soft-reconfiguration command.
Parameters
ipv4-address | Enter the IP address of the neighbor on which you want to enable
ipv6-address soft-reconfiguration debugging.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group on which you want to enable soft-reconfiguration
debugging.
ipv4 unicast Debug soft reconfiguration for IPv4 unicast routes.
Defaults Disabled

Usage This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv4 unicast routes. If no
Information neighbor is specified, debug is turned on for all neighbors.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced support for IPv4 multicast and IPv6 unicast routes
History

ces Enables you to view information about BGP updates.
Syntax debug ip bgp updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-list-name]

updates [in | out] command.
Parameters
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from
neighbors.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to
neighbors.
prefix-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefix-list followed by the name of an
prefix-list-name established prefix list. If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to
allow all routes).
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers
within the peer group.
Information
Command
Version 7.7.1 Introduced support on C-Series
History
default-metric
ces Enables you to change the metrics of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this
command with the redistribute command.
Syntax default-metric number
To return to the default setting, enter no default-metric.
Parameters
number Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.

Defaults 0
Usage The default-metric command in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute
Information for redistributed routes only.
Related
bgp always-compare-med Enable comparison of all BGP MED attributes.
Commands
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into BGP.
Command
History
description
ces Enter a description of the BGP routing protocol.
To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the BGP protocol (80 characters maximum).
Command
History
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced
Related
router bgp Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Commands
distance bgp
ces Configure three administrative distances for routes.
Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance
To return to default values, enter no distance bgp.

Parameters
external-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a neighbor external to the AS.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 20
internal-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a router within the AS.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
local-distance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from networks listed in the network
command.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
Defaults external-distance = 20; internal-distance = 200; local-distance = 200.
Caution: Dell Force10 recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of
internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table
inconsistencies.
Usage The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your confidence in that route is
Information low. Routes assigned an administrative distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table. Routes
from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes.
Command
History
maximum-paths
ces Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports.
Syntax maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number
To return to the default values, enter no maximum-paths.
Parameters
ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes.
ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes.
number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths.
Range: 1 to 16
Default: 1
Defaults 1
Usage If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft * command to recompute the best
Information path.

Command

History
neighbor activate
ces This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI
(Address Family Identifier/Subsequent Address Family Identifier).
Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate
To disable, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate command.
Parameters
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group
activate Enter the keyword activate to enable the neighbor/peer group in the new
AFI/SAFI.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-BGP-ADDRESS FAMILY
Usage By default, when a neighbor/peer group configuration is created in the Router BGP context, it is
Information enabled for the IPv4/Unicast AFI/SAFI. By using activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer
group is enabled for AFI/SAFI.
Command
History
ces Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

advertisement-interval command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers
in the peer group.
seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP advertisements.
Range: 0 to 600 seconds.
Default: 5 seconds for internal BGP peers; 30 seconds for external BGP peers.
Defaults seconds = 5 seconds (internal peers); seconds = 30 seconds (external peers)

Command
History
neighbor advertisement-start
ces Set the minimum interval before starting to send BGP routing updates.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start seconds
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start command.
Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, before BGP route updates are
sent.
Defaults none
Command
History
neighbor allowas-in
ces Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in number
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in
command.
Parameters
in the peer group.
number Enter a number of times to allow this neighbor ID to use the AS path.
Range: 1 to 10.
Related
Commands
Command
History

ces Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name]
To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

default-originate command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer
group.
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map.
Usage If you apply a route map to a BGP peer or neighbor with the neighbor default-originate command
Information configured, the software does not apply the set filters in the route map to that BGP peer or neighbor.
Command
History
ces Assign a character string describing the neighbor or group of neighbors (peer group).
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} description text
To delete a description, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} description

command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
text Enter a continuous text string up to 80 characters.
Command
History

ces Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out}
To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the distribute list filter to all routers
in the peer group.
prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established prefix list.
If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes).
in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic.
out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic.
Usage Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list, ip as-path access-list, and neighbor
Information route-map.
Related
ip as-path access-list Configure IP AS-Path ACL.
Commands
neighbor filter-list Assign a AS-PATH list to a neighbor or peer group.
neighbor route-map Assign a route map to a neighbor or peer group.
Command
History
ces Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl]
To disallow and disconnect connections, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

ebgp-multihop command.
Parameters
ttl (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of hops as the Time to Live (ttl) value.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 255
Defaults Disabled.

Usage To prevent loops, the neighbor ebgp-multihop command will not install default routes of the multihop
Information peer. Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best path selection.
Command
History
neighbor fall-over
ecs Enable or disable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors.
Syntax neighbor {ipv4-address | peer-group-name} fall-over
To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv4-address | peer-group-name} fall-over command.
Parameters
ipv4-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
Defaults Disabled
Usage When fall-over is enabled, BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 reachability to the peer remote address and
Information the peer local address. Whenever either address becomes unreachable (i.e, no active route exists in the
routing table for peer IP or IPv6 destination/local address), BGP brings down the session with the peer.
Related
show ip bgp neighbors Display information on the BGP neighbors
Commands
Command
History
ces Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out}
To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list

as-path-name {in | out} command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the
peer group.

as-path-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH access list (up to 140
characters).
If the AS-PATH access list is not configured, the default is permit (allow
routes).
in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound BGP routes.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound BGP routes.
Usage Use the ip as-path access-list command syntax in the CONFIGURATION mode to enter the AS-PATH
Information ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters to deny or permit BGP routes based on information in their
AS-PATH attribute.
Related
ip as-path access-list Enter AS-PATH ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters.
Commands
Command
History
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, ACL names are up
neighbor graceful-restart
ces Enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} graceful-restart [restart-time seconds]

[stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only]
Parameters
peer group.
seconds needed to restart and bring-up all the peers.
Defaults as above

Command
History
neighbor local-as
ces Configure Internal BGP (IBGP) routers to accept external routes from neighbors with a local AS
number in the AS number path
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} local-as as-number [no-prepend]
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} local-as
command.
Parameters
in the peer group.
as-number Enter the AS number to reset all neighbors belonging to that AS.
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
no prepend Specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the
neighbor.
Related
Commands
Command
History
Introduced support on C-Series
ces Control the number of network prefixes received.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold]

[warning-only]
To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

maximum-prefix maximum command.

Parameters
maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value.
When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value, the
E-Series software sends a message.
Range: 1 to 100 percent.
Default: 75
warning-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword warning-only to set the router to send a log
message when the maximum value is reached. If this parameter is not set, the
router stops peering when the maximum number of prefixes is reached.
Defaults threshold = 75
Usage If the neighbor maximum-prefix is configured and the neighbor receives more prefixes than allowed by
Information the neighbor maximum-prefix command configuration, the neighbor goes down and the show ip bgp
summary command displays (prfxd) in the State/PfxRcd column for that neighbor. The neighbor
remains down until you enter the clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft command for the neighbor or the peer
group to which the neighbor belongs or you enter neighbor shutdown and neighbor no shutdown
commands.
Related
show ip bgp summary Displays the current BGP configuration.
Commands
Command
History
ces Enables you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. (This command is used for
IBGP).
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self
To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

next-hop-self command.
Parameters
Defaults Disabled.
Usage If the set next-hop command in the ROUTE-MAP mode is configured, its configuration takes
Information precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.

Command

History
neighbor password
ces Enable Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication on the TCP connection between two neighbors.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} password [encryption-type] password
To delete a password, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} password

command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the router to be included in the peer group.
peer-group-name Enter the name of a configured peer group.
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 as the encryption type for the password entered. 7
means that the password is encrypted and hidden.
password Enter a text string up to 80 characters long. The first character of the password
must be a letter.
You cannot use spaces in the password.
Usage Configure the same password on both BGP peers or a connection does not occur. When you configure
Information MD5 authentication between two BGP peers, each segment of the TCP connection between them is
verified and the MD5 digest is checked on every segment sent on the TCP connection.
Configuring a password for a neighbor will cause an existing session to be torn down and a new one
established.
If you specify a BGP peer group by using the peer-group-name parameter, all the members of the
peer group will inherit the characteristic configured with this command.
If you configure a password on one neighbor, but you have not configured a password for the
neighboring router, the following message appears on the console while the routers attempt to establish
a BGP session between them:
%RPM0-P:RP1 %KERN-6-INT: No BGP MD5 from [peer's IP address] :179 to

[local router's IP address]:65524
Also, if you configure different passwords on the two routers, the following message appears on the
console:
%RPM0-P:RP1 %KERN-6-INT: BGP MD5 password mismatch from [peer's IP

address] : 11502 to [local router's IP address] :179
Command
History

ces Enables you to assign one peer to a existing peer group.
Syntax neighbor ip-address peer-group peer-group-name
To delete a peer from a peer group, use the no neighbor ip-address peer-group
peer-group-name command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the router to be included in the peer group.
peer-group-name Enter the name of a configured peer group.
Usage You can assign up to 256 peers to one peer group.

Information
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer groups configured parameters. A peer
cannot become part of a peer group if any of the following commands are configured on the peer:
neighbor distribute-list out
neighbor filter-list out
neighbor route-map out
A neighbor may keep its configuration after it was added to a peer group if the neighbors
configuration is more specific than the peer groups, and the neighbors configuration does not affect
outgoing updates.
A peer group must exist before you add a peer to it. If the peer group is disabled (shutdown) the peers
within the group are also disabled (shutdown).
Related
clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft Resets BGP sessions.
Commands
neighbor peer-group (creating group) Create a peer group.
show ip bgp peer-group View BGP peers.
show ip bgp neighbors View BGP neighbors configurations.
Command
History

ces Enables you to create a peer group and assign it a name.
Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group

To delete a peer group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group.
Usage When a peer group is created, it is disabled (shut mode).

Information
Related
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) Assign routers to a peer group.
Commands
neighbor remote-as Assign a indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group.
neighbor shutdown Disable a peer or peer group.
Command
History

ces Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group, that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message,
but will respond to one.
Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive [match-af]
To delete a passive peer-group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive

command.
Parameters
match-af (Optional) Enter the keyword match-af to require that the address family of a peer
matches the address family of the subnet assigned to the specified peer group before
the peers adjacency is brought up.
Usage After you configure a peer group as passive, you must assign it a subnet using the neighbor
Information soft-reconfiguration inbound command.
Use the keyword match-af to restrict the peer adjacency established with a passive peer group.
Entering match-af requires that a peers address family matches the address family of the subnet
assigned to the peer group before the peers adjacency is brought up. For example, if the address
family of the peer groups subnet is IPv6, only IPv6 neighbors in the subnet can be brought up in a
peering session.
You can only specify the match-af option when you first enter the neighbor peer-group passive
command to configure passive peering for a BGP group. An error message is displayed if you later try
to add this option to an existing passive peer group by re-entering the command.

Related
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound Assign a subnet to a dynamically-configured BGP neighbor.
Commands
Command
Version 8.4.2.0 Added support for the match-af keyword
History
neighbor remote-as
ces Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as number
To delete a remote AS entry, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as

number command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to enter the remote AS in its routing table.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to enter the remote AS into routing tables of all
routers within the peer group.
number Enter a number of the AS.
Range: 0-65535 (2-Byte) or 1-4294967295 (4-Byte)
Usage You must configure your system to accept 4-Byte formats before entering a 4-Byte AS Number. If the
Information number parameter is the same as the AS number used in the router bgp command, the remote AS entry
in the neighbor is considered an internal BGP peer entry.
This command creates a peer and the newly created peer is disabled (shutdown).
Related
router bgp Enter the ROUTER BGP mode and configure routes in an AS.
Commands
Command
History
Added 4-Byte support.
ces Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as
To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

remove-private-as command.

Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to remove the private AS numbers.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers
Defaults Disabled (that is, private AS number are not removed).
Usage Applies to EBGP neighbors only.

Information
You must configure your system to accept 4-Byte formats before entering a 4-Byte AS Number.
If the AS-PATH contains both public and private AS number or contains AS numbers of an EBGP
neighbor, the private AS numbers are not removed.
If a confederation contains private AS numbers in its AS-PATH, the software removes the private AS
numbers only if they follow the confederation numbers in the AS path.
Private AS numbers are 64512 to 65535 (2-Byte).
Command
History
Added 4-Byte support.
neighbor route-map
ces Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or peer
group.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out}
To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map
map-name {in | out} command.
Parameters
map-name Enter the name of an established route map.
If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).
in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes.
Usage When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route
Information map are permitted.

If you identify a peer group by name, the peers in that peer group inherit the characteristics in the
Route map used in this command. If you identify a peer by IP address, the Route map overwrites either
the inbound or outbound policies on that peer.
Command
History

ces Configure the router as a route reflector and the specified neighbors as members of the cluster.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client
To remove one or more neighbors from a cluster, use the no neighbor {ip-address |
peer-group-name} route-reflector-client command. If you delete all members of a cluster, you
also delete the route-reflector configuration on the router.
Parameters
All routers in the peer group receive routes from a route reflector.
Usage A route reflector reflects routes to the neighbors assigned to the cluster. Neighbors in the cluster do not
Information need not be fully meshed. By default, when no route reflector is used, internal BGP (IBGP) speakers in
the network must be fully meshed.
The first time you enter this command the router is configured as a route reflector and the specified
BGP neighbors are configured as clients in the route-reflector cluster.
When you remove all clients of a route reflector using the no neighbor route-reflector-client
command, the router no longer functions as a route reflector.
If the clients of a route reflector are fully meshed, you can configure the route reflector to not reflect
routes to specified clients by using the no bgp client-to-client reflection command.
Related
Commands
Command
History

ces Send a COMMUNITY attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. A COMMUNITY attribute indicates
that all routes with that attribute belong to the same community grouping.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} send-community
To disable sending a COMMUNITY attribute, use the no neighbor {ip-address |

peer-group-name} send-community command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to send a COMMUNITY attribute to all
Defaults Not configured and COMMUNITY attributes are not sent to neighbors.
Usage To configure a COMMUNITY attribute, use the set community command in the ROUTE-MAP mode.
Information
Command
History
neighbor shutdown
ces Disable a BGP neighbor or peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} shutdown
To enable a disabled neighbor or peer group, use the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no
shutdown command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer
group.
Defaults Enabled (that is, BGP neighbors and peer groups are disabled.)
Usage Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled.
Information
The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer
group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or
peer group is shutdown, use the show ip bgp summary command to confirm its status.
Related
show ip bgp summary Displays the current BGP configuration.
Commands
show ip bgp neighbors Displays the current BGP neighbors.

Command

History

ces Enable a BGP soft-reconfiguration and start storing inbound route updates.
Syntax neighbor {ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration inbound
Parameters
ipv4-address | Enter the IP address of the neighbor for which you want to start storing
ipv6-address inbound routing updates.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group for which you want to start storing inbound
routing updates.
Defaults Disabled
Usage This command enables soft-reconfiguration for the specified BGP neighbor. BGP will store all updates
Information for inbound IPv4 routes received by the neighbor but will not reset the peer-session.
Caution: Inbound update storage is a memory-intensive operation. The entire BGP update
database from the neighbor is stored in memory regardless of the inbound policy results
applied on the neighbor.
Related
show ip bgp neighbors Display routes received on a neighbor
Commands
Command
History

neighbor subnet
ces Enable passive peering so that the members of the peer group are dynamic
Syntax neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask
To remove passive peering, use the no neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask
command.
Parameters
subnet-number Enter a subnet number in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) as the allowable range of
addresses included in the Peer group.
To allow all addresses, enter 0.0.0.0/0.
mask Enter a prefix mask in / prefix-length format (/x).
Command
History
neighbor timers
ces Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime
To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} timers
command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the timers for all routers within the peer
group.
keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent
to the neighbor routers.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 60 seconds
holdtime Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive
message and declaring the router dead.
Range: 3 to 65535
Defaults keepalive = 60 seconds; holdtime = 180 seconds.
Usage Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with
Information the any other command.

When two neighbors, configured with different keepalive and holdtime values, negotiate for new
values, the resulting values will be as follows:
the lower of the holdtime values is the new holdtime value, and
whichever is the lower value; one-third of the new holdtime value, or the configured keepalive
value is the new keepalive value.
Command
History
ces Enable the E-Series software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface
To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}

update-source interface command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group.
interface Enter the keyword loopback followed by a number of the loopback interface.
Range: 0 to 16383.
Usage Loopback interfaces are up constantly and the BGP session may need one interface constantly up to
Information stabilize the session. The neighbor update-source command is not necessary for directly connected
internal BGP sessions.
Command
History
neighbor weight
ces Assign a weight to the neighbor connection, which is used to determine the best path.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight weight
To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight

command.
Parameters

peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group.
weight Enter a number as the weight.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0
Defaults 0
Usage In the FTOS best path selection process, the path with the highest weight value is preferred.
Information
Note: Reset the neighbor connection (clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast soft * command) to apply the
weight to the connection and recompute the best path.
If the set weight command is configured in a route map applied to this neighbor, the weight set in that
command overrides the weight set in the neighbor weight command.
Related
set weight Assign a weight to all paths meeting the route map criteria.
Commands
Command
History
network
ces Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.
Syntax network ip-address mask [route-map map-name]
To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network.
mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24).
The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an established route
map-name map.
Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported:
match ip address
set community
set metric
set next-hop
set origin
set weight
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).

Usage FTOS software resolves the network address configured by the network command with the routes in
Information the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable via non-BGP routes and non-default
routes.
Related
redistribute Redistribute routes into BGP.
Commands
Command
History
network backdoor
ces Specify this IGP route as the preferred route.
Syntax network ip-address mask backdoor
To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask backdoor command.
Parameters
Usage Though FTOS does not generate a route due to backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/
Information sourcing a local route in presence of network backdoor config on a learned route.
Command
History
redistribute
ces Redistribute routes into BGP.
Syntax redistribute {connected | static} [route-map map-name]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution {connected | static} command.
Parameters
connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected
interfaces.

static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes.
These routes are treated as incomplete routes.
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an established
map-name route map.
match ip address
set community
set metric
set next-hop
set origin
set weight
Usage With FTOS version 8.3.1.0 and later, the redistribute command can be used to advertise the IGP cost as
Information the MED on redistributed routes. When the route-map is set with metric-type internal and applied
outbound to an EBGP peer/peer-group, the advertised routes corresponding to those peer/peer-group
will have IGP cost set as MED.
If you do not configure default-metric command, in addition to the redistribute command, or there is no
route map to set the metric, the metric for redistributed static and connected is 0.
To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0) configure the neighbor default-originate command.
Related
neighbor default-originate Inject the default route.
Commands
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced ability to substitute IGP cost for MED when a peer/peer-group outbound
History
route-map is set as internal.
redistribute isis
e Redistribute IS-IS routes into BGP.
Syntax redistribute isis [WORD] [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [route-map
map-name]
To return to the default values, enter the no redistribute isis [WORD] [level-1| level-1-2 |
level-2] [metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
WORD ISO routing area tag
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to independently redistributed into
Level 1 routes only.

level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1-2 to independently redistributed

into Level 1 and Level 2 routes. This is the default.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to independently redistributed into
Level 2 routes only
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by the metric value used
for the redistributed route. Use a metric value that is consistent with the
destination protocol.
Range: 0 to 16777215
Default: 0
route-map map-name Enter the keyword route-map followed by the map name that is an
identifier for a configured route map.
The route map should filter imported routes from the source routing protocol
to the current routing protocol.
If you do not specify a map-name, all routes are redistributed. If you
specify a keyword, but fail to list route map tags, no routes will be imported.
Defaults level-1-2
Example Figure 12-3. Command Example: redistribute isis

(conf)#router bgp 1
(conf-router_bgp)#redistribute isis level-1 metric 44 route-map rmap-is2bgp
(conf-router_bgp)#show running-config bgp
!
router bgp 1
redistribute isis level-1 metric 44 route-map rmap-is2bgp
IS-IS to BGP redistribution supports matching of level-1 or level-2 routes or all routes (default). More
advanced match options can be performed using route maps. The metric value of redistributed routes
can be set by the redistribution command.
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced ability to substitute IGP cost for MED when a peer/peer-group outbound
History
route-map is set as internal.
redistribute ospf
ces Redistribute OSPF routes into BGP.
Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [[match external {1 | 2}] [match internal]] [route-map
map-name]
To stop redistribution of OSPF routes, use the no redistribute ospf process-id command.

Parameters
process-id Enter the number of the OSPF process.
Range: 1 to 65535
match external {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF
external routes. You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPF
internal routes only.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map followed by the name of a
configured Route map.
When you enter redistribute isis process-id command without any other parameters, FTOS
redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes. This feature is
not supported by an RFC.
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced ability to substitute IGP cost for MED when a peer/peer-group
History
outbound route-map is set as internal.
router bgp
ces Enter ROUTER BGP mode to configure and enable BGP.
Syntax router bgp as-number
To disable BGP, use the no router bgp as-number command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 65535 (2-Byte) or 1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
Example Figure 12-4. Command Example: router bgp

(conf)#router bgp 3
(conf-router_bgp)#

Command

History
Usage At least one interface must be in Layer 3 mode for the router bgp command to be accepted. If no
Information interfaces are enabled for Layer 3, an error message appears: % Error: No router id
configured.

ces Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv4 address on the system.
Syntax show capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv4-address
Parameters
ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP address to display
packet information for that address.
Example Figure 12-5. Command Example: show capture bgp-pdu neighbor

(conf-router_bgp)#show capture bgp-pdu neighbor 20.20.20.2
Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.2

Available buffer size 40958758, 26 packet(s) captured using 680 bytes
PDU[1] : len 101, captured 00:34:51 ago
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00650100 00000013 00000000
00000000 419ef06c 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af92c0
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000001 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af9400 00000000
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400
[. . .]
Outgoing packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.2

Available buffer size 40958758, 27 packet(s) captured using 562 bytes
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00290104 000100b4 14141401
0c020a01 04000100 01020080
00000000
[. . .]
#
Related
Commands
Command
History

show config
ces View the current ROUTER BGP configuration.
Syntax show config
Example Figure 12-6. show config Command Example

(conf-router_bgp)#show confi
!
router bgp 45
neighbor suzanne peer-group
neighbor suzanne no shutdown
neighbor sara peer-group
neighbor sara shutdown
neighbor 13.14.15.20 peer-group suzanne
neighbor 13.14.15.20 shutdown
neighbor 123.34.55.123 peer-group suzanne
neighbor 123.34.55.123 shutdown
(conf-router_bgp)#
Command
History
show ip bgp
ces View the current BGP IPv4 routing table for the system.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] [network [network-mask] [longer-prefixes]]
Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only
related to ipv4 unicast routes.
network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP
network to view information only on that network.
network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix format) of the BGP network
address.
longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view all routes with a
common prefix.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Usage When you enable bgp non-deterministic-med command, the show ip bgp command output for a
Information BGP route does not list the INACTIVE reason.

Example Figure 12-7. show ip bgp Command Example (Partial)
>show ip bgp
BGP table version is 847562, local router ID is 63.114.8.131
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete
Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*> 0.0.0.0/0 63.114.8.33 0 18508 i
* 3.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 701 80 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 80 i
*> 3.3.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 22 32768 ?
63.114.8.35 0 18508 ?
*> 4.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 1 i
*> 4.2.49.12/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
* 4.17.250.0/24 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 1239 13716 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 1239 13716 i
* 4.21.132.0/23 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 6461 16422 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 6461 16422 i
*> 4.24.118.16/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.24.145.0/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.24.187.12/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.24.202.0/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 i
*> 4.25.88.0/30 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 3561 3908 i
*> 5.0.0.0/9 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
*> 5.0.0.0/10 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
*> 5.0.0.0/11 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
--More--
Table 12-1 defines the information displayed in Figure 12-7
Table 12-1. show ip bgp Command Example Fields
Field Description
Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router.
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing
table.
Metric Displays the BGP routes metric, if assigned.
LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route.
Weight Displays the routes weight
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.
Related
show ip bgp community View BGP communities.
Commands
neighbor maximum-prefix Control number of network prefixes received.
Command
History

ces View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] cluster-list [cluster-id]

Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only related to
ipv4 unicast routes.
cluster-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-8. Command Example: show ip bgp cluster-list (Partial)

#show ip bgp cluster-list
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n
- network

* I 10.10.10.1/32 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
*>I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 i
* I 10.19.75.5/32 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
*>I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 10.30.1.0/24 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
*>I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
* I 192.68.16.1 0 100 0 ?
Table 12-2 defines the information displayed in Figure 12-8.
Table 12-2. show ip bgp cluster-list Command Fields
Field Description
table.
Command
History

ces View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export]

[no-advertise]
Parameters
You can specify up to eight community numbers to view information on those
community groups.
local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to view all routes with the COMMUNITY
attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to view all routes containing the
well-known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must
not be advertised to other BGP peers.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to view all routes containing the well-known
All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not
be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Usage To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command.
Information The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.

Example Figure 12-9. show ip bgp community Command Example (Partial)
>show ip bgp community


* i 3.0.0.0/8 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 701 80 i
*>i 4.2.49.12/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
* i 4.21.132.0/23 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 6461 16422 i
*>i 4.24.118.16/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.24.145.0/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.24.187.12/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.24.202.0/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 i
*>i 4.25.88.0/30 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 3561 3908 i
*>i 6.1.0.0/16 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.2.0.0/22 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.3.0.0/18 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.4.0.0/16 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.5.0.0/19 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.8.0.0/20 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.9.0.0/20 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.10.0.0/15 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.14.0.0/15 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.133.0.0/21 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
*>i 6.151.0.0/16 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i
--More--
The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP
community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.
Table 12-3. Command Example Fields: show ip bgp community
Field Description
table.
Command
History

ces View routes that are affected by a specific community list.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] community-list community-list-name [exact-match]

Parameters
community-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP community list. (max 16 chars)
exact-match Enter the keyword for an exact match of the communities.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-10. Command Example: show ip bgp community-list
#show ip bgp community-list pass


#
The show ip bgp community-list command without any parameters lists BGP routes matching the
Community List and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.
Table 12-4. show ip bgp community-list Command Example Fields
Field Description
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table.
Command
History

ces View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] dampened-paths
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 12-11. Command Example: show ip bgp dampened-paths
>show ip bgp damp

Network From Reuse Path
>
Table 12-5. show ip bgp dampened-paths Command Example
Field Description
Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened.
From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route.
Reuse Displays the hour:minutes:seconds until the dampened route is available.
Path Lists all the ASs the dampened route passed through to reach the
destination network.
Command
History
show ip bgp detail

ces Display BGP internal information for IPv4 Unicast address family.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] detail
Defaults none
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 12-12. Command Example: show ip bgp detail
R2#show ip bgp detail
Detail information for BGP Node

bgpNdP 0x41a17000 : NdTmrP 0x41a17000 : NdKATmrP 0x41a17014 : NdTics 74857 :
NhLocAS 1 : NdState 2 : NdRPMPrim 1 : NdListSoc 13
NdAuto 1 : NdEqCost 1 : NdSync 0 : NdDefOrg 0
NdV6ListSoc 14 NdDefDid 0 : NdConfedId 0 : NdMedConfed 0 : NdMedMissVal -1 :
NdIgnrIllId 0 : NdRRC2C 1 : NdClstId 33686273 : NdPaTblP 0x41a19088
NdASPTblP 0x41a19090 : NdCommTblP 0x41a19098 : NhOptTransTblP 0x41a190a0 :
NdRRClsTblP 0x41a190a8
NdPktPA 0 : NdLocCBP 0x41a6f000 : NdTmpPAP 0x419efc80 : NdTmpASPAP 0x41a25000 :
NdTmpCommP 0x41a25800
NdTmpRRClP 0x41a4b000 : NdTmpOptP 0x41a4b800 : NdTmpNHP : NdOrigPAP 0
NdOrgNHP 0 : NdModPathP 0x419efcc0 : NdModASPAP 0x41a4c000 : NdModCommP 0x41a4c800
NdModOptP 0x41a4d000 : NdModNHP : NdComSortBufP 0x41a19110 : NdComSortHdP
0x41a19d04 : NdUpdAFMsk 0 : AFRstSet 0x41a1a298 : NHopDfrdHdP 0x41a1a3e0 :
NumNhDfrd 0 : CfgHdrAFMsk 1
AFChkNetTmrP 0x41ee705c : AFRtDamp 0 : AlwysCmpMed 0 : LocrHld 10 : LocrRem 10 :
softReconfig 0x41a1a58c
DefMet 0 : AutoSumm 1 : NhopsP 0x41a0d100 : Starts 0 : Stops 0 : Opens 0
Closes 0 : Fails 0 : Fatals 0 : ConnExps 0 : HldExps 0 : KeepExps 0
RxOpens 0 : RxKeeps 0 : RxUpds 0 : RxNotifs 0 : TxUpds 0 : TxNotifs 0
BadEvts 0 : SynFails 0 : RxeCodeP 0x41a1b6b8 : RxHdrCodeP 0x41a1b6d4 : RxOpCodeP
0x41a1b6e4
RxUpdCodeP 0x41a1b704 : TxEcodeP 0x41a1b734 : TxHdrcodeP 0x41a1b750 : TxOpCodeP
0x41a1b760
TxUpdCodeP 0x41a1b780 : TrEvt 0 : LocPref 100 : tmpPathP 0x41a1b7b8 : LogNbrChgs 1
RecursiveNH 1 : PgCfgId 0 : KeepAlive 0 : HldTime 0 : DioHdl 0 : AggrValTmrP
0x41ee7024
UpdNetTmrP 0 : RedistTmrP 0x41ee7094 : PeerChgTmrP 0 : CleanRibTmrP 0x41ee7104
PeerUpdTmrP 0x41ee70cc : DfrdNHTmrP 0x41ee7174 : DfrdRtselTmrP 0x41ee713c :
FastExtFallover 1 : FastIntFallover 0 : Enforce1stAS 1
PeerIdBitsP 0x41967120 : softOutSz 16 : RibUpdCtxCBP 0
UpdPeerCtxCBP 0 : UpdPeerCtxAFI 0 : TcpioCtxCB 0 : RedistBlk 1
NextCBPurg 1101119536 : NumPeerToPurge 0 : PeerIBGPCnt 0 : NonDet 0 : DfrdPathSel 0
BGPRst 0 : NumGrCfg 1 : DfrdTmestmp 0 : SnmpTrps 0 : IgnrBestPthASP 0
RstOn 1 : RstMod 1 : RstRole 2 : AFFalgs 7 : RstInt 120 : MaxeorExtInt 361
FixedPartCrt 1 : VarParCrt 1
Packet Capture max allowed length 40960000 : current length 0
Peer Grp List

Nbr List
Confed Peer List
Address Family specific Information
AFIndex 0
NdSpFlag 0x41a190b0 : AFRttP 0x41a0d200 : NdRTMMkrP 0x41a19d28 : NdRTMAFTblVer 0 :
NdRibCtxAddr 1101110688
NdRibCtxAddrLen 255 : NdAFPrefix 0 : NdAfNLRIP 0 : NdAFNLRILen 0 : NdAFWPtrP 0
NdAFWLen 0 : NdAfNH : NdAFRedRttP 0x41a0d400 : NdRecCtxAdd 1101110868
NdRedCtxAddrLen 255 : NdAfRedMkrP 0x41a19e88 : AFAggRttP 0x41a0d600 : AfAggCtxAddr
1101111028 : AfAggrCtxAddrLen 255
AfNumAggrPfx 0 : AfNumAggrASSet 0 : AfNumSuppmap 0 : AfNumAggrValidPfx 0 :
AfMPathRttP 0x41a0d700
MpathCtxAddr 1101111140 : MpathCtxAddrlen 255 : AfEorSet 0x41a19f98 : NumDfrdPfx 0
AfActPeerHd 0x41a1a3a4 : AfExtDist 1101112312 : AfIntDist 200 : AfLocDist 200
AfNumRRc 0 : AfRR 0 : AfNetRttP 0x41a0d300 : AfNetCtxAddr 1101112392 :
AfNetCtxAddrlen 255
AfNwCtxAddr 1101112443 : AfNwCtxAddrlen 255 : AfNetBKDrRttP 0x41a0d500 :
AfNetBKDRCnt 0 : AfDampHLife 0
AfDampReuse 0 : AfDampSupp 0 : AfDampMaxHld 0 : AfDampCeiling 0 : AfDampRmapP
Command
History

show ip bgp extcommunity-list
ces View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] extcommunity-list [list name]
Parameters
list name Enter the extended community list name you wish to view.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ces View the routes that match the filter lists.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] filter-list as-path-name
Parameters
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the ipv4 unicast keywords to view information only related
to ipv4 unicast routes.
as-path-name Enter the name of an AS-PATH.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 12-13. Command Example: show ip bgp filter-list
#show ip bgp filter-list hello

Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n -
network

* I 6.1.5.0/24 192.100.11.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.8.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.9.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.10.2 20000 9999 0 ?
*>I 6.1.5.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.6.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.20.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.6.0/24 192.100.11.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.8.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.9.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.10.2 20000 9999 0 ?
*>I 6.1.5.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.6.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.20.1 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 6.1.20.0/24 192.100.11.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.8.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.9.2 20000 9999 0 ?
* I 192.100.10.2 20000 9999 0 ?
#
Table 12-6. Command Example fields: show ip bgp filter-list
Field Description
Path source codes Lists the path sources shown to the right of the last AS number in the
Path column:
i = internal route entry
a = aggregate route entry
c = external confederation route entry
n = network route entry
r = redistributed route entry
table.
Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination
network.
Command
History

ces View flap statistics on BGP routes.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name]
[regexp regular-expression]
Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the
BGP network address.
filter-list as-path-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a
configured AS-PATH ACL.
regexp Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following
regular-expression characters to match:
must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ?
regular expression.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-14. Command Example: show ip bgp flap-statistics
>show ip bgp flap

Network From Flaps Duration Reuse Path

>

Table 12-7. show ip bgp flap-statistics Command Example Fields
Field Description
Network Displays the network ID to which the route is flapping.
From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the flapping route.
Flaps Displays the number of times the route flapped.
Duration Displays the hours:minutes:seconds since the route first flapped.
Reuse Displays the hours:minutes:seconds until the flapped route is available.
Path Lists all the ASs the flapping route passed through to reach the destination
network.
Command
History

ces View routes with inconsistent originating Autonomous System (AS) numbers, that is, prefixes that are
announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] inconsistent-as
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-15. Command Example: show ip bgp inconsistent-as (Partial)

>show ip bgp inconsistent-as
Path source: I - internal, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network
* 3.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 7018 80 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 7018 80 i
* 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 7018 80 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 80 i
*> 3.18.135.0/24 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 7018 ?
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 7018 ?
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 7018 ?
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 7018 ?
*> 4.0.0.0/8 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 1 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 1 i
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 1 i
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 1 i
* 6.0.0.0/20 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 3549 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 3549 i
*> 63.114.8.33 0 0 18508 ?
* 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 3549 i
* 9.2.0.0/16 63.114.8.60 0 18508 209 701 i
* 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 701 i
--More--

Table 12-8. show ip bgp inconsistent-as Command Example Fields
Fields Description
table.
Command
History
show ip bgp neighbors

ces Displays routing information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] neighbors [ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighbor-addr]

[advertised-routes | dampened-routes | detail | flap-statistics | routes | {received-routes
[network [network-mask]] | {denied-routes [network [network-mask]]}]
Parameters
related to IPv4 unicast routes.
ipv4-neighbor-addr | (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor to view only BGP route
ipv6-neighbor-addr information exchanged with that neighbor.
advertised-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertised-routes to view only the
routes the neighbor sent.
dampened-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dampened-routes to view information on
dampened routes from the BGP neighbor.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view neighbor-specific internal
information for the IPv4 Unicast address family.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to view flap statistics on the
neighbors routes.
routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords routes to view only the neighbors feasible
routes.
received-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords received-routes followed by either the
[network network address (in dotted decimal format) or the network mask (in slash prefix
[network-mask] format) to view all information received from neighbors.
Note: neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound must be configured prior to
viewing all the information received from the neighbors.
denied-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords denied-routes followed by either the
[network-mask] format) to view all information on routes denied via neighbor inbound filters.

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added detail option and output now displays default MED value
Version 7.2.1.0 Added received and denied route options
Version 6.3.10 The output is changed to display the total number of advertised prefixes
Example 1 Figure 12-16. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors (Partial)

#show ip bgp neighbors
BGP neighbor is 100.10.10.2, remote AS 200, external link

BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.2.101
BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:16:12
Last read 00:00:12, last write 00:00:03
Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Received 1404 messages, 0 in queue
3 opens, 1 notifications, 1394 updates
6 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests
Sent 48 messages, 0 in queue
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds
Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds
Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast :

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128)
Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast :

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
GRACEFUL_RESTART(64)
Route map for incoming advertisements is test

Maximum prefix set to 4 with threshold 75
For address family: IPv4 Unicast

BGP table version 34, neighbor version 34
5 accepted prefixes consume 20 bytes
Prefix advertised 0, denied 4, withdrawn 0
Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer

Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 from peer
Connections established 2; dropped 1

Last reset 00:18:21, due to Maximum prefix limit reached

Example 2 Figure 12-17. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors advertised-routes
>show ip bgp neighbors 192.14.1.5 advertised-routes

Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed,
n - network

*>r 1.10.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 5000 32768 ?
*>r 1.11.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 5000 32768 ?
.....
.....
*>I 223.94.249.0/24 223.100.4.249 0 100 0 ?
*>I 223.94.250.0/24 223.100.4.250 0 100 0 ?
*>I 223.100.0.0/16 223.100.255.254 0 100 0 ?
Total number of prefixes: 74102
Example 3 Figure 12-18. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors received-routes

#show ip bgp neighbors 100.10.10.2 received-routes
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed
n - network, D - denied, S - stale

D 70.70.21.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.22.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.23.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.24.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.25.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.26.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.27.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.28.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
*> 70.70.29.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ?
#
Example 4 Figure 12-19. Command Example: show ip bgp neighbors denied-routes

#show ip bgp neighbors 100.10.10.2 denied-routes
4 denied paths using 205 bytes of memory
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed
n - network, D - denied, S - stale

D 70.70.21.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.22.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.23.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
D 70.70.24.0/24 100.10.10.2 0 0 100 200 ?
#
Table 12-9. Command Example fields: show ip bgp neighbors

BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last
phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router
and its neighbor is an external or internal one. If they are located in the
same AS, then the link is internal; otherwise the link is external.
BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router
ID.

Table 12-9. Command Example fields: show ip bgp neighbors

BGP state Displays the neighbors BGP state and the amount of time in
hours:minutes:seconds it has been in that state.
Last read This line displays the following information:
last read is the time (hours:minutes:seconds) the router read a
message from its neighbor
hold time is the number of seconds configured between messages
from its neighbor
keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive
messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive.
Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received, the number
of notifications (error messages) and the number of messages waiting
in a queue for processing.
Sent messages The line displays the number of BGP messages sent, the number of
notifications (error messages) and the number of messages waiting in
a queue for processing.
Received updates This line displays the number of BGP updates received and sent.
Soft reconfiguration This line indicates that soft reconfiguration inbound is configured.
Minimum time Displays the minimum time, in seconds, between advertisements.
(list of inbound and outbound Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route
policies) map, AS-PATH ACL or Prefix list configured for the policy.
For address family: Displays IPv4 Unicast as the address family.
BGP table version Displays the which version of the primary BGP routing table the
router and the neighbor are using.
accepted prefixes Displays the number of network prefixes accepted by the router and
the amount of memory used to process those prefixes.
Prefix advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number
rejected and the number withdrawn from the BGP routing table.
Connections established Displays the number of TCP connections established and dropped
between the two peers to exchange BGP information.
Last reset Displays the amount of time since the peering session was last reset.
Also states if the peer resets the peering session.
If the peering session was never reset, the word never is displayed.
Local host: Displays the peering address of the local router and the TCP port
number.
Foreign host: Displays the peering address of the neighbor and the TCP port
number.
Related
show ip bgp View the current BGP routing table.
Commands

ces View all next hops (via learned routes only) with current reachability and flap status. This command
only displays one path, even if the next hop is reachable by multiple paths.
Syntax show ip bgp next-hop
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-20. Command Example: show ip bgp next-hop

>show ip bgp next-hop
Next-hop Via RefCount Cost Flaps Time Elapsed
63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33, Gi 12/22 240984 0 0 00:18:25
63.114.8.34 63.114.8.34, Gi 12/22 135152 0 0 00:18:13
63.114.8.35 63.114.8.35, Gi 12/22 1 0 0 00:18:07
63.114.8.60 63.114.8.60, Gi 12/22 135155 0 0 00:18:11
>
Table 12-10. Command Example fields: show ip bgp next-hop
Field Description
Next-hop Displays the next-hop IP address.
Via Displays the IP address and interface used to reach the next hop.
RefCount Displays the number of BGP routes using this next hop.
Cost Displays the cost associated with using this next hop.
Flaps Displays the number of times the next hop has flapped.
Time Elapsed Displays the time elapsed since the next hop was learned. If the route is down,
then this field displays time elapsed since the route went down.
Command
History
show ip bgp paths

ces View all the BGP path attributes in the BGP database.
Syntax show ip bgp paths [regexp regular-expression]

Parameters
regexp Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the

regular-expression following characters to match:
? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1
sequences). You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v)
prior to entering the ? regular expression.
( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single
element
^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at
the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything
BUT the characters specified.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-21. Command Example: show ip bgp paths (Partial)

#show ip bgp path
Total 16 Paths
Address Hash Refcount Metric Path
0x1efe7e5c 15 10000 32 ?
0x1efe7e1c 71 10000 23 ?
0x1efe7ddc 127 10000 22 ?
0x1efe7d9c 183 10000 43 ?
0x1efe7d5c 239 10000 42 ?
0x1efe7c9c 283 6 {102 103} ?
0x1efe7b1c 287 336 20000 ?
0x1efe7d1c 295 10000 13 ?
0x1efe7c5c 339 6 {92 93} ?
0x1efe7cdc 351 10000 12 ?
0x1efe7c1c 395 6 {82 83} ?
0x1efe7bdc 451 6 {72 73} ?
0x1efe7b5c 491 78 0 ?
0x1efe7adc 883 2 120 i
0x1efe7e9c 983 10000 33 ?
0x1efe7b9c 1003 6 0 i
#
Table 12-11. Command Example fields: show ip bgp paths
Field Description
Total Displays the total number of BGP path attributes.
Address Displays the internal address where the path attribute is stored.
Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored.
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using this path attribute.
Metric Displays the MED attribute for this path attribute.
Path Displays the AS path for the route, with the origin code for the route
listed last.
Numbers listed between braces {} are AS_SET information.

Command
History

ces View all unique AS-PATHs in the BGP database
Syntax show ip bgp paths as-path
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-22. Command Example: show ip bgp paths as-path (Partial)
#show ip bgp paths as-path
Total 13 AS-Paths
Address Hash Refcount AS-Path
0x1ea3c1ec 251 1 42
0x1ea3c25c 251 1 22
0x1ea3c1b4 507 1 13
0x1ea3c304 507 1 33
0x1ea3c10c 763 1 {92 93}
0x1ea3c144 763 1 {102 103}
0x1ea3c17c 763 1 12
0x1ea3c2cc 763 1 32
0x1ea3c09c 764 1 {72 73}
0x1ea3c0d4 764 1 {82 83}
0x1ea3c224 1019 1 43
0x1ea3c294 1019 1 23
0x1ea3c02c 1021 4
#
Table 12-12. Command Example fields: show ip bgp paths community
Field Description
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these AS-Paths.
AS-Path Displays the AS paths for this route, with the origin code for the route listed last.
Numbers listed between braces {} are AS_SET information.
Command
History

ces View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database.
Syntax show ip bgp paths community

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-23. Command Example: show ip bgp paths community (Partial)
E1200-BGP>show ip bgp paths community
Total 293 Communities
Address Hash Refcount Community
0x1ec88a5c 3 4 209:209 209:6059 209:31272 3908:900 19092:300
0x1e0f10ec 15 4 209:209 209:3039 209:31272 3908:900 19092:300
0x1c902234 37 2 209:209 209:7193 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1f588cd4 41 24 209:209 209:6253 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1e805884 46 2 209:209 209:21226 286:777 286:3033 1899:3033
64675:21092
0x1e433f4c 46 8 209:209 209:5097 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1f173294 48 16 209:209 209:21226 286:40 286:777 286:3040 5606:40
12955:5606
0x1c9f8e24 50 6 209:209 209:4069 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1c9f88e4 53 4 209:209 209:3193 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1f58a944 57 6 209:209 209:2073 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300
0x1ce6be44 80 2 209:209 209:999 209:40832
0x1c6e2374 80 2 209:777 209:41528
0x1f58ad6c 82 46 209:209 209:41528
0x1c6e2064 83 2 209:777 209:40832
0x1f588ecc 85 570 209:209 209:40832
0x1f57cc0c 98 2 209:209 209:21226 286:3031 13646:1044 13646:1124
13646:1154 13646:1164 13646:1184 13646:1194 13646:1204 13646:1214 13646:1224
13646:1234 13646:1244 13646:1254 13646:1264 13646:3000
0x1d65b2ac 117 6 209:209 209:999 209:31272
0x1f5854ac 119 18 209:209 209:21226 286:108 286:111 286:777 286:3033
517:5104
Field Description
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these communities.
Community Displays the community attributes in this BGP path.
Command
History

ces Enables you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] peer-group [peer-group-name [detail | summary]]
Parameters
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a peer group to view information about that peer
group only.

detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed status information of
the peers in that peer group.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view status information of the
peers in that peer group.
The output is the same as that found in show ip bgp summary command
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-24. Command Example: show ip bgp peer-group (Partial)

#show ip bgp peer-group
Peer-group RT-PEERS
Description: ***peering-with-RT***
BGP version 4

BGP neighbor is RT-PEERS
Number of peers in this group 20
Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized):
12.1.1.2*
12.1.1.3*
12.1.1.4*
12.1.1.5*
12.1.1.6*
12.2.1.2*
12.2.1.3*
12.2.1.4*
12.2.1.5*
12.2.1.6*
12.3.1.2*
12.3.1.3*
12.3.1.4*
12.3.1.5*
12.3.1.6*
12.4.1.2*
12.4.1.3*
12.4.1.4*
12.4.1.5*
12.4.1.6*
Table 12-14. Command Example fields: show ip bgp peer-group
Line beginning with Description

Peer-group Displays the peer groups name.
Administratively shut Displays the peer groups status if the peer group is not enabled.
If the peer group is enabled, this line is not displayed.
BGP version Displays the BGP version supported.
Minimum time Displays the time interval between BGP advertisements.
For address family Displays IPv4 Unicast as the address family.
BGP neighbor Displays the name of the BGP neighbor.
Number of peers Displays the number of peers currently configured for this peer group.
Peer-group members: Lists the IP addresses of the peers in the peer group.
If the address is outbound optimized, a * is displayed next to the IP address.

Related
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) Assign peer to a peer-group.

Commands
show ip bgp peer-group (multicast) View information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
Command
History
show ip bgp regexp

ces Display the subset of BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified.
Syntax show ip bgp regexp regular-expression [character]
Parameters
regular-expression [character] Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the
following characters to match:
( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single
element
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 12-25. Command Example: show ip bgp regexp (Partial)
#show ip bgp regexp ^2914+

*>I 3.0.0.0/8 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 1239 80 i
*>I 4.0.0.0/8 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3356 i
*>I 4.17.225.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.17.226.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.17.251.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.17.252.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11853 11853 11853 11853 11853 6496
*>I 4.19.2.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 6167 6167 6167 i
*>I 4.19.16.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 6167 6167 6167 i
*>I 4.21.80.0/22 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 4200 16559 i
*>I 4.21.82.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 4200 16559 i
*>I 4.21.252.0/23 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 6389 8063 19198 i
*>I 4.23.180.0/24 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3561 6128 30576 i
*>I 4.36.200.0/21 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 14742 11854 14135 i
*>I 4.67.64.0/22 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11608 19281 i
*>I 4.78.32.0/21 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3491 29748 i
*>I 6.1.0.0/16 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i
*>I 6.2.0.0/22 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i
*>I 6.3.0.0/18 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i
Table 12-15. Command Example fields: show ip bgp regexp
Field Description
If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then non-BGP routes exist in the routers routing table.
Metric Displays the BGP routers metric, if assigned.
Path Lists all the AS paths the route passed through to reach the destination network.
Command
History
show ip bgp summary

ces Enables you to view the status of all BGP connections.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] summary
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 12-26. Command Example: show ip bgp summary
#show ip bgp summary

BGP router identifier 120.10.10.1, local AS number 100
9 network entrie(s) using 1372 bytes of memory
5 paths using 380 bytes of memory
4 denied paths using 164 bytes of memory
BGP-RIB over all using 385 bytes of memory
2 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 168 bytes of memory
1 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 39 bytes of memory
1 BGP community entrie(s) using 43 bytes of memory
2 neighbor(s) using 7232 bytes of memory
Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx
100.10.10.2 200 46 41 34 0 0 00:14:33 5

120.10.10.2 300 40 47 34 0 0 00:37:10 0
#
Table 12-16. Command Example fields: show ip bgp summary
Field Description
BGP router identifier Displays the local router ID and the AS number.
BGP table version Displays the BGP table version and the main routing table version.
network entries Displays the number of network entries and route paths and the amount of
memory used to process those entries.
paths Displays the number of paths and the amount of memory used.
denied paths Displays the number of denied paths and the amount of memory used.
BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory
used to process them.
BGP AS-PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and the
amount of memory used to process them.
BGP community entries Displays the number of BGP COMMUNITY attributes processed and the
amount of memory used to process them. The show ip bgp community
command provides more details on the COMMUNITY attributes.
Dampening enabled Displayed only when dampening is enabled. Displays the number of paths
designated as history, dampened, or penalized.
Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address.
AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor.
MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received.
MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent.
TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor.
InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be
processed.
OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
If a number appears in parentheses, the number represents the number of
messages waiting to be sent to the peer group.

Table 12-16. Command Example fields: show ip bgp summary
Field Description
Up/Down Displays the amount of time that the neighbor is in the Established stage.
If the neighbor has never moved into the Established stage, the word never
is displayed.
The output format is:
Time Established----------Display Example
< 1 day ----------------------- 00:12:23 (hours:minutes:seconds)
< 1 week --------------------- 1d21h (DaysHours)
> 1 week --------------------- 11w2d (WeeksDays)
State/Pfxrcd If the neighbor is in Established stage, the number of network prefixes
received.
If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor maximum-prefix
command, (prfxd) appears in this column.
If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed
(Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm) When the peer is
transitioning between states and clearing the routes received, the phrase
(Purging) may appear in this column.
If the neighbor is disabled, the phrase (Admin shut) appears in this column.
Command
History
show running-config bgp

ces Use this feature to display the current BGP configuration.
Syntax show running-config bgp
Command
History
timers bgp
ces Adjust BGP Keep Alive and Hold Time timers.
Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtime
To return to the default, enter no timers bgp.

Parameters
keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent
to the neighbor routers.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 60 seconds
holdtime Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive
message and declaring the router dead.
Range: 3 to 65535
Command
History
MBGP Commands
Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the
Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). FTOS
MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858.
FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later support MBGP for IPv6 on et and c platforms.
FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later supports MBGP for IPv4 Multicast only on the s platform.
FTOS version 8.2.1.0 and later support MBGP on the E-Series ExaScale ex platform.
The MBGP commands are:
address family ipv4 multicast (MBGP)

aggregate-address
bgp dampening
clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast soft
debug ip bgp peer-group updates
distance bgp
neighbor activate

neighbor route-map
network
redistribute
redistribute ospf
show ip bgp ipv4 multicast
show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
show ip bgp summary
address family ipv4 multicast (MBGP)

c et s This command changes the context to SAFI (Subsequent Address Family Identifier).
Syntax address family ipv4 multicast
To remove SAFI context, use the no address family ipv4 multicast command.
Parameters
ipv4 Enter the keyword ipv4 to specify the address family as IPV4.
multicast Enter the keyword multicast to specify multicast as SAFI.
Defaults IPv4 Unicast
Usage All subsequent commands will apply to this address family once this command is executed. You can
Information exit from this AFI/SAFI to the IPv4 Unicast (the default) family by entering exit and returning to the
Router BGP context.
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S-Series for MBGP IPv4 Multicast
History

aggregate-address
c et s Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.
Syntax aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map

map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name]
Parameters
ip-address mask Enter the IP address and mask of the route to be the aggregate address.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) and mask in /
prefix format (/x).
advertise-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map followed by the
map-name name of a configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate
route.
as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword as-set to generate path attribute
information and include it in the aggregate.
AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes
included in the aggregated route.
attribute-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords attribute-map followed by the name
of a configured route map to modify attributes of the aggregate, excluding
AS_PATH and NEXT_HOP attributes.
summary-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary-only to advertise only the
aggregate address. Specific routes will not be advertised.
suppress-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords suppress-map followed by the
map-name name of a configured route map to identify which more-specific routes in
the aggregate are suppressed.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Address Family (conf-router_bgp_af)
Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate. If routes within the aggregate are constantly
changing, the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH.
suppressed.
Command
History

bgp dampening
c et s Enable MBGP route dampening.
Syntax bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name]
To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name]
command.
Parameters
half-life time (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is
decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is
decreased by half, after the half-life period expires.
Range: 1 to 45.
Default: 15 minutes
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for E-Series
ces Use this command only when route-refresh is not negotiated between peers to avoid having a peer
resend BGP updates.
Defaults Off
Command Modes ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY (conf-router_bgp_af)
Related
clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast Activate inbound policies without resetting the BGP TCP session.
Commands
soft in

Command
History

c et s Clear information on route dampening.
Syntax clear ip bgp dampening ipv4 multicast network network-mask
Parameters
dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening
information.
network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address in dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D).
network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask in slash prefix format (/x).
Command
History

c et s Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap.
Syntax clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast flap-statistics network | filter-list list |regexp regexp
Parameters
Network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address to clear flap statistics in dotted decimal
format (A.B.C.D).

filter-list list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a
configured AS-PATH list (max 16 characters).
regexp regexp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp followed by regular expressions. Use
one or a combination of the following:
? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences). You must
enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular
expression.
^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the beginning
of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified.
Command
History
clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast soft

c et s Clear and reapply policies for IPv4 multicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is,
perform BGP soft reconfiguration.
Syntax clear ip bgp {* | as-number | ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighbor-addr | peer-group name }

ipv4 multicast soft [in | out]
Parameters
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
ipv6-neighbor-addr
ipv4 multicast Clear and reapply policies for all IPv4 multicast routes.

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added BGP Soft Reconfiguration support for IPv4 unicast and IPv6 routes
History

c et s View information on routes being dampened.
Syntax debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening
Parameters
dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening
information.
Command
History
debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast soft-reconfiguration

ces Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv4 multicast routes.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv4 multicast

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address |

peer-group-name] ipv4 multicast soft-reconfiguration command.
Parameters
debugging.
ipv4 multicast Debug soft reconfiguration for IPv4 multicast routes.
Defaults Disabled
Usage This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv4 multicast routes. If no

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced support for IPv4 multicast and IPv6 unicast routes
History
debug ip bgp peer-group updates

c et s View information about BGP peer-group updates.
debug ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out]
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out]
command.
Parameters
peer-group Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the peer-group.
peer-group-name
updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received
from neighbors.
neighbors.
Command
History

c et s View information about BGP updates.
debug ip bgp updates [in | out]
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp updates [in | out] command.
Parameters
from neighbors.
neighbors.
Defaults Disabled.

Command

History
distance bgp
c et s Define an administrative distance for routes.

Parameters
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 20
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
command.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp_af)
internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table
inconsistencies.
Command
History
neighbor activate
c et s This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI.
Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate

To disable, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate command.

Parameters
AFI/SAFI.
Defaults Disabled
Related
address family ipv4 multicast (MBGP) Changes the context to SAFI
Commands
Command
History
c et s Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds

To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}
Parameters
in the peer group.
Command
History

c et s Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name]

To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name}
Parameters
group.
Command
History
c et s Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list.
Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] distribute-list prefix-list-name [in | out]

To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name]
distribute-list prefix-list-name [in | out] command.
Parameters
in the peer group.
Usage Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list, ip as-path access-list, and neighbor
Information route-map.
Related
ip as-path access-list Configure IP AS-Path ACL.
Commands

Command
History
c et s Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] filter-list aspath access-list-name [in | out]

To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] filter-list aspath
access-list-name [in | out] command.
Parameters
peer group.
access-list-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH access list (up to 140
characters).
If the AS-PATH access list is not configured, the default is permit (to
allow routes).
Usage Use the ip as-path access-list command syntax in the CONFIGURATION mode to enter the AS-PATH
Information ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters to deny or permit BGP routes based on information in their
AS-PATH attribute.
Related
ip as-path access-list Enter AS-PATH ACL mode and configure AS-PATH filters.
Commands
Command
History

c et s Control the number of network prefixes received.
Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name maximum-prefix maximum [threshold]

[warning-only]
To return to the default values, use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name
Parameters
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value,
FTOS sends a message.
Default: 75
Command
History
c et s Enables you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor.
Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name next-hop-self

To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name next-hop-self
command.
Parameters
Defaults Disabled.
Usage If the set next-hop command in the ROUTE-MAP mode is configured, its configuration takes

Command
History
c et s Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates.
Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name remove-private-as

To return to the default, use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name remove-private-as
command.
Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor to remove the private AS
numbers.
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS
numbers
Command
History
neighbor route-map
c et s Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or c peer
group.
Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] route-map map-name [in | out]

To remove the route map, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] route-map
map-name [in | out] command.
Parameters

Command
History
c et s Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster.
Syntax neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name route-reflector-client

To indicate that the neighbor is not a route reflector client or to delete a route reflector configuration,
use the no neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name route-reflector-client command.
Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal
format.
Usage The first time you enter this command it configures the neighbor as a route reflector and members of
Information the route-reflector cluster. Internal BGP (IBGP) speakers do not need to be fully meshed if you
configure a route reflector.
When all clients of a route reflector are disabled, the neighbor is no longer a route reflector.
Command
History

ces Enable a BGP soft-reconfiguration and start storing updates for inbound IPv4 multicast routes.

Parameters
routing updates.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY (conf-router_bgp_af)
Information for inbound IPv4 multicast routes received by the neighbor but will not reset the peer-session.
Related
show ip bgp neighbors Display routes received on a neighbor
Commands
Command
History
network
c et s Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.
Syntax network ip-address mask [route-map map-name]

Parameters
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an established route
map-name map.
match ip address
set community
set metric
set next-hop
set origin
set weight

Usage FTOS resolves the network address configured by the network command with the routes in the main
Information routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable via non-BGP routes and non-default routes.
Related
Commands
Command
History
redistribute
c et s Redistribute routes into BGP.
Syntax redistribute [connected | static] [route-map map-name]

To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution [connected | static] [route-map
map-name] command.
Parameters
interfaces.
map-name route map.
match ip address
set community
set metric
set next-hop
set origin
set weight
Usage If you do not configure default-metric command, in addition to the redistribute command, or there is no
Information route map to set the metric, the metric for redistributed static and connected is 0.
To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0) configure the neighbor default-originate command.
Related
Commands

Command
History
redistribute ospf
c et s Redistribute OSPF routes into BGP.
map-name]
Parameters
process-id Enter the number of the OSPF process.
Range: 1 to 65535
match external (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF external routes.
{1 | 2} You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPF internal
routes only.
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map followed by the name of a configured
map-name Route map.
Usage When you enter redistribute ospf process-id command without any other parameters, FTOS
Information redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes.
This feature is not supported by an RFC.
Command
History

c et s View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast cluster-list [cluster-id]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command

History

ces View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export]

[no-advertise]
Parameters
community groups.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

c et s View routes that are affected by a specific community list.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast community-list community-list-name

Parameters
community-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP community list.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

c et s View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampened-paths
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

c et s View the routes that match the filter lists.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast filter-list as-path-name
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

c et s View flap statistics on BGP routes.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name]
[regexp regular-expression]

Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the
BGP network address.
regular expression.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

c et s View routes with inconsistent originating Autonomous System (AS) numbers, that is, prefixes that are
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast inconsistent-as
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

c et s View the current MBGP routing table for the system.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast [detail | network [network-mask] [length]]
Parameters
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display BGP internal information for
the IPv4 Multicast address family.
address.
common prefix.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-27. show ip bgp Command Example
#show ip bgp ipv4 multicast


*>I 25.1.0.0/16 25.25.25.25 0 100 0 i
*>I 25.2.0.0/16 25.25.25.26 0 100 0 ?
*>I 25.3.0.0/16 211.1.1.165 0 100 0 ?
*>r 144.1.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 0 32768 ?
*>r 144.2.0.0/16 100.10.10.10 0 32768 ?
*>r 144.3.0.0/16 211.1.1.135 0 32768 ?
*>n 145.1.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 0 32768 i
#
Field Description
table.
Related
show ip bgp community View BGP communities.
Commands
Command
History


show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors

c et s Displays information on IPv4 multicast routes exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors [ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighbor-addr]

[advertised-routes | dampened-routes | detail | flap-statistics | routes | received-routes
[network [network-mask]] | denied-routes [network [network-mask]]]
Parameters
ipv4 multicast Enter the ipv4 multicast keywords to view information only related to IPv4
multicast routes.
neighbors routes.
routes.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for the display of configured IPv4 multicast address families
History

Example 1 Figure 12-28. Command Example: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
#show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors
BGP neighbor is 25.25.25.25, remote AS 6400, internal link

Last read 00:00:16, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 unicast :

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Multicast :

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
Update source set to Loopback 0

For address family: IPv4 Multicast

Last reset 00:03:17, due to user reset
Notification History
'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0
Local host: 100.10.10.1, Local port: 179

Foreign host: 25.25.25.25, Foreign port: 2290
BGP neighbor is 211.1.1.129, remote AS 640, external link

BGP state ACTIVE, in this state for 00:00:36
Last read 00:00:41, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Received 28 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue
Sent 6 messages, 3 notifications, 0 in queue
Received 18 updates, Sent 6 updates
Route refresh request: received 0, sent 0
For address family: IPv4 Multicast

Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0

Last reset 00:00:37, due to user reset
Table 12-18. Command Example fields: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors

ID.

Table 12-18. Command Example fields: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast neighbors

from its neighbor
(List of inbound and outbound Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route
For address family: Displays IPv4 Multicast as the address family.
Prefixes accepted Displays the number of network prefixes accepted by the router and
Prefixes advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number
number.
number.
Related
show ip bgp View the current BGP routing table.
Commands

c et s Enables you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast peer-group [peer-group-name [detail | summary]]

Parameters
group only.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed status information of
the peers in that peer group.
The output is the same as that found in show ip bgp summary command
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Related
Commands
show ip bgp peer-group View information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Modified: added detail option
show ip bgp summary

c et s Enables you to view the status of all BGP connections.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-29. Command Example: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
#sho ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
7 network entrie(s) and 7 paths using 972 bytes of memory
25.25.25.25 6400 21 9 14 0 0 00:02:04 3

211.1.1.129 640 28 6 0 0 0 00:00:21 Active
#
Table 12-19. Command Example fields: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
Field Description

Table 12-19. Command Example fields: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
Field Description
network entries Displays the number of network entries and route paths and the amount of
memory used to process those entries.
BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory used to
process them.
BGP AS-PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and the amount of
memory used to process them.
BGP community entries Displays the number of BGP COMMUNITY attributes processed and the
amount of memory used to process them. The show ip bgp community
command provides more details on the COMMUNITY attributes.
Dampening enabled Displayed only when dampening is enabled. Displays the number of paths
designated as history, dampened, or penalized.
TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor.
InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be processed.
OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
If a number appears in parentheses, the number represents the number of
messages waiting to be sent to the peer group.
Up/Down Displays the amount of time (in hours:minutes:seconds) that the neighbor is in
the Established stage.
If the neighbor has never moved into the Established stage, the word never is
displayed.
State/Pfx If the neighbor is in Established stage, the number of network prefixes received.
If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor maximum-prefix
command, (prfxd) appears in this column.
If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed (Idle,
Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm) When the peer is transitioning
between states and clearing the routes received, the phrase (Purging) may
appear in this column.
If the neighbor is disabled, the phrase (Admin shut) appears in this column.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for the display of configured IPv4 multicast address families
History

BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360)
BGP Extended Communities, as defined in RFC 4360, is an optional transitive BGP attribute. It
provides two major advantages over Standard Communities:
The range is extended from 4-octet (AA:NN) to 8-octet (Type:Value) to provide enough number
communities.
Communities are structured using a new Type field (1 or 2-octets), allowing you to provide
granular control/filter routing information based on the type of extended communities.
The BGP Extended Community commands are:
deny
deny regex
description
ip extcommunity-list
match extcommunity
permit
permit regex
set extcommunity rt
set extcommunity soo
show ip bgp ipv4 extcommunity-list
show ip bgp paths extcommunity
show ip extcommunity-list
show running-config extcommunity-list
deny
ces Use this feature to reject (deny) from the two types of extended communities, Route Origin (rt) or
Site-of-Origin (soo).
Syntax deny {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN}

To remove (delete) the rule, use the no deny {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN |
IPADDR:NN} command.
Parameters
rt Enter the keyword rt to designate a Route Origin community
soo Enter the keyword soo to designate a Site-of-Origin community (also known as
Route Origin).
as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 followed by the 4-octet AS specific extended community
number in the format ASN4:NN (4-Byte AS number:2-Byte community value).
ASN:NNNN Enter the 2-octet AS specific extended community number in the format
ASN:NNNN (2-Byte AS number:4-Byte community value).
IPADDR:NN Enter the IP address specific extended community in the format IPADDR:NN
(4-Byte IPv4 Unicast Address:2-Byte community value)
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-ext-community-list)

Related
permit Configure to add (permit) rules

Commands
show ip extcommunity-list Display the Extended Community list
Command
History
deny regex
ces This features enables you to specify an extended communities to reject (deny) using a regular
expressions (regex).
Syntax deny regex {regex}

To remove, use the no deny regex {regex} command.
Parameters
regex Enter a regular expression.
Usage Duplicate commands are silently accepted.

Information
Example Figure 12-30. Commands Example: deny regexp

(conf-ext-community-list)#deny regexp 123
(conf-ext-community-list)#
Related
permit regex Permit a community using a regular expression
Commands
Command
History
description
ces Use this feature to designate a meaningful description to the extended community.
Syntax description {line}

To remove the description, use the no description {line} command.
Parameters
line Enter a description (maximum 80 characters).

Command
History
ip extcommunity-list
ces Use this feature to enter the Extended Community-list mode.
Syntax ip extcommunity-list word

To exit from this mode, use the exit command.
Parameters
word Enter a community list name (maximum 16 characters).
Defaults No defaults values or behavior
Usage This new mode will change the prompt. See the example below.
Information
Example Figure 12-31. Command Example: ip extcommunity-list

(conf)#ip extcommunity-list test
Command
History
match extcommunity
ces Use this feature to match an extended community in the Route Map mode.
Syntax match extcommunity {extended community list name}

To change the match, use the no match extcommunity {extended community list name}
command.
Parameters
extended community list name Enter the name of the extended community list.
Command Modes ROUTE MAP (config-route-map)
Usage Like standard communities, extended communities can be used in route-map to match the attribute.
Information

Example Figure 12-32. Command Example: match extcommunity
(config-route-map)#match extcommunity Freedombird

(config-route-map)#
Command
History
permit
ces Use this feature to add rules (permit) from the two types of extended communities, Route Origin (rt) or
Site-of-Origin (soo).
Syntax permit {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN}

To change the rules, use the no permit {rt | soo} {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN}
command.
Parameters
rt Enter the keyword rt to designate a Route Origin community
soo Enter the keyword soo to designate a Site-of-Origin community (also known as
Route Origin).
Related
deny Configure to delete (deny) rules
Commands
show ip extcommunity-list Display the Extended Community list
Command
History
permit regex
ces This features enables you specify an extended communities to forward (permit) using a regular
expressions (regex).
Syntax permit regex {regex}

To remove, use the no permit regex {regex} command.

Parameters
regex Enter a regular expression.
Usage Duplicate commands are silently accepted.

Information
Example Figure 12-33. Command Example: permit regexp

(conf-ext-community-list)#permit regexp 123
Related
deny regex Deny a community using a regular expression
Commands
Command
History
set extcommunity rt
ces Use this feature to set Route Origin community attributes in Route Map.
Syntax set extcommunity rt {as4 ASN4:NN [non-trans] | ASN:NNNN [non-trans] | IPADDR:NN

[non-trans]} [additive]
To delete the Route Origin community, use the no set extcommunity command.
Parameters
additive (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword additive to add to the existing extended
community.
non-trans (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword non-trans to indicate a non-transitive BGP
extended community.
Usage If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, we can define the behavior as:
Information
If rt option comes before soo, with or without additive option, then soo overrides the
communities set by rt

If rt options comes after soo, without the additive option, then rt overrides the communities set
by soo
If rt with additive option comes after soo, then rt adds the communities set by soo
Related
Commands set extcommunity soo Set extended community site-of-origin in route-map.
Command
History
set extcommunity soo

ces Use this feature to set extended community site-of-origin in Route Map.
Syntax set extcommunity soo {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN [non-trans]}

To delete the site-of-origin community, use the no set extcommunity command.
Parameters
non-trans (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword non-trans to indicate a non-transitive BGP
extended community.
Usage If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, we can define the behavior as:
Information
If rt option comes before soo, with or without additive option, then soo overrides the
communities set by rt
If rt options comes after soo, without the additive option, then rt overrides the communities set
by soo
If rt with additive option comes after soo, then rt adds the communities set by soo
Related
set extcommunity rt Set extended community route origins via the route-map
Commands
Command
History

show ip bgp ipv4 extcommunity-list
ces Use this feature to display IPv4 routes matching the extended community list name.
Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 [multicast | unicast] | ipv6 unicast] extcommunity-list name
Parameters
multicast Enter the keyword multicast to display the multicast route information.
unicast Enter the keyword unicast to display the unicast route information.
ipv6 unicast Enter the keywords ipv6 unicast to display the IPv6 unicast route information.
name (OPTIONALLY) Enter the name of the extcommunity-list.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Usage If there is a type or sub-type that is not well-known, it will be displayed as:
Information
TTSS:XX:YYYY
Where TT is type, SS is sub-type displayed in hexadecimal format, XX:YYYY is the value divided
into 2-Byte and 4-Byte values in decimal format. This format is consistent with other vendors.
For example, if the extended community has type 0x04, sub-type 0x05, value
0x20 00 00 00 10 00, it will be displayed as:
0x0405:8192:4096
Non-transitive extended communities are marked with an asterisk, as shown in the figure below.
Example Figure 12-34. Command Example: show ip bgp ipv4 multicast extcommunity-list
#show ip bgp ipv4 multicast extcommunity-list
BGP routing table entry for 192.168.1.0/24, version 2
Paths: (1 available, table Default-IP-Routing-Table.)

Not advertised to any peer
Received from :
100.100.1.2 (2.4.0.1) Best
AS_PATH : 200
Next-Hop : 100.100.1.2, Cost : 0
Origin IGP, Metric 4294967295 (Default), LocalPref 100, Weight 0,
external
Communities :
300:400 500:600
Extended Communities :
RT:1111:4278080 SoO:35:4 SoO:36:50529043 SoO:37:50529044
SoO:38:50529045 SoO:0.0.0.2:33 SoO:506.62106:34 0x0303:254:11223*
Command
History

ces Use this feature to display all BGP paths having extended community attributes.
Syntax show ip bgp paths extcommunity
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 12-35. Command Example: show ip bgp paths community (Partial)
#show ip bgp paths extcommunity
Total 1 Extended Communities
Address Hash Refcount Extended Community
0x41d57024 12272 1 RT:7:200 SoO:5:300 SoO:0.0.0.3:1285

#
Field Description
Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these extended communities.
Community Displays the extended community attributes in this BGP path.
Command
History
show ip extcommunity-list
ces Display the IP extended community list.
Syntax show ip extcommunity-list [word]
Parameters
word Enter the name of the extended community list you want to view.
Defaults Defaults.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 12-36. Command Example: show ip extcommunity-list
#show ip extcommunity-list test
ip extcommunity-list test
deny RT:1234:12
permit regexp 123
deny regexp 234
deny regexp 123
#
Command
History
show running-config extcommunity-list

ces Use this feature to display the current configuration of the extended community lists.
Syntax show running-config extcommunity-list [word]
Parameters
word Enter the name of the extended community list you want to view.
Example Figure 12-37. Command Example: show running-config extcommunity-list

#show running-config extcommunity-list test
ip extcommunity-list test
permit rt 65033:200
deny soo 101.11.11.2:23
permit rt as4 110212:340
deny regex ^(65001_)$
#
Command
History


13
Content Addressable Memory (CAM)
Overview
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) commands are supported C-Series, E-Series TeraScale and
S-Series, as indicated by the symbols under each command heading: c et s
This chapter includes information relating to the E-Series TeraScale platform. Refer to Chapter 13,
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) for ExaScale for information on the commands for the E-Series
ExaScale platform.
Note: Not all CAM commands are supported on all platforms. Be sure to note the platform
symbol when looking for a command.
Warning: If you are using these features for the first time, contact the Dell Force10
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance. For information on contacting Dell
Force10 TAC, visit the Dell Force10 website at www.force10networks.com/support
This chapter includes the following sections:
CAM Profile Commands

CAM IPv4flow Commands
CAM Layer 2 ACL Commands
CAM Profile Commands

The CAM profiling feature enables you to partition the CAM to best suit your application. For
example:
Configure more Layer 2 FIB entries when the system is deployed as a switch.
Configure more Layer 3 FIB entries when the system is deployed as a router.
Configure more ACLs (when IPv6 is not employed).
Hash MPLS packets based on source and destination IP addresses for LAGs.
Hash based on bidirectional flow for LAGs.
Optimize the VLAN ACL Group feature, which permits group VLANs for IP egress ACLs.
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) | 429

CAM Profiles are available on FTOS versions 6.3.1.1 and later for the E-Series TeraScale. Refer
to Chapter 13, Content Addressable Memory (CAM) for ExaScale for information on the
commands for the E-Series ExaScale platform.
FTOS versions 7.8.1.0 and later support CAM allocations on the C-Series and S-Series.
All line cards within a single system must have the same CAM profile (including CAM sub-region
configurations); this profile must match the system CAM profile (the profile on the primary
RPM).
FTOS automatically reconfigures the CAM profile on line cards and the secondary RPM to match
the system CAM profile by saving the correct profile on the card and then rebooting it.
The CAM configuration is applied to entire system when you use CONFIGURATION mode
commands. You must save the running-configuration to affect the change.
When budgeting your CAM allocations for ACLs and QoS configurations, remember that ACL
and QoS rules might consume more than one CAM entry depending on complexity. For example,
TCP and UDP rules with port range options might require more than one CAM entry.
After you install a secondary RPM, copy the running-configuration to the startup-configuration so
that the new RPM has the correct CAM profile.
You MUST save your changes and reboot the system for CAM profiling or allocations to take
effect.
The CAM Profiling commands are:
cam-acl (Configuration)
cam-acl (EXEC Privilege)
cam-optimization
cam-profile (Config)
show cam-acl
show cam-profile
show cam-usage
test cam-usage
430 | Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

cam-acl (Configuration)
cs Allocate CAM for IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs
Syntax cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number, ipv4qos number l2qos number,
l2pt number ipmacacl number ecfmacl number [vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number}
Parameters
default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows.
L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6
L2 ACL(l2acl): 5
IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0
L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1
L2 QoS (l2qos): 1
l2acl number ipv4acl number Allocate space to each CAM region.
ipv6acl number, ipv4qos number Enter the CAM profile name followed by the amount to be allotted.
l2qos number, l2pt number The total space allocated must equal 13.
ipmacacl number ecfmacl The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2.
number [vman-qos |
vman-dual-qos number
Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added ecfmacl, vman-qos, and vman-dual-qos keywords.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series
Usage You must save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload
Information the system for the new settings to take effect.
The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires 3 blocks and these cannot be
reallocated.
When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13.
Ranges for the CAM profiles are 1-10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is 0-10. The ipv6acl
allocation must be a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).

cam-acl (EXEC Privilege)
cs Adjust line card CAM setting to match chassis settings.
This command is deprecated as of FTOS 8.3.1.0
Syntax cam-acl {chassis |linecard}
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 COMMAND DEPRECATED
History
cam-optimization
cs Optimize CAM utilization for QoS Entries by minimizing require policy-map CAM space.
Syntax cam-optimization [qos]
Parameters
qos Optimize CAM usage for Quality of Service (QoS)
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the s-Series
History
Usage When this command is enabled, if a Policy Map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/
Information ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port pipe, only a single
copy of the policy will be written (only 1 FP entry will be used).
Note that an ACL itself may still require more that a single FP entry, regardless of the number of
interfaces. Refer to IP Access Control Lists, Prefix Lists, and Route-map in the FTOS Configuration
Guide for complete discussion.

cam-profile (Config)
e Set the default CAM profile and the required microcode.
Syntax cam-profile profile microcode microcode
Parameters
profile Choose one of the following CAM profiles:
Enter the keyword default to specify the default CAM profile.
Enter the keyword eg-default to specify the default CAM profile for EG
(dual-CAM) line cards.
Enter the keyword ipv4-320k to specify the CAM profile that provides
320K entries for the IPv4 Forwarding Information Base (FIB).
Enter the keyword ipv4-egacl-16k to specify the CAM profile that
provides 16K entries for egress ACLs.
Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to specify the CAM profile that
provides IPv6 functionality.
Enter the keyword l2-ipv4-inacl to specify the CAM profile that
provides 32K entries for ingress ACLs.
Enter the keyword unified-default to specify the CAM profile that
maintains the CAM allocations for the IPv6 and IPv4 FIB while allocating
more CAM space for the Ingress and Egress Layer 2 ACL, and IPv4 ACL
regions.
Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains the
CAM allocations for the IPv4 FIB while allocating CAM space for VRF.
Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains the
CAM allocations for the IPv4 and IPv6FIB while allocating CAM space for
VRF.
Enter the keyword ipv4-64k-ipv6 to specify the CAM profile that provides
an alternate to ipv6-extacl that redistributes CAM space from the IPv4FIB to
IPv4Flow and IPv6FIB.
microcode Choose a microcode based on the CAM profile you chose. Not all microcodes are
microcode available to be paired with a CAM profile.
Enter the keyword default to select the microcode that distributes CAM
space for a typical deployment.
Enter the keyword lag-hash-align to select the microcode for
applications that require the same hashing for bi-directional traffic.
Enter the keyword lag-hash-mpls to select the microcode for hashing
based on MPLS labels (up to five labels deep).
Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to select the microcode for IPv6.
Enter the keyword acl-group to select the microcode for applications that
need 16k egress IPv4 ACLs.
Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to select the microcode for IPv4 VRF
applications.
Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to select the microcode for IPv4 and IPv6
VRF applications.
E-Series TeraScale only: Select l2-switched-pbr microcode if you apply a
PBR redirect list to a VLAN interface and want to prevent Layer 2 traffic
from being redirected and dropped. l2-switched-pbr (IPv4-LDA)
microcode allows only Layer 3 traffic to be redirected while Layer 2 traffic is
switched within the VLAN.
Defaults cam-profile default microcode default

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for l2-switched-pbr microcode.

History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added support for the ipv4-64k-ipv6 profile.
Version 7.9.1.0 Added support for VRF protocols.
Version 7.5.1.0 Added the l2-ipv4-inacl CAM profile
Version 7.4.2.0 Added the unified-default CAM profile and lag-hash-align microcode
Version 7.4.1.0 Added the lag-hash-mpls microcode
Version 6.5.1.0 Added the eg-default and ipv4-320k CAM profiles
Usage You must save the running configuration using the command copy running-config
Information startup-config after changing the CAM profile from CONFIGURATION mode. CAM profile
changes take effect after the next chassis reboot.
Note: Do not use the ipv4-egacl-16 CAM profile for Layer 2 egress ACLs.
Note: Do not make any changes to the CAM profile after you change the profile to
ipv4-320K and save the configuration until after you reload the chassis; any changes lead to
unexpected behavior. After you reload the chassis, you may make changes to the IPv4 Flow
partition.
show cam-acl
c Display the details of the CAM profiles on the chassis and all line cards.
Syntax show cam-acl
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage The display reflects the settings implemented with the cam-acl command.
Information

Example Figure 13-1. Command Output: show cam-acl (default)
FTOS#show cam-acl
-- Chassis Cam ACL --

Current Settings(in block sizes)
L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1
-- Line card 4 --
L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1
FTOS#
Figure 13-2. Command Output: show cam-acl (non-default)

FTOS#show cam-acl

L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3
-- Line card 4 --
L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3
FTOS#
show cam-profile
e Display the details of the CAM profiles on the chassis and all line cards.
Syntax show cam-profile [profile microcode microcode | summary]

Parameters
profile (OPTIONAL) Choose a single CAM profile to display:

Enter the keyword default to specify the default CAM profile.
Enter the keyword eg-default to specify the default CAM profile for EG
(dual-CAM) line cards.
Enter the keyword ipv4-320k to specify the CAM profile that provides 320K
entries for the IPv4 Forwarding Information Base (FIB).
Enter the keyword ipv4-egacl-16k to specify the CAM profile that provides
16K entries for egress ACLs.
Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to specify the CAM profile that provides
IPv6 functionality.
Enter the keyword l2-ipv4-inacl to specify the CAM profile that
provides 32K entries for ingress ACLs.
Enter the keyword unified-default to specify the CAM profile that maintains the
CAM allocations for the IPv6 and IPv4 FIB while allocating more CAM space for the
Ingress and Egress Layer 2 ACL, and IPv4 ACL regions.
Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains the CAM
allocations for the IPv4 FIB while allocating CAM space for VRF.
Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to specify the CAM profile that maintains the CAM
allocations for the IPv4 and IPv6FIB while allocating CAM space for VRF.
microcode Choose the microcode to display. Not all microcodes are available to be paired with a
microcode CAM profile.
Enter the keyword default to select the microcode that distributes CAM space for a
typical deployment.
Enter the keyword lag-hash-align to select the microcode for applications
that require the same hashing for bi-directional traffic.
Enter the keyword lag-hash-mpls to select the microcode for hashing based on
MPLS labels (up to five labels deep).
Enter the keyword ipv6-extacl to select the microcode for IPv6.
Enter the keyword acl-group to select the microcode for applications that need 16k
egress IPv4 ACLs.
Enter the keyword ipv4-vrf to select the microcode for IPv4 VRF applications.
Enter the keyword ipv4-v6-vrf to select the microcode forIPv4 and IPv6 VRF
applications.
Enter the keyword ipv4-64k-ipv6 to specify the CAM profile that provides an
alternate to ipv6-extacl that redistributes CAM space from the IPv4FIB to IPv4Flow
and IPv6FIB.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to view a summary listing of the CAM profile and
microcode on the chassis and all line cards.
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added support for ipv4-64k-ipv6 profile
Version 7.9.1.0 Added support for VRF protocols.
Usage If the CAM profile has been changed, this command displays the current CAM profile setting in one
Information column and in the other column displays the CAM profile and the microcode that will be configured
for the chassis and all online line cards after the next reboot.

Example 1 Figure 13-3. Command Output: show cam-profile summary
FTOS#show cam-profile summary
-- Chassis CAM Profile --

: Current Settings : Next Boot
Profile Name : Default : Default
MicroCode Name : Default : Default

-- Line card 1 --

-- Line card 6 --
FTOS#
Example 2 Figure 13-4. Command Output: show cam-profile

FTOS#show cam-profile
-- Chassis Cam Profile --
CamSize : 18-Meg
Profile Name : DEFAULT : DEFAULT
L2FIB : 32K entries : 32K entries
L2ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
IPv4FIB : 256K entries : 256K entries
IPv4ACL : 12K entries : 12K entries
IPv4Flow : 24K entries : 24K entries
EgL2ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
EgIPv4ACL : 1K entries : 1K entries
Reserved : 8K entries : 8K entries
IPv6FIB : 0 entries : 0 entries
IPv6ACL : 0 entries : 0 entries
IPv6Flow : 0 entries : 0 entries
EgIPv6ACL : 0 entries : 0 entries
-- Line card 0 --
CamSize : 18-Meg
Profile Name : DEFAULT : DEFAULT
FTOS#
show cam-usage
e Display Layer 2, Layer 3, ACL, or all CAM usage statistics.
Syntax show cam-usage [acl | router | switch]

Parameters
acl (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACL CAM usage.
router (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display Layer 3 CAM usage.
switch (OPTIONAL) Enter this keyword to display Layer 2 CAM usage.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example Figure 13-5. Command Example: show cam-usage

FTOS#show cam-usage
Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM
========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1008 | 320 | 688
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1132 | 31636
| | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286
| | IN-L3 FIB | 262141 | 14 | 262127
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 45 | 2833
| | IN-L3-TrcList | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-L3-McastFib | 9215 | 0 | 9215
| | IN-L3-Qos | 8192 | 0 | 8192
| | IN-L3-PBR | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0
| | IN-V6 FIB | 0 | 0 | 0
| | IN-V6-SysFlow | 0 | 0 | 0
| | IN-V6-McastFib | 0 | 0 | 0
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0
1 | 1 | IN-L2 ACL | 320 | 0 | 320
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1136 | 31632
| | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286
| | IN-L3 FIB | 262141 | 14 | 262127
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 44 | 2834
--More--
Example Figure 13-6. Command Example: show cam-usage acl

FTOS#show cam-usage acl

========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
11 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1008 | 0 | 1008
| | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 1024 | 2 | 1022
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024
FTOS#

Example Figure 13-7. Command Example: show cam-usage router
FTOS#show cam-usage router

========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
11 | 0 | IN-L3 ACL | 8192 | 3 | 8189
| | IN-L3 FIB | 196607 | 1 | 196606
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 0 | 2878
| | IN-L3-TrcList | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-L3-McastFib | 9215 | 0 | 9215
| | IN-L3-Qos | 8192 | 0 | 8192
| | IN-L3-PBR | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 16384 | 0 | 16384
11 | 1 | IN-L3 ACL | 8192 | 3 | 8189
| | IN-L3 FIB | 196607 | 1 | 196606
| | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 0 | 2878
| | IN-L3-TrcList | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | IN-L3-McastFib | 9215 | 0 | 9215
| | IN-L3-Qos | 8192 | 0 | 8192
| | IN-L3-PBR | 1024 | 0 | 1024
| | OUT-L3 ACL | 16384 | 0 | 16384
FTOS#
Example Figure 13-8. Command Example: show cam-usage switch

FTOS#show cam-usage switch

========|========|=================|=============|=============|==============
11 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 7152 | 0 | 7152
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1081 | 31687
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0
11 | 1 | IN-L2 ACL | 7152 | 0 | 7152
| | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | 1081 | 31687
| | OUT-L2 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0
FTOS#
test cam-usage
ces Verify that enough CAM space is available for the IPv6 ACLs you have created.
Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input input policy name linecard {number | all}
Parameters
policy-map name Enter the name of the policy-map to verify.
number Enter all to get information for all the linecards/stack-units, or enter the linecard/
stack-unit number to get information for a specific card.
Range: 0-6 for E-Series, 0-7 for C-Series, 0-7 for S-Series
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM Profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS
Information optimization for IPv6 ACLs.

QoS Optimization for IPv6 ACLs does not impact the CAM usage for applying a policy on a single (or
the first of several) interfaces. It is most useful when a policy is applied across multiple interfaces; it
can reduce the impact to CAM usage across subsequent interfaces.
Example The following examples show some sample output when using the test cam-usage command.
Figure 13-9. Command Example: test cam-usage (C-Series)

FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard all
Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
2 | 1 | IPv6Flow | 0 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard 4 port-set 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
Table 13-1. Output Explanations: test cam-usage (C-Series)
Term Explanation
Linecard Lists the line card or linecards that are checked. Entering all shows
the status for linecards in the chassis
Portpipe Lists the portpipe (port-set) or port pipes (port-sets) that are checked.
Entering all shows the status for linecards and port-pipes in the
chassis.
CAM Partition Shows the CAM profile of the CAM
Available CAM Identifies the amount of CAM space remaining for that profile
Estimated CAM per Port Estimates the amount of CAM space the listed policy will require.
Status Indicates whether or not the policy will be allowed in the CAM

Figure 13-10. Command Example: test cam-usage (S-Series)
FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraIn stack-unit all
Stack-Unit | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 102 | 0 | Allowed
0 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 102 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
!
FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraIn stack-unit 0 port-set 1
Stack-Unit | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM per Port | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 102 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
Table 13-2. Output Explanations: test cam-usage (S-Series)
Term Explanation
Stack-Unit Lists the stack unit or units that are checked. Entering all shows the
status for all stacks.
Entering all shows the status for linecards and port-pipes in the
chassis.
CAM IPv4flow Commands

IPv4Flow sub-partitions are supported on E-Series TeraScale platform et
The 18-megabit user configurable CAM is divided into multiple regions such as Layer 2 FIB, Layer 3
FIB, IPv4Flow, IPv4 Ingress ACL, etc. The IPv4Flow region is further sub-divided into 5 regions:
System Flow, QoS, PBR, Trace-lists, Multicast FIB & ACL.
You can change the amount of CAM space allocated to each sub-region. You can configure the
IPv4Flow region in both EtherScale and TeraScale. In EtherScale, these commands allocate CAM
space for IPv4Flow sub-regions and the IPv4 ACL region.
Like CAM profiles, you can configure the IPv4Flow region from EXEC Privilege and
CONFIGURATION mode.
The CAM IPv4flow commands are:

cam ipv4flow (EXEC Privilege)
cam-ipv4flow (CONFIGURATION)
show cam-ipv4flow

cam ipv4flow (EXEC Privilege)
et Configure the amount of CAM space in IPv4flow sub-regions.
Syntax cam ipv4flow {chassis all | linecard number} {default | acl value multicast-fib value pbr
value qos value system-flow value trace-list value}
Command
History
cam-ipv4flow (CONFIGURATION)
et Configure the amount of CAM space in IPv4flow sub-regions.
Syntax cam-ipv4flow {default | multicast-fib value pbr value qos value system-flow value
trace-list value}
Parameters
default Enter the keyword default to reset the IPV4Flow CAM region to its default
setting.
multicast-fib value Enter the keyword multicast-fib followed by the number of entries for the
multicast FIB sub-region in 1K increments.
Range: 1 to 32 KB
Default: 9 KB
pbr value Enter the keyword pbr followed by the number of entries for the PBR
sub-region in 1K increments.
Range: 1 to 32 KB
Default: 1 KB
qos value Enter the keyword qos followed by the number of entries for the QoS
sub-region in 1K increments.
Range: 1 to 32 KB
Default: 8 KB
system-flow value Enter the keyword system-flow followed by the number of entries for the
system-flow sub-region in 1K increments.
Range: 4 to 32 KB
Default: 5 KB
trace-list value Enter the keyword trace-list followed by the number of entries for the
trace-list sub-region in 1K increments.
Range: 1 to 32 KB
Default: 1 KB

Command
History
Usage CAM profile changes take effect after the next chassis reboot.
Information
Related
copy Save the running configuration.
Commands
show cam-ipv4flow Display the CAM IPv4flow entries.
show cam-ipv4flow
et Display details about the IPv4Flow sub-regions.
Syntax show cam-ipv4flow
Command
History
Example Figure 13-11. Command Example: show cam-ipv4flow

FTOS#show cam-ipv4flow
-- Chassis Cam Ipv4Flow --

Current Settings Next Boot
Acl : 8K 5K
Multicast Fib/Acl : 9K 12K
Pbr : 1K 1K
Qos : 8K 8K
System Flow : 5K 5K
Trace Lists : 1K 1K
-- Line card 2 --
Acl : 5K 0K
Pbr : 1K 1K
Qos : 8K 8K
System Flow : 5K 5K
Trace Lists : 1K 1K
-- Line card 8 --
Acl : 5K 0K
Pbr : 1K 1K
Qos : 8K 8K
System Flow : 5K 5K
Trace Lists : 1K 1K
-- Line card 13 --
Acl : 5K 0K
Pbr : 1K 1K
Qos : 8K 8K
System Flow : 5K 5K
Trace Lists : 1K 1K
FTOS#
Usage If the IPv4Flow sub-region has been changed, this command displays the current IPv4Flow
Information configuration in one column and in the other column displays the IPv4Flow configuration that will be
loaded after the next reboot.

Related
Commands
cam-ipv4flow Configure the amount of CAM space in IPv4flow sub-regions.
(CONFIGURATION)
CAM Layer 2 ACL Commands

IPv4Flow sub-partitions are supported on the E-Series TeraScale platform et
The CAM Layer 2 ACL commands are:
cam l2acl (EXEC Privilege)
cam-l2acl (CONFIGURATION)
show cam-l2acl
The 18-megabit user configurable CAM is divided into multiple regions such as Layer 2 FIB, Layer 3
FIB, IPv4Flow, IPv4 Ingress ACL, etc. The Layer 2 ACL region is further sub-divided into 6 regions:
Sysflow, L2ACL, PVST, QoS, L2PT, FRRP.
You can change the amount of CAM space, in percentage, allocated to each sub-region. The amount of
space that you can distribute to the sub-partitions is equal to the amount of CAM space that the selected
CAM profile allocates to the Layer 2 ACL partition. FTOS requires that you specify the amount of
CAM space for all sub-partitions and that the sum of all sub-partitions is 100%.
Like CAM profiles, you can configure the Layer 2 ACL partition from EXEC Privilege mode or
CONFIGURATION mode.
cam l2acl (EXEC Privilege)

et Re-allocate the amount of space, in percentage, for each Layer 2 ACL CAM sub-partition.
Syntax cam l2acl {chassis all | linecard number} {default | system-flow percentage l2acl
percentage pvst percentage qos percentage l2pt percentage frrp percentage}
Command
History
cam-l2acl (CONFIGURATION)
et Re-allocate the amount of space, in percentage, for each Layer 2 ACL CAM sub-partition.
Syntax cam-l2acl {default | system-flow percentage l2acl percentage pvst percentage qos
percentage l2pt percentage frrp percentage}

Parameters
default Enter this keyword to reset the Layer 2 ACL CAM sub-partition space
allocations to the default values (Sysflow: 6, L2ACL: 14, PVST: 50, QoS: 12,
L2PT: 13, FRRP: 5).
system-flow Allocate a percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM space for system flow
percentage entries. Enter the keyword system-flow, and specify the percentage.
Range: 5 to 100
l2acl percentage Allocate a percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM space for Layer 2 ACL
entries. Enter the keyword l2acl, and specify the percentage.
Range: 5 to 95
pvst percentage Allocate a percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM space for PVST+ entries.
Enter the keyword pvst and specify the percentage.
Range: 5 to 95
qos percentage Allocate a percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM space for QoS entries. Enter
the keyword qos, and specify the percentage.
Range: 5 to 95
l2pt percentage Allocate a percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM space for L2PT entries. Enter
the keyword l2pt, and specify the percentage.
Range: 5 to 95
frrp percentage Allocate a percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM space for FRRP entries.
Enter the keyword frrp, and specify a percentage.
Range: 5 to 95
Command
History
Usage The PVST sub-partition requires a minimum number of entries when employing PVST+. See the CAM
Information chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for the E-Series.
Related
Display the percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM partition that is allocated to each Layer
Commands show cam-l2acl
2 ACL CAM sub-partition.
show cam-l2acl
et Display the percentage of the Layer 2 ACL CAM partition that is allocated to each Layer 2 ACL CAM
sub-partition. If configuration has changed, the command displays the current configuration and the
configuration that FTOS will write to the CAM after the next chassis reboot.
Syntax show cam-l2acl
Command
History

Example Figure 13-12. Command Example: show cam-l2acl
FTOS#show cam-l2acl
-- Chassis Cam L2-ACL --

Current Settings(in percent)
Sysflow : 6
L2Acl : 14
Pvst : 50
Qos : 12
L2pt : 13
Frrp : 5
-- Line card 1 --
Sysflow : 6
L2Acl : 14
Pvst : 50
Qos : 12
L2pt : 13
Frrp : 5
-- Line card 5 --
Sysflow : 6
L2Acl : 14
--More--
Related
cam-l2acl Re-allocate the amount of space, in percentage, for each Layer 2 ACL CAM
Commands
(CONFIGURATION) sub-partition.

14
Configuration Rollback
Overview
The Configuration Rollback feature is enabled on the C-Series c and E-Series e. Configuration
Rollback enables you to archive your running configurations for future use. This feature also enables
you to replace your running configuration with an archived running configuration without rebooting
the chassis. Once you load an archived configuration, you have the option to confirm the replacement
or revert (roll back) to your previous configuration. This rollback feature enables you to view and test a
configuration before completing the configuration change.
Note: Archive files are stored on the internal flash in a hidden directory named CFGARCH.
You may have to reboot the chassis when rolling back to a feature that explicitly requires it,
like CAM profiles.
Commands
The Configuration Rollback commands are:
archive
archive backup
archive config
archive delete
configure confirm
configure replace
configure terminal
configuration mode exclusive
debug rollback
maximum number
show archive
show config
show configuration lock
show run diff
time-period
Configuration Rollback | 447

archive
ce Enter the CONFIGURATION ARCHIVE mode.
Syntax archive
To exit the CONFIGURATION ARCHIVE mode, use the exit command at the CONFIGURATION
ARCHIVE mode prompt (conf-archive).
Command Modes CONFIGURATION ARCHIVE (conf-archive)
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series.
History
Example
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#archive
FTOS(conf-archive)#
FTOS#
archive backup
ce Copy an archive file to another location.
Syntax archive backup {flash://CFGARCH_DIR/filename} {flash://filepath | ftp://

userid:password@hostip/filepath}
Parameters
flash://CFGARCH_DIR/filename Enter the path directory flash://CFGARCH_DIR/
followed by the name of the file.
flash://filepath Enter the path flash:.// followed by the file path of the local
file system to copy your file to the local location.
ftp://userid:password@hostip/ Enter the path ftp:// followed by the FTP remote file system to
filepath copy your file to the remote location.
Command
History
Related
show archive Display the archive
Commands
archive config
ce Archive a running configuration.
Syntax archive config [comment comment]
448 | Configuration Rollback

Parameters
comment comment Describe the configuration that you are archiving using up to 30
characters.
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Comment option added
History
Usage Archive files are stored on flash in a hidden directory named CFGARCH. This directory name is a
Information acronym for Configure Archive. A maximum of 15 archive files can be stored in this directory.
Example Figure 14-1. archive config Command Example

R4_C300#archive config comment 30 characters
3d2h5m: %RPM0-P:CP %CFGARCHIVE-5-RUNNING_CFG_ARCHIVED: Archived
running-config as archive_0
configuration archived as archive_0
R4_C300#
archive delete
ce Delete an archived configuration.
Syntax archive delete {number | all}
Parameters
number Specify the which archived configuration you want to delete.
all Enter this keyword to delete all archived configurations.
Defaults None
Command Modes CONFIG ARCHIVE
Command
History
Example Figure 14-2. archive delete Command Example

FTOS#archive delete all
Please confirm if you want to proceed [yes/no]:yes
all archives have been removed.
FTOS#
configure confirm
ce Confirm the replacement of the running configuration when time option is used with the configure
replace command.
Syntax configure confirm

Command
History
Related
Commands
configure replace
ce Replace the running configuration with a specified file.
Syntax configure replace {flash://filepath | startup-config [force | time seconds]}
Parameters
flash://filepath Enter the path flash:.// followed by the file path of the local file system to
copy your file to the local location.
startup-config force Enter the keyword startup-config to replace with the startup
configuration and force the replacement without confirmation.
force Enter the keyword force to replace the startup configuration without
confirmation.
time seconds Enter the keyword time to replace with the startup configuration and
designate the time with which you have to confirm the replacement of the
running configuration.
Command
History
configure terminal
ce Enter the exclusive configuration mode when the confutation mode is set to manual.
Syntax configure terminal [lock]

To undo the lock, use the exit command.
Parameters
lock (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lock to lock the confirmation in an exclusive mode.
Defaults Unlocked
Usage Archiving/replacing a configuration automatically locks CONFIGURATION mode. Use this command
Information when you want exclusive control of CONFIGURATION mode when making configuration changes.
Command
History

Related
configuration mode exclusive Enable exclusive configuration.
Commands
configuration mode exclusive

ce Enable exclusive configuration mode.
Syntax configuration mode exclusive {auto | manual}

To negate the configuration, use the no configuration mode exclusive {auto | manual}
command.
Parameters
auto Enter auto to set the exclusive mode to auto.
manual Enter manual to set the exclusive mode to manual (the default).
Defaults CONFIGURATION mode does not lock by default.
Command
History
Usage If you choose the manual option, you must enter set the lock each time before entering
Information CONFIGURATION mode.
If you choose the auto option, you can exit to EXEC Privilege mode and re-enter CONFIGURATION
mode without setting the lock again.
If another user attempts to enter the CONFIGURATION mode while a lock is in place, the following
message is generated:
% Error: User "" on line console0 is in exclusive configuration mode
If a user is already in CONFIGURATION mode when a lock is executed, the following message is
generated:
% Error: Can't lock configuration mode exclusively since the following users
are currently configuring the system:
Note: The CONFIGURATION mode lock corresponds to a VTY session, not to a user. If you
set a lock and then exit the CONFIGURATION mode and another user enters
CONFIGURATION mode, you will be denied access when you attempt to re-enter
CONFIGURATION mode.

Example
FTOS(conf)#configuration mode exclusive auto

FTOS(conf)#exit
3d23h35m: %RPM0-P:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
FTOS#config! Locks configuration mode exclusively.
FTOS(conf)#
Note: When your session times out and you return to EXEC mode, the lock is no longer set.
Related
configure terminal When configuration is set to manual, use this command to set the exclusive
Commands
mode.
debug rollback
ce Enable debugging for the configuration replace and rollback feature.
Syntax debug rollback
Disable debugging using the command undebug all.
Defaults Debugging is disabled for all features by default.
Command
History
Related
undebug all Disable all debug operations on the system.
Commands
maximum number
ce Set the maximum number of archives.
Syntax maximum {number}

To return to the default, use the no maximum {number} command.
Parameters
number Enter the maximum number of files to archive.
Range: 2 to 15
Default: 10
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-archive)
Command
History
Related
Commands

show archive
ce Display the content of the archive.
Syntax show archive
Command
History
Example Figure 14-3. show archive Command Output

FTOS#show archive
Archive directory: flash:/CFGARCH_DIR
# Archive Date Time Size Comment

0 -
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 - Deleted
7 *archive_7 12/13/2007 20:51:24 5640 Archived
8 archive_8 12/13/2007 20:51:44 5645 Archived
9 archive_9 12/16/2007 21:43:44 5677 Most recently archived
10 -
11 - Deleted
12 - Deleted
13 - Deleted
14 -
FTOS#
Usage The most recent archived configuration is marked with an asterisk in the output of this command.
Information
show config
ce Display the contents of the archive configuration.
Syntax show config
Command
History
Example
FTOS#(conf-archive)#show config
!
archive
maximum 3
FTOS#(conf-archive)#

show configuration lock
ce Show the configuration lock status.
Syntax show configuration lock
Defaults None
Command
History
Example Figure 14-4. show configuration lock Command Output

FTOS# show configuration lock
Configure exclusively locked by the following line:
Line : vty 0
Line number : 2
User : admin
Type : AUTO
State : LOCKED
Ip address : 10.11.9.97
Usage The type may be auto, manual, or rollback. When set to auto, FTOS automatically denies access to
Information CONFIGURATION mode to all other users every time the user on the listed VTY line enters
CONFIGURATION mode. When set to manual, the user on the listed VTY line must explicitly set the
lock each time before entering CONFIGURATION mode. Rollback indicates that FTOS is in a
rollback process. The line number shown in the output can be used to send the messages to that session
or release a lock on a VTY line.
Related
clear line Reset a terminal line.
Commands
configuration mode exclusive Enable exclusive configuration mode.
send Send messages to one or all terminal line users.
show run diff

ce Display the difference between an archived file and a file.
Syntax show run diff {flash: | startup-config}
Parameters
flash: Enter the archive configuration file using the path [flash://]filename
startup-config Enter the keywords startup-config to compare the contents of the startup
configuration.
Command
History

Example Figure 14-5. show run diff archive Command Example
FTOS#show run diff archive_7
running-config
-------
< policy-map-input test
running-config
-------
< archive
< maximum 3
flash:/CFGARCH_DIR/archive_7
-------
> archive
FTOS#
time-period
ce Set a time period to automatically save an archive file.
Syntax time-period {minutes}

To stop the auto-save, use the no time-period {minutes} command.
Parameters
minutes Enter the time, in minutes to automatically save an archive file.
Range: 5 to 1440 minutes
Defaults Disabled, that is no automatically saving is configured
Command
History

456
|
Configuration Rollback
15
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
Overview
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically
assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on
configuration policies determined by network administrators.
Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server

Commands to Configure Secure DHCP
Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server

clear ip dhcp
client-identifier
debug ip dhcp server
default-router
disable
dns-server
domain-name
excluded-address
hardware-address
host
ip dhcp bootp
ip dhcp relay information
disable
lease
netbios-name-server
netbios-node-type
network
pool
show ip dhcp binding
show ip dhcp configuration
show ip dhcp conflict
show ip dhcp database
show ip dhcp server
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) | 457

clear ip dhcp
cs Reset DHCP counters.
Syntax clear ip dhcp [binding {address} | conflict | server statistics]
Parameters
binding Enter this keyword to delete all entries in the binding table.
address Enter the IP address to clear the binding entry for a single IP address.
conflicts Enter this keyword to delete all of the log entries created for IP address
conflicts.
server statistics Enter this keyword to clear all the server counter information.
Default None
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series.
History
Usage Entering <CR> after clear ip dhcp binding, clears all the IPs from the binding table.
Information
client-identifier
cs Identify the Microsoft clients using a special identifier rather than the hardware address.
Syntax client-identifier unique-identifier
Parameters
unique-identifier Enter the client identifier for a Microsoft.
Command Mode DHCP
Default None
Command
History
Usage Microsoft clients require a client identifier instead of a hardware addresses. The client identifier is
Information formed by concatenating the media type and the MAC address of the client. Refer to the Address
Resolution Protocol Parameters section of RFC 1700Assigned Numbers, for a list of media type
codes.
debug ip dhcp server

cs Display FTOS debugging messages for DHCP.
Syntax debug ip dhcp server [events | packets]
458 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Parameters
events Enter this keyword to display DHCP state changes.
packet Enter this keyword to display packet transmission/reception.
Default None
Command
History
default-router
cs Assign a default gateway to clients based on address pool.
Syntax default-router address [address2...address8]
Parameters
address Enter the a list of routers that may be the default gateway for clients on the subnet. You may
specify up to 8. List them in order of preference.
Command Mode DHCP <POOL>
Default None
Command
History
disable
cs Disable DHCP Server.
DHCP Server is disabled by default. Enable the system to be a DHCP server using the no form of the
disable command.
Syntax disable
Default Disabled
Command
History
dns-server
cs Assign a DNS server to clients based on address pool.
Syntax dns-server address [address2...address8]

Parameters
address Enter the a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet. You may list up to 8
servers, in order of preference.
Default None
Command
History
domain-name
cs Assign a domain to clients based on address pool.
Syntax domain-name name
Parameters
name Give a name to the group of addresses in a pool.
Default None
Command
History
excluded-address
cs Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool.
Syntax excluded-address [address | low-address high-address]
Parameters
address Enter a single address to be excluded from the pool.
low-address Enter the lowest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool.
high-address Enter the highest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool.
Command Mode DHCP
Default None
Command
History
hardware-address
cs For manual configurations, specify the client hardware address.
Syntax hardware-address address

Parameters
address Enter the hardware address of the client.
Default None
Command
History
host
cs For manual (rather than automatic) configurations, assign a host to a single-address pool.
Syntax host address
Parameters
address/mask Enter the host IP address and subnet mask.
Default None
Command
History
ip dhcp bootp
cs Allow the DHCP server to respond to BOOTP messages, or direct the server to ignore them.
Syntax ip dhcp bootp [automatic | ignore]
Parameters
automatic Enter this keyword to instruct the server to respond to BOOTP messages.
ignore Enter this keyword to instruct the server to ignore all BOOTP messages.
Command Mode DHCP
Default automatic
Command
History
ip dhcp relay information

cs
Syntax ip dhcp relay information [check | option | policy]
Parameters
check

option
policy
Command Mode
Default
Command
History
lease
cs Specify a lease time for the addresses in a pool.
Syntax lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite}
Parameters
days Enter the number of days of the lease.
Range: 0-31
hours Enter the number of hours of the lease.
Range: 0-23
minutes Enter the number of minutes of the lease.
Range: 0-59
infinite Specify that the lease never expires.
Default 24 hours
Command
History
netbios-name-server
cs Specify the NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) name servers, in order of preference,
that are available to Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients.
Syntax netbios-name-server address [address2...address8]
Parameters
address Enter the address of the NETBIOS name server. You may enter up to 8, in order of
preference.
Default None
Command
History

netbios-node-type
cs Specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Dell Force10 recommends specifying
clients as hybrid.
Syntax netbios-node-type type
Parameters
type Enter the NETBIOS node type.
Broadcast: Enter the keyword b-node.
Hybrid: Enter the keyword h-node.
Mixed: Enter the keyword m-node.
Peer-to-peer: Enter the keyword p-node.
Default Hybrid
Command
History
network
cs Specify the range of addresses in an address pool.
Syntax network network /prefix-length
Parameters
network/ Specify a range of addresses.
prefix-length Prefix-length Range: 17-31
Default None
Command
History
pool
cs Create an address pool
Syntax pool name
Parameters
name Enter the address pools identifying name
Command Mode DHCP
Default None
Command
History

show ip dhcp binding
cs Display the DHCP binding table.
Syntax show ip dhcp binding
Default None
Command
History
show ip dhcp configuration

cs Display the DHCP configuration.
Syntax show ip dhcp configuration [global | pool name]
Parameters
pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool.
global Display the DHCP configuration for the entire system.
Default None
Command
History
show ip dhcp conflict

cs Display the address conflict log.
Syntax show ip dhcp conflict address
Parameters
address Display a particular conflict log entry.
Default None
Command
History
show ip dhcp database

cs Display the DHCP database.
Syntax show ip dhcp database

Default None
Command
History
show ip dhcp server

cs Display the DHCP server statistics.
Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics
Default None
Command
History
Commands to Configure Secure DHCP

DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a
suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks.
arp inspection
arp inspection-trust
clear ip dhcp snooping
ip dhcp snooping
ip dhcp snooping database
ip dhcp snooping binding
ip dhcp snooping database renew
ip dhcp snooping trust
ip dhcp source-address-validation
ip dhcp snooping vlan
ip dhcp relay
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
show ip dhcp snooping
arp inspection
ces Enable Dynamic Arp Inspection (DAI) on a VLAN.
Syntax arp inspection
Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN

Default Disabled
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on E-Series.
History
Related
Commands
arp inspection-trust Specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against
the binding table.
arp inspection-trust
ces Specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table.
Syntax arp inspection-trust
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL
Default Disabled
Command
History
Related
arp inspection Enable Dynamic ARP Inspection on a VLAN.
Commands

ces Clear the DHCP binding table.
Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding
Default None
Command
History
Related
show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands
ip dhcp snooping
ces Enable DHCP Snooping globally.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping

Default Disabled
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series for Layer 2 interfaces.
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series on Layer 3 interfaces.
Usage When enabled, no learning takes place until snooping is enabled on a VLAN. Upon disabling DHCP
Information Snooping the binding table is deleted, and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection
are disabled.
Introduced in FTOS version 7.8.1.0, DHCP Snooping was available for Layer 3 only and dependent on
DHCP Relay Agent (ip helper-address). FTOS version 8.2.1.0 extends DHCP Snooping to Layer 2,
and you do not have to enable relay agent to snoop on Layer 2 interfaces.
Related
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
Commands

ces Delay writing the binding table for a specified time.
Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write-delay minutes
Parameters
minutes Range: 5-21600
Default None
Command
History

ces Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface type
slot/port lease number
Parameters
mac address Enter the keyword mac followed by the MAC address of the host to which the
server is leasing the IP address.
vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan-id followed by the VLAN to which the host belongs.
Range: 2-4094
ip ip-address Enter the keyword ip followed by the IP address that the server is leasing.

interface type Enter the keyword interface followed by the type of interface to which the host is
connected.
For an 10/100 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastethernet.
For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet.
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet.
tengigabitethernet.
slot/port Enter the slot and port number of the interface.
lease time Enter the keyword lease followed by the amount of time the IP address will be
leased.
Range: 1-4294967295
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Default None
Command
History
Related
Commands

ces Renew the binding table.
Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Default None
Command
History

ces Configure an interface as trusted.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust
Default Untrusted

Command
History
ces Enable IP Source Guard.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation [ipmac]
Parameters
ipmac Enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation (Not available on E-Series).
Default Disabled
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added keyword ipmac.
Usage You must allocate at least one FP block to ipmacacl before you can enable IP+MAC Source Address
Information Validation.
1 Use the command cam-acl l2acl from CONFIGURATION mode

2 Save the running-config to the startup-config
3 Reload the system.

ces Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name
Parameters
name Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping.
Default Disabled
Command
History
Usage When enabled the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLAN(s). Note
Information that learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN.
Related
Commands
ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted.

ip dhcp relay
ces Enable Option 82.
Syntax ip dhcp relay information-option [trust-downstream]
Parameters
trust-downstream Configure the system to trust Option 82 when it is received from the
previous-hop router.
Default Disabled
Command
History

ces Display the contents of the DHCP binding table or display the interfaces configured with IP Source
Guard.
Syntax show ip dhcp snooping [binding | source-address-validation]
Parameters
binding Display the binding table.
source-address-validation Display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Default None
Command
History
Related
clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

ces Validate a DHCP packets source hardware address against the client hardware address field
(CHADDR) in the payload.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
Default Disabled

Command
History


16
Equal Cost Multi-Path
Overview
The characters that appear below command headings indicate support for the associated Dell Force10
platform, as follows:
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Commands
The ECMP commands are:
hash-algorithm
hash-algorithm ecmp
hash-algorithm seed
ip ecmp-deterministic
ipv6 ecmp-deterministic
hash-algorithm
e Change the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across a Port Channel. The ECMP, LAG, and
line card options are supported only on the E-Series TeraScale and ExaScale chassis.
Syntax hash-algorithm {algorithm-number | {ecmp {checksum| crc | xor} [number] lag {checksum|
crc | xor} [number] nh-ecmp {checksum| crc | xor} [number] linecard number ip-sa-mask
value ip-da-mask value}
To return to the default hash algorithm, use the no hash-algorithm command.
To return to the default the Equal-cost Multipath Routing (ECMP) hash algorithm, use the no
hash-algorithm ecmp algorithm-value command.
To remove the hash algorithm on a particular line card, use the no hash-algorithm linecard number
command.
Equal Cost Multi-Path | 473

Parameters
algorithm-number Enter the algorithm number.

Range: 0 to 47
Note: For EtherScale, range 0 to 15 is valid; 16 to 47 will be considered
as 15.
ecmp hash algorithm TeraScale and ExaScale Only: Enter the keyword ecmp followed by the ECMP
value hash algorithm value.
Range: 0 to 47
lag hash algorithm TeraScale and ExaScale Only: Enter the keyword lag followed by the LAG hash
value algorithm value.
Range: 0 to 47
nh-ecmp hash (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword nh-ecmp followed by the ECMP hash
algorithm value algorithm value.
linecard number (OPTIONAL) TeraScale and ExaScale Only: Enter the keyword linecard
followed by the line card slot number.
Range: 0 to 13 on an E1200/E1200i, 0 to 6 on an E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on an
E300
ip-sa-mask value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip-sa-mask followed by the ECMP/LAG
hash mask value.
Range: 0 to FF
Default: FF
ip-da-mask value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip-da-mask followed by the ECMP/LAG
hash mask value.
Range: 0 to FF
Default: FF
Defaults 0 for hash-algorithm value on TeraScale and ExaScale

IPSA and IPDA mask value is FF for line card
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added nh-ecmp option
Version 7.7.1.1 Added nh-ecmp option
Version 6.5.1.0 Added support for the line card option on TeraScale only
Version 6.3.1.0 Added the support for ECMP and LAG on TeraScale only
Usage Set the he default hash-algorithm method on ExaScale systems to ensure CRC is not used for LAG. For
Information example, hash-algorithm ecmp xor lag checksum nh-ecmp checksum
To achieve the functionality of hash-align on the ExaScale platform, do not use CRC as a
hash-algorithm method
The hash value calculated with the hash-algorithm command is unique to the entire chassis. The hash
algorithm command with the line card option changes the hash for a particular line card by applying
the mask specified in the IPSA and IPDA fields.
The line card option is applicable with the lag-hash-align microcode only (refer to cam-profile
(Config)). Any other microcode returns an error message as follows:
474 | Equal Cost Multi-Path

FTOS(conf)#hash-algorithm linecard 5 ip-sa-mask ff ip-da-mask
ff
% Error: This command is not supported in the current microcode

configuration.
In addition, the linecard number ip-sa-mask value ip-da-mask value option has the following
behavior to maintain bi-directionality:
When hashing is done on both IPSA and IPDA, the ip-sa-mask and ip-da-mask values must be
equal. (Single Linecard)
When hashing is done only on IPSA or IPDA, FTOS maintains bi-directionality with masks set to
XX 00 for line card 1 and 00 XX for line card 2 (ip-sa-mask and ip-da-mask). The mask value
must be the same for both line cards when using multiple line cards as ingress (where XX is any
value from 00 to FF for both line cards). For example, assume traffic is flowing between linecard 1
and linecard 2:
hash-algorithm linecard 1 ip-sa-mask aa ip-da-mask 00
hash-algorithm linecard 2 ip-sa-mask 00 ip-da-mask aa
The different hash algorithms are based on the number of Port Channel members and packet values.
The default hash algorithm (number 0) yields the most balanced results in various test scenarios, but if
the default algorithm does not provide a satisfactory distribution of traffic, then use the
hash-algorithm command to designate another algorithm.
When a Port Channel member leaves or is added to the Port Channel, the hash algorithm is recalculated
to balance traffic across the members.
On TeraScale if the keyword ECMP or LAG is not entered, FTOS assumes it to be common for both.
If the keyword ECMP or LAG is entered separately, both should fall in the range of 0 to 23 or 24 to 47
since compression enable/disable is common for both.
TeraScale and ExaScale support the range 0-47. The default for ExaScale is 24.
For EtherScale, only the range 0 to 15 is valid; 16 to 47 is considered as 15.
Compression Enabled
0-11
rotate [0 - 11]
Compression Enabled
12 - 23
shift [0 - 11]
Compression Disabled
24 - 35
rotate [0 - 11]
Compression Disabled
36 - 47
shift [0 - 11]
Related
Commands load-balance (E-Series) Change the traffic balancing method.

hash-algorithm ecmp
cs Change the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across an ECMP (equal-cost multipath
routing) group.
Syntax hash-algorithm ecmp {crc-upper} | {dest-ip} | {lsb}
To return to the default hash algorithm, use the no hash-algorithm ecmp command.
Parameters
crc-upper Uses the upper 32 bits of the key for the hash computation
Default: crc-lower
dest-ip Uses the destination IP for ECMP hashing
Default: enabled
lsb Returns the LSB of the key as the hash
Default: crc-lower
Defaults crc-lower, dest-ip enabled
Command
History
Usage The hash value calculated with the hash-algorithm command is unique to the entire chassis. The
Information default ECMP hash configuration is crc-lower. This takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute
the egress port and is the fall-back configuration if the user hasnt configured anything else.
The different hash algorithms are based on the number of ECMP group members and packet values.
The default hash algorithm yields the most balanced results in various test scenarios, but if the default
algorithm does not provide satisfactory distribution of traffic, then use this command to designate
another algorithm.
When a member leaves or is added to the ECMP group, the hash algorithm is recalculated to balance
traffic across the members.
Related
Commands load-balance (C-Series and
S-Series)
hash-algorithm seed
e Select the seed value for the ECMP, LAG, and NH hashing algorithm.
Syntax hash-algorithm seed value [linecard slot] [port-set number]
Parameters
seed value Enter the keyword followed by the seed value.
Range: 0 - 4095
linecard slot Enter the keyword followed by the line card slot number.
port-set number Enter the keyword followed by the line card port-pipe number.
Defaults None

Command
History
Usage Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order.
Information However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a
different hash result for every chassis. This means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are
sorted, two unrelated chassis will select different hops.
FTOS provides a CLI-based solution for modifying the hash seed to ensure that on each configured
system, the ECMP selection is same. When configured, the same seed is set for ECMP, LAG, and NH,
and is used for incoming traffic only.
Note: While the seed is stored separately on each port-pipe, the same seed is used across all
CAMs.
Note: You cannot separate LAG and ECMP, but you can use different algorithms across
chassis with the same seed. If LAG member ports span multiple port-pipes and line cards, set
the seed to the same value on each port-pipe to achieve deterministic behavior.
Note: If the hash algorithm configuration is removed. Hash seed will not go to original
factory default setting.
ip ecmp-deterministic
e Deterministic ECMP Next Hop arranges all ECMPs in order before writing them into the CAM. For
example, suppose the RTM learns 8 ECMPs in the order that the protocols and interfaces came up. In
this case, the FIB and CAM sort them so that the ECMPs are always arranged.This implementation
ensures that every chassis having the same prefixes orders the ECMPs the same.
With 8 or less ECMPs, the ordering is lexicographic and deterministic. With more than 8 ECMPs,
ordering is deterministic, but it is not in lexicographic order.
Syntax ip ecmp-deterministic
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage After enabling IPv6 Deterministic ECMP, traffic loss occurs for a few milliseconds while FTOS sorts
Information the CAM entries.
ipv6 ecmp-deterministic
e Deterministic ECMP Next Hop arranges all ECMPs in order before writing them into the CAM. For
example, suppose the RTM learns 8 ECMPs in the order that the protocols and interfaces came up. In
this case, the FIB and CAM sort them so that the ECMPs are always arranged.This implementation
ensures that every chassis having the same prefixes orders the ECMPs the same.

With 8 or less ECMPs, the ordering is lexicographic and deterministic. With more than 8 ECMPs,
ordering is deterministic, but it is not in lexicographic order.
Syntax ipv6 ecmp-deterministic
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage After enabling IPv6 Deterministic ECMP, traffic loss occurs for a few milliseconds while FTOS sorts
Information the CAM entries.

17
Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD)
Overview
FTOS supports Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD) on the Ethernet interfaces of the E-Series, as
indicated by the e character that appears below each command heading. This feature detects and
reports far-end link failures.
FEFD is not supported on the Management interface.

During an RPM failover, FEFD is operationally disabled for approximately 8-10 seconds.
By default, FEFD is disabled.
Commands
The FEFD commands are:
debug fefd
fefd
fefd mode
fefd-global
fefd disable
fefd interval
fefd-global interval
fefd reset
show fefd
debug fefd
e Enable debugging of FEFD.
Syntax debug fefd {events | packets} [interface]

To disable debugging of FEFD, use the no debug fefd {events | packets} [interface] command.
Parameters
events Enter the keyword events to enable debugging of FEFD state changes.
Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD) | 479

packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of FEFD to view information on
packets sent and received.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
information.
fefd
e Enable Far-End Failure Detection on an interface.
Syntax fefd
To disable FEFD on an interface, enter no fefd.
Defaults Disabled.
Usage When you enter no fefd for an interface and fefd-global, FEFD is enabled on the interface because
Information the no fefd command is not retained in the configuration file. To keep the interface FEFD disabled
when the global configuration changes, use the fefd disable command.
fefd mode
e Change the FEFD mode on an interface.
Syntax fefd mode {normal | aggressive}]

To return the FEFD mode to the default of normal, enter no fefd mode.
Parameters
normal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword normal to change the link state to unknown
when a far-end failure is detected by the software on that interface. When the
interface is placed in unknown state, the software brings down the line
protocol.
aggressive (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword aggressive to change the link state to
error-disabled when a far-end failure is detected by the software on that
interface. When an interface is placed in error-disabled state, you must enter the
fefd reset command to reset the interface state.
Defaults normal
480 | Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD)

fefd-global
e Enable FEFD globally on the system.
Syntax fefd-global [mode {normal | aggressive}]

To disable FEFD globally, use the no fefd-global [mode {normal | aggressive}] command
syntax.
Parameters
mode normal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords mode normal to change the link state to
unknown when a far-end failure is detected by the software on that interface.
When the interface is placed in unknown state, the software brings down the
line protocol.
Normal mode is the default.
mode aggressive (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mode aggressive to change the link state
to error-disabled when a far-end failure is detected by the software on that
interface. When an interface is placed in error-disabled state, you must enter the
fefd reset command to reset the interface state.
Defaults Disabled.
Usage If you enter only the fefd-global syntax, the mode is normal and the default interval is 15 seconds.
Information
If you disable FEFD globally (no fefd-global), the system does not remove the FEFD interface
configuration.
fefd disable
e Disable FEFD on an interface only. This command overrides the fefd-global command for the
interface.
Syntax fefd disable
To re-enable FEFD on an interface, enter no fefd disable.
Default Not configured.
fefd interval
e Set an interval between control packets.
Syntax fefd interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no fefd interval.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the time between FEFD control packets.

Default: 15 seconds
Defaults 15 seconds
fefd-global interval
e Configure an interval between FEFD control packets.
Syntax fefd-global interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no fefd-global interval.
Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the time between FEFD control packets.
Default: 15 seconds
Defaults 15 seconds
fefd reset
e Reset all interfaces or a singe interface that was in error-disabled mode.
Syntax fefd reset [interface]
Parameters
information.
show fefd
e View FEFD status globally or on a specific interface.
Syntax show fefd [interface]

Parameters
information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 17-1. Command Example: show fefd

FTOS#sh fefd
FEFD is globally 'ON', interval is 10 seconds, mode is 'Aggressive'.
INTERFACE MODE INTERVAL STATE
(second)
Gi 5/0 Aggressive 10 Admin Shutdown
Gi 5/10 NA NA Locally disabled
Gi 5/11 Aggressive 10 Err-disabled
FTOS#
Table 17-1. Description of show fefd display
Field Description
Interface Displays the interfaces type and number.
Mode Displays the mode (aggressive or normal) or NA if the interface contains fefd disable in
its configuration.
Interval Displays the interval between FEFD packets.
State Displays the state of the interface and can be one of the following:
bi-directional (interface is up and connected and seeing neighbors echo)
err-disabled (only found when the FEFD mode is aggressive and when the interface
has not seen its neighbors echo for 3 times the message interval. To reset an interface
in this state, use the fefd reset command.)
unknown (only found when FEFD mode is normal
locally disabled (interface contains the fefd disable command in its configuration)
Admin Shutdown (interface is disabled with the shutdown command)


18
FTOS Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)
Overview
FTOS Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) is supported on platforms c e s
FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to
run the Spanning Tree Protocol. The Resilient Ring Protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a
high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master
node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode.
Commands
The FRRP commands are:
clear frrp
debug frrp
description
disable
interface
member-vlan
mode
protocol frrp
show frrp
timer

FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
FRRP is a Dell Force10 proprietary protocol that does not interoperate with any other vendor.
Spanning Tree must be disabled on both primary and secondary interfaces before Resilient Ring
protocol is enabled.
A VLAN configured as control VLAN for a ring cannot be configured as control or member
VLAN for any other ring.
Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes.
If multiple rings share one or more member VLANs, they cannot share any links between them.
Each ring can have only one Master node; all others are Transit nodes.
FTOS Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) | 485

clear frrp
ce Clear the FRRP statistics counters.
Syntax clear frrp [ring-id]
Parameters
ring-id (Optional) Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255
Command Modes EXEC
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series
History
Example Figure 18-1. clear frrp Command Examples
FTOS#clear frrp clears the frrp counters for all the available rings
Clear frrp statistics counter on all ring [confirm] yes confirmation required
FTOS#clear frrp 4 clears the frrp counters on the specified ring
Clear frrp statistics counter for ring 4 [confirm] yes confirmation required
FTOS#
Usage Executing this command, without the optional ring-id, will clear statistics counters on all the available
Information rings. FTOS requires a command line confirmation before the command is executed. This commands
clears the following counters:
hello Rx and Tx counters
Topology change Rx and Tx counters
The number of state change counters
Related
show frrp Display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration
Commands
debug frrp
ce Enable FRRP debugging.
Syntax debug frrp {event | packet | detail} [ring-id] [count number]

To disable debugging, use the no debug frrp {event | packet | detail} {ring-id} [count number]
command.
486 | FTOS Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

Parameters
event Enter the keyword event to display debug information related to ring
protocol transitions.
packet Enter the keyword packet to display brief debug information related to
control packets.
detail Enter the keyword detail to display detailed debug information related to
the entire ring protocol packets.
ring-id (Optional) Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255
count number Enter the keyword count followed by the number of debug outputs.
Range: 1 to 65534
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp)
Command
History
Usage Since the Resilient Ring Protocol can potentially transmit 20 packets per interface, debug information
Information must be restricted.
description
ce Enter an identifying description of the ring.
Syntax description Word

To remove the ring description, use the no description [Word] command.
Parameters
Word Enter a description of the ring.
Maximum: 255 characters
Command
History
disable
ce Disable the Resilient Ring Protocol.
Syntax disable
To enable the Resilient Ring Protocol, use the no disable command.
Defaults Disabled

Command
History
interface
ce Configure the primary, secondary, and control-vlan interfaces.
Syntax interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id}

To return to the default, use the no interface {primary interface secondary interface
control-vlan vlan-id} command.
Parameters
primary interface Enter the keyword primary to configure the primary interface followed by one of
the following interfaces and slot/port information:
For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed by
number:
ExaScale.
information.
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to configure the secondary interface followed by
interface one of the following interfaces and slot/port information:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
control-vlan Enter the keyword control-vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
vlan-id Range: 1 to 4094

Command
History
Usage This command causes the Ring Manager to take ownership of these two ports after the configuration is
Information validated by the IFM. Ownership is relinquished for a port only when the interface does not play a part
in any control VLAN, that is, the interface does not belong to any ring.
Related
show frrp Display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration information
Commands
member-vlan
ce Specify the member VLAN identification numbers.
Syntax member-vlan {vlan-range}

To return to the default, use the no member-vlan [vlan-range] command.
Parameters
vlan-range Enter the member VLANs using comma separated VLAN IDs, a range of VLAN IDs, a
single VLAN ID, or a combination. For example:
Comma separated: 3, 4, 6
Range: 5-10
Combination: 3, 4, 5-10, 8
Command
History
mode
ce Set the Master or Transit mode of the ring.
Syntax mode {master | transit}

To reset the mode, use the no mode {master | transit} command.
Parameters
master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode.
transit Enter the keyword transit to set the Ring node to Transit mode.
Defaults Mode None
Command
History

protocol frrp
ce Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification.
Syntax protocol frrp {ring-id}

To exit the ring protocol, use the no protocol frrp {ring-id} command.
Parameters
ring-id Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255
Command
History
Usage This command places you into the Resilient Ring Protocol. After executing this command, the
Information command line prompt changes to conf-frrp.
show frrp
ce Display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration.
Syntax show frrp [ring-id [summary]] | [summary]
Parameters
ring-id Enter the ring identification number.
Range: 1 to 255
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view just a summarized
version of the Ring configuration.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 18-2. show frrp summary Command Example

FTOS#show frrp summary
Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans

-----------------------------------------------------------------
2 UP Master 2 11-20, 25,27-30
31 UP Transit 31 40-41
50 Down Transit 50 32
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 18-3. show frrp ring-id Command Example
FTOS#show frrp 1
Ring protocol 1 is in Master mode
Ring Protocol Interface:
Primary : GigabitEthernet 0/16 State: Forwarding
Secondary: Port-channel 100 State: Blocking
Control Vlan: 1
Ring protocol Timers: Hello-Interval 50 msec Dead-Interval 150 msec
Ring Master's MAC Address is 00:01:e8:13:a3:19
Topology Change Statistics: Tx:110 Rx:45
Hello Statistics: Tx:13028 Rx:12348
Number of state Changes: 34
Member Vlans: 1000-1009
FTOS#
Example 3 Figure 18-4. show frrp ring-id summary Command Example

FTOS#show frrp 2 summary
Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans

-----------------------------------------------------------------
2 Up Master 2 11-20, 25, 27-30
FTOS#
Related
protocol frrp Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification
Commands
timer
ce Set the hello or dead interval for the Ring control packets.
Syntax timer {hello-interval milliseconds}| {dead-interval milliseconds}

To remove the timer, use the no timer {hello-interval [milliseconds]}| {dead-interval
milliseconds} command.
Parameters
hello-interval Enter the keyword hello-interval followed by the time, in milliseconds,
milliseconds to set the hello interval of the control packets. The milliseconds must be
enter in increments of 50 milliseconds, for example 50, 100, 150 and so on.
If an invalid value is enter, an error message is generated.
Range: 50 to 2000ms
Default: 500 ms
dead-interval Enter the keyword dead-interval followed by the time, in milliseconds,
milliseconds to set the dead interval of the control packets.
Range: 50 to 6000ms
Default: 1500ms
Note: The configured dead interval should be at least three times the
hello interval
Defaults Default as shown
Command
History

Usage The hello interval is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the
Information master node. The dead interval is the time that elapses before a timeout occurs.

19
FTOS Service Agent
Overview
The FTOS Service Agent (FTSA), commonly called a call-home service, collects information from the
chassis manager, constructs email messages, and sends the messages to the recipients that you
configure.
For details on the use of FTSA commands and the structure of FTSA messages, see the Service Agent
(FTSA) chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.
All commands in this chapter are supported on C-Series and the E-Series using TeraScale cards. All
commands except for three encrypt, keyadd, and show keys are supported on E-Series using
EtherScale cards. Platform support is indicated by the characters that appear below each command
heading c for C-Series, e for E-Series.
Commands
The FTSA commands are:
action-list
admin-email
call-home
case-number
schedule
seq cli-action
seq cli-debug
seq cli-show
contact-address
contact-email
contact-name
contact-notes
contact-phone
dampen
debug call-home
default-action
default-test
description
domain-name
enable
FTOS Service Agent | 493

enable-all
encrypt
frequency
keyadd
log-messages
log-only
match
message-format
policy
policy-action-list
policy-test-list
pr-number
recipient
run-cpu
sample-rate
server
show configuration
show debugging
show keys
smtp server-address
test-condition (comparing samples)
test-condition (comparison to a value)
test-condition message-text (deprecated)
test-limit
test-list
494 | FTOS Service Agent

action-list
ce Specify an action list for the associated policy and enter the conf-call-home-actionlist-name mode.
Syntax [no] action-list word
Parameters
word Enter the keyword action-list followed by the name of a configured policy action
list.
Defaults none
Command Modes config-callhome-policy-name
Command
History
Usage You access this command by first using the policy-action-list command to define a policy-action list
Information name and executing the policy command. Associate this action list to a selected test list through the
policy command. When any event occurs that is monitored by the associated test list, the policy
invokes the action list that you select here.
Related
default-action Select the information collection action that matches the selected test group.
Commands
policy Create a policy with a name and enter config-callhome-policy-name mode.
policy-action-list Name a policy action list and enter the config-callhome-actionlist mode to execute the
default-action command.
test-list Enter the name of a configured policy test list.
admin-email
ce Enter the Administrator email address, the address from which FTSA emails are addressed.
Syntax admin-email email_address

To remove the Administrators email address, use the no admin-email command.
Parameters
email address You have two choices:
Enter the administrators full email address, for example,
admin@domain_name.com.
Enter just the username component, for example, admin.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-callhome)
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series
History
Usage The domain name part of the email address can be specified here or by using the command
Information domain-name. In either case, if you specify a domain name by using the domain-name command,
that name will be used for the email address instead of a domain name that you might enter here.

Related
call-home Start FTSA and Enter the FTSA mode.

Commands
domain-name Specify the domain name to be used for the Administrators email address.
server Configure a recipient.
smtp server-address Identify the local SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server from which
FTSA email messages will be forwarded.
call-home
ce This command has two functions:
Start FTSA.
Enter the CONFIGURATION (conf-callhome) mode.
Syntax call-home
To stop FTSA, use the no call-home command. Stopping FTSA removes all FTSA configuration
from the running configuration.
Command
History
Example Figure 19-1. call-home Command Example

FTOS(conf)#call-home
Apr 28 15:32:21: %RPM1-P:CP %CALL-HOME-3-CALLHOME: Call-home service started
FTOS(conf-callhome)#
Usage If executing the call-home command starts FTSA (this only happens if FTSA is not already started),
Information FTOS returns a verification message, and FTSA generates an email message to the default recipient,
ftsa@force10networks.com.
If FTSA is already started, executing the call-home command simply puts the user in
CONFIGURATION (conf-callhome) mode.
If FTSA is running and the no call-home command is executed, FTSA sends an alert email message
to all designated recipients, then stops. The user is returned to CONFIGURATION mode, and FTOS
removes the current FTSA configuration from the running configuration.
Related
Commands
smtp server-address Identify the local SMTP server from which FTSA email messages will be forwarded.
admin-email Enter the Administrators email address.

case-number
ce Specify a case number for the associated policy.
Syntax [no] case-number word
Parameters
word Enter the keyword case-number followed by a case number in the format C-xxxxx
or c-xxxxx, where x = 0 to 9.
Range: 1 to 20 characters.
Defaults none
Command Modes config-callhome-policy-name
Command
History
Usage This is an optional command that you access by entering the policy command. You would only use
Information this command if there is a TAC case associated with this policy. The specified case number would be
returned to the host, if the action list is triggered.
Whatever you enter is saved in the call-home configuration.
Related
action-list Specify a policy action list for the associated policy.
Commands
pr-number Enter a PR (problem report) number associated with the selected policy.
test-list Enter the name of a configured policy test list.
schedule
ce Executes an action list at the configured time.
Syntax schedule hr:min:sec [once | daily]
Parameters
hr:min:sec Chassis time specified in hour:minute:second format.
once Executes the action list only once at the configured time.
daily Executes the action list multiple times at the configured time.
Defaults None
Command Modes CALL-HOME ACTION-LIST
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series.
History
Related
action-list Specify an action list for the associated policy and enter the
Commands
conf-call-home-actionlist-name mode.

seq cli-action
ce Configure an action to execute an FTOS command for one-time operation, triggered as part of the
selected action list.
Syntax seq number cli-action command
Parameters
seq number Use the keyword seq followed by a number that FTOS uses to execute the list of
actions in numerical order.
command Enter a mode command.
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Keyword cli-command changed to cli-action. All options removed. Added
keywork seq.
Related
Commands
seq cli-debug
ce Configure an action to collect debug information using the designated debug command for the
designated time interval.
Syntax seq number cli-debug command time seconds
Parameters
seq number Use the keyword seq followed by a number that FTOS uses to execute
the list of actions in numerical order.
cli-debug debug-command Enter a debug command, but without the initial debug keyword. If the
debug command has spaces, wrap the command in quotes.
Range: 1-100((max 100 chars including quotes)
time seconds Enter the keyword time, followed by the duration, in seconds, that the
debug operation should operate.
Range: 1600 (number of seconds that the operation should operate)
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added keyword seq.
Usage When you enter a debug command, do not repeat the initial debug keyword. For example, if the
command is debug cpu-traffic-stats, enter cli-debug cpu-traffic-stats.

If the debug command has spaces, such as debug ip bgp events, put the words following debug in
double quotes.
Related
Commands
seq cli-show
ce Configure an action to collect the output of the designated show command a designated number of
times at a designated time interval.
Syntax seq number cli-show command repeat number delay seconds
Parameters
seq number Use the keyword seq followed by a number that FTOS uses to execute the list of
actions in numerical order.
cli-show Enter the keyword cli-show, followed by a show command.
show-command Range: 1-100(max 100 chars including quotes)
repeat number Enter the keyword repeat, followed by the number of times that the output of the
designated show command should be collected.
Range: 110 (number of times to collect output)
delay seconds Enter the keyword delay, followed by the interval, in number of seconds, to wait in
collecting instances of the output of the designated show command.
Range: 1120 (number of seconds to wait between collections)
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added keyword seq.
Usage If the command has spaces. such as show processes cpu time, put the words following show in
double quotes, as shown in the following example.
Related
Commands

contact-address
ce Enter your customer address (up to 100 characters) to be included in type 5 FTSA messages.
Syntax contact-address string
Defaults none
Command Modes CALL-HOME
Command
History
Related
call-home Start FTSA and enter CONFIGURATION (conf-callhome) mode.
Commands
contact-email
ce Enter a customer email address (up to 60 characters) to be included in type 5 FTSA messages.
Syntax contact-email address
Defaults none
Command
History
Related
Commands
contact-name
ce Enter a customer contact name (up to 25 characters) to be included in type 5 FTSA messages.
Syntax contact-name name
Defaults none
Command
History
Related
Commands

contact-notes
ce Enter comments (up to 100 characters) to be included in the configuration database and in type 5 FTSA
messages.
Syntax contact-notes string
Defaults none
Command
History
Related
Commands
contact-phone
ce Enter a customer phone number (up to 50 characters) to be included in type-5 FTSA messages.
Syntax contact-phone number
Defaults none
Command
History
Related
Commands
dampen
ce Set a delay before sampling for a test condition again after it has been matched.
Syntax dampen number
Parameters
number Enter the number of minutes for FTSA to wait before sampling a test condition again after it
has been matched.
Range: 11440
Defaults 5 minutes
Command Modes CALL-HOME POLICY
Command
History
Related
Commands

debug call-home
ce Monitor FTSA email messages through the CLI.
Syntax debug call-home
To turn message monitoring off, use the no debug call-home command.
Defaults no debug call-home
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
show debugging Display the status of FTSA (call-home) debugging.
Commands
default-action
ce Select the information collection action that matches the equivalent test group.
Syntax default-action {hardware | software | exception}
Parameters
hardware Enter the keyword hardware to collect hardware information. See the FTOS
Configuration Guide for the list of actions executed by this keyword.
software Enter the keyword software to collect software information. See the FTOS
exception Enter the keyword exception to collect exception information. See the FTOS
Command Mode CALL-HOME ACTION-LIST
Command
History
Usage Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, after you use the policy-test-list and default-list commands to put you
Information in the config-callhome-actionlist mode, you can use the default-action command to select any test
group.
The FTSA message (or log entry) contains the information collected by the selected action.
Related
policy-action-list This command names the policy action list and enters the
Commands
config-callhome-actionlist-name mode.

default-test
ce Invoke one of three preset system-monitoring test groups.
Syntax default-test {hardware | software | exception}
Parameters
hardware Enter the keyword hardware to monitor hardware conditions. See the FTOS
Configuration Guide for the list of conditions monitored by this keyword.
software Enter the keyword software to monitor software conditions. See the FTOS Configuration
Guide for the list of conditions monitored by this keyword.
exception Enter the keyword exception to monitor the exceptions events. See the FTOS
Configuration Guide for the list of conditions monitored by this keyword.
Defaults None
Command Mode CALL-HOME TEST-LIST
Command
History
Usage Executing the policy-test-list command puts you in the config-callhome-testlist mode, where you
Information use this command to invoke one of three possible test groups. FTOS monitors the system for any event
in the selected test group. If such an event occurs, FTOS invokes the action you define using the
default-action command.
Related
Commands
policy-test-list Name a new or existing test list and enter the config-callhome-testlist-name mode.
description
ce Enter a description for the Call Home mode.
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Call Home mode(80 characters maximum).
Defaults None
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-CALLHOME
Command
History
Related
call-home Enter the Call Home mode on the switch.
Commands

domain-name
ce Specify the domain name for the Administrators email address.
Syntax domain-name domain_name
To remove the domain name, use the no domain-name command.
Parameters
domain name Enter the keyword domain-name followed by the complete domain name of the
Administrators email address, for example, domain_name.com.
Defaults The domain name specified in the admin-email command
Command
History
Usage If you use this command to specify a domain name, that domain name is used instead of any domain
Information name that you might have specified using the admin-email command.
Related
admin-email Enter the Administrators email address.
Commands
enable
ce Enable the sending of FTSA email messages to the selected recipient.
Syntax enable
To disable (end) the sending of FTSA email messages to the selected recipient, use the no enable
command.
Defaults no enable
Command Modes conf-callhome
Command
History
Usage If you leave the selected recipient in the default condition of disabled (no FTSA email messages to the
Information selected recipient), you can either come back to this command later, or you can use the enable-all
command. If you use the enable-all command, you can then disable email messages to the recipient
with the no enable command at the server-specific prompt.
FTSA sends an email notification to the selected recipient whenever the enable status changes.
Note: Execute the enable command only after the SMTP and admin-email commands are
executed.

Related
admin-email Specify the Administrators email address.
Commands
smtp server-address Configure the SMTP server detail.
enable-all
ce Enable (start) the sending of FTSA email messages to all designated recipients.
Syntax enable-all
To disable (end) the sending of FTSA email messages to all designated recipients, use the no enable
command.
Defaults no enable-all
Command
History
Usage FTSA sends an email notification to all designated recipients whenever the enable-all status changes.
Information
Note: Execute the enable-all command only after the SMTP and admin-email commands
are executed.
Related
Commands
smtp server-address Identify the SMTP server.
server Configure each recipient.
encrypt
ce Specify email encryption for this server.
Syntax encrypt
To remove email encryption for this server, use the no encrypt command.
Defaults no encrypt
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Server (conf-callhome-server_name)
Command
History

Usage Encryption is supported through PGP (Pretty Good Privacy). Encryption cannot be enabled without a
Information public key for the server. On E-Series chassis, this command is only supported for TeraScale cards.
Note: Execute the encrypt command only after the keyadd command is executed.
Related
Commands
keyadd Add a public key to the server.
server Configure each recipient.
frequency
ce Select the interval (frequency) with which email FTSA messages are sent to all designated recipients.
Syntax frequency minutes
To return to the default frequency, use the no frequency command.
Parameters
minutes Enter the time interval, in minutes, that you want between FTSA status emails.
Default: 1440 minutes (24 hours)
Defaults 1440 minutes (24 hours)
Command
History
Usage The frequency is immediately set once the frequency command is executed. For example, if you set
Information the frequency to 120 minutes, the 120 minutes begins as soon as the command is executed. In this
example, email messages will be sent to all designated recipients exactly two hours after executing the
command.
Related
Commands
keyadd
ce Add the public encryption key (PGP5-compatible) for a specific recipient if you want to encrypt
messages sent to that recipient.
Syntax keyadd public_key
To remove the public key, use the no keyadd public_key command.
Parameters
public_key Enter the local source and filename of the public key (must be PGP5 compatible) created
for the selected recipient, such as keyadd flash://mykey

Command Modes CONFIGURATION Server (conf-callhome-server_name)
Command
History
Usage The Dell Force10 server associated with the default Dell Force10 Support recipient has a public key
Information that is shipped as part of FTOS, so you do not need to enter the keys filename for that server.
However, if the Dell Force10 public key is changed, a notification will be made to download the new
key from the Dell Force10 website and to replace the old key with that new key. Also, if you set up
other recipients, use this command to enter their key filenames.
On E-Series chassis, this command is only supported for TeraScale cards.
Note: Execute the encrypt command after the keyadd command to ensure email
encryption.
Related
Commands
encrypt Enable email encryption.
server Configure recipients.
show keys Display the email encryption (PGP) keys.
log-messages
ce This command collects information from the chassis.
Syntax [no] log-messages [delay 601440] [severity 07] [filter word]
Parameters
delay 601440 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword delay followed by the number of minutes to delay
from the time of invoking the command after which FTSA will accumulate
system log messages into a message.
severity 07 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword severity followed by the error severity level
entered in the system log that should be collected into the FTSA message.
filter word (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter followed by a character string that FTSA
should use to search the system log. A search string containing spaces must be in
quotes.
If the search yields a positive result, FTSA will send a log message with the string
included.
Defaults delay = 1440 minutes; severity = 7; filter = no
Command
History
Usage Each of the three command parameters are optional and can be entered in any order, individually or in
Information combination.

The default severity level of 7 is the recommended severity level. Lower values will result in partial
log data sent to the server because messages with higher values are filtered out.
Related
Commands
log-only Select the information collection action that matches the selected test group.
logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default,
all messages are logged to the internal buffer.
show logging Display the logging settings and system messages logged to the internal buffer of the
switch.
log-only
ce Execute this command if you want FTSA data to be collected in a local log rather than to be sent to
configured FTSA recipients.
Syntax [no] log-only
Defaults no log-only
Command Modes conf-callhome-actionlist-name
Command
History
Usage If you execute this command, data gathered by the action list invoked by the default-action
Information command will be saved in a local file. The file will have the same name as the action list and with a
time stamp appended to the file name.
When saved in flash, the file name format is:
flash:/<actionlistName>-<timestamp>.ftsa
For example: flash:/hardwareAction- 02_16_34 423.ftsa
Because the time stamp makes each file unique, files will not be overwritten if the action list executes
more than once. If this log-only command is not executed, or if no log-only option is executed, then
the collected data will be sent in an FTSA email.
When sent as an mail attachment, the file name format is:
<actionlistName>-<timestamp>.txt
For example: hardwareAction-02_16_34 423.txt
If the collected data is split due to a size limit, a sequential version number will be added to it.
For example: hardwareAction-02_16_34 423_0.txt
Related
Commands

match
ce This command enables you to execute the configured action list based on one of three test list criteria.
Syntax match {any | all | simultaneous}
Parameters
all Entering this keyword will require that all conditions in the test list be matched in order
to execute the associated action list.
any Entering this keyword will cause a match for any item in the test list to execute the
associated action list. This is the default option.
simultaneous Entering this keyword indicates that the test conditions must be matched in the same
sampling period in order to execute the associated action list.
Default match any
Command Mode config-callhome-testlist-name
Command
History
Related
Commands
policy-test-list Name a policy test list and enter the config-callhome-actionlist-name mode.
message-format
ce Set the format of an action-list (type-5) email message.
Syntax message-format {xml | text}
Parameters
xml Enter the keyword xml to have the type-5 mail generated in XML format.
text Enter the keyword text to have the type-5 mail generated in text format.
Defaults xml
Command Modes config-callhome-actionlist-name
Command
History
Usage A type-5 message emails the output gathered by an action list. The attachment for the Type 5 message
Information contains the output of a single execution of a single action list, as well as the content of the main
message.
The example, below, shows generally how a type-5 message would look formatted in XML.

Example
<action_list_message>
<AgentInfo>
<messagetype>Type - 5</messagetype>
<time>Oct 18 15:05:34.699 UTC</time>
<serialnum>E000000001664</serialnum>
</AgentInfo>
<contact_info>
<contact-name> name </contact-name>
<contact-email> email </contact-email>
<contact-phone> phone </contact-phone>
<contact-address> address </contact-address>
<contact-notes> notes </contact-notes>
</contact_info>
<F10_info>
<policy_name>xxxxxxx</policy_name>
<case_number>xxxxx</case_number>
<pr_number>xxxxx</pr_number>
</F10_info>
<action_list_name> name </action_list_name>

<test_list_match>
<match> keyword : value </match>
<match> cpu-5-min : 98% </match>
<match> etc </match>
</test_list_match>
<content>
<item>
<item_name>show pcdfo</item_name>
<item_time>Oct 18 15:05:34.699 UTC</item_time>
<item_output>xxx</item_output>
</item>
<item>
<item_name>debug-cpu-traffic-stats</item_name>
<item_time>Oct 18 15:05:35.288 UTC</item_time>
<item_output>xxx</item_output>
</item>
etc.
</content>
</action_list_message>
Related
action-list Specify a policy action list for the associated policy and enter the
Commands
policy
ce Create a policy with a name and enter config-callhome-policy-name mode. In that mode, you can
create a case number identifier to be matched with a test list and action.
Syntax [no] policy word
Parameters
word Enter a name (up to 20 characters) for the new policy.
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Concurrent policies changed from three to five
History

Usage You can create up to five concurrent policies with this command. A policy is the association of a test
Information list with an action list, and optionally a case number. Choose the test list (the type of monitoring to
perform) with the policy-test-list command. Choose the associated action to perform with the
policy-action-list command.
Related
Commands
case-number Specify a case number for the associated policy
default-test Invoke one of three system-monitoring test groups.
policy-action-list Name a policy action list and enter the config-callhome-actionlist-name mode.
policy-test-list Name a policy test list and enter the config-callhome-testlist-name mode.
pr-number Create an entry for a PR number in policy mode. The PR number is the issue identifier
(bug ID) maintained by Dell Force10, and is associated with the test list.
test-list Enter the name of a configured policy test list to be associated with the selected policy.
policy-action-list
ce Name a policy action list and enter the config-callhome-actionlist-name mode to enter commands that
will execute actions based on test results.
Syntax policy-action-list word
Parameters
word Enter the name (up to 20 characters) of the new policy test list.
Command
History
Usage Capturing events with FTSA requires two parallel configurations. You choose the type of testing
Information (monitoring) to perform with the policy-test-list command. You choose the action to perform when
an event occurs by using this command and then action selection commands, such as default-action.
policy-test-list
ce Name a policy test list and enter the config-callhome-testlist-name mode.
Syntax policy-test-list word
Parameters
word Enter the name (up to 20 characters) of the new policy test list.
Command Mode conf-callhome
Command
History

Usage After you name the test list with this command, use the command such as default-test to choose the
Information type of monitoring to perform.
pr-number
ce Enter a PR (problem report) number associated with the selected policy. The number is the issue
identifier (bug ID) maintained by Dell Force10.
Syntax pr-number number
Parameters
number Enter a 5-digit PR number, as supplied by Dell Force10.
Defaults none
Command Mode config-callhome-policy-name
Command
History
Related
case-number Specify a case number for the associated policy.
Commands
recipient
ce Enter the email address of the recipient associated with the selected server name.
Syntax recipient email address
To remove the recipient, use the no recipient email address command.
Parameters
email address Enter the recipients full email address. For example, name@domain_name.com.
Defaults ftsa@force10networks.com (associated with the Dell Force10 server only)
Command Mode CONFIGURATION Server (conf-callhome-server_name)
Command
History
Usage After using the server command to create a server name, you are placed at that server-specific
Information prompt, where you can use this command to enter the email address of the recipient that you want to
associate with that server name.
Related
Commands

run-cpu
ce Set whether the action list associated with the selected test list should be executed, as a function of CPU
utilization.
Syntax run-cpu {cpu | rpm-any} {less-than | greater-than} percentage
Parameters
percentage Enter a CPU utilization percentage.
Range: 0100
cpu Select a CPU: CP, LP, RP1, or RP2
rpm-any Monitor all RPM CPUs for the run-cpu condition (CP, RP1, and RP2)
Default None
Command Mode CALL-HOME POLICY
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added variable cpu, and keyword rpm-any. Keyword more-than changed to
greater-than. Keyword unconditional removed.
Usage The purpose of this command is to determine whether the action list associated with this test list should
be executed, depending on whether the CPU utilization at the time the test list is executed meets the
configured parameter:
If less-than is configured, the user might be worried about executing the action list in high CPU
usage conditions. In such a case, for example, the user might configure run-cpu less-than
90. When a match is made to the test list, the CPU 1-minute average is checked and if it is 85%,
for example, then the associated action list will be executed. If the current CPU usage is at 90% or
greater, the action list will not be executed. In this case, FTSA logs this in the syslog to note that a
match was made, what the match was, and that the action list was not executed because CPU was
too high.
If greater-than is configured, it is probably because the user does not care about results that may
occur when CPU usage is low. For example, a user might configure run-cpu greater-than
60. If a match is found for the test list and the 1-minute CPU average is 40%, then the action list is
not executed; if it is 61% or greater, then it is executed.
Related
Commands
sample-rate
ce Set the sampling interval for how often to execute the configured test condition.
Syntax sample-rate number
Parameters
number Set the sampling interval for how often to execute the configured test condition.
Range: 11440 (minutes)
Default 1 (one minute)

Command Mode conf-callhome-policy
Command
History
Related
Commands
test-condition Collect multiple samples of a statistic and compare them using the specified
(comparing samples) comparator and hurdle value.
test-condition Collect a sample of a designated statistic and then compare it to the designated
(comparison to a number.
value)
test-condition Search for a stated value in the output of the designated show command or message
message-text type.
(deprecated)
test-limit Set the number of times that the test list should be executed.
server
ce Use this command to create a server name to be associated with a particular recipient.
Syntax server name
To remove a server and the associated recipient, use the no server name command.
Parameters
name Enter the name of the server in alphanumeric format, up to 25 characters long.
Defaults FTOS
Command Mode CONFIGURATION Server (conf-callhome)
Command
History
Example Figure 19-2. server (FTSA) Command Example

FTOS(conf-callhome)#server freedom_bird
FTOS(conf-callhome-freedom_bird)#?
Usage The Dell Force10 server name is configured for FTSA messages to be sent by default to Dell Force10
Support at ftsa@force10networks.com. If you want to change that address, enter the command server
FTOS. You will be placed at that server-specific prompt (conf-callhome-FTOS), where you would then
use the recipient command to enter a new address.
In addition to modifying the Dell Force10 server recipient, you can identify up to four more server
names and associated recipients.

If you want to use encryption for a particular recipients email messages, the server name must match
the user ID that is in the encryption file that the recipient will use to decrypt the messages. Use the
keyadd command to designate the encryption file.
Related
Commands
enable Enable FTSA (call home) email for the selected recipient.
recipient Enter the recipients email address.
enable Enable FTSA (call home) email for the selected recipient.
show configuration
ce Display the FTSA (call-home) configuration.
Syntax show configuration
Command Mode CONFIGURATION (conf-callhome)
Command
History
Example
FTOS(conf-callhome)#show configuration
!
call-home
admin-email traza
domain-name force10networks.com
smtp server-address 10.0.2.6
no enable-all
server Force10
recipient ftsa@force10networks.com
keyadd Force10DefaultPublicKey
no encrypt
enable
show debugging
ce Display the status of FTSA (call-home) debugging.
Syntax show debugging
Command
History

Example Figure 19-3. show debugging (FTSA) Command Example
FTOS(conf-callhome)#show debugging
CALLHOME:
Callhome service debugging is on
Related
Commands debug call-home Monitor FTSA email messages through the CLI.
show keys
ce Display the email encryption (PGP) keys. On E-Series chassis, this command is only supported for
TeraScale cards.
Syntax show keys
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support to resolve domain names to IPv6 addresses.
History
Example Figure 19-4. show keys Command Example

FTOS(conf-callhome)#show keys
Type Bits KeyID Created Expires Algorithm Use
sec+ 768 0x64CE09D9 2005-06-27 ---------- RSA Sign & Encrypt

uid E000000003209
pub 1024 0xA8E48C2F 2004-12-08 ---------- DSS Sign & Encrypt
sub 1024 0xD832BB91 2004-12-08 ---------- Diffie-Hellman
uid Force10
2 matching keys found

Related
Commands
encrypt Enable email encryption.
keyadd Add the server public key for encryption.

smtp server-address
ce Identify the local SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server from which FTSA email messages
will be forwarded.
Syntax smtp server-address server-address [smtp-port port number]
To remove the SMTP address, use the no smtp server-address command. This action will disable
email messaging until you enter a new SMTP server address.
Parameters
server-address server address Enter the keyword server-address followed by the SMTP
server address, such as smtp.yourco.com. The domain name you
specify can be resolved into an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
smtp-port port number Optionally, enter the keyword smtp-port followed by the
SMTP port number.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 25
Defaults SMTP port = 25
Command
History
Usage The switch only plays the part of an SMTP client to send email messages to the SMTP server
Information designated here. This SMTP server is required in order to receive the email messages and forward
them to local and remote designated recipients. The default port number on an SMTP server is 25. If a
host name is given (instead of an IP address), DNS should be enabled to resolve the host name.
Related
Commands
enable Enable FTSA email messages for the selected recipient.
enable-all Enable FTSA email messages for all designated recipients.

test-condition (comparing samples)
ce Configure an action to collect and compare multiple samples of a statistic.
Syntax test-condition statistic operator sample {cpu | rpm-any} number
Parameters
test-condition statistic Enter the keyword test-condition, followed by one of the following
statistic request types:
cpu-1-min: Average CPU utilization for 1 minute
cpu-5-min: Average CPU utilization for 5 minutes
interface-bit-rate {input | output} slot#: Instantaneous bit rate
on a given line card
interface-crc interface: Number of CRC errors on a given interface
interface-rate {input | output} interface: Packet rate on a
given interface
interface-throttles interface: Number of throttles on an interface
memory-free: Free system memory
memory-free-percent: Free system memory free in percentage
memory-used: System memory used
memory-used-percent: System memory used in percentage
wred-drops interface: Number of WRED drops on an interface
(E-Series only)
operator Enter one of the following Boolean comparison operators: decrease,
equal-to, greater-than, increase, less-than, not-equal-to,
no-change.
sample number Enter the keyword sample, followed by an integer representing the
number of the sample collected. For example, 5 is the fifth sample collected,
so the first and fifth samples would be compared, using the designated
operator.
Range: 2100
Default: 2
cpu | rpm-any Enter the processor that will be tested: cp, lp, rp1, rp2, or test all RPM CPUs
with the keyword rpm-any.
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Removed message-text keyword. Added operators.
Usage FTSA avoids false triggers when a counter rolls over by ignoring the first sample taken after a rollover.
Information
Also, FTSA does not allow you to configure a test that makes no sense because of a comparator that is
out of range. For example, by entering cpu-5-min increase number 150, you would be
looking for a difference between two CPU percentage utilization samples of at least 150. 150 is not
possible, because percentage utilization can only go up to 100, so FTSA displays the acceptable range,
as shown below, and will issue an error message if you try to enter a value that is out of range.

Examples
FTOS(conf-call-home-testlist-test)#test-condition cpu-1-min increase number ?
<0-100> Enter the boolean comparision value
FTOS(conf-call-home-testlist-test)#test-condition cpu-1-min increase number 80
sample 5
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition cpu-5-min decrease ?

<0-100> Enter the boolean comparision value
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition cpu-5-min decrease 10
In this next example, the configuration is to subtract the bit rate that was found in the second sample
from the bit rate found in the first sample. If the difference is at least 10Mb, then any associated action
list will be invoked.
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition interface-bit-rate ?
input Input interface
output Output interface
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition interface-bit-rate input ?
<0-3> Slot number
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition interface-bit-rate input 1
decrease ?
<0-10000> Enter the boolean comparision value in mbits/sec
decrease 10 ?
sample The time interval to check the condition
<cr>
decrease 10 sample ?
<2-100> Enter the sample value (default = 2)
decrease 10 sample 2
Here are other examples of test-condition configuration statements.
FTOS(conf-call-home-testlist-test)#test-condition interface-crc 1 decrease number 90

sample 5
FTOS(conf-call-home-testlist-test)#test-condition memory-free-percent no-change
sample 4
Related
dampen Set a delay before sampling for a test condition again after it has been matched.
Commands
test-limit Set the number of times that the test list that should be executed.
test-condition Collect a sample of a designated statistic and then compare it to the designated
(comparison to a value) number.
test-condition (comparison to a value)

ce Configure an action to collect a sample of a designated statistic and then use the designated Boolean
comparator to compare it to the designated value. When this configuration is associated with an action
list, a result outside of the acceptable limit will trigger the action list.
Syntax test-condition statistic operator number {cpu | rpm-any} value

Parameters
test-condition statistic Enter the keyword test-condition, followed by one of the following
statistic request types:
cpu-1-min: Average CPU utilization for 1 minute
cpu-5-min: Average CPU utilization for 5 minutes
interface-bit-rate {input | output} slot#: Instantaneous bit rate
on a given line card
interface-crc interface: Number of CRC errors on a given interface
interface-rate interface: Packet rate on a given interface
interface-throttles interface: Number of throttles on an interface
memory-free: Free system memory
memory-free-percent: Free system memory free in percentage
memory-used: System memory used
memory-used-percent: System memory used in percentage
wred-drops interface: Number of WRED drops on an interface
(E-Series only)
operator Enter one of the following Boolean comparison operators: decrease,
equal-to, greater-than, increase, less-than, not-equal-to,
no-change.
number value Enter the keyword number, followed by an integer to be the comparison
value to the designated statistic, in the range pertinent to the statistic.
cpu | rpm-any Enter the processor that will be tested: cp, lp, rp1, rp2, or test all RPM CPUs
with the keyword rpm-any.
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Removed message-text keyword. Added operators.
Usage FTOS does not allow you to configure a test that makes no sense, such as cpu-5-min greater-than
Information number 150. CPU percentage utilization can only go up to 100, so 150 is not possible. FTOS
displays the acceptable range, as shown below
Examples
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition cpu-5-min greater-than ?
number The boolean comparison value
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition cpu-5-min greater-than number ?
<0-100> Enter the boolean comparison value
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition cpu-5-min greater-than number 10
This example shows a couple other keyword configuration examples.

FTOS(conf-call-home-testlist-test)# test-condition interface-rate input 1 less-than
number 98
FTOS(conf-call-home-testlist-test)# test-condition memory-used not-equal-to number
1000
Related
Commands

test-condition Search for a stated value in the output of the designated show command or
message-text message type.
(deprecated)
test-condition message-text (deprecated)

ce Configure a search for a stated value in the output of the designated show command or message type
syslog or other error messages, sent to the console, trap, or message logged locally. This applies
only to messages logged by FTOS.
Syntax test-condition message-text command string equal-to string string
Parameters
test-condition Enter the keywords test-condition message-text command, and then
message-text for string, enter a show command in quotes.
command string Range: 164 characters
equal-to string string Enter the keywords equal-to string, and then for string, enter the text to
search for in the show command designated above.
Range: 164 characters
Defaults none
Command Modes conf-callhome-testlist-test
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Deprecated.
History
Usage In the following example:

Information
The search string can be used for both display xml and normal show command output.
The search string is <ifAdminStatus>down</ifAdminStatus>.
Note that the search target, in this example, is enclosed within double quotes. If either string contains
spaces, it must be enclosed in quotes or it will be truncated at the first whitespace.
The search string is compared against an entire text message, so a short string, such as the number zero,
is likely to produce many unintended matches. Therefore, the search string should be as long as
possible to guarantee as close a match as possible to the data that you want to match. However, the
maximum length of a string is 64 characters.

Example
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition message-text ?
command Enter the show command
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition message-text command ?
WORD Enter the show command
FTOS(conf-callhome-testlist-test)#test-condition message-text command "show
interfaces gi 1/0 | display xml" ?
equal-to Keyword boolean value equal to
interfaces gi 1/0 | display xml" equal-to ?
string Enter the search string pattern
interfaces gi 1/0 | display xml" equal-to string ?
LINE Regular expression
interfaces gi 1/0 | display xml" equal-to string <ifAdminStatus>down</
ifAdminStatus>
Related
dampen Set a delay before sampling for a test condition again after it has been
Commands
matched.
test-condition (comparing Configure an action to collect and compare multiple samples of a
samples) statistic.
test-condition (comparison to a Collect a statistic and compare it to a stated value.
value)

test-limit
ce Set the number of times that the test list should be executed.
Syntax test -limit number
Parameters
number Set the number of times the test list matches that should be attempted.
Range: 0256
Default none. If the test-limit number is removed or not configured, there is no limit for how many times to
test for the condition.
Command Mode conf-callhome-policy
Command
History
Related
Commands
test-condition Configure an action to collect and compare multiple samples of a statistic.
(comparing samples)
sample-rate Set the sampling interval for how often to execute the configured test condition.

test-list
ce Enter the name of a configured test list to be associated with the selected policy.
Syntax test-list word
Parameters
word Enter the keyword test-list followed by the name of a configured test list.
Command Mode config-callhome-policy-name
Command
History
Usage Executing the policy-test-list command puts you in the config-callhome-testlist mode, where you
Information use this command to invoke one of three possible test groups. FTOS monitors the system for any event
in the selected test group. If such an event occurs, FTOS invokes the action you defined using the
default-action command and then associate in this policy with the action-list command.
Table 19-1. FTSA Test Sets
Hardware test set Software test set Exception test set

SFM status transition from active to other SWP Timeout CPU usage more than 85%
state
Line card transition from active to other IPC Timeout System crash
state
Port-pipe error or transition to down IRC Timeout Task crash
RPM status transition from active to other CPU usage more than 85% Dump, reload due to error, RPM
state failover due to error
PEM transition from up to other state Memory usage more than 85%
AC power supply transition from up to
other state
Fan tray down or individual fan down
Overtemp of any item listed in show
environment
Over/under-voltage of any item listed in
show environment
Related
action-list Specify a policy action list for the associated policy and enter the
Commands
case-number Specify a case number for the associated policy.
policy Create a policy name and enter config-callhome-policy-name mode.
policy-test-list Name a policy test list and enter the config-callhome-testlist-name mode.

20
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)
Overview
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) is supported on platforms c, e, and s
Commands
The GVRP commands are:
bpdu-destination-mac-address
clear gvrp statistics
debug gvrp
disable
garp timers
gvrp enable
gvrp registration
protocol gvrp
show config
show garp timers
show gvrp
show gvrp statistics on page 27
The GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP
participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its
attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes. At the same
time, based on received declarations or withdrawals, GARP handles attributes of other participants.
GVRP enables a device to propagate local VLAN registration information to other participant devices
and dynamically update the VLAN registration information from other devices. The registration
information updates local databases regarding active VLAN members and through which port the
VLANs can be reached.
GVRP ensures that all participants on a bridged LAN maintain the same VLAN registration
information. The VLAN registration information propagated by GVRP include both manually
configured local static entries and dynamic entries from other devices.
GVRP participants have the following components:

The GVRP application
GARP Information Propagation (GIP)
GARP Information Declaration (GID)
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) | 525

GVRP is supported on Layer 2 ports only.

All VLAN ports added by GVRP are tagged.
GVRP is supported on untagged ports belonging to a default VLAN, and tagged ports.
GVRP cannot be enabled on untagged ports belonging to a non-default VLAN unless native
VLAN is turned on.
GVRP requires end stations with dynamic access NICs.
Based on updates from GVRP-enabled devices, GVRP allows the system to dynamically create a
port-based VLAN (unspecified) with a specific VLAN ID and a specific port.
On a port-by-port basis, GVRP allows the system to learn about GVRP updates to an existing
port-based VLAN with that VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1Q tagging.
GVRP allows the system to send dynamic GVRP updates about your existing port-based VLAN.
GVRP updates are not sent to any blocked Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) ports. GVRP operates
only on ports that are in the forwarding state.
GVRP operates only on ports that are in the STP forwarding state. If GVRP is enabled, a port that
changes to the STP forwarding state automatically begins to participate in GVRP. A port that
changes to an STP state other than forwarding no longer participates in GVRP.
VLANs created dynamically with GVRP exist only as long as a GVRP-enabled device is sending
updates. If the devices no longer send updates, or GVRP is disabled, or the system is rebooted, all
dynamic VLANs are removed.
GVRP manages the active topology, not non-topological data such as VLAN protocols. If a local
bridge needs to classify and analyze packets by VLAN protocols, you must manually configure
protocol-based VLANs, and simply rely on GVRP for VLAN updates. But if the local bridge
needs to know only how to reach a given VLAN, then GVRP provides all necessary information.
The VLAN topologies that GVRP learns are treated differently from VLANs that are statically
configured. The GVRP dynamic updates are not saved in NVRAM, while static updates are saved
in NVRAM. When GVRP is disabled, the system deletes all VLAN interfaces that were learned
through GVRP and leaves unchanged all VLANs that were manually configured.
cs Use the Provider Bridge Group address in Spanning Tree or GVRP PDUs.
Syntax bpdu-destination-mac-address [stp | gvrp] provider-bridge-group
Parameters
stp Force STP, RSTP, and MSTP to use the Provider Bridge Group address as the
destination MAC address in its BPDUs.
gvrp Forces GVRP to use the Provider Bridge GVRP Address as the destination
MAC address in its PDUs.
Defaults The destination MAC address for BPDUs is the Bridge Group Address.
Command
History
526 | GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)

clear gvrp statistics
ces Clear GVRP statistics on an interface.
Syntax clear gvrp statistics interface interface
Parameters
interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet
GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
512 for ExaScale.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series
History
Related
show gvrp statistics Display the GVRP statistics
Commands
debug gvrp
ces Enable debugging on GVRP.
Syntax debug gvrp {config | events | pdu}
To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command.
Parameters
config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration.
event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/LEAVE events.
pdu Enter the keyword pdu followed one of the following Interface keywords and slot/port
or number information:
number:
ExaScale.

Defaults Disabled
Command
History
disable
ces Globally disable GVRP.
Syntax disable
To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command.
Defaults Enabled
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP
Command
History
Related
gvrp enable Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs.
Commands
protocol gvrp Access GVRP protocol
garp timers
ces Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages.
Syntax garp timers {join | leave | leave-all}

To return to the previous setting, use the no garp timers {join | leave | leave-all} command.
Parameters
join Enter the keyword join followed by the number of milliseconds to configure the join
time.
Note: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100
leave Enter the keyword leave followed by the number of milliseconds to configure the leave
time.
leave-all Enter the keyword leave-all followed by the number of milliseconds to configure the
leave-all time.
Defaults Default as above

Command
History
Usage Join TimerJoin messages announce the willingness to register some attributes with other
Information participants. Each GARP application entity sends a Join message twice, for reliability, and uses a join
timer to set the sending interval.
Leave TimerLeave announces the willingness to de-register with other participants. Together with
the Join, Leave messages help GARP participants complete attribute reregistration and de-registration.
Leave Timer starts upon receipt of a leave message sent for de-registering some attribute information.
If a join message is not received before the leave time expires, the GARP application entity removes
the attribute information as requested.
Leave All TimerThe Leave All Timer starts when a GARP application entity starts. When this timer
expires, the entity sends a leave-all message so that other entities can re-register their attribute
information. Then, the leave-all time begins again.
Related
show garp timers Display the current GARP times
Commands
gvrp enable
ces Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs.
Syntax gvrp enable
To disable GVRP on the interface, use the no gvrp enable command.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE
Command
History
Related
disable Globally disable GVRP.
Commands
gvrp registration
ces Configure the GVRP register type.
Syntax gvrp registration {fixed | normal | forbidden}
To return to the default, use the gvrp register normal command.

Parameters
fixed Enter the keyword fixed followed by the VLAN range in a comma
separated VLAN ID set.
normal Enter the keyword normal followed by the VLAN range in a comma
This is the default
forbidden Enter the keyword forbidden followed by the VLAN range in a comma
Defaults Default registration is normal
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE
Command
History
Usage The fixed registration prevents an interface, configured via the command line to belong to a VLAN
Information (static configuration), from being un-configured when it receives a Leave message. Therefore, the
registration mode on that interface is fixed.
The normal registration is the default registration. The ports membership in the VLANs depends on
GVRP. The interface becomes a member of VLANs after learning about the VLAN through GVRP. If
the VLAN is removed from the port that sends GVRP advertisements to this device, then the port will
stop being a member of the VLAN.
The forbidden is used when you do not want the interface to advertise or learn about VLANs through
GVRP.
Related
show gvrp Display the GVRP configuration including the registration
Commands
protocol gvrp
ces Access GVRP protocol (config-gvrp)#.
Syntax protocol gvrp
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
disable Globally disable GVRP.
Commands
show config
ces Display the global GVRP configuration.
Syntax show config

Command
History
Related
gvrp enable Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs.
Commands
protocol gvrp Access GVRP protocol.
show garp timers

ces Display the GARP timer settings for sending GARP messages.
Syntax show garp timers
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 20-1. show garp timers Command Example

FTOS#show garp timers
GARP Timers Value (milliseconds)
----------------------------------------
Join Timer 200
Leave Timer 600
LeaveAll Timer 10000
FTOS#
Related
garp timers Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages.
Commands
show gvrp
ces Display the GVRP configuration.
Syntax show gvrp [brief | interface]

Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display a brief summary of the GVRP
configuration.
number:
ExaScale.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version7.6.1.0 Introduced on C, E, and S-Series
History
Example Figure 20-2. show gvrp brief Command Example

R3#show gvrp brief
GVRP Feature is currently enabled.
Port GVRP Status Edge-Port

-------------------------------------------------------
Gi 3/0 Disabled No
Gi 3/1 Disabled No
Gi 3/2 Enabled No
Gi 3/3 Disabled No
Gi 3/4 Disabled No
Gi 3/5 Disabled No
Gi 3/6 Disabled No
Gi 3/7 Disabled No
Gi 3/8 Disabled No
R3#show gvrp brief
Usage If no ports are GVRP participants, the message output changes from:
Information
GVRP Participants running on <port_list>
to
GVRP Participants running on no ports
Related
show gvrp statistics Display the GVRP statistics
Commands
show gvrp statistics

ces Display the GVRP configuration statistics.
Syntax show gvrp statistics {interface interface | summary}

Parameters
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the interface keywords and
slot/port or number information:
a number:
for ExaScale.
summary Enter the keyword summary to display just a summary of the GVRP statistics.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 20-3. show gvrp statistics Command Example

FTOS#show gvrp statistics int gi 1/0
Join Empty Received: 0

Join In Received: 0
Empty Received: 0
LeaveIn Received: 0
Leave Empty Received: 0
Leave All Received: 40
Join Empty Transmitted: 156
Join In Transmitted: 0
Empty Transmitted: 0
Leave In Transmitted: 0
Leave Empty Transmitted: 0
Leave All Transmitted: 41
Invalid Messages/Attributes skipped: 0
Failed Registrations: 0
FTOS#
Usage Invalid messages/attributes skipped can occur in the following cases:

Information
The incoming GVRP PDU has an incorrect length.
End of PDU was reached before the complete attribute could be parsed.
The Attribute Type of the attribute that was being parsed was not the GVRP VID Attribute Type
(0x01).
The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid attribute length.
The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid GARP event.
The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 - 4095.
A failed registration can occur for the following reasons:
Join requests were received on a port that was blocked from learning dynamic VLANs (GVRP
Blocking state).

An entry for a new GVRP VLAN could not be created in the GVRP database.
Related
show gvrp Display the GVRP configuration
Commands

21
High Availability (HA)
Overview
High Availability (HA) in FTOS is configuration synchronization to minimize recovery time in the
event of a Route Processor Module (RPM) failure. The feature is available on the C-Series and
E-Series where noted by these symbols under command headings: c e
FTOS on the E-Series supports RPM 1 + 1 redundancy. The Primary RPM performs all routing and
control operations, while the Secondary RPM is online and monitoring the Primary RPM.
In general, a protocol is defined as hitless in the context of an RPM failure/failover, and not failures
of a line card, SFM, or power module. A protocol is defined as hitless if an RPM failover has no impact
on the protocol.
Some protocols must be specifically enabled for HA, and some protocols are only hitless if related
protocols are also enabled as hitless (see the redundancy protocol command).
High Availability is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.1.1.0. and later.
Commands
The HA commands available in FTOS are:
patch flash://RUNTIME_PATCH_DIR
process restartable
redundancy auto-failover-limit
redundancy disable-auto-reboot
redundancy force-failover
redundancy primary
redundancy protocol
redundancy reset-counter
redundancy sfm standby
redundancy synchronize
show patch
show processes restartable
show redundancy
High Availability (HA) | 535

patch flash://RUNTIME_PATCH_DIR
e Insert an In-Service Modular Hot-Fix patch.
Syntax patch flash://RUNTIME_PATCH_DIR/patch-filename

To remove the patch, enter no patch flash://RUNTIME_PATCH_DIR/patch-filename
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage The patch filename includes the FTOS version, the platform, the cpu, and the process it affects
Information (FTOS-platform-cpu-process-patchversion.rtp). For example, a patch labeled
7.8.1.0-EH-rp2-l2mgr-1.rtp identifies that this patch applies to FTOS version 7.8.1.0 - E-Series
platform, for RP2, addressing the layer 2 management process, and this is the first version of this patch.
There is no need to reload or reboot the system when the patch is inserted. The In-Service Modular
patch replaces the existing process code. Once installation is complete, the system executes the patch
code as though it was always there.
Related
Commands
show patch Display the system patches loaded with the In-Service Modular Hot
Fix Command.
process restartable
e Enable a process to be restarted. Restartablility is subject to a maximum restart limitthe limit is
defined as a configured amount of restarts within a configured amount of time. On the software
exception that exceeds the limit, the system reloads (for systems with a single RPM) or fails over (for
systems with dual RPMs).
Syntax process restartable [process] [count number] [period minutes]
Parameters
process Configure a process to be restartable.
count number Enter the number of times a process can restart within the configured period.
Range: 1-3
Default: 3
period minutes Enter the amount of time within which the process can restart count times.
Range: 1-60 minutes
Default: 60 minutes
Defaults By default, a process can be restarted a maximum of 3 times within 1 hour. On the exception that
exceeds this limit, the system reloads or fails over.
Command
History
536 | High Availability (HA)

Related
Commands
redundancy auto-failover-limit
ce Specify an auto-failover limit for RPMs. When an non-recoverable fatal error is detected, an automatic
RPM failover occurs. This command does not affect user-initiated (manual) failovers.
Syntax redundancy auto-failover-limit [count number [period minutes] | period minutes]]

To disable the auto-failover limit control, enter no redundancy auto-failover-limit.
Parameters
count number Enter the number of times the RPMs can automatically failover within the period
defined in the period parameter.
Range: 2 to 10
Default: 3
period minutes Enter a duration in which to allow a number of automatic failovers (limited to the
number defined in the count parameter).
Default: 60 minutes
Defaults Count: 3 Period: 60 minutes
Command
History
Usage If auto failover is disabled, enter the redundancy auto-failover-limit (without any parameters) to
Information set auto failover to the default parameters (Count 3, Period 60 minutes).Use the show redundancy
command to view the redundancy status.
When you change one or both of the optional parameters, FTOS checks that the interval between auto
failovers is more than five (5) minutes. If the interval is less, FTOS returns a configuration error
message.
ce Prevent the system from auto-rebooting the failed module.
Syntax redundancy disable-auto-reboot [rpm| card number | all]

To return to the default, enter no redundancy disable-auto-reboot rpm.
Parameters
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to disable auto-reboot of the failed RPM.
Defaults Disabled (that is, the failed module is automatically rebooted).

Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added the all option
Usage Enabling this command will keep the failed RPM in the failed state. If there are two RPMs in the
Information system, enabling this command prevents the failed RPM from becoming a working Standby RPM. If
there is only one RPM in the system, the failed RPM will not recoverthis will effect the system.
redundancy force-failover
ce Force the secondary RPM to become primary RPM or force an SFM (on an E-Series chassis only) to
become the standby SFM. This command can also be used to upgrade the software on one RPM from
the other when the other has been loaded with the upgraded software.
Syntax redundancy force-failover {rpm | sfm [slot-number]}
Parameters
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to force the secondary RPM to become the primary RPM.
sfm slot-number EtherScale OnlyEnter the keyword sfm followed by the SFM slot number.
Range: 0 to 8.
Command
History
Usage This command can be used to provide a hitless or warm upgrade. A hitless upgrade means that a
Information software upgrade does not require a reboot of the line cards. A warm upgrade means that a software
upgrade requires a reset of the line cards and SFMs. A warm upgrade is possible for major releases and
lower, while a hitless upgrade can only support patch releases.
You load the software upgrade on one RPM and then issue this command with the rpm keyword to
move the software to the other RPM. The system senses the condition and provides a series of prompts
appropriate to that context, as shown in the following example:
Note: On C-Series, this command could affect traffic (even during hot-failover) since the
switch fabric present on the RPM is taken down during the failover.
Example Figure 21-1. redundancy force-failover rpm Command Example

FTOS#redundancy force-failover rpm
Peer RPM's SW version is different but HA compatible.
Failover can be done by warm or hitless upgrade.
All linecards will be reset during warm upgrade.
Specify hitless upgrade or warm upgrade [confirm hitless/warm]:hitless

Proceed with warm upgrade [confirm yes/no]:

Example Figure 21-2. redundancy force-failover sfm (EtherScale only) Command Example
FTOS#redundancy force-failover sfm 0
%TSM-6-SFM_FAILOVER: Standby switch to SFM 8
Standby switch to SFM 0
FTOS#
redundancy primary
ce Set an RPM as the primary RPM.
Syntax redundancy primary [rpm0 | rpm1]

To delete a configuration, enter no redundancy primary.
Parameters
rpm0 Enter the keyword rpm0 to set the RPM in slot R0 as the primary RPM.
rpm1 Enter the keyword rpm1 to set the RPM in slot R1 as the primary RPM.
Defaults The RPM in slot R0 is the Primary RPM.
Command
History
redundancy protocol
ce Enable hitless protocols.
Syntax redundancy protocol {lacp | xstp}

To disable a hitless protocol, enter no redundancy protocol {lacp | xstp}.
Parameters
lacp Enter the keyword lacp to make LACP hitless.
xstp Enter the keyword xstp to invoke hitless STP (all STP modesMSTP, PVST+,
RSTP, STP).
Note: On the C-Series, hitless STP is available only for MSTP, PVST+,
and RSPT.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History

Related
show lacp Display the lacp configuration

Commands
show redundancy Display the current redundancy configuration.
redundancy reset-counter
e Reset failover counter and timestamp information displayed in the show redundancy command output.
Syntax redundancy reset-counter
Command
History
redundancy sfm standby

c Place the SFM in an offline state.
Syntax redundancy sfm standby

Place the SFM in an online state using the command no redundancy sfm standby command.
Defaults The SFM is online by default.
Command
History
Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series Only
History
Usage When a secondary RPM with logical SFM is inserted or removed, the system must add or remove the
Information backplane links to the switch fabric trunk. To avoid traffic disruption, use this command when the
secondary RPM is inserted. When this command is executed, the logical SFM on the standby RPM is
immediately taken offline and the SFM state is set as standby.
Note: This command could affect traffic when taking the secondary SFM offline.

Example Figure 21-3. redundancy sfm standby Command Example
FTOS#show sfm all

Slot Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active
1 active
FTOS#configure
FTOS(conf)#redundancy sfm standby
Taking secondary SFM offline...
!
FTOS(conf)#do show sfm all

Slot Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active
1 standby
FTOS(conf)#no redundancy sfm

Taking secondary SFM online...
!
FTOS(conf)#do show sfm all

Slot Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 active
1 active
Related
show sfm Display the SFM status
Commands
show switch links Display the switch fabric backplane or internal status.
redundancy synchronize
ce Manually synchronize data once between the Primary RPM and the Secondary RPM.
Syntax redundancy synchronize [full | persistent-data | system-data]
Parameters
full Enter the keyword full to synchronize all data.
persistent-data Enter the keywords persistent-data to synchronize the startup configuration
between RPMs.
system-data Enter the keywords system-data to synchronize persistent-data and the running
configuration file, event log, SFM and line card states.
Command
History

show patch
e Display the system patches loaded with the In-Service Modular Hot Fix Command.
Syntax show patch
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Related
Commands
patch flash:// Insert an In-Service Modular Hot-Fix patch.
RUNTIME_PATCH_DIR

e Display the processes and tasks configured for restartability.
Syntax show processes restartable [history]
Parameters
history Display the last time the restartable processes crashed.
Command
History
Example FTOS#sho processes restartable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Process name State How many times restarted Timestamp last
restarted
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
radius enabled 0 [-]
tacplus enabled 0 [-]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FTOS#show processes restartable history
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Process name Timestamp last crashed
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
radius [5/23/2001 10:11:47]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related
process restartable
Commands
show redundancy
ce Display the current redundancy configuration.
Syntax show redundancy

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 21-4. show redundancy Command Example

FTOS#show redundancy
-- RPM Status --
------------------------------------------------
RPM Slot ID: 1
RPM State: Active
RPM SW Version: 7.5.1.0
Link to Peer: Up
-- PEER RPM Status --

------------------------------------------------
RPM State: Standby

------------------------------------------------
Primary RPM: rpm0
Auto reboot RPM: Enabled
-- RPM Failover Record --

------------------------------------------------
Failover Count: 1
Last failover timestamp: Jul 13 2007 21:25:32
Last failover Reason: User request
-- Last Data Block Sync Record: --

------------------------------------------------
Line Card Config: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53
Start-up Config: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53
SFM Config State: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53
Runtime Event Log: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53
Running Config: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53
FTOS#
Table 21-1. show redundancy Command Example Fields
Field Description
RPM Status Displays the following information:
Slot number of the RPM
Whether the RPM is Primary or Standby
The state of the RPM: Active, Standby, Booting, or Offline
Whether the link to the second RPM is up or down.
PEER RPM Status Displays the state of the second RPM, if present

Table 21-1. show redundancy Command Example Fields (continued)
Field Description
RPM Redundancy Displays the following information:
Configuration which RPM is the preferred Primary on next boot (redundancy primary
command)
the data sync method configured (redundancy synchronize command).
the failover type (you cannot change this; it is software dependent) Hot
Failover means the running configuration and routing table are applied on
secondary RPM. Fast Failover means the running configuration is not
applied on the secondary RPM till failover occurs, and the routing table on
line cards is cleared during failover.
the status of auto booting the RPM (redundancy disable-auto-reboot
command)
the parameter for auto failover limit control (redundancy auto-failover-limit
command)
RPM Failover Record Displays the following information:
RPM failover counter (to reset the counter, use the redundancy reset-counter
command)
the time and date of the last RPM failover
the reason for the last RPM failover.
Last Data Sync Record Displays the data sync information and the timestamp for the data sync:
Start-up Config is the contents of the startup-config file.
Line Card Config is the line card types configured and interfaces on those
line cards.
Runtime Event Log is the contents of the Event log.
Running Config is the current running-config.
This field only appears when you enter the command from the Primary RPM.

22
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
Overview
The platforms on which a command is supported is indicated by the character e for the E-Series,
c for the C-Series, and s for the S-Series that appears below each command heading.
IGMP Commands
IGMP Snooping Commands
IGMP Commands
FTOS supports IGMPv1/v2/v3 and is compliant with RFC-3376.

FTOS supports PIM-SM and PIM-SSM include and exclude modes.
IGMPv2 is the default version of IGMP on interfaces. IGMPv3 can be configured on interfaces,
and is backward compatible with IGMPv2.
The maximum number of interfaces supported is 512 on the E-Series. On the C-Series and
S-Series 31 interfaces are supported.
Maximum number of groups supported no hard limit
IGMPv3 router interoperability with IGMPv2 and IGMPv1 routers on the same subnet is not
supported.
An administrative command (ip igmp version) is added to manually set the IGMP version.
All commands, previously used for IGMPv2, are compatible with IGMPv3.
The commands include:
clear ip igmp groups
debug ip igmp
ip igmp access-group
ip igmp group-join-limit
ip igmp immediate-leave
ip igmp last-member-query-interval
ip igmp querier-timeout
ip igmp query-interval
ip igmp query-max-resp-time
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) | 545

ip igmp ssm-map
ip igmp static-group
ip igmp version
show ip igmp groups
show ip igmp interface
show ip igmp ssm-map
clear ip igmp groups

ces Clear entries from the group cache table.
Syntax clear ip igmp groups [group-address | interface]
Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format.
For an 100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet
information.
Command
History
E-Series legacy command
Usage IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfacesspecifying VLAN will not yield a results.
Information
debug ip igmp
ces Enable debugging of IGMP packets.
Syntax debug ip igmp [group address | interface]
To disable IGMP debugging, enter no debug ip igmp [group address | interface]. To disable all
debugging, enter undebug all.
546 | Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format.
Defaults Disabled

Command
History
Usage IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfacesspecifying a VLAN will not yield results. This
Information command displays packets for IGMP and IGMP Snooping.
ip igmp access-group
ces Use this feature to specify access control for packets.
Syntax ip igmp access-group access-list

To remove the feature, use the no ip igmp access-group access-list command.
Parameters
access-list Enter the name of the extended ACL (16 characters maximum).
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port)
Command
History
Usage The access list accepted is an extended ACL. This feature is used to block IGMP reports from hosts, on
Information a per-interface basis; based on the group address and source address specified in the access list.

ip igmp group-join-limit
ces Use this feature to limit the number of IGMP groups that can be joined in a second.
Syntax ip igmp group-join-limit number
Parameters
number Enter the number of IGMP groups permitted to join in a second.
Range: 1 to 10000
Command
History
ip igmp immediate-leave
ces Enable IGMP immediate leave.
Syntax ip igmp immediate-leave [group-list prefix-list-name]

To disable ip igmp immediate leave, use the no ip igmp immediate-leave command.
Parameters
group-list prefix-list-name Enter the keyword group-list followed by a string up to 16
characters long of the prefix-list-name.
Command
History
Usage Querier normally sends a certain number of group specific queries when a leave message is received,
Information for a group, prior to deleting a group from the membership database. There may be situations in which
immediate deletion of a group from the membership database is required. This command provides a
way to achieve the immediate deletion. In addition, this command provides a way to enable
immediate-leave processing for specified groups.

ip igmp last-member-query-interval
ces Change the last member query interval, which is the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific
Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages. This interval is also the interval between
Group-Specific Query messages.
Syntax ip igmp last-member-query-interval milliseconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip igmp last-member-query-interval.
Parameters
milliseconds Enter the number of milliseconds as the interval.
Range: 100 to 65535
Defaults 1000 milliseconds
Command
History
ip igmp querier-timeout
ces Change the interval that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another
multicast router that should be the querier.
Syntax ip igmp querier-timeout seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip igmp querier-timeout.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the router must wait to become the new querier.
Range: 60 to 300
Defaults 125 seconds
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable that system to act as an
IGMP Proxy Querier.

ip igmp query-interval
ces Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries sent by the Querier.
Syntax ip igmp query-interval seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip igmp query-interval.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds between queries sent out.
Default: 60 seconds
Range: 1 to 18000
Defaults 60 seconds
Command
History
IGMP Proxy Querier.
IGMP Proxy Querier.
ip igmp query-max-resp-time
ces Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries.
Syntax ip igmp query-max-resp-time seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip igmp query-max-resp-time.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds for the maximum response time.
Default: 10 seconds
Range: 1 to 25
Defaults 10 seconds
Command
History
IGMP Proxy Querier.
IGMP Proxy Querier.

ip igmp ssm-map
ces Use a statically configured list to translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships.
Syntax ip igmp ssm-map std-access-list source-address

Undo this configuration, that is, remove SSM map (S,G) states and replace them with (*,G) states
using the command ip igmp ssm-map std-access-list source-address command.
Parameters
std-access-list Specify the standard IP access list that contains the mapping rules for multicast
groups.
source-address Specify the multicast source address to which the groups are mapped.
Command
History
Usage Mapping applies to both v1 and v2 IGMP joins; any updates to the ACL are reflected in the IGMP
Information groups. You may not use extended access lists with this command. When a static SSM map is
configured and the router cannot find any matching access lists, the router continues to accept (*,G)
groups.
Related
ip access-list standard Create a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
Commands
ip igmp static-group
ces Configure an IGMP static group.
Syntax ip igmp static-group {group address [exclude [source address]] | [include {source
address}]}
To delete a static address, use the no ip igmp static-group {group address [exclude [source
address]] | [include {source address}]} command.
Parameters
group address Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D)
exclude source (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword exclude followed by the source address, in dotted
address decimal format (A.B.C.D), for which a static entry needs to be added.
include source (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword include followed by the source address, in dotted
address decimal format (A.B.C.D), for which a static entry needs to be added.
Note: A group in include mode must have at least one source address
defined.
Command
History

Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support the exclude and include options

Usage A group in the include mode should have at least one source address defined. In exclude mode if no
Information source address is specified, FTOS implicitly assumes all sources are included. If neither include or
exclude is specified, FTOS implicitly assumes a IGMPv2 static join.
Command Limitations
Only one mode (include or exclude) is permitted per multicast group per interface. To
configure another mode, all sources belonging to the original mode must be unconfigured.
If a static configuration is present and a packet for the same group arrives on an interface, the
dynamic entry will completely overwrite all the static configuration for the group.
Related
show ip igmp groups Display IGMP group information
Commands
ip igmp version
ces Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3.
Syntax ip igmp version {2 | 3}
Parameters
2 Enter the number 2 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv2.
3 Enter the number 3 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv3.
Defaults 2 (that is IGMPv2)
Command
History
show ip igmp groups

ces View the IGMP groups.
Syntax show ip igmp groups [group-address [detail] | detail | interface [group-address [detail]]]

Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information
on that group only.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and slot/port information:
For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet
number:
ExaScale.
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from 0 to 16383.
information.
For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display the IGMPv3 source information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series and on C-Series
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support the detail option.
Usage This command displays the IGMP database including configured entries for either all groups on all
Information interfaces, or all groups on specific interfaces, or specific groups on specific interfaces.
Example Figure 22-1. show ip igmp groups Command Example

FTOS#show ip igmp groups
IGMP Connected Group Membership
Group Address Interface Uptime Expires Last Reporter
224.0.1.40 GigabitEthernet 13/6 09:45:23 00:02:08 10.87.7.5
FTOS#
Table 22-1. show ip igmp groups Command Example Fields
Field Description
Group Address Lists the multicast address for the IGMP group.
Interface Lists the interface type, slot and port number.
Uptime Displays the amount of time the group has been operational.
Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires.
Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group.

show ip igmp interface
ces View information on the interfaces participating in IGMP.
Syntax show ip igmp interface [interface]
Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and slot/port information:
For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0 to
16383.
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet followed
For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfacesspecifying VLAN will not yield a results.
Information
Example Figure 22-2. show ip igmp interface Command Example

FTOS#show ip igmp interface
GigabitEthernet 0/0 is down, line protocol is down
Internet protocol processing disabled
GigabitEthernet 0/7 is up, line protocol is down
GigabitEthernet 7/9 is up, line protocol is up
Internet address is 10.87.5.250/24
IGMP is enabled on interface
IGMP query interval is 60 seconds
IGMP querier timeout is 120 seconds
IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds
IGMP last member query response interval is 1000 ms
IGMP activity: 0 joins, 0 leaves
IGMP querying router is 10.87.5.250 (this system)
IGMP version is 2

show ip igmp ssm-map
ces Display is a list of groups that are currently in the IGMP group table and contain SSM mapped sources.
Syntax show ip igmp ssm-map [group]
Parameters
group (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the form A.B.C.D to display the list of
sources to which this group is mapped.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands ip igmp Use a statically configured list to translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships.
ssm-map
IGMP Snooping Commands

FTOS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Force10 systems:
ip igmp snooping enable

ip igmp snooping fast-leave
ip igmp snooping flood
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
ip igmp snooping mrouter
ip igmp snooping querier
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping

FTOS supports version 1, version 2, and version 3 hosts.
FTOS IGMP snooping implementation is based on IP multicast address (not based on Layer 2
multicast mac-address) and the IGMP snooping entries are in Layer 3 flow table not in Layer 2
FIB.
FTOS IGMP snooping implementation is based on draft-ietf-magma-snoop-10.
FTOS supports IGMP snooping on JUMBO enabled cards.
IGMP snooping is not enabled by default on the switch.
A maximum of 1800 groups and 600 VLAN are supported.
IGMP snooping is not supported on default VLAN interface.
IGMP snooping is not supported over VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN interfaces (you must disable
IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface before configuring VLAN-Stack-related commands).
IGMP snooping does not react to Layer 2 topology changes triggered by STP.

IGMP snooping reacts to Layer 2 topology changes triggered by MSTP by sending a general query
on the interface that comes in FWD state.
Important Points to Remember for IGMP Querier

The IGMP snooping Querier supports version 2.
You must configure an IP address to the VLAN interface for IGMP snooping Querier to begin.
The IGMP snooping Querier disables itself when a VLAN IP address is cleared, and then it
restarts itself when an IP address is re-assigned to the VLAN interface.
When enabled, IGMP snooping Querier will not start if there is a statically configured multicast
router interface in the VLAN.
When enabled, IGMP snooping Querier starts after one query interval in case no IGMP general
query (with IP SA lower than its VLAN IP address) is received on any of its VLAN members.
When enabled, IGMP snooping Querier periodically sends general queries with an IP source
address of the VLAN interface. If it receives a general query on any of its VLAN member, it will
check the IP source address of the incoming frame.
If the IP SA in the incoming IGMP general query frame is lower than the IP address of
the VLAN interface, then the switch disables its IGMP snooping Querier functionality.
If the IP SA of the incoming IGMP general query is higher than the VLAN IP address,
the switch will continue to work as an IGMP snooping Querier.
ip igmp snooping enable

ces Enable IGMP snooping on all or a single VLAN. This is the master on/off switch to enable IGMP
snooping.
Syntax ip igmp snooping enable

To disable IGMP snooping, enter no ip igmp snooping enable command.
Defaults Disabled

INTERFACE VLAN
Command
History
Usage You must enter this command to enable IGMP snooping. When enabled from CONFIGURATION
Information mode, IGMP snooping is enabled on all VLAN interfaces (except default VLAN).
Note: You must execute the no shutdown command on the VLAN interface for IGMP
Snooping to function.
Related
no shutdown Activate an interface
Commands

ip igmp snooping fast-leave
ces Enable IGMP snooping fast leave for this VLAN.
Syntax ip igmp snooping fast-leave

To disable IGMP snooping fast leave, use the no igmp snooping fast-leave command.
Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN(conf-if-vl-n)
Command
History
Usage Queriers normally send a certain number of queries when a leave message is received prior to deleting
Information a group from the membership database. There may be situations in which fast deletion of a group is
required. When IGMP fast leave processing is enabled, the switch will remove an interface from the
multicast group as soon as it detects an IGMP version 2 leave message on the interface.
ip igmp snooping flood

ces This command controls the flooding behavior of unregistered multicast data packets. On the E-Series,
when flooding is enabled (the default), unregistered multicast data traffic is flooded to all ports in a
VLAN. When flooding is disabled, unregistered multicast data traffic is forwarded to only multicast
router ports, both static and dynamic, in a VLAN. If there is no multicast router port in a VLAN, then
unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped. On the
C-Series and S-Series, unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped when flooding is disabled; they do
not forward the packets to multicast router ports. On the C-Series and S-Series, Layer 3 multicast must
be disabled (no ip multicast-routing) in order to disable Layer 2 multicast flooding.
Syntax ip igmp snooping flood
Defaults Enabled
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
History

ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval
ces The last member query interval is the maximum response time inserted into Group-Specific queries
sent in response to Group-Leave messages. This interval is also the interval between successive
Group-Specific Query messages. Use this command to change the last member query interval.
Syntax ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval milliseconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval.
Parameters
milliseconds Enter the interval in milliseconds.
Range: 100 to 65535
Command
History
ip igmp snooping mrouter

ces Statically configure a VLAN member port as a multicast router interface.
Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter interface interface

To delete a specific multicast router interface, use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface
interface command.
Parameters
interface For an 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
number:
ExaScale.
Command
History

Usage FTOS provides the capability of statically configuring interface to which a multicast router is attached.
Information To configure a static connection to the multicast router, enter the ip igmp snooping mrouter
interface command in the VLAN context. The interface to the router must be a part of the VLAN
where you are entering the command.
ip igmp snooping querier

ces Enable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface.
Syntax ip igmp snooping querier

To disable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface, enter no ip igmp snooping querier
command.
Command
History
Usage This command enables the IGMP switch to send General Queries periodically. This is useful when
Information there is no multicast router present in the VLAN because the multicast traffic does not need to be
routed. An IP address must be assigned to the VLAN interface for the switch to act as a querier for this
VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter

ces Display multicast router interfaces.
Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan number]
Parameters
vlan number Enter the keyword vlan followed by the vlan number.
Range: 1-4094
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 22-3. show ip igmp snooping mrouter Command Example
FTOS#show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Interface Router Ports
Vlan 2 Gi 13/3, Po 1
FTOS#
Related
show ip igmp groups Use this IGMP command to view groups
Commands

23
\
Interfaces
Overview
This chapter defines interface commands and is divided into the following sections:
Basic Interface Commands

Port Channel Commands
Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR)
UDP Broadcast
The symbols c e s under command headings indicate which Dell Force10 platforms C-Series,
E-Series, or S-Series, respectively support the command.
Although all interfaces are supported on E-Series ExaScale, some interface functionality is supported
on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.2.1.0. and later. When this is the case that is noted in the
command history.
Basic Interface Commands

The following commands are for physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces:
clear counters
clear dampening
cx4-cable-length
dampening
description
disable-on-sfm-failure
duplex (Management)
duplex (10/100 Interfaces)
flowcontrol
interface
interface loopback
interface ManagementEthernet
interface null
interface range
interface range macro (define)
interface range macro name
interface vlan
ipg (Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)
Interfaces | 561
ipg (10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)
keepalive
lfs enable (EtherScale)
link debounce-timer
monitor
mtu
negotiation auto
portmode hybrid
rate-interval
show config
show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode)
show interfaces
show interfaces configured
show interfaces dampening
show interfaces description
show interfaces linecard
show interfaces phy
show interfaces stack-unit
show interfaces status
show interfaces switchport
show interfaces transceiver
show range
shutdown
speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces)
speed (Management interface)
switchport
wanport
clear counters
ces Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and
physical interfaces, or selected ones.
Syntax clear counters [interface] [vrrp [{[ipv6] vrid | vrf instance}] | learning-limit]
562 | Interfaces
Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter any of the following keywords and slot/port or number to clear
counters from a specified interface:
from 0 to 16383.
number:
ExaScale.
For the management interface on the RPM, enter the keyword
ManagementEthernet followed by slot/port information. The slot range is
0-1, and the port range is 0.
information.
For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
vrrp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrrp to clear the counters of all VRRP groups. To
[[ipv6] vrid] clear the counters of VRRP groups on all IPv6 interfaces, enter ipv6. To clear the
counters of a specified group, enter a vrid number from 1 to 255.
vrrp (OPTIONAL) E-Series only: Enter the keyword vrrp to clear counters for all VRRP
[vrf instance] groups. To clear the counters of VRRP groups in a specified VRF instance, enter the
name of the instance (32 characters maximum). IPv6 VRRP groups are not supported.
learning-limit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword learning-limit to clear unknown source address
(SA) drop counters when MAC learning limit is configured on the interface.
Note: This option is not supported on the S-Series, as the MAC learning limit
is not supported
Defaults Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 On the E-Series, support was added for VRRP groups in a VRF instance.
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior to release supported 2094.
Version 6.5.1.0 Updated definition of the learning-limit option for clarity.
Example Figure 23-1. clear counters Command Example

FTOS#clear counters
Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm]
Related
mac learning-limit Allow aging of MACs even though a learning-limit is configured or disallow
Commands
station move on learnt MACs.
show interfaces Displays information on the interfaces.
Interfaces | 563
clear dampening
ces Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface.
Syntax clear dampening [interface]
Parameters
interface (Optional) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
Defaults Without a specific interface specified, the command clears all interface dampening counters
Command
History
Example
FTOS#clear dampening gigabitethernet 1/2
Clear dampening counters on Gi 1/2 [confirm] y
FTOS#
Related
Commands
show interfaces dampening Display interface dampening information.
dampening Configure dampening on an interface.
cx4-cable-length
s Configure the length of the cable to be connected to the selected CX4 port.
Syntax [no] cx4-cable-length {long | medium | short}
Parameters
long | medium | short Enter the keyword that matches the cable length to be used at the selected
port:
short = For 1-meter and 3-meter cable lengths
medium = For 5-meter cable length
long = For 10-meter and 15-meter cable lengths
564 | Interfaces
Defaults medium
Mode Interface
Command
History
Usage This command only works on ports that the system recognizes as CX4 ports. The figure below shows
Information an attempt to configure an XFP port in an S25P with the command after inserting a CX4 converter into
the port:
Note: When using a long CX4 cable between the C-Series and the S-Series, configure the
cable using the cx4-cable-length short command only to avoid any errors.
Note: 15M CX4 active cable is not supported on C-Series and S-series. It is only supported
for S2410 with active end on the device.
Example Figure 23-2. Example of Unsuccessful CX4 Cable Length Configuration

FTOS#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/26 | grep "XFP type"
Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-CX4
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length short
% Error: Unsupported command.
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length medium
FTOS(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length long
The figure below shows a successful CX4 cable length configuration.
Example Figure 23-3. Example of CX4 Cable Length Configuration

FTOS#config
FTOS(config)#interface tengigabitethernet 0/52
FTOS(conf-if-0/52)#cx4-cable-length long
FTOS(conf-if-0/52)#show config
!
interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/51
no ip address
cx4-cable-length long
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-0/52)#exit
FTOS(config)#
For details on using XFP ports with CX4 cables, see your S-Series hardware guide.
Related
Commands show config Display the configuration of the selected interface.
dampening
ces Configure dampening on an interface.
Syntax dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]]

To disable dampening, use the no dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]]
[suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]] command syntax.
Interfaces | 565
Parameters
half-life Enter the number of seconds after which the penalty is decreased. The
penalty is decreased by half after the half-life period expires.
Default: 5 seconds
reuse-threshold Enter a number as the reuse threshold, the penalty value below which the
interface state is changed to up.
Range: 1 to 20000
Default: 750
suppress-threshold Enter a number as the suppress threshold, the penalty value above which the
interface state is changed to error disabled.
Range: 1 to 20000
Default: 2500
max-suppress-time Enter the maximum number for which a route can be suppressed. The default
is four times the half-life value.
Range: 1 to 86400
Default: 20 seconds
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-)
Command
History
Example
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/2)#dampening 20 800 4500 120
Usage With each flap, FTOS penalizes the interface by assigning a penalty (1024) that decays exponentially
Information depending on the configured half-life. Once the accumulated penalty exceeds the suppress threshold
value, the interface is moved to the error-disabled state. This interface state is deemed as down by all
static/dynamic Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols. The penalty is exponentially decayed based on the
half-life timer. Once the penalty decays below the reuse threshold, the interface is enabled. The
configured parameters should follow:
suppress-threshold should be greater than reuse-threshold
max-suppress-time should be at least 4 times half-life
Note: Dampening cannot be applied on an interface that is monitoring traffic for other
interfaces.
Related
clear dampening Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified
Commands
interface.
show interfaces dampening Display interface dampening information.
566 | Interfaces
description
ces Assign a descriptive text string to the interface.
Syntax description desc_text

To delete a description, enter no description.
Parameters
desc_text Enter a text string up to 240 characters long.
Defaults No description is defined.
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified for E-Series: Revised from 78 to 240 characters.
Usage Spaces between characters are not preserved after entering this command unless you enclose the
Information entire description in quotation marks (desc_text).
Entering a text string after the description command overwrites any previous text string configured
as the description.
The shutdown and description commands are the only commands that you can configure on an
interface that is a member of a port-channel.
Use the show interfaces description command to display descriptions configured for each
interface.
Related
Commands
show interfaces description Display description field of interfaces.
disable-on-sfm-failure
e Disable select ports on E300 systems when a single SFM is available.
Syntax disable-on-sfm-failure
To delete a description, enter no disable-on-sfm-failure.
Defaults Port is not disabled
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on E300 systems only
History
Usage When an E300 system boots up and a single SFM is active this configuration, any ports configured
Information with this feature will be shut down. If an SFM fails (or is removed) in an E300 system with two SFM,
ports configured with this feature will be shut down. All other ports are treated normally.
When a second SFM is installed or replaced, all ports are booted up and treated as normally. This
feature does not take affect until a single SFM is active in the E300 system.
Interfaces | 567
duplex (Management)
ce Set the mode of the Management interface.
Syntax duplex {half | full}
To return to the default setting, enter no duplex.
Parameters
half Enter the keyword half to set the Management interface to transmit only in one direction.
full Enter the keyword full to set the Management interface to transmit in both directions.
Command
History
Version 6.4.1.0 Documentation modifiedadded Management to distinguish from duplex (10/100
Interfaces)
Usage This command applies only to the Management interface on the RPMs.
Information
Related
Commands interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary
or Standby RPM).
duplex (Management) Set the mode of the Management interface.
management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a
forwarding router.
speed (Management interface) Set the speed on the Management interface.
duplex (10/100 Interfaces)

ces Configure duplex mode on any physical interfaces where the speed is set to 10/100.Syntax
duplex {half | full}
To return to the default setting, enter no duplex.
Parameters
half Enter the keyword half to set the physical interface to transmit only in one direction.
full Enter the keyword full to set the physical interface to transmit in both directions.
Command
History
568 | Interfaces
Usage This command applies to any physical interface with speed set to 10/100.
Information
Note: Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, when a copper SFP2 module with catalog number
GP-SFP2-1T is used in the S25P model of the S-Series, its speed can be manually set with the
speed command. When the speed is set to 10 or 100 Mbps, the duplex command can also be
executed.
Related
speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces) Set the speed on the Base-T Ethernet interface.
Commands
negotiation auto Enable or disable auto-negotiation on an interface.
flowcontrol
ces Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on 1Gig and 10Gig line cards.
Syntax flowcontrol rx {off | on} tx {off | on} threshold {<1-2047> <1-2013> <1-2013>}
The threshold keyword is supported on C-Series and S-Series only.
Parameters
rx on Enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port. This is
the default value for the receive side.
rx off Enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port.
tx on Enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device
when a higher rate of traffic is received. This is the default value on the send side.
tx off Enter the keywords tx off so that flow control frames are not sent from this port to the
connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
threshold When tx on is configured, you can set the threshold values for:
(C-Series and Number of flow-control packet pointers: 1-2047 (default = 75)
S-Series only) Flow-control buffer threshold in KB: 1-2013 (default = 49KB)
Flow-control discard threshold in KB: 1-2013 (default= 75KB)
Defaults C-Series: rx off tx off

E-Series: rx on tx on
S-Series: rx off tx off
Command
History
Version 6.5.1.9 and 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series with thresholds
Usage The globally assigned 48-bit Multicast address 01-80-C2-00-00-01 is used to send and receive pause
Information frames. To allow full duplex flow control, stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC
to enable reception of frames with a destination address equal to this multicast address.
The pause:
Starts when either the packet pointer or the buffer threshold is met (whichever is met first). When
the discard threshold is met, packets are dropped.
Interfaces | 569
Ends when both the packet pointer and the buffer threshold fall below 50% of the threshold
settings.
The discard threshold defines when the interface starts dropping the packet on the interface. This may
be necessary when a connected device does not honor the flow control frame sent by the S-Series. The
discard threshold should be larger than the buffer threshold so that the buffer holds at least hold at least
3 packets.
On 4-port 10G line cards: Changes in the flow-control values are not reflected automatically in the
show interface output for 10G interfaces. This issue results from the fact that 10G interfaces do not
support auto-negotiation per-se. On 1G interfaces, changing the flow control values causes an
automatic interface flap, after which PAUSE values are exchanged as part of the auto-negotiation
process. As a workaround, apply the new settings, execute shut followed by no shut on the interface,
and then check the running-config of the port.

Do not enable tx pause when buffer carving is enabled. Consult Dell Force10 TAC for
information and assistance.
Asymmetric flow control (rx on tx off or rx off tx on) setting for the interface port less than 100
Mb/s speed is not permitted. The following error is returned:
Cant configure Asymmetric flowcontrol when speed <1G, config

ignored
The only configuration applicable to half duplex ports is rx off tx off. The following error is
returned:
Cant configure flowcontrol when half duplex is configure,

config ignored
Half duplex cannot be configured when the flow control configuration is on (default is rx on tx
on). The following error is returned:
Cant configure half duplex when flowcontrol is on, config

ignored
Note: The flow control must be off (rx off tx off) before configuring the half duplex.
Speeds less than 1 Gig cannot be configured when the asymmetric flow control configuration is
on. The following error is returned:
Cant configure speed <1G when Asymmetric flowcontrol is on,

config ignored
FTOS only supports rx on tx on and rx off tx off for speeds less than 1 Gig (Symmetric).
On the C-Series and S-Series systems, the flow-control sender and receiver must be on the same
port-pipe. Flow control is not supported across different port-pipes on the C-Series or S-Series
system.
Example Figure 23-4. show running config (partial)

FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/1)#show config
!
no ip address
switchport
no negotiation auto
flowcontrol rx off tx on
no shutdown
...
570 | Interfaces
The table below displays how FTOS negotiates the flow control values between two Dell Force10
chassis connected back-to-back using 1G copper ports.
Table 23-1. Negotiated Flow Control Values
Configured Negotiated
LocRxConf LocTxConf RemoteRxConf RemoteTxConf LocNegRx LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx
off off off off off off off off
off on off off off off
on off off off off off
on on off off off off
off on off off off off off off

on off off on on off
on on off off off off
on off off off off off off off

off on on off off on
on off on on on on
on on on on on on
on on off off off off off off

on off on on on on
on on on on on on
Related
show running-config Display the flow configuration parameters (non-default values only).
Commands
show interfaces Display the negotiated flow control parameters.
Interfaces | 571
interface
ces Configure a physical interface on the switch.
Syntax interface interface
Parameters
For 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
Command
History
Example Figure 23-5. interface Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface gig 0/0
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/0)#exit#
Usage You cannot delete a physical interface.

Information
By default, physical interfaces are disabled (shutdown) and are in Layer 3 mode. To place an interface
in mode, ensure that the interfaces configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the
switchport command.
Related
interface loopback Configure a Loopback interface.
Commands
interface null Configure a Null interface.
interface port-channel Configure a port channel.
interface sonet Configure a SONET interface.
interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
show interfaces Display interface configuration.
interface loopback
ces Configure a Loopback interface.
Syntax interface loopback number

To remove a loopback interface, use the no interface loopback number command.
572 | Interfaces
Parameters
number Enter a number as the interface number.
Range: 0 to 16383.
Command
History
Example Figure 23-6. interface loopback Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface loopback 1655
FTOS(conf-if-lo-1655)#
Related
interface Configure a physical interface.
Commands
interface null Configure a Null interface.
interface ManagementEthernet
ce Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or Standby RPM).
Syntax interface ManagementEthernet slot/port
Parameters
slot/port Enter the keyword ManagementEthernet followed by slot number (0-1) and port
number zero (0).
Command
History
Example Figure 23-7. interface ManagementEthernet Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface managementethernet 0/0
FTOS(conf-if-ma-0/0)#
Usage You cannot delete a Management port.

Information
The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown). Use the ip address command to assign an
IP address to the Management port.
Interfaces | 573
If two RPMs are installed in your system, use the show redundancy command to display which RPM is
the Primary RPM.
Related
Commands
forwarding router.
duplex (Management) Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.
speed (Management interface) Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.
interface null
ces Configure a Null interface on the switch.
Syntax interface null number
Parameters
number Enter zero (0) as the Null interface number.
Defaults Not configured; number = 0
Command
History
Example Figure 23-8. interface null Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface null 0
FTOS(conf-if-nu-0)#
Usage You cannot delete the Null interface. The only configuration command possible in a Null interface is ip
Information unreachables.
Related
Commands
ip unreachables Enable generation of ICMP unreachable messages.
574 | Interfaces
interface range
ces This command permits configuration of a range of interfaces to which subsequent commands are
applied (bulk configuration). Using the interface range command, identical commands can be
entered for a range of interface.
Syntax interface range interface , interface , ...
Parameters
interface , Enter the keyword interface range and one of the interfaces slot/port,
interface , ... port-channel or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration.
You can enter up to six comma separated rangesspaces are not required between the
commas. Comma-separated ranges can include VLANs, port-channels and physical
interfaces.
Slot/Port information must contain a space before and after the dash. For example,
interface range gigabitethernet 0/1 - 5 is valid; interface range
gigabitethernet 0/1-5 is not valid.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Defaults This command has no default behavior or values.
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale. Prior releases supported 2094.
History
Usage When creating an interface range, interfaces appear in the order they are entered; they are not sorted.
Information The command verifies that interfaces are present (physical) or configured (logical). Important things to
remember:
Bulk configuration is created if at least one interface is valid.
Non-existing interfaces are excluded from the bulk configuration with a warning message.
The interface range prompt includes interface types with slot/port information for valid interfaces.
The prompt allows for a maximum of 32 characters. If the bulk configuration exceeds 32
characters, it is represented by an ellipsis ( ... ).
When the interface range prompt has multiple port ranges, the smaller port range is excluded from
the prompt.
If overlapping port ranges are specified, the port range is extended to the smallest start port and the
biggest end port.
Interfaces | 575
Example Figure 23-9. Bulk Configuration Warning Message
FTOS(conf)#interface range so 2/0 - 1 , te 10/0 , gi 3/0 , fa 0/0

% Warning: Non-existing ports (not configured) are ignored by
interface-range
Example Figure 23-10. Interface Range prompt with Multiple Ports

FTOS(conf)#interface range gi 2/0 - 23 , gi 2/1 - 10
FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-2/0-23#
Example Figure 23-11. Interface Range prompt Overlapping Port Ranges

FTOS(conf)#interface range gi 2/1 - 11 , gi 2/1 - 23
FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-2/1-23#
Only VLAN and port-channel interfaces created using the interface vlan and interface port-channel
commands can be used in the interface range command.
Use the show running-config command to display the VLAN and port-channel interfaces. VLAN or
port-channel interfaces that are not displayed in the show running-config command can not be used
with the bulk configuration feature of the interface range command. You cannot create virtual
interfaces (VLAN, Port-channel) using the interface range command.
Note: If a range has VLAN, physical, port-channel, and SONET interfaces, only commands
related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured. To configure commands specific to VLAN,
port-channel or SONET, only those respective interfaces should be configured in a particular
range.
The following figure is an example of a single range bulk configuration.
Example Figure 23-12. Single Range Bulk Configuration

FTOS(config)# interface range gigabitethernet 5/1 - 23
FTOS(config-if-range)# no shutdown
FTOS(config-if-range)#
The following figure shows how to use commas to add different interface types to the range enabling
all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in the range 5/1 to 5/23 and both Ten Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1/1 and
1/2.
Example Figure 23-13. Multiple Range Bulk Configuration Gigabit Ethernet and Ten Gigabit
Ethernet
FTOS(config-if)# interface range gigabitethernet 5/1 - 23, tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 2

576 | Interfaces
The following figure shows how to use commas to add SONET, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces to
the range.
Example Figure 23-14. Multiple Range Bulk Configuration with SONET, VLAN, and port channel
FTOS(config-if)# interface range gigabitethernet 5/1 - 23, tengigabitethernet 1/1 2,

Vlan 2 100 , Port 1 25
Related
interface port-channel Configure a port channel group.
Commands
interface vlan Configure a VLAN interface.
show config (from INTERFACE Show the bulk configuration interfaces.
RANGE mode)
show range Show the bulk configuration ranges.
interface range macro (define) Define a macro for an interface-range.
interface range macro (define)

ces Defines a macro for an interface range and then saves the macro in the running configuration.
Syntax define interface range macro name interface , interface , ...
Parameters
name Enter up to 16 characters for the macro name.
interface , interface ,... Enter the interface keyword (see below) and one of the interfaces slot/
port, port-channel or VLAN numbers. Select the range of interfaces for bulk
configuration. You can enter up to six comma separated rangesspaces are
not required between the commas. Comma-separated ranges can include
VLANs, port-channels and physical interfaces.
Slot/Port information must contain a space before and after the dash. For
example, interface range gigabitethernet 0/1 - 5 is valid;
interface range gigabitethernet 0/1-5 is not valid.
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
Defaults This command has no default behavior or value
Interfaces | 577
Command
History
Example Figure 23-15. define interface-range macro Command Example

FTOS(config)# define interface-range test tengigabitethernet 0/0 - 3 ,
gigabitethernet 5/0 - 47 , gigabitethernet 13/0 - 89
FTOS# show running-config | grep define

define interface-range test tengigabitethernet 0/0 - 3 , gigabitethernet 5/0 - 47 ,
gigabitethernet 13/0 - 89
FTOS(config)#interface range macro test
FTOS(config-if-range-te-0/0-3,gi-5/0-47,gi-13/0-89)#
Usage The above figure is an example of how to define an interface range macro named test. Execute the
Information show running-config command to display the macro definition.
Related
interface range Configure a range of command (bulk configuration)
Commands
interface range macro name Run an interface range macro.
interface range macro name

ces Run the interface-range macro to automatically configure the pre-defined range of interfaces.
Syntax interface range macro name
Parameters
name Enter the name of an existing macro.
Defaults This command has no default behavior or value
Command
History
Usage The following figure runs the macro named test that was defined earlier.
Information
Example Figure 23-16. interface-range macro Command Example

FTOS(config)#interface range macro test
FTOS(config-if-range-te-0/0-3,gi-5/0-47,gi-13/0-89)#
FTOS
578 | Interfaces
Related
interface range Configure a range of command (bulk configuration)
Commands
interface range macro (define) Define a macro for an interface range (bulk configuration)
interface vlan
ces Configure a VLAN. You can configure up to 4094 VLANs.
Syntax interface vlan vlan-id

To delete a VLAN, use the no interface vlan vlan-id command.
Parameters
vlan-id Enter a number as the VLAN Identifier.
Range: 1 to 4094.
Defaults Not configured, except for the Default VLAN, which is configured as VLAN 1.
Command
History
Example Figure 23-17. interface vlan Command Example

FTOS(conf)#int vlan 3
FTOS(conf-if-vl-3)#
Usage For more information on VLANs and the commands to configure them, refer to Virtual LAN (VLAN)
Information Commands.
FTP, TFTP, and SNMP operations are not supported on a VLAN. MAC ACLs are not supported in
VLANs. IP ACLs are supported. See Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).
Related
Commands
interface loopback Configure a loopback interface.
interface null Configure a null interface.
interface port-channel Configure a port channel group.
show vlan Display the current VLAN configuration on the switch.
shutdown Disable/Enable the VLAN.
tagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface.
untagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface.
Interfaces | 579
ipg (Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)
e Set the Inter-packet gap (IPG) to 8 bytes for traffic on a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
Syntax ipg 8
To return to the default setting, enter no ipg.
Parameters
8 Enter the keyword 8 to set the IPG to 8 bytes.
Defaults 12 bytes
Command
History
Usage For 1-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only.

Information
Note: This command is an EtherScale only command.
ipg (10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)

e Set the Inter-packet Gap for traffic on 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface.
Syntax ipg {ieee-802.3ae | shrink}

To return to the default of averaging the IPG, enter no ipg {shrink | ieee-802.3ae}
Parameters
ieee-802.3ae Enter the keyword ieee-802.3ae to set the IPG to 12 (12-15) bytes (packet size
dependent)
shrink Enter the keyword shrink to set the IPG to 8 (8-11) bytes (packet size dependent).
Defaults averaging the IPG
Command
History
pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced for E-Series (EtherScale-only)
Usage For 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only.

Information
IPG equals 96 bits times from end of the previous packet to start of the pre-amble of the next packet.
580 | Interfaces
keepalive
ces On SONET interfaces, send keepalive packets periodically to keep an interface alive when it is not
transmitting data.
Syntax keepalive [seconds]

To stop sending SONET keepalive packets, enter no keepalive.
Parameters
seconds (OPTIONAL) For SONET interfaces with PPP encapsulation enabled, enter the number of
seconds between keepalive packets.
Range: 0 to 23767
Default: 10 seconds
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Usage When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured
Information interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up. When you configure no keepalive, the
system does not send keepalive packets and so the local end of a WAN link remains up even if the
remote end is down.
lfs enable (EtherScale)

e Enable Link Fault Signaling (LFS) on EtherScale 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only.
Syntax lfs enable

To disable LFS, enter no lfs enable.
Defaults Enabled.
Command Modes INTERFACE (10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only)
Command
History
Usage If there is a failure on the link, FTOS brings down the interface. The interface will stay down until the
Information link failure signal stops.
Note: On TeraScale line cards, LFS is always enabled by default.
Interfaces | 581
link debounce-timer
e Assign the debounce time for link change notification on this interface.
Syntax link debounce [milliseconds]
Parameters
milliseconds Enter the time to delay link status change notification on this interface.
Range: 100-5000 ms
Default for copper is 3100 ms
Default for fiber is 100 ms
Command
History
Usage Changes do not affect any ongoing debounces. The timer changes take affect from the next debounce
Information onward.
monitor
ces Monitor counters on a single interface or all interfaces on a line card. The screen is refreshed every 5
seconds and the CLI prompt disappears.
Syntax monitor interface [interface]

To disable monitoring and return to the CLI prompt, press the q key.
Parameters
For the management port, enter the keyword managementethernet followed by
the slot (0-1) and the port (0).
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The delta column displays changes since the last screen refresh.
Information
582 | Interfaces
Example Figure 23-18. monitor Command Example of a Single Interface
systest-3 Monitor time: 00:00:06 Refresh Intvl.: 2s Time: 03:26:26
Interface: Gi 0/3, Enabled, Link is Up, Linespeed is 1000 Mbit
Traffic statistics: Current Rate Delta

Input bytes: 9069828 43 Bps 86
Output bytes: 606915800 43 Bps 86
Input packets: 54001 0 pps 1
Output packets: 9401589 0 pps 1
64B packets: 67 0 pps 0
Over 64B packets: 49166 0 pps 1
Error statistics:
Input underruns: 0 0 pps 0
Input giants: 0 0 pps 0
Input throttles: 0 0 pps 0
Input CRC: 0 0 pps 0
Input IP checksum: 0 0 pps 0
Input overrun: 0 0 pps 0
Output underruns: 0 0 pps 0
Output throttles: 0 0 pps 0
m - Change mode c - Clear screen

l - Page up a - Page down
T - Increase refresh interval t - Decrease refresh interval
q - Quit
Figure 23-19. monitor Command Example of All Interfaces on a Line Card

systest-3 Monitor time: 00:01:31 Refresh Intvl.: 2s Time: 03:54:14
Interface Link In Packets [delta] Out Packets

[delta]
Gi 0/0 Down 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/1 Down 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/2 Up 61512 52 66160 42
Gi 0/3 Up 63086 20 9405888 24
Gi 0/4 Up 14697471418 2661481 13392989657
2661385
Gi 0/5 Up 3759 3 161959604 832816
Gi 0/6 Up 4070 3 8680346 5
Gi 0/7 Up 61934 34 138734357 72
Gi 0/8 Up 61427 1 59960 1
Gi 0/9 Up 62039 53 104239232 3
Gi 0/10 Up 17740044091 372 7373849244 79
Gi 0/11 Up 18182889225 44 7184747584 138
Gi 0/12 Up 18182682056 0 3682 1
Gi 0/13 Up 18182681434 43 6592378911 144
Gi 0/14 Up 61349 55 86281941 15
Gi 0/15 Up 59808 58 62060 27
Gi 0/16 Up 59889 1 61616 1
Gi 0/17 Up 0 0 14950126 81293
Gi 0/18 Up 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/19 Down 0 0 0 0
Gi 0/20 Up 62734 54 62766 18
Gi 0/21 Up 60198 9 200899 9
Gi 0/22 Up 17304741100 3157554 10102508511
1114221
Gi 0/23 Up 17304769659 3139507 7133354895
523329
m - Change mode c - Clear screen

b - Display bytes r - Display pkts/bytes per sec
l - Page up a - Page down
Interfaces | 583
Table 23-2. monitor Command Menu Options
Key Description
systest-3 Displays the host name assigned to the system.
monitor time Displays the amount of time since the monitor command was entered.
time Displays the amount of time the chassis is up (since last reboot).
m Change the view from a single interface to all interfaces on the line card or visa-versa.
c Refresh the view.
b Change the counters displayed from Packets on the interface to Bytes.
r Change the [delta] column from change in the number of packets/bytes in the last interval to
rate per second.
l Change the view to next interface on the line card, or if in the line card mode, the next line
card in the chassis.
a Change the view to the previous interface on the line card, or if the line card mode, the
previous line card in the chassis.
T Increase the screen refresh rate.
t Decrease the screen refresh rate.
q Return to the CLI prompt.
mtu
ce Set the maximum Link MTU (frame size) for an Ethernet interface.
Syntax mtu value

To return to the default MTU value, enter no mtu.
Parameters
value Enter a maximum frame size in bytes.
Range: 594 to 9252
Default: 1554
Defaults 1554
Command
History
Usage If the packet includes a Layer 2 header, the difference between the link MTU and IP MTU (ip mtu
Information command) must be enough bytes to include the Layer 2 header:
On C-Series, the IP MTU will get adjusted automatically when the Layer 2 MTU is configured
with the mtu command.
On the E-Series, you must compensate for a Layer 2 header when configuring IP MTU and link
MTU on an Ethernet interface. Use the ip mtu command.
584 | Interfaces
When you enter the no mtu command, FTOS reduces the IP MTU value to 1536 bytes. On the
E-Series, to return the IP MTU value to the default, enter no ip mtu.
Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows.
port channels:
All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value.
The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU
values configured on the channel members.
Example: if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channels MTU
values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU.
VLANs:
All members of a VLAN must have same IP MTU value.
Members can have different Link MTU values. Tagged members must have a link MTU 4 bytes
higher than untagged members to account for the packet tag.
The VLAN link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values
configured on the VLAN members.
Example The VLAN contains tagged members with Link MTU of 1522 and IP MTU of 1500 and untagged
members with Link MTU of 1518 and IP MTU of 1500. The VLANs Link MTU cannot be higher
than 1518 bytes and its IP MTU cannot be higher than 1500 bytes.
Table 23-3. Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU
Layer 2 Overhead Link MTU and IP MTU Delta

Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes
VLAN Tag 22 bytes
Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes
Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes
negotiation auto
ces Enable auto-negotiation on an interface.
Syntax negotiation auto

To disable auto-negotiation, enter no negotiation auto.
Defaults Enabled.
Command
History
Usage This command is supported on C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series (TeraScale and ExaScale) 10/100/1000
Information Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
Interfaces | 585
The no negotiation auto command is only available if you first manually set the speed of a port to
10Mbits or 100Mbits.
The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to
forced-master/forced slave once auto-negotiation is enabled
Note: The mode option is not available on non-10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet line cards.
Figure 23-20. negotiation auto Master/Slave Example

FTOS(conf)# int gi 0/0
FTOS(conf-if)#neg auto
FTOS(conf-if-autoneg)# ?
end Exit from configuration mode

exit Exit from autoneg configuration mode
mode Specify autoneg mode
no Negate a command or set its defaults
show Show autoneg configuration information
FTOS(conf-if-autoneg)#mode ?
forced-master Force port to master mode
forced-slave Force port to slave mode
FTOS(conf-if-autoneg)#
If the mode option is not used, the default setting is slave. If you do not configure forced-master or
forced slave on a port, the port negotiates to either a master or a slave state. Port status is one of the
following:
Forced-master
Force-slave
Master
Slave
Auto-neg Errortypically indicates that both ends of the node are configured with forced-master
or forced-slave.
Caution: Ensure that one end of your node is configured as forced-master and one is
configured as forced-slave. If both are configured the same (that is forced-master or
forced-slave), the show interfaces command will flap between an auto-neg-error and
forced-master/slave states.
You can display master/slave settings with the show interfaces command.
Figure 23-21. Display Auto-negotiation Master/Slave Setting (partial)
FTOS#show interfaces configured

Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
Interface index is 474791997
MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Master
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of "show interfaces" counters 00:12:42
Queueing strategy: fifo
Input Statistics:
...
Both sides of the link must have auto-negotiation enabled or disabled for the link to come up.
586 | Interfaces
The following table details the possible speed and auto-negotiation combinations for a line between
two 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
Table 23-4. Auto-negotiation and Link Speed Combinations
Link Status between

Port 0 Port 1
Port 1 and Port 2
auto-negotiation enabled* auto-negotiation enabled*
Up at 1000 Mb/s
speed 1000 or auto speed 1000 or auto
auto-negotiation enabled auto-negotiation enabled
Up at 100 Mb/s
speed 100 speed 100
auto-negotiation disabled auto-negotiation disabled
Up at 100 Mb/s
speed 100 speed 100
auto-negotiation disabled auto-negotiation enabled
Down
speed 100 speed 100
auto-negotiation enabled* auto-negotiation disabled
Down
speed 1000 or auto speed 100
* You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto.
Related
speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces) Set the link speed to 10, 100, 1000 or auto-negotiate the speed.
Commands
portmode hybrid
ces Set a physical port or port-channel to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port configured this
way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
Syntax portmode hybrid

To return a port to accept either tagged or untagged frames (non-hybrid), use the no portmode
hybrid command.
Defaults non-hybrid
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series and S-Series
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series only
Example Figure 23-22. portmode hybrid configuration example

FTOS(conf)#interface gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-gi-7/0)#portmode hybrid
FTOS(conf-if-gi-7/0)#interface vlan 10
FTOS(conf-if-vl-10)#untagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-10)#interface vlan 20
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#
Interfaces | 587
Usage The figure above sets a port as hybrid, makes the port a tagged member of VLAN 20, and an untagged
Information member of VLAN 10, which becomes the native VLAN of the port. The port will now accept:
untagged frames and classify them as VLAN 10 frames
VLAN 20 tagged frames
The next figure is an example show output with Hybrid as the newly added value for 802.1QTagged.
The options for this field are:
Trueport is tagged
Falseport is untagged
Hybridport accepts both tagged and untagged frames
Example Figure 23-23. Display the Tagged Hybrid Interface

FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#do show interfaces switchport
Name: GigabitEthernet 7/0
802.1QTagged: Hybrid
Vlan membership:
Vlan 10, Vlan 20
Native VlanId: 10
The figure below is an example unconfiguration of the hybrid port using the no portmode hybrid
command.
Note: You must remove all other configurations on the port before you can remove the
hybrid configuration from the port.
Example Figure 23-24. Unconfigure the hybrid port

FTOS(conf-if-vl-10)#no untagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#no tagged gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#interface gi 7/0
FTOS(conf-if-gi-7/0)#no portmode hybrid
Related
show interfaces switchport Display the configuration of switchport (Layer 2) interfaces on the switch.
Commands
switchport Place the interface in a Layer 2 mode.
vlan-stack trunk Specify an interface as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network.
rate-interval
ces Configure the traffic sampling interval on the selected interface.
Syntax rate-interval seconds
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds for which to collect traffic data.
Note: Since polling occurs every 15 seconds, the number of seconds designated
here will round to the multiple of 15 seconds lower than the entered value. For
example, if 44 seconds is designated it will round to 30; 45 to 59 seconds will
round to 45, and so forth.
588 | Interfaces
Command
History
Usage The configured rate interval is displayed, along with the collected traffic data, in the output of show
Information interfaces commands.
Related
show interfaces Display information on physical and virtual interfaces.
Commands
show config
ces Display the interface configuration.
Syntax show config
Command
History
Example Figure 23-25. show config Command Example for the INTERFACE Mode
FTOS(conf-if)#show conf
!
no ip address
switchport
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if)#
show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode)

ces Display the bulk configured interfaces (interface range).
Syntax show config
Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (conf-if-range)
Command
History
Interfaces | 589

Example Figure 23-26. show config (Bulk Configuration) Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface range gigabitethernet 1/1 - 2
FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-1/1-2)#show config
!
no ip address
switchport
no shutdown
!
no ip address
switchport
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-1/1-2)#
show interfaces
ces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Syntax show interfaces interface
Parameters
information.
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0 to
16383.
For the management interface on an RPM, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
For a Null interface, enter the keywords null 0.
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.2.1.2 Include SFP and SFP+ optics power detail in E-Series and C-Series output.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Output expanded to include SFP+ media in C-Series
590 | Interfaces
Version 6.4.1.0 Changed organization of display output
Version 6.3.1.0 Added Pluggable Media Type field in E-Series TeraScale output
Usage Use this show interfaces command for details on a specific interface. Use the show interfaces
linecard command for details on all interfaces on the designated line card.
Note that, in an E-Series EtherScale chassis, the show interfaces command output does not include
details about installed SFP or XFP transceivers.
Example Figure 23-27. show interfaces Command Example for 10G Port (EtherScale in
E-Series)
FTOS#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 2/0
TenGigabitEthernet 2/0 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:3a
LineSpeed 10000 Mbit
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts
0 symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
1 packets, 64 bytes, 0 underruns
0 Multicasts, 2 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts
0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS
0 throttles, 0 discarded
Rate info (interval 299 seconds):
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate
Time since last interface status change: 00:00:27
Table 23-5. Lines in show interfaces Command Example (EtherScale)
Line Description
TenGigabitEthernet 2/0... Displays the interfaces type, slot/port, and administrative and line protocol
status.
Hardware is... Displays the interfaces hardware information and its assigned MAC address.
Interface index... Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface.
Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If one is, that address
is displayed.
MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU information.
If the chassis is in Jumbo mode, this number can range from 576 to 9252.
LineSpeed Displays the interfaces line speed.
ARP type:... Displays the ARP type and the ARP timeout value for the interface.
Last clearing... Displays the time when the show interfaces counters where cleared.
Queuing strategy... States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.
Interfaces | 591
Table 23-5. Lines in show interfaces Command Example (EtherScale) (continued)
Line Description
Input Statistics: Displays all the input statistics including:
Number of packets and bytes into the interface
Number of packets with IP headers, VLAN tagged headers and MPLS
headers
Note: The sum of the number of packets may not be as expected
since a VLAN tagged IP packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an
IP packet.
Packet size and the number of those packets inbound to the interface
Number of symbol errors, runts, giants, and throttles packets:
symbol errors = number packets containing bad data. That is, the port
MAC detected a physical coding error in the packet.
runts = number of packets that are less than 64B
giants = packets that are greater than the MTU size
throttles = packets containing PAUSE frames
Note: Symbol errors is supported on E-Series EtherScale only.
Number of CRC, IP Checksum, overrun, and discarded packets:
CRC = packets with CRC/FCS errors
IP Checksum = packets with IP Checksum errors
overrun = number of packets discarded due to FIFO overrun conditions
discarded = the sum of input symbol errors, runts, giants, CRC, IP
Checksum, and overrun packets discarded without any processing
Output Statistics: Displays output statistics sent out of the interface including:
Number of packets, bytes and underruns out of the interface
packets = total number of packets
bytes = total number of bytes
underruns = number of packets with FIFO underrun conditions
Number of Multicast, Broadcast and Unicast packets:
Multicasts = number of MAC multicast packets
Broadcasts = number of MAC broadcast packets
Unicasts = number of MAC unicast packets
Number of IP, VLAN and MPLs packets:
IP Packets = number of IP packets
Vlans = number of VLAN tagged packets
MPLS = number of MPLS packets (found on a LSR interface)
Number of throttles and discards packets:
discarded = number of packets discarded without any processing
Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to
299 seconds).
Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate.
Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format).
592 | Interfaces
Example Figure 23-28. show interfaces Command Example for 10G (TeraScale)
TenGigabitEthernet 3/0 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:41:77:c5
Current address is 00:01:e8:41:77:c5
Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-SR
Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 850.00nm
XFP receive power reading is -2.4834
Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure
Flowcontrol rx on tx on
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:15:14
Input Statistics:
4410013700 packets, 282240876800 bytes
0 Vlans
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded
Output Statistics:
0 Vlans,0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 4409143619 wredDrops
FTOS#
Table 23-6. Fields in show interfaces Command Example (TeraScale)
Line Description
TenGigabitEthernet 0/0... Interface type, slot/port and administrative and line protocol status.
Hardware is... Interface hardware information, assigned MAC address, and current address.
Pluggable media present... Present pluggable media wavelength, type, and rate. The error scenarios are:
Wavelength, Non-qualified Dell Force10 ID is not present, but
wavelength information is available from XFP or SFP serial data
Wavelength, F10 unknownDell Force10 ID is present, but not able to
determine the optics type
Unknown, Non-qualified if wavelength is reading error, and F10 ID is
not present
Dell Force10 allows unsupported SFP and XFP transceivers to be used, but
FTOS might not be able to retrieve some data about them. In that case,
typically when the output of this field is Pluggable media present, Media
type is unknown, the Medium and the XFP/SFP receive power reading data
might not be present in the output.
Interface index... Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface.
is displayed.
MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU information.
LineSpeed Displays the interfaces line speed, duplex mode, and Slave
Interfaces | 593
Table 23-6. Fields in show interfaces Command Example (TeraScale)
Line Description
Queuing strategy... States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.
Input Statistics: Displays all the input statistics including:
Number of packets and bytes into the interface
Number of packets with VLAN tagged headers
Packet size and the number of those packets inbound to the interface
Number of Multicast and Broadcast packets:
Number of runts, giants, and throttles packets:
runts = number of packets that are less than 64B
giants = packets that are greater than the MTU size
Number of CRC, overrun, and discarded packets:
CRC = packets with CRC/FCS errors
overrun = number of packets discarded due to FIFO overrun conditions
discarded = the sum of runts, giants, CRC, and overrun packets discarded
without any processing
Output Statistics: Displays output statistics sent out the interface including:
Number of packets, bytes and underruns out of the interface
Packet size and the number of those packets outbound to the interface
Number of Multicast, Broadcast and Unicast packets:
Unicasts = number of MAC unicast packets
Number of VLANs, throttles, discards, and collisions:
Vlans = number of VLAN tagged packets
discarded = number of packets discarded without any processing
collisions = number of packet collisions
wred=count both packets discarded in the MAC and in the
hardware-based queues
Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to
299 seconds)
Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate.
Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format).
594 | Interfaces
Example Figure 23-29. show interfaces Command Example for 1G SFP Interface
FTOS#show interfaces gigabitethernet 2/0
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:41:77:95
Current address is 00:01:e8:41:77:95
Pluggable media present, SFP type is 1000BASE-SX
Wavelength is 850nm
Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure
Internet address is not set
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit
Flowcontrol rx on tx on
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1w0d5h
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
0 Vlans
Output Statistics:
0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops
Time since last interface status change: 1w0d5h
FTOS#
Example Figure 23-30. show interfaces Command Example for 10G SFP+ Interface in C-Series
TenGigabitEthernet 0/44 is down, line protocol is down
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:32:44:26
Current address is 00:01:e8:32:44:26
Pluggable media present, SFP+ type is 10GBASE-CU5M
Medium is MultiRate
FTOS#
Figure 23-31. show interfaces ManagementEthernet Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces managementethernet 0/0
ManagementEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up

Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c
Current address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c
Pluggable media not present
Link local IPv6 address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe0b:a94c/64
Global IPv6 address: 2222::5/64
Virtual-IP is not set
Virtual-IP IPv6 address is not set
LineSpeed 10 Mbit, Mode half duplex
Input 943 packets, 78347 bytes, 190 multicast
Received 0 errors, 0 discarded
Output 459 packets, 102388 bytes, 15 multicast
Output 0 errors, 0 invalid protocol
Interfaces | 595
Usage On the C-Series and S-Series, the interface counter over 1023-byte pkts does not increment for
Information packets in the range 9216 > x < 1023.
The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown). If necessary, use the ip address command
to assign an IP address to the Management port. If two RPMs are installed in your system, use the show
redundancy command to display which RPM is the Primary RPM.
Related
show interfaces configured Display any interface with a non-default configuration.
Commands
show interfaces linecard Display information on all interfaces on a specific line card.
show interfaces phy
show interfaces rate Display information of either rate limiting or rate policing on the interface.
show interfaces switchport Display Layer 2 information about the interfaces.
show inventory (C-Series and Display the chassis type, components (including media), FTOS version
E-Series) including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols.
show inventory (S-Series) Display the S-Series switch type, components (including media), FTOS
version including hardware identification numbers and configured
protocols.
show ip interface Display Layer 3 information about the interfaces.
show range Display all interfaces configured using the interface range command.
Note: Unicast counters in the show interface output will increment when the interface receives multicast
or broadcast packets..
596 | Interfaces
show interfaces configured
ces Display any interface with a non-default configuration.
Syntax show interfaces configured
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 6.4.1.0 Changed organization of display output
Example Figure 23-32. show interfaces configured Command Output

FTOS#show interfaces configured
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Master
Input Statistics:
10 packets, 10000 bytes
0 Vlans
Output Statistics:
0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions
FTOS#
Related
show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Commands
Interfaces | 597
show interfaces dampening
ces Display interface dampening information.
Syntax show interfaces dampening [[interface] [summary] [detail]]
Parameters
interface (Optional) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display the current
summary of dampening data, including the number of interfaces configured
and the number of interfaces suppressed, if any.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed interface
dampening data.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 23-33. show interfaces dampening Command Example
FTOS#show interfaces dampening

Interface Supp Flaps Penalty Half-Life Reuse Suppress Max-Sup
State
Gi 3/2 Up 0 0 20 800 4500 120
Gi 3/10 Up 0 0 5 750 2500 20
FTOS#
Related
dampening Configure dampening on an interface
Commands
show interfaces configured Display any interface with a non-default configuration.
598 | Interfaces
show interfaces debounce
e Display information on interfaces with debounce timer configured.
Syntax show interfaces debounce interface
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands
show interfaces description

ces Display the descriptions configured on the interface.
Syntax show interfaces [interface] description
Parameters
information.
For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0 to
16383.
For the management interface on the RPM, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
For the Null interface, enter the keywords null 0.
For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port.
For VLAN interfaces, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Interfaces | 599
Command
History
Example Figure 23-34. show interfaces description Command Example

FTOS>
Interface OK? Status Protocol Description
GigabitEthernet 4/17 NO admin down down ***connected-to-host***
GigabitEthernet 4/18 NO admin down down ***connected-to-Tom***
GigabitEthernet 4/19 NO admin down down ***connected-to-marketing***
GigabitEthernet 4/20 NO admin down down ***connected-to-Bill***
GigabitEthernet 4/21 NO up down ***connected-to-Radius-Server***
GigabitEthernet 4/22 NO admin down down ***connected-to-Web-Server***
GigabitEthernet 4/23 NO admin down down ***connected-to-PC-client***
TenGigabitEthernet 6/0 NO admin down down
GigabitEthernet 8/0 YES up up
FTOS>
Table 23-7. show interfaces description Command Example Fields
Field Description
Interface Displays type of interface and associated slot and port number.
OK? Indicates if the hardware is functioning properly.
Status States whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (administratively down).
Protocol States whether IP is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on the interface.
Description Displays the description (if any) manually configured for the interface.
Related
Commands
600 | Interfaces
show interfaces linecard
ce Display information on all interfaces on a specific line card.
Syntax show interfaces linecard slot-number
Parameters
slot-number Enter a number for the line card slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7 for C300; 03 for C150
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on the E600/600i, 0 to 5 on the
E300
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced support on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Usage The following figure shows a line card that has an XFP interface. The type, medium, wavelength, and
receive power details are displayed. When a device that is not certified by Dell Force10 is inserted, it
might work, but its details might not be readable by FTOS and not displayed here.
Example Figure 23-35. show interfaces linecard Command Example (in C150)
FTOS#show interfaces linecard 0
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:51:b2:d4
Current address is 00:01:e8:51:b2:d4
Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-SR
Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 850.00nm
XFP receive power reading is -2.3538
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
Output Statistics:
--More--
Related
Commands
Interfaces | 601
show interfaces phy
ces Display auto-negotiation and link partner information.
Syntax show interfaces gigabitethernet slot/port phy
Parameters
gigabitethernet Enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by the slot/port information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 23-36. show interfaces gigabitethernet phy Command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show int gigabitethernet 1/0 phy
Mode Control:
SpeedSelection: 10b
AutoNeg: ON
Loopback: False
PowerDown: False
Isolate: False
DuplexMode: Full
Mode Status:
AutoNegComplete: False
RemoteFault: False
LinkStatus: False
JabberDetect: False
AutoNegotation Advertise:
100MegFullDplx: True
100MegHalfDplx: True
10MegFullDplx: False
10MegHalfDplx: True
Asym Pause: False
Sym Pause: False
AutoNegotiation Remote Partner's Ability:
100MegHalfDplx: False
Asym Pause: False
Sym Pause: False
AutoNegotiation Expansion:
ParallelDetectionFault: False
...
Table 23-8. Lines in show interfaces gigabitethernet Command Example
Line Description
Mode Control Indicates if auto negotiation is enabled. If so, indicates the selected speed and
duplex.
Mode Status Displays auto negotiation fault information. When the interface completes
auto negotiation successfully, the autoNegComplete field and the linkstatus
field read True.
AutoNegotiation Advertise Displays the control words advertised by the local interface during
negotiation. Duplex is either half or full. Asym- and Sym Pause is the types of
flow control supported by the local interface.
602 | Interfaces
Table 23-8. Lines in show interfaces gigabitethernet Command Example
Line Description
AutoNegotiation Remote Displays the control words advertised by the remote interface during
Partners Ability negotiation. Duplex is either half or full. Asym- and Sym Pause is the types of
flow control supported by the remote interface
AutoNegotiation Expansion ParallelDetectionFault is the handshaking scheme in which the link partner
continuously transmit an idle data packet using the Fast Ethernet MLT-3
waveform. Equipment that does not support auto-negotiation must be
configured to exactly match the mode of operation as the link partner or else
no link can be established.
1000Base-T Control 1000Base-T requires auto-negotiation. The IEEE Ethernet standard does not
support setting a speed to 1000 Mbps with the speed command without
auto-negotiation. E-Series line cards support both full-duplex and half-duplex
1000BaseT.
Phy Specific Control Values are:
0 - Manual MDI
1 - Manual MDIX
2 - N/A
3 - Auto MDI/MDIX
Phy Specific Status Displays PHY-specific status information. Cable length represents a rough
estimate in meters:
0 - < 50 meters
1 - 50 - 80 meters
2 - 80 - 110 meters
3 - 110 - 140 meters
4 - 140 meters.
Link Status:
Up or Down
Speed:
Auto
1000MB
100MB
10MB
Related
Commands
show interfaces stack-unit

s Display information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series stack member.
Syntax show interfaces stack-unit unit-number
Parameters
unit-number Enter the stack member number (0 to 7).
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Interfaces | 603
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series only

History
Example Figure 23-37. show interfaces status Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces stack-unit 0
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:82
Current address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:82
Pluggable media not present
LineSpeed auto, Mode auto
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 3w0d17h
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
Output Statistics:
0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions
Time since last interface status change: 3w0d17h

Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83
Current address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83
!-------------output truncated ----------------!
Related
show hardware stack-unit Display data plane and management plane input/output statistics.
Commands
show interfaces status

ces Display a summary of interface information or specify a line card slot and interface to display status
information on that specific interface only.
Syntax show interfaces [interface | linecard slot-number] status
Parameters
information:
linecard slot-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number.
C-Series Range: 0 to 7 for C300; 03 for C150
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200, 0 to 6 on the E600, 0 to 5 on the E300
604 | Interfaces
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 23-38. show interfaces status Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces status
Port Description Status Speed Duplex Vlan
Gi 0/0 Up 1000 Mbit Auto --
Gi 0/1 Down Auto Auto 1
Gi 0/2 Down Auto Auto 1
Gi 0/3 Down Auto Auto --
Gi 0/4 Force10Port Up 1000 Mbit Auto 30-130
Gi 0/7 Up 1000 Mbit Auto 1502,1504,1506-1508,1602
FTOS#
Related
Commands
show interfaces switchport

ces Display only virtual and physical interfaces in Layer 2 mode. This command displays the Layer 2
mode interfaces IEEE 802.1Q tag status and VLAN membership.
Syntax show interfaces switchport [interface [linecard slot-number] | stack-unit unit-id ]
Interfaces | 605
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
information. This keyword is only available on E-Series and C-Series.
Enter the keyword backup to view the backup interface for this interface.
linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number. This option is
slot-number available only on E-Series and C-Series.
C-Series Range: 0-7 for C300; 03 for C150
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200, 0 to 6 on the E600, 0 to 5 on the E300
stack-unit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack member number.
unit-id This option is available only on S-Series.
Range: 0 to 1
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for hybrid port/native VLAN, introduced on S-Series
Example Figure 23-39. show interfaces switchport Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces switchport
802.1QTagged: Hybrid
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2, Vlan 20
Native VlanId: 20

802.1QTagged: True
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2

802.1QTagged: True
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2

802.1QTagged: True
Vlan membership:
Vlan 2
--More--
606 | Interfaces
Table 23-9. Items in show interfaces switchport Command Example
Items Description
Name Displays the interfaces type, slot and port number.
802.1QTagged Displays whether if the VLAN tagged (True), untagged (False), or hybrid
(Hybrid, which supports both untagged and tagged VLANs by port 13/0.
Vlan membership Lists the VLANs to which the interface is a member. Starting with FTOS 7.6.1,
this field can display native VLAN membership by port 13/0.
Related
interface Configure a physical interface on the switch.
Commands
show ip interface Displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces.
show interfaces transceiver Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver.
The output also displays the transceivers serial number.

ces Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays
the transceivers serial number.
Syntax show interfaces [gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet] slot/port transceiver
Parameters
gigabitethernet For a 10/100/1000 interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed
tengigabitethernet For a 10G interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet followed by the
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Output augmented with diagnostic data for pluggable media
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed three fields in output: Vendor Name, Vendor OUI, Vendor PN
Usage See the figure below for an example screenshot, and see the following table or a description of the
output fields.
For related commands, see the Related Commands section, below, and see the Debugging and
Diagnostics chapter for your platform at the end of this book.
Interfaces | 607
Example Figure 23-40. show interfaces gigabitethernet transceiver Command Example
FTOS#show interfaces gigabitethernet 1/0 transceiver

SFP is present.
SFP 0 Serial Base ID fields

SFP 0 Id = 0x03
SFP 0 Ext Id = 0x04
SFP 0 Connector = 0x07
SFP 0 Transciever Code = 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x20 0x40 0x0c 0x05
SFP 0 Encoding = 0x01
SFP 0 BR Nominal = 0x15
SFP 0 Length(9um) Km = 0x00
SFP 0 Length(9um) 100m = 0x00
SFP 0 Length(50um) 10m = 0x1e
SFP 0 Length(62.5um) 10m = 0x0f
SFP 0 Length(Copper) 10m = 0x00
SFP 0 Vendor Rev = A
SFP 0 Laser Wavelength = 850 nm
SFP 0 CheckCodeBase = 0x66
SFP 0 Serial Extended ID fields
SFP 0 Options= 0x00 0x12
SFP 0 BR max= 0
SFP 0 BR min= 0
SFP 0 Vendor SN= P5N1ACE
SFP 0 Datecode = 040528
SFP 0 CheckCodeExt = 0x5b
SFP 1 Diagnostic Information

===================================
SFP 1 Rx Power measurement type = Average
===================================
SFP 1 Temp High Alarm threshold = 95.000C
SFP 1 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 3.900V
SFP 1 Bias High Alarm threshold = 17.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power High Alarm threshold = 0.631mW
SFP 1 RX Power High Alarm threshold = 1.259mW
SFP 1 Temp Low Alarm threshold = -25.000C
SFP 1 Voltage Low Alarm threshold = 2.700V
SFP 1 Bias Low Alarm threshold = 1.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power Low Alarm threshold = 0.067mW
SFP 1 RX Power Low Alarm threshold = 0.010mW
===================================
SFP 1 Temp High Warning threshold = 90.000C
SFP 1 Voltage High Warning threshold = 3.700V
SFP 1 Bias High Warning threshold = 14.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power High Warning threshold = 0.631mW
SFP 1 RX Power High Warning threshold = 0.794mW
SFP 1 Temp Low Warning threshold = -20.000C
SFP 1 Voltage Low Warning threshold = 2.900V
SFP 1 Bias Low Warning threshold = 2.000mA
SFP 1 TX Power Low Warning threshold = 0.079mW
SFP 1 RX Power Low Warning threshold = 0.016mW
===================================
SFP 1 Temperature = 39.930C
SFP 1 Voltage = 3.293V
SFP 1 Tx Bias Current = 6.894mA
SFP 1 Tx Power = 0.328mW
SFP 1 Rx Power = 0.000mW
===================================
SFP 1 Data Ready state Bar = False
SFP 1 Rx LOS state = True
SFP 1 Tx Fault state = False
SFP 1 Rate Select state = False
SFP 1 RS state = False
SFP 1 Tx Disable state = False
===================================
SFP 1 Temperature High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Voltage High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Bias High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Power High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Rx Power High Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Temperature Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Voltage Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Bias Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Tx Power Low Alarm Flag = False
SFP 1 Rx Power Low Alarm Flag = True
===================================
!-------output truncated -------------------------!
608 | Interfaces
Table 23-10. Diagnostic Data in show interfaces transceiver
Line Description
Rx Power measurement type Output depends on the vendor, typically either Average or OMA
(Receiver optical modulation amplitude).
Temp High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting, typically in Centigrade. Value differs between SFPs
and SFP+.
Voltage High Alarm threshold Displays the interface index number used by SNMP to identify the interface.
Bias High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power High Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
RX Power High Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Temp Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Voltage Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Bias Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power Low Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
RX Power Low Alarm Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Temp High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Voltage High Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Bias High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power High Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
RX Power High Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Temp Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Voltage Low Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Bias Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
TX Power Low Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
threshold
Power Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Temperature Current temperature of the sfps.If this temperature crosses Temp High alarm/
warning thresholds, then the temperature high alarm/warning flag is set to
true.
Voltage Current voltage of the sfps.If this voltage crosses voltage high alarm/warning
thresholds, then the voltage high alarm/warning flag is set to true.
Tx Bias Current Present Tx bias current of the SFP. If this crosses bias high alarm/warning
thresholds, then the tx bias high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls
below the low alarm/warning thresholds, then the tx bias low alarm/warning
flag is set to true.
Interfaces | 609
Table 23-10. Diagnostic Data in show interfaces transceiver (continued)
Line Description
Tx Power Present Tx power of the SFP. If this crosses Tx power alarm/warning
thresholds, then the Tx power high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls
below the low alarm/warning thresholds, then the Tx power low alarm/
warning flag is set to true.
Rx Power Present Rx power of the SFP. This value is either average Rx power or
OMA.This depends upon on the Rx Power measurement type displayed
above. If this crosses Rx power alarm/warning thresholds, then the Rx power
high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls below the low alarm/warning
thresholds, then the Rx power low alarm/warning flag is set to true.
Data Ready state Bar This field indicates that the transceiver has achieved power up and data is
ready. This is set to true if data is ready to be sent, false if data is being
transmitted.
Rx LOS state This is the digital state of the Rx_LOS output pin.This is set to true if the
operating status is down.
Tx Fault state This is the digital state of the Tx Fault output pin.
Rate Select state This is the digital state of the SFP rate_select input pin.
RS state This is the reserved digital state of the pin AS(1) per SFF-8079 and RS(1) per
SFF-8431.
Tx Disable state If the admin status of the port is down then this flag will be set to true.
Temperature High Alarm Flag This can be either true/False and it depends on the Current Temperature value
displayed above.
Voltage High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value
displayed above.
Tx Power High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value
displayed above.
Temperature Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value
displayed above.
Voltage Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Tx bias current value
displayed above.
Tx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value
displayed above.
Temperature High Warning This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value
Flag displayed above.
Voltage High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Tx bias current value
displayed above.
610 | Interfaces
Table 23-10. Diagnostic Data in show interfaces transceiver (continued)
Line Description
Tx Power High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Temperature Low Warning This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value
Flag displayed above.
Voltage Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value
displayed above.
Tx Bias Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value
displayed above.
Tx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value
displayed above.
Rx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value
displayed above.
Related
Commands
show inventory (C-Series Display the chassis type, components (including media), FTOS version
and E-Series) including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols.
show inventory (S-Series) Display the S-Series switch type, components (including media), FTOS version
including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols.
show range
ces Display all interfaces configured using the interface range command.
Syntax show range
Command Mode INTERFACE RANGE (config-if-range)
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale
History
Example Figure 23-41. show range Command Example

FTOS(conf-if-range-so-2/0-1,fa-0/0)#show range
interface sonet 2/0 - 1
interface fastethernet 0/0
FTOS(conf-if-range-so-2/0-1,fa-0/0)#
Interfaces | 611
Related

Commands
shutdown
ces Disable an interface.
Syntax shutdown
To activate an interface, enter no shutdown.
Defaults The interface is disabled.
Command
History
Usage The shutdown command marks a physical interface as unavailable for traffic. To discover if an
Information interface is disabled, use the show ip interface brief command. Disabled interfaces are listed as down.
Disabling a VLAN or a port channel causes different behavior. When a VLAN is disabled, the Layer 3
functions within that VLAN are disabled. Layer 2 traffic continues to flow. Entering the shutdown
command on a port channel disables all traffic on the port channel and the individual interfaces within
the port channel. To enable a port channel, you must enter no shutdown on the port channel interface
and at least one interface within that port channel.
The shutdown and description commands are the only commands that you can configure on an
interface that is a member of a port channel.
Related
interface port-channel Create a port channel interface.
Commands
interface vlan Create a VLAN.
Displays the interface routing status. Add the keyword brief to display a
show ip interface
table of interfaces and their status.
612 | Interfaces
speed (for 10/100/1000 interfaces)
ces Set the speed for 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces. Both sides of a link must be set to the same
speed (10/100/1000) or to auto or the link may not come upSyntax
speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | auto}
To return to the default setting, use the no speed {10 | 100 | 1000} command.
Parameters
10 Enter the keyword 10 to set the interfaces speed to 10 Mb/s.
Note: This i speed is not supported on the LC-EH-GE-50P or the LC-EJ-GE-50P
card. If the command is entered for these interfaces, an error message appears.
100 Enter the keyword 100 to set the interfaces speed to 10/100 Mb/s.
Note: When this setting is enabled, only 100Base-FX optics are supported on the
LC-EH-GE-50P or the LC-EJ-GE-50P card.
(Auto-negotiation is enabled. See negotiation auto for more information)
Note: When this setting is enabled, only 100oBase-FX optics are supported on
the LC-EH-GE-50P or the LC-EJ-GE-50P card.
auto Enter the keyword auto to set the interface to auto-negotiate its speed.
(Auto-negotiation is enabled. See negotiation auto for more information)
Defaults auto
Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Supported on LC-EH-GE-50P or the LC-EJ-GE-50P cards
Usage This command is found on the 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.

Information
When auto is enabled, the system performs and automatic discovery to determine the optics installed
and configure the appropriate speed.
When you configure a speed for the 10/100/1000 interface, you should confirm negotiation auto
command setting. Both sides of the link should have auto-negotiation either enabled or disabled. For
speed settings of 1000 or auto, the software sets the link to auto-negotiation, and you cannot change
that setting.
Note: Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, when a copper SFP2 module with catalog number
GP-SFP2-1T is used in the S25P model of the S-Series, its speed can be manually set with the
speed command. When the speed is set to 10 or 100 Mbps, the duplex command can also be
executed.
Related
duplex (10/100 Configure duplex mode on physical interfaces with the speed set to 10/100.
Commands
Interfaces)
negotiation auto Enable or disable auto-negotiation on an interface.
Interfaces | 613
speed (Management interface)
ce Set the speed for the Management interface.
Syntax speed {10 | 100 | auto}

To return to the default setting, use the no speed {10 | 100} command.
Parameters
auto Enter the keyword auto to set the interface to auto-negotiate its speed.
Defaults auto
Command
History
Usage This command is found on the Management interface only.

Information
Related
interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or
Commands
Standby RPM).
forwarding router.
switchport
ces Place an interface in Layer 2 mode.
Syntax switchport [backup interface {gigabit slot/port | tengigabit slot/port | port-channel

number}]
To remove an interface from Layer 2 mode and place it in Layer 3 mode, enter no switchport. If a
switchport backup interface is configured, you must first remove the backup configuration. To remove
a switchport backup interface, enter no switchport backup interface {gigabit slot/port |
tengigabit slot/port | port-channel number}].
Parameters
backup Use this option to configure a redundant Layer 2 link without using Spanning Tree. This
interface keyword configures a backup port so that if the primary port fails the backup port
changes to the up state. If the primary later comes up, it becomes the backup.
gigabit Enter this keyword if the backup port is a 1G port.
tengigabit Enter this keyword if the backup port is a 10G port.
port-channel Enter this keyword if the backup port is a static or dynamic port channel.
slot/port Specify the line card and port number of the backup port.
614 | Interfaces
Defaults Disabled (The interface is in Layer 3 mode.)
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for port-channel interfaces (port-channel number option).
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added backup interface option.
Usage If an IP address or VRRP group is assigned to the interface, you cannot use the switchport command
Information on the interface. To use the switchport command on an interface, only the no ip address and no
shutdown statements must be listed in the show config output.
When you enter the switchport command, the interface is automatically added to the default VLAN.
To use the switchport backup interface command on a port, you must first enter the switchport
command. For details, see the Configuring Redundant Links section in the Layer 2 chapter of the
Related
interface port-channel Create a port channel interface.
Commands
show interfaces switchport Display information about switchport interfaces.
wanport
e Enable the WAN mode on a TenGigabitEthernet interface.
Syntax wanport
To disable the WAN Port, enter no wanport.
Command
History
Usage The port must be in a shutdown state to change from LAN mode to WAN mode and vice-versa as
Information shown in the figure below.
For E-Series ExaScale systems, you must configure all the ports in a port-pipe to either WANPHY or
non-WANPHY. They cannot be mixed on the same port-pipe.
Interfaces | 615
Example Figure 23-42. wanport Command with shutdown Command Example
interface TenGigabitEthernet 13/0

no ip address
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#wanport
% Error: Port should be in shutdown mode, config ignored Te 13/0.
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-te-13/0)#wanport
Related
ais-shut Send LAIS on shutdown
Commands
alarm-report Enable reporting of a selected alarm
clock source Configure a clock source
down-when-looped Send a message when a loopback condition is detected
flag Set flags to ensure interoperability
framing Set framing type
keepalive Enable keepalive
loopback Troubleshoot a SONET loopback
Port Channel Commands

A Link Aggregation Group (LAG) is a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a
single link according to IEEE 802.3ad. In FTOS, a LAG is referred to as a Port Channel.
Table 23-11. Port Channel Limits

Maximum Port Channel Maximum Members per Port
Platform IDs Channel
E-Series ExaScale 255 64
E-Series TeraScale 255 16
E-Series EtherScale 32 16
C-Series 128 8
S-Series 128 8
Because each port can be assigned to only one Port Channel, and each Port Channel must have at least
one port, some of those nominally available Port Channels might have no function because they could
have no members if there are not enough ports installed. In the S-Series, those ports could be provided
by stack members.
The commands in this section are specific to Port Channel interfaces:
channel-member
group
interface port-channel
minimum-links
port-channel failover-group
show config
616 | Interfaces
show interfaces port-channel
show port-channel-flow
Note: The FTOS implementation of LAG or Port Channel requires that you configure a LAG
on both switches manually. For information on FTOS Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) for dynamic LAGs, refer to Chapter 29, Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
For more information on configuring and using Port Channels, refer to the FTOS
channel-member
ces Add an interface to the Port Channel, while in the INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL mode.
Syntax channel-member interface

To delete an interface from a Port Channel, use the no channel-member interface command.
Parameters
For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
information.
For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet
Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL
Command
History
Usage Use the interface port-channel command to access this command.

Information
You cannot add an interface to a Port Channel if the interface contains an IP address in its
configuration. Only the shutdown, description, mtu, and ip mtu commands can be configured on an
interface if it is to be added to a Port Channel. The mtu and ip mtu commands are only available when
the chassis is in Jumbo mode.
Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for Port Channels are:

The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU
Example: If the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the Port Channels MTU
Interfaces | 617
When an interface is removed from a Port Channel with the no channel-member command syntax, the
interface reverts to its configuration prior to joining the Port Channel.
An interface can belong to only one Port Channel.

On the E-Series TeraScale, you can add up to 16 interfaces to a Port Channel; E-Series ExaScale can
have up to 64. You can have eight interfaces per Port Channel on the C-Series and S-Series. The
interfaces can be located on different line cards but must be the same physical type and speed (for
example, all 1-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces). However, you can combine 100/1000 interfaces and GE
interfaces in the same Port Channel.
If the Port Channel contains a mix of interfaces with 100 Mb/s speed and 1000 Mb/s speed, the
software disables those interfaces whose speed does not match the speed of the first interface
configured and enabled in the Port Channel. If that first interface goes down, the Port Channel does not
change its designated speed; you must disable and re-enable the Port Channel or change the order of
the channel members configuration to change the designated speed. Refer to the FTOS Configuration
Guide for more information on Port Channels.
Related
description Assign a descriptive text string to the interface.
Commands
interface port-channel Create a Port Channel interface.
shutdown Disable/Enable the port channel.
group
ces Group two LAGs in a supergroup (fate-sharing group or failover group).
Syntax group group_number port-channel number port-channel number

To remove an existing LAG supergroup, use the no group group_number command.
Parameters
group_number Enter an integer from 1 to 32 that will uniquely identify this LAG
fate-sharing group.
port-channel number Enter the keyword port-channel followed by an existing LAG number.
Enter this keyword/variable combination twice, identifying the two LAGs to
be paired.
Command Modes PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP (conf-po-failover-grp)
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series
Example
FTOS(conf)#port-channel failover-group
FTOS(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2
FTOS(conf-po-failover-grp)#
618 | Interfaces
Related
port-channel failover-group Access the PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a
Commands
LAG failover group.
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups.
interface port-channel
ces Create a Port Channel interface, which is a link aggregation group containing up to 16 physical
interfaces on E-Series, eight physical interfaces on C-Series and S-Series.
Syntax interface port-channel channel-number

To delete a Port Channel, use the no interface port-channel channel-number command.
Parameters
channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a
number:
ExaScale.
Command
History
Example Figure 23-43. interface port-channel Command Example

FTOS(conf)#int port-channel 2
FTOS(conf-if-po-2)#
Usage Port Channel interfaces are logical interfaces and can be either in Layer 2 mode (by using the
Information switchport command) or Layer 3 mode (by configuring an IP address). You can add a Port Channel in
Layer 2 mode to a VLAN.
The shutdown, description, and name commands are the only commands that you can configure on an
interface while it is a member of a Port Channel. To add a physical interface to a Port Channel, the
interface can only have the shutdown, description, and name commands configured. The Port
Channels configuration is applied to the interfaces within the Port Channel.
A Port Channel can contain both 100/1000 interfaces and GE interfaces. Based on the first interface
configured in the Port Channel and enabled, FTOS determines if the Port Channel uses 100 Mb/s or
1000 Mb/s as the common speed. Refer to channel-member for more information.
If the line card is in a Jumbo mode chassis, then the mtu and ip mtu commands can also be configured.
The Link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members must be greater than the Link
MTU and IP MTU values configured on the Port Channel interface.
Note: In a Jumbo-enabled system, all members of a Port Channel must be configured with the
same link MTU values and the same IP MTU values.
Interfaces | 619
Related
channel-member Add a physical interface to the LAG.

Commands
interface null Configure a null interface.
shutdown Disable/Enable the port channel.
minimum-links
ces Configure the minimum number of links in a LAG (Port Channel) that must be in oper up status for
the LAG to be also in oper up status.
Syntax minimum-links number
Parameters
number Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in oper up status.
Range: 1 to 16
Default: 1
Defaults 1
Command
History
Usage If you use this command to configure the minimum number of links in a LAG that must be in oper up
Information status, then the LAG must have at least that number of oper up links before it can be declared as up.
For example, if the required minimum is four, and only three are up, then the LAG will be considered
down.
port-channel failover-group
ces Access the PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a LAG failover group.
Syntax port-channel failover-group

To remove all LAG failover groups, use the no port-channel failover-group command.
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series
620 | Interfaces
Usage This feature groups two LAGs to work in tandem as a supergroup, so that, for example, if one LAG
Information goes down, the other LAG is taken down automatically, providing an alternate path to reroute traffic,
avoiding oversubscription on the other LAG. You can use both static and dynamic (LACP) LAGs to
configure failover groups. For details, see the Port Channel chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.
Related
group Group two LAGs in a supergroup (fate-sharing group).
Commands
show config
ces Display the current configuration of the selected LAG.
Syntax show config
Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL
Example Figure 23-44. show config Command Sample Output for a Selected LAG
FTOS(conf-if-po-1)#show config
!
interface Port-channel 1
no ip address
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-po-1)#
Command
History
show interfaces port-channel

ces Display information on configured Port Channel groups.
Syntax show interfaces port-channel [channel-number] [brief]
Parameters
channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by
a number:
ExaScale.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only the port channel
number, the state of the port channel, and the number of interfaces in the port
channel.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for S-Series; Modified to display LAG failover group status
Interfaces | 621

Example Figure 23-45. show interfaces port-channel Command Example (EtherScale)

FTOS#show interfaces port-channel 20
Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up (Failover-group 1 is down)
Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa
Port-channel is part of failover-group 1
LineSpeed 2000 Mbit
Members in this channel: Gi 0/5 Gi 0/18
ARP type: ARPA, ARP timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of show interfaces counters 00:00:00
44507301 packets input, 3563070343 bytes
Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
1218120 packets output, 100745130 bytes, 0 underruns
Output 5428 Multicasts, 4 Broadcasts, 1212688 Unicasts
Rate info (interval 299 sec):
Input 01.50Mbits/sec, 2433 packets/sec
Output 00.02Mbits/sec, 4 packets/sec
FTOS#
Table 23-12. show interfaces port-channel Command Example Fields
Field Description
Port-Channel 1... Displays the LAGs status. In the example, the status of the LAGs LAG
fate-sharing group (Failover-group) is listed.
Hardware is... Displays the interfaces hardware information and its assigned MAC
address.
Port-channel is part... Indicates whether the LAG is part of a LAG fate-sharing group
(Failover-group).
Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If one is, that
address is displayed.
MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU.
LineSpeed Displays the interfaces line speed. For a port channel interface, it is the
line speed of the interfaces in the port channel.
Members in this... Displays the interfaces belonging to this port channel.
Last clearing... Displays the time when the show interfaces counters were cleared.
Queueing strategy. States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.
packets input... Displays the number of packets and bytes into the interface.
Input 0 IP packets... Displays the number of packets with IP headers, VLAN tagged headers
and MPLS headers.
The number of packets may not add correctly because a VLAN tagged IP
packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an IP packet.
622 | Interfaces
Table 23-12. show interfaces port-channel Command Example Fields (continued)
Field Description
0 64-byte... Displays the size of packets and the number of those packets entering that
interface. This information is displayed over two lines.
Received 0... Displays the type and number of errors or other specific packets received.
This information is displayed over three lines.
Output 0... Displays the type and number of packets sent out the interface. This
information is displayed over three lines.
Rate information... Displays the traffic rate information into and out of the interface. Traffic
rate is displayed in bits and packets per second.
Time since... Displays the time since the last change in the configuration of this
interface.
Figure 23-46. show interfaces port-channel brief Command Example

FTOS#sh int por 1 br
LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports

1 L2 up 00:00:08 Gi 3/0 (Up) *
Gi 3/1 (Down)
Gi 3/2 (Up)
FTOS#
Table 23-13. show interfaces port-channel brief Command Example Fields
Field Description
LAG Lists the port channel number.
Mode Lists the mode:
L3 - for Layer 3
L2 - for Layer 2
Status Displays the status of the port channel.
down - if the port channel is disabled (shutdown)
up - if the port channel is enabled (no shutdown)
Uptime Displays the age of the port channel in hours:minutes:seconds.
Ports Lists the interfaces assigned to this port channel.
(untitled) Displays the status of the physical interfaces (up or down).
In Layer 2 port channels, an * (asterisk) indicates which interface is the
primary port of the port channel. The primary port sends out interface
PDU.
In Layer 3 port channels, the primary port is not indicated.
Related
show lacp Display the LACP matrix.
Commands
Interfaces | 623
show port-channel-flow
ces Display an egress port in a given port-channel flow.
Syntax show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel number incoming-interface interface

{source-ip address destination-ip address} | {protocol number | icmp | tcp | udp} |
{source-port number destination-port number} | {source-mac address destination-mac
address}
Parameters
outgoing-port-channel Enter the keyword outgoing-port-channel followed by the
number number of the port channel to display flow information.
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255 for TeraScale and
1 to 512 for ExaScale.
incoming-interface interface Enter the keyword incoming-interface followed by the interface
type and slot/port or number information:
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the
source-ip address Enter the keyword source-ip followed by the IP source address in
IP address format.
destination-ip address Enter the keyword destination-ip followed by the IP destination
address in IP address format.
protocol number | icmp | tcp On the E-Series only, enter the keyword protocol followed by one of
the protocol type
| udp
keywords: tcp, udp, icmp or protocol number
Note: The protocol number keyword applies to E-Series only.
source-port number Enter the keyword source-port followed by the source port
number.
Range: 1-65536
Default: None
destination-port number Enter the keyword destination-port followed by the destination
port number.
Range: 1-65536
Default: None
source-mac address Enter the keyword source-mac followed by the MAC source
address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
destination-mac address Enter the keyword destination-mac followed by the MAC
destination address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Command Modes EXEC
624 | Interfaces
Usage Since this command calculates based on a Layer 2 hash algorithm, use this command to display flows
Information for switched Layer 2 packets, not for routed packets (use the show ip flow command to display
routed packets).
The show port-channel-flow command returns the egress port identification in a given
port-channel, if a valid flow is entered. A mismatched flow error occurs if MAC-based hashing is
configured for a Layer 2 interface and the user is trying to display a Layer 3 flow.
The output will display three entries:

Egress port for unfragmented packets.
In the event of fragmented packets, egress port of the first fragment.
In the event of fragmented packets, egress port of the subsequent fragments.
Example show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel number incoming-interface interface

source-mac address destination-mac address
Load-balance is configured for MAC

Load balance is configured for IP 4-tuple/2-tuple for the C-Series and S-Series
A non-IP payload is going out of Layer 2 LAG interface that is a member of VLAN with an IP
address.
Figure 23-47. show port-channel-flow Command for MAC Addresses
FTOS#show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel 1 incoming-interface gi 3/0
source-mac 00:00:50:00:00:00 destination-mac 00:00:a0:00:00:00
Egress Port for port-channel 1, for the given flow, is Te 13/01
Example On the E-Series only:
show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel number incoming-interface interface

source-ip address destination-ip address {protocol number [icmp/tcp/udp]}
{source-port number destination-port number}
Load balance is configured for IP 5-tuple/3-tuple.

An IP payload is going out of a Layer 2 LAG interface that is a member of a VLAN with an IP
address.
FTOS#show port-channel-flow outgoing-port-channel 2 incoming-interface gi 3/
0 source-ip 2.2.2.0 destination-ip 3.2.3.1 protocol tcp source-port 5
destination-port 6
Egress Port for port-channel 2, for the given flow:

Unfragmented packet: Gi 1/6
Fragmented packets (first fragment): Gi 1/12
Fragmented packets (remaining fragments): Gi 1/12
Related
load-balance (E-Series) Balance traffic over E-Series port channel members.
Commands
Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR)

TDR is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.2.1.0. and later.
Interfaces | 625
TDR is useful for troubleshooting an interface that is not establishing a link; either it is flapping or not
coming up at all. TDR detects open or short conditions of copper cables on 100/1000 Base-T modules.
tdr-cable-test
show tdr

The interface and port must be enabled (configuredsee the interface command) before running
TDR. An error message is generated if you have not enabled the interface.
The interface on the far-end device must be shut down before running TDR.
Since TDR is an intrusive test on an interface that is not establishing a link, do not run TDR on an
interface that is passing traffic.
When testing between two devices, do not run the test on both ends of the cable.
tdr-cable-test
ces Test the condition of copper cables on 100/1000 Base-T modules.
Syntax tdr-cable-test interface
Parameters
interface Enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port
information for the 100/1000 Ethernet interface.
Defaults No default behavior or setting
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Usage The interface must be enabled to run the test or an error message is generated:
Information
FTOS#tdr-cable-test gigabitethernet 5/2
%Error: Interface is disabled GI 5/2
The C-Series and S-Series do not generate log messages is generated when the link flaps down/up
during TDR tests. The E-series, does produce these log messages.
Related
show tdr Display the results of the TDR test.
Commands
626 | Interfaces
show tdr
ces Display the TDR test results.
Syntax show tdr interface
Parameters
interface Enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information for
the 100/1000 Ethernet interface.
Defaults No default behavior or settings
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 23-48. show tdr gigabitethernet Command Example

FTOS#show tdr gigabitethernet 10/47
Time since last test: 00:00:02
Pair A, Length: OK Status: Terminated
Pair B, Length: 92 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Short
Pair C, Length: 93 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Open
Pair D, Length: 0 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Impedance Mismatch
Table 23-14. TDR Test Status

Status Definition
TDR test is complete, no fault is detected on the
OK Status: Terminated
cable, and the test is terminated
A short is detected on the cable. The location, in
Length: 92 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Shorted this example 92 meters, of the short is accurate to
plus or minus one meter.
An opening is detected on the cable. The location,
Length: 93 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Open in this example 93 meters, of the open is accurate
to plus or minus one meter.
Status: Impedance Mismatch There is an impedance mismatch in the cables.
Usage If the TDR test has not been run, an error messages is generated:
Information
%Error: Please run the TDR test first
Related
tdr-cable-test Run the TDR test.
Commands
UDP Broadcast
The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcast feature is a software-based method to forward low
throughput (not to exceed 200 pps) IP/UDP broadcast traffic arriving on a physical or VLAN interface.
Interfaces | 627
This feature is available only on the E-Series platform, as noted by this symbol under each
command heading: e
This feature applies only to E-Series Layer 3 physical or VLAN interfaces.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is not supported with the UDP Broadcast feature.
If this feature is configured on an interface using ip udp-helper udp-port, then the command ip
directed-broadcast becomes ineffective on that interface.
The existing command show interface has been modified to display the configured broadcast
address.
The commands for UDP Broadcast are:
debug ip udp-helper
ip udp-broadcast-address
ip udp-helper udp-port
show ip udp-helper
debug ip udp-helper
e Enable UDP debug and display the debug information on a console.
Syntax debug ip udp-helper

To disable debug information, use the no debug ip udp-helper command.
Defaults Debug disabled
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 23-49. Debug Output Example

FTOS#debug ip udp-helper
UDP helper debugging is on
01:20:22: Pkt rcvd on Gi 5/0 with IP DA (0xffffffff) will be sent on Gi 5/1 Gi 5/2
Vlan 3
01:44:54: Pkt rcvd on Gi 7/0 is handed over for DHCP processing.
Related
ip udp-broadcast-address Configure a UDP IP address for broadcast
Commands
ip udp-helper udp-port Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface.
show ip udp-helper Display the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces.
628 | Interfaces
ip udp-broadcast-address
e Configure an IP UDP address for broadcast.
Syntax ip udp-broadcast-address address

To delete the configuration, use the no ip udp-broadcast-address address command.
Parameters
address Enter an IP broadcast address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Command Modes INTERFACE (config-if)
Usage When a UDP broadcast packet is flooded out of an interface, and the outgoing interface is configured
Information using this command, the outgoing packets IP destination address is replaced with the configured
broadcast address.
Related
debug ip udp-helper Enable debug and display the debug information on a console.
Commands
e Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP ports or a specified list of UDP
ports.
Syntax ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list]

To disable the UDP broadcast on a port, use the no ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list]
command.
Parameters
udp-port-list (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 comma separated UDP port numbers.
Note: If this option is not used, all UDP Ports are considered by default.
Command Modes INTERFACE (config-if)
Usage If the ip helper-address command and ip udp-helper udp-port command are configured, the
Information behavior is that the UDP broadcast traffic with port numbers 67/68 will be unicast relayed to the DHCP
server per the ip helper-address configuration. This will occur regardless if the ip udp-helper
udp-port command contains port numbers 67/68 or not.
If only the ip udp-helper udp-port command is configured, all the UDP broadcast traffic is flooded,
including ports 67/68 traffic if those ports are part of the udp-port-list.
Related
ip helper-address Configure the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP server.
Commands
Interfaces | 629
show ip udp-helper
e Display the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces.
Syntax show ip udp-helper
Defaults No default configuration or values
Command Modes EXEC
Example Figure 23-50. show ip udp-helper Command Example

FTOS#show ip udp-helper
--------------------------------------------------
Port UDP port list
--------------------------------------------------
Gi 10/0 656, 658
Gi 10/1 All
Related
Commands
ip udp-broadcast-address Configure a UDP IP address for broadcast.
Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP ports or
a specified list of UDP ports.
630 | Interfaces
24
IPv4 Routing
Overview
The characters that appear below command headings indicate support for the associated Dell Force10
platform, as follows:
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Commands
IPv4-related commands are described in this chapter. They are:
arp
arp learn-enable
arp retries
arp timeout
clear arp-cache
clear host
clear ip fib linecard
clear ip route
clear tcp statistics
debug arp
debug ip dhcp
debug ip icmp
debug ip packet
ip address
ip directed-broadcast
ip domain-list
ip domain-lookup
ip domain-name
ip fib download-igp-only
ip helper-address
ip helper-address hop-count disable
ip host
ip max-frag-count
ip mtu
IPv4 Routing | 631

ip name-server
ip proxy-arp
ip redirects
ip route
ip source-route
ip unreachables
ip vlan-flooding
load-balance (C-Series and S-Series)
load-balance (E-Series)
management route
show arp
show arp retries
show hosts
show ip cam linecard
show ip cam stack-unit
show ip fib linecard
show ip fib stack-unit
show ip flow
show ip interface
show ipv6 management-route
show ip protocols
show ip route
show ip route list
show ip traffic
show protocol-termination-table
show tcp statistics
arp
ces Use Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to associate an IP address with a MAC address in the switch.
Syntax arp vrf {vrf name} ip-address mac-address interface

To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command.
Parameters
vrf name E-Series Only: Enter the VRF process identifier to tie the static route to the VRF
process.
632 | IPv4 Routing

mac-address Enter a MAC address in nnnn.nnnn.nnnn format.
For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
Usage You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.0) when creating a static
Information ARP. Zero MAC addresses (00:00:00:00:00:00) are also invalid.
Related
clear arp-cache Clear dynamic ARP entries from the ARP table.
Commands
show arp Display ARP table.
arp learn-enable
ces Enable ARP learning via Gratuitous ARP.
Syntax arp learn-enable
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage In FTOS versions prior to 8.3.1.0, if a gratuitous ARP is received some time after an ARP request is
Information sent, only RP2 installs the ARP information. For example:
1 At time t=0 FTOS sends an ARP request for IP A.B.C.D

2 At time t=1 FTOS receives an ARP request for IP A.B.C.D
IPv4 Routing | 633

3 At time t=2 FTOS installs an ARP entry for A.B.C.D only on RP2.
Beginning with version 8.3.1.0, when a Gratuitous ARP is received, FTOS installs an ARP entry on all
3 CPUs.
arp retries
ces Set the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP
request.
Syntax arp retries number
Parameters
number Enter the number of retries.
Range: 5 to 20.
Default: 5
Defaults 5
Command
History
Usage Retries are 20 seconds apart.

Information
Related
show arp retries Display the configured number of ARP retries.
Commands
arp timeout
ces Set the time interval for an ARP entry to remain in the ARP cache.
Syntax arp timeout minutes

To return to the default value, enter no arp timeout.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of minutes.
Range: 0 to 35790.
Defaults 240 minutes (4 hours)
Command
History
634 | IPv4 Routing

Related
show interfaces Displays the ARP timeout value for all available interfaces.
Commands
clear arp-cache
ces Clear the dynamic ARP entries from a specific interface or optionally delete (no-refresh) ARP
entries from CAM.
Syntax clear arp-cache [vrf name | interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh]
Parameters
vrf name E-Series Only: Clear only the ARP cache entries tied to the VRF process.
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-1 and the port range is
0.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
ip ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip followed by the IP address of the ARP entry
you wish to clear.
no-refresh (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM.
Or use this option with interface or ip ip-address to specify which dynamic
ARP entries you want to delete.
Note: Transit traffic may not be forwarded during the period when deleted
ARP entries are resolved again and re-installed in CAM. Use this
option with extreme caution.
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Support 4094 VLANs on E-Series ExaScale (prior limit was 2094)
History
Version 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series
IPv4 Routing | 635

clear host
ces Remove one or all dynamically learnt host table entries.
Syntax clear host name
Parameters
name Enter the name of the host to delete.
Enter * to delete all host table entries.
Command
History
clear ip fib linecard

ces Clear all Forwarding Information Base (fib) entries in the specified line card (use this command with
caution, see Usage Information below)
Syntax clear ip fib linecard slot-number | vrf vrf instance
Parameters
slot-number Enter the number of the line card slot.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on E12001200i, 0 to 6 on E600/E600i; 0 to 5 on E300
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Clear only the FIB entries on the specified card
associated with the VRF instance.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced support on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Usage Use this command to clear Layer 3 CAM inconsistencies.

Information
Caution: Executing this command will cause traffic disruption.
Related
Commands show ip fib linecard Show FIB entries.
636 | IPv4 Routing

clear ip route
ces Clear one or all routes in the routing table.
Syntax clear ip route {* | ip-address mask | vrf vrf instance}
Parameters
* Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes.
ip-address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear
that IP address from the routing table.
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Clear only the routes tied to the VRF
instance.
Command
History
Related
ip route Assign an IP route to the switch.
Commands
show ip route View the routing table.
show ip route summary View a summary of the routing table.
clear tcp statistics

ces Clear TCP counters.
Syntax clear tcp statistics [all | cp | rp1 | rp2]
Note: These options are supported only on the E-Series.

Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to clear all TCP statistics maintained on all switch processors.
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to clear only statistics from the Control Processor.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to clear only the statistics from Route Processor 1.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to clear only the statistics from Route Processor 2.
Command
History
IPv4 Routing | 637

debug arp
ces View information on ARP transactions.
Syntax debug arp [interface] [count value]

To stop debugging ARP transactions, enter no debug arp.
Parameters
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet followed by
For the Management interface, enter the keyword managementethernet
number:
ExaScale.
information.
count value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count followed by the count value.
Range: 1 to 65534
Command
History
Version 6.3.1.0 Added the count option
Usage Use the count option to stop packets from flooding the user terminal when debugging is turned on.
Information
debug ip dhcp
ces Enable debug information for DHCP relay transactions and display the information on the console.
Syntax debug ip dhcp

To disable debug, use the no debug ip dhcp command.
Defaults Debug disabled
638 | IPv4 Routing

Command
History
Version 6.4.10 Introduced on E-Series
Example Figure 24-1. debug ip dhcp Command Example
FTOS#debug ip dhcp
00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.17 BOOTP
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xbf05140f, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xbf05140f, secs = 5, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REPLY (Unicast) received at interface 14.4.4.1 BOOTP Reply,
hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 113.3.3.17
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY: Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 113.3.3.254
Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REPLY (Unicast) received at interface 14.4.4.1 BOOTP Reply,
hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 113.3.3.17
00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY: Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 113.3.3.254
FTOS#
Related
Specify the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP
Commands ip helper-address
server request.
ip helper-address hop-count disable Disable hop-count increment for DHCP relay agent.
debug ip icmp
ces View information on the Internal Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
Syntax debug ip icmp [interface] [count value]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip icmp command.
IPv4 Routing | 639

Parameters
followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0 and the port range is 0-1.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
For VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Range: 1 to 65534
Default: Infinity
Command
History
Example Figure 24-2. debug ip icmp Command Example (Partial)
ICMP: echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40

ICMP: src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo reply
ICMP: echo request sent to dst 40.40.40.40
ICMP: echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40
ICMP: echo request sent to dst 40.40.40.40
Information
debug ip packet
ces View a log of IP packets sent and received.
Syntax debug ip packet [access-group name] [count value] [interface]

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip packet [access-group name] [count value]
[interface] command.
640 | IPv4 Routing

Parameters
access-group name Enter the keyword access-group followed by the access list name
(maximum 16 characters) to limit the debug output based on the defined rules
in the ACL.
Range: 1 to 65534
Default: Infinity
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
managementethernet followed by the slot/port information. The
slot range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
4094.
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Added the access-group option
IPv4 Routing | 641

Example Figure 24-3. debug ip packet Command Example (Partial)
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), len 54, sending

TCP src=23, dst=40869, seq=2112994894, ack=606901739, win=8191 ACK PUSH
IP: s=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), d=10.1.2.62, len 40, rcvd
TCP src=0, dst=0, seq=0, ack=0, win=0
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), len 226, sending
TCP src=23, dst=40869, seq=2112994896, ack=606901739, win=8192 ACK PUSH
IP: s=10.1.2.216 (Ma 0/0), d=10.1.2.255, len 78, rcvd
UDP src=0, dst=0
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.3 (Ma 0/0), len 1500, sending fragment
IP Fragment, Ident = 4741, fragment offset = 0
ICMP type=0, code=0
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.3 (Ma 0/0), len 1500, sending fragment
IP Fragment, Ident = 4741, fragment offset = 1480
IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.5 (Gi 4/11), len 64, sending broad/multicast
proto=89
IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.6 (Gi 4/11), len 28, sending broad/multicast
proto=2
IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.30, len 100, unroutable
ICMP type=8, code=0
IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.30, len 100, unroutable
ICMP type=8, code=0
Table 24-1. debug ip packet Command Example Fields
Field Description
s= Lists the source address of the packet and the name of the interface (in
parentheses) that received the packet.
d= Lists the destination address of the packet and the name of the interface
(in parentheses) through which the packet is being sent out on the
network.
len Displays the packets length.
sending The last part of each line lists the status of the packet.
rcvd
fragment
sending broad/multicast proto
unroutable
TCP src= Displays the source and destination ports, the sequence number, the
acknowledgement number, and the window size of the packets in that
TCP packets.
UDP src= Displays the source and destination ports for the UDP packets.
ICMP type= Displays the ICMP type and code.
IP Fragment States that it is a fragment and displays the unique number identifying the
fragment (Ident) and the offset (in 8-byte units) of this fragment
(fragment offset) from the beginning of original datagram.
Information
The access-group option supports only the equal to (eq) operator in TCP ACL rules. Port operators
not equal to (neq), greater than (gt), less than (lt), or range are not supported in access-group
option (see Figure 24-4). ARP packets (arp) and Ether-type (ether-type) are also not supported in
access-group option. The entire rule is skipped to compose the filter.
The access-group option pertains to:
IP Protocol Number 0 to 255
642 | IPv4 Routing

Internet Control Message Protocol* icmp
* but not the ICMP message type (0-255)
Any Internet Protocol ip
Transmission Control Protocol* tcp
* but not on the rst, syn, or urg bit
User Datagram Protocol udp
In the case of ambiguous access control list rules, the debug ip packet access-control command will be
disabled. A message appears identifying the error (see Figure 24-4).
Example Figure 24-4. debug ip packet access-group Command Errors

FTOS#debug ip packet access-group test
%Error: port operator GT not supported in access-list debug
%Error: port operator LT not supported in access-list debug
%Error: port operator RANGE not supported in access-list debug
%Error: port operator NEQ not supported in access-list debug
FTOS#00:10:45: %RPM0-P:CP
%IPMGR-3-DEBUG_IP_PACKET_ACL_AMBIGUOUS_EXP: Ambiguous rules not
supported in access-list debug, access-list debugging is turned off
FTOS#
ip address
ces Assign a primary and secondary IP address to the interface.
Syntax ip address ip-address mask [secondary]

To delete an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address [ip-address] command.
Parameters
mask Enter the mask of the IP address in slash prefix format (for example, /24).
secondary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword secondary to designate the IP address as the
secondary address.
Command
History
Usage You must be in the INTERFACE mode before you add an IP address to an interface. Assign an IP
Information address to an interface prior to entering the ROUTER OSPF mode.
IPv4 Routing | 643

ip directed-broadcast
ces Enables the interface to receive directed broadcast packets.
Syntax ip directed-broadcast
To disable the interface from receiving directed broadcast packets, enter no ip directed-broadcast.
Defaults Disabled (that is, the interface does not receive directed broadcast packets)
Command
History
ip domain-list
ces Configure names to complete unqualified host names.
Syntax ip domain-list name

To remove the name, use the no ip domain-list name command.
Parameters
name Enter a domain name to be used to complete unqualified names (that is, incomplete
domain names that cannot be resolved).
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage Configure the ip domain-list command up to 6 times to configure a list of possible domain names.
Information
If both the ip domain-name and ip domain-list commands are configured, the software will try to
resolve the name using the ip domain-name command. If the name is not resolved, the software goes
through the list of names configured with the ip domain-list command to find a match.
Use the following steps to enable dynamic resolution of hosts:

specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command.
enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command.
To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. To view DNS related configuration, use the
show running-config resolve command.
Related
ip domain-name Specify a DNS server.
Commands
644 | IPv4 Routing

ip domain-lookup
ces Enable dynamic host-name to address resolution (that is, DNS).
Syntax ip domain-lookup
To disable DNS lookup, use the no ip domain-lookup.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage To fully enable DNS, also specify one or more domain name servers with the ip name-server
FTOS does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN. DNS queries are sent out all other
interfaces, including the Management port.
To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.
Related
ip name-server Specify a DNS server.
Commands
show hosts View current bindings.
ip domain-name
ces Configure one domain name for the switch.
Syntax ip domain-name name

To remove the domain name, enter no ip domain-name.
Parameters
name Enter one domain name to be used to complete unqualified names (that is,
incomplete domain names that cannot be resolved).
Command
History
Usage You can only configure one domain name with the ip domain-name command. To configure more than
Information one domain name, configure the ip domain-list command up to 6 times.
Use the following steps to enable dynamic resolution of hosts:
specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command.
IPv4 Routing | 645

enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command.
To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.
Related
ip domain-list Configure additional names.
Commands
ip fib download-igp-only
e Configure the E-Series to download only IGP routes (for example, OSPF) on to line cards. When the
command is configured or removed, it clears the routing table (similar to clear ip route command) and
only IGP routes populate the table.
Syntax ip fib download-igp-only [small-fib]

To return to default setting, use the no ip fib download-igp-only [small-fib] command.
Parameters
small-fib (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword small-fib to download a smaller FIB table. This option
is useful on line cards with a limited FIB size.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
ip helper-address
ces Specify the address of a DHCP server so that DHCP broadcast messages can be forwarded when the
DHCP server is not on the same subnet as the client.
Syntax ip helper-address ip-address | default-vrf

To remove a DHCP server address, enter no ip helper-address.
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
default-vrf (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter default-vrf for the DHCP server VRF is using.
Command
History
646 | IPv4 Routing

Usage You can add multiple DHCP servers by entering the ip helper-address command multiple times. If
Information multiple servers are defined, an incoming request is sent simultaneously to all configured servers and
the reply is forwarded to the DHCP client.
FTOS uses standard DHCP ports, that is UDP ports 67 (server) and 68 (client) for DHCP relay
services. It listens on port 67 and if it receives a broadcast, the software converts it to unicast, and
forwards to it to the DHCP-server with source port=68 and destination port=67.
The server replies with source port=67, destination port=67 and FTOS forwards to the client with
source port=67, destination port=68.
ip helper-address hop-count disable

ces Disable the hop-count increment for the DHCP relay agent.
Syntax ip helper-address hop-count disable

To reenable the hop-count increment, use the no ip helper-address hop-count disable
command.
Defaults Enabled; the hops field in the DHCP message header is incremented by default
Command
History
Usage This command disables the incrementing of the hops field when boot requests are relayed to a DHCP
Information server through FTOS. If the incoming boot request already has a non-zero hops field, the message will
be relayed with the same value for hops. However, the message will be discarded if the hops field
exceeds 16, to comply with the relay agent behavior specified in RFC 1542.
Related
ip helper-address Specify the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP server requests.
Commands
show running-config Display the current configuration and changes from default values.
ip host
ces Assign a name and IP address to be used by the host-to-IP address mapping table.
Syntax ip host name ip-address

To remove an IP host, use the no ip host name [ip-address] command.
IPv4 Routing | 647

Parameters
name Enter a text string to associate with one IP address.

ip-address Enter an IP address, in dotted decimal format, to be mapped to the name.
Command
History
ip max-frag-count
ces Set the maximum number of fragments allowed in one packet for packet re-assembly.
Syntax ip max-frag-count count

To place no limit on the number of fragments allowed, enter no ip max-frag-count.
Parameters
count Enter a number for the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly.
Range: 2 to 256
Defaults No limit is set on number of fragments allowed.
Command
History
Usage To avoid Denial of Service (DOS) attacks, keep the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly low.
Information
ip mtu
e Set the IP MTU (frame size) of the packet transmitted by the RPM for the line card interface. If the
packet must be fragmented, FTOS sets the size of the fragmented packets to the size specified in this
command.
Syntax ip mtu value

To return to the default IP MTU value, enter no ip mtu.
Parameters
value Enter the maximum MTU size if the IP packet is fragmented.
Default: 1500 bytes
Range: 576 to 9234
648 | IPv4 Routing

Defaults 1500 bytes
Command Modes INTERFACE (Gigabit Ethernet and 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces)
Command
History
Usage When you enter no mtu command, FTOS reduces the ip mtu value to 1536 bytes. To return the IP
Information MTU value to the default, enter no ip mtu.
You must compensate for Layer 2 header when configuring link MTU on an Ethernet interface or
FTOS may not fragment packets. If the packet includes a Layer 2 header, the difference between the
link MTU and IP MTU (ip mtu command) must be enough bytes to include for the Layer 2 header.
Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for Port Channels and VLANs are as follows.
Port Channels:
The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU
Example: if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the Port Channels MTU
VLANs:
All members of a VLAN must have same IP MTU value.

Members can have different Link MTU values. Tagged members must have a link MTU 4 bytes
higher than untagged members to account for the packet tag.
The VLAN link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values
configured on the VLAN members.
Example: The VLAN contains tagged members with Link MTU of 1522 and IP MTU of 1500 and
untagged members with Link MTU of 1518 and IP MTU of 1500. The VLANs Link MTU cannot be
higher than 1518 bytes and its IP MTU cannot be higher than 1500 bytes.
Table 24-2. Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU
Layer 2 Overhead Difference between Link MTU and IP MTU

Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes
VLAN Tag 22 bytes
Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes
Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes
Related
mtu Set the link MTU for an Ethernet interface.
Commands
IPv4 Routing | 649

ip name-server
ces Enter up to 6 IPv4 addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order
of their use.
Syntax ip name-server ipv4-address [ipv4-address2...ipv4-address6]

To remove a name server, use the no ip name-server ip-address command.
Parameters
ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address, in dotted decimal format, of the name server to be used.
ipv4-address2.. (OPTIONAL) Enter up five more IPv4 addresses, in dotted decimal format, of name
. ipv4-address6 servers to be used.
Separate the addresses with a space.
Defaults No name servers are configured.
Command
History
Usage FTOS does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN. DNS queries are sent out all other
Information interfaces, including the Management port.
You can separately configure both IPv4 and IPv6 domain name servers.
Related
ipv6 name-server on Configure an IPv6 name server.
Commands
page 717
ip proxy-arp
ces Enable Proxy ARP on an interface.
Syntax ip proxy-arp
To disable Proxy ARP, enter no ip proxy-arp.
Defaults Enabled.
Command
History
Related
show ip interface Displays the interface routing status and configuration.
Commands
650 | IPv4 Routing

ip redirects
e Enable the interface to send ICMP redirect messages.
Syntax ip redirects
To return to default, enter no ip redirects.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage This command is available for physical interfaces and port-channel interfaces on the E-Series.
Information
Note: This command is not supported on default VLAN (default vlan-id command).
ip route
ces Assign a static route to the switch.
Syntax ip route vrf {vrf instance} destination mask {ip-address | interface [ip-address]} [distance]
[permanent] [tag tag-value]
To delete a specific static route, use the no ip route destination mask {address | interface
[ip-address]} command.
To delete all routes matching a certain route, use the no ip route destination mask command.
Parameters
vrf name (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF Instances
name to tie the static route to the VRF instance.
destination Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the destination device.
mask Enter the mask in slash prefix formation (/x) of the destination devices IP address.
ip-address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the forwarding router.
IPv4 Routing | 651


For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from zero (0) to 16383.
For the null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
number:
ExaScale.
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the sonet followed
distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the route.
Range: 1 to 255
permanent (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permanent to specify the route is not removed,
even if the interface assigned to that route goes down. The route must be up initially to
install it in the routing table.
If you disable the interface with an IP address associated with the keyword
permanent, the route disappears from the routing table.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a number to assign to the route.
Range: 1 to 4294967295
Command
History
Usage Using the following example of a static route:

Information ip route 33.33.33.0 /24 gigabitethernet 0/0 172.31.5.43
The software installs a next hop that is not on the directly connected subnet but which recursively
resolves to a next hop on the interfaces configured subnet. In the example, if gig 0/0 has ip
address on subnet 2.2.2.0 and if 172.31.5.43 recursively resolves to 2.2.2.0, FTOS installs the
static route.
When the interface goes down, FTOS withdraws the route.
When the interface comes up, FTOS re-installs the route.
When recursive resolution is broken, FTOS withdraws the route.
When recursive resolution is satisfied, FTOS re-installs the route.
652 | IPv4 Routing

Related
show ip route View the switch routing table.
Commands
ip source-route
ces Enable FTOS to forward IP packets with source route information in the header.
Syntax ip source-route
To drop packets with source route information, enter no ip route-source.
Defaults Enabled.
Command
History
ip unreachables
ces Enable the generation of Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages.
Syntax ip unreachables
To disable the generation of ICMP messages, enter no ip unreachables.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
ip vlan-flooding
e Enable unicast data traffic flooding on VLAN member ports.
Syntax ip vlan-flooding
To disable, use the no ip vlan-flooding command.
Defaults disabled
IPv4 Routing | 653

Command

History
Usage By default this command is disabled. When enabled, all the Layer 3 unicast routed data traffic going
Information through a VLAN member port is flooded across all the member ports of that VLAN. There might be
some ARP table entries which are resolved through ARP packets which had Ethernet MAC SA
different from MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only
for those packets which use these ARP entries.
load-balance (C-Series and S-Series)

cs By default for C-Series and S-Series, FTOS uses an IP 4-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, Source Port, and
Destination Port) to distribute IP traffic over members of a Port Channel as well as equal-cost paths. To
designate another method to balance traffic over Port Channel members, use the load-balance
command.
Syntax load-balance {ip-selection [dest-ip | source-ip]} | {mac [dest-mac | source-dest-mac |

source-mac]} | {tcp-udp [enable]}
To return to the default setting (IP 4-tuple), use the no version of the command.
Parameters
ip-selection {dest-ip | Enter the keywords to distribute IP traffic based on the following criteria:
source-ip} dest-ipUses destination IP address and destination port fields to hash.
The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the
packet should be forwarded to.
source-ipUses source IP address and source port fields to hash. The
hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the
mac {dest-mac | Enter the keywords to distribute MAC traffic based on the following criteria:
source-dest-mac | dest-macUses the destination MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype,
source-mac} source module ID and source port ID fields to hash. The hashing
mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should
be forwarded to.
source-dest-macUses the destination and source MAC address,
VLAN, Ethertype, source module ID and source port ID fields to hash.
The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the
source-macUses the source MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype, source
module ID and source port ID fields to hash. The hashing mechanism
returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should be
forwarded to.
tcp-udp enable Enter the keywords to distribute traffic based on the following:
enableTakes the TCP/UDP source and destination ports into
consideration when doing hash computations. (By default, this is
enabled)
Defaults IP 4-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, Source Port, Destination Port)
Command
History
654 | IPv4 Routing

Usage By default, FTOS distributes incoming traffic based on a hash algorithm using the following criteria:
Information
IP source address
IP destination address
TCP/UDP source port
TCP/UDP destination port
Related
Commands hash-algorithm ecmp
load-balance (E-Series)
e By default, for E-Series chassis, FTOS uses an IP 5-tuple to distribute IP traffic over members of a Port
Channel as well as equal cost paths. To designate another method to balance traffic over Port Channel
members, use the load-balance command.
Syntax load-balance [ip-selection 3-tuple | ip-selection packet-based] [mac]

To return to the default setting (IP 5-tuple), use one of the following commands:
no load-balance ip-selection 3-tuple
no load-balance ip-selection packet-based
no load-balance mac
Parameters
ip-selection 3-tuple Enter the keywords ip-selection 3-tuple to distribute IP traffic based
on the following criteria:
IP source address
IP Protocol type
Note: For IPV6, only the first 32 bits (LSB) of IP SA and IP DA are
used for hash generation.
ip-selection packet-based Enter the keywords ip-selection packet-based to distribute IPV4
traffic based on the IP Identification field in the IPV4 header.
This option does not affect IPV6 traffic; that is, IPV6 traffic is not
distributed when this command is executed.
Note: Hash-based load-balancing on MPLS does not work when
packet-based hashing (load-balance ip-selection
packet-based) is enabled.
mac Enter the keyword mac to distribute traffic based on the following:
MAC source address, and
MAC destination address.
Defaults IP 5-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, IP Protocol Type, Source Port and Destination Port)
Command
History
Usage By default, FTOS distributes incoming traffic based on a hash algorithm using the following criteria:
Information
IPv4 Routing | 655

IP source address
IP Protocol type
TCP/UDP source port
TCP/UDP destination port
Note: For IPV6, only the first 32 bits (LSB) of IP Source Address and IP Destination
Address are used for hash generation.
The table below lists the load balance command options and how the command combinations effect the
distribution of traffic.
Table 24-3. Configurations of the load-balance Command
Routed IP Traffic Switched Non-IP

Configuration Switched IP Traffic
(IPV4 Only) Traffic
Default (IP 5-tuple) IP 5-tuple IP 5-tuple MAC based
ip-selection 3-tuple IP 3-tuple IP 3-tuple MAC based
mac MAC based IP 5-tuple MAC based
ip-selection 3-tuple and mac MAC based IP 3-tuple MAC based
Packet based: IPV4
ip-selection packet-based Packet based: IPV4 MAC based
No distribution: IPV6
ip-selection packet-based and mac MAC based Packet based: IPV4 MAC based
Related
ip address Change the algorithm used to distribute traffic on an E-Series chassis.
Commands
management route
ce Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router.
Syntax management route {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}/mask {forwarding-router-address |

managementethernet}
Parameters
{ipv4-address | ipv6-address}/ Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X),
mask followed by the prefix-length for the IP address of the management
interface.
forwarding-router-address Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address of a forwarding router.
managementethernet Enter the keyword managementethernet for the
Management interface on the Primary RPM.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 management routes.
History
656 | IPv4 Routing

Usage When a static route (or a protocol route) overlaps with Management static route, the static route (or a
Information protocol route) is preferred over the Management Static route. Also, Management static routes and the
Management Connected prefix are not reflected in the hardware routing tables. Separate routing tables
are maintained for IPv4 and IPv6 management routes. This command manages both tables.
Related
interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or
Commands
Standby RPM).
speed (Management interface) Set the speed for the Management interface.
show arp
ces Display the ARP table.
Syntax show arp [vrf vrf name] [interface interface | ip ip-address [mask] | macaddress
mac-address [mac-address mask]] [cpu {cp | rp1 | rp2}] [static | dynamic] [summary]
Parameters
vrf name E-Series Only: Show only the ARP cache entries tied to the VRF process.
cpu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cpu with one of the following keywords to
view ARP entries on that CPU:
cp - view ARP entries on the control processer.
rp1 - view ARP entries on Routing Processor 1.
rp2 - view ARP entries on Routing Processor 2.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
For the Management interface, enter the keyword
managementethernet followed by the slot/port information.
by a number:
for ExaScale.
information.
ip ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip followed by an IP address in the dotted
decimal format. Enter the optional IP address mask in the slash prefix format (/
x).
macaddress (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword macaddress followed by a MAC address in
mac-address mask nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Enter the optional MAC address mask in
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format also.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view entries entered manually.
IPv4 Routing | 657

dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to view dynamic entries.

summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of ARP
entries.
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Augmented to display local ARP entries learned from private VLANs (PVLANs)
Usage The following figure shows two VLANs that are associated with a private VLAN (PVLAN) (see
Information Chapter 45, Private VLAN (PVLAN)), a feature added for C-Series and S-Series in FTOS
7.8.1.0.
Example Figure 24-5. show arp Command Example (Partial)

FTOS>show arp
Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internet 192.2.1.254 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.253 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.252 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.251 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.250 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.251 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.250 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.249 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.248 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.247 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.246 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Internet 192.2.1.245 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi 9/13 - CP
Figure 24-6. show arp Command Example with Private VLAN data
FTOS#show arp

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internet 5.5.5.1 - 00:01:e8:43:96:5e - Vl 10 pv 200 CP
Internet 5.5.5.10 - 00:01:e8:44:99:55 - Vl 10 CP
Internet 10.1.2.4 1 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 Ma 0/0 - CP
Line 1 shows community VLAN 200 (in primary VLAN 10) in
a PVLAN.
Line 2 shows primary VLAN 10.
658 | IPv4 Routing

Figure 24-7. show arp cpu cp Command Example
FTOS#sho arp cpu cp

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internet 10.1.2.206 0 00:a0:80:00:15:b8 Ma 0/0 - CP
Internet 182.16.1.20 0 00:30:19:24:2d:70 Gi 8/0 - CP
Internet 100.10.10.10 0 00:30:19:4f:d3:80 Gi 8/12 - CP
Internet 10.1.2.209 12 00:a0:80:00:12:6c Ma 0/0 - CP
FTOS#
Table 24-4. show arp Command Example Fields
Row Heading Description

Protocol Displays the protocol type.
Address Displays the IP address of the ARP entry.
Age(min) Displays the age in minutes of the ARP entry.
Hardware Address Displays the MAC address associated with the ARP entry.
Interface Displays the first two letters of the interfaces type and the slot/port
associated with the ARP entry.
VLAN Displays the VLAN ID, if any, associated with the ARP entry.
CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on.
Figure 24-8. show arp summary Command Example

FTOS# show arp summary
Total Entries Static Entries Dynamic Entries CPU

------------------------------------------------------
83 0 83 CP
FTOS
Table 24-5. show arp summary Command Example Fields

Total Entries Lists the total number of ARP entries in the ARP table.
Static Entries Lists the total number of configured or static ARP entries.
Dynamic Entries Lists the total number of learned or dynamic ARP entries.
CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on.
Related
ip local-proxy-arp Enable/disable Layer 3 communication in secondary VLANs.
Commands
switchport mode Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.
private-vlan
show arp retries

ces Display the configured number of ARP retries.
IPv4 Routing | 659

Syntax show arp retries
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
arp retries Set the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply
Commands
in response to an ARP request.
show hosts
ces View the host table and DNS configuration.
Syntax show hosts
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 24-9. show hosts Command Example

FTOS#show hosts
Default domain is not set
Name/address lookup uses static mappings
Name servers are not set
Host Flags TTL Type Address
-------- ----- ---- ---- -------
ks (perm, OK) - IP 2.2.2.2
4200-1 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.69.2
1230-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.99.2
ZZr (perm, OK) - IP 192.71.18.2
Z10-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.71.23.1
FTOS#
Table 24-6. show hosts Command Example Fields
Field Description
Default domain... Displays the domain name (if configured).
Name/address lookup... States if DNS is enabled on the system.
If DNS is enabled, the Name/Address lookup is domain service.
If DNS is not enabled, the Name/Address lookup is static mapping.
Name servers are... Lists the name servers, if configured.
Host Displays the host name assigned to the IP address.
660 | IPv4 Routing

Table 24-6. show hosts Command Example Fields (continued)
Field Description
Flags Classifies the entry as one of the following:
perm - the entry was manually configured and will not time out
temp - the entry was learned and will time out after 72 hours of inactivity.
Also included in the flag is an indication of the validity of the route:
ok - the entry is valid.
ex - the entry expired.
?? - the entry is suspect.
TTL Displays the amount of time until the entry ages out of the cache. For dynamically
learnt entries only.
Type Displays IP as the type of entry.
Address Displays the IP address(es) assigned to the host.
Related
traceroute View DNS resolution
Commands
ip host Configure a host.
show ip cam linecard

ce View CAM entries for a port pipe on a line card.
Syntax show ip cam linecard number port-set pipe-number [ip-address mask [longer-prefixes] |
index index-number | summary | vrf vrf instance]
Parameters
number Enter the number of the line card.
Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
pipe-number Enter the number of the line cards port-pipe.
Range: 0 to 1
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route
[longer-prefix] only.
Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view routes with a common prefix.
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword index followed by the CAM index number.
index-number Range: depends on CAM size
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing route prefixes
and the total number of routes that can be entered into the CAM.
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf following by the VRF Instance
name to show CAM information as it applies to that VRF instance.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.1.1.2 E-Series ExaScale E600i supported
History
IPv4 Routing | 661


Example Figure 24-10. show ip cam Command Example on E-Series

FTOS#show ip cam linecard 13 port-set 0
Index Destination EC CG V C Next-Hop VId Mac-Addr Port

------ --------------- -- -- - - --------------- ---- ---------------- -------
3276 6.6.6.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3277 5.5.5.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3278 4.4.4.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3279 3.3.3.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
3280 2.2.2.2 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c1 CP
11144 6.6.6.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 6 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11145 5.5.5.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 5 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11146 4.4.4.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 4 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11147 3.3.3.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 3 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
11148 2.2.2.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 2 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
65535 0.0.0.0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 17c5 RP2
FTOS#
Table 24-7. show ip cam Command Example Fields
Field Description
Index Displays the CAM index number of the entry.
Destination Displays the destination route of the index.
EC Displays the number of equal cost multipaths (ECMP) available for the default route for
non-Jumbo line cards.
Displays 0,1 when ECMP is more than 8, for Jumbo line cards.
CG Displays 0.
V Displays a 1 if the entry is valid and a 0 if the entry is for a line card with Catalog number
beginning with LC-EF.
C Displays the CPU bit.
1 indicates that a packet hitting this entry is forwarded to the CP or RP2, depending on
Egress port.
Next-Hop Displays the next hop IP address of the entry.
VId Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN.
Mac Addr Displays the next-hop routers MAC address.
Port Displays the egress interface. Use the second half of the entry to determine the interface.
For example, in the entry 17cl CP, the CP is the pertinent portion.
CP = control processor
RP2 = route processor 2
Gi = Gigabit Ethernet interface
So = SONET interface
Te = 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface
662 | IPv4 Routing

Example Figure 24-11. show ip cam summary Command Example
FTOS#show ip cam linecard 4 port-set 0 summary
Total Number of Routes in the CAM is 13
Total Number of Routes which can be entered in CAM is 131072
Prefix Len Current Use Initial Sz

---------- ----------- ----------
32 7 37994
31 0 1312
30 0 3932
29 0 1312
28 0 1312
27 0 1312
26 0 1312
25 0 1312
24 6 40610
23 0 3932
22 0 2622
21 0 2622
20 0 2622
19 0 2622
18 0 1312
17 0 1312
16 0 3932
15 0 1312
14 0 1312
13 0 1312
12 0 1312
11 0 1312
10 0 1312
9 0 1312
8 0 1312
7 0 1312
6 0 1312
5 0 1312
4 0 1312
3 0 1312
2 0 1312
1 0 1312
0 0 8
FTOS#
Table 24-8. show ip cam summary Command Example Fields
Field Description
Prefix Length Displays the prefix-length or mask for the IP address configured on the linecard 0 port pipe
0.
Current Use Displays the number of routes currently configured for the corresponding prefix or mask on
the linecard 0 port pipe 0.
Initial Size Displays the CAM size allocated by FTOS for the corresponding mask. The CAM size is
adjusted by FTOS if the number of routes for the mask exceeds the initial allocation.
show ip cam stack-unit

s Display content-addressable memory (CAM) entries for an S-Series switch.
Syntax show ip cam stack-unit 0-7 port-set pipe-number [ip-address mask [longer-prefixes] |
summary]
Parameters
0-7 Enter the stack-unit ID, from 0 to 7.
pipe-number Enter the number of the Port-Pipe number.
S50n, S50V range: 0 to 1; S25N, S25P, S25V range: 0 to 0
IPv4 Routing | 663

ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route
[longer-prefix] only.
Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view routes with a common prefix.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing route prefixes
and the total number routes which can be entered in to CAM.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added support for up to seven stack members.
History
Example Figure 24-12. show ip cam stack-unit Command Example

FTOS#show ip cam stack-unit 0 port-set 0 10.10.10.10/32 longer-prefixes
Destination EC CG V C VId Mac-Addr Port
----------------- -- -- - - ----- ----------------- -------------

10.10.10.10 0 0 1 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 3f01 CP
FTOS#
Table 24-9. show ip cam Command Example Fields
Field Description
Destination Displays the destination route of the index.
EC Displays the number of equal cost multipaths (ECMP) available for the default route for
non-Jumbo line cards.
Displays 0,1 when ECMP is more than 8, for Jumbo line cards.
CG Displays 0.
V Displays a 1 if the entry is valid and a 0 otherwise.
C Displays the CPU bit.
1 indicates that a packet hitting this entry is forwarded to the control processor, depending
on Egress port.
V Id Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN.
Mac Addr Displays the next-hop routers MAC address.
Port Displays the egress interface. Use the second half of the entry to determine the interface.
For example, in the entry 17cl CP, the CP is the pertinent portion.
CP = control processor
Gi = Gigabit Ethernet interface
Te = 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface
show ip fib linecard

ce View all Forwarding Information Base (FIB) entries.
Syntax show ip fib linecard slot-number [vrf vrf instance | ip-address/prefix-list | summary]
664 | IPv4 Routing

Parameters
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF INstance
name to show the FIB cache entries tied to that VRF instance.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, 0 to 5 on a E300
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the network destination to view only
information on that destination.
You must enter the IP address is dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). You must enter
the mask in slash prefix format (/X).
common prefix.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view the total number of prefixes in
the FIB.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 24-13. show ip fib linecard Command Example
FTOS>show ip fib linecard 12
Destination Gateway First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId Index EC

-------------------- -------------------------- -------------- ---------------- ------- -------------
3.0.0.0/8 via 100.10.10.10, So 2/8 100.10.10.10 00:01:e8:00:03:ff So 2/8 0 60260 0
3.0.0.0/8 via 101.10.10.10, So 2/9
100.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/8 0.0.0.0 00:01:e8:00:03:ff So 2/8 0 11144 0
100.10.10.1/32 via 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 0 3276 0
100.10.10.10/32 via 100.10.10.10, So 2/8 100.10.10.10 00:01:e8:00:03:ff So 2/8 0 0 0
101.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/9 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 RP2 0 11145 0
101.10.10.1/32 via 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 0 3277 0
101.10.10.10/32 via 101.10.10.10, So 2/9 101.10.10.10 00:01:e8:01:62:32 So 2/9 0 1 0
FTOS>
Table 24-10. show ip fib linecard Command Example Fields
Field Description
Destination Lists the destination IP address.
Gateway Displays either the word direct and an interface for a directly
connected route or the remote IP address to be used to forward the traffic.
First-Hop Displays the first hop IP address.
Mac-Addr Displays the MAC address.
Port Displays the egress-port information.
VId Displays the VLAN ID. If no VLAN is assigned, zero (0) is listed.
Index Displays the internal interface number.
EC Displays the number of ECMP paths.
IPv4 Routing | 665

Related
clear ip fib linecard Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.

Commands
show ip fib stack-unit

s View all Forwarding Information Base (FIB) entries.
Syntax show ip fib stack-unit 0-7 [ip-address [mask] [longer-prefixes] | summary]
Parameters
0-7 Enter the S-Series stack unit ID, from 0 to 7.
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the network destination to view only
information on that destination.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). You must enter the mask in
slash prefix format (/X).
common prefix.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view the total number of prefixes in
the FIB.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Modified: Added support for up to seven stack members.
History
Example Figure 24-14. show ip fib linecard Command Example
FTOS#show ip fib stack-unit 0
Destination Gateway First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC
------------------ --------------------------- ----------------- ------------------- -------- ----- --

10.10.10.10/32 Direct, Nu 0 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 BLK HOLE 0 0
FTOS>
Table 24-11. show ip fib linecard Command Example Fields
Field Description
Destination Lists the destination IP address.
Gateway Displays either the word Direct and an interface for a directly connected route or the
remote IP address to be used to forward the traffic.
First-Hop Displays the first hop IP address.
Mac-Addr Displays the MAC address.
Port Displays the egress-port information.
VId Displays the VLAN ID. If no VLAN is assigned, zero (0) is listed.
EC Displays the number of ECMP paths.
666 | IPv4 Routing

Related
clear ip fib linecard Clear FIB entries on a specified line card.
Commands
show ip flow
ces Show how a Layer 3 packet is forwarded when it arrives at a particular interface.
Syntax show ip flow interface [vrf vrf instance] interface {source-ip address destination-ip
address} {protocol number [tcp | udp] | icmp} {src-port number destination-port number}
Parameters
vrf instance E-Series Only: Show only the L3 flow as they apply to that VRF process.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by of the following interface
keywords.
port information.
(OPTIONAL) Enter an in or out parameter in conjunction with the
optional interface:
source-ip address Enter the keyword source-ip followed by the IP source address in IP
address format.
destination-ip address Enter the keyword destination-ip followed by the IP destination address
in IP address format.
protocol number [tcp | E-Series only: Enter the keyword protocol followed by one of the protocol
udp] | icmp type
keywords: tcp, udp, icmp or protocol number
src-port number Enter the keyword src-port followed by the source port number.
destination-port Enter the keyword destination-port followed by the destination port
number number.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Usage This command provides egress port information for a given IP flow. This is useful in identifying which
Information interface the packet will follow in the case of Port-channel and Equal Cost Multi Paths. Use this
command for routed packed only. For switched packets use the show port-channel-flow command
show ip flow does not compute the egress port information when load-balance mac hashing is
also configured due to insufficient information (the egress MAC is not available).
IPv4 Routing | 667

S-Series produces the following error message:
%Error: Unable to read IP route table
C-Series produces the message:
%Error: FIB cannot compute the egress port with the current trunk hash
setting.
Example Figure 24-15. Command Example show ip flow on E-Series
FTOS#show ip flow interface Gi 1/8 189.1.1.1 63.0.0.1 protocol tcp source-port 7898 destination-port 8976
flow: 189.1.1.1 63.0.0.1 protocol 6 7868 8976

Ingress interface: Gi 1/20
Egress interface: Gi 1/14 to 1.7.1.2[CAM hit 103710] unfragmented packet
Gi 1/10 to 1.2.1.2[CAM hit 103710] fragmented packet
show ip interface
ces View IP-related information on all interfaces.
Syntax show ip interface [interface | brief | linecard slot-number] [configuration]
Parameter
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword Loopback followed by a number
from 0 to 16383.
followed by zero (0).
For the Null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
number:
ExaScale.
information.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a brief summary of the interfaces and
whether an IP address is assigned.
668 | IPv4 Routing

linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the number of the line card
slot-number slot.
C-Series Range: 0-7
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300
Note: This keyword is not available on the S-Series.
configuration (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configuration to display the physical interfaces
with non-default configurations only.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Supported on E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Example Figure 24-16. show ip interface Command Example
FTOS#show ip int te 0/0

IP MTU is 1500 bytes
Inbound access list is not set
Proxy ARP is enabled
Split Horizon is enabled
Poison Reverse is disabled
ICMP redirects are not sent
ICMP unreachables are not sent
FTOS#
Table 24-12. show ip interface Command Example Items
Lines Description
TenGigabitEthernet 0/0... Displays the interfaces type, slot/port and physical and line protocol
status.
Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If one is, that
address is displayed.
IP MTU is... Displays IP MTU value.
Inbound access... Displays the name of the any configured incoming access list. If none is
configured, the phrase not set is displayed.
Proxy ARP... States whether proxy ARP is enabled on the interface.
Split horizon... States whether split horizon for RIP is enabled on the interface.
Poison Reverse... States whether poison for RIP is enabled on the interface
ICMP redirects... States if ICMP redirects are sent.
ICMP unreachables... States if ICMP unreachable messages are sent.
IPv4 Routing | 669

Figure 24-17. show ip interface brief Command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show ip int brief

Interface IP-Address OK? Method Status Protocol
GigabitEthernet 1/0 unassigned NO Manual administratively down down
GigabitEthernet 1/2 unassigned YES Manual up up
GigabitEthernet 1/5 10.10.10.1 YES Manual up up
Table 24-13. show ip interface brief Column Headings
Field Description
Interface Displays type of interface and the associated slot and port number.
IP-Address Displays the IP address for the interface, if configured.
Ok? Indicates if the hardware is functioning properly.
Method Displays Manual if the configuration is read from the saved configuration.
Status States whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (administratively
down).
Protocol States whether IP is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on the interface.
ce View the IP addresses assigned to the Management interface.
Syntax show ip management-route [all | connected | summary | static]
Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all IP addresses assigned to all
Management interfaces on the switch.
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only routes directly
connected to the Management interface.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing the number
of active and non-active routes and their sources.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view non-active routes also.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
670 | IPv4 Routing

Example Figure 24-18. show ip management route Command Example
FTOS#show ip management-route
Destination Gateway State

----------- ------- -----
10.1.2.0/24 ManagementEthernet 0/0 Connected
172.16.1.0/24 10.1.2.4 Active
FTOS#
show ipv6 management-route

ce Display the IPv6 static routes configured for the management interface.
Syntax show ipv6 management-route [all | connected | summary | static]
Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to view all IP addresses assigned to all Management
interfaces on the switch.
connected Enter the keyword connected to view only routes directly connected to the
summary Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing the number of active and
non-active routes and their sources.
static Enter the keyword static to view non-active routes also.
Command
History
Example FTOS#show ipv6 management-route

IPv6 Destination Gateway State
---------------- ------- -----
2001:34::0/64 ManagementEthernet 0/0 Connected
2001:68::0/64 2001:34::16 Active
FTOS#
show ip protocols
ces View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the switch.
Syntax show ip protocols
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Regular evaluation optimization enabled/disabled added to display output
IPv4 Routing | 671

Example Figure 24-19. show ip protocols Command Example
FTOS#show ip protocols
Routing Protocol is "bgp 1"
Cluster Id is set to 20.20.20.3
Router Id is set to 20.20.20.3
Fast-external-fallover enabled
Regular expression evaluation optimization enabled
Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH
For Address Family IPv4 Unicast
Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200
Neighbor(s):
Address : 20.20.20.2
Filter-list in : foo
Route-map in : foo
Weight : 0
Address : 5::6
Weight : 0
FTOS#
show ip route
ces View information, including how they were learned, about the IP routes on the switch.
Syntax show ip route [vrf [vrf name] hostname | ip-address [mask] [longer-prefixes] | list prefix-list |
protocol [process-id | routing-tag] | all | connected | static | summary]
Parameter
vrf name E-Series Only: Clear only the route entries tied to the VRF process.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify a name of a device or the IP address of the device to view
more detailed information about the route.
mask (OPTIONAL) Specify the network mask of the route. Use this parameter with
the IP address parameter.
common prefix.
list prefix-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword list and the name of a configured prefix list.
See show ip route list.
protocol (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a routing protocol (bgp, isis, ospf, rip) or
the keywords connected or static.
bgp, isis, ospf, rip are E-Series-only options.
If you enter bgp, you can include the BGP as-number. (E-Series only)
If you enter isis, you can include the ISIS routing-tag. (E-Series only)
If you enter ospf, you can include the OSPF process-id.
process-id (OPTIONAL) Specify that only OSPF routes with a certain process ID must be
displayed.
routing-tag (OPTIONAL) Specify that only ISIS routes with a certain routing tag must be
displayed.
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only the directly
connected routes.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view both active and non-active routes.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view only routes configured by the
ip route command.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary. See show ip route summary.
672 | IPv4 Routing

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 24-20. show ip route all Command Example

FTOS#show ip route all
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP

B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP, LO - Locally Originated
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1
E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1
L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default
> - non-active route + - summary route
Gateway of last resort is not set
Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change

----------- ------- ----------- -----------
R 3.0.0.0/8 via 100.10.10.10, So 2/8 120/1 00:07:12
via 101.10.10.10, So 2/9
C 100.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/8 0/0 00:08:54
> R 100.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/8 120/0 00:08:54
C 101.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/9 0/0 00:09:15
> R 101.10.10.0/24 Direct, So 2/9 120/0 00:09:15
FTOS#
Example Figure 24-21. show ip route summary and show ip route static Command Examples
FTOS#show ip route summary
Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes

connected 2 0
static 1 0
Total 3 0
Total 3 active route(s) using 612 bytes
R1_E600i>show ip route static ?
<cr>
R1_E600i>show ip route static
----------- ------- ----------- -----------
*S 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.10.91.9, Gi 1/2 1/0 3d2h
FTOS>
IPv4 Routing | 673

Table 24-14. show ip route all Command Example Fields

Field Description
(undefined) Identifies the type of route:
C = connected
S = static
R = RIP
B = BGP
IN = internal BGP
EX = external BGP
LO = Locally Originated
O = OSPF
IA = OSPF inter area
N1 = OSPF NSSA external type 1
E1 = OSPF external type 1
i = IS-IS
L1 = IS-IS level-1
L2 = IS-IS level-2
IA = IS-IS inter-area
* = candidate default
> = non-active route
+ = summary routes
Destination Identifies the routes destination IP address.
Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is
configured.
Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric.
Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.
show ip route list

ces Display IP routes in an IP prefix list.
Syntax show ip route list prefix-list
Parameters
prefix-list Enter the name of a configured prefix list.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
674 | IPv4 Routing

Related
ip prefix-list Enter the CONFIGURATION-IP PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a
Commands
prefix list.
show ip prefix-list summary Display a summary of the configured prefix lists.
Example Figure 24-22. show ip route summary Command Example
FTOS#show ip route list test
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP,

B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated,
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1,
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1,
E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1,
L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default,
> - non-active route, + - summary route

----------- ------- ----------- -----------
R 2.1.0.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/2 3d0h
R 2.1.1.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/2 3d1h
R 2.1.2.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/1 3d0h
R 2.1.3.0/24 via 2.1.4.1, Gi 4/43 120/1 3d1h
C 2.1.4.0/24 Direct, Gi 4/43 0/0 3d1h

ces View a table summarizing the IP routes in the switch.
Syntax show ip route summary
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 24-23. show ip route summary Command Example
FTOS>show ip route summary

connected 17 0
static 3 0
ospf 100 1368 2
Intra-area: 762 Inter-area: 1 External-1: 600 External-2: 5
Total 1388 2
Total 2 non-active route(s) using 128 bytes
FTOS>
IPv4 Routing | 675

Table 24-15. show ip route summary Column Headings
Column Heading Description
Route Source Identifies how the route is configured in FTOS.

Active Routes Identifies the best route if a route is learned from two protocol sources.
Non-active Routes Identifies the back-up routes when a route is learned by two different protocols. If the
best route or active route goes down, the non-active route will become the best route.
ospf 100 If routing protocols (OSPF, RIP) are configured and routes are advertised, then
information on those routes is displayed.
Total 1388 active... Displays the number of active and non-active routes and the memory usage of those
routes.
If there are no routes configured in the FTOS, this line does not appear.
Related
show ip route Display information about the routes found in switch.
Commands
show ip traffic
ces View IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP traffic statistics.
Syntax show ip traffic [all | cp | rp1 | rp2]
Note: These options are supported only on the E-Series.

Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view statistics from all processors.
If you do not enter a keyword, you also view all statistics from all processors.
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to view only statistics from the Control Processor.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 1.
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 2.
Command
History
Version 6.5.1.0 F10 Monitoring MIB available for ip traffic statistics
676 | IPv4 Routing

Example Figure 24-24. show ip traffic Command Example (partial)
FTOS#show ip traffic
Control Processor IP Traffic:
IP statistics:
Rcvd: 23857 total, 23829 local destination
0 format errors, 0 checksum errors, 0 bad hop count
0 unknown protocol, 0 not a gateway
0 security failures, 0 bad options
Frags: 0 reassembled, 0 timeouts, 0 too big
0 fragmented, 0 couldn't fragment
Bcast: 28 received, 0 sent; Mcast: 0 received, 0 sent
Sent: 16048 generated, 0 forwarded
21 encapsulation failed, 0 no route
ICMP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors, 0 redirects, 0 unreachable
0 echo, 0 echo reply, 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench
0 parameter, 0 timestamp, 0 info request, 0 other
Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply
0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp
0 info reply, 0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem
UDP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port
0 short packets, 0 bad length, 0 no port broadcasts, 0 socket full
Sent: 0 total, 0 forwarded broadcasts
TCP statistics:
Rcvd: 23829 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port
Sent: 16048 total
ARP statistics:
Rcvd: 156 requests, 11 replies
Sent: 21 requests, 10 replies (0 proxy)
Routing Processor1 IP Traffic:
Table 24-16. show ip traffic output definitions
Keyword Definition
unknown protocol... No receiver for these packets. Counts those packets whose protocol type field is not
recognized by FTOS.
not a gateway... Packets can not be routed; host/network is unreachable.
security failures... Counts the number of received unicast/multicast packets that could not be forwarded
due to:
route not found for unicast/multicast; ingress interfaces do not belong to the
destination multicast group
destination IP address belongs to reserved prefixes; host/network unreachable
bad options... Unrecognized IP option on a received packet.
Frags: IP fragments received.
... reassembled Number of IP fragments that were reassembled.
... timeouts Number of times a timer expired on a reassembled queue.
... too big Number of invalid IP fragments received.
... couldnt fragment Number of packets that could not be fragmented and forwarded.
...encapsulation failed Counts those packets which could not be forwarded due to ARP resolution failure.
FTOS sends an arp request prior to forwarding an IP packet. If a reply is not
received, FTOS repeats the request three times. These packets are counted in
encapsulation failed.
Rcvd:
...short packets The number of bytes in the packet are too small.
...bad length The length of the packet was not correct.
IPv4 Routing | 677

Table 24-16. show ip traffic output definitions
Keyword Definition
...no port broadcasts The incoming broadcast/multicast packet did not have any listener.
...socket full The applications buffer was full and the incoming packet had to be dropped.
Usage The F10 Monitoring MIB provides access to the statistics described below.
Information
Table 24-17. F10 Monitoring MIB
Command Display Object OIDs

IP statistics:
Bcast:
Received f10BcastPktRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.1
Sent f10BcastPktSent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.2
Mcast:
Received f10McastPktRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.3
Sent f10McastPktSent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.4
ARP statistics:
Rcvd:
Request f10ArpReqRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.1
Replies f10ArpReplyRecv 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.3
Sent:
Request f10ArpReqSent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.2
Replies f10ArpReplySent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.4
Proxy f10ArpProxySent 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.5
show protocol-termination-table
e Display the IP Packet Termination Table (IPPTT).
Syntax show protocol-termination-table linecard number port-set port-pipe-number
Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by slot number of the line
card.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200/1200i, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i,
and 0 to 5 on a E300
port-set port-pipe-number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line cards Port-Pipe
number.
Range: 0 to 1
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
678 | IPv4 Routing

Command
Version 8.1.1.2 Introduced support for E-Series ExaScale E600i
History
Example Figure 24-25. show protocol-termination-table Command Output

FTOS#show protocol-termination-table linecard 2 port-set 0
Index Protocol Src-Port Dst-Port Queue DP Blk-Hole VlanCPU EgPort
----- -------- -------- -------- ----- -- -------- ---------- ------
0 ICMP any any Q0 0 No - CP
1 UDP any 1812 Q7 6 No - CP
4 TCP any 22 Q7 6 No - CP
5 TCP 22 any Q7 6 No - CP
6 TCP 639 any Q7 6 No - RP2
7 TCP any 639 Q7 6 No - RP2
8 TCP 646 any Q7 6 No - RP1
9 TCP any 646 Q7 6 No - RP1
10 UDP 646 any Q7 6 No - RP1
11 UDP any 646 Q7 6 No - RP1
21 UDP 21 any Q7 6 No - CP
33 PIM-SM any any Q6 0 No - RP2
34 IGMP any any Q7 6 No - RP2
35 OSPF any any Q7 6 No - RP1
Usage The IPPTT table is used for looking up forwarding information for IP control traffic destined to the
Information router. For the listed control traffic types, IPPTT contains the information for the following:
Which CPU to send the traffic (CP, RP1, or RP2)
What QoS parameters to set
Related
Commands show ip cam stack-unit Display the CAM table
show tcp statistics

ces View information on TCP traffic through the switch.
Syntax show tcp statistics {all | cp | rp1 | rp2}
Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to view all TCP information.
cp Enter the keyword cp to view only TCP information from the Control Processor.
IPv4 Routing | 679

rp1 Enter the keyword rp1 to view only TCP statistics from Route Processor 1.
rp2 Enter the keyword rp2 to view only TCP statistics from Route Processor 2.
Command
History
Example Figure 24-26. show tcp statistics cp Command Example

FTOS#show tcp stat cp
Control Processor TCP:

Rcvd: 10585 Total, 0 no port
0 checksum error, 0 bad offset, 0 too short
329 packets (1263 bytes) in sequence
17 dup packets (6 bytes)
0 partially dup packets (0 bytes)
7 out-of-order packets (0 bytes)
0 packets ( 0 bytes) with data after window
0 packets after close
0 window probe packets, 41 window update packets
41 dup ack packets, 0 ack packets with unsend data
10184 ack packets (12439508 bytes)
Sent: 12007 Total, 0 urgent packets
25 control packets (including 24 retransmitted)
11603 data packets (12439677 bytes)
24 data packets (7638 bytes) retransmitted
355 ack only packets (41 delayed)
0 window probe packets, 0 window update packets
7 Connections initiated, 8 connections accepted, 15 connections established
14 Connections closed (including 0 dropped, 0 embryonic dropped)
20 Total rxmt timeout, 0 connections dropped in rxmt timeout
0 Keepalive timeout, 0 keepalive probe, 0 Connections dropped in keepalive
FTOS#
Table 24-18. show tcp statistics cp Command Example Fields
Field Description
Rcvd: Displays the number and types of TCP packets received by the switch.
Total = total packets received
no port = number of packets received with no designated port.
0 checksum error... Displays the number of packets received with the following:
checksum errors
bad offset to data
too short
329 packets... Displays the number of packets and bytes received in sequence.
17 dup... Displays the number of duplicate packets and bytes received.
0 partially... Displays the number of partially duplicated packets and bytes received.
7 out-of-order... Displays the number of packets and bytes received out of order.
0 packets with data after Displays the number of packets and bytes received that exceed the switchs
window window size.
0 packets after close Displays the number of packet received after the TCP connection was closed.
0 window probe packets... Displays the number of window probe and update packets received.
41 dup ack... Displays the number of duplicate acknowledgement packets and
acknowledgement packets with data received.
680 | IPv4 Routing

Table 24-18. show tcp statistics cp Command Example Fields (continued)
Field Description
10184 ack... Displays the number of acknowledgement packets and bytes received.
Sent: Displays the total number of TCP packets sent and the number of urgent packets
sent.
25 control packets... Displays the number of control packets sent and the number retransmitted.
11603 data packets... Displays the number of data packets sent.
24 data packets retransmitted Displays the number of data packets resent.
355 ack... Displays the number of acknowledgement packets sent and the number of packet
delayed.
0 window probe... Displays the number of window probe and update packets sent.
7 Connections initiated... Displays the number of TCP connections initiated, accepted, and established.
14 Connections closed... Displays the number of TCP connections closed, dropped.
20 Total rxmt... Displays the number of times the switch tried to resend data and the number of
connections dropped during the TCP retransmit timeout period.
0 Keepalive... Lists the number of keepalive packets in timeout, the number keepalive probes
and the number of TCP connections dropped during keepalive.
IPv4 Routing | 681

682
|
IPv4 Routing
25
IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)
Overview
IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on platforms: c e s
IPv6 ACL Commands

IPv6 Route Map Commands
Note: For IPv4 ACL commands, see Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).

E-Series platforms require IPv6-ExtACL CAM profile to support IPv6 ACLs.
C-Series platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. Refer to cam-acl later in this
document.
Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on Loopback interface is not supported.
Reference to an empty ACL will permit any traffic.
ACLs are not applied to self-originated traffic (e.g. Control Protocol traffic not affected by IPv6
ACL since the routed bit is not set for Control Protocol traffic and for egress ACLs the routed bit
must be set).
The same access list name can be used for both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs.
Both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs can be applied on an interface at the same time.
IPv6 ACLs can be applied on physical interfaces and a logical interfaces (Port-channel/VLAN).
Non-contiguous masks are not supported in source or destination addresses in IPv6 ACL entries.
Since prefix mask is specified in /x format in IPv6 ACLs, inverse mask is not supported.
IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) | 683

IPv6 ACL Commands
The following commands configure IPv6 ACLs:
cam-acl
clear counters ipv6 access-group
deny
deny icmp
deny tcp
deny udp
ipv6 access-group
ipv6 access-list
permit
permit icmp
permit tcp
permit udp
remark
seq
show cam-acl
show config
show ipv6 accounting access-list
show running-config acl
test cam-usage
cam-acl
ces Allocate space for IPv6 ACLs.
Syntax cam-acl {default | l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10}
Parameters
default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows.
L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6
L2 ACL(l2acl): 5
IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0
L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1
L2 QoS (l2qos): 1
l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. You must enter all of the
ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 profiles and a range.
l2qos 1-10 Enter the CAM profile name followed by the amount to be allotted.
The total space allocated must equal 13.
The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2.
684 | IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

Command
Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale
History
Usage You must save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then
Information reload the system for the new settings to take effect.
The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires 3 blocks and these cannot be
reallocated.
When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13.
Ranges for the CAM profiles are 1-10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is 0-10. The ipv6acl
allocation must be a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
clear counters ipv6 access-group

ces Erase all counters maintained for the IPv6 access lists.
Syntax clear counters ipv6 access-group [access-list-name]
Parameters
access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured access-list, up to 140 characters.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Added monitor option

deny
ces Configure a filter that drops IPv6 packets that match the filter criteria.
Syntax deny {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp}

or
Use the no deny {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp} command.
Parameters
ip-protocol-number Enter an IPv6 protocol number.
Range: 0 to 255
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to deny Internet Control Message Protocol version 6.
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to deny any Internet Protocol version 6.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to deny the Transmission Control protocol.
udp Enter the keyword udp to deny the User Datagram Protocol.
Command Modes ACCESS-LIST
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series ExaScale
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on the C-Series
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support on the E-Series TeraScale

deny icmp
ces Configure a filter to drop all or specific ICMP messages.
Syntax deny icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any |
host ipv6-address} [message-type] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

or
Use the no deny icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} command.
Parameters
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent
in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero
destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in
the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
message-type On the E-Series only, enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and
code, if necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type.
filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in an ACL
log file.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the
monitoring interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with
the filter operation.
Command
History

Usage The C-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only
Information bytes are incremented.
The following table lists the keywords displayed in the CLI help and their corresponding ICMP
Message Type Name.

dest-unreachable Destination unreachable
echo Echo request (ping)
echo-reply Echo reply
inverse-nd-na Inverse neighbor discovery advertisement
inverse-nd-ns Inverse neighbor discovery solicitation
log Log matches against this entry
mobile-advertisement Mobile prefix advertisement
mobile-solicitation Mobile prefix solicitation
mrouter-advertisement Multicast router advertisement
mrouter-solicitation Multicast router solicitation
mrouter-termination Multicast router termination
nd-na Neighbor advertisement
nd-ns Neighbor solicitation
packet-too-big Packet is too big
parameter-problem Parameter problems
redirect Neighbor redirect
router-advertisement Neighbor discovery router advertisement
router-renumbering All routers renumbering
router-solicitation Neighbor discovery router solicitation
time-exceeded All time exceeded

deny tcp
ces Configure a filter that drops TCP packets that match the filter criteria.
Syntax deny tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

or
Use the no deny tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
x:x:x:x::x format.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
command parameter.
Range: 0 to 65535.
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
Range: /0 to /128
psh: push function
urg: urgent field

filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log.
Command
History
lt, range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on
bitmask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.
1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024
Related
deny Assign a filter to deny IP traffic.
Commands
deny udp Assign a filter to deny UDP traffic.

deny udp
ces Configure a filter to drop UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax deny udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] {destination
address | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]

or
Use the no deny udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
x:x:x:x::x format.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers
if using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
Range: /0 to /128
filter.

Command

History
For example, an ACL rule with TCP port range 4000 - 8000 will use 8 entries in the CAM:
1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024
Related
deny Assign a deny filter for IP traffic.
Commands
deny tcp Assign a deny filter for TCP traffic.
ipv6 access-group
ces Assign an IPv6 access-group to an interface.
Syntax ipv6 access-group access-list-name {in | out} [implicit-permit] [vlan range]

To delete an IPv6 access-group configuration, use the no ipv6 access-group access-list-name
{in} [implicit-permit] [vlan range] command.
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters.
in | out Enter either the keyword in or out to apply the IPv6 ACL to incoming traffic
(ingress) or outgoing traffic (egress).

implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action
of the IPv6 ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does
not match the filters in the IPv6 ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
vlan range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN range in a comma
separated format.
Range: 1 to 4094
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16
characters long.
Usage You can assign an IPv6 access group to a physical, LAG, or VLAN interface context.
Information
Example Figure 25-1. Command Example: ipv6 access-group

FTOS(conf-if-gi-9/0)#ipv6 access-group AclList1 in implicit-permit vlan 10-20
!
no ip address
ipv6 access-group AclList1 in implicit-permit Vlan 10-20
no shutdown
Force10conf-if-gi-9/0)#
ipv6 access-list
ce Configure an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protocols.
Syntax ipv6 access-list access-list-name

To delete an access list, use the no ipv6 access-list access-list-name command.
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the as the access list name as a string, up to 140 characters.
Defaults All access lists contain an implicit deny any; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.
Command
History
characters long.

Related
show config View the current configuration.
Commands
permit
ce Select an IPv6 protocol number, ICMP, IPv6, TCP, or UDP to configure a filter that match the filter
criteria.
Syntax permit {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp}

or
Use the no permit {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp} command.
Parameters
ip-protocol-number Enter an IPv6 protocol number.
Range: 0 to 255
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to filter Internet Control Message Protocol version 6.
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to filter any Internet Protocol version 6.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to filter the Transmission Control protocol.
udp Enter the keyword udp to filter the User Datagram Protocol.
permit icmp
ces Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages.
Syntax permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any |
host ipv6-address} [message-type] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]
or
Use the no permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128

x:x:x:x::x format.
Range: /0 to /128
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type.
filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in an ACL
log file.
Command
History
permit tcp
ces Configure a filter to pass TCP packets that match the filter criteria.
Syntax permit tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]]
{destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] |
[log] [monitor]

or
Use the no permit tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination

Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
x:x:x:x::x format.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
parameter.)
Range: 0 to 65535.
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
Range: /0 to /128
psh: push function
urg: urgent field
filter.

Command
History
1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024
Related
permit Assign a permit filter for IPv6 packets.
Commands
permit udp
ces Configure a filter to pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax permit udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]]
{destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log]
[monitor]

or
Use the no permit udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination

Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
x:x:x:x::x format.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
parameter.)
Range: 0 to 65535
Range: /0 to /128
filter.
Command
History

1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32

2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64
3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048
4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024
5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512
6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1
Total Ports: 4001
1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024
Total Ports: 1024
Related
Commands

remark
ces Enter a description for an IPv6 ACL entry.
Syntax remark remark number [description]

To delete the description, use the no remark remark number command (it is not necessary to
include the remark description that you are deleting).
Parameters
remark number Enter the remark number. Note that the same sequence number can be used
for the remark and an ACL rule.
Range: 0 to 4294967290
description Enter a description of up to 80 characters.
Command
History
Example Figure 25-2. Command Example: remark

FTOS(config-ipv6-acl)#remark 10 Remark for Entry # 10
FTOS(config-ipv6-acl)#show config
!
ipv6 access-list Acl1
description IPV6 Access-list
seq 5 permit ipv6 1111::2222/127 host 3333::1111 log count bytes
remark 10 Remark for Entry # 10
seq 10 permit icmp host 3333:: any mobile-advertisement log
seq 15 deny tcp any any rst
seq 20 permit udp any any gt 100 count
!FTOS(config-ipv6-acl)#
Usage As shown in the example above, the same sequence number is used for the remark and an ACL rule.
Information The remark will precede the rule in the running-configuration because it is assumed that the remark is
for that rule or that group of rules that follow the remark. You can configure up to 4294967290
remarks in a given ACL.
Related
show config Display the current ACL configuration.
Commands

Syntax resequence access-list {ipv4 | ipv6 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum

Step-to-Increment}
Parameters
ipv4 |ipv6 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4, ipv6 or mac to identify the access list type to
resequence.
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
Range: 0 - 4294967290
Range: 1 - 4294967290
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands

Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters.
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names
Range: 0 65535
Range: 1 65535
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands

seq
ces Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IPv6 access list while creating the filter.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp}

{source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host
ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | [log] [monitor]
To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.
Parameters
condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting
this criteria.
ipv6-protocol-number Enter an IPv6 protocol number.
Range: 0 to 255
icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an Internet Control Message Protocol
version 6 filter.
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to configure any Internet Protocol version 6 filter.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a Transmission Control protocol filter.
udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a User Datagram Protocol filter.
source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were
sent in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
x:x:x:x::x format.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the
port parameter.)
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port
numbers if using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP

Range: /0 to /128
necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type.
filter.
monitoring interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along
with the filter operation.
Command
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale and S-Series
History
Related
Commands

show cam-acl
ces Show space allocated for IPv6 ACLs.
Syntax show cam-acl
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privileged
Command
History
Related
cam-acl Configure CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs
Commands
Examples Figure 25-3. Command Example: show cam-acl (default profile)

FTOS#show cam-acl

L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1
-- Line card 4 --
L2Acl : 5
Ipv4Acl : 6
Ipv6Acl : 0
Ipv4Qos : 1
L2Qos : 1
FTOS#show cam-acl
Figure 25-4. Command Example: show cam-acl (manually set profiles)

FTOS#show cam-acl

L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3
-- Line card 4 --
L2Acl : 2
Ipv4Acl : 2
Ipv6Acl : 4
Ipv4Qos : 2
L2Qos : 3
FTOS#show cam-acl

show config
ces View the current IPv6 ACL configuration.
Syntax show config
Command
History

FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#show config
!
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#
show ipv6 accounting access-list

ces View the IPv6 access-lists created on the E-Series and the sequence of filters.
Syntax show ipv6 accounting {access-list access-list-name | cam_count} interface interface
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of the ACL to be displayed, up to 140 characters.
cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL.
number information:
by a number:
for ExaScale.
information.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

characters long.
Example Figure 25-6. Command Example: show ipv6 accounting access-lists

FTOS#show ipv6 accounting access-list
!
Ingress IPv6 access list AclList1 on GigabitEthernet 9/0
Total cam count 15
seq 20 permit udp any any gt 101 count (0 packets)
!
FTOS#
Table 25-2. show ip accounting access-lists Command Example Field
Field Description
Ingress IPv6... Displays the name of the IPv6 ACL, in this example AclList1.
seq 10... Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the
filter, the number of packets or bytes processed by the filter is displayed at
the end of the line.
show running-config acl

ces Display the ACL running configuration.
Syntax show running-config acl
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 25-7. Command Example: show running-config acl

FTOS#show running-config acl
!
ip access-list extended ext-acl1
!
ip access-list standard std-acl1
!
description IPV6 Access-list
remark 10 Remark for Entry # 10
!FTOS#

test cam-usage
ces Verify that enough ACL CAM space is available for the IPv6 ACLs you have created.
Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input input policy name linecard {number | all}
Parameters
policy-map name Enter the name of the policy-map to verify.
number Enter all to get information for all the line cards, or enter the line card number to get
information for a specific card.
Range: 0-6 for E-Series, 0-7 for C-Series
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series TeraScale
Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM Profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS
Information optimization for IPv6 ACLs.
QoS Optimization for IPv6 ACLs does not impact the CAM usage for applying a policy on a single (or
the first of several) interfaces. It is most useful when a policy is applied across multiple interfaces; it
can reduce the impact to CAM usage across subsequent interfaces.

Example The following example shows the output shown when using the test cam-usage command.
Figure 25-8. Command Example: test cam-usage (C-Series)

FTOS#test cam-usage service-policy input LauraMapTest linecard all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 | 0 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 | 1 | IPv4Flow | 232 | 0 | Allowed
FTOS#
Table 25-3. Output Explanations: test cam-usage
Term Explanation
Linecard Lists the line card or line cards that are checked. Entering all shows
the status for line cards in the chassis
Entering all shows the status for line cards and port-pipes in the
chassis.

IPv6 Route Map Commands
The following commands allow you to configure route maps and their redistribution criteria.
match ipv6 address

match ipv6 next-hop
match ipv6 route-source
route-map
set ipv6 next-hop
show config
show route-map
match ipv6 address

ces Configure a filter to match routes based on IPv6 addresses specified in an access list.
Syntax match ipv6 address prefix-list-name

To delete a match, use the no match ipv6 address prefix-list-name command.
Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of IPv6 prefix list, up to 140 characters.
Command
History
characters long.
Related
match ipv6 next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
Commands
match ipv6 route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
match ipv6 next-hop

ces Configure a filter which matches based on the next-hop IPv6 addresses specified in the IPv6 prefix list.
Syntax match ipv6 next-hop prefix-list prefix-list-name

To delete a match, use the no match ipv6 next-hop prefix-list prefix-list-name command.
Parameters
prefix-list-name list, up to 140 characters.

Command
History
characters long.
Related
match ipv6 address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
Commands
match ipv6 route-source Redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers.

ces Configure a filter which matches based on the routes advertised in the IPv6 prefix lists.
Syntax match ipv6 route-source prefix-list prefix-list-name

To delete a match, use the no match ipv6 route-source prefix-list prefix-list-name command.
Parameters
prefix-list prefix-list-name Enter the keywords prefix-list followed by the name of configured
prefix list, up to 140 characters.
Command
History
characters long.
Related
match ipv6 address Redistribute routes that match an IP address.
Commands
match ipv6 next-hop Redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.

route-map
ces Designate a IPv6 route map name and enter the ROUTE-MAP mode.
Syntax route-map map-name

To delete a route map, use the no route-map map-name command.
Parameters
map-name Enter a text string to name the route map, up to 140 characters.
Command
History
characters long.
Example Figure 25-9. Command Example: route-map

FTOS(conf)#route-map Rmap1
FTOS(config-route-map)#match ?

ip IP specific information
ipv6 IPv6 specific information

Related
show config View the current configuration.
Commands
set ipv6 next-hop

ces Configure a filter that specifies IPv6 address as the next hop.
Syntax set ipv6 next-hop ipv6-address

To delete the setting, use the no set ipv6 next-hop ipv6-address command.
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.

Command
History
Usage The set ipv6 next-hop command is the only way to set an IPv6 Next-Hop.
Information
show config
ces View the current route map configuration.
Syntax show config
Command
History

FTOS(config-route-map)#show config
!
route-map Rmap1 permit 10
match ip address v4plist
match ipv6 address plist1
match ipv6 next-hop prefix-list plist2
match ipv6 route-source prefix-list plist3
set next-hop 1.1.1.1
set ipv6 next-hop 3333:2222::
show route-map
ces View the current route map configurations.
Syntax show route-map
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 25-11. Command Example: show route-map
FTOS#show route-map
!
route-map Rmap1, permit, sequence 10
Match clauses:
ip address: v4plist
ipv6 address: plist1
ipv6 next-hop prefix-lists: plist2
ipv6 route-source prefix-lists: plist3
Set clauses:
next-hop 1.1.1.1
ipv6 next-hop 3333:2222::
Related
route-map Configure a route map.
Commands

26
IPv6 Basics
Overview
IPv6 Basic Commands are supported on platforms: c e s
Note: Basic IPv6 basic commands are supported on all platforms. See Table 23-2 on page 506
in Chapter 23, IPv6 Addressing for information on the FTOS version and platform that
supports IPv6 in each software feature.
Commands
The IPv6 commands in the chapter are:
clear ipv6 fib

clear ipv6 route
ipv6 address
ipv6 host
ipv6 nd prefix-advertisement
ipv6 route
ipv6 unicast-routing
show ipv6 cam linecard
show ipv6 cam stack-unit
show ipv6 fib linecard
show ipv6 fib stack-unit
show ipv6 interface
show ipv6 route
trust ipv6-diffserv
IPv6 Basics | 715

clear ipv6 fib
ces Clear (refresh) all FIB entries on a linecard.
Syntax clear ipv6 fib linecard slot
Parameters
slot Enter the slot number to clear the FIB for a linecard.
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series TeraScale
clear ipv6 route

ces Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table.
Syntax clear ipv6 route {* | ipv6-address prefix-length}
Parameters
* Enter the * to clear (refresh) all routes from the IPv6 routing table.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x
prefix-length format.
Range: /0 to /128
Command
History
ipv6 address
ces Configure an IPv6 address to an interface.
Syntax ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length}

To remove the IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} command.
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x
prefix-length format.
Range: /0 to /128
716 | IPv6 Basics

Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Support added on the management Ethernet port.
History
Example Figure 26-1. Command Example: ipv6 address

FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address ?
X:X:X:X::X IPv6 address
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 ?
<0-128> Prefix length in bits
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 /96 ?
<cr>
FTOS(conf-if-gi-10/0)#ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 /96
!
no ip address
ipv6 address 2002:1:2::3 /96
no shutdown
Usage FTOS allows multiple IPv6 addresses to be configured on an interface. When the no ipv6 address
Information command is issued without specifying a particular IPv6 address, all IPv6 addresses on that interface are
deleted.
ipv6 name-server
ces Enter up to 6 IPv6 addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order
of their use.
Syntax ipv6 name-server ipv6-address [ipv6-address2...ipv6-address6]
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the name server to be used.
ipv6-address2... Enter up five more IP addresses, in dotted decimal format, of name servers to be used.
ipv6-address6 Separate the addresses with a space.
Defaults No name servers are configured.
Command
History
Usage You can separately configure both IPv4 and IPv6 domain name servers.
Information
IPv6 Basics | 717

ipv6 host
ces Assign a name and IPv6 address to be used by the host-to-IP address mapping table.
Syntax ipv6 host name ip-address
Parameters
name Enter a text string to associate with one IP address.
ipv6-address Enter an IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) to be mapped to the name.
Command
History
718 | IPv6 Basics

ipv6 nd prefix-advertisement
ces Specify which IPv6 prefixes are include in Neighbor Advertisements. By default, all prefixes
configured as addresses on the interface are advertised. This command allows control over the
individual parameters per prefix; the default keyword can be used to use the default parameters for
all prefixes.
Syntax ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-address/prefix-length> | default} [no-advertise] |

[no-autoconfig] [no-rtr-address] [off-link] [lifetime {valid | infinite} {preferred |
infinite}]
Parameters
ipv6-prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix.
prefix-length Enter the prefix followed by the prefix length.
Length Range: 0-128
default Enter this keyword to set default parameters for all prefixes.
no-advertise Enter this keyword to prevent the specified prefix from being advertised.
no-autoconfig Enter this keyword to disable Stateless Address Autoconfiguration.
no-rtr-address Enter this keyword to exclude the full router address from router advertisements
(the R bit is not set).
off-link Enter this keyword to advertise the prefix without stating to recipients that the
prefix is either on-link or off-link.
valid-lifetime | Enter the amount of time that the prefix is advertised, or enter infinite for an
infinite unlimited amount of time.
Default: 2592000
Range: 0 to 4294967295
preferred-lifetime | Enter the amount of time that the prefix is preferred, or enter infinite for an
infinite unlimited amount of time.
Default: 604800
Range: 0 to 4294967295; the maximum value means that the preferred lifetime
does not expire.
Command
Version 8.3.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale, C-Series, and S-Series.
History
IPv6 Basics | 719

ipv6 route
ces Establish a static IPv6 route.
Syntax ipv6 route ipv6-address prefix-length {interface | ipv6-address} [distance] [tag value]
[permanent]
To remove the IPv6 route, use the no ipv6 route ipv6-address prefix-length {interface |
ipv6-address} [distance] [tag value] [permanent] command.
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 destination address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix
prefix-length length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information of the
egress interface on the router:
For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a
number from zero (0) to 16383.
Note: If you configure a static IPv6 route using an egress interface and
enter the ping command to reach the destination IPv6 address, the ping
operation may not work. Configure the IPv6 route using a next-hop IPv6
address in order for the ping command to detect the destination address.
ipv6-address Enter the next-hop address of an IPv6 neighbor router in the x:x:x:x::x format.
distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the route.
Range: 1 to 255
tag value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a tag value number.
Range: 1 to 4294967295
permanent (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permanent to specify that the route is not to
be removed, even if the interface assigned to that route goes down.
Note: If you disable the interface with an IPv6 address associated with the
keyword permanent, the route disappears from the routing table.
Command
History
720 | IPv6 Basics

Example Figure 26-2. Command Example: ipv6 route
FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 44::0 /64 33::1 ?
<1-255> Distance metric for this route
permanent Permanent route
tag Set tag for this route
FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 55::0 /64 ?

X:X:X:X::X Forwarding router's address
gigabitethernet Gigabit Ethernet interface
loopback Loopback interface
null Null interface
port-channel Port channel interface
sonet Sonet interface
tenGigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface
vlan VLAN interface
FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 55::0 /64 gigabitethernet 9/0 ?

X:X:X:X::X Forwarding router's address
FTOS(conf)#ipv6 route 55::0 /64 gigabitethernet 9/0 66::1 ?

FTOS#
Usage When the interface goes down, FTOS withdraws the route. The route is re-installed, by FTOS, when
Information the interface comes back up. When a recursive resolution is broken, FTOS withdraws the route. The
route is re-installed, by FTOS, when the recursive resolution is satisfied.
Related
show ipv6 route View the IPv6 configured routes.
Commands
IPv6 Basics | 721

ipv6 unicast-routing
ces Enable IPv6 Unicast routing.
Syntax ipv6 unicast-routing

To disable unicast routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing command.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Usage Since this command is enabled by default, it does not appear in the running configuration. When
Information unicast routing is disabled, the no ipv6 unicast-routing command is included in the running
configuration. Whenever unicast routing is disabled or re-enabled, FTOS generates a syslog message
indicating the action.
Disabling unicast routing on an E-Series chassis causes the following behavior:

static and protocol learnt routes are removed from RTM and from the CAM; packet forwarding to
these routes is terminated.
connected routes and resolved neighbors remain in the CAM and new IPv6 neighbors are still
discoverable
additional protocol adjacencies (OSPFv3 and BGP4) are brought down and no new adjacencies
are formed
the IPv6 address family configuration (under router bgp) is deleted
IPv6 Multicast traffic continues to flow unhindered
722 | IPv6 Basics

show ipv6 cam linecard
ces Displays the IPv6 CAM entries for the specified line card.
Syntax show ipv6 cam linecard slot-number port-set {0-1} [summary | index | ipv6 address]
Parameters
slot-number Enter the line card slot ID number.
Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200; 0 on 6 for E600, and 0 to 5 on the E300.
port-set Enter the Port Set to
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a table listing network
prefixes and the total number prefixes which can be entered into the IPv6 CAM.
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index in the IPv6 CAM
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have
more specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Note: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The forwarding table displays host route first, then displays route originated by routing protocol
Information including static route.
The egress port section displays the egress port of the forwarding entry which is designated as:
C for the Control Processor
1 for the Route Processor 1
2 for the Route Processor 2
Note: If a link-local IPv6 address is statically configured and dynamically learned on a C-Series router, the
dynamically -learned IPv6 address is displayed in show ipv6 cam linecard output, but the statically-configured
IPv6 address may not be displayed. Use the show ipv6 fib linecard or show ipv6 neighbors commands to
display statically-configured addresses of IPv6 neighbors.
IPv6 Basics | 723

Examples Figure 26-3. Command Example: show ipv6 cam linecard fib (C or E-Series)
FTOS#show ipv6 cam linecard 13 fib
Neighbor Mac-Addr Port VId

---------------------------------------------- ----------------- --------- ----
[ 31] 2002:44:1:1::11 00:00:01:1a:1e:d5 Gi 13/2 0
Prefix Next-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC
------------------------------- ------------------------------- ----------------- --------- ---- --
[ 3147] 100::/64 [ 0] 2002:44:1:1::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1

[ 0] 2002:44:1:24::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:23::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:21::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:20::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
[ 0] 2002:44:1:19::11 - Gi 0/0 0 1
FTOS#
Figure 26-4. Command Example: show ipv6 cam linecard (C or E-Series)
FTOS#show ipv6 cam linecard 1 port-set 0

Neighbor Mac-Addr Port VId
--------------------------------------------------- ----------------- --------- ----
[ 0] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae BLK 100
[ 1] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bbe 00:01:e8:17:5b:be BLK 0
[ 2] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bbd 00:01:e8:17:5b:bd BLK 0
[ 3] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cb0 00:01:e8:17:5c:b0 BLK 0
[ 4] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae BLK 1000
[ 5] fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5caf 00:01:e8:17:5c:af BLK 0
Prefix First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC

------------------------------------ ------------------------ ----------------- --------- ----
[ 80] 2222::2/128 [ 2] : 00:00:00:00:00:00 RP2 0 0
[ 81] 3333::2/128 [ 2] ::1 00:00:00:00:00:00 RP2 0 0

FTOS#
724 | IPv6 Basics

show ipv6 cam stack-unit
ces Displays the IPv6 CAM entries for the specified stack-unit.
Syntax show ipv6 cam stack-unit unit-number port-set {0-1} [summary | index | ipv6 address]
Parameters
unit-number Enter the stack units ID number.
Range: 0 to 7
port-set Enter the Port Set to
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a table listing network
prefixes and the total number prefixes which can be entered into the IPv6 CAM.
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index in the IPv6 CAM
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have
more specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
IPv6 Basics | 725

show ipv6 fib linecard
ce View all Forwarding Information Base entries.
Syntax show ipv6 fib linecard slot-number {summary | ipv6-address}
Parameters
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more
specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
show ipv6 fib stack-unit

ces View all Forwarding Information Base entries.
Syntax show ipv6 fib stack-unit unit-number [summary] ipv6-address
Parameters
slot-number Enter the number of the stack unit.
Range: 0 to 7
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more
specific prefixes.
Range: /0 to /128
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
726 | IPv6 Basics

show ipv6 interface
ces Display the status of interfaces configured for IPv6.
Syntax show ipv6 interface interface [brief] [configured] [gigabitethernet slot | slot/port] [linecard
slot-number] [loopback interface-number] [managementethernet slot/port] [port-channel
number] [tengigabitethernet slot | slot/port] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
information:
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword Loopback followed by a
number from 0 to 16383.
For the Null interface, enter the keyword null followed by zero (0).
brief (OPTIONAL) View a summary of IPv6 interfaces.
configured (OPTIONAL) View information on all IPv6 configured interfaces
gigabitethernet (OPTIONAL) View information for an IPv6 gigabitethernet interface.
linecard slot-number (OPTIONAL) View information for a specific IPv6 linecard or S-Series
stack-unit
Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
Range: 0-7 for C-Series
Range 0-7 for S-Series
managementethernet (OPTIONAL) View information on an IPv6 Management port. Enter the
slot/port slot number (0-1) and port number zero (0).
loopback (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 loopback interfaces.
port-channel (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 port channels.
tengigabitethernet (OPTIONAL) View information for an IPv6 tengigabitethernet interface.
vlan (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 VLANs.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Support for the managementethernet slot/port parameter was added.
Usage The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown). If necessary, use the ipv6 address
Information command to assign an IPv6 address to the Management port.
IPv6 Basics | 727

Example Figure 26-5. Command Example: show ipv6 interface
FTOS#show ipv6 interface gigabitethernet 1/1

IPV6 is enabled
Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe04:62c4
Global Unicast address(es):
2001::1, subnet is 2001::/64
2002::1, subnet is 2002::/120
2003::1, subnet is 2003::/120
2004::1, subnet is 2004::/32
Global Anycast address(es):
Joined Group address(es):
ff02::1
ff02::2
ff02::1:ff00:1
ff02::1:ff04:62c4
MTU is 1500
DAD is enabled: number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30 seconds
ND advertised reachable time is 30 seconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 30 seconds
Figure 26-6. Command Example: show ipv6 interface managementethernet

FTOS#show ipv6 interface managementethernet 0/0
ManagementEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up

IPV6 is enabled
Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe0b:a94c
Global Unicast address(es):
Actual address is 2222::5, subnet is 2222::/64
Virtual-IP IPv6 address is not set
Global Anycast address(es):
Joined Group address(es):
ff02::1
ff02::2
ff02::1:ff00:5
ff02::1:ff0b:a94c
MTU is 1500
DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3
ND reachable time is 3600000 milliseconds
ND advertised reachable time is 3600000 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds
ND router advertisements are sent every 200 to 600 seconds
ND router advertisements live for 9000 seconds
Figure 26-7. Command Example: show ipv6 interface brief

FTOS#show ipv6 interface brief
GigabitEthernet 0/0 [up/up]

fe80::201:e8ff:fe3a:143e
10::1/64
...
ManagementEthernet 0/0 [up/up]
fe80::201:e8ff:fe5d:b74c
fdaa:bbbb:cccc:1004::50/64
...
Vlan 3 [up/up]
fe80::201:e8ff:fe3a:19b7
728 | IPv6 Basics

show ipv6 route
ces Displays the IPv6 routes.
Syntax show ipv6 route [ipv6-address prefix-length] [hostname] [all] [bgp as number]
[connected] [isis tag] [list prefix-list name] [ospf process-id] [rip] [static] [summary]
Parameter
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the
prefix-length prefix length in the /x format. Range: /0 to /128.
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
hostname (OPTIONAL) View information for this IPv6 routes with Host Name
all (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 routes
bgp (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 BGP routes
connected (OPTIONAL) View only the directly connected IPv6 routes.
isis (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 IS-IS routes
list (OPTIONAL) View the IPv6 prefix list
ospf (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 OSPF routes
rip (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 RIP routes
static (OPTIONAL) View only routes configured by the ipv6 route command.
summary (OPTIONAL) View a brief list of the configured IPv6 routes.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 26-8. Command Example: show ipv6 route

FTOS#show ipv6 route
Codes: C - connected, L - local, S - static, R - RIP,

B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated,
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1,
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1,
E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1,
L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default,
Destination Dist/Metric, Gateway, Last Change

-----------------------------------------------------
C 2001::/64 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
C 2002::/120 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
C 2003::/120 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
C 2004::/32 [0/0]
Direct, Gi 1/1, 00:28:49
L fe80::/10 [0/0]
Direct, Nu 0, 00:29:09
IPv6 Basics | 729

Example Figure 26-9. Command Example: show ipv6 route summary
FTOS#show ipv6 route summary

connected 5 0
static 0 0
Total 5 0
Table 26-1. show ipv6 route Command Example Fields

Field Description
(undefined) Identifies the type of route:
L = Local
C = connected
S = static
R = RIP
B = BGP
IN = internal BGP
EX = external BGP
LO = Locally Originated
O = OSPF
IA = OSPF inter area
i = IS-IS
L1 = IS-IS level-1
L2 = IS-IS level-2
IA = IS-IS inter-area
* = candidate default
> = non-active route
+ = summary routes
Destination Identifies the routes destination IPv6 address.
Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is
configured.
Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric.
Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.
730 | IPv6 Basics

trust ipv6-diffserv
ces Allows the dynamic classification of IPv6 DSCP.
Syntax trust ipv6-diffserv

To remove the definition, use the no trust ipv6-diffserv command.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-POLICY-MAP-IN
Command
History
Usage When trust IPv6 diffserv is configured, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the
Information show qos statistics command.
Trust differv (IPv4) can co-exist with trust ipv6-diffserv in an Input Policy Map. Dynamic
classification happens based on the mapping detailed in the following table.
Table 26-2. IPv6 -Diffserv Mapping
IPv6 Service Class Field Queue ID

111XXXXX 7
110XXXXX 6
101XXXXX 5
100XXXXX 4
011XXXXX 3
010XXXXX 2
001XXXXX 1
000XXXXX 0
IPv6 Basics | 731

732
|
IPv6 Basics
27
IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP)
Overview
IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on platforms: e c
This chapter includes the following commands:
IPv6 BGP Commands

IPv6 MBGP Commands
IPv6 BGP Commands

Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing
information within and between Autonomous Systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports
classless interdomain routing and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two routers (called
neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically send messages
to update those routing tables.
The following commands allow you to configure and enable BGP.
aggregate-address
bgp cluster-id
bgp dampening
IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) | 733

bgp router-id
capture bgp-pdu neighbor (ipv6)
clear ip bgp as-number
clear ip bgp ipv6-address
clear ip bgp ipv6 dampening
clear ip bgp ipv6 flap-statistics
debug ip bgp
debug ip bgp events
debug ip bgp ipv6 dampening
default-metric
description
distance bgp
maximum-paths
neighbor activate
neighbor allowas-in
neighbor fall-over
neighbor X:X:X::X password
neighbor remote-as
neighbor route-map
neighbor shutdown
neighbor subnet
neighbor timers
734 | IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP)

neighbor weight
network
network backdoor
redistribute
redistribute isis
redistribute ospf
router bgp
show config
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter-list
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary
show ip bgp paths
show ip bgp regexp
timers bgp
address-family
c et Enable the IPv4 multicast or the IPv6 address family.
Syntax address-family [ipv4 multicast| ipv6unicast]
Parameters
ipv4 multicast Enter BGPv4 multicast mode.
ipv6 unicast Enter BGPv6 mode.

Command
.
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on C-Series and S4810.

History
Usage Enter ipv6 unicast to enter the BGP for IPv6 mode (CONF-ROUTER_BGPv6_AF).
Information
aggregate-address
ce Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.
Syntax aggregate-address ipv6-address prefix-length [advertise-map map-name] [as-set]

[attribute-map map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name]
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the
prefix-length /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros
advertise-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate route.
as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword as-set to generate path attribute information and
include it in the aggregate.
AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included
in the aggregated route.
attribute-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords attribute-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to modify attributes of the aggregate, excluding AS_PATH
and NEXT_HOP attributes.
summary-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary-only to advertise only the aggregate
address. Specific routes will not be advertised.
suppress-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords suppress-map followed by the name of a
map-name configured route map to identify which more-specific routes in the aggregate are
suppressed.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY
Command
History
Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate, if routes within the aggregate are constantly
changing as the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH.

suppressed.
In the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast command, aggregates contain an a in the first column and routes
suppressed by the aggregate contain an s in the first column.
ce Allows you to enable comparison of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attributes in the paths from
different external ASs.
Syntax bgp always-compare-med
To disable comparison of MED, enter no bgp always-compare-med.
Defaults Disabled (that is, the software only compares MEDs from neighbors within the same AS).
Command
History
Usage Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route.
Information
If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command to recompute the
best path.

ce Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations.
Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore
To return to the default, enter no bgp bestpath as-path ignore.
Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best).
Command
History


Usage If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command to recompute the
Information best path.

ce Enable MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute comparison on paths learned from BGP confederations.
Syntax bgp bestpath med confed
To disable MED comparison on BGP confederation paths, enter no bgp bestpath med confed.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers.
Information
If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command to recompute the
best path.

ce During path selection, indicate preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over
those paths with an advertised MED attribute.
Syntax bgp bestpath med missing-as-best
To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath med missing-as-best command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage The MED is a 4-byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as
Information 4294967295. This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0. During the path selection, paths
with a lower MED are preferred over those with a higher MED.

ce Allows you to enable route reflection between clients in a cluster.
Syntax bgp client-to-client reflection
To disable client-to-client reflection, enter no bgp client-to-client reflection.
Defaults Enabled when a route reflector is configured.
Command
History
Usage Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed.
Information
Related
bgp cluster-id Assign ID to a BGP cluster with two or more route reflectors.
Commands
bgp cluster-id
ce Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector.
Syntax bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number}
To delete a cluster ID, use the no bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address as the route reflector cluster ID.
number Enter a route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295.
Command
History
Usage When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflectors router ID.
Information For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors and you assign a cluster ID
with the bgp cluster-id command. Without a cluster ID, the route reflector cannot recognize route
updates from the other route reflectors within the cluster.
The default format for displaying the cluster-id is dotted decimal, but if you enter the cluster-id as an
integer, it will be displayed as an integer.

Related
Commands
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View paths with a cluster ID.
cluster-list

ce Configure an identifier for a BGP confederation.
Syntax bgp confederation identifier as-number
To delete a BGP confederation identifier, use the no bgp confederation identifier as-number
command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 65535
Command
History
Usage The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each
Information autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. The
next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved throughout the confederation.
FTOS accepts confederation EBGP peers without a LOCAL_PREF attribute. The software sends
AS_CONFED_SET and accepts AS_CONFED_SET and AS_CONF_SEQ.

ce Specify the Autonomous Systems (ASs) that belong to the BGP confederation.
Syntax bgp confederation peers as-number [...as-number]
To enter no bgp confederation peer.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 65535
...as-number (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 confederation numbers.
Range: 1 to 65535.

Command
History
Usage The Autonomous Systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each
Information Autonomous System is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other Autonomous Systems.
After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation, recycle the peers to update
their configuration.
Related
bgp confederation identifier Configure a confederation ID.
Commands
bgp dampening
ce Enable BGP route dampening and configure the dampening parameters.
Syntax bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name]
To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress
max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
half-life (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is
is decreased by half after the half-life period expires.
Range: 1 to 45.
Default: 15 minutes
reuse (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the reuse value, which is compared to the
flapping routes Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse
value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed).
Range: 1 to 20000.
Default: 750
suppress (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the suppress value, which is compared to
the flapping routes Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the
suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is
suppressed).
Range: 1 to 20000.
Default: 2000
max-suppress-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the maximum number of minutes a route can be
suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value.
Range: 1 to 255.
Defaults Disabled.

Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY
Command
History
Usage If you enter bgp dampening, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and
Information max-suppress-time are applied. The parameters are position-dependent, therefore, if you configure
one parameter, you must configure the parameters in the order they appear in the command.
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View the BGP paths
Commands
dampened-paths

ce Change the default local preference value for routes exchanged between internal BGP peers.
Syntax bgp default local-preference value
To return to the default value, enter no bgp default local-preference.
Parameters
value Enter a number to assign to routes as the degree of preference for those routes. When
routes are compared, the higher the degree of preference or local preference value, the
more the route is preferred.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Default: 100
Defaults 100
Command
=

History
Usage The bgp default local-preference command setting is applied by all routers within the AS.
Information
ce Disable (or enable) enforce-first-as check for updates received from EBGP peers.
Syntax bgp enforce-first-as

To turn off the default, use the no bgp enforce-first-as command.
Defaults Enabled

Usage This is enabled by default, that is for all updates received from EBGP peers, BGP ensures that the first
Information AS of the first AS segment is always the AS of the peer. If not, the update is dropped and a counter is
incremented. Use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors command to view the failed enforce-first-as
check counter.
If enforce-first-as is disabled, it can be viewed via the show ip protocols command.
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast Display IPv6 routing information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Commands
neighbors
show ip protocols View Information on routing protocols.
Command
History
ce Enable the fast external fallover feature, which immediately resets the BGP session if a link to a
directly connected external peer fails.
Syntax bgp fast-external-fallover
To disable fast external fallover, enter no bgp fast-external-fallover.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Usage The bgp fast-external-fallover command appears in the show config command output.
Information
ce Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process
Syntax bgp four-octet-as-support

To disable fast external fallover, enter no bgp four-octet-as-support.
Defaults Disabled (supports 2-Byte format)

Usage Routers supporting 4-Byte ASNs advertise that function in the OPEN message. The behavior of a
Information 4-Byte router will be slightly different depending on whether it is speaking to a 2-Byte router or a
4-Byte router.
When creating Confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be 4 or 2 byte identified
routers. You cannot mix them.
Where the 2-Byte format is 1-65535, the 4-Byte format is 1-4294967295. Both formats are accepted,
and the advertisements will reflect the entered format.
Command
History
ce Enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor, a BGP node, or designate a local router to support graceful
restart as a receiver only.
Syntax bgp graceful-restart [restart-time seconds] [stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only]
Parameters
neighbor ip-address | Enter the keyword neighbor followed by one of the options listed
peer-group-name below:
ip-address of the neighbor in IP address format of the neighbor
peer-group-name of the neighbor peer group.
seconds needed to restart and bring up all peers.
Defaults As above
Command
History

ce Enable logging of BGP neighbor resets.
Syntax bgp log-neighbor-changes
To disable logging, enter no bgp log-neighbor-changes.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Usage The bgp log-neighbor-changes command appears in the show config command output.
Information
Related
show config View the current configuration
Commands
ce Compare MEDs of paths from different Autonomous Systems.
Syntax bgp non-deterministic-med
To return to the default, enter no bgp non-deterministic-med.
Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs will not have their MEDs
compared).
Command
History
Usage In non-deterministic mode, paths are compared in the order in which they arrive. This method can lead
Information to FTOS choosing different best paths from a set of paths, depending on the order in which they are
received from the neighbors since MED may or may not get compared between adjacent paths. In
deterministic mode (no bgp non-deterministic-med), FTOS compares MED between adjacent
paths within an AS group since all paths in the AS group are from the same AS.
When you change the path selection from deterministic to non-deterministic, the path selection for
existing paths remains deterministic until you enter capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command to clear
existing paths.

ce Enable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP.
Syntax bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop

To disable next-hop resolution, use the no bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop command.
Defaults Enabled
Usage This command is a knob to disable BGP next-hop resolution via BGP learned routes. During the
Information next-hop resolution, only the first route that the next-hop resolves through is verified for the routes
protocol source and is checked if the route is learned from BGP or not.
The clear ip bgp command is required for this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database
consistent. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command.
Related
Commands capture bgp-pdu Description.
max-buffer-size
Command
History
ce Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP.
Syntax bgp regex-eval-optz-disable

To re-enable optimization engine, use the no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable command.
Defaults Enabled by default
Usage BGP uses regular expressions (regex) to filter route information. In particular, the use of regular
Information expressions to filter routes based on AS-PATHs and communities is quite common. In a large scale
configuration, filtering millions of routes based on regular expressions can be quite CPU intensive, as a
regular expression evaluation involves generation and evaluation of complex finite state machines.
BGP policies, containing regular expressions to match as-path and communities, tend to use a lot of
CPU processing time, which in turn affects the BGP routing convergence. Additionally, the show bgp
commands, which are filtered through regular expressions, use up CPU cycles particularly with large
databases. The Regex Engine Performance Enhancement feature optimizes the CPU usage by caching
and reusing regular expression evaluation results. This caching and reuse may be at the expensive of
RP1 processor memory.

Related
Commands show ip protocols View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the
E-Series.
Command
History
bgp router-id
ce Assign a user-given ID to a BGP router.
Syntax bgp router-id ip-address
To delete a user-assigned IP address, enter no bgp router-id.
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor.
Defaults The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or, if no Loopback interfaces are
configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router.
Command
History
Usage Peering sessions are reset when you change the router ID of a BGP router.
Information
c et Use this command only when route-refresh is not negotiated between peers to avoid having a peer
resend BGP updates.
Defaults Off
Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY (conf-router_bgpv6_af)

Related
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft Activate inbound policies for IPv6 routes without resetting the BGP TCP
Commands
in session.
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support on S4810
capture bgp-pdu neighbor (ipv6)

ce Enable capture of an IPv6 BGP neighbor packet.
Syntax capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv6-address direction {both | rx | tx}
To disable capture of the IPv6 BGP neighbor packet, use the no capture bgp-pdu neighbor
ipv6-address command.
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the target BGP neighbor.
direction {both | Enter the keyword direction and a direction either rx for inbound, tx for
rx | tx} outbound, or both.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Enable route reflection between route reflector and clients.
Commands
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Configure a route reflector and clients.
capture bgp-pdu neighbor Enable capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet.

ce Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
Syntax capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size 100-102400000
Parameters
100-102400000 Enter a size for the capture buffer.
Defaults 40960000 bytes

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Configure a route reflector and clients.
clear ip bgp * (asterisk)

ce Reset all BGP sessions in the specified category on the E-Series. The soft parameter (BGP Soft
Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection.
Syntax clear ip bgp * [ipv4 multicast soft [in | out] | ipv6 unicast soft [in | out] | soft [in | out]]
Parameters
* Enter an asterisk ( * ) to reset all BGP sessions.
ipv4 multicast soft [in | out] (OPTIONAL) This keyword sequence sets options within the a
specified IPv4 address family.
ipv6 unicast soft [in | out] (OPTIONAL) This keyword sequence sets options within the a
specified IPv6 address family.
soft (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword soft to configure and activate
policies without resetting the BGP TCP session, that is, BGP Soft
Reconfiguration.
Note: If you enter clear ip bgp ip6-address soft, both
inbound and outbound policies are reset.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound
policies.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound
policies.
Command
History
clear ip bgp as-number

ce Reset BGP sessions on the E-Series. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies
without resetting the TCP connection.
Syntax clear ip bgp as-number [flap-statistics | ipv4 {multicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} |
unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} | ipv6 unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}| soft
[in | out]

Parameters
as-number Enter an autonomous system (AS) number to reset neighbors belonging to

that AS. If used without a qualifier, the keyword resets all neighbors
belonging to that AS.
Range: 1 to 65535
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to clear all flap
statistics belonging to that AS or a specified address family within that AS.
ipv4 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 to select options for that address
family.
family.
unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword unicast to select the unicast option
within the selected address family.
multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to select the multicast option
Multicast is supported on IPv4 only
soft (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword soft to configure and activate policies
without resetting the BGP TCP session, that is, BGP Soft Reconfiguration.
Note: If you enter clear ip bgp ipv6-address soft, both inbound and
outbound policies are reset.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound policies.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies.
Command
History
clear ip bgp ipv6-address

ce Reset BGP sessions specific to an IPv6 address on the E-Series. The soft parameter (BGP Soft
Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection.
Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6-address [flap-statistics | ipv4 {multicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}}
| unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} | ipv6 unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}|
soft [in | out]
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter an IPv6 address to reset neighbors belonging to that IP. Used without a
qualifier, the keyword resets all neighbors belonging to that IP.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to clear all flap
statistics belonging to that AS or a specified address family within that IP.
family.
family.
unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword unicast to select the unicast option

multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to select the multicast option
Multicast is supported on IPv4 only
soft (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword soft to configure and activate policies
without resetting the BGP TCP session, that is, BGP Soft Reconfiguration.
Note: If you enter clear ip bgp ip6-address soft, both inbound and
outbound policies are reset.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound policies.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies.
Command
History

ce Reset a peer-groups BGP sessions.
Syntax clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group.
Command
History
clear ip bgp ipv6 dampening

ce Clear information on route dampening and return suppressed route to active state.
Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening [ipv6-address]
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in
the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
Command
History


Usage After you enter this command, the software deletes history routes and returns suppressed routes to
Information active state.
clear ip bgp ipv6 flap-statistics

ce Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap.
Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address | filter-list as-path-name | regexp
regular-expression]
Parameters
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed
by the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
configured AS-PATH list.
regexp regular-expression (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp followed by regular
expressions. Use one or a combination of the following:
. (period) matches on any single character, including white space
* (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more
sequences)
+ (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more
sequences)
? (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences)
[ ] (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
^ (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is
used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on
everything BUT the characters specified.)
$ (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string.
Command
History
Usage If you enter clear ip bgp ipv6 flap-statistics without any parameters, all statistics are cleared.
Information
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics View BGP flap statistics.
Commands

c et Clear and reapply policies for IPv6 unicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is,
perform BGP soft reconfiguration.
Syntax clear ip bgp {* | as-number | ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighbor-addr | peer-group name} ipv6

unicast soft [in | out]
Parameters
1-4294967295 (4-Byte) or
0.1-65535.65535 (Dotted format)
ipv6-neighbor-addr
ipv6 unicast Clear and reapply policies for all IPv6 unicast routes.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv4 multicast and IPv6 unicast routes
History
debug ip bgp
ce Allows you to view all information on BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and
updates.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv6-address | peer-group peer-group-name] [in | out]
To disable all BGP debugging, enter no debug ip bgp.
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
peer-group Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the peer
peer-group-name group.

in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on

inbound BGP routes.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on
outbound BGP routes.
Command
History
Usage To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters
Information in the debugging command. The in and out parameters cancel each other; for example, if you enter
debug ip bgp in and then enter debug ip bgp out, you will not see information on the incoming
routes.
Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP.
Related
debug ip bgp events View information about BGP events.
Commands
debug ip bgp keepalives View information about BGP keepalives.
debug ip bgp notifications View information about BGP notifications.
debug ip bgp updates View information about BGP updates.
debug ip bgp events

ce Allows you to view information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv6-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out]
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv6-address | peer-group peer-group-name]

events command.
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name
peer-group-name of the peer group.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only events on inbound
BGP messages.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only events on outbound
BGP messages.
Command
History

Usage Enter the no debug ip bgp command to remove all configured debug commands for BGP.
Information
debug ip bgp ipv6 dampening

ce View information on IPv6 routes being dampened.
Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening [in | out]
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening.
Parameters
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound dampened routes.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound dampened routes.
Command
History
Information
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View BGP dampened routes.
Commands
dampened-paths

c et Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv6 unicast routes.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name]

ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command.
Parameters
debugging.
ipv6 unicast Debug soft reconfiguration for IPv6 unicast routes.
Defaults Disabled

Usage This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. If no
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv4 multicast and IPv6 unicast routes
History

ce Allows you to view information about BGP keepalive messages.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv6-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalives [in | out]

keepalives [in | out] command.
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound keepalive
messages.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound keepalive
messages.
Command
History
Information

ce Allows you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv6-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out]

notifications [in | out] command.
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view BGP notifications received
from neighbors.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view BGP notifications sent to
neighbors.
Command
History
Information

ce Allows you to view information about BGP updates.
Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv6-address | peer-group peer-group-name | ipv6 unicast [ipv6-address]]

updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-list-name]
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name |

ipv6 unicast [ipv6-address]] updates [in | out] command.
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
ipv6 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 unicast, and, optionally, an
[ipv6-address] ipv6 address.
from neighbors.
neighbors.

Command

History
Information
default-metric
ce Allows you to change the metrics of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this
command with the redistribute command.
To return to the default setting, enter no default-metric.
Parameters
number Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
Defaults 0
Command
History
Usage The default-metric command in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute
Information for redistributed routes only.
Related
bgp always-compare-med Enable comparison of all BGP MED attributes.
Commands
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into BGP.
description
ce Enter a description of the BGP routing protocol
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the BGP protocol (80 characters maximum).

Command
History
Related
router bgp Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Commands
distance bgp
ce Configure three administrative distances for routes.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 20
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
command.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
Command
History
internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies.
Information low. Routes assigned an administrative distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table.
Routes from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes.
maximum-paths
ce Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports.

Syntax maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number
Parameters
ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes.
ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes.
number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths.
Range: 1 to 16
Default: 1
Defaults 1
Command
History
Usage If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command to recompute the best
Information path.
neighbor activate
ce This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} activate
To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} activate command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Identify a peer group by name.
activate Enter the keyword activate to enable the identified neighbor or peer
group in the new AFI/SAFI.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History

ce Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all
routers in the peer group.
seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP
advertisements.
Default: 5 seconds for internal BGP peers; 30 seconds for external BGP
peers.
Command
History
neighbor allowas-in
ce Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path
Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in number
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in
command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all
routers in the peer group.
number Enter a number of times to allow this neighbor ID to use the AS path.
Range: 1 to 10.
Related
Commands bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process.

Command

History
ce Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name]
To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

default-originate [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in
that peer group.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of
a configured route map.
Command
History
Usage If you apply a route map to a BGP peer or neighbor with the neighbor default-originate command
Information configured, the software does not apply the set filters in the route map to that BGP peer or neighbor.
ce Assign a character string describing the neighbor or group of neighbors (peer group).
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} description text
To delete a description, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} description text

command.
Parameters
text Enter a continuous text string up to 80 characters.

Command
History
ce Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out}
To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command.
Parameters
If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all
routes).
Command
History
Usage Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list and neighbor route-map.
Information
Related
Commands
ce Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl]
To disallow and disconnect connections, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

ebgp-multihop [ttl] command.

Parameters

ttl (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of hops as the Time to Live (ttl) value.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 255
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage To prevent loops, the neighbor ebgp-multihop command will not install default routes of the multihop
Information peer. Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best path selection.
neighbor fall-over
ce Enable or disable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over
To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over command.
Parameters
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage When fall-over is enabled, BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 reachability to the peer remote address and
Information the peer local address. Whenever either address becomes unreachable (i.e, no active route exists in the
routing table for peer IP or IPv6 destination/local address), BGP brings down the session with the peer.
Related
Commands
neighbors

ce Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out}
To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} filter-list

as-path-name {in | out} command.
Parameters
peer group.
as-path-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH access list.
allow routes). (16 characters maximum)
Command
History
ce Control the number of network prefixes received.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold]

[warning-only]
To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] command.
Parameters
maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this
BGP router.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.

threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the

maximum value. When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage
of the maximum value, the E-Series software sends a message.
Default: 75
warning-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword warning-only to set the router to
send a log message when the maximum value is reached. If this
parameter is not set, the router stops peering when the maximum number
of prefixes is reached.
Command
History
Usage If the neighbor maximum-prefix is configured and the neighbor receives more prefixes than allowed by
Information the neighbor maximum-prefix command configuration, the neighbor goes down and the show ip bgp
ipv6 unicast summary command displays (prfxd) in the State/PfxRcd column for that neighbor.
The neighbor remains down until you enter the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command for the
neighbor or the peer group to which the neighbor belongs or you enter neighbor shutdown and
neighbor no shutdown commands.
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Displays the current BGP configuration.
Commands
neighbor X:X:X::X password

c et Enable TCP MD5 Authentication for an IPv6 BGP peer session.
Syntax neighbor x:x:x::x password {7 <encrypt-pass> | <clear-pass}
To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor x:x:x::x password command.
Parameters
encrypt-pass Enter the encrypted password.
clear-pass Enter the clear text password.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage The TCP session is authentication and hence prevents the data from being compromised.
Information

ce Allows you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. (This command is used for
IBGP).
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self
To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

Parameters
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage If the set ipv6 next-hop command in the ROUTE-MAP mode is configured, its configuration takes

ce Allows you to assign one peer to a existing peer group.
Syntax neighbor ipv6-address peer-group peer-group-name
To delete a peer from a peer group, use the no neighbor ipv6-address peer-group
peer-group-name command.
Parameters
peer-group Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of a configured
peer-group-name peer group. (maximum 16 characters)
Command
History

Usage You can assign up to 64 peers to one peer group.
Information
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer groups configured parameters. A peer
cannot become part of a peer group if any of the following commands are configured on the peer:
neighbor distribute-list out
neighbor filter-list out
neighbor route-map out
A neighbor may keep its configuration after it was added to a peer group if the neighbors
configuration is more specific than the peer groups, and the neighbors configuration does not affect
outgoing updates.
A peer group must exist before you add a peer to it. If the peer group is disabled (shutdown) the peers
within the group are also disabled (shutdown).
Related
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Resets BGP sessions.
Commands
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group View BGP peers.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors View BGP neighbors configurations.

ce Allows you to create a peer group and assign it a name.
Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group
To delete a peer group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group command.
Parameters
Command
History
Usage When a peer group is created, it is disabled (shut mode).

Information
Related
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) Assign routers to a peer group.
Commands

neighbor remote-as Assign a indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group.
neighbor shutdown Disable a peer or peer group.

ce Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group, that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message,
but will respond to one.
Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive
To delete a passive peer-group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive

command.
Parameters
Command
History
Usage After you configure a peer group as passive, you must assign it a subnet using the neighbor subnet
Related
neighbor subnet Assign a subnet to a dynamically-configured BGP neighbor.
Commands
neighbor remote-as
ce Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remote-as number
To delete a remote AS entry, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remote-as

number command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to enter the remote AS into routing
tables of all routers within the peer group.
number Enter a number of the AS.
Range: 1 to 65535.

Command

History
Usage If the number parameter is the same as the AS number used in the router bgp command, the remote
Information AS entry in the neighbor is considered an internal BGP peer entry.
This command creates a peer and the newly created peer is disabled (shutdown).
Related
router bgp Enter the ROUTER BGP mode and configure routes in an AS.
Commands
ce Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as
To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers
Command
History
Usage Applies to EBGP neighbors only.

Information
If the AS-PATH contains both public and private AS number or contains AS numbers of an EBGP
neighbor, the private AS numbers are not removed.
If a confederation contains private AS numbers in its AS-PATH, the software removes the private AS
numbers only if they follow the confederation numbers in the AS path.
Private AS numbers are 64512 to 65535.
neighbor route-map
ce Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or peer
group.

Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out}
To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-map
map-name {in | out} command.
Parameters
If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all
routes).
Command
History
ce Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client
use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client command.
Parameters

Command

History
ce Send a COMMUNITY attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. A COMMUNITY attribute indicates
that all routes with that attribute belong to the same community grouping.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} send-community
To disable sending a COMMUNITY attribute, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address |

peer-group-name} send-community command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to send a COMMUNITY attribute to all
Defaults Not configured and COMMUNITY attributes are not sent to neighbors.
Command
History
neighbor shutdown
ce Disable a BGP neighbor or peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} shutdown
To enable a disabled neighbor or peer group, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address |

peer-group-name} shutdown command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within
the peer group.

Defaults Enabled (that is, BGP neighbors and peer groups are disabled.)
Command
History
Usage Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled.
Information
The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer
group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or
peer group is shutdown, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command to confirm its status.
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Display the current BGP configuration.
Commands
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors Display IPv6 routing information exchanged by BGP neighbors.

c et Enable a BGP soft-reconfiguration and start storing updates for inbound IPv6 unicast routes.
Parameters
routing updates.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes ROUTER BGPv6 ADDRESS FAMILY (conf-router_bgpv6_af)
Information for inbound IPv6 unicast routes received by the neighbor but will not reset the peer-session.
Related
Commands
neighbors
Command
History

neighbor subnet
ce Enable passive peering so that the members of the peer group are dynamic
Syntax neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask
To remove passive peering, use the no neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask
command.
Parameters
subnet-number Enter a subnet number in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) as the allowable range of
addresses included in the Peer group.
To allow all addresses, enter 0::0/0.
mask Enter a prefix mask in / prefix-length format (/x).
Command
History
neighbor timers
ce Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime
To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} timers
command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the timers for all routers within
the peer group.
keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive
messages sent to the neighbor routers.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 60 seconds
holdtime Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between the last
keepalive message and declaring the router dead.
Range: 3 to 65535
Defaults keepalive = 60 seconds; holdtime = 180 seconds.

Command
History
Usage Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with
Information the timers bgp command.
When two neighbors, configured with different keepalive and holdtime values, negotiate for new
values, the resulting values will be as follows:
the lower of the holdtime values is the new holdtime value, and
whichever is the lower value; one-third of the new holdtime value, or the configured keepalive
value is the new keepalive value.
ce Enable the E-Series software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} update-source loopback interface
To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

update-source loopback interface command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer
group.
loopback interface Enter the keyword loopback followed by a number of the loopback
interface.
Range: 0 to 16383.
Command
History
Usage Loopback interfaces are up constantly and the BGP session may need one interface constantly up to
Information stabilize the session. The neighbor update-source command is not necessary for directly connected
internal BGP sessions.

neighbor weight
ce Assign a weight to the neighbor connection, which is used to determine the best path.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} weight weight
To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} weight

weight command.
Parameters
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer
group.
weight Enter a number as the weight.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0
Defaults 0
Command
History
Usage In the FTOS best path selection process, the path with the highest weight value is preferred.
Information
Note: Reset the neighbor connection (capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command) to apply
the weight to the connection and recompute the best path.
network
ce Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.
Syntax network ipv6-address prefix-length [route-map map-name]
Parameters
ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix
length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128

mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for
example, /24).
The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D).
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of
an established route map.
match ipv6 address
match ipv6 next-hop
set ipv6 next-hop
Command
History
Usage The E-Series software resolves the network address configured by the network command with the
Information routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable via non-BGP routes and
non-default routes.
Related
Commands
network backdoor
ce Specify this IGP route as the preferred route.
Syntax network ipv6-address prefix-length backdoor
To remove a network, use the no network ipv6-address prefix-length backdoor command.
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
Command
History

Usage Though FTOS does not generate a route due to backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/
Information sourcing a local route in presence of network backdoor config on a learned route.
redistribute
ce Redistribute routes into BGP.
Syntax redistribute {connected | static} [route-map map-name]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution {connected | static} command.
Parameters
interfaces.
map-name route map.
match ipv6 address
match ipv6 next-hop
set ipv6 next-hop
Command
History
To redistribute the default route (0::0/0) configure the neighbor default-originate command.
Related
Commands
redistribute isis
ce Redistribute IS-IS routes into BGP.
Syntax redistribute isis [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value | metric-type {external |
internal}] [route-map map-name]
To stop redistribution of IS-IS routes, use the no redistribute isis command.

Parameters
level-1 | level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the type (level) of routes to redistribute.
| level-2]
metric (OPTIONAL) Assign metric to an interface for use with IPv6 information
metric-type (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route advertised into a
routing domain. You must specify one of the following:
external
internal (Default)
route-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an
map-name established route map.
match ipv6 address
match ipv6 next-hop
set ipv6 next-hop
Command
History
redistribute ospf
ce Redistribute OSPFv3 routes into BGP.
map-name]
Parameters
process-id Enter the number of the OSPFv3 process.
Range: 1 to 65535
match external (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF external routes.
{1 | 2} You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPFv3 internal
routes only.
map-name established route map.
match ipv6 address
match ipv6 next-hop
set ipv6 next-hop

Command
History
Usage When you enter redistribute ospf process-id command without any other parameters, FTOS
Information redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes.
router bgp
ce Enter ROUTER BGP mode to configure and enable BGP.
Syntax router bgp as-number

To disable BGP, use the no router bgp as-number command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 65535.
Command
History

ce Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv6 address on the E-Series.
Syntax show capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv6-address
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of a BGP neighbor.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Related
Commands
show config
ce View the current ROUTER BGP configuration.
Syntax show config
Example Figure 27-1. show config Command Example (Partial)

FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#show conf
!
router bgp 18508
neighbor RR-CLIENT peer-group
neighbor RR-CLIENT remote-as 18508
neighbor RR-CLIENT no shutdown
neighbor RR-CLIENT-PASSIV peer-group passive
neighbor RR-CLIENT-PASSIV remote-as 18508
neighbor RR-CLIENT-PASSIV subnet 9000::9:0/120
neighbor RR-CLIENT-PASSIV no shutdown
neighbor 1109::33 remote-as 18508
neighbor 1109::33 update-source Loopback 101
neighbor 1109::33 no shutdown
neighbor 2222::220 route-reflector-client
neighbor 2222::220 update-source Loopback 100
neighbor 9000::1:2 remote-as 640
no neighbor 9000::1:2 activate
neighbor 9000::1:2 no shutdown
!
FTOS#

ce View the current BGP routing table for the E-Series.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast [network [network-mask] [longer-prefixes]]
Parameters
address.
common prefix.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command

History
Usage When you enable bgp non-deterministic-med command, the show ip bgp command output for a
Information BGP route does not list the INACTIVE reason.

ce View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list [cluster-id]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export]

[no-advertise]
Parameters
community groups.

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast
Information summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes
found.

ce View routes that are affected by a specific community list.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list community-list-name [exact-match]
Parameters
exact-match (OPTIONAL) Enter exact-match to display only for an exact match of the
communities.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce Display BGP internal information for IPv6 Unicast address family.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail
Defaults none
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list

ce View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list [list name]
Parameters
list name Enter the extended community list name you wish to view.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
found.
The show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at
least one BGP community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast
command output.
Command
History

ce View the routes that match the filter lists.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter-list as-path-name
Parameters

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View flap statistics on BGP routes.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address prefix-length] [filter-list

as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression]
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
filter-list as-path-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of
a configured AS-PATH ACL.
regexp regular-expression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View routes with inconsistent originating Autonomous System (AS) numbers, that is, prefixes that are
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce Displays information on IPv6 unicast routes exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors [ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighbor-addr]

[advertised-routes | dampened-routes | detail | flap-statistics | routes | received-routes
[network [network-mask]] | denied-routes [network [network-mask]]]
Parameters
ipv6 unicast Enter the ipv6 unicast keywords to view information only related to IPv6
unicast routes.
neighbors routes.
routes.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on S4810

Example 1 Figure 27-2. Command Example: show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors
FTOS#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors
BGP neighbor is 5ffe:10::3, remote AS 1, external link


MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)


Last reset 00:00:39, due to Closed by neighbor
'OPEN error/Bad AS' Sent : 0 Recv: 1
Local host: 5ffe:10::4, Local port: 179

Foreign host: 5ffe:10::3, Foreign port: 35470


MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)
MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)



Table 27-1. Command Example fields: show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors

ID.
from its neighbor
(List of inbound and outbound Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route
Prefixes accepted Displays the number of network prefixes accepted by the router and
Prefixes advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number
number.
number.
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View the current BGP routing table.
Commands

ce Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group [peer-group-name [summary]]
Parameters
group only.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view peer-group-specific information
for the IPv6 address family.
The output is the same as that found in show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary
command
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 27-3. show ip bgp peer-group Command Example

FTOS#show ip bgp peer-group
Peer-group RR-CLIENT, remote AS 18508

BGP version 4

BGP neighbor is RR-CLIENT, peer-group internal,
9000::4:
Peer-group RR-CLIENT-PASSIV, remote AS 18508

BGP version 4

BGP neighbor is RR-CLIENT-PASSIV, peer-group internal,
9000::9:2*
FTOS#

ce Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 27-4. show ip bgp summary Command Example

FTOS# show ip bgp summary
6 BGP community entrie(s) using 234 bytes of memory
1109::33 18508 0 0 0 0 0 never Active

2222::220 18508 0 0 0 0 0 never Active
4000::33 18508 0 0 0 0 0 never Active
4000::60 18508 0 0 0 0 0 never Active
9000::4:2 18508 0 0 0 0 0 never Active
9000::5:2 1 35 32 0 0 0 00:16:42 0
9000::6:2 2 35 32 0 0 0 00:16:39 0
9000::7:2 3 35 32 0 0 0 00:16:41 0
9000::8:2 18508 35 32 0 0 0 00:16:42 0
9000::9:2 18508 44 19 0 0 0 00:16:41 0
9000::a:2 18508 35 32 0 0 0 00:16:43 0
9000::b:14 18508 29 29 0 0 0 00:13:01 0
FTOS#

ce View all next hops (via learned routes only) with current reachability and flap status. This command
only displays one path, even if the next hop is reachable by multiple paths.
Syntax show ip bgp next-hop [local-routes]
Parameters
local-routes (OPTIONAL) Show next-hop information for local routes
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 27-5. show ip bgp next-hop Command Example
FTOS#show ip bgp next-hop

Next-hop Via RefCount Cost Flaps Time Elapsed
9000::5:2 9000::5:2, Gi 8/38 2 0 0 00:23:22
9000::6:2 9000::6:2, Gi 8/38 2 0 0 00:23:22
9000::7:2 9000::7:2, Gi 8/38 2 0 0 00:23:22
9000::8:2 9000::8:2, Gi 8/38 2 0 0 00:23:22
9000::9:2 9000::9:2, Gi 8/38 6000 0 0 00:23:16
9000::a:2 9000::a:2, Gi 8/38 2 0 0 00:23:22
FTOS#
show ip bgp paths

ce View all the BGP path attributes in the BGP database.
Syntax show ip bgp paths [regexp regular-expression]
Parameters
? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences).
You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the
? regular expression.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View all unique AS-PATHs in the BGP database
Syntax show ip bgp paths as-path
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History


ce View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database.
Syntax show ip bgp paths community
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View all unique Extended community information in the BGP database.
Syntax show ip bgp paths extcommunity
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
show ip bgp regexp

ce Allows you to view the subset of BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified.
Syntax show ip bgp regexp regular-expression [character]

Parameters
regular-expression [character] Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the
^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is
used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on
everything BUT the characters specified.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
timers bgp
ce Allows you to adjust the BGP network timers for all neighbors.
Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtimer

To return to the default values, use the no timers bgp command.
Parameters
keepalive Enter the time interval in seconds between which the E-Series sends keepalive messages.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 60 seconds
holdtimer Enter the time interval in seconds which the E-Series waits since the last keepalive
message before declaring a BGP peer dead.
Range: 3 to 65535
Defaults keepalive = 60 seconds; holdtimer = 180 seconds
Command
History
Related
neighbor timers Adjust BGP timers for a specific peer or peer group.
Commands

IPv6 MBGP Commands
Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the
Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). FTOS
MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. The MBGP commands are:
address family
aggregate-address
bgp dampening
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group updates
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast updates
distance bgp
neighbor activate
neighbor route-map
network
redistribute
address family
ce This command changes the context to SAFI (Subsequent Address Family Identifier).
Syntax address family ipv6 unicast

To remove SAFI context, use the no address family ipv6 unicast command.
Parameters
ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to specify the address family as IPv6.
unicast Enter the keyword unicast to specify multicast as SAFI.
Defaults IPv6 Unicast
Command
History
Usage All subsequent commands will apply to this address family once this command is executed. You can
Information exit from this AFI/SAFI to the IPv6 Unicast (the default) family by entering exit and returning to the
Router BGP context.
aggregate-address
ce Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.
Syntax aggregate-address ipv6-address prefix-length [advertise-map map-name] [as-set]

[attribute-map map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name]
Parameters
Range: /0 to /128
advertise-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map followed by the
map-name name of a configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate
route.
as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword as-set to generate path attribute
information and include it in the aggregate.
AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes
included in the aggregated route.
attribute-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords attribute-map followed by the name
of a configured route map to modify attributes of the aggregate, excluding
AS_PATH and NEXT_HOP attributes.
summary-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary-only to advertise only the
aggregate address. Specific routes will not be advertised.
suppress-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords suppress-map followed by the
map-name name of a configured route map to identify which more-specific routes in
the aggregate are suppressed.

Command
History
Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate. If routes within the aggregate are constantly
changing, the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH.
suppressed.
bgp dampening
ce Enable MBGP route dampening.
Syntax bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name]
To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name]
command.
Parameters
half-life time (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is
is decreased by half, after the half-life period expires.
Range: 1 to 45.
Default: 15 minutes
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast

ce Reset MBGP sessions.

Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast * ipv6-address prefix-length [dampening | flap-statistics]
peer-group]
Parameters
* Enter the character * to clear all peers.
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix
Range: /0 to /128
dampening (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap
dampening information.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword flap-statistics to reset the flap
statistics on all prefixes from that neighbor.
peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group to clear all members of a
peer-group.
Command
History
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening

ce Clear information on route dampening.
Syntax clear ip bgp dampening ipv6 unicast [network network-mask]
Parameters
network (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 network address in x:x:x:x::x format.
network-mask If you enter the network address, then enter the network mask, from 0 to 128.
Command
History
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics

ce Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap.
Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [network | filter-list list |regexp regexp
Parameters
network (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 network address in x:x:x:x::x format to clear flap statistics.

filter-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list followed by the name of a configured AS-PATH
list list (max 16 characters).
regexp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp followed by regular expressions. Use one or a
regexp combination of the following:
. (period) matches on any single character, including white space
* (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences)
+ (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences)
? (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences)
[ ] (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns.
^ (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used at the beginning of a
sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified.)
$ (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string.
Command
History
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening

ce View information on routes being dampened.
Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening
Parameters
dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening information.
Command
History
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group updates

ce View information about BGP peer-group updates.
Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out]
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group peer-group-name

updates [in | out] command.
Parameters
peer-group Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the peer-group.
peer-group-name


from neighbors.
neighbors.
Command
History
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast updates

ce View information about BGP updates.
Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast ipv6-address prefix-length updates [in | out]
To disable debugging, enter no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast ipv6-address prefix-length updates
[in | out] command.
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix
Range: /0 to /128
from neighbors.
neighbors.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
distance bgp
ce Define an administrative distance for routes.

Parameters
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 20
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
command.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 200
Command
History
Caution: Dell Force10 recommends that you do not change the administrative distance
of internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table
inconsistencies.
neighbor activate
ce This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI.
Syntax neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] activate
To disable, use the no neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] activate command.
Parameters
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
AFI/SAFI.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History

Related
Commands
address family Changes the context to SAFI
ce Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

Parameters
in the peer group.
Command
=

History
ce Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.
Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name]
To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name}

Parameters
group.

Command
History
ce Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list.
Syntax neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] distribute-list prefix-list-name [in | out]
To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name]

distribute-list prefix-list-name [in | out] command.
Parameters
in the peer group.
Command
History
Usage Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list and neighbor route-map.
Information
Related
Commands
ce Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
Syntax neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] filter-list aspath access-list-name [in | out]
To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] filter-list aspath
access-list-name [in | out] command.

Parameters

peer group.
access-list-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH access list.
allow routes).
Command
History
ce Control the number of network prefixes received.
Syntax neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name maximum-prefix maximum [threshold]

[warning-only]
To return to the default values, use the no neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name

Parameters
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value, the
E-Series software sends a message.
Default: 75
Command
History

ce Allows you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor.
Syntax neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name next-hop-self
To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name

Parameters
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage If the set ipv6 next-hop command in the ROUTE-MAP mode is configured, its configuration takes
ce Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates.
Syntax neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name remove-private-as
To return to the default, use the no neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name

Parameters
peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS
numbers
Command
History

neighbor route-map
ce Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or peer
group.
Syntax neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name route-map map-name [in | out]
To remove the route map, use the no neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-group-name] route-map
map-name [in | out] command.
Parameters
Command
History
ce Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster.
Syntax neighbor ipv6-address| peer-group-name route-reflector-client
use the no neighbor ipv6-address | peer-group-name route-reflector-client command.
Parameters

Command
History
network
ce Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.
Syntax network ipv6-address [route-map map-name]
To remove a network, use the no network ipv6-address [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
map-name route map.
match ipv6 address
match ipv6 next-hop
set ipv6 next-hop
Command
History
Usage The E-Series software resolves the network address configured by the network command with the
Information routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable via non-BGP routes and
non-default routes.
Related
Commands

redistribute
ce Redistribute routes into BGP.
Syntax redistribute [connected | static] [route-map map-name]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution [connected | static] [route-map map-name]

command.
Parameters
interfaces.
map-name route map.
match ipv6 address
match ipv6 next-hop
set ipv6 next-hop
Command
History
To redistribute the default route (0::0/0) configure the neighbor default-originate command.
Related
Commands

ce View the current MBGP routing table for the E-Series.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast [network [network-mask] [length]]
Parameters
address.
common prefix.

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 27-6. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast
FTOS#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast

Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, a
- aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? -
incomplete

h dead:1::/100 5ffe:10::3 0 0 1 i
h 5ffe:11::3 0 0 1 i
*> dead:2::/100 5ffe:10::3 0 0 1 i
* 5ffe:11::3 0 0 1 i
*> dead:3::/100 5ffe:10::3 0 0 1 i
* 5ffe:11::3 0 0 1 i
h dead:4::/100 5ffe:10::3 0 0 1 i
h 5ffe:11::3 0 0 1 i
FTOS#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dead:3::/100
BGP routing table entry for dead:3::/100, version 3

Paths: (2 available, table Default-MBGP-Routing-Table.)
Not advertised to any peer
Received from :
5ffe:10::3 (5.5.5.3) Best
AS_PATH : 1
Next-Hop : 5ffe:10::3, Cost : 0

Origin IGP, Metric 0, LocalPref 100, Weight 0, external
5ffe:11::3 (5.5.5.3)
AS_PATH : 1
Next-Hop : 5ffe:11::3, Cost : 0

Origin IGP, Metric 0, LocalPref 100, Weight 0, external
Inactive reason: Peer IP address
FTOS#
Field Description
If 0::0/0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table.
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View BGP communities.
Commands
community

ce View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list [cluster-id]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export]

[no-advertise]
Parameters
community groups.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
found.

ce View routes that are affected by a specific community list.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list community-list-name
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce Display detailed BGP information.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 27-7. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail Command Example (Partial)
R2_Training#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail
Detail information for BGP Node

bgpNdP 0x41a17000 : NdTmrP 0x41a17000 : NdKATmrP 0x41a17014 : NdTics 327741 :
NhLocAS 1 : NdState 2 : NdRPMPrim 1 : NdListSoc 13
NdAuto 1 : NdEqCost 1 : NdSync 0 : NdDefOrg 0
NdV6ListSoc 14 NdDefDid 0 : NdConfedId 0 : NdMedConfed 0 : NdMedMissVal -1 :
NdIgnrIllId 0 : NdRRC2C 1 : NdClstId 33686273 : NdPaTblP 0x41a19088
NdASPTblP 0x41a19090 : NdCommTblP 0x41a19098 : NhOptTransTblP 0x41a190a0 :
NdRRClsTblP 0x41a190a8
NdPktPA 0 : NdLocCBP 0x41a6f000 : NdTmpPAP 0x419efc80 : NdTmpASPAP 0x41a25000 :
NdTmpCommP 0x41a25800
NdTmpRRClP 0x41a4b000 : NdTmpOptP 0x41a4b800 : NdTmpNHP : NdOrigPAP 0
NdOrgNHP 0 : NdModPathP 0x419efcc0 : NdModASPAP 0x41a4c000 : NdModCommP 0x41a4c800
NdModOptP 0x41a4d000 : NdModNHP : NdComSortBufP 0x41a19110 : NdComSortHdP
0x41a19d04 : NdUpdAFMsk 0 : AFRstSe
t 0x41a1a298 : NHopDfrdHdP 0x41a1a3e0 : NumNhDfrd 0 : CfgHdrAFMsk 1

ce View the routes that match the filter lists.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter-list as-path-name
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce View flap statistics on BGP routes.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address prefix-length] [filter-list

as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression]

Parameters
ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by
prefix-length the prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
regular expression.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 27-8. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics command

FTOS#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics
Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path
source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n -
network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete
Network From Flaps Duration Reuse Path

h dead:1::/100 5ffe:10::3 1 00:03:20 1 i
h dead:1::/100 5ffe:11::3 1 00:03:20 1 i
h dead:4::/100 5ffe:10::3 1 00:04:39 1 i
h dead:4::/100 5ffe:11::3 1 00:04:39 1 i
FTOS#

ce View routes with inconsistent originating Autonomous System (AS) numbers, that is, prefixes that are
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

ce Allows you to view the information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors [ipv6-address prefix-length [advertised-routes |

dampened-routes | detail | flap-statistics | routes]]
Parameters
prefix-length prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
advertised-routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertised-routes to view only the routes
the neighbor sent.
neighbors routes.
detail (OPTIONAL) Display detailed neighbor information.
routes.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Modified: Added detail option; added information to output.

Example Figure 27-9. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors Command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors


MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)



Foreign host: 5ffe:10::3, Foreign port: 35470


MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)

MULTIPROTO_EXT(1)
ROUTE_REFRESH(2)



Table 27-3. show ip bgp neighbors Command Fields

ID.
from its neighbor
(list of inbound and outbound Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route
accepted prefixes Displays the number of network prefixes accepted by the router and
Prefix advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number
number.
number.
Related
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View the current BGP routing table.
Commands

ce Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group [peer-group-name [summary]]
Parameters
group only.
The output is the same as that found in show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary
command
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands

ce Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections.
Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 27-10. show ip bgp summary Command Example

FTOS#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary
2 network entrie(s) and 4 paths using 536 bytes of memory
Dampening enabled. 0 history paths, 0 dampened paths, 0 penalized paths
5ffe:10::3 1 28 0 12 0 0 00:01:01 2
5ffe:11::3 1 27 0 12 0 0 00:00:55 2
FTOS#

Table 27-4. show ip bgp summary Command Fields
Field Description
network entries Displays the number of network entries and route paths and the
amount of memory used to process those entries.
BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of
memory used to process them.
BGP AS-PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and
the amount of memory used to process them.
BGP community entries Displays the number of BGP COMMUNITY attributes processed
and the amount of memory used to process them. The show ip bgp
ipv6 unicast community command provides more details on the
COMMUNITY attributes.
Dampening enabled Displayed only when dampening is enabled. Displays the number
of paths designated as history, dampened, or penalized.
TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that
neighbor.
InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be
processed.
OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that
neighbor.
If a number appears in parentheses, the number represents the
number of messages waiting to be sent to the peer group.
Up/Down Displays the amount of time (in hours:minutes:seconds) that the
neighbor is in the Established stage.
If the neighbor has never moved into the Established stage, the
word never is displayed.
State/Pfx If the neighbor is in Established stage, the number of network
prefixes received.
If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor
maximum-prefix command, (prfxd) appears in this column.
If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is
displayed (Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm) When
the peer is transitioning between states and clearing the routes
received, the phrase (Purging) may appear in this column.
If the neighbor is disabled, the phrase (Admin shut) appears in this
column.

28
Intermediate System to Intermediate System
(IS-IS)
Overview
Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol (IS-IS) for IPv4 and IPv6is supported only on
the E-Series platform, as indicated by the e character under each command heading.
IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the
communication between open systems, supporting routers passing both IP and OSI traffic.
A router is considered an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing
domains, called areas. Intermediate systems send, receive, and forward packets to other routers within
their area (Level 1 and Level 1-2 devices). Only Level 1-2 and Level 2 devices communicate with
other areas.
IS-IS protocol standards are listed in the Standard Compliance chapter in the FTOS Configuration
Guide.
Note: The fundamental mechanisms of IS-IS are the same between IPv4 and IPv6. Where
there are differences between the two versions, they are identified and clarified in this chapter.
Except where identified, the information in this chapter applies to both protocol versions.
Commands
The following are the FTOS commands to enable IS-IS.
adjacency-check
advertise
area-password
clear config
clear isis
clns host
debug isis
debug isis adj-packets
debug isis local-updates
debug isis snp-packets
debug isis spf-triggers
debug isis update-packets
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) | 819

default-information originate
description
distance
distribute-list in
distribute-list out
distribute-list redistributed-override
domain-password
graceful-restart ietf
graceful-restart interval
graceful-restart t1
graceful-restart t2
graceful-restart t3
graceful-restart restart-wait
hello padding
hostname dynamic
ignore-lsp-errors
ip router isis
ipv6 router isis
isis circuit-type
isis csnp-interval
isis hello-interval
isis hello-multiplier
isis hello padding
isis ipv6 metric
isis metric
isis network point-to-point
isis password
isis priority
is-type
log-adjacency-changes
lsp-gen-interval
lsp-mtu
lsp-refresh-interval
max-area-addresses
max-lsp-lifetime
maximum-paths
metric-style
multi-topology
net
passive-interface
redistribute
redistribute bgp
redistribute ospf
router isis
set-overload-bit
show config
820 | Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)

show isis database
show isis graceful-restart detail
show isis hostname
show isis interface
show isis neighbors
show isis protocol
show isis traffic
spf-interval
adjacency-check
e Verify that the protocols supported field of the IS-IS neighbor contains matching values to this
router.
Syntax adjacency-check
To disable adjacency check, use the no adjacency-check command.
Defaults Enabled
Command Modes ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4)
CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6)
Command
History
Usage Use this command to perform protocol-support consistency checks on hello packets. The
Information adjacency-check is enabled by default.
advertise
e Leak routes between levels (distribute IP prefixes between Level 1 and Level 2 and vice versa).
Syntax advertise {level1-into-level2 | level2-into-level1} prefix-list-name
To return to the default, use the no advertise {level1-into-level2 |

level2-into-level1}[prefix-list-name] command.
Parameters
level1-into-level2 Enter the keyword level1-into-level2 to advertise Level 1 routes into
Level 2 LSPs.
This is the default.
level2-into-level1 Enter the keyword level2-into-level1 to advertise Level 2 inter-area
routes into Level 1 LSPs.
Described in RFC 2966.
prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP prefix list. Routes meeting the criteria of the
IP Prefix list are leaked.
Defaults level1-into-level2 (Level 1 to Level 2 leaking enabled.)

Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced IPv6 ISIS support
History
Usage You cannot disable leaking from one level to another, however you can regulate the rate flow from one
Information level to another via an IP Prefix list. If the IP Prefix list is not configured, all routes are leaked.
Additional information can be found in IETF RFC 2966, Domain-wide Prefix Distribution with
Two-Level IS-IS.
area-password
e Configure a Hash Message Authentication Code (HMAC) authentication password for an area.
Syntax area-password [hmac-md5 | encryption-type] password
To delete a password, enter no area-password.
Parameters
hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword hmac-md5 to encrypt the password.

encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES.
password Enter a 116-character length alphanumeric string to prevent unauthorized access or
incorrect routing information corrupting the link state database. The password is
processed as plain text which only provides limited security.
Command Modes ROUTER ISIS
Usage Use the area-password command on routers within an area to prevent the link state database from
Information receiving incorrect routing information from unauthorized routers.
The password configured is injected into Level 1 LSPs, CSNPs, and PSNPs.
Related
Commands domain-password Allows you to set the authentication password for a routing domain.
isis password Allows you to configure an authentication password for an interface.
clear config
e Clear IS-IS configurations that display under the router isis heading of the show
running-config command output.
Syntax clear config

Usage Use caution when you enter this command. Back up your configuration prior to using this command or
Information your IS-IS configuration will be erased.
Related
copy Use this command to save the current configuration to another location.
Commands
clear isis
e Restart the IS-IS process. All IS-IS data is cleared.
Syntax clear isis [tag] {* | database | traffic}
Parameters
tag (Optional) Enter an alphanumeric string to specify the IS-IS routing tag area.
* Enter the keyword * to clear all IS-IS information and restarts the IS-IS process. This
command removes IS-IS neighbor information and IS-IS LSP database information and
the full SPF calculation will be done.
database Clears IS-IS LSP database information.
traffic Clears IS-IS counters.
clns host
e Define a name-to-network service mapping point (NSAP) mapping that can then be used with
commands that require NSAPs and system IDs.
Syntax clns host name nsap
Parameters
name Enter an alphanumeric string to identify the name-to-NSAP mapping.
nsap Enter a specific NSAP address that will be associated with the name parameter.
Usage Use this command to configure a shortcut name that can used instead of entering a long string of
Information numbers associated with an NSAP address.
Related
Commands hostname dynamic Enables dynamic learning of hostnames from routers in the domain and
allows the routers to advertise the hostnames in LSPs.
debug isis
e Enable debugging for all IS-IS operations.
Syntax debug isis

To disable debugging of IS-IS, enter no debug isis.
Usage Entering debug isis enables all debugging parameters.

Information
Use this command to display all debugging information in one output. To turn off debugging, you
normally enter separate no forms of each command. Enter the no debug isis command to disable all
debug messages for IS-IS at once.
debug isis adj-packets

e Enable debugging on adjacency-related activity such as hello packets that are sent and received on
IS-IS adjacencies.
Syntax debug isis adj-packets [interface]
To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis adj-packets [interface] command.
Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
debug isis local-updates

e Enables debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information to debug IS-IS local
update packets.
Syntax debug isis local-updates [interface]
To turn off debugging, enter the no debug isis local-updates [interface] command.

Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
information.
debug isis snp-packets

e Enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information to debug IS-IS complete
sequence number PDU (CSNP) and partial sequence number PDU (PSNP) packets.
Syntax debug isis snp-packets [interface]
To turn off debugging, enter the no debug isis snp-packets [interface] command.
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
information.
debug isis spf-triggers

e Enable debugging on the events that triggered IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) events for debugging
purposes.
Syntax debug isis spf-triggers
To turn off debugging, enter no debug isis spf-triggers.

debug isis update-packets
e Enable debugging on Link State PDUs (LSPs) that are detected by a router.
Syntax debug isis update-packets [interface]
To turn off debugging, enter the no debug isis update-packets [interface] command.
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
information.
e Generate a default route into an IS-IS routing domain and controls the distribution of default
information.
Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric] [route-map map-name]
To disable the generation of a default route into the specified IS-IS routing domain, enter the no
default-information originate [always] [metric metric] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to have the default route always
advertised
metric metric (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number to assign to the
route.
Range: 0 to 16777215
route-map (OPTIONAL) A default route will be generated by the routing process if the route
map-name map is satisfied.
Command
History

Usage When you use this command to redistribute routes into a routing domain, the router becomes an
Information autonomous system (AS) boundary router. An AS boundary router does not always generate a default
route into a routing domain. The router still requires its own default route before it can generate one.
How a metric value assigned to a default route is advertised depends on how on the configuration of
the metric-style command. If the metric-style is set for narrow mode and the metric value in the
default-information originate command is set to a number higher than 63, the metric value advertised
in LSPs will be 63. If the metric-style is set for wide mode, their the metric value in the
default-information originate command is advertised.
Related
redistribute Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain.
Commands
isis metric Configure a metric for an interface
metric-style Set the metric style for the router.
show isis database Display the IS-IS link state database.
description
ces Enter a description of the IS-IS routing protocol
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the IS-IS protocol (80 characters maximum).
Command
History
Related
router isis Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Commands
distance
e Define the administrative distance for learned routes.
Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask [prefix-list]]
To return to the default values, enter the no distance weight command.

Parameters
weight The administrative distance value indicates the reliability of a routing information
source.
Range: 1 to 255. (A higher relative value indicates lower reliability. Routes with
smaller values are given preference.)
Default: 115
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and enter a mask in
either dotted decimal or /prefix format.
prefix-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a prefix list name.
Defaults weight = 115
Usage The administrative distance indicates the trust value of incoming packets. A low administrative
Information distance indicates a high trust rate. A high value indicates a lower trust rate. For example, a weight of
255 is interpreted that the routing information source is not trustworthy and should be ignored.
distribute-list in
e Filter network prefixes received in updates.
Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface]
To return to the default values, enter the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface]

command.
Parameters
prefix-list-name Specify the prefix list to filter prefixes in routing updates.
For a1- Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet
number:
ExaScale.
information.

Command
History
Related
distribute-list out Suppress networks from being advertised in updates.
Commands
redistribute Redistributes routes from one routing domain to another routing domain.
distribute-list out
e Suppress network prefixes from being advertised in outbound updates.
Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | bgp as number | ospf process-id | rip | static]
To return to the default values, enter the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp as number
connected | ospf process-id | rip | static] command.
Parameters
prefix-list-name Specify the prefix list to filter prefixes in routing updates.
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected for directly connected routing
process.
ospf process-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ospf followed by the OSPF process-ID number.
Range: 1 to 65535
bgp as number (OPTIONAL) Enter the BGP followed by the AS Number.
Range: 1 to 65535
rip (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rip for RIP routes.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static for user-configured routing process.
Command
History
Usage You can assign a name to a routing process so a prefix list will be applied to only the routes derived
Information from the specified routing process.
Related
distribute-list in Filters networks received in updates.
Commands
redistribute Redistributes routes from one routing domain to another routing domain.
distribute-list redistributed-override
e Suppress flapping of routes when the same route is redistributed into IS-IS from multiple routers in the
network.

Syntax distribute-list redistributed-override in
To return to the default, use the no distribute-list redistributed-override in command.
Command
History
Usage When the command is executed, IS-IS will not download the route to the routing table if the same route
Information was redistributed into IS-IS routing protocol on the same router.
domain-password
e Set the authentication password for a routing domain.
Syntax domain-password [hmac-md5 | encryption-type] password
To disable the password, enter no domain-password.
Parameters
hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword hmac-md5 to encrypt the password using
MD5.
password Enter an alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long.
If you do not specify an encryption type or hmac-md5 keywords, the password is
processed as plain text which provides limited security.
Defaults No default password.
Usage The domain password is inserted in Level 2 link state PDUs (LSPs), complete sequence number PDUs
Information (CSNPs), and partial sequence number PDUs (PSNPs).
Related
area-password Configure an IS-IS area authentication password.
Commands
isis password Configure the authentication password for an interface.
graceful-restart ietf
e Enable Graceful Restart on an IS-IS router.
Syntax graceful-restart ietf
To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart ietf command.

Parameters
ietf Enter ietf to enable Graceful Restart on the IS-IS router.
Defaults Default is Graceful Restart disabled
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series
History
Usage A Restart TLV included in every Graceful Restart enabled routers HELLO PDUs. This enables the
Information (re)starting as well as the existing ISIS peers to detect the GR capability of the routers on the connected
network. A flag in the Restart TLV contains Restart Request (RR), Restart Acknowledge (RA) and
Suppress Adjacency Advertisement (SA) bit flags.
The ISIS Graceful Restart enabled router can co-exist in mixed topologies where some routers are
Graceful Restart enabled and others are not. For neighbors that are not Graceful Restart enabled, the
restarting router brings up the adjacency per the usual methods.
graceful-restart interval
e Set the Graceful Restart grace period, the time during which all Graceful Restart attempts are
prevented.
Syntax graceful-restart interval minutes
To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart interval command.
Parameters
minutes Range: 1-20 minutes
Default: 5 minutes
Defaults 5 minutes
Command
History
graceful-restart t1
e Set the Graceful Restart wait time before unacknowledged restart requests are generated. This is the
interval before the system sends a Restart Request (an IIH with RR bit set in Restart TLV) until the
CSNP is received from the helping router.
Syntax graceful-restart t1 {interval seconds | retry-times value}
To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t1command.

Parameters
interval Enter the keyword interval to set the wait time.

Default: 5 seconds
retry-times Enter the keyword retry-times to set the number of times the
request interval is extended until a CSNP is received from the
helping router.
Range: 1-10 attempts
Default: 1
Defaults see above
Command
History
graceful-restart t2
e Configure the wait time for the Graceful Restart timer T2 that a restarting router uses as the wait time
for each database to synchronize.
Syntax graceful-restart t2 {level-1 | level-2} seconds
Parameters
level-1, level-2 Enter the keyword level-1 or level-2 to identify the database
instance type to which the wait interval applies.
seconds Range: 5-120 seconds
Default: 30 seconds
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
graceful-restart t3
e Configure the overall wait time before Graceful Restart is completed.
Syntax graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual} seconds

Parameters
adjacency Enter the keyword adjacency so that the restarting router receives the
remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value
accordingly if user has configured this option.
manual Enter the keyword manual to specify a time value that the restarting
router uses.
default: 30 seconds
Defaults manual, 30 seconds
Command
History
Usage The running router sets remaining time value to the current adjacency hold time. This can be
Information overridden by implementing this command.
Override the default restart-wait time by entering the no graceful-restart restart-wait command.
When restart-wait is disabled, the current adjacency hold time is used.
Be sure to set the t3 timer to adjacency on the restarting router when implementing this command. The
restarting router gets the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value accordingly only
when you have configured graceful-restart t3 adjacency.
Related
Commands
graceful-restart restart-wait Enable the Graceful Restart maximum wait time before a
restarting peer comes up.
graceful-restart restart-wait
e Enable the Graceful Restart maximum wait time before a restarting peer comes up.
Be sure to set the t3 timer to adjacency on the restarting router when implementing this command.
Syntax graceful-restart restart-wait seconds
To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart restart-wait command.
Parameters
seconds Range: 5-300 seconds
Default: 30 seconds
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
Related
Commands
graceful-restart t3 Configure the overall wait time before Graceful Restart is completed.

hello padding
e Use to turn ON or OFF padding for LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs or to selectively turn padding
ON or OFF for LAN or point-to-point hello PDUs.
Syntax hello padding [multi-point | point-to-point]
To return to default, use no hello padding [multi-point | point-to-point].
Parameters
multi-point (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multi-point to pad only LAN hello
PDUs.
point-to-point (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword point-to-point to pad only
point-to-point PDUs.
Defaults Both LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs are padded.
Usage IS-IS hellos are padded to the full maximum transmission unit (MTU) size. Padding IS-IS Hellos
Information (IIHS) to the full MTU provides early error detection of large frame transmission problems or
mismatched MTUs on adjacent interfaces.
Related
isis hello padding Turn ON or OFF hello padding on an interface basis.
Commands
hostname dynamic
e Enables dynamic learning of hostnames from routers in the domain and allows the routers to advertise
the hostname in LSPs.
Syntax hostname dynamic
To disable this command, enter no hostname dynamic.
Defaults Enabled.
Usage Use this command to build name-to-systemID mapping tables through the protocol. All show
Information commands that display systems also display the hostname.
Related
clns host Define a name-to-NSAP mapping.
Commands
ignore-lsp-errors
e Ignore LSPs with bad checksums instead of purging those LSPs.
Syntax ignore-lsp-errors
To return to the default values, enter no ignore-lsp-errors.

Defaults In IS-IS, the default deletes LSPs with internal checksum errors (no ignore-lsp-errors).
Usage IS-IS normally purges LSPs with an incorrect data link checksum, causing the LSP source to
Information regenerate the message. A cycle of purging and regenerating LSPs can occur when a network link
continues to deliver accurate LSPs even though there is a link causing data corruption. This could
cause disruption to your system operation.
ip router isis
e Configure IS-IS routing processes on an interface and attach an area tag name to the routing process.
Syntax ip router isis [tag]
To disable IS-IS on an interface, enter the no ip router isis [tag] command.
Parameters
tag (OPTIONAL) The tag you specify identifies a specific area routing process. If you do not specify
a tag, a null tag is assigned.
Defaults No processes are configured.
Command
History
Usage You must use the net command to assign a network entity title to enable IS-IS.
Information
Related
net Configures an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for the routing process.
Commands
router isis Enables the IS-IS routing protocol.
ipv6 router isis

e Enable the IPv6 IS-IS routing protocol and specify an IPv6 IS-IS process.
Syntax ipv6 router isis [tag]

To disable IS-IS routing, enter no router isis [tag].
Parameters
tag (OPTIONAL) This is a unique name for a routing process. A null tag is assumed if the tag option
is not specified. The tag name must be unique for all IP router processes for a given router.
Command
History

Usage You must configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router
Information system ID.
You must enable routing on one or more interfaces to establish adjacencies and establish dynamic
routing.
Only one IS-IS routing process can be configured to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation
performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time.
Related
net Configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process.
Commands
is-type Assign a type for a given area.
isis circuit-type
e Configure the adjacency type on interfaces.
Syntax isis circuit-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only}
To return to the default values, enter no isis circuit-type.
Parameters
level-1 You can form a Level 1 adjacency if there is at least one common area address between this
system and neighbors.
You cannot form Level 2 adjacencies on this interface.
level-1-2 You can form a Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies when the neighbor is also configured as
Level-1-2 and there is at least one common area, if not, then a Level 2 adjacency is
established.
level-2-only You can form a Level 2 adjacencies when other Level 2 or Level 1-2 routers and their
interfaces are configured for Level 1-2 or Level 2. Level 1 adjacencies cannot be
established on this interface.
Defaults level-1-2
Usage Because the default establishes Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies, you do not need to configure this
Information command. Routers in an IS-IS system should be configured as a Level 1-only, Level 1-2, or Level
2-only system.
Only configure interfaces as Level 1 or Level 2 on routers that are between areas (for example, a Level
1-2 router) to prevent the software from sending unused hello packets and wasting bandwidth.
isis csnp-interval
e Configure the IS-IS complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) interval on an interface.
Syntax isis csnp-interval seconds [level-1 | level-2]
To return to the default values, enter the no isis csnp-interval [seconds] [level-1 | level-2]
command.

Parameters
seconds Interval of transmission time between CSNPs on multi-access networks for the designated
intermediate system.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 10
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the interval of time between transmission of CSNPs
for Level 1.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the interval of time between transmission of CSNPs
for Level 2.
Defaults seconds = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified)
Usage The default values of this command are typically satisfactory transmission times for a specific interface
Information on a designated intermediate system. To maintain database synchronization, the designated routers
send CSNPs.
Level 1 and Level 2 CSNP intervals can be configured independently.
isis hello-interval
e Specify the length of time between hello packets sent.
Syntax isis hello-interval seconds [level-1 | level-2]
To return to the default values, enter the no isis hello-interval [seconds] [level-1 | level-2]
command.
Parameters
seconds Allows you to set the length of time between hello packet transmissions.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 10
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Select this value to configure the hello interval for Level 1.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Select this value to configure the hello interval for Level 2.
Defaults seconds = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified)
Usage Hello packets are held for a length of three times the value of the hello interval. Use a high hello
Information interval seconds to conserve bandwidth and CPU usage. Use a low hello interval seconds for faster
convergence (but uses more bandwidth and CPU resources).
Related
isis hello-multiplier Specifies the number of IS-IS hello packets a neighbor must miss before the
Commands
router should declare the adjacency as down.

isis hello-multiplier
e Specify the number of IS-IS hello packets a neighbor must miss before the router declares the
adjacency down.
Syntax isis hello-multiplier multiplier [level-1 | level-2]
To return to the default values, enter no isis hello-multiplier [multiplier] [level-1 | level-2].
Parameters
multiplier Specifies an integer that sets the multiplier for hello holding time.
Never configure a hello-multiplier lower then the default (3).
Range: 3 to 1000
Default: 3
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Select this value to configure the hello multiplier independently for Level 1
adjacencies.
level-2 (OPTONAL) Select this value to configure the hello multiplier independently for Level 2
adjacencies.
Defaults multiplier =3; level-1 (if not otherwise specified)
Usage The holdtime (the product of the hello-multiplier multiplied by the hello-interval) determines how long
Information a neighbor waits for a hello packet before declaring the neighbor is down so routes can be
recalculated.I
Related
isis hello-interval Specify the length of time between hello packets.
Commands
isis hello padding

e Turn ON or OFF padding of hello PDUs from the interface mode.
Syntax isis hello padding
To return to the default, use the no isis hello padding.
Defaults Padding of hello PDUs is enabled (ON).
Usage Hello PDUs are padded only when both the global and interface padding options are ON. Turning
Information either one OFF will disable padding for the corresponding interface(s).
Related
hello padding Turn ON or OFF padding for LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs.
Commands

isis ipv6 metric
e Assign metric to an interface for use with IPv6 information.
Syntax isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2]

To return to the default values, enter no ipv6 isis metric [default-metric] [level-1 | level-2]
command.
Parameters
default-metric Metric assigned to the link and used to calculate the cost from each other router via the
links in the network to other destinations.
You can configure this metric for Level 1 or Level 2 routing.
Range:0 to 16777215
Default: 10
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter level-1 to configure the shortest path first (SPF) calculation for
Level 1 (intra-area) routing.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter level-2 to configure the SPF calculation for Level 2 (inter-area)
routing.
Defaults default-metric = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified)
Command
History
Usage Dell Force10 recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command,
Information the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics.
isis metric
e Assign a metric to an interface.
Syntax isis metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2]

To return to the default values, enter no isis metric [default-metric] [level-1 | level-2].
Parameters
default-metric Metric assigned to the link and used to calculate the cost from each other router via the
links in the network to other destinations.
You can configure this metric for Level 1 or Level 2 routing.
Range: 0 to 63 for narrow and transition metric styles; 0 to 16777215 for wide metric
styles.
Default: 10
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter level-1 to configure the shortest path first (SPF) calculation for
Level 1 (intra-area) routing.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter level-2 to configure the SPF calculation for Level 2 (inter-area)
routing.
Defaults default-metric = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified)

Usage Dell Force10 recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command,
Information the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics.
isis network point-to-point

e Enable the software to treat a broadcast interface as a point-to-point interface.
Syntax isis network point-to-point
To disable the feature, enter no isis network point-to-point.
isis password
e Configure an authentication password for an interface.
Syntax isis password [hmac-md5] password [level-1 | level-2]
To delete a password, enter the no isis password [password] [level-1 | level-2] command.
Parameters
hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword hmac-md5 to encrypt the password using MD5.
password Assign the interface authentication password.
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the authentication password for Level 1. The
router acts as a station router for Level 1 routing.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the authentication password for Level 2. The
router acts as an area router for Level 2 routing.
Defaults No default password. level-1 (if not otherwise specified)
Usage To protect your network from unauthorized access, use this command to prevent unauthorized routers
Information from forming adjacencies.
You can assign different passwords for different routing levels by using the level-1 and level-2
keywords.
The no form of this command disables the password for Level 1 or Level 2 routing, using the
respective keywords level-1 or level-2.
This password provides limited security as it is processed as plain text.

isis priority
e Set priority of the designated router you select.
Syntax isis priority value [level-1 | level-2]
To return to the default values, enter the no isis priority [value] [level-1 | level-2] command.
Parameters
value This value sets the router priority. The higher the value, the higher the priority.
Range: 0 to 127
Default: 64
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Specify the priority for Level 1.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Specify the priority for Level 2.
Defaults value = 64; level-1 (if not otherwise specified)
Usage You can configure priorities independently for Level 1 and Level 2. Priorities determine which router
Information on a LAN will be the designated router. Priorities are advertised within hellos. The router with the
highest priority will become the designated intermediate system (DIS).
Routers with a priority of 0 cannot be a designated router. Setting the priority to 0 lowers the chance of
this system becoming the DIS, but does not prevent it. If all the routers have priority 0, one with
highest MAC address will become DIS even though its priority is 0.
is-type
e Configure IS-IS operating level for a router.
Syntax is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only}
To return to the default values, enter no is-type.
Parameters
level-1 Allows a router to act as a Level 1 router.
level-1-2 Allows a router to act as both a Level 1 and Level 2 router.
level-2-only Allows a router to act as a Level 2 router.
Defaults level-1-2
Usage The IS-IS protocol automatically determines area boundaries and are able to keep Level 1 and Level 2
Information routing separate. Poorly planned use of this feature may cause configuration errors, such as accidental
area partitioning.
If you are configuring only one area in your network, you do not need to run both Level 1 and Level 2
routing algorithms. The IS type can be configured as Level 1.

e Generate a log messages for adjacency state changes.
Syntax log-adjacency-changes
To disable this function, enter no log-adjacency-changes.
Defaults Adjacency changes are not logged.
Usage This command enables you to monitor adjacency state changes, which is useful when you monitor
Information large networks. Messages are logged in the system error message facility.
lsp-gen-interval
e Set the minimum interval between successive generations of link-state packets (LSPs).
Syntax lsp-gen-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds

[second_wait_interval seconds]]
To restore default values, use the no lsp-gen-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds
[initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] command.
Parameters
level-l (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to apply the configuration to
generation of Level-1 LSPs.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to apply the configuration to
generation of Level-2 LSPs.
interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between LSP generations.
Default: 5 seconds
initial_wait_interval (OPTIONAL) Enter the initial wait time, in seconds, before running the first
seconds LSP generation.
Default: 1 second
second_wait_interval (OPTIONAL) Enter the wait interval, in seconds, between the first and
seconds second LSP generation.
Default: 5 seconds
Defaults Defaults as above
Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support LSP Throttling Enhancement
History

Usage LSP throttling slows down the frequency at which LSPs are generated during network instability. Even
Information though throttling LSP generations slows down network convergence, no throttling can result in a
network not functioning as expected. If network topology is unstable, throttling slows down the
scheduling of LSP generations until the topology regains its stability.
The first generation is controlled by the initial wait interval and the second generation is controlled by
the second wait interval. Each subsequent wait interval is twice as long as the previous one until the
wait interval reaches the maximum wait time specified (interval seconds). Once the network calms
down and there are no triggers for two times the maximum interval, fast behavior is restored (the initial
wait time).
lsp-mtu
e Set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of IS-IS link-state packets (LSPs). This command only
limits the size of LSPs generated by this router.
Syntax lsp-mtu size
To return to the default values, enter no lsp-mtu.
Parameters
size The maximum LSP size, in bytes.
Range: 128 to 1497 for non-jumbo mode; 128 to 9195 for jumbo mode.
Default: 1497
Defaults 1497 bytes
Command
History
Usage The link MTU (mtu command) and the LSP MTU size must be the same
Information
Since each device can generate a maximum of 255 LSPs, consider carefully whether the lsp-mtu
command should be configured.
lsp-refresh-interval
e Set the link state PDU (LSP) refresh interval. LSPs must be refreshed before they expire. When the
LSPs are not refreshed after a refresh interval, they are kept in a database until their max-lsp-lifetime
reaches zero and then LSPs will be purged.
Syntax lsp-refresh-interval seconds
To restore the default refresh interval, enter no lsp-refresh-interval.
Parameters
seconds The LSP refresh interval, in seconds. This value has to be less than the seconds
value specified with the max-lsp-lifetime command.
Default: 900

Command
History
Usage The refresh interval determines the rate at which route topology information is transmitted preventing
Information the information from becoming obsolete.
The refresh interval must be less than the LSP lifetime specified with the max-lsp-lifetime command.
A low value reduces the amount of time that undetected link state database corruption can persist at the
cost of increased link utilization. A higher value reduces the link utilization caused by the flooding of
refreshed packets.
Related
max-lsp-lifetime Sets the maximum interval that LSPs persist without being refreshed
Commands
max-area-addresses
e Configure manual area addresses.
Syntax max-area-addresses number
To return to the default values, enter no max-area-addresses.
Parameters
number Set the maximum number of manual area addresses.
Range: 3 to 6.
Default: 3
Defaults 3 addresses
Usage Use this command to configure the number of area addresses on router. This value should be consistent
Information with routers in the same area, or else, the router will form only Level 2 adjacencies. The value should
be same among all the routers to form Level 1 adjacencies.
max-lsp-lifetime
e Set the maximum time that link-state packets (LSPs) exist without being refreshed.
Syntax max-lsp-lifetime seconds
To restore the default time, enter no max-lsp-lifetime.
Parameters
seconds The maximum lifetime of LSP in seconds. This value must be greater than the
lsp-refresh-interval. The higher the value the longer the LSPs are kept.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 1200

Usage Change the maximum LSP lifetime with this command. The maximum LSP lifetime must always be
Information greater than the LSP refresh interval.
The seconds parameter enables the router to keep LSPs for the specified length of time. If the value is
higher, the overhead is reduced on slower-speed links.
Related
lsp-refresh-interval Use this command to set the link-state packet (LSP) refresh interval.
Commands
maximum-paths
e Allows you to configure the maximum number of equal cost paths allowed in a routing table.
Syntax maximum-paths number
Parameters
number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths an IP routing installs in a
routing table.
Range: 1 to 16.
Default: 4
Defaults 4
Command Mode ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4)
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced MT ISIS support
History
metric-style
e Configure a router to generate and accept old-style, new-style, or both styles of type, length, and values
(TLV).
Syntax metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2]
To return to the default values, enter the no metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide
[transition]} [level-1 | level-2] command.
Parameters
narrow Allows you to configure the E-Series to generate and accept old-style TLVs.
Metric range: 0 to 63
transition Allows you to configure the E-Series to generate both old-style and new-style TLVs.

wide Allows you to configure the E-Series to generate and accept only new-style TLVs.
level-1 Enables the metric style on Level 1.
level-2 Enables the metric style on Level 2.
Defaults narrow; if no Level is specified, Level-1 and Level-2 are configured.
Usage If you enter the metric-style wide command, the FTOS generates and accepts only new-style TLVs.
Information The router uses less memory and other resources rather than generating both old-style and new-style
TLVs.
The new-style TLVs have wider metric fields than old-style TLVs.
Related
isis metric Use this command to configure a metric for an interface.
Commands
multi-topology
e Enables Multi-Topology IS-IS. It also allows enabling/disabling of old and new style TLVs for IP
prefix information in the LSPs.
Syntax multi-topology [transition]
To return to a single topology configuration, enter no multi-topology [transition].
Parameters
transition
Defaults Disabled
Command Mode CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6
Command
History
net
e Use this mandatory command to configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process. If
a NET is not configured, the IS-IS process will not start.
Syntax net network-entity-title
To remove a net, enter no net network-entity-title.
Parameters
network-entity-title Specify the area address and system ID for an IS-IS routing process. The first 1
to 13 bytes identify the area address. The next 6 bytes identify the system ID.
The last 1 byte is the selector byte, always identified as zero zero (00). This
argument can be applied to an address or a name.

passive-interface
e Suppress routing updates on an interface. This command stops the router from sending updates on that
interface.
Syntax passive-interface interface
To delete a passive interface configuration, enter the no passive-interface interface command.
Parameters
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet followed by
For Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16383.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Usage Although the passive interface will neither send nor receive routing updates, the network on that
Information interface will still be included in IS-IS updates sent via other interfaces
redistribute
e Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain.
Syntax redistribute {static | connected | rip} [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value]
[metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name]
To end redistribution or disable any of the specified keywords, enter the
no redistribute {static | connected | rip} [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external |
internal}] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
connected Enter the keyword connected redistribute active routes into IS-IS.
rip Enter the keyword rip to redistribute RIP routes into IS-IS.
static Enter the keyword static to redistribute user-configured routes into IS-IS.

metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Assign a value to the redistributed route.

Range: 0 to 16777215
Default: 0. You should use a value that is consistent with the destination
protocol.
metric-type {external | (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route
internal} advertised into a routing domain. You must specify one of the following:
external
internal
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level 1
routes.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level-1-2
routes.
routes.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) If the route-map argument is not entered, all routes are
redistributed. If a map-name value is not specified, then no routers are
imported.
Defaults metric metric-value = 0; metric-type= internal; level-2
Command
History
Usage To redistribute a default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command.
Information
Changing or disabling a keyword in this command will not affect the state of the other command
keywords.
When an LSP with an internal metric is received, the FTOS considers the route cost taking into
consideration the advertised cost to reach the destination.
Redistributed routing information is filtered with the distribute-list out command to ensure that the
routes are properly are passed to the receiving routing protocol.
How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration
of the metric-style command. If the metric-style command is set for narrow or transition mode and the
metric value in the redistribute command is set to a number higher than 63, the metric value advertised
in LSPs will be 63. If the metric-style command is set for wide mode, an the metric value in the
redistribute command is advertised.
Related
default-information originate Generate a default route for the IS-IS domain.
Commands
distribute-list out Suppress networks from being advertised in updates. Redistributed
routing information is filtered by this command.

redistribute bgp
e Redistribute routing information from a BGP process. (new command in Release 6.3.1)
Syntax redistribute bgp AS number [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [metric-type
{external| internal}] [route-map map-name]
To return to the default values, enter the no redistribute bgp command with the appropriate
parameters.
Parameters
AS number Enter a number that corresponds to the Autonomous System number.
Range: 1 to 65355
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS Level 1
routes only
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS Level 1 and
Level 2 routes.
routes only.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) The value used for the redistributed route. You should use a
metric value that is consistent with the destination protocol.
Range: 0 to 16777215
Default: 0.
metric-type {external| (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route
internal} advertised into a routing domain. The two options are:
external
internal
route-map map-name map-name is an identifier for a configured route map.
Defaults IS-IS Level 2 routes only
Example Figure 28-1. redistribute bgp Command Example

FTOS(conf)#router is
FTOS(conf-router_isis)#redistribute bgp 1 level-1 metric 32 metric-type external
route-map rmap-isis-to-bgp
FTOS(conf-router_bgp)#show running-config isis
!
router isis
redistribute bgp 1 level-1 metric 32 metric-type external route-map
rmap-isis-to-bgp
Command
History

Usage BGP to IS-IS redistribution supports match options using route maps. The metric value, level, and
Information metric-type of redistributed routes can be set by the redistribution command. More advanced set
options can be performed using route maps.
redistribute ospf
e Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process.
Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [match {internal | external}]
[metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name]
To return to the default values, enter the no redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 |
level-2] [match {internal | external}] [metric metric-value][metric-type {external |
internal}] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
process-id Enter a number that corresponds to the OSPF process ID to be redistributed.
Range: 1 to 65355
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) The value used for the redistributed route. You should use a
metric value that is consistent with the destination protocol.
Range: 0 to 16777215
Default: 0.
metric-type {external | (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route
internal} advertised into a routing domain. The two options are:
external
internal
routes.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level-1-2
routes.
routes.
match {external | (OPTIONAL) The command used for OSPF to route and redistribute into
internal} other routing domains. The values are
internal
external
route-map map-name map-name is an identifier for a configured route map.
Defaults As above

Command
History
Usage How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration
Information of the metric-style command. If the metric-style command is set for narrow mode and the metric value
in the redistribute ospf command is set to a number higher than 63, the metric value advertised in LSPs
will be 63. If the metric-style command is set for wide mode, an the metric value in the redistribute
ospf command is advertised.
router isis
e Allows you to enable the IS-IS routing protocol and to specify an IP IS-IS process.
Syntax router isis [tag]
To disable IS-IS routing, enter no router isis [tag].
Parameters
tag (OPTIONAL) This is a unique name for a routing process. A null tag is assumed if the tag option
is not specified. The tag name must be unique for all IP router processes for a given router.
Usage You must configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router
Information system ID.
You must enable routing on one or more interfaces to establish adjacencies and establish dynamic
routing.
Only one IS-IS routing process can be configured to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation
performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time.
Related
ip router isis Configure IS-IS routing processes for IP on interfaces and attach an area designator
Commands
to the routing process.
net Configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process.
is-type Assign a type for a given area.
set-overload-bit
e Configure the router to set the overload bit in its non-pseudonode LSPs. This prevents other routers
from using it as an intermediate hop in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations.
Syntax set-overload-bit
To return to the default values, enter no set-overload-bit.
Defaults Not set.

Command Mode ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4)
Usage Set the overload bit when a router experiences problems, such as a memory shortage due to an
Information incomplete link state database which can result in an incomplete or inaccurate routing table. If you set
the overload bit in its LSPs, other routers ignore the unreliable router in their SPF calculations until the
router has recovered.
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced MT ISIS support
History
show config
e Display the changes you made to the IS-IS configuration. Default values are not shown.
Syntax show config
Examples Figure 28-2. Command Example: show config (router-isis mode)

FTOS(conf-router_isis)#show config
!
router isis
clns host ISIS 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00
net 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00
!
address-family ipv6 unicast
maximum-paths 16 Identifies that Multi-Topology
multi-topology transition
set-overload-bit IS-IS is enabled in transition
spf-interval level-1 100 15 20 mode
spf-interval level-2 120 20 25
exit-address-family
Figure 28-3. Command Example: show config (address-family-ipv6 mode)

FTOS(conf-router_isis-af_ipv6)#show conf
!
address-family ipv6 unicast
maximum-paths 16 Identifies that Multi-Topology
multi-topology transition IS-IS is enabled in transition
set-overload-bit mode
exit-address-family
show isis database

e Display the IS-IS link state database.
Syntax show isis database [level-1 | level-2] [local] [detail | summary] [lspid]

Parameters
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Displays the Level 1 IS-IS link-state database.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Displays the Level 2 IS-IS link-state database.
local (OPTIONAL) Displays local link-state database information.
detail (OPTIONAL) Detailed link-state database information of each LSP displays when
specified. If not specified, a summary displays.
summary (OPTIONAL) Summary of link-state database information displays when specified.
lspid (OPTIONAL) Display only the specified LSP.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 28-4. Command Example: show isis database

FTOS#show isis database
IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database

LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL
ISIS.00-00 * 0x00000006 0xCF43 580 0/0/0

ISIS.00-00 * 0x00000006 0xCF43 580 0/0/0
!
FTOS#show isis database detail ISIS.00-00

ISIS.00-00 * 0x0000002B 0x853B 1075 0/0/0
Area Address: 49.0000.0001
NLPID: 0xCC 0x8E
IP Address: 10.1.1.1
IPv6 Address: 1011::1
Topology: IPv4 (0x00) IPv6 (0x8002)
Metric: 10 IS OSPF.00
Metric: 10 IS (MT-IPv6) OSPF.00
Metric: 10 IP 15.1.1.0 255.255.255.0
Metric: 10 IPv6 (MT-IPv6) 1511::/64
Metric: 10 IPv6 1511::/64
Metric: 10 IP 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0
Hostname: ISIS

ISIS.00-00 * 0x0000002D 0xB2CD 1075 0/0/0
Area Address: 49.0000.0001
NLPID: 0xCC 0x8E Multi-Topology
IP Address: 10.1.1.1 IS-IS is enabled
IPv6 Address: 1011::1
Topology: IPv4 (0x00) IPv6 (0x8002)
Metric: 10 IS OSPF.00
Metric: 10 IS (MT-IPv6) OSPF.00
Metric: 10 IP 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0
Metric: 10 IP 15.1.1.0 255.255.255.0
Metric: 20 IP 10.3.3.0 255.255.255.0
Metric: 10 IPv6 2511::/64
Metric: 20 IPv6 1033::/64
Hostname: ISIS
FTOS#

Table 28-1. Command Example Fields
Field Description
IS-IS Level-1/Level-2 Link Displays the IS-IS link state database for Level 1 or Level 2.
State Database
LSPID Displays the LSP identifier.
The first six octets are the System ID of the originating router.
The next octet is the pseudonode ID. If this byte is not zero, then the LSP
describes system links. If this byte is zero (0), then the LSP describes the state
of the originating router.
The designated router for a LAN creates and floods a pseudonode LSP and
describes the attached systems.
The last octet is the LSP number. An LSP will be divided into multiple LSP
fragments if there is more data than cannot fit in a single LSP. Each fragment
has a unique LSP number.
An * after the LSPID indicates that an LSP was originated by the system where
this command was issued.
LSP Seq Num This value is the sequence number for the LSP that allows other systems to
determine if they have received the latest information from the source.
LSP Checksum This is the checksum of the entire LSP packet.
LSP Holdtime This value is the amount of time, in seconds, that the LSP remains valid. A zero
holdtime indicates that this is a purged LSP and is being removed from the link
state database. A value between brackets indicates the duration that the purged
LSP stays in the database before being removed.
ATT This value represents the Attach bit. This indicates that the router is a Level 2
router and can reach other areas. Level 1-only routers and Level 1-2 routers that
have lost connection to other Level 2 routers use the Attach bit to find the
closest Level 2 router. They point a default route to the closest Level 2 router.
P This value represents the P bit. This bit will always set be zero as Dell Force10
does not support area partition repair.
OL This value represents the overload bit, determining congestion. If the overload
bit is set, other routers will not use this system as a transit router when
calculating routes.
show isis graceful-restart detail

e Display detailed IS-IS Graceful Restart related settings.
Syntax show isis graceful-restart detail
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 28-5. Command Example: show isis graceful-restart detail
FTOS#show isis graceful-restart detail
Configured Timer Value
======================
Graceful Restart : Enabled
T3 Timer : Manual
T3 Timeout Value : 30
T2 Timeout Value : 30 (level-1), 30 (level-2)
T1 Timeout Value : 5, retry count: 1
Adjacency wait time : 30
Operational Timer Value

======================
Current Mode/State : Normal/RUNNING
T3 Time left : 0
T2 Time left : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2)
Restart ACK rcv count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2)
Restart Req rcv count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2)
Suppress Adj rcv count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2)
Restart CSNP rcv count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2)
Database Sync count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2)
FTOS#
show isis hostname

e Display IS-IS host names configured or learned on the E-Series.
Syntax show isis hostname
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 28-6. Command Example: show isis hostname

FTOS#show isis hostname
System Id Dynamic Name Static Name
*F100.E120.0013 FTOS ISIS
FTOS#
show isis interface

e Display detailed IS-IS interface status and configuration information.
Syntax show isis interface [interface]

Parameters
For Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
zero (0) to 16383.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 28-7. Command Example: show isis interface (Partial)

FTOS>show isis int
MTU 1497, Encapsulation SAP
Routing Protocol: IS-IS
Circuit Type: Level-1-2
Interface Index 37847070, Local circuit ID 1
Level-1 Metric: 10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: systest-3.01
Hello Interval: 10, Hello Multiplier: 3, CSNP Interval: 10
Number of active level-1 adjacencies: 1
Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 2 seconds
Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 1 seconds
LSP Interval: 33
MTU 1497, Encapsulation SAP
Routing Protocol: IS-IS
Circuit Type: Level-1-2
Interface Index 38371358, Local circuit ID 2
--More--
show isis neighbors

e Display information about neighboring (adjacent) routers.
Syntax show isis neighbors [level-1 | level-2] [detail] [interface]
Parameters
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 1 IS-IS neighbors.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 2 IS-IS neighbors.

detail (OPTIONAL) Displays detailed information about neighbors.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 28-8. Command Example: show isis neighbors
FTOS#show isis neighbors

System Id Interface State Type Priority Uptime Circuit Id
TEST Gi 7/1 Up L1L2(M) 127 09:28:01 TEST.02
!
FTOS#show isis neighbors detail
System Id Interface State Type Priority Uptime Circuit Id
TEST Gi 7/1 Up L1L2(M) 127 09:28:04 TEST.02 Area Address(es):
49.0000.0001
IP Address(es): 25.1.1.3*
MAC Address: 0000.0000.0000
Hold Time: 28
Link Local Address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:492c
Topology: IPv4 IPv6 , Common (IPv4 IPv6 ) Identified Multi-Topology ISIS enabled
Adjacency being used for MTs: IPv4 IPv6
FTOS#
Table 28-2. show isis neighbors Command Example Fields
Field Description
System Id The value that identifies a system in an area.
Interface The interface, slot, and port in which the router was discovered.
State The value providing status about the adjacency state. The valid values are Up and
Init.
Type This value displays the adjacency type (Layer 2, Layer 2 or both).
Priority IS-IS priority advertised by the neighbor. The neighbor with highest priority becomes
the designated router for the interface.
Uptime Displays the interfaces uptime.
Circuit Id The neighbors interpretation of the designated router for the interface.
Usage Use this command to confirm that the neighbor adjacencies are operating correctly. If you suspect that
Information they are not, you can verify the specified area addresses of the routers by using the show isis neighbors
command.

show isis protocol
e Display IS-IS routing information.
Syntax show isis protocol
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 28-9. Command Example: show isis protocol
FTOS#show isis protocol

IS-IS Router: <Null Tag>
System Id: F100.E120.0013 IS-Type: level-1-2
Manual area address(es):
49.0000.0001
Routing for area address(es):
49.0000.0001
Interfaces supported by IS-IS:
GigabitEthernet 1/0 - IP - IPv6
Loopback 0 - IP - IPv6
Redistributing:
Distance: 115
Generate narrow metrics: level-1-2 Identifies that MT IS-IS
Accept narrow metrics: level-1-2 is enabled.
Generate wide metrics: none
Accept wide metrics: none
Multi Topology Routing is enabled in transition mode.
FTOS#
show isis traffic

e This command enables you to display IS-IS traffic interface information.
Syntax show isis traffic [interface]
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege

Example Figure 28-10. Command Example: show isis traffic
FTOS#sho is traffic
IS-IS: Level-1 Hellos (sent/rcvd) : 0/721
IS-IS: Level-2 Hellos (sent/rcvd) : 900/943
IS-IS: PTP Hellos (sent/rcvd) : 0/0
IS-IS: Level-1 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) : 0/0
IS-IS: Level-2 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) : 1/3
IS-IS: Level-1 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) : 0/0
IS-IS: Level-2 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) : 5934/5217
IS-IS: Level-1 LSPs CSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 0/0
IS-IS: Level-2 LSPs CSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 472/238
IS-IS: Level-1 LSPs PSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 0/0
IS-IS: Level-2 LSPs PSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 10/337
IS-IS: Level-1 DR Elections : 4
IS-IS: Level-2 DR Elections : 4
IS-IS: Level-1 SPF Calculations : 0
IS-IS: Level-2 SPF Calculations : 389
IS-IS: LSP checksum errors received : 0
IS-IS: LSP authentication failures : 0
FTOS#
Table 28-3. Command Example Fields
Item Description
Level-1/Level-2 Hellos (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of Hello packets sent and received.
PTP Hellos (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of point-to-point Hellos sent and received.
Level-1/Level-2 LSPs sourced Displays the number of new and refreshed LSPs.
(new/refresh)
Level-1/Level-2 LSPs flooded Displays the number of flooded LSPs sent and received.
(sent/rcvd)
Level-1/Level-2 LSPs CSNPs (sent/ Displays the number of CSNP LSPs sent and received.
rcvd)
Level-1/Level-2 LSPs PSNPs (sent/ Displays the number of PSNP LPSs sent and received.
rcvd)
Level-1/Level-2 DR Elections Displays the number of times designated router elections ran.
Level-1/Level-2 SPF Calculations Displays the number of shortest path first calculations.
LSP checksum errors received Displays the number of checksum errors LSPs received.
LSP authentication failures Displays the number of LSP authentication failures.
spf-interval
e Specify the minimum interval between Shortest Path First (SPF) calculations.
Syntax spf-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds

[second_wait_interval seconds]]
To restore default values, use the no spf-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds
[initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] command.

Parameters
level-l (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to apply the configuration to

Level-1 SPF calculations.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to apply the configuration to
Level-2 SPF calculations.
interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between SPF calculations.
Default: 10 seconds
initial_wait_interval (OPTIONAL) Enter the initial wait time, in seconds, before running the first
seconds SPF calculations.
Default: 5 second
second_wait_interval (OPTIONAL) Enter the wait interval, in seconds, between the first and
seconds second SPF calculations.
Default: 5 seconds
Defaults Defaults as above
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced to support MT ISIS
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support SPF Throttling Enhancement
Usage This command spf-interval in CONFIG-ROUTER-ISIS-AF-IPV6 mode is used for IPv6

Information Multi-Topology route computation only. If using single topology mode, use the spf-interval
command in CONFIG-ROUTER-ISIS mode for both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations.
SPF throttling slows down the frequency at which route calculation are performed during network
instability. Even though throttling route calculations slows down network convergence, not throttling
can result in a network not functioning as expected. If network topology is unstable, throttling slows
down the scheduling of route calculations until the topology regains its stability.
The first route calculation is controlled by the initial wait interval and the second calculation is
controlled by the second wait interval. Each subsequent wait interval is twice as long as the previous
one until the wait interval reaches the maximum wait time specified (interval seconds). Once the
network calms down and there are no triggers for two times the maximum interval, fast behavior is
restored (the initial wait time).

29
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Overview
This chapter contains commands for Dell Force10s implementation of Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP) for the creation of dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs called port-channels
in FTOS parlance). For static LAG commands, see the section Port Channel Commands in the
Interfaces chapter), based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access
with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.
Commands in this chapter generally are supported on all three Dell Force10 platforms C-Series,
E-Series, and S-Series as indicated by the following symbols under command headings: c e s
Commands
Use the following commands for LACP:
clear lacp counters
debug lacp
lacp long-timeout
lacp port-priority
lacp system-priority
port-channel mode
port-channel-protocol lacp
show lacp
In addition, an FTOS option provides hitless dynamic LACP states (no noticeable impact to dynamic
LACP states after an RPM failover) on E-Series. See redundancy protocol in the High Availability
chapter.
clear lacp counters

ces Clear Port Channel counters.
Syntax clear lacp port-channel-number counters
Parameters
port-channel-number Enter a port-channel number:
for ExaScale.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) | 861

Defaults Without a Port Channel specified, the command clears all Port Channel counters.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands
debug lacp
ces Debug LACP (configuration, events etc.)
Syntax debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]]
To disable LACP debugging, use the no debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface
[in | out]]]] command.
Parameters
config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug the LACP configuration.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug LACP event information.
pdu in | out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword pdu to debug LACP Protocol Data Unit
information. Optionally, enter an in or out parameter to:
Receive enter in
Transmit enter out
interface in | out (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
information.
Optionally, enter an in or out parameter:
Receive enter in
Transmit enter out
Defaults This command has no default values or behavior
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
862 | Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

lacp long-timeout
ce Configure a long timeout period (30 seconds) for an LACP session.
Syntax lacp long-timeout

To reset the timeout period to a short timeout (1 second), use the no lacp long-timeout command.
Defaults 1 second
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-po-number)
Command
History
Usage This command applies to dynamic port-channel interfaces only. When applied on a static port-channel,
Information the command has no effect.
Related
Commands
lacp port-priority
ces Configure the port priority to influence which ports will be put in standby mode when there is a
hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating.
Syntax lacp port-priority priority-value

To return to the default setting, use the no lacp port-priority priority-value command.
Parameters
priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number the lower the priority.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 32768
Defaults 32768
Command
History

lacp system-priority
ces Configure the LACP system priority.
Syntax lacp system-priority priority-value
Parameters
priority-value Enter the system-priority value. The higher the value, the lower the priority.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 32768
Defaults 32768
Command
History
port-channel mode
ces Configure the LACP port channel mode.
Syntax port-channel number mode [active] [passive] [off]
Parameters
number Enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number:
ExaScale.
active Enter the keyword active to set the mode to the active state.*
passive Enter the keyword passive to set the mode to the passive state.*
off Enter the keyword off to set the mode to the off state.*
* The LACP modes are defined in the table below.
Defaults off
Command
History
Usage The LACP modes are defined in the following table.

Information

Table 29-1. LACP Modes
Mode Function
An interface is in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link
active configured in the active state and also automatically initiates negotiation with other
ports by initiating LACP packets.
An interface is not in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link
configured in the passive state. Ports in a passive state respond to negotiation requests
passive
from other ports that are in active states. Ports in a passive state respond to LACP
packets.
An interface can not be part of a dynamic port channel in the off mode. LACP will not
off
run on a port configured in the off mode.
port-channel-protocol lacp
ces Enable LACP on any LAN port.
Syntax port-channel-protocol lacp

To disable LACP on a LAN port, use the no port-channel-protocol lacp command.
Command
History
Related
show lacp Display the LACP information.
Commands
show lacp
ces Display the LACP matrix.
Syntax show lacp port-channel-number [sys-id | counters]
Parameters
port-channel-number Enter a port-channel number:
for ExaScale.
sys-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword sys-id and the value that identifies a
system.
counters (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display the LACP counters.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History


Example 1 Figure 29-1. show lacp port-channel-number command
FTOS#show lacp 1
Port-channel 1 admin up, oper up, mode lacp
Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b
Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.45a5
Actor Admin Key 1, Oper Key 1, Partner Oper Key 1
LACP LAG 1 is an aggregatable link
A - Active LACP, B - Passive LACP, C - Short Timeout, D - Long Timeout

E - Aggregatable Link, F - Individual Link, G - IN_SYNC, H - OUT_OF_SYNC
I - Collection enabled, J - Collection disabled, K - Distribution enabled L - Distribution disabled,
M - Partner Defaulted, N - Partner Non-defaulted, O - Receiver is in expired state,
P - Receiver is not in expired state
Port Gi 10/6 is enabled, LACP is enabled and mode is lacp

Actor Admin: State ACEHJLMP Key 1 Priority 128
Oper: State ACEGIKNP Key 1 Priority 128
Partner Admin: State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0
Oper: State BCEGIKNP Key 1 Priority 128
FTOS#
Example 2 Figure 29-2. show lacp sys-id command Example

FTOS#show lacp 1 sys-id
Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b
Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.45a5
FTOS#
Example 3 Figure 29-3. show lacp counter command Example

FTOS#show lacp 1 counters
----------------------------------------------------------------------
LACP PDU Marker PDU Unknown Illegal
Port Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Pkts Rx Pkts Rx
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 10/6 200 200 0 0 0 0
FTOS#
Related
clear lacp counters Clear the LACP counters.
Commands

30
Layer 2
Overview
This chapter describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. It contains the following sections:
MAC Addressing Commands

Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands
Some MAC addressing commands are supported only on the E-Series, some on all three Dell Force10
platforms and some on two Dell Force10 platforms. Support is indicated by these characters, where
appropriate, under each command heading: c e s
The VLAN commands are supported on all three Dell Force10 platforms c e s
MAC Addressing Commands

The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses:
clear mac-address-table dynamic

mac accounting destination
mac-address-table aging-time
mac-address-table static
mac-address-table station-move threshold
mac-address-table station-move time-interval
mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp
mac cam fib-partition
mac learning-limit
mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation
mac learning-limit station-move-violation
mac learning-limit reset
show cam mac linecard (count)
show cam maccheck linecard
show cam mac linecard (dynamic or static)
show cam mac stack-unit
show mac-address-table
show mac-address-table aging-time
show mac accounting destination
show mac cam
Layer 2 | 867
show mac learning-limit
clear mac-address-table dynamic

ces Clear the MAC address table of all MAC address learned dynamically.
Syntax clear mac-address-table dynamic {address mac-address | all | interface interface | vlan
vlan-id}
Parameters
address mac-address Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
all Enter the keyword all to delete all MAC address entries in the MAC address
table.
interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094.
Command
History
mac accounting destination

e Configure a destination counter for Layer 2 traffic.
Syntax mac accounting destination {mac-address vlan vlan-id | vlan} [bytes | packets]
To delete a destination counter, enter no mac accounting destination.
Parameters
mac-address Enter the MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to count Layer 2 packets
or bytes sent to that MAC address.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to count Layer 2 packets or
bytes sent to the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count only bytes
packets (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packets to count only packets.
868 | Layer 2
Command Modes INTERFACE (available on physical interfaces only)
Command
History
Usage You must place the interface in Layer 2 mode (using the switchport command) prior to configuring the
Information mac accounting destination command.
mac-address-table aging-time
ces Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to be removed from the MAC Address Table.
Syntax mac-address-table aging-time seconds
Parameters
seconds Enter either zero (0) or a number as the number of seconds before MAC addresses are
relearned. To disable aging of the MAC address table, enter 0.
E-Series Range from CONFIGURATION mode: 10 - 1000000
E-Series Range from INTERFACE VLAN mode: 1 - 1000000
C-Series and S-Series Range: 10 - 1000000
INTERFACE VLAN (E-Series only)
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 On the E-Series, available in INTERFACE VLAN context and reduced
History
minimum aging time in INTERFACE VLAN context from 10 seconds to 1
second.
Related
mac learning-limit Set the MAC address learning limits for a selected interface.
Commands
show mac-address-table aging-time Display the MAC aging time.
ces Associate specific MAC or hardware addresses to an interface and VLANs.
Syntax mac-address-table static mac-address output interface vlan vlan-id

To remove a MAC address, use the no mac-address-table static mac-address output interface
vlan vlan-id command.
Layer 2 | 869
Parameters
mac-address Enter the 48-bit hexidecimal address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.

output interface Enter the keyword output followed by one of the following interfaces:
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID.
Range:1 to 4094.
Command
History
Related
show mac-address-table Displays the MAC address table.
Commands
mac-address-table station-move threshold

ce Change the frequency with which the MAC address station-move trap is sent after a MAC address
changes in a VLAN. A trap is sent if a station move is detected above a threshold number of times in a
given interval.
Syntax [no] mac-address-table station-move threshold number interval count
Parameters
threshold number Enter the keyword threshold followed by the number of times MAC
addresses in VLANs can change before an SNMP trap is sent.
Range: 1 to 10
interval seconds Enter the keyword interval followed by the number of seconds.
Range: 5 to 60
Command
History
870 | Layer 2
Usage For information on the specific trap sent and the corresponding Syslog refer to Appendix , .
Information
mac-address-table station-move time-interval

e Reduce the amount of time FTOS takes to detect aged entries and station moves.
Syntax [no] mac-address-table station-move time-interval number
Parameters
time-interval number Select the interval of the successive scans of the MAC address table that are
used to detect a aged entries and station moves.
Range: 500 to 5000ms
Defaults 5000ms
Command
History
Usage FTOS takes 4 to 5 seconds to detect aged entries and station moves because the MAC address table
Information scanning routine runs every 5000 ms by default. To achieve faster detection, reduce the scanning
interval.
mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp

ces Ensure that ARP refreshes the egress interface when a station move occurs due to a topology change.
Syntax [no] mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp
Command
History
Usage See the NIC Teaming section of the Layer 2 chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide for details on
Information using this command.
Layer 2 | 871
mac cam fib-partition
e Reapportion the amount of Content Addressable Memory (CAM) available for MAC address learning
(FIB) versus the amount available for MAC ACLs on a line card.
Syntax mac cam fib-partition {25 | 50 | 75 | 100} slot-number
To return to the default setting, enter no mac cam fib-partition.
Parameters
25 Enter the keyword 25 to set aside 25% of the CAM for MAC address learning.
100 Enter the keyword 100 to set aside 100% of the MAC CAM for MAC address
learning.
With this configuration, no MAC ACLs are processed.
slot-number Enter the line card slot number.
Range: 0 to 13 for the E1200
0 to 6 for the E600
0 to 5 for the E300
Defaults 75 (75% of the MAC CAM for MAC address learning)
Usage After setting the CAM partition size, the line card resets.
Information
Related
show mac cam Display the current MAC CAM partition values.
Commands
mac learning-limit
ces Limit the maximum number of MAC addresses (static + dynamic) learned on a selected interface. .
Note: Sticky MAC is not supported on the S25 or S50 in FTOS release 8.4.2.6.
Syntax mac learning-limit address_limit [vlan vlan-id] [dynamic] [no-station-move |

station-move] [sticky]
Parameters
address_limit Enter the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the
interface.
Range: 1 to 1000000
vlan vlan-id E-Series only: Enter the keyword followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1-4094
dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to allow aging of MACs even
though a learning limit is configured.
no-station-move (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-station-move to disallow a station
move (associate the learned MAC address with the most recently accessed
port) on learned MAC addresses.
872 | Layer 2
station-move (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword station-move to allow a station move
on learned MAC addresses.
sticky (OPTIONAL) C-Series and S-Series only: Enter the keyword sticky to
enable sticky MAC-address learning, which converts dynamically-learned
MAC addresses on a port or port-channel interface to sticky MAC
addresses that prevent trusted devices from moving to a different interface.
Defaults On C-Series, the default behavior is no-station-move + static.

On E-Series, the default behavior is station-move + static.
Static means manually entered addresses, which do not age.
Command
History
Version 8.4.2.3 Added the sticky option on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version 8.3.1.0 Added vlan option on E-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on C-Series; added station-move option
Version 6.5.1.0 Added support for MAC Learning-Limit on LAG
Usage This command and its options are supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, LACP LAGs, and
Information VLANs.
If the vlan option is not specified, then the MAC address counters is not VLAN-based. That is, the
sum of the addresses learned on all VLANs (not having any learning limit configuration) is counted
against the MAC learning limit.
MAC Learning Limit violation logs and actions are not available on a per-VLAN basis.
With the keyword no-station-move option, MAC addresses learned through this feature on the
selected interface will persist on a per-VLAN basis, even if received on another interface. Enabling or
disabling this option has no effect on already learned MAC addresses.
Once the MAC address learning limit is reached, the MAC addresses do not age out unless you add the
dynamic option. To clear statistics on MAC address learning, use the clear counters command with
the learning-limit parameter.
Note: If you configure this command on an interface in a routed VLAN, and once the MAC
addresses learned reaches the limit set in the mac learning-limit command, IP protocols are
affected. For example, VRRP sets multiple VRRP Masters, and OSPF may not come up.
When a channel member is added to a port-channel and there is not enough ACL CAM space, then the
MAC limit functionality on that port-channel is undefined. When this occurs, un-configure the existing
configuration first and then reapply the limit with a lower value.
Layer 2 | 873
When you enable sticky MAC-address learning (sticky), dynamically-learned MAC addresses of
trusted devices are added to the running configuration and stick to the port or VLAN on which they
are learned even if an interface goes down and comes back up. If you save sticky MAC addresses to the
start-up configuration file by entering the write config command, the addresses are deleted from the
running-configuration, do not have to be dynamically relearned, and do not change when the switch
reboots. Any sticky MAC addresses learned after the write config is performed are not saved after a
reboot.
Related
Commands
clear counters Clear counters used in the show interface command
clear mac-address-table Clear the MAC address table of all MAC address learned dynamically.
dynamic
show mac learning-limit Display MAC learning-limit configuration.
mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation

ces Configure an action for a MAC address learning-limit violation.
Syntax mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation {log | shutdown}

To return to the default, use the no mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation {log | shutdown}
command.
Parameters
log Enter the keyword log to generate a syslog message on a learning-limit
violation.
shutdown Enter the keyword shutdown to shut down the port on a learning-limit
violation.
Command
History
Usage This is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs.
Information
Related
show mac learning-limit Display details of the mac learning-limit
Commands
874 | Layer 2
mac learning-limit station-move-violation
ces Specify the actions for a station move violation.
Syntax mac learning-limit station-move-violation {log | shutdown-both | shutdown-offending |

shutdown-original}
To disable a configuration, use the no mac learning-limit station-move-violation command,
followed by the configured keyword.
Parameters
log Enter the keyword log to generate a syslog message on a station move
violation.
shutdown-both Enter the keyword shutdown to shut down both the original and
offending interface and generate a syslog message.
shutdown-offending Enter the keyword shutdown-offending to shut down the offending
interface and generate a syslog message.
shutdown-original Enter the keyword shutdown-original to shut down the original
interface and generate a syslog message.
Command
History
Usage This is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs.
Information
Related
show mac learning-limit Display details of the mac learning-limit
Commands
mac learning-limit reset

ces Reset the MAC address learning-limit error-disabled state.
Syntax mac learning-limit reset
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Layer 2 | 875
show cam mac linecard (count)
e Display the CAM size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.
Syntax show cam mac linecard slot port-set port-pipe count [vlan vlan-id] [interface interface]
Parameters
linecard slot (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword linecard followed by a slot number to
select the linecard for which to gather information.
E-Series range: 0 to 6.
port-set port-pipe (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword port-set followed by a Port-Pipe number
to select the Port-Pipe for which to gather information.
E-Series range: 0 or 1
count (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword count to display CAM usage by interface
type.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type,
slot and port information:
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display
the MAC address assigned to the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
show cam maccheck linecard

c Display the results of the BCMI2 check command.
Syntax show cam maccheck linecard slot port-set port-pipe
Parameters
C300 range: 0 to 7; C150 range: 0 to 4
Range: 0 or 1
876 | Layer 2
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 30-1. show cam maccheck linecard Command Output Example
FTOS#show cam maccheck linecard 2 port-set 0
Dumping entries. From 0 to 16383.
Progress . marks 100 memory table entries.
............................Index 5576 (0x15c8) has valid entries (H: 2b9, E: 0)
<MAC_ADDR=0xffffffffffff,VLAN_ID=0xfff,PRI=0,CPU=0,DST_DISCARD=0,SRC_DISCARD=0,SCP
=0,TGID_LO=0,PORT_TGID=0,TGID_PORT=0,T=0,TGID_HI=0,L2MC_PTR=0,MODULE_ID=0,REMOTE_T
RUNK=0,L3=0,MAC_BLOCK_INDEX=0,STATIC_BIT=1,RPE=0,MIRROR=0,VALID=1,EVEN_PARITY=0,HI
TDA=0,HITSA=0>
..........Index 6592 (0x19c0) has valid entries (H: 338, E: 0)
<MAC_ADDR=0xa0000000,VLAN_ID=0xffe,PRI=0,CPU=0,DST_DISCARD=0,SRC_DISCARD=0,SCP=0,T
GID_LO=0,PORT_TGID=0,TGID_PORT=0,T=0,TGID_HI=0,L2MC_PTR=0,MODULE_ID=0x10,REMOTE_TR
UNK=0,L3=0,MAC_BLOCK_INDEX=0,STATIC_BIT=0,RPE=0,MIRROR=0,VALID=1,EVEN_PARITY=1,HIT
DA=1,HITSA=1>
!-------------output truncated-------------------!
Usage Use this command to check various flags associated with each MAC address in the CAM.
Information
Figure 30-1 shows information for two MAC addresses. The second entry is for MAC address
00:00:a0:00:00:00 (leading 0s are not shown), which is shown as learned on VLAN ID 4094
(0xfff), as shown below in Figure 30-2 and Figure 30-3. Above, STATIC_BIT=0 means that
the address is dynamically learned.
When an entry is listed as STATIC_BIT=1, its HIT_SA is 0, which signifies that this address is
not getting continuously learned trough traffic. The HIT_DA is set when a new learn happens, and
after the first age sweep, it gets reset.
Example Figure 30-2. show mac-address-table Command Output Example

FTOS#show mac-address-table
VlanId Mac Address Type Interface State
4094 00:00:a0:00:00:00 Dynamic Gi 2/0 Active
Example Figure 30-3. show cam mac linecard Command Output Example
FTOS#show cam mac linecard 2 port-set 0
VlanId Mac Address Region Interface
0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff STATIC 00001
4094 00:00:a0:00:00:00 DYNAMIC Gi 2/0
Layer 2 | 877
show cam mac linecard (dynamic or static)
ce Display the CAM size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.
Syntax show cam mac linecard slot port-set port-pipe [address mac_addr | dynamic | interface
interface | static | vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
C-Series Range: 0 to 4 (C150); 0 to 8 (C300)
E-Series Range: 0 to 6
Range: 0 or 1
address mac-addr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address.
dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to display only those MAC
addresses learned dynamically by the switch.
C-Series Range: 1-128
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to display only those MAC address
specifically configured on the switch.
Range: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
878 | Layer 2
Example Figure 30-4. show cam mac linecard Command Example
FTOS#show cam mac linecard 1 port-set 0
Port - (TableID) assignments:
00(01) 01(01) 02(01) 03(01) 04(01) 05(01) 06(01) 07(01) 08(01) 09(01) 10(01) 11(01)
12(01) 13(01) 14(01) 15(01) 16(01) 17(01) 18(01) 19(01) 20(01) 21(01) 22(01) 23(01)
Index Table ID VlanId Mac Address Region Interface
0 1 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:3b LOCAL_DA 1e000
1 1 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:3a LOCAL_DA 1e000
101 0 0 00:01:e8:00:04:00 SYSTEM_STATIC 01c05
102 0 0 01:80:00:00:00:00 SYSTEM_STATIC 01c05
103 0 0 01:00:0c:cc:cc:cc SYSTEM_STATIC 01c01
104 0 0 01:80:c2:00:00:02 SYSTEM_STATIC 01c02
105 0 0 01:80:c2:00:00:0e SYSTEM_STATIC 01c01
106 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:68 SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
115 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:5f SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
116 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:5e SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
117 0 0 00:01:e8:0d:b7:5d SYSTEM_STATIC DROP
FTOS#
show cam mac stack-unit

s Display the Content Addressable Memory (CAM) size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses
and for MAC ACLs.
Syntax show cam mac stack-unit unit_number port-set port-pipe count [vlan vlan-id] [interface
interface]
Parameters
stack-unit unit_number (REQUIRED) Enter the keyword linecard followed by a stack member
number to select the linecard for which to gather information.
S-Series Range: 0 to 1
S-Series range: 0 or 1
address mac-addr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
addresses learned dynamically by the switch.
specifically configured on the switch.
Layer 2 | 879
S-Series Range: 1-128
Range: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 This version of the command introduced for S-Series
History
show mac-address-table
ces Display the MAC address table..
Note: Sticky MAC is not supported on the S25 or S50 in FTOS release 8.4.2.6.
Syntax show mac-address-table [dynamic | static] [address mac-address | interface interface |

vlan vlan-id] [count [vlan vlan-id] [interface interface-type [slot [/port]]]]
Parameters
addresses learned dynamically by the switch. Optionally, you can also add
one of these combinations: address/mac-address, interface/
interface, or vlan vlan-id.
specifically configured on the switch. Optionally, you can also add one of
these combinations: address/mac-address, interface/interface, or
vlan vlan-id.
address mac-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address followed by a MAC address in
880 | Layer 2
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
interface interface-type (OPTIONAL) Instead of entering the keyword interface followed by the
interface type, slot and port information, as above, you can enter the
interface type, followed by just a slot number.
Range: 1 to 4094.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count, followed optionally, by an
interface or VLAN ID, to display total or interface-specific static addresses,
dynamic addresses, and MAC addresses in use.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.2.3 Added support for sticky-MAC learned addresses on the C-Series and S-Series.
History
Example Figure 30-5. show mac-address-table Command Example

FTOS#show mac-address-table
VlanId Mac Address Type Interface State

999 00:00:00:00:00:19 Dynamic Gi 0/1 Active
999 00:00:00:00:00:29 Dynamic Gi 0/2 Active
10 00:00:00:11:11:11 Sticky Gi 0/3 Active
FTOS#
Table 30-1. show mac-address-table Information

VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number.
Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Type Lists whether the MAC address was manually configured (Static), learned dynamically
(Dynamic), or learned on a port configured for sticky-MAC learning (Sticky).
Layer 2 | 881
Table 30-1. show mac-address-table Information (continued)

Interface Displays the interface type and slot/port information. The following abbreviations
describe the interface types:
giGigabit Ethernet followed by a slot/port.
poPort Channel followed by a number. Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1 to 255
for TeraScale
soSonet followed by a slot/port.
te10-Gigabit Ethernet followed by a slot/port.
State Lists if the MAC address is in use (Active) or not in use (Inactive).
Figure 30-6. show mac-address-table count Command Example

FTOS#show mac-address-table count
MAC Entries for all vlans:
Dynamic Address Count: 5
Static Address (User-defined) Count: 0
Total MAC Addresses in Use: 5
FTOS#
Table 30-2. show mac-address-table count Information
Line Beginning with Description

MAC Entries... Displays the number of MAC entries learnt per VLAN.
Dynamic Address... Lists the number of dynamically learned MAC
addresses.
Static Address... Lists the number of user-defined MAC addresses.
Total MAC... Lists the total number of MAC addresses used by the
switch.
Related
show mac-address-table aging-time Display MAC aging time.
Commands
show mac-address-table aging-time

ces Display the aging times assigned to the MAC addresses on the switch.
Syntax show mac-address-table aging-time [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
vlan vlan-id On the E-Series, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to
display the MAC address aging time for MAC addresses on the VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
882 | Layer 2
Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added the vlan option on the E-Series.
Example Figure 30-7. show mac-address-table aging-time Command Example

FTOS#show mac-address-table aging-time
Mac-address-table aging time : 1800
FTOS#
Related
show mac-address-table Display the current MAC address configuration.
Commands
Layer 2 | 883
show mac accounting destination
e Display destination counters for Layer 2 traffic (available on physical interfaces only).
Syntax show mac accounting destination [mac-address vlan vlan-id] [interface interface
[mac-address vlan vlan-id] [vlan vlan-id]] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
mac-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to
display information on that MAC address.
the MAC address assigned to that VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage MAC Accounting information can be accessed using SNMP via the FTOS Monitor MIB. For more
Information information on enabling SNMP, refer to Chapter 3 of the FTOS Configuration Guide.
Note: Currently, the FTOS MONITOR MIB does not return the MAC addresses in an
increasing order via SNMP. As a workaround, you can use the -C c option in snmpwalk or
snmpbulkwalk to access the FTOS MONITOR MIB. For example:
% snmpwalk -C c -v 2c -c public 133.33.33.131 enterprise.6027.3.3.3
Example Figure 30-8. show mac accounting destination Command Example

FTOS-1#sh mac accounting destination interface gigabitethernet 2/1
Destination Out Port VLAN Packets Bytes
00:44:00:00:00:02 Te 11/0 1000 10000 5120000

00:44:00:00:00:01 Te 11/0 1000 10000 5120000
00:22:00:00:00:00 Te 11/0 1000 10000 5120000
00:44:00:00:00:02 Te 11/0 2000 10000 5120000
00:44:00:00:00:01 Te 11/0 2000 10000 5120000
FTOS-1#
Related
show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured).
Commands
884 | Layer 2
show mac cam
e Display the CAM size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.
Syntax show mac cam
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 30-9. show mac cam Command Example

FTOS#show mac cam
Slot Type MAC CAM Size MAC FIB Entries MAC ACL Entries
0 E24PD 64K entries 48K (75%) 8K (25%)
2 E24PD2 128K entries 64K (50%) 32K (50%)
11 EX2YD 64K entries 16K (25%) 24K (75%)
Note: All CAM entries are per portpipe.
FTOS#
Table 30-3. show mac cam Information
Field Description
Slot Lists the active line card slots.
Type Lists the type of line card present in the slot.
MAC CAM Size Displays the total CAM size available.
Note: A portion of the MAC CAM is used for system operations,
therefore adding the MAC FIB and MAC ACL will be less than the MAC
CAM.
MAC FIB Entries Displays the amount and percentage of CAM available for MAC addresses.
MAC ACL Entries Displays the amount and percentage of CAM available for MAC ACLs.
show mac learning-limit

ce Display MAC address learning limits set for various interfaces.
Syntax show mac learning-limit [violate-action] [detail] [interface interface [vlan vlan-id]]
Parameters
violate-action (OPTIONALY) Enter the keyword violate-action to display the MAC
learning limit violation status.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display the MAC learning limit
in detail.
Layer 2 | 885
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface with the following keywords
For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/
port information.
512 for ExaScale.
vlan vlan-id On the E-Series, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1-4094
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added vlan option on E-Series.
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for violate-action and detail options
Version 6.5.1.0 Added support for Port Channel
Example E-Series output:
FTOS#show mac learning-limit

Interface Vlan Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Id Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 5/84 2 2 0 0 0
Gi 5/84 * 5 0 0 0
Gi 5/85 3 3 0 0 0
Gi 5/85 * 10 0 0 0
FTOS#show mac learning-limit interface gig 5/84
Gi 5/84 2 2 0 0 0
Gi 5/84 * 5 0 0 0
FTOS#show mac learning-limit interface gig 5/84 vlan 2
Gi 5/84 2 2 0 0 0
Example C-Series/S-Series output:
FTOS#show mac learning-limit

Interface Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 1/0 10 0 0 0
Gi 1/1 5 0 0 0
FTOS#show mac learning-limit interface gig 1/0
Interface Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA
Slot/port Limit MAC count MAC count Drops
Gi 1/0 10 0 0 0
886 | Layer 2
Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands
The following commands configure and monitor Virtual LANs (VLANs). VLANs are a virtual
interface and use many of the same commands as physical interfaces.
You can configure an IP address and Layer 3 protocols on a VLAN called Inter-VLAN routing. FTP,
TFTP, ACLs and SNMP are not supported on a VLAN.
Occasionally, while sending broadcast traffic over multiple Layer 3 VLANs, the VRRP state of a
VLAN interface may continually switch between Master and Backup.
description
default vlan-id
default-vlan disable
enable vlan-counters
name
show config
show vlan
tagged
track ip
untagged
See also VLAN Stacking and see VLAN-related commands, such as portmode hybrid, in Chapter 23,
Interfaces.
description
ces Add a description about the selected VLAN.

To remove the description from the VLAN, use the no description command.
Parameters
description Enter a text string description to identify the VLAN (80 characters maximum).
Command
History
Related
show vlan Display VLAN configuration.
Commands
Layer 2 | 887
default vlan-id
ces Specify a VLAN as the Default VLAN.
Syntax default vlan-id vlan-id

To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist, use the no default
vlan-id vlan-id syntax.
Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN to become the new Default VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094.
Default: 1
Defaults The Default VLAN is VLAN 1.
Command
History
Usage To return VLAN 1 as the Default VLAN, use this command syntax (default-vlan-id 1).
Information
The Default VLAN contains only untagged interfaces.
Related
Commands
default-vlan disable
ces Disable the default VLAN so that all switchports are placed in the Null VLAN until they are explicitly
configured as a member of another VLAN.
Defaults The default VLAN is enabled.
Command
History
Usage no default vlan disable is not listed in the running-configuration, but when the default VLAN is
Information disabled, default-vlan disable is listed in the running-configuration.
enable vlan-counters
ex Display VLAN counters for ingress and/or egress hardware. You must be in restricted mode to use this
command.
Syntax enable vlan-output-counters [ingress | egress | all]
To return to the default (disabled), use the no enable vlan-output-counters command.
888 | Layer 2
Defaults DisabledVLAN counters are disabled in hardware (all linecards/port-pipes) by default.
Command
History
Example
FTOS(conf)#enable vlan-output-counters
FTOS(conf)#exit
FTOS#show interface vlan 101
Vlan 101 is down, line protocol is down
Address is 00:01:e8:26:e0:5b, Current address is 00:01:e8:26:e0:5b
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit
Last clearing of show interface counters 01:12:44
Input Statistics:
0 packets, 0 bytes
Output Statistics: Enabling VLAN output reveals the output statistics counters for the VLAN
0 packets, 0 bytes
FTOS#
FTOS#show interfaces vlan 1

Vlan 1 is down, line protocol is down
Address is 00:01:e8:13:a5:aa, Current address is 00:01:e8:13:a5:aa
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit
Last clearing of show interface counters 01:36:01
Input Statistics:
Output Statistics:
FTOS#
Usage FTOS supports a command to enable viewing of the VLAN input/output counters. This command also
Information applies to SNMP requests. If the command is not enabled, IFM returns zero values for VLAN output
counters.
SNMP counters differ from show interface counters as SNMP counters must maintain history. At any
point, the value of SNMP counters reflect the amount of traffic being carried on the VLAN.
VLAN output counters may show higher than expected values because source-suppression drops are
counted.
During an RPM failover event, all SNMP counters remain intact. The counters will sync over to the
secondary RPM.
Layer 2 | 889
name
ces Assign a name to the VLAN.
Syntax name vlan-name

To remove the name from the VLAN, enter no name.
Parameters
vlan-name Enter up to 32 characters as the name of the VLAN.
Command
History
Usage To display information about a named VLAN, enter the show vlan command with the name parameter
Information or the show interfaces description command.
Related
description Assign a descriptive text string to the interface.
Commands
show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.
show config
ces Display the current configuration of the selected VLAN.
Syntax show config
Example Figure 30-10. show config Command Sample Output for a Selected VLAN
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100)#show config
!
interface Vlan 100
no ip address
no shutdown
Command
History
890 | Layer 2
show vlan
ces Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.
Syntax show vlan [brief | id vlan-id | name vlan-name]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the following information:
VLAN ID
VLAN name (left blank if none is configured.)
Spanning Tree Group ID
MAC address aging time
IP address
id vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword id followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Only
information on the VLAN specified is displayed.
name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name followed by the name configured for the VLAN.
vlan-name Only information on the VLAN named is displayed.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Augmented to display PVLAN data for C-Series and S-Series; revised output to
History
include Description field to display user-entered VLAN description
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series; revised output to display Native VLAN
Example Figure 30-11. show vlan Command Example

FTOS#show vlan
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated

Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged
x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack
NUM Status Description Q Ports

* 1 Inactive
2 Active U Po1(Gi 13/0)
T Po20(Gi 13/6), Gi 13/25
T Gi 13/7
3 Active T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
U Gi 13/1
T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
T Gi 13/7
U Gi 13/3
T Po20(Gi 13/6)
T Gi 13/7
T Gi 13/7
U Gi 13/5
P 100 Active T Po1(Gi 0/1)
T Gi 0/2
C 101 Inactive T Gi 0/3
I 102 Inactive T Gi 0/4
FTOS#
Layer 2 | 891
Table 30-4. show vlan Information

(Column 1 no heading) asterisk symbol (*) = Default VLAN
G = GVRP VLAN
P = primary VLAN
C = community VLAN
I = isolated VLAN
NUM Displays existing VLAN IDs.
Status Displays the word Inactive for inactive VLANs and the word
Active for active VLANs.
Q Displays G for GVRP tagged, M for member of a VLAN-Stack VLAN, T
for tagged interface, U (for untagged interface), x (uncapitalized x) for
Dot1x untagged, or X (capitalized X) for Dot1x tagged.
Ports Displays the type, slot, and port information. For the type, Po = port
channel, Gi = gigabit ethernet, and Te = ten gigabit ethernet.
Figure 30-12. Example of Output of show vlan id
FTOS# show vlan id 40
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs


40 Active M Gi 13/47
FTOS#show vlan id 41


41 Active T Gi 13/47
FTOS#show vlan id 42


42 Active U Gi 13/47
FTOS#
892 | Layer 2
Figure 30-13. Example of Output of show vlan brief
FTOS#show vlan br
VLAN Name STG MAC Aging IP Address
---- -------------------------------- ---- --------- ------------------
1 0 1800 unassigned
2 0 1800 2.2.2.2/24
3 0 1800 3.3.3.2/24
FTOS#
Figure 30-14. Using VLAN Name

FTOS(conf)#interface vlan 222
FTOS(conf-if-vl-222)#name test
FTOS(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test


222 Inactive U Gi 1/22
Related
vlan-stack compatible Enable the Stackable VLAN feature on the selected VLAN.
Commands
tagged
ces Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface.
Syntax tagged interface

To remove a tagged interface from a VLAN, use no tagged interface command.
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged.
Command
History
Layer 2 | 893
Usage When you use the no tagged command, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN as
Information an untagged interface unless the interface is a member of another VLAN. If the interface belongs to
several VLANs, you must remove it from all VLANs to change it to an untagged interface.
Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, while untagged interfaces can only belong to one
VLAN at a time.
Related
Commands interface vlan Configure a VLAN.
untagged Specify which interfaces in a VLAN are untagged.
track ip
ces Track the Layer 3 operational state of a Layer 3 VLAN, using a subset of the VLAN member
interfaces.
Syntax track ip interface

To remove the tracking feature from the VLAN, use the no track ip interface command.
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
Usage When this command is configured, the VLAN is operationally UP if any of the interfaces specified in
Information the track ip command are operationally UP, and the VLAN is operationally DOWN if none of the
tracking interfaces are operationally UP.
If the track ip command is not configured, the VLAN's Layer 3 operational state depends on all the
members of the VLAN.
The Layer 2 state of the VLAN, and hence the Layer 2 traffic is not affected by the track ip command
configuration.
894 | Layer 2
Related
Commands
tagged Specify which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged.
untagged
ces Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface.
Syntax untagged interface

To remove an untagged interface from a VLAN, use the no untagged interface command.
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged.
Command
History
Usage Untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN.

Information
In the Default VLAN, you cannot use the no untagged interface command. To remove an untagged
interface from all VLANs, including the Default VLAN, enter the INTERFACE mode and use the no
switchport command.
Related
Commands
tagged Specify which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged.
Layer 2 | 895
896
|
Layer 2
31
Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)
Overview
Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station
to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using
standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network
management. The FTOS implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
The basic LLDP commands are supported by FTOS on all Dell Force10 systems, as indicated by the
characters that appear below each command heading:
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Commands
This chapter contains the following commands, in addition to the commands in the related section
LLDP-MED Commands.
advertise dot1-tlv
advertise dot3-tlv
advertise management
clear lldp counters
clear lldp neighbors
debug lldp interface
disable
hello
mode
multiplier
protocol lldp (Configuration)
protocol lldp (Interface)
show lldp neighbors
show lldp statistics
show running-config lldp
The starting point for using LLDP is invoking LLDP with the protocol lldp command in either the
CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode.
Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) | 897

The information distributed by LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information
Base (MIB). The information can be accessed by a network management system through a
management protocol such as SNMP.
See the Link Layer Discovery Protocol chapter of the FTOS Configuration Guide for details on
implementing LLDP/LLDP-MED.
advertise dot1-tlv
ces Advertise dot1 TLVs (Type, Length, Value).
Syntax advertise dot1-tlv {port-protocol-vlan-id | port-vlan-id | vlan-name}

To remove advertised dot1-tlv, use the no advertise dot1-tlv {port-protocol-vlan-id |
port-vlan-id | vlan-name} command.
Parameters
port-protocol-vlan-id Enter the keyword port-protocol-vlan-id to advertise the port protocol
VLAN identification TLV.
port-vlan-id Enter the keyword port-vlan-id to advertise the port VLAN identification
TLV.
vlan-name Enter the keyword vlan-name to advertise the vlan-name TLV. This
keyword is only supported on C-Series and S-Series.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)
Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series, added vlan-name option.
Related
protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable LLDP globally.
Commands
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration
advertise dot3-tlv
ces Advertise dot3 TLVs (Type, Length, Value).
Syntax advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size}

To remove advertised dot3-tlv, use the no advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size} command.
Parameters
max-frame-size Enter the keyword max-frame-size to advertise the dot3 maximum frame size.
898 | Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

Command
History
advertise management
ces Advertise management TLVs (Type, Length, Value).
Syntax advertise management -tlv {system-capabilities | system-description | system-name}

To remove advertised management TLVs, use the no advertise management -tlv
{system-capabilities | system-description | system-name} command.
Parameters
system-capabilities Enter the keyword system-capabilities to advertise the system
capabilities TLVs.
system-description Enter the keyword system-description to advertise the system
description TLVs.
system-name Enter the keyword system-description to advertise the system
description TLVs.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp)
Command
History
Usage All three command options system-capabilities, system-description, and system-name}

Information -can be invoked individually or together, in any sequence.
clear lldp counters

ces Clear LLDP transmitting and receiving counters for all physical interfaces or a specific physical
interface.
Syntax clear lldp counters interface

Parameters

For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitEthernet followed
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet
Command
History
clear lldp neighbors

ces Clear LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specific interfaces.
Syntax clear lldp neighbors {interface}
Parameters
Command
History
debug lldp interface

ces Enable LLDP debugging to display timer events, neighbor additions or deletions, and other
information about incoming and outgoing packets.
Syntax debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events| packet {brief | detail} {tx | rx | both}}
To disable debugging, use the no debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events} {packet {brief
| detail} {tx | rx | both}} command.

Parameters
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitEthernet
Note: The FastEthernet option is not supported on S-Series.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to display information on all interfaces.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to display major events such as timer
events.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to display information regarding packets
coming in or going out.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display brief packet information.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed packet information.
tx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tx to display transmit only packet information.
rx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rx to display receive only packet information
both (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword both to display both receive and transmit packet
information.
Command
History
disable
ces Enable or disable LLDP.
Syntax disable
To enable LLDP, use the no disable
Defaults Enabled, that is no disable
Command
History
Related
Commands


hello
ces Configure the rate at which the LLDP control packets are sent to its peer.
Syntax hello seconds

To revert to the default, use the no hello seconds command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer.
Rate: 5 - 180 seconds
Default: 30 seconds
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
mode
ces Set LLDP to receive or transmit.
Syntax mode {tx | rx}

To return to the default, use the no mode {tx | rx} command.
Parameters
tx Enter the keyword tx to set the mode to transmit.
rx Enter the keyword rx to set the mode to receive.
Defaults Both transmit and receive
Command
History
Related
Commands

multiplier
ces Set the number of consecutive misses before LLDP declares the interface dead.
Syntax multiplier integer

To return to the default, use the no multiplier integer command.
Parameters
integer Enter the number of consecutive misses before the LLDP declares the interface dead.
Range: 2 - 10
Defaults 4 x hello
Command
History
protocol lldp (Configuration)

ces Enable LLDP globally on the switch.
Syntax protocol lldp

To disable LLDP globally on the chassis, use the no protocol lldp command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
protocol lldp (Interface)

ces Enter the LLDP protocol in the INTERFACE mode.
Syntax [no] protocol lldp

To return to the global LLDP configuration mode, use the no protocol lldp command from the
Interface mode.
Defaults LLDP is not enabled on the interface.
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp)
Command
History


Usage LLDP must be enabled globally from CONFIGURATION mode, before it can be configured on an
Information interface. This command places you in LLDP mode on the interface; it does not enable the protocol.
When you enter the LLDP protocol in the Interface context, it overrides global configurations. When
you execute the no protocol lldp from the INTERFACE mode, interfaces will begin to inherit the
configuration from the global LLDP CONFIGURATION mode.
show lldp neighbors

ces Display LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specified interface.
Syntax show lldp neighbors [interface] [detail]
Parameters
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display all the TLV information, timers, and
LLDP tx and rx counters.
Command
History
Example Figure 31-1. show lldp neighbors Command Output

R1(conf-if-gi-1/31)#do show lldp neighbors
Loc PortID Rem Host Name Rem Port Id Rem Chassis Id
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 1/21 R2 GigabitEthernet 2/11 00:01:e8:06:95:3e

Gi 1/31 R3 GigabitEthernet 3/11 00:01:e8:09:c2:4a
Usage Omitting the keyword detail displays only the remote chassis ID, Port ID, and Dead Interval.
Information

show lldp statistics
ces Display the LLDP statistical information.
Syntax show lldp statistics
Command
History
Example Figure 31-2. show lldp statistics Command Output

FTOS#show lldp statistics
Total number of neighbors: 300
Last table change time : Mon Oct 02 16:00:52 2006
Number of Table Inserts : 1621
Number of Table Deletes : 200
Number of Table Drops : 0
Number of Table Age Outs : 400
FTOS#
show running-config lldp

ces Display the current global LLDP configuration.
Syntax show running-config lldp
Command
History
Example
FTOS#show running-config lldp
!
protocol lldp
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id
advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size
advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description
hello 15
multiplier 3
no disable
FTOS#

LLDP-MED Commands
The LLDP-MED commands in this section are:
advertise med guest-voice

advertise med guest-voice-signaling
advertise med location-identification
advertise med power-via-mdi
advertise med softphone-voice
advertise med streaming-video
advertise med video-conferencing
advertise med video-signaling
advertise med voice
advertise med voice-signaling
FTOS LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands are an extension of the set of LLDP TLV
advertisement commands. The C-Series and S-Series support all commands, as indicated by these
symbols underneath the command headings: c s
The E-Series generally supports the commands, too, as indicated by the e symbol under command
headings. However, LLDP-MED commands are more useful on the C-Series and the S50V model of
the S-Series, because they support Power over Ethernet (PoE) devices.
As defined by ANSI/TIA-1057, LLDP-MED provides organizationally specific TLVs (Type Length

Value), so that endpoint devices and network connectivity devices can advertise their characteristics
and configuration information. The Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) for the
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) is 00-12-BB.
LLDP-MED Endpoint Deviceany device that is on an IEEE 802 LAN network edge, can
communicate using IP, and uses the LLDP-MED framework.
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Deviceany device that provides access to an IEEE 802
LAN to an LLDP-MED endpoint device, and supports IEEE 802.1AB (LLDP) and TIA-1057
(LLDP-MED). The Dell Force10 system is an LLDP-MED network connectivity device.
With regard to connected endpoint devices, LLDP-MED provides network connectivity devices with
the ability to:
manage inventory
manage Power over Ethernet (POE)
identify physical location
identify network policy

advertise med guest-voice
ces Configure the system to advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user with their own IP
telephony handset or other appliances that support interactive voice services.
Syntax advertise med guest-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med guest-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority
DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.
Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
priority-tagged number Enter the keyword priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7
Defaults unconfigured
Command
History
Related
Commands
debug lldp interface Debug LLDP.
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP neighbors.
show running-config lldp Display the LLDP running configuration.
advertise med guest-voice-signaling

ces Configure the system to advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user when the guest voice
control packets use a separate network policy than the voice data.
Syntax advertise med guest-voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} |

{priority-tagged number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med guest-voice-signaling {vlan-id
layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
Range: 0 to 7

DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value.

Range: 0 to 63
Range: 0 to 7
Command
\

History
Related
Commands
advertise med location-identification

ces Configure the system to advertise a location identifier.
Syntax advertise med location-identification {coordinate-based value | civic-based value |

ecs-elin value}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med location-identification {coordinate-based
value | civic-based value | ecs-elin value} command.
Parameters
coordinate-based value Enter the keyword coordinate-based followed by the coordinated
based location in hexadecimal value of 16 bytes.
civic-based value Enter the keyword civic-based followed by the civic based location in
hexadecimal format.
Range: 6 to 255 bytes
ecs-elin value Enter the keyword ecs-elin followed by the Emergency Call Service
(ecs) Emergency Location Identification Number (elin) numeric location
string.
Range: 10 to 25 characters
Command
History
Usage ECSEmergency Call Service such as defined by TIA or National Emergency Numbering
Information Association (NENA)
ELINEmergency Location Identification Number, a valid North America Numbering Plan format
telephone number supplied for ECS purposes.

Related
Commands
advertise med power-via-mdi

cs Configure the system to advertise the Extended Power via MDI TLV.
Syntax advertise med power-via-mdi

To return to the default, use the no advertise med power-via-mdi command.
Command
History
Usage Advertise the Extended Power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered,
Information LLDP-MED endpoint device.
Related
Commands
advertise med softphone-voice

ces Configure the system to advertise softphone to enable IP telephony on a computer so that the computer
can be used as a phone.
Syntax advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 7
DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value (C-Series and E-Series only).
Range: 0 to 63
Range: 0 to 7

Command
History
Related
Commands
show lldp neighbors Display the LLDP running configuration
advertise med streaming-video

ces Configure the system to advertise streaming video services for broadcast or multicast-based video.
This does not include video applications that rely on TCP buffering.
Syntax advertise med streaming-video {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med streaming-video {vlan-id layer2_priority
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
Range: 0 to 7
Range: 0 to 63
Range: 0 to 7
Command
History
Related
Commands

advertise med video-conferencing
ces Configure the system to advertise dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances that
support real-time interactive video.
Syntax advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
Range: 0 to 7
Range: 0 to 63
Range: 0 to 7
Command
History
Related
Commands
advertise med video-signaling

ces Configure the system to advertise video control packets that use a separate network policy than video
data.
Syntax advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
Range: 0 to 7


Range: 0 to 63
Range: 0 to 7
Command
History
Related
Commands
advertise med voice

ces Configure the system to advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting
interactive voice services.
Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number}

To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} |
{priority-tagged number} command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
Range: 0 to 7
Range: 0 to 63
Range: 0 to 7
Command
History
Related
Commands

advertise med voice-signaling
ces Configure the system to advertise when voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice
data.
Syntax advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged

number}
To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
Range: 0 to 7
Range: 0 to 63
Range: 0 to 7
Command
History
Related
Commands


32
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)
Overview
MLD Commands
MLD Snooping Commands
MLD Commands
The MLD commands are:
clear ipv6 mld groups

debug ipv6 mld
ipv6 mld explicit-tracking
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval
ipv6 mld querier-timeout
ipv6 mld query-interval
ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time
ipv6 mld static-group
ipv6 mld version
show ipv6 mld interface
clear ipv6 mld groups

e Clear entries from the group cache table.
Syntax clear ipv6 mld groups [interface | group-address]
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) | 915

Parameters

information:
a number:
for ExaScale.
information.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
Command
History
Related
show ipv6 mld interface Display the IPv6 MLD interface
Commands
debug ipv6 mld

e Enable debugging on IPv6 MLD packets.
Syntax debug ipv6 mld {group-address | interface}

To turn off debugging, use the no debug ipv6 mld {group-address | interface} command.
Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Defaults Disabled
916 | Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)

Command
History
ipv6 mld explicit-tracking

e Enable MLD explicit tracking of receivers.
Syntax ipv6 mld explicit-tracking

To disable explicit tracking, use the no ipv6 mld explicit-tracking command.
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if)
Command
History
Usage If snooping is enabled on the VLAN, this command has no effect. Enable ipv6 mld snooping
Information explicit tracking instead.
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval

e Change the MAX Response Time inserted into the Group-Specific Queries sent in response to a Leave
Group messages. This interval is also the interval between Group-Specific Query messages.
Syntax ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval {milliseconds}

To return to the default, use the no ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval {milliseconds}
command.
Parameters
milliseconds Enter the last member query interval in milliseconds.
Range: 200 - 60000
Default: 1000
Command
History
ipv6 mld querier-timeout

e Change the interval that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another
multicast router that should be the querier.
Syntax ipv6 mld querier-timeout {seconds}

To return to the default, use the no ipv6 mld querier-timeout command.

Parameters
seconds Enter the querier timeout in seconds.

Range: 60 - 300
Default: 255
Command
History
ipv6 mld query-interval

e Change the transmission frequency of the MLD host.
Syntax ipv6 mld query-interval {seconds}

To return to the default interval, use the no ipv6 mld query-interval command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the interval in seconds.
Range: 1 - 18000
Default: 125
Command
History
ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time

e Set the maximum query response time advertised in the general queries.
Syntax ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time {seconds}
To return to the default, use the no ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the interval in seconds.
Range: 1 - 25
Default: 10
Defaults 10 seconds
Command
History

ipv6 mld static-group
e Configure an MLD static group to exclude or include mode.
Syntax ipv6 mld static-group group-address {exclude [source-address] | include source-address}

To return to default, use the no ipv6 mld static-group group-address {exclude
[source-address] | include source-address} command.
Parameters
exclude Enter the keyword exclude and optionally enter the source ip address in the
source-address x:x:x:x::x format.
include Enter the keyword include followed by source ip address in the x:x:x:x::x
source-address format.
Command
History
ipv6 mld version

e Set the MLD version number on this interface.
Syntax ipv6 mld version 1
Defaults Version 2
Command
History
Usage FTOS supports MLD version 2 and is backward compatible with MLD version 1.
Information
Command
History
show ipv6 mld groups

e View the configured MDL groups.
Syntax show ipv6 mld groups [detail] [explicit] [link-local] [group-address] [interface interface
[detail]] [summary]

Parameters
explicit Enter this keyword to display explicit tracking information.

link-local Enter this keyword to display link-local groups.
group-address Enter the group address for which you want to display information.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type.
detail View detailed group information.
summary View a summary of group information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 32-1. show ipv6 mld groups Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 mld groups vlan 100 link-local ?
detail Detailed information
<cr>
===========================================================================
show ipv6 mld groups explicit
Interface GigabitEthernet 2/14, Group ff02::1:ff00:0
Reporter fe80::200:ff:fe00:0
Uptime 00:00:19, Expires in 00:04:00
Mode EXCLUDE
Interface GigabitEthernet 2/14, Group ff02::1:ff00:5
Mode EXCLUDE
Interface GigabitEthernet 2/14, Group ff3e:100::4000:1
Mode INCLUDE
165:87:32::8
165:87:32::9
165:87:32::a
Interface GigabitEthernet 2/14, Group ff3e:100::4000:2
Mode INCLUDE
165:87:32::8
165:87:32::9
165:87:32::a
[output omitted]
show ipv6 mld interface

e View the configured MDL interfaces.
Syntax show ipv6 mld interface [interface]

Parameters
interface Enter the keyword interface to display the configured MDL interfaces. Optionally,
[interface] enter the keyword interface followed by one of the keywords below, with slot/port or
number information, to display information for that specific interface:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 32-2. show ipv6 mld interface Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 mld interface

Interface address is fe80::201:e8ff:fe08:9a09/64
Current MLD version is 2
MLD query interval is 125 seconds
MLD querier expiry time is 255 seconds
MLD max query response time is 10 seconds
Last member response interval is 1000 ms
MLD explicit tracking is disabled
MLD querying router is fe80::201:e8ff:fe08:9a09 (this router)
Port-channel 200 is up, line protocol is up

Interface address is fe80::201:e8ff:fe08:9abd/64
MLD querying router is fe80::201:e8ff:fe08:9abd (this router)
Vlan 200 is up, line protocol is up

Interface address is fe80::201:e8ff:fe08:9abc/64
MLD querying router is fe80::201:e8ff:fe08:9abc (this router)
FTOS#

MLD Snooping Commands
The MLD Snooping commands are:
ipv6 mld snooping enable

ipv6 mld snooping flood
ipv6 mld snooping
ipv6 mld snooping explicit-tracking
ipv6 mld snooping mrouter
ipv6 mld snooping querier
show ipv6 mld snooping groups
show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter
ipv6 mld snooping enable

e Enable MLD Snooping globally.
Syntax ipv6 mld snooping enable
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf)
Command
History
ipv6 mld snooping flood

e Enable MLD Snooping Flood globally.
Syntax ipv6 mld snooping flood

To disable, use the no ipv6 mld snooping flood command.
Defaults Enabled
Usage When flooding is enabled, unregistered multicast data is flooded on the VLAN.
Information
When flooding is disabled, unregistered multicast data is forwarded only to mrouter ports on the
VLAN.
Command
History

ipv6 mld snooping
e Enable MLD Snooping (v1 and v2) on a VLAN.
Syntax ipv6 mld snooping

To disable MLD Snooping, use the no ipv6 mld snooping command.
Defaults Enabled on all VLAN interfaces
Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN (conf-if-vl-n)
Command
History
ipv6 mld snooping explicit-tracking

e Enable explicit MLD Snooping tracking on an interface.
Syntax ipv6 mld snooping explicit-tracking

To disable, use the no ipv6 mld snooping explicit-tracking command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage Whether the switch is the Querier or not, if snooping is enabled, the switch tracks all MLD joins. It has
Information separate explicit tracking table which contains group, source, interface, VLAN and reporter details.
Related
Commands
ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

e Configure a Layer 2 port as a multicast router port.
Syntax ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface {interface}
Parameters
interface Enter the keyword interface to indicate the next-hop interface to the multicast router.
ExaScale.

Command
History
ipv6 mld snooping querier

e Enable the MLD querier processing for the VLAN interface.
Syntax ipv6 mld snooping querier

To disable the querier feature, use the no ipv6 mld snooping querier command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage This command enables the VLAN to send out periodic queries as a proxy querier. You must configure
Information and IP address for the VLAN.

e Display the IPv6 MLD Snooping group information.
Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping groups [group-address] [explicit] [link-local] [summary] [vlan]
Parameters
explicit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword explicit to display explicit tracking
information.
link-local (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword link-local to display link local groups.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a summary of
groups.
vlan (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number to
display information on that specific VLAN.
Range: 1 - 4094
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 32-3. show ipv6 mld snooping groups summary Command Example
FTOS#show ipv6 mld snooping groups summary
MLD snooping connected groups summary:
(*,G) routes :12
FTOS#
show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

e Display information on the MLD Snooping router.
Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter [vlan]
Parameters
vlan (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number to display information on
that specific VLAN.
Range: 1 - 4094
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 32-4. show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter Command Example
FTOS#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter
Interface Ports (* - Dynamic)
Vlan 2 Gi 13/18
FTOS#


33
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)
Overview
MSDP (Multicast Source Discovery Protocol) connects multiple PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM)
domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds.
A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are
parallel with MBGP connections. FTOS supports MSDP commands on the E-Series only, as indicated
by the e character that appears below each command heading.
Commands
The commands are:
clear ip msdp peer

clear ip msdp sa-cache
debug ip msdp
ip msdp cache-rejected-sa
ip msdp default-peer
ip msdp log-adjacency-changes
ip msdp mesh-group
ip msdp originator-id
ip msdp peer
ip msdp redistribute
ip msdp sa-filter
ip msdp sa-limit
ip msdp shutdown
ip multicast-msdp
show ip msdp
show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa
clear ip msdp peer

e Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all the peer statistics.
Syntax clear ip msdp peer {peer address}
Parameters
peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.)
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) | 927

Command
History
clear ip msdp sa-cache

e Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected,
or local source-active entries.
Syntax clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | rejected-sa | local]
Parameters
group-address Enter the group IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.)
rejected-sa Enter this keyword to clear the cache source-active entries that are rejected because
the RPF check failed, an SA filter or limit is configured, the RP or MSDP peer is
unreachable, or because of a format error.
local Enter this keyword to clear out local PIM advertised entries. It applies the
redistribute filter (if present) while adding the local PIM SA entries to the SA cache.
Defaults Without any options, this command clears the entire source-active cache.
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added local option.
Version 7.7.1.0 Added rejected-sa option.
debug ip msdp
e Turn on MSDP debugging.
Syntax debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address | pim}
To turn debugging off, use the no debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address |
pim} command.
Parameters
event peer address Enter the keyword event followed by the peer address in a dotted decimal
format (A.B.C.D.).
packet peer address Enter the keyword packet followed by the peer address in a dotted decimal
format (A.B.C.D.).
pim Enter the keyword pim to debug advertisement from PIM.
928 | Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)

Command
History Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced
ip msdp cache-rejected-sa
e Enable a MSDP cache for the rejected source-active entries.
Syntax ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number}

To clear the MSDP rejected source-active entries, use the no ip msdp cache-rejected-sa
{number} command followed by the ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command.
Parameters
number Enter the number of rejected SA entries to cache.
Range: 0 to 32766
Command
History
Related
show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa Description.
Commands
ip msdp default-peer
e Define a default peer from which to accept all Source-Active (SA) messages.
Syntax ip msdp default-peer peer address [list name]

To remove the default peer, use the no ip msdp default-peer {peer address} list name
command.
Parameters
list name Enter this keyword and specify a standard access list that contains the RP address
that should be treated as the default peer. If no access list is specified, then all SAs
from the peer are accepted.
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added the list option, and removed the prefix-list option.
Usage If a list is not specified, all SA messages received from the default peer are accepted. You can enter
Information multiple default peer commands.

ip msdp log-adjacency-changes
e Enable logging of MSDP adjacency changes.
Syntax ip msdp log-adjacency-changes

To disable logging, use the no ip msdp log-adjacency-changes command.
Command
History
ip msdp mesh-group
e Configure a peer to be a member of a mesh group.
Syntax ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address}

To remove the peer from a mesh group, use the no ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address}
command.
Parameters
name Enter a string of up to 16 characters long for as the mesh group name.
Command
History
Usage A MSDP mesh group is a mechanism for reducing SA flooding, typically in an intra-domain setting.
Information When some subset of a domains MSDP speakers are fully meshed, they can be configured into a
mesh-group. If member X of a mesh-group receives a SA message from an MSDP peer that is also a
member of the mesh-group, member X accepts the SA message and forwards it to all of its peers that
are not part of the mesh-group.However, member X can not forward the SA message to other members
of the mesh-group.
ip msdp originator-id
e Configure the MSDP Originator ID.
Syntax ip msdp originator-id {interface}
To remove the originator-id, use the no ip msdp originator-id {interface} command.

Parameters
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from
0 to 16383.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
ip msdp peer
e Configure an MSDP peer.
Syntax ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source] [description] [sa-limit number]

To remove the MSDP peer, use the no ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source interface]
[description name] [sa-limit number] command.
Parameters
connect-source (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connect-source followed by one of the
interface interfaces and slot/port or number information:
For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed
a number:
for ExaScale.
information.

description name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword description followed by a description name
(max 80 characters) to designate a description for the MSDP peer.
sa-limit number (OPTIONAL) Enter the maximum number of SA entries in SA-cache.
Range: 1 to 500000
Default: 500000
Defaults As above
Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Added option for SA upper limit and description option
History
Usage The connect-source option is used to supply a source IP address for the TCP connection. When an
Information interface is specified using the connect-source option, the primary configured address on the
interface is used.
If the total number of SA messages received from the peer is already larger than the limit when this
command is applied, those SA messages will continue to be accepted. To enforce the limit in such
situation, use command clear ip msdp peer command to reset the peer.
Related
ip msdp sa-limit Configure the MSDP SA Limit
Commands
clear ip msdp peer Clear the MSDP peer.
show ip msdp Display the MSDP information
ip msdp redistribute
e Filter local PIM SA entries in the SA cache. SAs which are denied by the ACL will time out and not be
refreshed. Until they time out, they will continue to reside in the MSDP SA cache.
Syntax ip msdp redistribute [list acl-name]
Parameters
list acl-name Enter the name of an extended ACL that contains permitted SAs. If you do not use this
option, all local entries are blocked.
Command
History
Usage Modifications to the ACL will not have an immediate affect on the sa-cache.
Information
To apply the redistribute filter to entries already present in the SA cache, use clear ip msdp
sa-cache local.

ip msdp sa-filter
e Permit or deny MSDP source active (SA) messages based on multicast source and/or group from the
specified peer.
Syntax ip msdp sa-filter {in | out} peer-address list [access-list name]
Remove this configuration using the command no ip msdp sa-filter {in | out} peer address list
[access-list name]
Parameters
in Enter the keyword in to enable incoming SA filtering.
out Enter the keyword out to enable outgoing SA filtering.
peer-address Enter the peer address of the MSDP peer in a dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D.)
access-list name (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP extended access list name that defines from
which peers SAs are to be permitted or denied.
Command
History
ip msdp sa-limit
e Configure the upper limit of SA (Source-Active) entries in SA-cache.
Syntax ip msdp sa-limit number
To return to the default, use the no ip msdp sa-limit number command.
Parameters
number Enter the maximum number of SA entries in SA-cache.
Range 0 to 40000
Defaults Default 50000
Command
History
Usage FTOS counts the SA messages originated by itself and those received from the MSDP peers. When the
Information total SA messages reach this limit, the subsequent SA messages are dropped (even if they pass RPF
checking and policy checking). If the total number of SA messages is already larger than the limit
when this command is applied, those SA messages that are already in FTOS will continue to be
accepted. To enforce the limit in such situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command.

Related
ip msdp peer Configure the MSDP peer

Commands
clear ip msdp peer Clear the MSDP peer.
show ip msdp Display the MSDP information
ip msdp shutdown
e Administratively shut down a configured MSDP peer.
Syntax ip msdp shutdown {peer address}
Parameters
Command
History
ip multicast-msdp
e Enable MSDP.
Syntax ip multicast-msdp
To exit MSDP, use the no ip multicast-msdp command.
Command
History
show ip msdp
e Display the MSDP peer status, SA cache, or peer summary.
Syntax show ip msdp {peer peer address | sa-cache | summary}
Parameters
peer peer address Enter the keyword peer followed by the peer address in a dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D.)
sa-cache Enter the keyword sa-cache to display the Source-Active cache.
summary Enter the keyword summary to display a MSDP peer summary.

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 33-1. show ip msdp peer Command Example

FTOS#show ip msdp peer 100.1.1.1
Peer Addr: 100.1.1.1

Local Addr: 100.1.1.2(639) Connect Source: none
State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:00:08
Timers: KeepAlive 60 sec, Hold time 75 sec
SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0
SAs learned from this peer: 0
SA Filtering:
Input (S,G) filter: none
Output (S,G) filter: none
FTOS#
Example 2 Figure 33-2. show ip msdp sa-cache Command Example

FTOS#show ip msdp sa-cache
MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries
GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom Expire UpTime
224.1.1.1 172.21.220.10 172.21.3.254 172.21.3.254 102 00:02:52
FTOS#
Example 3 Figure 33-3. show ip msdp summary Command Example

FTOS#show ip msdp summary
Peer Addr Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down Description
72.30.1.2 72.30.1.1 Established none 0 00:00:03 peer1
72.30.2.2 72.30.2.1 Established none 0 00:00:03 peer2
72.30.3.2 72.30.3.1 Established none 0 00:00:02 test-peer-3
FTOS#
show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa

e Display the rejected SAs in the SA cache.
Syntax show ip mdsp sa-cache rejected-sa
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 33-4. show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa Command Example
FTOS#sh ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa

MSDP Rejected SA Cache 200 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000
UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom Reason
00:00:13 225.1.2.1 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.2 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.3 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.4 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.5 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.6 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.7 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.8 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.9 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.10 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.11 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.11 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.12 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.13 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.14 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.15 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.16 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.17 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.18 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
00:00:13 225.1.2.19 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail
FTOS#

34
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
Overview
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), as implemented by FTOS, conforms to IEEE 802.1s. MSTP
is supported by FTOS on all Dell Force10 systems (C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series), as indicated by
the characters that appear below each command heading:
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Commands
The following commands configure and monitor MSTP:
debug spanning-tree mstp

disable
forward-delay
hello-time
max-age
max-hops
msti
name
protocol spanning-tree mstp
revision
show config
show spanning-tree mst configuration
show spanning-tree msti
spanning-tree
spanning-tree msti
spanning-tree mstp
tc-flush-standard
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) | 937

debug spanning-tree mstp
ces Enable debugging of Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol and view information on the protocol.
Syntax debug spanning-tree mstp [all | bpdu interface {in | out} | events]
To disable debugging, enter no debug spanning-tree mstp.
Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations.
bpdu interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug Bridge Protocol Data Units.
{in | out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface keyword along with the type slot/port of the
interface you want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Optionally, enter an in or out parameter in conjunction with the optional interface:
For Receive, enter in
For Transmit, enter out
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug MSTP events.
Command
History
Example Figure 34-1. debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu Command Example

FTOS#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu gigabitethernet 2/0 ?
in Receive (in)
out Transmit (out)
938 | Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

description
ces Enter a description of the Multiple Spanning Tree
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Multiple Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).
Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is config-mstp.)
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree mstp Enter Multiple SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands
disable
ces Globally disable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the switch.
Syntax disable
To enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, enter no disable.
Defaults Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled
Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree mstp Enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
Commands

forward-delay
ces The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before
transitioning to the Forwarding State.
Syntax forward-delay seconds
To return to the default setting, enter no forward-delay.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning
State before transiting to the Forwarding State.
Range: 4 to 30
Defaults 15 seconds
Command
History
Related
max-age Change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.
Commands
hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs.
hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of Multiple Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDUs).
Syntax hello-time seconds
To return to the default value, enter no hello-time.
Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs.
Range: 1 to 10.
Default: 2 seconds.
Defaults 2 seconds
Command
History

Related
forward-delay The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State
Commands
before transitioning to the Forwarding State.
max-age Change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.
max-age
ces Set the time interval for the Multiple Spanning Tree bridge to maintain configuration information
before refreshing that information.
Syntax max-age seconds
To return to the default values, enter no max-age.
Parameters
max-age Enter a number of seconds the FTOS waits before refreshing configuration information.
Range: 6 to 40
Defaults 20 seconds
Command
History
Related
forward-delay The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State
Commands
before transitioning to the Forwarding State.

max-hops
ces Configure the maximum hop count.
Syntax max-hops number
To return to the default values, enter no max-hops.
Parameters
range Enter a number for the maximum hop count.
Range: 1 to 40
Default: 20
Defaults 20 hops
Command
History
Usage The max-hops is a configuration command that applies to both the IST and all MST instances in the
Information MSTP region. The BPDUs sent out by the root switch set the remaining-hops parameter to the
configured value of max-hops. When a switch receives the BPDU, it decrements the received value of
the remaining hops and uses the resulting value as remaining-hops in the BPDUs. If the
remaining-hops reaches zero, the switch discards the BPDU and ages out any information that it holds
for the port.
msti
ces Configure Multiple Spanning Tree instance, bridge priority, and one or multiple VLANs mapped to the
MST instance.
Syntax msti instance {vlan range | bridge-priority priority}
To disable mapping or bridge priority no msti instance {vlan range | bridge-priority priority}
Parameters
msti instance Enter the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Instance
Range: zero (0) to 63
vlan range Enter the keyword vlan followed by the identifier range value.
Range: 1 to 4094
bridge-priority priority Enter the keyword bridge-priority followed by a value in increments of
4096 as the bridge priority.
Valid priority values are: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576,
28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All
other values are rejected.
Defaults default bridge-priority is 32768

Command
History
Usage By default, all VLANs are mapped to MST instance zero (0) unless you use the vlan range command
Information to map it to a non-zero instance.
name
ces The name you assign to the Multiple Spanning Tree region.
Syntax name region-name

To remove the region name, enter no name
Parameters
region-name Enter the MST region name.
Range: 32 character limit
Defaults no default name
Command
History
Usage For two MSTP switches to be within the same MSTP region, the switches must share the same region
Information name (including matching case).
Related
msti Map the VLAN(s) to an MST instance
Commands
revision Assign revision number to the MST configuration.

ces Enter the MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode to enable and configure the Multiple Spanning Tree
group.
Syntax protocol spanning-tree mstp

To disable the Multiple Spanning Tree group, enter no protocol spanning-tree mstp command.
Command
History
Example Figure 34-2. protocol spanning-tree mstp Command Example

FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree mstp
FTOS(config-mstp)#no disable
Usage MSTP is not enabled when you enter the MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. To enable MSTP
Information globally on the switch, enter no disable while in MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
Refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information on Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
Related
disable Disable Multiple Spanning Tree.
Commands
Defaults Disable.
Usage Refer to the FTOS Configuration Guide for more information on Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
Information

revision
ces The revision number for the Multiple Spanning Tree configuration
Syntax revision range

To return to the default values, enter no revision.
Parameters
range Enter the revision number for the MST configuration.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0
Defaults 0
Command
History
Usage For two MSTP switches to be within the same MST region, the switches must share the same revision
Information number.
Related
msti Map the VLAN(s) to an MST instance
Commands
name Assign the region name to the MST region.
show config
ces View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are shown.
Syntax show config
Command
History
Example Figure 34-3. show config Command for MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Mode
FTOS(conf-mstp)#show config
!
no disable
name CustomerSvc
revision 2
MSTI 10 VLAN 101-105
max-hops 5
FTOS(conf-mstp)#

show spanning-tree mst configuration
ces View the Multiple Spanning Tree configuration.
Syntax show spanning-tree mst configuration
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 34-4. show spanning-tree mst configuration Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree mst configuration
MST region name: CustomerSvc
Revision: 2
MSTI VID
10 101-105
FTOS#
Usage You must enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol prior to using this command.
Information

show spanning-tree msti
ces View the Multiple Spanning Tree instance.
Syntax show spanning-tree msti [instance-number [brief]] [guard]
Parameters
instance-number [Optional] Enter the Multiple Spanning Tree Instance number
Range: 0 to 63
brief [Optional] Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the MST instance.
guard [Optional] Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an
MSTP interface and the current port state.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Usage You must enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol prior to using this command.
Information
Command
Version 8.5.1.0 Support for the optional guard keyword was added on the E-Series ExaScale.
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Support for the optional guard keyword was added on the C-Series, S-Series, and
E-Series TeraScale.
Version 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU
inconsistency (see Figure 34-6)
Example Figure 34-5. show spanning-tree msti [instance-number] Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree msti 10
MSTI 10 VLANs mapped 101-105
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e802.3506

Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 5
Current root has priority 16384, Address 0001.e800.0a5c
Number of topology changes 0, last change occured 3058087
Port 82 (GigabitEthernet 2/0) is designated Forwarding

Port path cost 0, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.82
Designated root has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e802.35:06
Designated port id is 128.82, designated path cost
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1
BPDU (Mrecords): sent 1109, received 0
The port is not in the portfast mode
Port 88 (GigabitEthernet 2/6) is root Forwarding

Designated bridge has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c
Port 89 (GigabitEthernet 2/7) is alternate Discarding

Designated bridge has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c

Example 2 Figure 34-6. show spanning-tree msti with EDS and LBK
FTOS#show spanning-tree msti 0 brief

Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol

Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20
Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
We are the root of MSTI 0 (CIST)
CIST regional root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
CIST external path cost 0
Interface Designated
Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID
---------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 0/0 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e801.6aa8 128.257
Interface
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge Boundary
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ---- --------
Gi 0/0 ErrDis 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 P2P No No
FTOS#show spanning-tree msti 0

Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8

Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
We are the root of MSTI 0 (CIST)
Current root has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
CIST regional root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
CIST external path cost 0
Number of topology changes 1, last change occured 00:00:15 ago on Gi 0/0
Port 257 (GigabitEthernet 0/0) is LBK_INC Discarding Loopback BPDU

Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.257Inconsistency
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8 (LBK_INC)
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8
Designated port id is 128.257, designated path cost 0
BPDU (MRecords): sent 21, received 9
The port is not in the Edge port mode
Example 3 Figure 34-7. show spanning-tree msti guard Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree msti 5 guard
Interface
Name Instance Sts Guard type
--------- -------- --------- ----------
Gi 0/1 5 INCON(Root) Rootguard
Gi 0/2 5 FWD Loopguard
Gi 0/3 5 EDS(Shut) Bpduguard
Table 34-1. show spanning-tree msti guard Command Information
Field Description
Interface Name MSTP interface
Instance MSTP instance
Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS),
blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut)
Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard)

spanning-tree
ces Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the interface.
Syntax spanning-tree
To disable the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the interface, use no spanning-tree
Parameters
spanning-tree Enter the keyword spanning-tree to enable the MSTP on the interface.
Default: Enable
Defaults Enable
Command
History
spanning-tree msti
ces Configure Multiple Spanning Tree instance cost and priority for an interface.
Syntax spanning-tree msti instance {cost cost | priority priority}
Parameters
msti instance Enter the keyword msti and the MST Instance number.
cost cost (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost followed by the port cost value.
Range: 1 to 200000
Defaults:
100 Mb/s Ethernet interface = 200000
1-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 20000
Port Channel interface with one 100 Mb/s Ethernet = 200000
Port Channel interface with one 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 20000
Port Channel with two 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 18000
Port Channel with two 100-Mbps Ethernet = 180000
priority priority Enter keyword priority followed by a value in increments of 16 as the priority.
Range: 0 to 240.
Default: 128
Defaults cost = depends on the interface type; priority = 128

Command

History
spanning-tree mstp
ces Configures a Layer 2 MSTP interface as an edge port with (optionally) a Bridge Protocol Data Unit
(BPDU) guard, or enables the root guard or loop guard feature on the interface.
Syntax spanning-tree mstp {edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]] | loopguard |

rootguard}
Parameters
edge-port Enter the keyword edge-port to configure the interface as a Multiple Spanning Tree
edge port.
bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into
forwarding mode immediately after the root fails.
Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
shutdown-on- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an
violation interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
loopguard Enter the keyword loopguard to enable STP loop guard on an MSTP port or
port-channel interface.
rootguard Enter the keyword rootguard to enable root guard on an MSTP port or port-channel
interface.
Command
Version 8.5.1.0 Introduced the loopguard and rootguard options on the E-Series ExaScale.
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced the loopguard and rootguard options on the E-Series TeraScale, C-Series,
and S-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced hardware shutdown-on-violation option
Version 6.1.1.0 Support for BPDU guard added
Usage On an MSTP switch, a port configured as an edge port will immediately transition to the forwarding
Information state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as an edge port. Consider an edge port
similar to a port with spanning-tree portfast enabled.
If shutdown-on-violation is not enabled, BPDUs will still be sent to the RPM CPU.
Root guard and loop guard cannot be enabled at the same time on a port. For example, if you configure
loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured, the following error message is
displayed:
% Error: RootGuard is configured. Cannot configure LoopGuard.

When used in an MSTP network, if root guard blocks a boundary port in the CIST, the port is also
blocked in all other MST instances.

Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains
in a blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it. For example, when Portfast BPDU
guard and loop guard are both configured:
If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an err-disabled
blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
If no BPDU is received from a remote device, loop guard places the port in a loop-inconsistent
tc-flush-standard
ces Enable the MAC address flushing upon receiving every topology change notification.
Syntax tc-flush-standard
To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage By default FTOS implements an optimized flush mechanism for MSTP. This helps in flushing the
Information MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often) allowing for faster convergence during topology
changes. However, if a standards-based flush mechanism is needed, this knob command can be turned
on to enable flushing MAC addresses upon receiving every topology change notification.


35
Multicast
Overview
IPv4 Multicast Commands


The IPv4 Multicast commands are:
clear ip mroute
clear ip mroute snooping
ip mroute
ip multicast-lag-hashing
ip multicast-mode l2
ip multicast-routing
ip multicast-limit
mac-flood-list
mtrace
queue backplane multicast
restrict-flooding
show ip mroute
show ip rpf
show mac-address-table static multicast
show queue backplane multicast
Multicast | 953
clear ip mroute
ces Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the PIM tree information
base, use clear ip pim tib command.
Syntax clear ip mroute {group-address [source-address] | *}
Parameters
group-address Enter multicast group address and source address (if desired), in dotted decimal
[source-address] format, to clear information on a specific group.
* Enter * to clear all multicast routes.
Command
History
Related
show ip pim tib Show the PIM Tree Information Base.
Commands
clear ip mroute snooping

ex Clear the multicast routes learned through PIM-SM snooping from the IPv4 multicast snooping table.
To clear tree information learned through PIM-SM snooping from the PIM tree information base, use
clear ip pim snooping tib command.
Syntax clear ip mroute snooping {vlan vlan-id [group-address [source-address] | *}
Parameters
vlan vlan-id Enter a VLAN ID to clear information learned through PIM-SM snooping about a
specified VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs: 1 to 4094.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a group address and, optionally, a source address in dotted
[source-address] decimal format, to clear information learned through PIM-SM snooping about a
specified multicast group and source.
* Enter * to clear all multicast routes learned through PIM-SM snooping.
Command
History
Related
show ip pim snooping Display the information from the PIM tree information base learned through PIM
Commands
tib snooping.
954 | Multicast
ip mroute
show ip pim tib Show the PIM Tree Information Base.
ces Assign a static mroute.
Syntax ip mroute destination mask {ip-address | null 0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static}
{ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance]
To delete a specific static mroute, use the command ip mroute destination mask {ip-address | null
0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static} {ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance].
To delete all mroutes matching a certain mroute, use the no ip mroute destination mask command.
Parameters
destination Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the destination device.
mask Enter the mask in slash prefix formation ( /x ) or in dotted decimal
format.
null 0 (OPTIONAL) Enter the null followed by zero (0).
[protocol [process-id | tag] (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the routing protocols:
ip-address] Enter the BGP as-number followed by the IP address in dotted
decimal format of the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
Range:1-65535
Enter the OSPF process identification number followed by the IP
address in dotted decimal format of the reverse path forwarding
(RPF) neighbor.
Range: 1-65535
Enter the IS-IS alphanumeric tag string followed by the IP address
in dotted decimal format of the reverse path forwarding (RPF)
neighbor.
Enter the RIP IP address in dotted decimal format of the reverse
path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
static ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the Static IP address in dotted decimal format of
the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the
reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the
mroute.
Range: 0 to 255
Command
History
Related
show ip mroute View the E-Series routing table.
Commands
Multicast | 955
ip multicast-lag-hashing
e Distribute multicast traffic among Port Channel members in a round-robin fashion.
Syntax ip multicast-lag-hashing
To revert to the default, enter no ip multicast-lag-hashing.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage By default, one Port Channel member is chosen to forward multicast traffic. With this feature turned
Information on, multicast traffic will be distributed among the Port Channel members in a round-robin fashion.
This feature applies to the routed multicast traffic. If IGMP Snooping is turned on, this feature also
applies to switched multicast traffic.
Related
Commands ip multicast-routing Enable IP multicast forwarding.
956 | Multicast
ip multicast-limit
ces Use this feature to limit the number of multicast entries on the system.
Syntax ip multicast-limit limit
Parameters
limit Enter the desired maximum number of multicast entries on the system.
E-Series Default: 15000
C-Series Range: 1 to 10000
C-Series Default: 4000
S-Series Range: 1 to 2000
S-Series Default: 400
Defaults As above
Command
History
Usage This features allows the user to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the
Information sum total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system. On each line card, the multicast
module will only install the maximum possible number of entries, depending on the configured CAM
profile.
The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition is used to store multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit
that is exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit might be superseded by this hardware space
limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the
system-wide route limit set by the ip multicast-limit is reached.
Related
show ip igmp groups
Commands
Multicast | 957
ip multicast-mode l2
c Enable Layer 2 multicast switching.
Syntax ip multicast-mode l2
To return to the default Layer 3 multicast forwarding on the router, enter the no ip multicast-mode l2
command after you remove the static multicast MAC address (no mac-address-table static multicast
multicast-mac-address command).
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 Introduced on C-Series.
History
Usage When a multicast source and multicast receivers are in the same VLAN, you can configure a router so
Information that multicast traffic is switched only to the ports assigned to a VLAN that is associated with a static
multicast MAC address. However, before you can configure a static MAC address and associate it with
a VLAN used to switch Layer 2 multicast traffic, you must enable the router for Layer 2 multicast
switching with the ip multicast-mode l2 command.
Related
mac-address-table static Configure a static multicast MAC address, associate the multicast MAC address
Commands
with the Layer 2 VLAN used to switch multicast traffic, and add output ports.
ces Enable IP multicast forwarding.
Syntax ip multicast-routing
To disable multicast forwarding, enter no ip multicast-routing.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage You must enter this command to enable multicast on the E-Series.
Information
After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In the INTERFACE mode,
enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface.
Related
ip pim sparse-mode Enable IGMP and PIM on an interface.
Commands
958 | Multicast
c Configure a static multicast MAC address, associate the multicast MAC address with the VLAN used
to switch Layer 2 multicast traffic, and add output ports that will receive multicast streams on the
VLAN.
To delete a configured static multicast MAC address from the MAC address table on the router, enter
the no mac-address-table static multicast-mac-address command.
Syntax mac-address-table static multicast-mac-address multicast vlan vlan-id range-output

{single-interface | interface-list | interface-range}
To return to the default Layer 3 multicast forwarding on the router, enter the no ip multicast-mode l2
command after you remove the static multicast MAC address (no mac-address-table static multicast
vlan output-range command).
Parameters
mac-address-table static Enter a 48-bit hexadecimal address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format for the
multicast-mac-address static MAC address to be used to switch multicast traffic.
multicast vlan vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of the VLAN used to switch Layer 2 multicast
traffic. VLAN ID range: 1 to 4094.
range-output {single-interface Specify the output ports to be added to the multicast VLAN used to
| interface-list | switch multicast traffic as follows:
interface-range} range-output single-interface: Enter one of the following port
types:
- 1-Gigabit Ethernet: Enter gigabitethernet slot/port.
- 10-Gigabit Ethernet: Enter tengigabitethernet slot/port.
- Port channel: Enter port-channel {1-128}.
range-output interface-list: Enter multiple ports separated by a
space, comma, and space; for example:
tengigabitethernet 0/1 , gigabitethernet 0/3 , ...
range-output interface-range: Enter a port range in the format:
interface-type slot/first_port - last_port; for example:
tengigabitethernet 0/1 - 3
Defaults Unconfigured
Command
History
Usage When a multicast source and multicast receivers are in the same VLAN, you can configure a router so
Information that multicast traffic is switched only to the ports assigned to a VLAN that is associated with a static
multicast MAC address. However, before you can configure a static MAC address and associate it with
a VLAN used to switch Layer 2 multicast traffic, you must first enable the router for Layer 2 multicast
switching with the ip multicast-mode l2 command.
Related
ip multicast-mode l2 Enable Layer 2 multicast switching.
Commands
Multicast | 959
mac-flood-list
e Provide an exception to the restrict-flood configuration so that multicast frames within a specified
MAC address range to be flooded on all ports in a VLAN.
Syntax mac-flood-list mac-address mask vlan vlan-list [min-speed speed]
Parameters
mac-address Enter a multicast MAC address in hexadecimal format.
mac-mask Enter the MAC Address mask.
vlan vlan-list Enter the VLAN(s) in which flooding will be restricted. Separate values by
commasno spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a
hyphen (1-3).
Range: 1 to 4094
min-speed min-speed (OPTIONAL) Enter the minimum link speed that ports must have to receive
the specified flooded multicast traffic.
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage When the mac-flood-list with the min-speed option is used in combination with the restrict-flood
Information command, mac-flood-list command has higher priority than the restrict-flood command.
Therefore, all multicast frames matching the mac-address range specified using the mac-flood-list
command are flooded according to the mac-flood-list command. Only the multicast frames not
matching the mac-address range specified using the mac-flood-list command are flooded according
to the restrict-flood command.
Related
Commands restrict-flooding Prevent Layer 2 multicast traffic from being forwarded on ports below a
specified speed.
960 | Multicast
mtrace
e Trace a multicast route from the source to the receiver.
Syntax mtrace {source-address/hostname} {destination-address/hostname} {group-address}
Parameters
source-address/ Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
hostname
destination-address/ Enter the destination (receiver) IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
hostname
group-address Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support originator
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to support intermediate (transit) router
Usage Mtrace is an IGMP protocol based on the Multicast trace route facility and implemented according to
Information the IETF draft A trace route facility for IP Multicast (draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm-01.txt). FTOS
supports the Mtrace client and transmit functionality.
As an Mtrace client, FTOS transmits Mtrace queries, receives, parses and prints out the details in the
response packet received.
As an Mtrace transit or intermediate router, FTOS returns the response to Mtrace queries. Upon
receiving the Mtrace request, FTOS computes the RPF neighbor for the source, fills in the request and
the forwards the request to the RPF neighbor. While computing the RPF neighbor, the static mroute
and mBGP route is preferred over the unicast route.
Multicast | 961
queue backplane multicast
e Reallocate the amount of bandwidth dedicated to multicast traffic.
Syntax queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percentage percentage
Parameters
percentage Enter the percentage of backplane bandwidth to be dedicated to multicast
traffic.
Range: 5-95
Defaults 80% of the scheduler weight is for unicast traffic and 20% is for multicast traffic by default.
Command
History
Example Figure 35-1. queue backplane multicast Command Example

FTOS(conf)#queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percent 30
FTOS(conf)#exit
FTOS#00:14:04: %RPM0-P:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by
console
show run | grep bandwidth
queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percent 30
FTOS#
Related
show queue backplane Display the backplane bandwidth configuration about how much bandwidth is
Commands
multicast dedicated to multicast versus unicast.
962 | Multicast
restrict-flooding
et Prevent Layer 2 multicast traffic from being flooded on ports below a specified link speed.
Syntax restrict-flooding multicast min-speed speed
Parameters
min-speed min-speed Enter the minimum link speed that a port must have to receive flooded
multicast traffic.
Range: 1000
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage This command restricts flooding for all unknown multicast traffic on ports below a certain speed. If
Information you want some multicast traffic to be flooded on slower ports, use the command mac-flood-list
without the min-speed option, in combination with restrict-flooding. With mac-flood-list you
specify the traffic you want to be flooded using a MAC address range.
You may not use unicast MAC addresses when specifying MAC address ranges, and do not overlap
MAC addresses ranges, when creating multiple mac-flood-list entries for the same VLAN. Restricted
Layer 2 Flooding is not compatible with MAC accounting or VLANs.
Related
Commands mac-flood-list Flood multicast frames with specified MAC addresses to all ports in a
VLAN.
Multicast | 963
show ip mroute
ces View the Multicast Routing Table.
Syntax show ip mroute [static | group-address [source-address] | active [rate] | count | snooping
[vlan vlan-id] [group-address [source-address]] | summary]
Parameters
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view static multicast routes.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group-address to view only routes associated
[source-address] with that group.
Enter the source-address to view routes with that group-address and
source-address.
active [rate] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword active to view only active multicast routes.
Enter a rate to view active routes over the specified rate.
Range: 0 to 10000000
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to view the number of multicast routes
and packets on the E-Series.
snooping (OPTIONAL) E-Series ExaScale only:
[vlan vlan-id] Enter the keyword snooping to display information on the multicast routes
[group-address discovered by PIM-SM snooping.
[source-address]] Enter a VLAN ID to limit the information displayed to the multicast routes
discovered by PIM-SM snooping on a specified VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs: 1 to
4094.
Enter a multicast group address and, optionally, a source multicast address in
dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to limit the information displayed to the
multicast routes discovered by PIM-SM snooping for a specified multicast group
and source.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view routes in a tabular format.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.1 Support for the snooping keyword and optional vlan vlan-id, group-address, and
History
source-address parameters were added on E-Series ExaScale.
Example 1 Figure 35-2. show ip mroute static Command Example

FTOS#show ip mroute static
Mroute: 23.23.23.0/24, interface: Lo 2

Protocol: static, distance: 0, route-map: none, last change: 00:00:23
964 | Multicast
Example 2 Figure 35-3. show ip mroute snooping Command Example
FTOS#show ip mroute snooping
IPv4 Multicast Snooping Table
(*, 224.0.0.0), uptime 17:46:23

Incoming vlan: Vlan 2
Outgoing interface list:
GigabitEthernet 4/13
(*, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:04:16

(165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:03:17

Example 3 Figure 35-4. show ip mroute Command Example

FTOS#show ip mroute
IP Multicast Routing Table
(*, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:05:12

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 3/12
(1.13.1.100, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:04:03

(*, 224.20.20.1), uptime 00:05:12

GigabitEthernet 3/4
Table 35-1. show ip mroute Command Example Fields
Field Description
(S,G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table.
uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding
table.
Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) information towards the
source for (S,G) entries and the RP for (*,G) entries.
Outgoing interface list: Lists the interfaces that meet one of the following:
a directly connected member of the Group
statically configured member of the Group
received a (*,G) or (S,G) Join message
Multicast | 965
show ip rpf
ces View reverse path forwarding.
Syntax show ip rpf
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage Static mroutes are used by network administrators to control the reachability of the multicast sources.
Information If a PIM registered multicast source is reachable via static mroute as well as unicast route, the distance
of each route is examined and the route with shorter distance is the one the PIM selects for reachability.
Note: The default distance of mroutes is zero (0) and is CLI configurable on a per route basis.
Example Figure 35-5. show ip rpf Command Example
force10#show ip rpf
RPF information for 10.10.10.9
RPF interface: Gi 3/4
RPF neighbor: 165.87.31.4
RPF route/mask: 10.10.10.9/255.255.255.255
RPF type: unicast
966 | Multicast
show mac-address-table static multicast
c Display information on the current configuration of Layer 2 multicast switching on a router.
Syntax show mac-address-table static multicast [multicast-mac-address [vlan vlan-id] | vlan

vlan-id | count [vlan vlan-id]]
Parameters
multicast-mac-address Enter the static multicast MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format and
[vlan vlan-id] (optionally) the VLAN ID of a VLAN used to switch Layer 2 multicast
traffic on the router. VLAN ID range: 1 to 4094.
vlan vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of a VLAN used to switch Layer 2 multicast traffic on
the router. VLAN ID range: 1 to 4094.
count [vlan vlan-id] Enter the keyword count and (optionally) the VLAN ID of a VLAN used to
switch Layer 2 multicast traffic to display the number of static multicast
MAC addresses in use for all or a specified VLAN.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage Use the show mac-address-table static multicast command to display the currently configured static
Information multicast MAC addresses, associated VLAN, and assigned output ports used to switch Layer 2
multicast traffic on a router.
Example Figure 35-6. show mac-address-table static multicast Command Output

FTOS# show mac-address-table static multicast
VlanId Mac Address Type State L2MCIndex Interfaces

10 01:00:5e:01:01:01 static Active 0 Gi 1/2,
Gi 2/47
11 01:00:5e:01:01:02 static Active 1 Po 10
12 01:00:5e:01:01:01 static Inactive 0
Table 35-2. show mac-address-table static multicast Information

VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number of the VLAN used for Layer 2 multicast forwarding.
Mac Address Displays the static MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format that is configured for
Layer 2 multicast forwarding.
Type Displays static for a manually configured MAC address.
State Displays whether the multicast MAC address is in use (Active) or not in use (Inactive).
The state of a multicast MAC address is inactive if an associated VLAN has not been
configured.
Multicast | 967
Table 35-2. show mac-address-table static multicast Information

L2MCIndex Displays the Layer 2 multicast index used to represent a group of outbound interfaces.
The L2 multicast index is a hardware-specific index that is used an internal command
and useful for debugging purposes. Range: 0 - 1023.
Interfaces Displays the interface type and slot/port of output ports assigned to the VLAN used for
Layer 2 multicast forwarding, where the following abbreviations are used for output
port types:
giGigabit Ethernet slot/port.
poPort Channel number
te10-Gigabit Ethernet slot/port
Figure 35-7. show mac-address-table static multicast count Command Output

FTOS#show mac-address-table static multicast count
Static Multicast MAC Entries for all vlans : 3
Related
ip multicast-mode l2 Enable Layer 2 multicast switching.
Commands
mac-address-table static Configure a static multicast MAC address, associate the multicast
MAC address with the Layer 2 VLAN used to switch multicast
traffic, and add output ports.
968 | Multicast
show queue backplane multicast
e Display the backplane bandwidth configuration about how much bandwidth is dedicated to multicast
versus unicast.
Syntax show queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percentage
Defaults None
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 35-8. show queue backplane multicast Command Example

FTOS#show queue backplane multicast bandwidth-percent
Configured multicast bandwidth percentage is 80
Related
Commands queue backplane Reallocate the amount of bandwidth dedicated to multicast traffic.
multicast
Multicast | 969
IPv6 Multicast commands are:
clear ipv6 mroute

ipv6 multicast-limit
show ipv6 mroute
show ipv6 mroute mld
show ipv6 mroute summary
clear ipv6 mroute

e Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the PIM tib, use clear ip pim
tib command.
Syntax clear ipv6 mroute {group-address [source-address] | *}
Parameters
group-address Enter multicast group address and source address (if desired) to clear information
[source-address] on a specific group. Enter the addresses in the x:x:x:x::x format.
* Enter * to clear all multicast routes.
Command
History
Related
show ipv6 pim tib Display the IPv6 PIM Tree Information Base.
Commands
970 | Multicast
ipv6 multicast-limit
e Limit the number of multicast entries on the system.
Syntax ipv6 multicast-limit limit
Parameters
limit Enter the desired maximum number of multicast entries on the system.
Range: 1 to 50000
Default: 15000
Defaults 15000 routes
Command
History
Usage The maximum number of multicast entries allowed on each line card is determined by the CAM
Information profile. Multicast routes are stored in the IN-V6-McastFib CAM region, which has a fixed number of
entries. Any limit configured via the CLI is superseded by this hardware limit. The opposite is also
true; the CAM might not be exhausted at the time the CLI-configured route limit is reached.
ipv6 multicast-routing
e Enable IPv6 multicast forwarding.
Syntax ipv6 multicast-routing

To disable multicast forwarding, enter no ipv6 multicast-routing.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
ipv6 pim sparse-mode
Commands
Multicast | 971
show ipv6 mroute
e View IPv6 multicast routes.
Syntax show ipv6 mroute [group-address [source-address]] [active rate] [count group-address
[source source-address]]
Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 multicast group-address to view only
[source-address] routes associated with that group. Optionally, enter the IPv6
source-address to view routes with that group-address and
source-address.
active [rate] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword active to view active multicast
sources. Enter a rate to view active routes over the specified rate.
Range: 0 to 10000000 packets/second
count group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to view the number of IPv6
[source source-address]} multicast routes and packets on the E-Series. Optionally, enter the IPv6
source-address count information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Example Figure 35-9. show ipv6 mroute command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 mroute
(165:87:32::30, ff05:100::1), uptime 00:01:11
Incoming interface: Vlan 200
(165:87:37::30, ff05:200::1), uptime 00:01:04

Incoming interface: Port-channel 200
Vlan 200
(165:87:31::30, ff05:300::1), uptime 00:01:19

Port-channel 200
(165:87:32::30, ff05:1100::1), uptime 00:01:08
Incoming interface: Vlan 200
(165:87:37::30, ff05:2200::1), uptime 00:01:01

Incoming interface: Port-channel 200
Vlan 200
FTOS#
972 | Multicast
Example Figure 35-10. show ipv6 mroute active Command Example
FTOS#show ipv6 mroute active 10
Active Multicast Sources - sending >= 10 pps
Group: ff05:300::1
Source: 165:87:31::30
Rate: 100 pps
Group: ff05:3300::1
Source: 165:87:31::30
Rate: 100 pps
Group: ff3e:300::4000:1
Source: 165:87:31::20
Rate: 100 pps
Group: ff3e:3300::4000:1
Source: 165:87:31::20
Rate: 100 pps
FTOS#
Example Figure 35-11. show ipv6 mroute count group Command Examples
FTOS#show ipv6 mroute count group ff05:3300::1
IP Multicast Statistics
1 routes using 648 bytes of memory
1 groups, 1.00 average sources per group
Forwarding Counts: Pkt Count/Pkts per second
Group: ff05:3300::1, Source count: 1

Source: 165:87:31::30, Forwarding: 3997/0
FTOS#
Example Figure 35-12. show ipv6 mroute count source command Examples
FTOS#show ipv6 mroute count source 165:87:31::30
IP Multicast Statistics
2 routes using 1296 bytes of memory
2 groups, 1.00 average sources per group
Forwarding Counts: Pkt Count/Pkts per second


FTOS#
Multicast | 973
show ipv6 mroute mld
e Display the Multicast MLD information.
Syntax show ipv6 mroute [mld [group-address | all | vlan vlan-id]]
Parameters
mld (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mld to display Multicast MLD
information.
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all the MLD information.
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to view
MLD VLAN information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 35-13. show ipv6 mroute mld all Command Example
FTOS#show ipv6 mroute mld all
MLD SNOOPING MRTM Table
(*, ff05:100::1), uptime 00:04:21

(*, ff05:200::1), uptime 00:04:15

(*, ff05:1100::1), uptime 00:04:18

FTOS#
974 | Multicast
show ipv6 mroute summary
e Display a summary of the Multicast routing table.
Syntax show ipv6 mroute summary
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 35-14. show ipv6 mroute summary Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 mroute summary

12 groups, 12 routes
(165:87:32::30, ff05:100::1), 00:00:24

(165:87:37::30, ff05:200::1), 00:00:24
(165:87:31::30, ff05:300::1), 00:00:24
(165:87:32::30, ff05:1100::1), 00:00:21
(165:87:37::30, ff05:2200::1), 00:00:21
(165:87:31::30, ff05:3300::1), 00:00:21
(165:87:32::20, ff3e:100::4000:1), 00:00:41
FTOS#
Multicast | 975
976
|
Multicast
36
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
Overview
Neighbor Discovery Protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address
Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4. It defines
mechanisms for solving the following problems:
Router discovery: Hosts can locate routers residing on a link.

Prefix discovery: Hosts can discover address prefixes for the link.
Parameter discovery
Address autoconfiguration configuration of addresses for an interface
Address resolution mapping from IP address to link-layer address
Next-hop determination
Neighbor Unreachability Detection (NUD): Determine that a neighbor is no longer reachable on
the link.
Duplicate Address Detection (DAD): Allow a node to check whether a proposed address is already
in use.
Redirect: The router can inform a node about a better first-hop.
NDP makes use of the following five ICMPv6 packet types in its implementation:
Router Solicitation
Router Advertisement
Neighbor Solicitation
Neighbor Advertisement
Redirect
Commands
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) commands in this chapter are:
clear ipv6 neighbors

ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
ipv6 nd max-ra-interval
ipv6 nd mtu
ipv6 nd other-config-flag
ipv6 nd prefix
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
ipv6 nd reachable-time
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) | 977

ipv6 nd suppress-ra
ipv6 neighbor
show ipv6 neighbors
clear ipv6 neighbors

e Delete all entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache, or neighbors of a specific interface. Static
entries will not be removed using this command.
Syntax clear ipv6 neighbors [ipv6-address] [interface]
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format to remove a
specific IPv6 neighbor.
interface interface To remove all neighbor entries learned on a specific interface, enter the
keyword interface followed by the interface type and slot/port or number
information of the interface:
For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet
512 for ExaScale.
For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The
range is from 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
e Set the managed address configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement. The description of this
flag from RFC 2461 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
M: 1-bit Managed address configuration flag. When set, hosts use the administered (stateful)
protocol for address autoconfiguration in addition to any addresses autoconfigured using stateless
address autoconfiguration. The use of this flag is described in:
Thomson, S. and T. Narten, IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration, RFC 2462, December 1998.
Syntax ipv6 nd managed-config-flag

To clear the flag from the IPv6 router advertisements, use the no ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
command.
Defaults The default flag is 0.
978 | Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

ipv6 nd max-ra-interval
e Configure the interval between the IPv6 router advertisement (RA) transmissions on an interface.
Syntax ipv6 nd max-ra-interval {interval} min-ra-interval {interval}

To restore the default interval, use the no ipv6 nd max-ra-interval command.
Parameters
max-ra-interval {interval} Enter the keyword max-ra-interval followed by the interval in
seconds.
min-ra-interval {interval} Enter the keyword min-ra-interval followed by the interval in
seconds.
Defaults Max RA interval: 600 seconds, Min RA interval: 200 seconds
ipv6 nd mtu
ces Configure an IPv6 neighbor discovery.
Syntax ipv6 nd mtu number
Parameters
mtu number Set the MTU advertisement value in Routing Prefix
Advertisement packets. Range: 1280 to 9234
Command
History
Usage The ip nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For
Information example, if ip nd mtu is set to 1280, the interface will still pass 1500-byte packets.
The mtu command sets the actual frame size passed, and can be larger than the advertised MTU. If the
mtu setting is larger than the ip nd mtu, an error message is sent, but the configuration is accepted.
% Error: nd ra mtu is greater than link mtu, link mtu will be used.
Related
Commands
mtu Set the maximum link MTU (frame size) for an Ethernet interface.

ipv6 nd other-config-flag
e Set the other stateful configuration flag in the IPv6 router advertisement. The description of this flag
from RFC 2461 (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
O: 1-bit Other stateful configuration flag. When set, hosts use the administered (stateful) protocol
for autoconfiguration of other (non-address) information. The use of this flag is described in:
Thomson, S. and T. Narten, IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration, RFC 2462, December 1998.
Syntax ipv6 nd other-config-flag

To clear the flag from the IPv6 router advertisements, use the no ipv6 nd other-config-flag
command.
Defaults The default flag is 0.
ipv6 nd prefix
e Configure how IPv6 prefixes are advertised in the IPv6 router advertisements. The description of an
IPv6 prefix from RFC 2461(http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is a bit string that consists of some
number of initial bits of an address.
Syntax ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-address prefix-length | default} [no-advertise] | [no-autoconfig |

no-rtr-address | off-link]
Parameters
ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the
prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
default (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword default to specify the prefix
default parameters.
no-advertise (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-advertise to not advertise
prefixes.
no-autoconfig (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-autoconfig to not use
prefixes for auto-configuration.
no-rtr-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-rtr-address to not send full
router addresses in prefix advertisement.
off-link (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword off-link to not use prefixes for
on-link determination.

ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
e Configure the router lifetime value in the IPv6 router advertisements on an interface. The description
of router lifetime from RFC 2461(http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
Router Lifetime: 16-bit unsigned integer. The lifetime associated with the default router in units of
seconds. The maximum value corresponds to 18.2 hours. A Lifetime of 0 indicates that the router is not
a default router and SHOULD NOT appear on the default router list. The Router Lifetime applies only
to the router's usefulness as a default router; it does not apply to information contained in other
message fields or options. Options that need time limits for their information include their own lifetime
fields.
Syntax ipv6 nd ra-lifetime seconds

To restore the default values, use the no ipv6 nd ra-lifetime command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the lifetime value in seconds.
Range: 0 to 9000
ipv6 nd reachable-time
e Configure the amount of time that a remote IPv6 node is considered available after a reachability
confirmation event has occurred. The description of reachable time from RFC 2461(http://
tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2461) is:
Reachable Time: 32-bit unsigned integer. The time, in milliseconds, that a node assumes a neighbor is
reachable after having received a reachability confirmation. Used by the Neighbor Unreachability
Detection algorithm. A value of zero means unspecified (by this router).
Syntax ipv6 nd reachable-time {milliseconds}

To restore the default time, use the no ipv6 nd reachable-time command.
Parameters
milliseconds Enter the leachability time in milliseconds.
Range: 0 to 3600000
ipv6 nd suppress-ra
e Suppress the IPv6 router advertisement transmissions on an interface.
Syntax ipv6 nd suppress-ra
To enable the sending of IPv6 router advertisement transmissions on an interface, use the no ipv6 nd
suppress-ra command.

Defaults Enabled
ipv6 neighbor
e Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery.
Syntax ipv6 neighbor {ipv6-address} {interface interface} {hardware_address}

To remove a static IPv6 entry from the IPv6 neighbor discovery, use the no ipv6 neighbor
{ipv6-address} {interface interface} command.
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format.
number information:
For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet
512 for ExaScale.
hardware_address Enter a 48-bit hardware MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
show ipv6 neighbors

e Display IPv6 discovery information. Entering the command without options shows all IPv6 neighbor
addresses stored on the CP (control processor).
Syntax show ipv6 neighbors [ipv6-address] [cpu {rp1 [ipv6-address] | rp2 [ipv6-address]}]
[interface interface]
Parameters
ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format.

cpu Enter the keyword cpu followed by either rp1 or rp2 (Route Processor 1
or 2), optionally followed by an IPv6 address to display the IPv6 neighbor
entries stored on the designated RP.
interface interface For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet
followed by a number from 1 to 255.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 36-1. show ipv6 neighbors Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 neighbors
IPv6 Address Expires(min) Hardware Address State Interface VLAN CPU

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc6
1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c6 STALE Gi 1/9 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc7
1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c7 STALE Gi 1/10 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc8
1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c8 STALE Gi 1/11 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5caf
0.3 00:01:e8:17:5c:af REACH Po 1 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cb0
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:b0 STALE Po 32 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cb1
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:b1 STALE Po 255 - CP
fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5cae
1439 00:01:e8:17:5c:ae STALE Gi 1/3 Vl 100 CP
FTOS#


37
Object Tracking
Object Tracking supports IPv4 and IPv6, and is available on platforms: c e s
Overview
Object tracking allows you to define objects of interest, monitor their state, and report to a client when
a change in an objects state occurs. The following tracked objects are supported:
Link status of Layer 2 interfaces

Routing status of Layer 3 interfaces (IPv4 and IPv6)
Reachability of IPv4 and IPv6 routes
Metric thresholds of IPv4 and IPv6 routes
You can configure client applications, such VRRP, to receive a notification when the state of a tracked
object changes.
This chapter has the following sections:
IPv4 Object Tracking Commands on page 985

IPv6 Object Tracking Commands on page 999
IPv4 Object Tracking Commands

The IPv4 VRRP commands are:
debug track
delay
description
show running-config track
show track
threshold metric
track interface ip routing
track interface line-protocol
track ip route metric threshold
track ip route reachability
track resolution ip route
Object Tracking | 985

debug track
ces Enables debugging for tracked objects.
Syntax debug track [all | notifications | object-id]
Parameters
all Enables debugging on the state and notifications of all tracked objects.
notifications Enables debugging on the notifications of all tracked objects.
object-id Enables debugging on the state and notifications of the specified tracked object. Range:
1 to 65535.
Defaults Enable debugging on the state and notifications of all tracked objects (debug track all).
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Command Example: debug track

FTOS#debug track all
04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-STATE: track 6 - Interface GigabitEthernet 0/2

line-protocol DOWN
04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-NOTIF: VRRP notification: resource ID 6 DOWN
986 | Object Tracking

delay
ces Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked object to
clients.
Syntax delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]}
To return to the default setting, enter no delay.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the object tracker waits before sending a notification about
the change in the UP and/or DOWN state of a tracked object to clients.
Range: 0 to 180
Default: 0 seconds.
Defaults 0 seconds
Command Modes OBJECT TRACKING (conf_track_object-id)
Command
History
Related
track interface ip Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface.
Commands
routing
track interface Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
line-protocol
track ip route Configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric.
metric threshold
track ip route Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 route.
reachability
Usage You can configure an UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a
Information change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts
when the state changes from UP to DOWN or vice-versa.
If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer
is cancelled and the client is not notified. For example, if the DOWN timer is running when an
interface goes down and comes back up, the DOWN timer is cancelled and the client is not notified of
the event.
If the timer expires and an objects state has changed, a notification is sent to the client. If no delay is
configured, a notification is sent immediately as soon as a change in the state of a tracked object is
detected. The time delay in communicating a state change is specified in seconds.

description
ces Enter a description of a tracked object.
Syntax description {text}
To remove the description, enter the no description {text} command.
Parameters
text Enter a description to identify a tracked object (80 characters maximum).
Command
History
Related
track interface ip routing Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3
Commands
interface.
track interface line-protocol Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2
interface.
track ip route metric threshold Configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric.
track ip route reachability Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 route.

ces Display the current configuration of tracked objects.
Syntax show running-config track [object-id]
Parameters
object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. Range: 1
to 65535.
Command
History
Related
show track Display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current
Commands
state, and clients which track the object.
interface.
track interface line-protocol Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
Example Command Example: show running-config track

FTOS#show running-config track
track 1 ip route 23.0.0.0/8 reachability
track 2 ipv6 route 2040::/64 metric threshold

delay down 3
delay up 5
threshold metric up 200
track 3 ipv6 route 2050::/64 reachability
track 4 interface GigabitEthernet 13/4 ip routing
track 5 ip route 192.168.0.0/24 reachability vrf red
track resolution ip route isis 20

track resolution ip route ospf 10
Command Example: show running-config track object-id

FTOS#show running-config track 300
track 300 ip route 10.0.0.0/8 metric threshold

delay down 3
delay up 5
threshold metric up 100

show track
ces Display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current tracked state (UP or
DOWN), and the clients which are tracking an object.
Syntax show track [object-id [brief] | interface [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | ip route [brief] [vrf vrf-name]
| resolution | vrf vrf-name [brief] | brief]
Parameters
object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object.
Range: 1 to 65535.
interface (OPTIONAL) Display information on all tracked interfaces (Layer 2 and IPv4 Layer 3).
ip route (OPTIONAL) Display information on all tracked IPv4 routes.
resolution (OPTIONAL) Display information on the configured resolution values used to scale
protocol-specific route metrics to the range 0 to 255.
brief (OPTIONAL) Display a single line summary of the tracking information for a specified
object, object type, or all tracked objects.
vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) E-Series only: Display information on only the tracked objects that are
members of the specified VRF instance. Maximum: 32 characters.
If you do not enter a VRF name, information on the tracked objects from all VRFs is
displayed.
Command
History
Related
show running-config track Display configuration information about tracked objects.
Commands
interface.
track interface line-protocol Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.

Example Figure 37-1. Command Example: show track
FTOS#show track
Track 1
IP route 23.0.0.0/8 reachability
Reachability is Down (route not in route table)
2 changes, last change 00:16:08
Tracked by:
Track 2
IPv6 route 2040::/64 metric threshold
Metric threshold is Up (STATIC/0/0)
Metric threshold down 255 up 254
First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 13/2
Tracked by:
VRRP GigabitEthernet 7/30 IPv6 VRID 1
Track 3
IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability
Reachability is Up (STATIC)
Tracked by:
Table 37-1. Command Example Description: show track
show track Output Description

Track object-id Displays the number of the tracked object.
Interface type slot/port Displays the interface type and slot/port number or address of the
IP route ip-address IPv4/IPv6 route that is being tracked.
IPv6 route ipv6-address
object is Up/Down Up/Down state of tracked object; for example, IPv4 interface, reachability or
metric threshold of an IP route.
number changes, Number of times that the state of the tracked object has changed and the time since
last change time the last change in hours:minutes:seconds
First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked
route.
Tracked by Client that is tracking an objects state; for example, VRRP.
Figure 37-2. Command Example: show track brief
FTOS>show track brief
ResId Resource Parameter State LastChange

1 IP route reachability 10.16.0.0/16 Up 00:01:08
2 Interface line-protocol Ethernet0/2 Down 00:05:00
3 Interface ip routing VLAN100 Up 01:10:05
Table 37-2. Command Example Description: show track brief
show track Output Description

Table 37-2. Command Example Description: show track brief
ResID Number of the tracked object

Resource Type of tracked object
Parameter Detailed description of the tracked object
State Up or Down state of the tracked object
Last Change Time since the last change in the state of the tracked object
threshold metric
ces Configure the metric threshold used to determine the UP and/or DOWN state of a tracked IPv4 or IPv6
route.
Syntax threshold metric {up number | down number}
To return to the default setting, enter no threshold metric {up number | down number}.
Parameters
object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. Range: 1 to 65535.
up number Enter a number for the UP threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or
IPv6 route.
Default UP threshold: 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less
than or equal to the UP threshold.
down number Enter a number for the DOWN threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4
or IPv6 route
Default DOWN threshold: 255. The routing state is DOWN if the scaled route metric
is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
metric threshold
track resolution ip Configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv4 route metric.
route
Usage Use this command to configure the UP and/or DOWN threshold for the scaled metric of a tracked IPv4
Information or IPv6 route.
The UP/DOWN state of a tracked route is determined by the threshold for the current value of the route
metric in the routing table. To provide a common tracking interface for different clients, route metrics
are scaled in the range 0 to 255, where 0 is connected and 255 is inaccessible. The scaled metric value
communicated to a client always considers a lower value to have priority over a higher value.
The resulting scaled value is compared against the configured threshold values to determine the state of
a tracked route as follows:

If the scaled metric for a route entry is less than or equal to the UP threshold, the state of a route is
UP.
If the scaled metric for a route is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold or the route is not
entered in the routing table, the state of a route is DOWN.
You configure the UP and DOWN thresholds for each tracked route with the threshold metric
command. The default UP threshold is 254; the default DOWN threshold is 255. The notification of a
change in the state of a tracked object is sent when a metric value crosses a configured threshold.
The tracking process uses a protocol-specific resolution value to convert the actual metric in the
routing table to a scaled metric in the range 0 to 255. You can configure the resolution value used to
scale route metrics for supported protocols with the track resolution ip route and track resolution ipv6
route commands.
track
ces Enter Object Tracking command mode to modify the configuration of a tracked object.
Syntax track object-id
Parameters
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
show track Display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current state, and
Commands
clients which track the object.
Usage Use this command to enter the Object Tracking mode to edit an existing configuration of a tracked
Information object. For example, after you enter the track object-id command, you can modify or add a delay
timer (delay command) or a metric threshold (threshold metric command) for the UP or DOWN
state of the tracked object.
track ip route metric threshold

ces Configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric.
Syntax track object-id ip route ip-address/prefix-len metric threshold [vrf vrf-name]
To return to the default setting, enter no track object-id.
Parameters

ip-address/ Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. Valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to
prefix-len /32.
vrf vrf-name (Optional) E-Series only: You can configure a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF)
instance to specify the virtual routing table to which the tracked route belongs.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
threshold metric Configure the metric threshold used to determine the UP and/or DOWN state of a tracked
route.
track resolution Configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv4 route metric.
ip route
Usage Use this command to create an object that tracks the UP and/or DOWN threshold of an IPv4 route
Information metric. In order for a routes metric to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table.
A tracked IPv4 route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv4 address
and prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24
does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8. If no route-table entry has the exact IPv4 address and
prefix length, the status of the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
When you configure the threshold of an IPv4 route metric as a tracked object, the UP/DOWN state of
the tracked route is also determined by the current metric for the route in the routing table.
To provide a common tracking interface for different clients, route metrics are scaled in the range 0 to
255, where 0 is connected and 255 is inaccessible. The scaled metric value communicated to a client
always considers a lower value to have priority over a higher value. The resulting scaled value is
compared against the configured threshold values to determine the state of a tracked route as follows:
UP.
You configure the UP and DOWN thresholds for each tracked route by using the threshold metric
track ip route reachability

ces Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 route.
Syntax track object-id ip route ip-address/prefix-len reachability [vrf vrf-name]

Parameters
ip-address/ Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. Valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /
prefix-len 32.
vrf vrf-name (Optional) E-Series only: You can configure a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF)
instance to specify the virtual routing table to which the tracked route belongs.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
metric threshold
Usage Use this command to create an object that tracks the reachability of an IPv4 route. In order for a routes
Information reachability to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table.
and prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24
does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8. If no route-table entry has the exact IPv4 address and
prefix length, the status of the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
When you configure IPv4 route reachability as a tracked object, the UP/DOWN state of the tracked
route is also determined by the entry of the next-hop address in the ARP cache. A tracked route is
considered to be reachable if there is an ARP cache entry for the route's next-hop address.
If the next-hop address in the ARP cache ages out for a route tracked for its reachability, an attempt is
made to regenerate the ARP cache entry to see if the next-hop address appears before considering the
route DOWN.

track interface ip routing
ces Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface.
Syntax track object-id interface interface ip routing
Parameters
interface Enter one of the following values:
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter gigabitethernet slot-number/
port-number.
For a Loopback interface, enter loopback number, where number is from 0 to
16383.
For a Port Channel interface, enter port-channel number, where the valid values
are:
C-Series and S-Series: 1 to 128
E-Series: 1 to 32 for EtherScale; 1 to 255 for TeraScale; 1 to 512 for ExaScale.
For SONET interfaces, enter the sonet slot-number/port-number.
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter tengigabitethernet slot-number/
port-number
For a VLAN interface, enter vlan number, where number is from 1 to 4094.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
track interface Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
line-protocol
Usage Use this command to create an object that tracks the routing state of an IPv4 Layer 2 interface:
Information
The status of the IPv4 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the
interface has a valid IP address.
The Layer 3 status of an IPv4 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a
Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IP address is removed from the routing
table.

ces Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
Syntax track object-id interface interface line-protocol
Parameters
port-number.
16383.
are:
port-number
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
routing
Usage Use this command to create an object that tracks the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface by
Information monitoring its operational status (UP or DOWN).
When the link-level status goes down, the tracked object status is considered to be DOWN; if the
link-level status is up, the tracked object status is considered to be UP.

track resolution ip route
ces Configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv4 route metric.
Syntax track resolution ip route {isis resolution-value | ospf resolution-value}
Parameters
isis Enter the resolution used to convert the metric in the routing table for ISIS routes to a
resolution-value scaled metric.
ospf Enter the resolution used to convert the metric in the routing table for OSPF routes to
resolution-value a scaled metric.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
threshold metric Configure the metric threshold used to determine the UP and/or DOWN state of a
Commands
tracked route.
metric threshold
Usage Use this command to configure the protocol-specific resolution value that converts the actual metric of
Information an IPv4 route in the routing table to a scaled metric in the range 0 to 255.
The UP/DOWN state of a tracked IPv4 route is determined by a user-configurable threshold (threshold
metric command) for the routes metric in the routing table. To provide a common tracking interface
for different clients, route metrics are scaled in the range 0 to 255, where 0 is connected and 255 is
inaccessible.
The protocol-specific resolution value calculates the scaled metric by dividing a route's cost by the
resolution value set for the route protocol:
For ISIS, you can set the resolution in the range 1 to 1000, where the default is 10.
For OSPF, you can set the resolution in the range 1 to 1592, where the default is 1.
The resolution value used to map static routes is not configurable. By default, FTOS assigns a
metric of 0 to static routes.
The resolution value used to map RIP routes is not configurable. The RIP hop-count is
automatically multiplied by 16 to scale it. For example, a RIP metric of 16 (unreachable) scales to
256, which considers the route to be DOWN.

IPv6 Object Tracking Commands
The IPv6 object tracking commands are:
show track ipv6 route

track interface ipv6 routing
track ipv6 route metric threshold
track ipv6 route reachability
track resolution ipv6 route
The following object tracking commands apply to IPv4 and IPv6:
debug track
delay
description
threshold metric

ces Display information about all tracked IPv6 routes, including configuration, current tracked state (UP or
DOWN), and the clients which are tracking an object.
Syntax show track ipv6 route [brief]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Display a single line summary of information for tracked IPv6 routes.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
show running-config track Display configuration information about tracked objects.
Commands
show track Display information about tracked objects, including configuration,
current state, and clients which track the object.
track interface ipv6 routing Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv6 Layer 3
interface.
track ipv6 route metric threshold Configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv6 route metric.
track ipv6 route reachability Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route.

Example Figure 37-3. Command Example: show track ipv6 route
FTOS#show track ipv6 route
Track 2
IPv6 route 2040::/64 metric threshold
Metric threshold is Up (STATIC/0/0)
Metric threshold down 255 up 254
Tracked by:
Track 3
IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability
Reachability is Up (STATIC)
Tracked by:
Table 37-3. Command Example Description: show track ipv6 route

Output Description
Track object-id Displays the number of the tracked object.
Interface type slot/port Displays the interface type and slot/port number or address of the
IP route ip-address IPv4/IPv6 route that is being tracked.
IPv6 route ipv6-address
object is Up/Down Up/Down state of tracked object; for example, IPv4 interface, reachability or
metric threshold of an IP route.
number changes, Number of times that the state of the tracked object has changed and the time since
last change time the last change in hours:minutes:seconds
First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked
route.
Tracked by Client that is tracking an objects state; for example, VRRP.
Figure 37-4. Command Example: show track ipv6 route brief

FTOS#show track ipv6 route brief
ResId Resource Parameter State LastChange
2 IPv6 route metric threshold 2040::/64 Up 00:02:36
3 IPv6 route reachability 2050::/64 Up 00:02:36
Table 37-4. Command Example Description: show track ipv6 route brief

brief Output Description
ResID Number of the tracked object
Resource Type of tracked object
Parameter Detailed description of the tracked object
State Up or Down state of the tracked object
Last Change Time since the last change in the state of the tracked object

track interface ipv6 routing
ces Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv6 Layer 3 interface.
Syntax track object-id interface interface ipv6 routing
Parameters
port-number.
16383.
are:
port-number
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
show track ipv6 Display information about tracked IPv6 routes, including configuration, current state, and
Commands
route clients which track the route.
routing
Usage Use this command to create an object that tracks the routing state of an IPv6 Layer 3 interface:
Information
The status of the IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the
interface has a valid IP address.
The Layer 3 status of an IPv6 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a
Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IP address is removed from the routing
table.

track ipv6 route metric threshold
ces Configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric.
Syntax track object-id ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len metric threshold
Parameters
ipv6-address/ Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. Valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to /
prefix-len 128.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
route.
track resolution Configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv6 route metric.
ipv6 route
Usage Use this command to create an object that tracks the UP and/or DOWN threshold of an IPv6 route
Information metric. In order for a routes metric to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table.
and prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route,
3333:100:200:300:400::/80 does not match routing table entry 3333:100:200:300::/64. If no route-table
entry has the exact IPv6 address and prefix length, the status of the tracked route is considered to be
DOWN.
When you configure the threshold of an IPv6 route metric as a tracked object, the UP/DOWN state of
the tracked route is also determined by the current metric for the route in the routing table.
To provide a common tracking interface for different clients, route metrics are scaled in the range 0 to
255, where 0 is connected and 255 is inaccessible. The scaled metric value communicated to a client
always considers a lower value to have priority over a higher value. The resulting scaled value is
compared against the configured threshold values to determine the state of a tracked route as follows:
UP.
You configure the UP and DOWN thresholds for each tracked IPv6 route by using the threshold metric

track ipv6 route reachability
ces Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route.
Syntax track object-id ipv6 route ip-address/prefix-len reachability
Parameters
ipv6-address/ Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. Valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to /
prefix-len 128.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
track ip route Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 route.
reachability
Usage Use this command to create an object that tracks the reachability of an IPv6 route. In order for a routes
Information reachability to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table.
A tracked route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv6 address and
prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route,
3333:100:200:300:400::/80 does not match routing table entry 3333:100:200:300::/64. If no route-table
entry has the exact IPv6 address and prefix length, the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
When you configure IPv6 route reachability as a tracked object, the UP/DOWN state of the tracked
route is also determined by the entry of the next-hop address in the ARP cache. A tracked route is
considered to be reachable if there is an ARP cache entry for the route's next-hop address.
If the next-hop address in the ARP cache ages out for a route tracked for its reachability, an attempt is
made to regenerate the ARP cache entry to see if the next-hop address appears before considering the
route DOWN.

track resolution ipv6 route
ces Configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv6 route metric.
Syntax track resolution ipv6 route {isis resolution-value | ospf resolution-value}
Parameters
isis Enter the resolution used to convert the metric in the routing table for ISIS routes to a
resolution-value scaled metric.
ospf Enter the resolution used to convert the metric in the routing table for OSPF routes to
resolution-value a scaled metric.
Defaults None
Command
History
Related
Commands
route.
track ipv6 route Configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv6 route metric.
metric threshold
Usage Use this command to configure the protocol-specific resolution value that converts the actual metric of
Information an IPv6 route in the routing table to a scaled metric in the range 0 to 255.
The UP/DOWN state of a tracked IPv6 route is determined by the user-configurable threshold
(threshold metric command) for a routes metric in the routing table. To provide a common tracking
interface for different clients, route metrics are scaled in the range 0 to 255, where 0 is connected and
255 is inaccessible.
The protocol-specific resolution value calculates the scaled metric by dividing a route's cost by the
resolution value set for the route protocol:
For ISIS, you can set the resolution in the range 1 to 1000, where the default is 10.
For OSPF, you can set the resolution in the range 1 to 1592, where the default is 1.
The resolution value used to map static routes is not configurable. By default, FTOS assigns a
metric of 0 to static routes.
The resolution value used to map RIP routes is not configurable. The RIP hop-count is
automatically multiplied by 16 to scale it. For example, a RIP metric of 16 (unreachable) scales to
256, which considers the route to be DOWN.

38
Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)
Overview
Open Shortest Path First version 2 for IPv4 is supported on platforms c e s
Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6 is supported on platforms c e
Note: The C-Series supports OSPFv3 with FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later.
OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information
between routers in a single Autonomous System (AS). OSPF is also a link-state protocol in which all
routers contain forwarding tables derived from information about their links to their neighbors.
The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, etc.) are
the same for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3. OSPFv3 runs on a per-link basis instead of on a per-IP-subnet
basis.
This chapter is divided into 2 sections. There is no overlap between the two sets of commands. You
cannot use an OSPFv2 command in the IPv6 OSPFv3 mode.
OSPFv2 Commands
OSPFv3 Commands
Note: FTOS version 7.8.1.0 introduces Multi-Process OSPF on IPv4 (OSPFv2) only. It is not
supported on OSPFv3 (IPv6).
Note that the CLI now requires that the Process ID be included when entering the ROUTER-OSPF
mode. Each command entered applies to the specified OSPFv2 process only.
OSPFv2 Commands
The Dell Force10 implementation of OSPFv2 is based on IETF RFC 2328. The following commands
enable you to configure and enable OSPFv2.
area default-cost
area nssa
area range
area stub
area virtual-link
auto-cost
Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) | 1005

clear ip ospf
clear ip ospf statistics

debug ip ospf
default-metric
description
distance
distance ospf
distribute-list in
distribute-list out
enable inverse mask
fast-convergence
flood-2328
graceful-restart grace-period
graceful-restart helper-reject
graceful-restart mode
graceful-restart role
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time
ip ospf authentication-key
ip ospf cost
ip ospf dead-interval
ip ospf hello-interval
ip ospf message-digest-key
ip ospf mtu-ignore
ip ospf network
ip ospf priority
ip ospf retransmit-interval
ip ospf transmit-delay
max-metric router-lsa
maximum-paths
mib-binding
network area
passive-interface
redistribute
redistribute bgp
redistribute isis
router-id
router ospf
show config
show ip ospf
show ip ospf asbr
show ip ospf database
show ip ospf database asbr-summary
show ip ospf database external
show ip ospf database network
1006 | Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

show ip ospf database nssa-external
show ip ospf database opaque-area
show ip ospf database opaque-as
show ip ospf database opaque-link
show ip ospf database router
show ip ospf database summary
show ip ospf interface
show ip ospf neighbor
show ip ospf routes
show ip ospf statistics
show ip ospf topology
show ip ospf virtual-links
summary-address
timers spf
area default-cost
ces Set the metric for the summary default route generated by the area border router (ABR) into the stub
area. Use this command on the border routers at the edge of a stub area.
Syntax area area-id default-cost cost

To return default values, use the no area area-id default-cost command.
Parameters
area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero
(0) to 65535.
cost Specifies the stub areas advertised external route metric.
Defaults cost = 1; no areas are configured.

Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
History
Usage In FTOS, cost is defined as reference bandwidth/bandwidth.

Information
Related
area stub Create a stub area.
Commands

area nssa
ces Specify an area as a Not So Stubby Area (NSSA).
Syntax area area-id nssa [default-information-originate] [no-redistribution] [no-summary]

To delete an NSSA, enter no area area-id nssa.
Parameters
area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) or enter a number
from 0 and 65535.
no-redistribution (OPTIONAL) Specify that the redistribute command should not distribute
routes into the NSSA. You should only use this command in a NSSA Area
Border Router (ABR).
default-information-or (OPTIONAL) Allows external routing information to be imported into the
iginate NSSA by using Type 7 default.
no-summary (OPTIONAL) Specify that no summary LSAs should be sent into the NSSA.
Command Mode ROUTER OSPF
Command
History
area range
ces Summarize routes matching an address/mask at an area border router (ABR).
Syntax area area-id range ip-address mask [not-advertise]

To disable route summarization, use the no area area-id range ip-address mask command.
Parameters
area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from
zero (0) to 65535.
ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format.
mask Specify a mask for the destination prefix. Enter the full mask (for example,
255.255.255.0).
not-advertise (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword not-advertise to set the status to DoNotAdvertise
(that is, the Type 3 summary-LSA is suppressed and the component networks remain
hidden from other areas.)
Defaults No range is configured.
Command
History

Usage Only the routes within an area are summarized, and that summary is advertised to other areas by the
Information ABR. External routes are not summarized.
Related
area stub Create a stub area.
Commands
router ospf Enter the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance.
area stub
ces Configure a stub area, which is an area not connected to other areas.
Syntax area area-id stub [no-summary]

To delete a stub area, enter no area area-id stub.
Parameters
area-id Specify the stub area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero
(0) to 65535.
no-summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword no-summary to prevent the ABR from sending
summary Link State Advertisements (LSAs) into the stub area.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage Use this command to configure all routers and access servers within a stub.
Information
Related
router ospf Enter the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance.
Commands
area virtual-link
ces Set a virtual link and its parameters.
Syntax area area-id virtual-link router-id [[authentication-key [encryption-type] key] |

[message-digest-key keyid md5 [encryption-type] key]] [dead-interval seconds]
[hello-interval seconds] [retransmit-interval seconds] [transmit-delay seconds]
To delete a virtual link, use the no area area-id virtual-link router-id command.

To delete a parameter of a virtual link, use the no area area-id virtual-link router-id
[[authentication-key [encryption-type] key] | [message-digest-key keyid md5

[encryption-type] key]] [dead-interval seconds] [hello-interval seconds]
[retransmit-interval seconds] [transmit-delay seconds] command syntax.
Parameters
area-id Specify the transit area for the virtual link in dotted decimal format
(A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535.
router-id Specify an ID (IP address in dotted decimal format) associated with a
virtual link neighbor.
authentication-key (OPTIONAL) Choose between two authentication methods:
[encryption-type] key | Enter the keyword authentication-key to enable simple
message-digest-key keyid authentication followed by an alphanumeric string up to 8
md5 [encryption-type] key characters long. Optionally, for the encryption-type variable,
enter the number 7 before entering the key string to indicate that an
encrypted password will follow.
Enter the keyword message-digest-key followed by a
number from 1 to 255 as the keyid. After the keyid, enter the
keyword md5 followed by the key. The key is an alphanumeric
string up to 16 characters long. Optionally, for the
encryption-type variable, enter the number 7 before entering the
key string to indicate that an encrypted password will follow.
dead-interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dead-interval followed by a
number as the number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
hello-interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword hello-interval followed by the
number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
retransmit-interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword retransmit-interval followed by
the number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
Default: 5 seconds.
transmit-delay seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword transmit-delay followed by the
number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 8192.
Default: 1 second.
Defaults dead-interval seconds = 40 seconds; hello-interval seconds = 10 seconds; retransmit-interval

seconds = 5 seconds; transmit-delay seconds = 1 second
Command
History
Usage All OSPF areas must be connected to a backbone area (usually Area 0). Virtual links connect broken or
Information discontiguous areas.

You cannot enable both authentication options. Choose either the authentication-key or
message-digest-key option.
auto-cost
ces Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method.
Syntax auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw]

To return to the default bandwidth or to assign cost based on the interface type, use the no auto-cost
[reference-bandwidth] command.
Parameters
ref-bw (OPTIONAL) Specify a reference bandwidth in megabits per second.
Range: 1 to 4294967
Default: 100 megabits per second.
Defaults 100 megabits per second.
Command
History
clear ip ospf
ces Clear all OSPF routing tables.
Syntax clear ip ospf process-id [process]
Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
process (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword process to reset the OSPF process.
Command
History
clear ip ospf statistics

ces Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors.

Syntax clear ip ospf process-id statistics [interface name {neighbor router-id}]
Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear statistics for a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
interface name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the
following interface keywords and slot/port or number information:
512 for ExaScale.
information.
neighbor router-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword neighbor followed by the neighbors
router-id in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
Command
History
Related
show ip ospf statistics Display the OSPF statistics
Commands
debug ip ospf
ces Display debug information on OSPF. Entering debug ip ospf enables OSPF debugging for the first
OSPF process,.
Syntax debug ip ospf process-id [bfd |event | packet | spf]

To cancel the debug command, enter no debug ip ospf.
Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to debug a specific process.
If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
bfd (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bfd to debug only OSPF BFD information.
event (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword event to debug only OSPF event information.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to debug only OSPF packet information.
spf (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword spf to display the Shortest Path First information.

Command
History
Example Figure 38-1. Command example: debug ip ospf process-id packet

FTOS#debug ip ospf 1 packet
OSPF process 90, packet debugging is on
FTOS#
08:14:24 : OSPF(100:00):
Xmt. v:2 t:1(HELLO) l:44 rid:192.1.1.1
aid:0.0.0.1 chk:0xa098 aut:0 auk: keyid:0 to:Gi 4/3 dst:224.0.0.5
netmask:255.255.255.0 pri:1 N-, MC-, E+, T-,
hi:10 di:40 dr:90.1.1.1 bdr:0.0.0.0
Table 38-1. Output Descriptions for debug ip ospf process-id packet
Field Description
8:14 Displays the time stamp.
OSPF Displays the OSPF process ID: instance ID.
v: Displays the OSPF version. FTOS supports version 2 only.
t: Displays the type of packet sent:
1 - Hello packet
2 - database description
3 - link state request
4 - link state update
5 - link state acknowledgement
l: Displays the packet length.
rid: Displays the OSPF router ID.
aid: Displays the Autonomous System ID.
chk: Displays the OSPF checksum.
aut: States if OSPF authentication is configured. One of the following is listed:
0 - no authentication configured
1 - simple authentication configured using the ip ospf authentication-key command)
2 - MD5 authentication configured using the ip ospf message-digest-key command.
auk: If the ip ospf authentication-key command is configured, this field displays the key used.
keyid: If the ip ospf message-digest-key command is configured, this field displays the MD5 key
to: Displays the interface to which the packet is intended.
dst: Displays the destination IP address.
netmask: Displays the destination IP address mask.
pri: Displays the OSPF priority

Table 38-1. Output Descriptions for debug ip ospf process-id packet
Field Description
N, MC, E, T Displays information available in the Options field of the HELLO packet:
N + (N-bit is set)
N - (N-bit is not set)
MC+ (bit used by MOSPF is set and router is able to forward IP multicast packets)
MC- (bit used by MOSPF is not set and router cannot forward IP multicast packets)
E + (router is able to accept AS External LSAs)
E - (router cannot accept AS External LSAs)
T + (router can support TOS)
T - (router cannot support TOS)
hi: Displays the amount of time configured for the HELLO interval.
di: Displays the amount of time configured for the DEAD interval.
dr: Displays the IP address of the designated router.
bdr: Displays the IP address of the Border Area Router.
ces Configure the FTOS to generate a default external route into an OSPF routing domain.
Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value]

[route-map map-name]
To return to the default values, enter no default-information originate.
Parameters
always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to specify that default route
information must always be advertised.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number to configure a
metric value for the route.
Range: 1 to 16777214
metric-type type-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by an OSPF link
state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are:
1 = Type 1 external route
2 = Type 2 external route.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an
established route map.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History

Related
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into OSPF.
Commands
default-metric
ces Change the metrics of redistributed routes to a value useful to OSPF. Use this command with the
redistribute command.

To return to the default values, enter no default-metric [number].
Parameters
number Enter a number as the metric.
Range: 1 to 16777214.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Related
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into OSPF.
Commands
description
ces Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration.
To remove the OSPF description, use the no description command.
Parameters
description Enter a text string description to identify the OSPF configuration (80 characters maximum).
Command
History
Related
show ip ospf asbr Display VLAN configuration.
Commands

distance
ces Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address.
Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name]

To delete the settings, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] command.
Parameters
weight Specify an administrative distance.
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 110
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a router ID in the dotted decimal format.
If you enter a router ID, you must include the mask for that router address.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a mask in dotted decimal format or /n format.
access-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of an IP standard access list, up to 140 characters.
Defaults 110
Command
History
Increased name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to
16 characters long.
distance ospf
ces Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes.
Syntax distance ospf [external dist3] [inter-area dist2] [intra-area dist1]

To delete these settings, enter no distance ospf.
Parameters
external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external followed by a number to specify a
distance for external type 5 and 7 routes.
Range: 1 to 255
Default: 110.
inter-area dist2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword inter-area followed by a number to specify a
distance metric for routes between areas.
Range: 1 to 255
Default: 110.
intra-area dist1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword intra-area followed by a number to specify a
distance metric for all routes within an area.
Range: 1 to 255
Default: 110.
Defaults external dist3 = 110; inter-area dist2 = 110; intra-area dist1 = 110.

Command
History
Usage To specify a distance for routes learned from other routing domains, use the redistribute command.
Information
distribute-list in
ces Apply a filter to incoming routing updates from OSPF to the routing table.

To delete a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command.
Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list.
information:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History

distribute-list out
ces Apply a filter to restrict certain routes destined for the local routing table after the SPF calculation.
Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static]

To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip |
static] command.
Parameters
bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bgp to specify that BGP routes are distributed.*
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to specify that connected routes are
distributed.
isis (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isis to specify that IS-IS routes are distributed.*
rip (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routes are distributed.*
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to specify that only manually configured
routes are distributed.
* BGP and ISIS routes are not available on the C-Series.

BGP, ISIS, and RIP routes are not available on the S-Series.
Command
History
Usage The distribute-list out command applies to routes being redistributed by autonomous system boundary
Information routers (ASBRs) into OSPF. It can be applied to external type 2 and external type 1 routes, but not to
intra-area and inter-area routes.
enable inverse mask

ce FTOS, by default, permits the user to input OSPF network command with a net-mask. This command
provides a choice between inverse-mask or net-mask (the default).
Syntax enable inverse mask

To return to the default net-mask, enter no enable inverse mask.
Defaults net-mask
Command
History

fast-convergence
ces This command sets the minimum LSA origination and arrival times to zero (0), allowing more rapid
route computation so that convergence takes less time.
Syntax fast-convergence {number}

To cancel fast-convergence, enter no fast convergence.
Parameters
number Enter the convergence level desired. The higher this parameter is set, the
faster OSPF converge takes place.
Range: 1-4
Defaults None.
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on all platforms.
History
Usage The higher this parameter is set, the faster OSPF converge takes place. Note that the faster the
Information convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This will impact CPU utilization
and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Higher convergence levels
should only be selected following consultation with Dell Force10 technical support.
flood-2328
ces Enable RFC-2328 flooding behavior.
Syntax flood-2328
To disable, use the no flood-2328 command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage In OSPF, flooding is the most resource-consuming task. The flooding algorithm, described in
Information RFC-2328, requires that OSPF flood LSAs (Link State Advertisements) on all interfaces, as governed
by LSAs flooding scope (see Section 13 of the RFC). When multiple direct links connect two routers,
the RFC-2328 flooding algorithm generates significant redundant information across all links.
By default, FTOS implements an enhanced flooding procedure that dynamically and intelligently
determines when to optimize flooding. Whenever possible, the OSPF task attempts to reduce flooding
overhead by selectively flooding on a subset of the interfaces between two routers.

When flood-2328 is enabled, this command configures FTOS to flood LSAs on all interfaces.
ces Specifies the time duration, in seconds, that the routers neighbors will continue to advertise the router
as fully adjacent regardless of the synchronization state during a graceful restart.
Syntax graceful-restart grace-period seconds

To disable the grace period, enter no graceful-restart grace-period.
Parameters
seconds Time duration, in seconds, that specifies the duration of the restart process
before OSPF terminates the process.
Command
History
Introduced support for Multi-Process OSPF.
graceful-restart helper-reject
ces Specify the OSPF router to not act as a helper during graceful restart.
Syntax graceful-restart helper-reject ip-address

To return to default value, enter no graceful-restart helper-reject.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the OSPF router-id, in IP address format, of the restart router that will
not act as a helper during graceful restart.
Command
History
Restart role enabled on S-Series (Both Helper and Restart roles now supported
on S-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Helper-Role supported on S-Series

ces Enable the graceful restart mode.
Syntax graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only]

To disable graceful restart mode, enter no graceful-restart mode.
Parameters
planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful
restart is supported in a planned restart condition only.
unplanned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords unplanned-only to indicate graceful
restart is supported in an unplanned restart condition only.
Defaults Support for both planned and unplanned failures.
Command
History
graceful-restart role
ces Specify the role for your OSPF router during graceful restart.
Syntax graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only]

To disable graceful restart role, enter no graceful-restart role.
Parameters
role helper-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords helper-only to specify the OSPF router
is a helper only during graceful restart.
role restart-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords restart-only to specify the OSPF
router is a restart only during graceful-restart.
Defaults OSPF routers are, by default, both helper and restart routers during a graceful restart.
Command
History
Restart and helper roles supported on S-Series
Version 7.7.1 Helper-Role supported on S-Series

ip ospf auth-change-wait-time
ces OSPF provides a grace period while OSPF changes its interface authentication type. During the grace
period, OSPF sends out packets with new and old authentication scheme till the grace period expires.
Syntax ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds

To return to the default, enter no ip ospf auth-change-wait-time.
Parameters
seconds Enter seconds
Range: 0 to 300
Defaults zero (0) seconds
Command
History
ip ospf authentication-key
ces Enable authentication and set an authentication key on OSPF traffic on an interface.
Syntax ip ospf authentication-key [encryption-type] key

To delete an authentication key, enter no ip ospf authentication-key.
Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the key.
key Enter an 8 character string. Strings longer than 8 characters are truncated.
Command
History
Usage All neighboring routers in the same network must use the same password to exchange OSPF
Information information.
ip ospf cost
ces Change the cost associated with the OSPF traffic on an interface.
Syntax ip ospf cost cost

To return to default value, enter no ip ospf cost.

Parameters
cost Enter a number as the cost.
Range: 1 to 65535.
Defaults The default cost is based on the reference bandwidth.
Command
History
Usage If this command is not configured, cost is based on the auto-cost command.
Information
When you configure OSPF over multiple vendors, use the ip ospf cost command to ensure that all
routers use the same cost. Otherwise, OSPF routes improperly.
Related
auto-cost Control how the OSPF interface cost is calculated.
Commands
ip ospf dead-interval
ces Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the interval elapses,
the neighboring routers declare the router dead.
Syntax ip ospf dead-interval seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip ospf dead-interval.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds for the interval.
Range: 1 to 65535. Default: 40 seconds.
Defaults 40 seconds
Command
History
Usage By default, the dead interval is four times the default hello-interval.
Information
Related
ip ospf hello-interval Set the time interval between hello packets.
Commands

ip ospf hello-interval
ces Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface.
Syntax ip ospf hello-interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip ospf hello-interval.
Parameters
seconds Enter a the number of second as the delay between hello packets.
Range: 1 to 65535.
Defaults 10 seconds
Command
History
Usage The time interval between hello packets must be the same for routers in a network.
Information
Related
ip ospf dead-interval Set the time interval before a router is declared dead.
Commands
ip ospf message-digest-key
ces Enable OSPF MD5 authentication and send an OSPF message digest key on the interface.
Syntax ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5 key

To delete a key, use the no ip ospf message-digest-key keyid command.
Parameters
keyid Enter a number as the key ID.
Range: 1 to 255.
key Enter a continuous character string as the password.
Defaults No MD5 authentication is configured.
Command
History
Usage To change to a different key on the interface, enable the new key while the old key is still enabled. The
Information FTOS will send two packets: the first packet authenticated with the old key, and the second packet
authenticated with the new key. This process ensures that the neighbors learn the new key and
communication is not disrupted by keeping the old key enabled.

After the reply is received and the new key is authenticated, you must delete the old key. Dell Force10
recommends keeping only one key per interface.
Note: The MD5 secret is stored as plain text in the configuration file with service password
encryption.
ip ospf mtu-ignore
ces Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description (DBD) packets.
Syntax ip ospf mtu-ignore

To return to the default, enter no ip ospf mtu-ignore.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
ip ospf network
ces Set the network type for the interface.
Syntax ip ospf network {broadcast | point-to-point}

To return to the default, enter no ip ospf network.
Parameters
broadcast Enter the keyword broadcast to designate the interface as part of a broadcast
network.
point-to-point Enter the keyword point-to-point to designate the interface as part of a
point-to-point network.
Command
History

ip ospf priority
ces Set the priority of the interface to determine the Designated Router for the OSPF network.
Syntax ip ospf priority number

To return to the default setting, enter no ip ospf priority.
Parameters
number Enter a number as the priority.
Range: 0 to 255.
The default is 1.
Defaults 1
Command
History
Usage Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a Designated Router or Backup
Information Designated Router.
Use this command for interfaces connected to multi-access networks, not point-to-point networks.
ip ospf retransmit-interval
ces Set the retransmission time between lost link state advertisements (LSAs) for adjacencies belonging to
the interface.
Syntax ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds

To return to the default values, enter no ip ospf retransmit-interval.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds as the interval between retransmission.
Range: 1 to 3600.
Default: 5 seconds.
This interval must be greater than the expected round-trip time for a packet to travel
between two routers.
Defaults 5 seconds
Command
History
Usage Set the time interval to a number large enough to prevent unnecessary retransmissions. For example,
Information the interval should be larger for interfaces connected to virtual links.

ip ospf transmit-delay
ces Set the estimated time elapsed to send a link state update packet on the interface.
Syntax ip ospf transmit-delay seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip ospf transmit-delay.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds as the transmission time. This value should be greater than the
transmission and propagation delays for the interface.
Range: 1 to 3600.
Default: 1 second.
Defaults 1 second
Command
History
ces Generate a Syslog message for OSPF adjacency state changes. When enabled, changes are logged for
both IPv4 and IPv6 adjacencies.
Syntax log-adjacency-changes
Defaults Disabled.
Command Mode ROUTER OSPF
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced for IPv6.
History
max-metric router-lsa
ce Configure the maximum cost of 65535 on a new router so that it functions as a stub router in the
network and OSPF traffic destined to other networks is not forwarded on a path through the router.
Syntax max-metric router-lsa [on-startup {announce-time | wait-for-bgp [wait-time]}]

To remove the maximum metric assignment from an OSPF router and send LSAs with the currently
configured cost, enter no max-metric router-lsa [on-startup {announce-time | wait-for-bgp
[wait-time]}].

Parameters
on-startup Enter the time (in seconds) following boot-up during which the maximum
announce-time cost (65535) for transmitting OSPF traffic on router interfaces is announced
in LSAs and the router functions as a stub router.
on-startup wait-for-bgp Enable the router to announce the maximum metric in OSPF LSAs until the
[wait-time] BGP routing table converges with updated routes.
You can also specify the time (in seconds) that the router waits for the BGP
routing table to converge before it stops advertising the maximum cost in
LSAs and advertises the routers currently configured OSPF cost. Range: 5
to 86400 seconds.
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series TeraScale.
History
Usage When you bring a new router onto an OSPF network, you can configure the router to function as a stub
Information router by globally reconfiguring the OSPF link cost so that other routers do not use a path that forwards
traffic destined to other networks through the new router for a specified time until the routers
switching and routing functions are up and running, and the routing tables in network routers have
converged.
By using the max-metric router-lsa command, you force the link cost of all OSPF non-stub links to
the maximum link cost (65535). The advertisement of this maximum metric causes other routers to
assign a cost to the new router that is higher than the cost of using an alternate path. Because of the
high cost assigned to paths that pass through the new router, other routers will not use a path through
the router as a transit path to forward traffic to other networks.
Use the max-metric router-lsa command to gracefully shut down or reload a router without dropping
packets destined for other networks.
Note: If you enter the max-metric router-lsa command without an option (on-startup
announce-time or on-startup wait-for-bgp [wait-time]), the maximum metric of 65535 is
always announced in LSAs sent by the router.

Example Figure 38-2. Command Example: max-metric router-lsa
FTOS(conf)#router ospf 10
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#log-adjacency-changes
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#network 4.1.1.0/24 area 0
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#network 1.1.1.0/24 area 1
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#max-metric router-lsa on-startup wait-for-bgp
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#exit
FTOS(conf)#show ip ospf
Routing Process ospf 10 with ID 100.1.1.1 Virtual router default-vrf
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes
It is an Area Border Router
Originating router lsas with maximum metric
Time remaining 00:07:07
Condition : On-Startup while BGP is converging for 600 secs. State : Active
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs
Convergence Level 0
Min LSA origination 5 secs, Min LSA arrival 1 secs
Number of area in this router is 2, normal 2 stub 0 nssa 0
Area BACKBONE (0)
Number of interface in this area is 1
SPF algorithm executed 3 times
Area ranges are
Area 1
Area ranges are
FTOS(conf)#show ip ospf database router

Exception Flag: Announcing maximum link costs
LS age: 198
Options: (No TOS-capability, DC)
LS Type: Router Links
Link State ID: 2.1.1.1
Advertising Router: 2.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 80000005
Checksum: 0x9F5D
Length: 48
Number of Links: 2
maximum-paths
ces Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths.

To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, enter no maximum-paths.
Parameters
number Specify the number of paths.
Range: 1 to 16.
Default: 4 paths.
Defaults 4
Command
History

mib-binding
ces Enable this OSPF process ID to manage the SNMP traps and process SNMP queries.
Syntax mib-binding
To mib-binding on this OSPF process, enter no mib-binding.
Defaults None.
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced to all platforms.
History
Usage This command is either enabled or disabled. If no OSPF process is identified as the MIB manager, the
Information first OSPF process will be used.
If an OSPF process has been selected, it must be disabled prior to assigning new process ID the MIB
responsibility.
network area
ces Define which interfaces run OSPF and the OSPF area for those interfaces.
Syntax network ip-address mask area area-id

To disable an OSPF area, use the no network ip-address mask area area-id command.
Parameters
ip-address Specify a primary or secondary address in dotted decimal format. The primary address
is required before adding the secondary address.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format. (/x)
area-id Enter the OSPF area ID as either a decimal value or in a valid IP address.
Decimal value range: 0 to 65535
IP address format: dotted decimal format A.B.C.D.
Note: If the area ID is smaller than 65535, it will be converted to a decimal
value. For example, if you use an area ID of 0.0.0.1, it will be converted to 1.
Command
History
Usage To enable OSPF on an interface, the network area command must include, in its range of addresses,
Information the primary IP address of an interface.
Note: An interface can be attached only to a single OSPF area.

If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output will not list
Area 0.
passive-interface
ces Suppress both receiving and sending routing updates on an interface.
Syntax passive-interface {default | interface}

To enable both the receiving and sending routing, enter the no passive-interface interface
command.
To return all OSPF interfaces (current and future) to active, enter the no passive-interface default
command.
Parameters
default Enter the keyword default to make all OSPF interfaces (current and future) passive.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified to include the default keyword.
Information interface will still be included in OSPF updates sent via other interfaces.
The default keyword sets all interfaces as passive. You can then configure individual interfaces, where
adjacencies are desired, using the no passive-interface interface command. The no form of this
command is inserted into the configuration for individual interfaces when the no passive-interface
interface command is issued while passive-interface default is configured.
This command behavior has changed as follows:
passive-interface interface
The previous no passive-interface interface is removed from the running configuration.

The ABR status for the router is updated.
Save passive-interface interface into the running configuration.

passive-interface default
All present and future OSPF interface are marked as passive.
Any adjacency are explicitly terminated from all OSPF interfaces.
All previous passive-interface interface commands are removed from the running
configuration.
All previous no passive-interface interface commands are removed from the running
configuration.
no passive-interface interface
Remove the interface from the passive list.

The ABR status for the router is updated.
If passive-interface default is specified, then save no passive-interface interface into the
running configuration.
No passive-interface default
Clear everything and revert to the default behavior.

All previously marked passive interfaces are removed.
May update ABR status.
redistribute
ces Redistribute information from another routing protocol throughout the OSPF process.
Syntax redistribute {connected | rip | static} [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value]

[route-map map-name] [tag tag-value]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | isis | rip | static} command.
Parameters
connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes
on interfaces is redistributed.
rip Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routing information is redistributed.
static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is
redistributed.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number.
Range: 0 (zero) to 16777214.
metric-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by one of the
type-value following:
1 = OSPF External type 1
2 = OSPF External type 2
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of the
route map.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a number.
Range: 0 to 4294967295

Command
History
Usage To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command.
Information
Related
default-information originate Generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain.
Commands
redistribute bgp
ces Redistribute BGP routing information throughout the OSPF instance.
Syntax redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] | [tag tag-value]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] |
[metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] command.
Parameters
as number Enter the autonomous system number.
Range: 1 to 65535
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by the metric-value
number.
Range: 0 to16777214
metric-type type-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by one of the
following:
1 = for OSPF External type 1
route map.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag to set the tag for routes redistributed
into OSPF.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.3 Introduced Route Map for BGP Redistribution to OSPF
Version 7.4.1.0 Modified to include the default keyword.

redistribute isis
ces Redistribute IS-IS routing information throughout the OSPF instance.
Syntax redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value | metric-type
type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric
metric-value | metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] command.
Parameters
tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process.
level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-1
routes.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1
and Level-2 routes.
routes.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number.
Range: 0 (zero) to 4294967295.
metric-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by one of the
type-value following:
route map.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a number.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Command
History
Usage IS-IS is not supported on S-Series platforms.

Information
router-id
ces Use this command to configure a fixed router ID.
Syntax router-id ip-address

To remove the fixed router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the router ID in the IP address format

Command
History
Example Figure 38-3. Command Example: router-id

FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#router-id 1.1.1.1
Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/n]:
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#show config
!
router ospf 100
router-id 1.1.1.1
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#no router-id
Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/n]:
FTOS#
Usage You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address format for each router. However, each router ID
Information must be unique. If this command is used on an OSPF router process, which is already active (that is,
has neighbors), a prompt reminding you that changing router-id will bring down the existing OSPF
adjacency. The new router ID is effective at the next reload
router ospf
ces Enter the ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance.
Syntax router ospf process-id [vrf {vrf name}]

To clear an OSPF instance, enter no router ospf process-id.
Parameters
process-id Enter a number for the OSPF instance.
Range: 1 to 65535.
vrf name (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the VRF process identifier to tie the OSPF instance to the
VRF. All network commands under this OSPF instance are subsequently tied to the VRF
instance.
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced support of Multi-Process OSPF.

Example Figure 38-4. Command Example: router ospf
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#
Usage You must have an IP address assigned to an interface to enter the ROUTER OSPF mode and configure
Information OSPF.
Once the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF Process ID cannot be used again in
the system.
show config
ces Display the non-default values in the current OSPF configuration.
Syntax show config
Command
History

FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#show config
!
router ospf 3
passive-interface FastEthernet 0/1
FTOS(conf-router_ospf)#
show ip ospf
ces Display information on the OSPF process configured on the switch.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id [vrf vrf name]
Parameters
process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
vrf name E-Series Only: Show only the OSPF information tied to the VRF process.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced process-id option, in support of Multi-Process OSPF.

Usage If you are using Multi-Process OSPF, you must enter the Process ID to view information regarding a
Information specific OSPF process. If you do not enter the Process ID, only the first configured process is listed.
If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output will not list
Area 0.
Example Figure 38-6. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id

FTOS>show ip ospf 1
Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 11.1.2.1
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes
It is an autonomous system boundaryrouter
SPF schedule delay 0 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 5 secs
Number of area in this router is 1, normal 1 stub 0 nssa 0
Area BACKBONE (0.0.0.0)
Area ranges are
FTOS>
Table 38-2. Command Output Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id

Routing Process... Displays the OSPF process ID and the IP address associated with the
process ID.
Supports only... Displays the number of Type of Service (TOS) rouse supported.
SPF schedule... Displays the delay and hold time configured for this process ID.
Number of... Displays the number and type of areas configured for this process ID.
Related
show ip ospf database Displays information about the OSPF routes configured.
Commands
show ip ospf interface Displays the OSPF interfaces configured.
show ip ospf neighbor Displays the OSPF neighbors configured.
show ip ospf virtual-links Displays the OSPF virtual links configured.
show ip ospf asbr

ces Display all ASBR routers visible to OSPF.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id asbr
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Use this command to isolate problems with external routes. In OSPF, external routes are calculated by
adding the LSA cost to the cost of reaching the ASBR router. If an external route does not have the
correct cost, use this command to determine if the path to the originating router is correct. The display
output is not sorted in any order.
Note: ASBRs that are not in directly connected areas are also displayed.
Example Figure 38-7. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id asbr

FTOS#show ip ospf 1asbr
RouterID Flags Cost Nexthop Interface Area

3.3.3.3 -/-/-/ 2 10.0.0.2 Gi 0/1 1
1.1.1.1 E/-/-/ 0 0.0.0.0 - 0 FTOS#
You can determine if an ASBR is in a directly connected area (or not) by the flags. For ASBRs in a
directly connected area, E flags are set. In the figure above, router 1.1.1.1 is in a directly connected
area since the Flag is E/-/-/. For remote ASBRs, the E flag is clear (-/-/-/)
show ip ospf database

ces Display all LSA information. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database [database-summary]
Parameters
database-summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords database-summary to the display
summary of the information stored in the OSPFv2 database of the router,
including the number of LSAs received from OSPFv2 neighbor routers.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 38-8. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database database-summary
FTOS#show ip ospf database database-summary

!
OSPF Router with ID (200.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
Area ID Router Net S-Net S-ASBR Type7 Type9 Type10 Total ChSum
0 4 3 3000 0 0 1 0 3008 0x5e69164
Example Figure 38-9. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database

FTOS>show ip ospf 1 database

Router (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum Link count
11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 673 0x80000005 0x707e 2
13.1.1.1 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000097 0x1035 2
192.68.135.2 192.68.135.2 1419 0x80000294 0x9cbd 1
Network (Area 0.0.0.0)

Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum
10.2.3.2 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000003 0x6592
10.2.4.2 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000055 0x683e
Type-5 AS External
Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum Tag
0.0.0.0 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000052 0xeb83 100
1.1.1.1 192.68.135.2 908 0x8000002a 0xbd27 0
10.1.1.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x9012 0
10.1.2.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x851c 0
10.2.2.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x7927 0
10.2.3.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x6e31 0
10.2.4.0 13.1.1.1 1184 0x80000068 0x45db 0
11.1.1.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x831e 0
11.1.2.0 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 0x7828 0
12.1.2.0 192.68.135.2 1663 0x80000054 0xd8d6 0
13.1.1.0 13.1.1.1 1192 0x8000006b 0x2718 0
13.1.2.0 13.1.1.1 1184 0x8000006b 0x1c22 0
172.16.1.0 13.1.1.1 148 0x8000006d 0x533b 0
FTOS>
Table 38-3. Command Output Description: show ip ospf process-id database
Field Description
Link ID Identifies the router ID.
ADV Router Identifies the advertising routers ID.
Age Displays the link state age.
Seq# Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or
duplicate link state advertisements.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSAs complete contents.
Link count Displays the number of interfaces for that router.
Related
show ip ospf database asbr-summary Displays only ASBR summary LSA information.
Commands

show ip ospf database asbr-summary
ces Display information about AS Boundary LSAs.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database asbr-summary [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters
link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends
on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following:
the networks IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs
the routers OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs
the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs
adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router ip-address to display only the LSA
ip-address information about that router.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 38-10. Command Example: show ip ospf database asbr-summary (Partial)
FTOS#show ip ospf 100 database asbr-summary
Summary Asbr (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 1437
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Summary Asbr
LS Seq Number: 0x8000000f
Checksum: 0x8221
Length: 28
Network Mask: /0
TOS: 0 Metric: 2
LS age: 473
LS type: Summary Asbr
LS Seq Number: 0x80000010
Checksum: 0x4198
Length: 28
--More--

Table 38-4. Command Output Descriptions: show ip ospf database asbr-summary
Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSAs age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be
found in this item:
TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the
router can support Type of Service.
DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can
support OSPF over demand circuits.
E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS
External LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSAs type.
Link State ID Displays the Link State ID.
Advertising Router Identifies the advertising routers ID.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the an LSAs complete contents.
Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area.
TOS Displays the Type of Service (TOS) options. Option 0 is the only option.
Metric Displays the LSA metric.
Related
show ip ospf database Displays OSPF database information.
Commands
show ip ospf database external

ces Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database external [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History


Example Figure 38-11. Command Example: show ip ospf database external

FTOS#show ip ospf 1 database external

Type-5 AS External
LS age: 612
LS type: Type-5 AS External
Checksum: 0x4cde
Length: 36
Network Mask: /32
Metrics Type: 2
TOS: 0
Metrics: 25
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0
External Route Tag: 43
LS age: 1868
Options: (No TOS-capability, DC)
LS type: Type-5 AS External
Checksum: 0xa00e
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Metrics Type: 2
TOS: 0
Metrics: 1
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0
External Route Tag: 701
FTOS#
Table 38-5. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database

external
Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSA age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can
be found in this item:
External LSAs.
Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSAs originating router.

external
Item Description
LS Seq Number Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify
old or duplicate LSAs.
Metrics Type Displays the external type.
TOS Displays the TOS options. Option 0 is the only option.
Metrics Displays the LSA metric.
Forward Address Identifies the address of the forwarding router. Data traffic is forwarded to this
router. If the forwarding address is 0.0.0.0, data traffic is forwarded to the
originating router.
External Route Tag Displays the 32-bit field attached to each external route. This field is not used by
the OSPF protocol, but can be used for external route management.
Related
Commands
show ip ospf database network

ces Display the network (type 2) LSA information.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database network [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 38-12. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database network
FTOS#show ip ospf 1 data network

LS age: 1372
Options: (No TOS-capability, DC, E)
LS type: Network
Checksum: 0xa35
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 20.20.20.8
LS age: 252
Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E)
LS type: Network
Checksum: 0x4309
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
FTOS#

network
Item Description
found in this item:
TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router
can support Type of Service.
DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support
OSPF over demand circuits.
E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External
LSAs.
Checksum Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or
duplicate LSAs.
Length Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSAs complete contents.
Network Mask Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
Attached Router Identifies the IP address of routers attached to the network.

Related
Commands
show ip ospf database nssa-external

ces Display NSSA-External (type 7) LSA information.
Syntax show ip ospf database nssa-external [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands
show ip ospf database opaque-area

ces Display the opaque-area (type 10) LSA information.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-area [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 38-13. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database opaque-area
(Partial)
FTOS>show ip ospf 1 database opaque-area
Type-10 Opaque Link Area (Area 0)
LS age: 1133
LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area
Checksum: 0x376
Length: 28
Opaque Type: 1
Opaque ID: 1
Unable to display opaque data
LS age: 833
LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area
Checksum: 0x19c2
--More--

opaque-area
Item Description
LS Age Displays the LSAs age.
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following
options can be found in this item:
TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on
whether the router can support Type of Service.
DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router
can support OSPF over demand circuits.
External LSAs.
Advertising Router Identifies the advertising routers ID.
Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the an LSAs complete contents.

opaque-area
Item Description
Opaque Type Displays the Opaque type field (the first 8 bits of the Link State ID).
Opaque ID Displays the Opaque type-specific ID (the remaining 24 bits of the Link
State ID).
Related
Commands
show ip ospf database opaque-as

ces Display the opaque-as (type 11) LSA information.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-as [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands
show ip ospf database opaque-link

ces Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database opaque-link [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]

Parameters

adv-router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword adv-router followed by the IP address of an
ip-address Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands
show ip ospf database router

ces Display the router (type 1) LSA information.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database router [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 38-14. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database router (Partial)
FTOS#show ip ospf 100 database router
Router (Area 0)
LS age: 967
LS type: Router
LS Seq Number: 0x8000012f
Checksum: 0x3357
Length: 144
AS Boundary Router
Area Border Router
Number of Links: 10
Link connected to: a Transit Network

(Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.129.1
(Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.129.1
Number of TOS metric: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 1

TOS 0 Metric: 1

TOS 0 Metric: 1

TOS 0 Metric: 1

TOS 0 Metric: 1
Link connected to: a Stub Network

(Link ID) Network/subnet number: 11.1.5.0
--More--

Table 38-8. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id database router
Item Description
Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can
be found in this item:
External LSAs.
LS Type Displays the LSA type.
LS Seq Number Displays the link state sequence number. This number detects duplicate or old
LSAs.
Number of Links Displays the number of active links to the type of router (Area Border Router or
AS Boundary Router) listed in the previous line.
Link connected to: Identifies the type of network to which the router is connected.
(Link ID) Identifies the link type and address.
(Link Data) Identifies the router interface address.
Number of TOS Metric Lists the number of TOS metrics.
TOS 0 Metric Lists the number of TOS 0 metrics.
Related
Commands
show ip ospf database summary

ces Display the network summary (type 3) LSA routing information.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id database summary [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address]
Parameters

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 38-15. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id database summary
FTOS#show ip ospf 100 database summary
Summary Network (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 1551
Options: (No TOS-capability, DC, E)
LS type: Summary Network
Checksum: 0xb5a2
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 1
LS age: 9
Checksum: 0x987c
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 1
LS age: 7
Checksum: 0x1241
Length: 28
Network Mask: /26
TOS: 0 Metric: 1


summary
Items Description
found in this item:
TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router
can support Type of Service.
DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support
OSPF over demand circuits.
E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External
LSAs.
LS Seq Number Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or
duplicate LSAs.
TOS Displays the TOS options. Option 0 is the only option.
Metric Displays the LSA metrics.
Related
Commands
show ip ospf interface

ces Display the OSPF interfaces configured. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id interface [interface]

Parameters
For loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0
to 16383.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The range is from 1
to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 38-16. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id interface
FTOS>show ip ospf int

Internet Address 192.168.1.2/30, Area 0.0.0.1
Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.2, Interface address 192.168.1.2
Backup Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.1, Interface address 192.168.1.1
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:02
Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1
Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.1 (Backup Designated Router)

Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DROTHER, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.5, Interface address 192.168.0.4
Backup Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.3, Interface address 192.168.0.2
Neighbor Count is 3, Adjacent neighbor count is 2
Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.5 (Designated Router)
Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.3 (Backup Designated Router)
Loopback 0 is up, line protocol is up

Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type LOOPBACK, Cost: 1
Loopback interface is treated as a stub Host.
Table 38-10. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id interface
Line beginning with Description

GigabitEthernet... This line identifies the interface type slot/port and the status of the OSPF protocol
on that interface.
Internet Address... This line displays the IP address, network mask and area assigned to this
interface.
Process ID... This line displays the OSPF Process ID, Router ID, Network type and cost metric
for this interface.
Transmit Delay... This line displays the interfaces settings for Transmit Delay, State, and Priority.
In the State setting, BDR is Backup Designated Router.
Designated Router... This line displays the ID of the Designated Router and its interface address.
Backup Designated... This line displays the ID of the Backup Designated Router and its interface
address.
Timer intervals... This line displays the interfaces timer settings for Hello interval, Dead interval,
Transmit Delay (Wait), and Retransmit Interval.
Hello due... This line displays the amount time till the next Hello packet is sent out this
interface.
Neighbor Count... This line displays the number of neighbors and adjacent neighbors. Listed below
this line are the details about each adjacent neighbor.
show ip ospf neighbor

ces Display the OSPF neighbors configured.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id neighbor

Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 38-17. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id neighbor

FTOS#show ip ospf 34 neighbor
Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area

20.20.20.7 1 FULL/DR 00:00:32 182.10.10.3 Gi 0/0 0.0.0.2
192.10.10.2 1 FULL/DR 00:00:37 192.10.10.2 Gi 0/1 0.0.0.1
20.20.20.1 1 FULL/DROTHER00:00:36 192.10.10.4 Gi 0/1 0.0.0.1
FTOS#
Table 38-11. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id neighbor

Neighbor ID Displays the neighbor router ID.
Pri Displays the priority assigned neighbor.
State Displays the OSPF state of the neighbor.
Dead Time Displays the expected time until FTOS declares the neighbor dead.
Address Displays the IP address of the neighbor.
Interface Displays the interface type slot/port information.
Area Displays the neighbors area (process ID).
show ip ospf routes

ces Display routes as calculated by OSPF and stored in OSPF RIB.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id routes
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
This command is useful in isolating routing problems between OSPF and RTM. For example, if a route
is missing from the RTM/FIB but is visible from the display output of this command, then likely the
problem is with downloading the route to the RTM.
This command has the following limitations:
The display output is sorted by prefixes; intra-area ECMP routes are not displayed together.
For Type 2 external routes, type1 cost is not displayed.
Example Figure 38-18. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id routes

FTOS#show ip ospf 100 route
Prefix Cost Nexthop Interface Area Type

1.1.1.1 1 0.0.0.0 Lo 0 0 Intra-Area
3.3.3.3 2 13.0.0.3 Gi 0/47 1 Intra-Area
13.0.0.0 1 0.0.0.0 Gi 0/47 0 Intra-Area
150.150.150.0 2 13.0.0.3 Gi 0/47 - External
172.30.1.0 2 13.0.0.3 Gi 0/47 1 Intra-Area
FTOS#
show ip ospf statistics

ces Display OSPF statistics.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id statistics global | [interface name {neighbor router-id}]
Parameters
global Enter the keyword global to display the packet counts received on all running
OSPF interfaces and packet counts received and transmitted by all OSPF
neighbors.

interface name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the following
interface keywords and slot/port or number information:
a number:
for ExaScale.
information.
neighbor router-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword neighbor followed by the neighbors
router-id in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 38-19. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id statistics global
FTOS#show ip ospf 1 statistics global
OSPF Packet Count

Total Error Hello DDiscr LSReq LSUpd LSAck
RX 10 0 8 2 0 0 0
TX 10 0 10 0 0 0 0
OSPF Global Queue Length

TxQ-Len RxQ-Len Tx-Mark Rx-Mark
Hello-Q 0 0 0 2
LSR-Q 0 0 0 0
Other-Q 0 0 0 0
Error packets (Only for RX)
Intf-Down 0 Non-Dr 0 Self-Org 0

Wrong-Len 0 Invld-Nbr 0 Nbr-State 0
Auth-Err 0 MD5-Err 0 Chksum 0
Version 0 AreaMis 0 Conf-Issues 0
No-Buffer 0 Seq-No 0 Socket 0
Q-OverFlow 0 Unkown-Pkt 0
Error packets (Only for TX)
Socket Errors 0
FTOS#

Table 38-12. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf statistics process-id

global

Total Displays the total number of packets received/transmitted by the OSPF process
Error Displays the error count while receiving and transmitting packets by the OSPF process
Hello Number of OSPF Hello packets
DDiscr Number of database description packets
LSReq Number of link state request packets
LSUpd Number of link state update packets
LSAck Number of link state acknowledgement packets
TxQ-Len The transmission queue length
RxQ-Len The reception queue length
Tx-Mark The highest number mark in the transmission queue
Rx-Mark The highest number mark in the reception queue
Hello-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the hello packets
LSR-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state request packets.
Other-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state acknowledgement, database
description, and update packets.
Table 38-13. Error Definitions: show ip ospf statistics process-id global
Error Type Description

Intf_Down Received packets on an interface that is either down or OSPF is not enabled.
Non-Dr Received packets with a destination address of ALL_DRS even though SELF is not a
designated router
Self-Org Receive the self originated packet
Wrong_Len The received packet length is different to what was indicated in the OSPF header
Invld-Nbr LSA, LSR, LSU, and DDB are received from a peer which is not a neighbor peer
Nbr-State LSA, LSR, and LSU are received from a neighbor with stats less than the loading state
Auth-Error Simple authentication error
MD5-Error MD5 error
Cksum-Err Checksum Error
Version Version mismatch
AreaMismatch Area mismatch
Conf-Issue The received hello packet has a different hello or dead interval than the configuration
No-Buffer Buffer allocation failure
Seq-no A sequence no errors occurred during the database exchange process
Socket Socket Read/Write operation error
Q-overflow Packet(s) dropped due to queue overflow
Unknown-Pkt Received packet is not an OSPF packet

The show ip ospf process-id statistics command displays the error packet count received on each
interface as:
The hello-timer remaining value for each interface
The wait-timer remaining value for each interface
The grace-timer remaining value for each interface
The packet count received and transmitted for each neighbor
Dead timer remaining value for each neighbor
Transmit timer remaining value for each neighbor
The LSU Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor
The LSR Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor
Example Figure 38-20. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id statistics

FTOS#show ip ospf 100 statistics
Interface GigabitEthernet 0/8
Hello-Timer 9, Wait-Timer 0, Grace-Timer 0

Error packets (Only for RX)
Intf-Down 0 Non-Dr 0 Self-Org 0

Wrong-Len 0 Invld-Nbr 0 Nbr-State 0
Auth-Error 0 MD5-Error 0 Cksum-Err 0
Version 0 AreaMisMatch 0 Conf-Issue 0
SeqNo-Err 0 Unkown-Pkt 0
Neighbor ID 9.1.1.2
Hello DDiscr LSReq LSUpd LSAck

RX 59 3 1 1 1
TX 62 2 1 0 0
Dead-Timer 37, Transmit-Timer 0

LSU-Q-Len 0, LSU-Q-Wmark 0
LSR-Q-Len 0, LSR-Q-Wmark 1
Related
clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in all interfaces and neighbors
Commands
show ip ospf topology

ces Display routers in directly connected areas.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id topology
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History


This command can be used to isolate problems with inter-area and external routes. In OSPF inter-area
and external routes are calculated by adding LSA cost to the cost of reaching the router. If an inter-area
or external route is not of correct cost, the display can determine if the path to the originating router is
correct or not.
Example Figure 38-21. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id topology

FTOS#show ip ospf 1 topology
Router ID Flags Cost Nexthop Interface Area

3.3.3.3 E/B/-/ 1 20.0.0.3 Gi 13/1 0
1.1.1.1 E/-/-/ 1 10.0.0.1 Gi 7/1 1
FTOS#
show ip ospf virtual-links

ces Display the OSPF virtual links configured and is useful for debugging OSPF routing operations. If no
OSPF virtual-links are enabled on the switch, no output is generated.
Syntax show ip ospf process-id virtual-links
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 38-22. Command Example: show ip ospf process-id virtual-links

FTOS#show ip ospf 1 virt
Virtual Link to router 192.168.253.5 is up

Run as demand circuit
Transit area 0.0.0.1, via interface GigabitEthernet 13/16, Cost of using 2
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State POINT_TO_POINT,

Table 38-14. Command Example Descriptions: show ip ospf process-id virtual-links
Items Description
Virtual Link... This line specifies the OSPF neighbor to which the virtual link was created
and the links status.
Run as... This line states the nature of the virtual link.
Transit area... This line identifies the area through which the virtual link was created, the
interface used, and the cost assigned to that link.
Transmit Delay... This line displays the transmit delay assigned to the link and the State of
the OSPF neighbor.
Timer intervals... This line displays the timer values assigned to the virtual link. The timers
are Hello is hello-interval, Dead is dead-interval, Wait is transmit-delay,
and Retransmit is retransmit-interval.
Hello due... This line displays the amount of time until the next Hello packet is
expected from the neighbor router.
Adjacency State... This line displays the adjacency state between neighbors.
summary-address
ces Set the OSPF ASBR to advertise one external route.
Syntax summary-address ip-address mask [not-advertise] [tag tag-value]

To disable summary address, use the no summary-address ip-address mask command.
Parameters
ip-address Specify the IP address in dotted decimal format of the address to be summarized.
mask Specify the mask in dotted decimal format of the address to be summarized.
not-advertise (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword not-advertise to suppress that match the
network prefix/mask pair.
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag followed by a value to match on routes
redistributed through a route map.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Command
History
The command area range summarizes routes for the different areas.

With not-advertise parameter configured, this command can be used to filter out some external
routes. For example, you want to redistribute static routes to OSPF, but you don't want OSPF to
advertise routes with prefix 1.1.0.0. Then you can configure summary-address 1.1.0.0
255.255.0.0 not-advertise to filter out all the routes fall in range 1.1.0.0/16.
Related
area range Summarizes routes within an area.
Commands
timers spf
ces Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first
(SPF) calculation.
Syntax timers spf delay holdtime

To return to the default, enter no timers spf.
Parameters
delay Enter a number as the delay.
Range: 0 to 4294967295.
Default: 5 seconds
holdtime Enter a number as the hold time.
Range: 0 to 4294967295.
Defaults delay = 5 seconds; holdtime = 10 seconds
Command
History
Usage Setting the delay and holdtime parameters to a low number enables the switch to switch to an alternate
Information path quickly but requires more CPU usage.

OSPFv3 Commands
Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6 is supported on the c and e platforms.
Note: The C-Series supports OSPFv3 with FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later.
The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, etc.)
remain unchanged. However, OSPFv3 runs on a per-link basis instead of on a per-IP-subnet basis.
Most changes were necessary to handle the increased address size of IPv6.
The Dell Force10 implementation of OSPFv3 is based on IETF RFC 2740. The following commands
allow you to configure and enable OSPFv3.
area authentication
area encryption
clear ipv6 ospf process
debug ipv6 ospf packet
ipv6 ospf area
ipv6 ospf authentication
ipv6 ospf cost
ipv6 ospf dead-interval
ipv6 ospf encryption
ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject
ipv6 ospf hello-interval
ipv6 ospf priority
ipv6 router ospf
passive-interface
redistribute
router-id
show crypto ipsec policy
show crypto ipsec sa ipv6
show ipv6 ospf database
show ipv6 ospf interface
show ipv6 ospf neighbor

area authentication
et Configure an IPsec authentication policy for OSPFv3 packets in an OSPFv3 area.
Syntax area area-id authentication ipsec spi number {MD5 | SHA1} [key-encryption-type] key
Parameters
area area-id Area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be authenticated. For area-id, you can enter
a number or an IPv6 prefix.
ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy.
Range: 256 to 4294967295.
MD5 | SHA1 Authentication type: Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1
(SHA-1).
key-encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted.
Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted).
key Text string used in authentication.
For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex
digits (encrypted).
For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80
hex digits (encrypted).
Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3
Command
History
Usage Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 area, you must first enable OSPFv3 globally on
Information the router. You must configure the same authentication policy (same SPI and key) on each interface in
an OSPFv3 link.
An SPI number must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the
router.
If you have enabled IPsec encryption in an OSPFv3 area with the area encryption command, you
cannot use the area authentication command in the area at the same time.
The configuration of IPsec authentication on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level

configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area authentication policy that has been
configured is applied to the interface.
To remove an IPsec authentication policy from an OSPFv3 area, enter the no area area-id
authentication spi number command.
Related
ipv6 ospf authentication Configure an IPsec authentication policy on an OSPFv3 interface.
Commands
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec authentication policies.

area encryption
et Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets in an OSPFv3 area.
Syntax area area-id encryption ipsec spi number esp encryption-algorithm [key-encryption-type]
key authentication-algorithm [key-encryption-type] key
Parameters
area area-id Area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, you can enter a
number or an IPv6 prefix.
Range: 256 to 4294967295.
esp Encryption algorithm used with ESP.
encryption-algorithm Valid values are: 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL.
For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported.
key Text string used in encryption.
The required lengths of a non-encrypted or encrypted key are:
3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AES-CBC -
32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192.
authentication-algorith Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption.
m Valid values are MD5 or SHA1.
key-encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted.
For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64
null Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the
interface.
Command
History
Usage Before you enable IPsec encryption on an OSPFv3 interface, you must first enable OSPFv3 globally
Information on the router. You must configure the same encryption policy (same SPI and keys) on each interface in
an OSPFv3 link.
An SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
Note that when you configure encryption for an OSPFv3 area with the area encryption command,
you enable both IPsec encryption and authentication. However, when you enable authentication on an
area with the area authentication command, you do not enable encryption at the same time.
If you have enabled IPsec authentication in an OSPFv3 area with the area authentication command,
you cannot use the area encryption command in the area at the same time.

The configuration of IPsec encryption on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level
configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area encryption policy that has been
configured is applied to the interface.
To remove an IPsec encryption policy from an interface, enter the no area area-id encryption spi
number command.
Related
-
ipv6 ospf encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy on an OSPFv3 interface.

Commands
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec encryption policies.
clear ipv6 ospf process

ce Reset an OSPFv3 router process without removing or re-configuring the process.
Syntax clear ipv6 ospf process [process-id]
Parameters
process-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the process identification number.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
debug ipv6 ospf packet

ce Display debug information on OSPF IPv6 packets.
Syntax debug ipv6 ospf packet [interface]

To cancel the debug, use the no debug ipv6 ospf packet [interface] command.
Parameters
information:
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
4094

Command
History
Example Figure 38-23. debug ipv6 ospf packet Command Example

FTOS#debug ipv6 ospf packet
OSPFv3 packet related debugging is on for all interfaces
05:21:01 : OSPFv3: Sending, Ver:3, Type:1(Hello), Len:40, Router

ID:223.255.255.254, Area ID:0, Inst:0, on Po 255
05:21:03 : OSPFv3: Received, Ver:3, Type:1(Hello), Len:40, Router

ID:223.255.255.255, Area ID:0, Chksum:a177, Inst:0, from Vl 100
05:20:25 : OSPFv3: Sending, Ver:3, Type:4(LS Update), Len:580, Router

ID:223.255.255.254, Area ID:0, Inst:0, on Vl 1000
FTOS#
Table 38-15. debug ip ospf Output Fields
Field Description
OSPFv3... Debugging is on for all OSPFv3 packets and all interfaces
05:21:01 Displays the time stamp.
Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version.
Type: Displays the type of packet sent:
1 - Hello packet
2 - database description
3 - link state request
4 - link state update
5 - link state acknowledgement
Length: Displays the packet length.
Router ID: Displays the OSPF3 router ID.
Area ID: Displays the Area ID.
Chksum: Displays the OSPF3 checksum.
ce Configure FTOS to generate a default external route into the OSPFv3 routing domain.
Syntax default-information originate [always [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value]]

To return to the default, use the no default-information originate command.
Parameters
always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to indicate that default route
information must always be advertised.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by the number to
configure a metric value for the route.
Range: 1 to 16777214

metric-type type-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by the OSPFv3
link state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are:
Default: 2
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map followed by the name of an
established route map.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
redistribute Redistribute routes from other routing protocols into OSPFv3.
Commands
et Enable OSPFv3 graceful restart globally by setting the grace period (in seconds) that an OSPFv3
routers neighbors will continue to advertise the router as adjacent during a graceful restart.
Syntax graceful-restart grace-period seconds

To disable OSPFv3 graceful restart, enter no graceful-restart grace-period.
Parameters
seconds Time duration, in seconds, that specifies the duration of the restart process
before OSPFv3 terminates the process.
Defaults OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions in a helper-only role.
Command
Version 8.4.2.2 Introduced on E-Series TeraScale.
History
Usage By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting
Information neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
To enable OSPFv3 graceful restart, you must enter the ipv6 router ospf command to enter OSPFv3
configuration mode and then configure a grace period using the graceful-restart grace-period
command. The grace period is the length of time that OSPFv3 neighbors continue to advertise the
restarting router as though it is fully adjacent. When graceful restart is enabled (restarting role), an
OSPFv3 restarting expects its OSPFv3 neighbors to help when it restarts by not advertising the broken
link.
When you enable the helper-reject role on an interface with the ipv6 ospf graceful-restart
helper-reject command, you reconfigure OSPFv3 graceful restart to function in a restarting-only
role. In a restarting-only role, OSPFv3 does not participate in the graceful restart of a neighbor.

et Specify the type of events that trigger an OSPFv3 graceful restart.
Syntax graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only]

To disable the configured graceful-restart mode, enter no graceful-restart mode.
Parameters
planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful
restart is supported in a planned restart condition only.
unplanned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords unplanned-only to indicate graceful
restart is supported in an unplanned restart condition only.
Defaults OSPFv3 graceful restart supports both planned and unplanned failures.
Command
History
Usage OSPFv3 graceful restart supports planned-only and/or unplanned-only restarts. The default is support
Information for both planned and unplanned restarts.
A planned restart occurs when you enter the redundancy force-failover rpm command to force
the primary RPM to switch to the backup RPM. During a planned restart, OSPF sends out a
Type-11 Grace LSA before the system switches over to the backup RPM.
An unplanned restart occurs when an unplanned event causes the active RPM to switch to the
backup RPM, such as when an active process crashes, the active RPM is removed, or a power
failure happens. During an unplanned restart, OSPF sends out a Grace LSA when the backup RPM
comes online.
By default, both planned and unplanned restarts trigger an OSPFv3 graceful restart. Selecting one or
the other mode restricts OSPFv3 to the single selected mode.
ipv6 ospf area

ce Enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface.
Syntax ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id

To disable OSPFv6 routing for an interface, use the no ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id
command.
Parameters
process-id Enter the process identification number.
area area-id Specify the OSPF area.
Range: 0 to 65535

Command

History
ipv6 ospf authentication

et Configure an IPsec authentication policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface.
Syntax ipv6 ospf authentication {null | ipsec spi number {MD5 | SHA1} [key-encryption-type] key}
Parameters
null Causes an authentication policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the
interface.
Range: 256 to 4294967295.
MD5 | SHA1 Authentication type: Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1
(SHA-1).
For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex
digits (encrypted).
Command
History
Usage Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 interface, you must first enable IPv6 unicast
Information routing globally, configure an IPv6 address and enable OSPFv3 on the interface, and assign the
interface to an area.
You must configure the same authentication policy (same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a
link.
To remove an IPsec authentication policy from an interface, enter the no ipv6 ospf authentication
spi number command. To remove null authentication on an interface to allow the interface to inherit
the authentication policy configured for the OSPFv3 area, enter the no ipv6 ospf authentication
null command.
Related
area authentication Configure an IPsec authentication policy for an OSPFv3 area.
Commands
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec authentication policies.
show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Display the security associations set up for OSPFv3 interfaces
in authentication policies.

ipv6 ospf encryption
et Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface.
Syntax ipv6 ospf encryption {null | ipsec spi number esp encryption-algorithm
[key-encryption-type] key authentication-algorithm [key-encryption-type] key}
Parameters
null Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the
interface.
Range: 256 to 4294967295.
esp Encryption algorithm used with ESP.
encryption-algorithm Valid values are: 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL.
For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported.
key Text string used in encryption.
The required lengths of a non-encrypted or encrypted key are:
3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AES-CBC -
32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192.
authentication-algorith Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption.
m Valid values are MD5 or SHA1.
key-encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted.
For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64
Command
History
Usage Before you enable IPsec encryption on an OSPFv3 interface, you must first enable IPv6 unicast routing
Information globally, configure an IPv6 address and enable OSPFv3 on the interface, and assign the interface to an
area.
You must configure the same encryption policy (same SPI and keys) on each OSPFv3 interface in a
link.
To remove an IPsec encryption policy from an interface, enter the no ipv6 ospf encryption spi
number command. To remove null authentication on an interface to allow the interface to inherit the
authentication policy configured for the OSPFv3 area, enter the no ipv6 ospf encryption null
command.

Related
-
area encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy for an OSPFv3 area.

Commands
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec encryption policies.
show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Display the security associations set up for OSPFv3 interfaces
in encryption policies.
ipv6 ospf cost

ce Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an inter.
Syntax ipv6 ospf cost interface-cost

To reset the interface cost to the default value, use the no ipv6 ospf cost interface-cost command.
Parameters
interface-cost Enter a unsigned integer value expressed as the link-state metric.
Range: 1 to 65535
Defaults Default cost based on the bandwidth
Command
History
Usage In general, the path cost is calculated as:

Information
10^8 / bandwidth
Using this formula, the default path cost are calculated as:
GigabitEthernetDefault cost is 1
TenGigabitEthernetDefault cost is 1
EthernetDefault cost is 10
ipv6 ospf dead-interval

ce Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the time interval
elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router down.
Syntax ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds

To return to the default time interval, use the no ipv6 ospf dead-interval command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the time interval in seconds.
Default: 40 seconds (Ethernet)
Defaults As above

Command
History
Usage By default, the dead interval is four times longer than the default hello-interval.
Information
Related
ipv6 ospf hello-interval Specify the time interval between hello packets
Commands
ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject

et Configure an OSPFv3 interface to not act upon the Grace LSAs that it receives from a restarting
OSPFv3 neighbor.
Syntax graceful-restart helper-reject

To disable the helper-reject role, enter no ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject.
Defaults The helper-reject role is not configured.
Command
History
Usage By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting
Information neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
When configured in a helper-reject role, an OSPFv3 router ignores the Grace LSAs that it receives
from a restarting OSPFv3 neighbor.
The graceful-restart role command is not supported in OSPFv3. When you enable the helper-reject
role on an interface, you reconfigure an OSPFv3 router to function in a restarting-only role.
ipv6 ospf hello-interval

ce Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface.
Syntax ipv6 ospf hello-interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ipv6 ospf hello-interval.
Parameters
seconds Enter a the time interval in seconds as the time between hello packets.
Range: 1 to 65535.
Default: 10 seconds (Ethernet)
Defaults As above

Command

History
Usage The time interval between hello packets must be the same for routers in a network.
Information
Related
ipv6 ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router.
Commands
ipv6 ospf priority

ce Set the priority of the interface to determine the Designated Router for the OSPFv3 network.
Syntax ipv6 ospf priority number

To return to the default value, use the no ipv6 ospf priority command.
Parameters
number Enter a number as the priority.
Range: 0 to 255.
Default: 1
Defaults 1
Command
History
Usage Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a Designated Router or Backup
Information Designated Router.
Use this command for interfaces connected to multi-access networks, not point-to-point networks.
ipv6 router ospf

ce Enable OSPF for IPv6 router configuration.
Syntax ipv6 router ospf process-id

To exit OSPF for IPv6, enter no ipv6 router ospf process-id
Parameters
process-id Enter the process identification number.
Range: 1 to 65535

Command
History
passive-interface
ce Disable (suppress) sending routing updates on an interface.

To enable sending routing updates on an interface, use the no passive-interface interface
command.
Parameters
512 for ExaScale.
4094.
Defaults Enabled, that is sending of routing updates are enabled by default
Command
History
Usage By default, no interfaces are passive. Routing updates are sent to all interfaces on which the routing
Information protocol is enabled.
If you disable the sending of routing updates on an interface, the particular address prefix will continue
to be advertised to other interfaces, and updates from other routers on that interface continue to be
received and processed.
OSPFv3 for IPv6 routing information is neither sent nor received through the specified router interface.
The specified interface address appears as a stub network in the OSPFv3 for IPv6 domain.
redistribute
ce Redistribute into OSPFv3.
Syntax redistribute {bgp as number} {connected | static} [metric metric-value | metric-type

type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | static} command.

Parameters
bgp as number Enter the keyword bgp followed by the autonomous system number.
Range: 1 to 65535
connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically
connected interfaces.
static Enter the keyword static redistribute manually configured routes.
metric metric-value Enter the keyword metric followed by the metric value.
Range: 0 to 16777214
Default: 20
metric-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric-type followed by the OSPFv3 link
type-value state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are:
Default: 2
map-name established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to
drop all routes).
tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag to set the tag for routes redistributed into
OSPFv3.
Range: 0 to 4294967295
Default: 0
Command
History
Usage To redistribute the default route (x:x:x:x::x), configure the default-information originate command.
Information
Related
default-information originate Configure default external route into OSPFv3
Commands
router-id
ce Designate a fixed router ID.
Syntax router-id ip-address

To return to the previous router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the router ID in the dotted decimal format.
Defaults The router ID is selected automatically from the set of IPv4 addresses configured on a router

Command
History
Usage You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address for each router. However, each router ID must be
Information unique.
If this command is used on an OSPFv3 process that is already active (has neighbors), all the neighbor
adjacencies are brought down immediately and new sessions are initiated with the new router ID.
Related
clear ipv6 ospf process Reset an OSPFv3 router process
Commands
show crypto ipsec policy

et Display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies.
Syntax show crypto ipsec policy [name name]
Parameters
name name (OPTIONAL) Displays configuration details about a specified policy.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The show crypto ipsec policy command output displays the AH and ESP parameters configured in
Information IPsec security policies, including the SPI number, keys, and algorithms used.
Related
show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Display the IPsec security associations used on OSPFv3 interfaces.
Commands

Example Figure 38-24. show crypto ipsec policy Command
FTOS#show crypto ipsec policy
Crypto IPSec client security policy data
Policy name : OSPFv3-1-502

Policy refcount : 1
Inbound ESP SPI : 502 (0x1F6)
Outbound ESP SPI : 502 (0x1F6)
Inbound ESP Auth Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c12
Outbound ESP Auth Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c12
Inbound ESP Cipher Key :
123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678
Outbound ESP Cipher Key :
123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678
Transform set : esp-3des esp-md5-hmac

Policy refcount : 2
Inbound AH SPI : 500 (0x1F4)
Outbound AH SPI : 500 (0x1F4)
Inbound AH Key :
bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97e
Outbound AH Key :
bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97e
Transform set : ah-md5-hmac

Policy refcount : 1
Inbound ESP SPI : 501 (0x1F5)
Outbound ESP SPI : 501 (0x1F5)
Inbound ESP Auth Key :
bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0
c30808825fb5
Outbound ESP Auth Key :
bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0
c30808825fb5
Inbound ESP Cipher Key :
bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a
Outbound ESP Cipher Key :
bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a
Transform set : esp-128-aes esp-sha1-hmac
Table 38-16. show crypto ipsec policy Command Fields
Field Description
Policy name Displays the name of an IPsec policy.
Policy refcount Number of interfaces on the router that use the policy.
Inbound ESP SPI The encapsulating security payload (ESP) security policy index (SPI) for
Outbound ESP SPI inbound and outbound links.
Inbound ESP Auth Key The ESP authentication key for inbound and outbound links.
Outbound ESP Auth Key
Inbound ESP Cipher Key The ESP encryption key for inbound and outbound links.
Outbound ESP Cipher Key
Transform set The set of security protocols and algorithms used in the policy.
Inbound AH SPI The authentication header (AH) security policy index (SPI) for inbound
Outbound AH SPI and outbound links.
Inbound AH Key The AH key for inbound and outbound links.
Outbound AH Key

show crypto ipsec sa ipv6
et Display the IPsec security associations (SAs) used on OSPFv3 interfaces.
Syntax show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 [interface interface]
Parameters
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Displays information about the SAs used on a specified OSPFv3
interface, where interface is one of the following values:
For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter GigabitEthernet slot/port.
For a Port Channel interface, enter port-channel number.
Valid port-channel numbers (on an E-Series TeraScale): 1 to 255.
For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter TenGigabitEthernet slot/port.
For a VLAN interface, enter vlan vlan-id. Valid VLAN IDs: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command output displays security associations set up for OSPFv3
Information links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router.
Related
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies.
Commands

Example Figure 38-25. show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Command
FTOS#show crypto ipsec policy

FTOS#show crypto ipsec sa ipv6
Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 0/0

Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d10
IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-500
inbound ah sas
spi : 500 (0x1f4)
transform : ah-md5-hmac
in use settings : {Transport, }
replay detection support : N
STATUS : ACTIVE
outbound ah sas
spi : 500 (0x1f4)
transform : ah-md5-hmac
STATUS : ACTIVE
inbound esp sas
outbound esp sas
Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 0/1

Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11
IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-600
inbound ah sas
outbound ah sas
inbound esp sas

spi : 600 (0x258)
transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac
STATUS : ACTIVE
outbound esp sas

spi : 600 (0x258)
transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac
STATUS : ACTIVE
Table 38-17. show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Command Fields
Field Description
Interface IPv6 interface
Link local address IPv6 address of interface
IPSecv6 policy name Name of the IPsec security policy applied to the interface.
inbound/outbound ah Authentication policy applied to inbound or outbound traffic.
inbound/outbound esp Encryption policy applied to inbound or outbound traffic.
spi Security policy index number used to identify the policy.
transform Security algorithm that is used to provide authentication, integrity, and confidentiality.
in use settings Transform that the SA uses (only transport mode is supported).
replay detection support Y: An SA has enabled the replay detection feature.
N: The replay detection feature is not enabled.
STATUS ACTIVE: The authentication or encryption policy is enabled on the interface.

show ipv6 ospf database
ce Display information in the OSPFv3 database, including link-state advertisements (LSAs).
Syntax show ipv6 ospf database [database-summary | grace-lsa]
Parameters
database-summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords database-summary to view a
summary of database LSA information.
grace-lsa (OPTIONAL) E-Series TeraScale only: Enter the keywords grace-lsa to
display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.2.2 Added support for the display of graceful restart parameters and Type-11 Grace LSAs on
History
E-Series TeraScale routers.
Example Figure 38-26. show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa Command

FTOS#show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa
!
Type-11 Grace LSA (Area 0)
LS Age : 10
Link State ID : 6.16.192.66
Advertising Router : 100.1.1.1
LS Seq Number : 0x80000001
Checksum : 0x1DF1
Length : 36
Associated Interface : Gi 5/3
Restart Interval : 180
Restart Reason : Switch to Redundant Processor

Example Figure 38-27. show ipv6 ospf database database-summary Command
FTOS#show ipv6 ospf database database-summary
OSPFv3 Router with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
Process 1 database summary

Type Count/Status
Oper Status 1
Admin Status 1
Area Bdr Rtr Status 1
AS Bdr Rtr Status 1
AS Scope LSA Count 0
AS Scope LSA Cksum sum 0
Originate New LSAS 50
Rx New LSAS 22
Ext LSA Count 0
Rte Max Eq Cost Paths 10
GR grace-period 180
GR mode planned and unplanned
Area 0 database summary

Type Count/Status
Brd Rtr Count 1
AS Bdr Rtr Count 1
LSA count 6
Rtr LSA Count 2
Net LSA Count 1
Inter Area Pfx LSA Count 1
Inter Area Rtr LSA Count 0
Group Mem LSA Count 0
Type-7 LSA count 0
Intra Area Pfx LSA Count 2
Intra Area TE LSA Count 2
Area 1 database summary

Type Count/Status
Brd Rtr Count 1
AS Bdr Rtr Count 1
LSA count 8
Rtr LSA Count 1
Net LSA Count 0
Inter Area Pfx LSA Count 5
Inter Area Rtr LSA Count 0
Group Mem LSA Count 0
Type-7 LSA count 0
Intra Area Pfx LSA Count 2
Intra Area TE LSA Count 2
E1200-T2C2#sh ipv6 ospf neighbor
Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Interface ID

Interface
63.114.8.36 1 FULL/DR 00:00:37 4 Gi 9/0
show ipv6 ospf interface

ce View OSPFv3 interface information.
Syntax show ipv6 ospf [interface]

Parameters
information:
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
4094
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 38-28. show ipv6 ospf interface command

FTOS#show ipv6 ospf interface gigabitethernet 1/0

Link Local Address fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bbd, Interface ID 67420217
Area 0, Process ID 1, Instance ID 0, Router ID 11.1.1.1
NetworkType BROADCAST, Cost: 1, Passive: No
Transmit Delay is 100 sec, State DR, Priority 1
Designated router on this network is 11.1.1.1 (local)
No backup designated router on this network
FTOS#
show ipv6 ospf neighbor

ce Display the OSPF neighbor information on a per-interface basis.
Syntax show ipv6 ospf neighbor [interface]

Parameters

information:
512 for ExaScale.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 38-29. show ipv6 ospf neighbor Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 ospf neighbor gi 9/0
Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Interface ID Interface

63.114.8.36 1 FULL/DR 00:00:38 4 Gi 9/0
FTOS#

39
Policy-based Routing (PBR)
Overview
Policy-based Routing (PBR) enables you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable
PBR, you create a redirect list and then apply it to the interface. Once the redirect list is applied to the
interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list.
PBR is supported by FTOS on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series platforms.
Commands
Policy-based routing includes the following commands:
description
ip redirect-group
ip redirect-list
permit
redirect
seq
show cam pbr
show ip redirect-list
PBR can be applied to physical interfaces and logical interfaces (such as LAG or VLAN). Trace lists
and redirect lists do not function correctly when both are configured in the same configuration.
Note: Apply Policy-based Routing to Layer 3 interfaces only.
Policy-based Routing (PBR) | 1085

description
ces Add a description to this redirect list.
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the IP redirect list (80 characters maximum).
Command Modes REDIRECT-LIST
Command
History
pre-Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale
Related
ip redirect-list Enable an IP Redirect List
Commands
ip redirect-group
ces Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) on an interface. You can apply multiple redirect lists to an
interface by entering this command multiple times.
Syntax ip redirect-group redirect-list-name

To remove a redirect list from an interface, use the no ip redirect-group name command.
Parameters
redirect-list-name Enter the name of a configured redirect list.
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-vl-)
Command
History
Version 7.4.2.0 Added support for LAG and VLAN interfaces
Usage Any number of redirect-groups can be applied to an interface. A redirect list can contain any number of
Information configured rules. These rules includes the next-hop IP address where the incoming traffic is to be
redirected.
1086 | Policy-based Routing (PBR)

If the next hop address is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next hop. Otherwise the
normal routing table is used to forward traffic. When a redirect-group is applied to an interface and the
next-hop is reachable, the rules are added into the PBR CAM region. When incoming traffic hits an
entry in the CAM, the traffic is redirected to the corresponding next-hop IP address specified in the
rule.
Note: Apply redirect list to physical, VLAN, or LAG interfaces only.
Related
show cam pbr Display the content of the PBR CAM.
Commands
show ip redirect-list Display the redirect-list configuration.
ip redirect-list
ces Configure a redirect list and enter the REDIRECT-LIST mode.
Syntax ip redirect-list redirect-list-name

To remove a redirect list, enter no ip redirect-list.
Parameters
redirect-list-name Enter the name of a redirect list.
Command
History

permit
ces Configure a rule for the redirect list.
Syntax permit {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ip-address}

{destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operators]
To remove the rule, use one of the following:
If you know the filter sequence number, use the no seq sequence-number syntax.
no permit {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ip-address}
{destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operators]
Parameters
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 for the protocol identified in the IP protocol
header.
protocol-type Enter one of the following keywords as the protocol type:
icmp for Internet Control Message Protocol
ip for Any Internet Protocol
tcp for Transmission Control Protocol
udp for User Datagram Protocol
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter.
bit (OPTIONAL) For TCP protocol type only, enter one or a combination of the
following TCP flags:
ack = acknowledgement
fin = finish (no more data from the user)
psh = push function
rst = reset the connection
syn = synchronize sequence number
urg = urgent field
operator (OPTIONAL) For TCP and UDP parameters only. Enter one of the following
logical operand:
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
command parameter.)
Command
History

redirect
ces Configure a rule for the redirect list.
Syntax redirect {ip-address | sonet slot/port} {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type [bit]} {source mask
| any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator]

Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filters sequence number.
Use the no redirect {ip-address | sonet slot/port} {ip-protocol-number [bit] | protocol-type}
{source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address}
[operator]
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address of the forwarding router.
sonet slot/port Enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
header.
psh = push function
urg = urgent field
address.
operator (OPTIONAL) For TCP and UDP parameters only. Enter one of the
following logical operand:
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
port command parameter.)

Command

History
Version 7.4.1.0 Added the bit variable for TCP protocols only
seq
ces Configure a filter with an assigned sequence number for the redirect list.
Syntax seq sequence-number {permit | redirect {ip-address | sonet slot/port}} {ip-protocol-number

| protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} [bit] [operator]
Parameters
permit Enter the keyword permit assign the sequence to the permit list.
redirect Enter the keyword redirect to assign the sequence to the redirect list.
ip-address Enter the IP address of the forwarding router.
sonet slot/port Enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port information.
header.
address.

psh = push function
urg = urgent field
operator (OPTIONAL) For TCP and UDP parameters only. Enter one of the
following logical operand:
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
port command parameter.)
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added the bit variable and Permit and Redirect

show cam pbr
ces Display the PBR CAM content.
Syntax show cam pbr {[interface interface] | linecard slot-number port-set number]} [summary]
Parameters
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the name of the interface.
linecard slot-number Enter the keyword linecard followed the slot number.
Range: 0 to 13 for the E1200, 0 to 6 for the E600/E600i, 0 to 5 for the E300
port-set number Enter the keyword port-set followed the port-pipe number.
Range: 0 to 1
summary Enter the keyword summary to view only the total number of CAM
entries.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 39-1. Command example: show cam pbr linecard 2 port-set 0
FTOS#show cam pbr linecard 2 p 0
TCP Flag: Bit 5 - URG, Bit 4 - ACK, Bit 3 - PSH, Bit 2 - RST, Bit 1 - SYN, Bit 0 FIN
Cam Port VlanID Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp Next-hop Egress
Index Flag Port Port MAC Port
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
.
.
.
15230 _ 10 TCP 0x10 0 0 100.55.1.0/24 182.16.1.1/24 N/A N/A
FTOS#
Usage The show cam pbr command displays the PBR CAM content. The VlanID column displays the
Information corresponding VLAN ID to which the redirect-group is applied.
Related
ip redirect-group Apply a redirect group to an interface.
Commands
show ip redirect-list Display the redirect-list configuration.
show cam-usage Display the CAM usage on ACL, router, or switch.

show ip redirect-list
ces View the redirect list configuration and the interfaces it is applied to.
Syntax show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name
Parameters
redirect-list-name Enter the name of a configured Redirect list.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 39-2. show ip redirect-list Command Example

FTOS#show ip redirect-list test_sonet
IP redirect-list rcl0:
Defined as:
seq 5 permit ip any host 182.16.2.10
seq 10 redirect 182.16.1.2 ip any any, Next-hop un-reachable, ARP un-resolved
Applied interfaces:
Gi 9/0
So 8/2
Vl 10
Po 3
FTOS#


40
PIM-Dense Mode (PIM-DM)
Overview
PIM-DM is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex in FTOS 8.1.1.0. and later.
PIM-DM is supported on E-Series TeraScale et, C-Series c, and S-Series s platforms in FTOS
8.4.2.0. and later.
For information on the commands required to configure and use PIM-Dense Mode (PIM-DM), refer to:
IPv4 PIM Commands on page 1131

IPv4 PIM-Dense Mode Commands
IPv4 PIM-Dense Mode Commands

The IPv4 PIM-Dense Mode (PIM-DM) commands are:
ip pim dense-mode
PIM-Dense Mode (PIM-DM) | 1095

ip pim dense-mode
ces Enable PIM Dense-Mode (PIM-DM) Multicast capability for the specified interface.
Syntax ip pim dense-mode

To disable PIM-DM, use the no ip pim dense-mode command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Example Figure 40-1. ip pim dense-mode Command Example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# interface gigabitethernet 3/27
FTOS(gigabitethernet 3/27)# ip address 10.1.1.1 /24
FTOS(gigabitethernet 3/27)# no shut
FTOS(gigabitethernet 3/27)# ip pim dense-mode
FTOS#
Usage Currently, the chassis operates in either PIM Dense-Mode or PIM Sparse-Mode. The mode
Information configuration for the first PIM enabled interface determines the mode for the entire chassis.
Subsequent configurations, on other interfaces, to enable PIM is only accepted if the mode is the same
as the original configuration mode. The chassis PIM mode can be changed if PIM-configuration from
all interfaces are removed prior to applying a new PIM mode configuration.
Related
ip pim sparse-mode Configure sparse-mode
Commands
show ip pim tib Display PIM tree information.
1096 | PIM-Dense Mode (PIM-DM)

41
PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)
Overview
PIM is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.1.1.0. and later.
IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands


The IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) commands are:
clear ip pim rp-mapping
clear ip pim tib
clear ip pim snooping tib
debug ip pim
ip pim bsr-border
ip pim bsr-candidate
ip pim dr-priority
ip pim graceful-restart
ip pim join-filter
ip pim ingress-interface-map
ip pim neighbor-filter
ip pim query-interval
ip pim register-filter
ip pim rp-address
ip pim rp-candidate
ip pim snooping
ip pim sparse-mode
ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer
ip pim spt-threshold
no ip pim snooping dr-flood
show ip pim bsr-router
PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) | 1097

show ip pim interface
show ip pim neighbor

show ip pim rp
show ip pim snooping interface
show ip pim snooping neighbor
show ip pim snooping tib
show ip pim summary
show ip pim tib
show running-config pim
clear ip pim rp-mapping

ces Used by the bootstrap router (BSR) to remove all or particular Rendezvous Point (RP) Advertisement.
Syntax clear ip pim rp-mapping rp-address
Parameters
rp-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the RP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D)
Command
History
clear ip pim tib

ces Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database.
Syntax clear ip pim tib [group]
Parameters
group (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D)
Command
History
1098 | PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

clear ip pim snooping tib
ces Clear tree information discovered by PIM-SM snooping from the PIM database.
Syntax clear ip pim snooping tib [vlan vlan-id] [group-address]
Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to clear TIB information learned through PIM-SM
snooping about a specified VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs: 1 to 4094.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to
clear TIB information learned through PIM-SM snooping about a specified multicast
group.
Command
History
Related
show ip pim snooping tib Display TIB information learned through PIM-SM snooping.
Commands
debug ip pim
ces View IP PIM debugging messages.
Syntax debug ip pim [bsr | events | group | packet [in | out] | register | state | timer [assert | hello |
joinprune | register]]
To disable PIM debugging, enter no debug ip pim, or enter undebug all to disable all debugging.
Parameters
bsr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bsr to view PIM Candidate RP/BSR
activities.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to view PIM events.
group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword group to view PIM messages for a specific
group.
packet [in | out] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to view PIM packets. Enter one of
the optional parameters
in: to view incoming packets
out: to view outgoing packets.
register (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword register to view PIM register address in
dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
state (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword state to view PIM state changes.
timer [assert | hello | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timer to view PIM timers. Enter one of the
joinprune | register] optional parameters:
assert: to view the assertion timer.
hello: to view the PIM neighbor keepalive timer.
joinprune: to view the expiry timer (join/prune timer)
register: to view the register suppression timer.
Defaults Disabled

Command

History
ip pim bsr-border
ces Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface.
Syntax ip pim bsr-border

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim bsr-border.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series.
Usage This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by
Information time out. Candidate RP advertisements can be cleaned using the clear ip pim rp-mapping command.
ip pim bsr-candidate
ces Configure the PIM router to join the Bootstrap election process.
Syntax ip pim bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority]

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim bsr-candidate.
Parameters
from 0 to 16383.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
hash-mask-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the hash mask length.
Default: 30
priority (OPTIONAL) Enter the priority used in Bootstrap election process.
Default: zero (0)

Command
History
Version 6.1.1.0 Added support for VLAN interface
ip pim dr-priority
ces Change the Designated Router (DR) priority for the interface.
Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value

To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command.
Parameters
priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number.
Range: 0 to 4294967294
Default: 1
Defaults 1
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series on port-channels and S-Series
Usage The router with the largest value assigned to an interface becomes the Designated Router. If two
Information interfaces contain the same DR priority value, the interface with the largest interface IP address
becomes the Designated Router.
e This feature permits configuration of Non-stop Forwarding (NFS or graceful restart) capability of a PIM
router to its neighbors.
Syntax [ipv6] ip pim graceful-restart {helper-only | nsf [restart-time | stale-entry-time]}
Parameters
ipv6 Enter this keyword to enable graceful-restart for IPv6 Multicast Routes.
helper-only Enter the keyword helper-only to configure as a receiver (helper) only by
preserving the PIM status of a graceful restart PIM neighboring router.
nsf Enter the keyword nfs to configure the Non-stop Forwarding capability.

restart-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword restart-time followed by the number of

seconds estimated for the PIM speaker to restart.
stale-entry-time (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stale-entry-time followed by the number of
seconds for which entries are kept alive after restart.
Default: 60 seconds
Defaults as above
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale. Added the ipv6 option for E-Series.
Usage When an NSF-capable router comes up, it announces the graceful restart capability and restart duration
Information as a Hello option. The receiving router notes the Hello option. Routers not NSF capable will discard
the unknown Hello option and adjacency is not affected.
When an NSF-capable router goes down, neighboring PIM speaker preserves the states and continues
the forwarding of multicast traffic while the neighbor router restarts.
ip pim join-filter
ces Permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list. This
command prevents the PIM SM router from creating state based on multicast source and/or group.
Syntax ip pim join-filter ext-access-list {in | out}
Remove the access list using the command no ip pim join-filter ext-access-list {in | out}
Parameters
ext-access-list Enter the name of an extended access list.
in Enter this keyword to apply the access list to inbound traffic.
out Enter this keyword to apply the access list to outbound traffic.
Defaults None
Command
History

Example Figure 41-1. ip pim join-filter Command Example
FTOS(conf)# ip access-list extended iptv-channels
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 10.1.2.3/24 225.1.1.0/24
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any 232.1.1.0/24
FTOS(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 100.1.1.0/16 any
FTOS(config-if-gi-1/1)# ip pim join-filter iptv-channels in
FTOS(config-if-gi-1/1)# ip pim join-filter iptv-channels out
Related
ip access-list Configure an access list based on IP addresses or protocols.
Commands
extended
ip pim ingress-interface-map
ces When the Dell Force10 system is the RP, statically map potential incoming interfaces to (*,G) entries
to create a lossless multicast forwarding environment.
Syntax ip pim ingress-interface-map std-access-list
Parameters
std-access-list Enter the name of an standard access list that permits the
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOSFTOS(conf)# ip access-list standard map1

FTOS(config-std-nacl)# permit 224.0.0.1/24
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#exit
FTOS(conf)#int gig 1/1
FTOS(config-if-gi-1/1)# ip pim ingress-interface-map map1
ces Configure this feature to prevent a router from participating in protocol independent Multicast (PIM).
Syntax ip pim neighbor-filter {access-list}

To remove the restriction, use the no ip pim neighbor-filter {access-list} command.
Parameters
access-list Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters.
Defaults Defaults.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION.
Command
History

Usage Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.
Information
ces Change the frequency of PIM Router-Query messages.
Syntax ip pim query-interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim query-interval seconds command.
Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the number of seconds between router query messages.
Default: 30 seconds
Range: 0 to 65535
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
ip pim register-filter
ces Use this feature to prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified
multicast source and group.
Syntax ip pim register-filter access-list

To return to the default, use the no ip pim register-filter access-list command.
Parameters
access-list Enter the name of an extended access list. Maximum 16 characters.
Command
History
Usage The access name is an extended IP access list that denies PIM register packets to RP at the source DR
Information based on the multicast and group addresses. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.

ip pim rp-address
ces Configure a static PIM Rendezvous Point (RP) address for a group or access-list.
Syntax ip pim rp-address address {group-address group-address mask} override

To remove an RP address, use the no ip pim rp-address address {group-address
group-address mask} override command.
Parameters
address Enter the RP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
group-address Enter the keyword group-address followed by a group-address mask, in
group-address mask dotted decimal format (/xx), to assign that group address to the RP.
override Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP.
The override will take effect immediately during enable/disable.
Note: This option is applicable to multicast group range.
Command
History
Usage This address is used by first-hop routers to send Register packets on behalf of source multicast hosts.
Information The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered. RP addresses learned via BSR take
priority over static RP addresses. Without the override option, RPs advertised by the BSR updates take
precedence over the statically configured RPs.

ip pim rp-candidate
ces Configure a PIM router to send out a Candidate-RP-Advertisement message to the Bootstrap (BS)
router or define group prefixes that are defined with the RP address to PIM BSR.
Syntax ip pim rp-candidate {interface [priority]

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim rp-candidate {interface [priority] command.
Parameters
512 for ExaScale.
port information.
4094.
priority (OPTIONAL) Enter the priority used in Bootstrap election process.
Default: 192
Command
History
Usage Priority is stored at BSR router when receiving a Candidate-RP-Advertisement.

Information

ip pim snooping
ex Enable PIM-SM snooping globally on a switch or on a VLAN interface.
Syntax ip pim snooping [enable]

To disable PIM-SM snooping enter the no form of the command.
Defaults Disabled.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION: To configure PIM-SM snooping globally, enter the ip pim snooping enable
command in global configuration mode.
VLAN INTERFACE: To configure PIM-SM snooping on a VLAN interface, enter the ip pim
snooping command in VLAN interface configuration mode.
Command
History
Usage Because PIM-SM snooping is used in a Layer 2 environment, PIM-SM snooping and PIM multicast
Information routing are mutually exclusive. PIM-SM snooping cannot be enabled on a switch/router if PIM-SM or
PIM-DM is enabled.
If enabled at the global level, PIM-SM snooping is automatically enabled on all VLANs unless the no
ip pim snooping command has been entered on a VLAN.
If enabled at the VLAN level, PIM-SM snooping requires that you also enter the no shutdown
command to enable the interface.
PIM-SM snooping is supported with IGMP snooping, and forwards the IGMP report on the port that
connects to the PIM DR. It is recommended that you do not enable IGMP snooping on a PIM-SM
snooping-enabled VLAN interface unless until it is necessary for VLAN operation.
PIM-SM snooping listens to PIM hello and PIM-SM join and prune messages while maintaining the
VLAN- and port-specific information in multicast packets that are snooped.
To display information about the operation of PIM-SM snooping on a switch, enter the show ip pim
summary command.
Related
show ip pim snooping tib Display TIB information learned through PIM-SM snooping.
Commands

ip pim sparse-mode
ces Enable PIM sparse mode and IGMP on the interface.
Syntax ip pim sparse-mode

To disable PIM sparse mode and IGMP, enter no ip pim sparse-mode.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Usage C-Series supports a maximum of 31 PIM interfaces.

Information
The interface must be enabled (no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command
configured. Multicast must also be enabled globally (using the ip multicast-lag-hashing command). PIM
is supported on the port-channel interface.
Related
ip multicast-lag-hashing Enable multicast globally.
Commands
ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer

ces Enable expiry timers globally for all sources, or for a specific set of (S,G) pairs defined by an access
list.
Syntax ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds [access-list name]

To disable configured timers and return to default mode, enter no ip pim sparse-mode
sg-expiry-timer.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the S, G entries will be retained.
Range 211-86400
access-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a previously configured Extended ACL to enable the
name expiry time to specified S,G entries
Defaults Disabled. The default expiry timer (with no times configured) is 210 sec.
Command
History
Usage This command configures an expiration timer for all S.G entries, unless they are assigned to an
Information Extended ACL.

ip pim spt-threshold
ce Configure PIM router to switch to shortest path tree when the traffic reaches the specified threshold
value.
Syntax ip pim spt-threshold value | infinity

To return to the default value, enter no ip pim spt-threshold.
Parameters
value (OPTIONAL) Enter the traffic value in kilobits per second.
Default: 10 packets per second. A value of zero (0) will cause a switchover on the first
packet.
infinity (OPTIONAL) To never switch to the source-tree, enter the keyword infinity.
Command
History
Usage This is applicable to last hop routers on the shared tree towards the Rendezvous Point (RP).
Information
no ip pim snooping dr-flood

ex Disable the flooding of multicast packets to the PIM designated router.
Syntax no ip pim snooping dr-flood

To re-enable the flooding of multicast packets to the PIM designated router, enter the ip pim
snooping dr-flood command.
Defaults Enabled.
Command
History
Usage By default, when you enable PIM-SM snooping, a switch floods all multicast traffic to the PIM
Information designated router (DR), including unnecessary multicast packets. To minimize the traffic sent over the
network to the designated router, you can disable designated-router flooding.
When designated-router flooding is disabled, PIM-SM snooping only forwards the multicast traffic,
which belongs to a multicast group for which the switch receives a join request, on the port connected
towards the designated router.
If the PIM DR flood is not disabled (default setting):

Multicast traffic is transmitted on the egress port towards the PIM DR if the port is not the
incoming interface.
Multicast traffic for an unknown group is sent on the port towards the PIM DR. When DR
flooding is disabled, multicast traffic for an unknown group is dropped.

Related
ip pim snooping Enable PIM-SM snooping.

Commands
show ip pim bsr-router

ces View information on the Bootstrap router.
Syntax show ip pim bsr-router
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-2. show ip pim bsr-router Command Example

E600-7-rpm0#show ip pim bsr-router
PIMv2 Bootstrap information
This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2)
BSR address: 7.7.7.7 (?)
Uptime: 16:59:06, BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 30
Next bootstrap message in 00:00:08
This system is a candidate BSR

Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.7, priority: 0, hash mask length: 30

ces View information on the interfaces with IP PIM enabled.
Syntax show ip pim interface
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-3. show ip pim interface Command Example

E600-7-RPM0#show ip pim interface
Address Interface Ver/ Nbr Query DR DR
Mode Count Intvl Prio
172.21.200.254 Gi 7/9 v2/S 0 30 1 172.21.200.254
172.60.1.2 Gi 7/11 v2/S 0 30 1 172.60.1.2
192.3.1.1 Gi 7/16 v2/S 1 30 1 192.3.1.1
192.4.1.1 Gi 13/5 v2/S 0 30 1 192.4.1.1
172.21.110.1 Gi 13/6 v2/S 0 30 1 172.21.110.1
172.21.203.1 Gi 13/7 v2/S 0 30 1 172.21.203.1

Table 41-1. show ip pim interface Command Example Fields
Field Description
Address Lists the IP addresses of the interfaces participating in PIM.
Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or
Port Channel), of the interfaces participating in PIM.
Ver/Mode Displays the PIM version number and mode for each interface
participating in PIM.
v2 = PIM version 2
S = PIM Sparse mode
Nbr Count Displays the number of PIM neighbors discovered over this interface.
Query Intvl Displays the query interval for Router Query messages on that interface
(configured with ip pim query-interval command).
DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface
(ip pim dr-priority command).
DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface.

ces View PIM neighbors.
Syntax show ip pim neighbor
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-4. show ip pim neighbor Command Example

FTOS#show ip pim neighbor
Neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Ver DR
Address Prio/Mode
127.87.3.4 Gi 7/16 09:44:58/00:01:24 v2 1 / S
FTOS#
Table 41-2. show ip pim neighbor Command Example Fields
Field Description
Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor.
Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or
Port Channel), on which the PIM neighbor was found.
Uptime/expires Displays the amount of time the neighbor has been up followed by the
amount of time until the neighbor is removed from the multicast routing
table (that is, until the neighbor hold time expires).

Table 41-2. show ip pim neighbor Command Example Fields
Field Description
Ver Displays the PIM version number.
v2 = PIM version 2
DR prio/Mode Displays the Designated Router priority and the mode.
1 = default Designated Router priority (use ip pim dr-priority)
DR = Designated Router
S = Sparse mode
show ip pim rp
ces View all multicast groups-to-RP mappings.
Syntax show ip pim rp [mapping | group-address]
Parameters
mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast
groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learnt.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address mask in dotted decimal
format to view RP for a specific group.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 41-5. show ip pim rp mapping Command Example 1

FTOS#sh ip pim rp
Group RP
224.2.197.115 165.87.20.4
224.2.217.146 165.87.20.4
224.3.3.3 165.87.20.4
225.1.2.1 165.87.20.4
225.1.2.2 165.87.20.4
229.1.2.1 165.87.20.4
229.1.2.2 165.87.20.4
FTOS#
Example 2 Figure 41-6. show ip pim rp mapping Command Example 2

FTOS#sh ip pim rp mapping
Group(s): 224.0.0.0/4
RP: 165.87.20.4, v2
Info source: 165.87.20.5, via bootstrap, priority 0
Uptime: 00:03:11, expires: 00:02:46
RP: 165.87.20.3, v2
Info source: 165.87.20.5, via bootstrap, priority 0
Uptime: 00:03:11, expires: 00:03:03
FTOS#

Example 3 Figure 41-7. show ip pim rp group-address Command Example 3
FTOS#sh ip pim rp 229.1.2.1
Group RP
229.1.2.1 165.87.20.4
FTOS#
show ip pim snooping interface

ex Display information on VLAN interfaces with PIM-SM snooping enabled.
Syntax show ip pim snooping interface [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display information about a specified VLAN
configured for PIM-SM snooping. Valid VLAN IDs: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-8. show ip pim snooping interface Command Example

FTOS#show ip pim snooping interface
Interface Ver Nbr DR DR
Count Prio
Vlan 2 v2 3 1 165.87.32.2
Table 41-3. show ip pim snooping interface Command Example Fields
Field Description
Interface Displays the VLAN interfaces with PIM-SM snooping enabled.
Ver/Mode Displays the PIM version number for each VLAN interface with PIM-SM
snooping enabled:
v2 = PIM version 2
S = PIM Sparse mode
Nbr Count Displays the number of neighbors learned through PIM-SM snooping on
the interface.
DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface
(ip pim dr-priority command).
DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface.

show ip pim snooping neighbor
ex Display information on PIM neighbors learned through PIM-SM snooping.
Syntax show ip pim snooping neighbor [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display information about PIM neighbors that was
discovered by PIM-SM snooping on a specified VLAN.
Valid VLAN IDs: 1 to 4094.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-9. show ip pim snooping neighbor Command Example

FTOS#show ip pim snooping neighbor
Neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Ver DR Prio

Address
165.87.32.2 Vl 2 [Gi 4/13 ] 00:04:03/00:01:42 v2 1
165.87.32.10 Vl 2 [Gi 4/11 ] 00:00:46/00:01:29 v2 0
165.87.32.12 Vl 2 [Gi 4/20 ] 00:00:51/00:01:24 v2 0
Table 41-4. show ip pim snooping neighbor Command Example Fields
Field Description
Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the neighbor learned through PIM-SM
snooping.
Interface Displays the VLAN ID number and slot/port on which the
PIM-SM-enabled neighbor was discovered.
Uptime/expires Displays the amount of time the neighbor has been up followed by the
amount of time until the neighbor is removed from the multicast routing
table (that is, until the neighbor hold time expires).
Ver Displays the PIM version number.
v2 = PIM version 2
DR prio/Mode Displays the Designated Router priority and the mode.
1 = default Designated Router priority (use ip pim dr-priority)
DR = Designated Router
S = Sparse mode

show ip pim snooping tib
ex Display information from the tree information base (TIB) discovered by PIM-SM snooping about
multicast group members and states.
Syntax show ip pim snooping tib [vlan vlan-id] [group-address [source-address]]
Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display TIB information discovered by PIM-SM
snooping on a specified VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs: 1 to 4094.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to display
TIB information discovered by PIM-SM snooping for a specified multicast group.
source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to display
TIB information discovered by PIM-SM snooping for a specified multicast source.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-10. show ip pim snooping tib Command Example

FTOS#show ip pim snooping tib
PIM Multicast Snooping Table

Flags: J/P - (*,G) Join/Prune, j/p - (S,G) Join/Prune
SGR-P - (S,G,R) Prune
Timers: Uptime/Expires
* : Inherited port
(*, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:00:01, expires 00:02:59, RP 165.87.70.1, flags: J

Incoming interface: Vlan 2, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0
GigabitEthernet 4/11 RPF 165.87.32.2 00:00:01/00:02:59
GigabitEthernet 4/13 Upstream Port -/-
FTOS#show ip pim snooping tib vlan 2 225.1.2.1 165.87.1.7
PIM Multicast Snooping Table

Flags: J/P - (*,G) Join/Prune, j/p - (S,G) Join/Prune
SGR-P - (S,G,R) Prune
* : Inherited port
(165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:00:08, expires 00:02:52, flags: j

Incoming interface: Vlan 2, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0
GigabitEthernet 4/11 Upstream Port -/-
GigabitEthernet 4/13 DR Port -/-
GigabitEthernet 4/20 RPF 165.87.32.10 00:00:08/00:02:52

Table 41-5. show ip pim snooping tib Command Example Fields
Field Description
(S, G) Displays the entry in the PIM multicast snooping database.
uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the PIM multicast route
table.
expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires and is removed from
the database.
RP Displays the IP address of the RP/source for this entry.
flags List the flags to define the entries:
S = PIM Sparse Mode
C = directly connected
L = local to the multicast group
P = route was pruned
R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP
F = FTOS is registering this entry for a multicast source
T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path
J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is
ready to switch to SPT
K=acknowledge pending state
Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/
source.
RPF neighbor Displays the next hop from this interface towards the RP/source.
Outgoing interface list: Lists the interfaces that meet one of the following criteria:
a directly connect member of the Group.
statically configured member of the Group.
received a (*,G) Join message.

show ip pim summary
ces View information about PIM-SM operation.
Syntax show ip pim summary
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.1 Support for the display of PIM-SM snooping status was added on E-Series
History
ExaScale
Example Figure 41-11. show ip pim summary Command Example

FTOS#show ip pim summary
PIM TIB version 495

Uptime 22:44:52
Entries in PIM-TIB/MFC : 2/2
Active Modes :
PIM-SNOOPING
Interface summary:
1 active PIM interface
0 passive PIM interfaces
3 active PIM neighbors
TIB summary:
1/1 (*,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC
1/1 (S,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC
0/0 (S,G,Rpt) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC
0 PIM nexthops
0 RPs
0 sources
0 Register states
Message summary:
2582/2583 Joins sent/received
5/0 Prunes sent/received
0/0 Candidate-RP advertisements sent/received
0/0 BSR messages sent/received
0/0 State-Refresh messages sent/received
0/0 MSDP updates sent/received
0/0 Null Register messages sent/received
0/0 Register-stop messages sent/received
Data path event summary:

0 no-cache messages received
0 last-hop switchover messages received
0/0 pim-assert messages sent/received
0/0 register messages sent/received
Memory usage:
TIB : 3768 bytes
Nexthop cache : 0 bytes
Interface table : 992 bytes
Neighbor table : 528 bytes
RP Mapping : 0 bytes

show ip pim tib
ces View the PIM tree information base (TIB).
Syntax show ip pim tib [group-address [source-address]]
Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-12. show ip pim tib Command Example

FTOS#show ip pim tib
PIM Multicast Routing Table

Flags: D - Dense, S - Sparse, C - Connected, L - Local, P - Pruned,
R - RP-bit set, F - Register flag, T - SPT-bit set, J - Join SPT,
M - MSDP created entry, A - Candidate for MSDP Advertisement,
K - Ack-Pending State
Interface state: Interface, next-Hop, State/Mode
(*, 226.1.1.1), uptime 01:29:19, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ

Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2
GigabitEthernet 8/0

GigabitEthernet 8/0

GigabitEthernet 8/0

GigabitEthernet 8/0
Table 41-6. show ip pim tib Command Example Fields
Field Description
(S, G) Displays the entry in the multicast PIM database.
uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the PIM route table.
expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires and is removed from
the database.
RP Displays the IP address of the RP/source for this entry.

Table 41-6. show ip pim tib Command Example Fields (continued)
Field Description
flags List the flags to define the entries:
D = PIM Dense Mode
S = PIM Sparse Mode
C = directly connected
L = local to the multicast group
P = route was pruned
R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP
F = FTOS is registering this entry for a multicast source
T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path
J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is
ready to switch to SPT
K = acknowledge pending state
Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/
source.
RPF neighbor Displays the next hop from this interface towards the RP/source.
Outgoing interface list: Lists the interfaces that meet one of the following criteria:
a directly connect member of the Group.
statically configured member of the Group.
received a (*,G) Join message.
show running-config pim

ex Display the current configuration of PIM-SM snooping.
Syntax show running-config pim
Command
History
Related
ip pim snooping Enable PIM-SM snooping.
Commands
Example Command Example: show running-config pim

FTOS#show running-config pim
!
ip pim snooping enable

The IPv6 PIM-SM commands are:

ipv6 pim bsr-border
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate
ipv6 pim dr-priority
ipv6 pim join-filter
ipv6 pim query-interval
ipv6 pim neighbor-filter
ipv6 pim register-filter
ipv6 pim rp-address
ipv6 pim rp-candidate
ip pim sparse-mode
ipv6 pim spt-threshold
show ipv6 pim bsr-router
show ipv6 pim interface
show ipv6 pim neighbor
show ipv6 pim rp
show ipv6 pim tib
clear ipv6 pim tib

e Clear the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information basetib).
Syntax clear ipv6 pim tib [group-address]
Parameters
Command
History
Related
show ipv6 pim tib Display the IPv6 PIM tree information base (tib)
Commands
debug ipv6 pim

e Invoke IPv6 PIM debugging.
Syntax debug ipv6 pim [bsr | events | group group | packet | register [group] | state | | timer [assert
| hello | joinprune | register]]
To disable IPv6 PIM debugging, enter no debug ipv6 pim.

Parameters
bsr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bsr to invoke debugging of IPv6 PIM
Candidate RP/BSR activities.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to invoke debugging of IPv6 PIM
events.
group group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword group followed by the group address to
invoke debugging on that specific group.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to invoke debugging of IPv6 PIM
packets.
register [group] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword register and optionally the group address to
invoke debugging of IPv6 PIM register messages for a particular group.
state (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword state to view IPv6 PIM state changes.
timer [assert | hello | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timer to view IPv6 PIM timers. Enter one of
joinprune | register] the optional parameters:
assert: to view the assertion timer.
hello: to view the IPv6 PIM neighbor keepalive timer.
joinprune: to view the expiry timer (join/prune timer)
register: to view the register suppression timer.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
ipv6 pim bsr-border

e Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface.
Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-border
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR messages. Existing BSR advertisements are
Information cleaned up by time-out.
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate

e Configure the router as a bootstrap (bsr) candidate.
Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority]
To disable the bootstrap candidate, use the no ipv6 pim bsr-candidate command.

Parameters

number:
ExaScale.
hash-mask-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the hash mask length for RP selection.
Range: 0 to 128
Default: 126
priority (OPTIONAL) Enter the priority value for Bootstrap election process.
Range: 0 to 255
Default: 0
Defaults As above
Command
History

e Change the Designated Router (DR) priority for the IPv6 interface.
Syntax ipv6 pim dr-priority priority-value
To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ipv6 pim dr-priority command.
Parameters
priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number.
Range: 0 to 4294967294
Default: 1
Defaults 1
Command
History
Usage The router with the largest value assigned to an interface becomes the Designated Router. If two
Information interfaces contain the same DR priority value, the interface with the largest interface IP address
becomes the Designated Router.

e Permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an access list. This command prevents
the PIM-SM router from creating state based on multicast source and/or group.
Syntax ipv6 pim join-filter access-list
Parameters
access-list Enter the name of an extended access list.
in Enter this keyword to apply the access list to inbound traffic.
out Enter this keyword to apply the access list to outbound traffic.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS(conf)#ipv6 access-list JOIN-FIL_ACL

FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 165:87:34::0/112 ff0e::225:1:2:0/112
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 any ff0e::230:1:2:0/112
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 165:87:32::0/112 any
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#exit
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/84)#ipv6 pim join-filter JOIN-FIL_ACL in
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/84)#ipv6 pim join-filter JOIN-FIL_ACL out

e Change the frequency of IPv6 PIM Router-Query messages.
Syntax ipv6 pim query-interval seconds

To return to the default value, enter no ipv6 pim query-interval seconds command.
Parameters
seconds Enter a number as the number of seconds between router query messages.
Default: 30 seconds
Range: 0 to 65535
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History

e Prevent the system from forming a PIM adjacency with a neighboring system.
Syntax ipv6 pim neighbor-filter {access-list}
Parameters
access-list Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters.

Defaults None
Command
History
Usage Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.

Information
ipv6 pim register-filter

e Configure the source DR so that it does not send register packets to the RP for the specified sources
and groups.
Syntax ipv6 pim register-filter access-list
Parameters
access-list Enter the name of the extended ACL that contains the sources and groups to be
filtered.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example FTOS(conf)#ipv6 pim register-filter REG-FIL_ACL

FTOS(conf)#ipv6 access-list REG-FIL_ACL
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#deny ipv6 165:87:34::10/128 ff0e::225:1:2:0/112
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 any any
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#exit
ipv6 pim rp-address

e Configure a static PIM Rendezvous Point (RP) address for a group. This address is used by first-hop
routers to send Register packets on behalf of the source multicast host.
Syntax ipv6 pim rp-address address group-address group-address mask override

To remove an RP address, use the no ipv6 pim re-address address group-address mask
override.
Parameters
address Enter the IPv6 RP address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
group-address Enter the keyword group-address followed by the group address in the
group-address mask x:x:x:x::x format and then the mask in /nn format to assign that group
address to the RP.
override Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP.
The override will take effect immediately during enable/disable.
Note: This option is applicable to multicast group range.

Command
History
Usage The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered. RP addresses learnt via BSR take
Information priority over static RP addresses.
Without the override option, RPs advertised by the BSR updates take precedence over the statically
configured RPs.
ipv6 pim rp-candidate

e Specify an interface as an RP candidate.
Syntax ipv6 pim rp-candidate interface [priority-value]
Parameters
from 0 to 16383.
number:
ExaScale.
priority-value (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the priority of this RP Candidate, which is included
in the Candidate-RP-Advertisements.
Range: 0 (highest) to 255 (lowest)
Command
History

ipv6 pim sparse-mode
e Enable IPv6 PIM sparse mode on the interface.
Syntax ipv6 pim sparse-mode

To disable IPv6 PIM sparse mode, enter no ipv6 pim sparse-mode.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage The interface must be enabled (no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command
Information configured. Multicast must also be enabled globally. PIM is supported on the port-channel interface.
ipv6 pim spt-threshold

e Specifies when a PIM leaf router should join the shortest path tree.
Syntax ipv6 pim spt-threshold {kbps | infinity}
To return to the default value, enter no ipv6 pim spt-threshold.
Parameters
kbps Enter a traffic rate in kilobytes per second.
Range: 0 to 4294967 kbps
Default: 10 kbps
infinity Enter the keyword infinity to have all sources for the specified group use the shared tree and
never join shortest path tree (SPT).
Defaults 10 kbps
Command
History
Usage PIM leaf routers join the shortest path tree immediately after the first packet arrives from a new source.
Information

show ipv6 pim bsr-router
e View information on the bootstrap router (v2).
Syntax show ipv6 pim bsr-router
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-13. show ipv6 pim bsr-router Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 pim bsr-router
PIMv2 Bootstrap information
This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2)
BSR address: 14::2
Uptime: 00:02:54, BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 126
Next bootstrap message in 00:00:06
This system is a candidate BSR

Candidate BSR address: 14::2, priority: 0, hash mask length: 126
FTOS#

e Display IPv6 PIM enabled interfaces.
Syntax show ipv6 pim interface
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-14. show ipv6 pim interface Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 pim interface
Interface Ver/ Nbr Query DR
Mode Count Intvl Prio
Gi 10/3 v2/S 1 30 1
Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:140f
DR : this router
Gi 10/11 v2/S 0 30 1
Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:1417
DR : this router
FTOS#

e DisplaysIPv6 PIM neighbor information.
Syntax show ipv6 pim neighbor [detail]

Parameters
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to displayed PIM neighbor detailed information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-15. show ipv6 pim neighbor detail Command Example
FTOS#show ipv6 pim neighbor detail
Neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Ver DR
Address Prio/Mode
fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Gi 10/3 00:07:39/00:01:42 v2 1 / S
165:87:50::6
FTOS#
show ipv6 pim rp

e View all IPv6 multicast groups-to-rendezvous point (RP) mappings.
Syntax show ipv6 pim rp [mapping | group-address]
Parameters
mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP
mapping and information on how RP is learnt.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format to view RP
mappings for a specific group.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 41-16. show ipv6 pim rp Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 pim rp
Group RP
ff0e::225:1:2:1 14::1
ff0e::225:1:2:2 14::1
ff0e::226:1:2:1 14::1
ff0e::226:1:2:2 14::1
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 41-17. show ipv6 pim rp mapping Command Example
FTOS#show ipv6 pim rp mapping
PIM Group-to-RP Mappings
Group(s): ff00::/8
RP: 14::1, v2
Info source: 14::1, via bootstrap, priority 192
Uptime: 00:03:37, expires: 00:01:53
Group(s): ff00::/8, Static
RP: 14::2, v2
FTOS#
show ipv6 pim tib

e View the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information basetib).
Syntax show ipv6 pim tib [group-address [source-address]]
Parameters
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 group address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 41-18. show ipv6 pim tib Command Example

FTOS#show ipv6 pim tib
PIM Multicast Routing Table

Flags: D - Dense, S - Sparse, C - Connected, L - Local, P - Pruned,
R - RP-bit set, F - Register flag, T - SPT-bit set, J - Join SPT,
M - MSDP created entry, A - Candidate for MSDP Advertisement
K - Ack-Pending State
Interface state: Interface, next-Hop, State/Mode
(25::1, ff0e::225:1:2:1), uptime 00:09:53, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ

RPF neighbor: GigabitEthernet 10/3, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265



FTOS#

1130
|
PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)
42
PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)
Overview
PIM is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.1.1.0. and later.
IPv4 PIM Commands

IPv4 PIM-Source Specific Mode Commands
IPv6 PIM Commands
IPv4 PIM Commands

The following commands apply to IPv4 PIM-SM, PIM-SSM, and PIM-DM:
clear ip pim tib

debug ip pim
ip pim dr-priority
show ip pim tib

The IPv4 PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) commands are:
ip pim ssm-range
ip pim join-filter
show ip pim ssm-range
PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) | 1131

ip pim ssm-range
ces Specify the SSM group range using an access-list.
Syntax ip pim ssm-range {access_list_name}
Parameters
access_list_name Enter the name of the access list.
Defaults Default SSM range is 232/8 and ff3x/32
Command
History
Usage FTOS supports standard access list for the SSM range. Extended ACL cannot be used for configuring
Information SSM range. If an Extended ACL is configured and then used in the ip pim ssm-range {access list
name} configuration, an error is reported.
However, if ip pim ssm-range {access list name} is configured first and then the ACL is
configured as an Extended ACL, an error is not reported and the ACL is not applied to the SSM range.
FTOS recommended best-practices are to configure the standard ACL, and then apply the ACL to the
SSM range. Once the SSM range is applied, the changes are applied internally without requiring
clearing of the TIB.
When ACL rules change, the ACL and PIM modules apply the new rules automatically.
When SSM range is configured, FTOS supports SSM for configured group range as well as default
SSM range.
When the SSM ACL is removed, PIM SSM is supported for default SSM range only
show ip pim ssm-range

ces Display the non-default groups added using the SSM range feature.
Syntax show ip pim ssm-range
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
1132 | PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)

IPv6 PIM Commands

The following commands apply to IPv6 PIM-SM and PIM-SSM:
clear ipv6 pim tib

debug ip pim
show ipv6 pim tib

The IPv6 PIM-SSM commands are:
ipv6 pim ssm-range

show ipv6 pim ssm-range
ipv6 pim ssm-range

e Specify the SSM group range using an access-list.
Syntax ipv6 pim ssm-range {access_list_name}
Parameters
access_list_name Enter the name of the access list. Maximum 16 characters.
Defaults Default SSM range is 232/8 and ff3x/32
Command
History
Usage Once the SSM range is applied, the changes are applied internally without requiring clearing of the
Information TIB. SSM ACL overrides the default range. To use the default range while SSM range is active, add
the default range to the SSM ACL.
When ACL rules change, the ACL manager and PIM modules apply the new rules automatically.
PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) | 1133

When the SSM ACL is removed, the default range is restored. When SSM range is configured, FTOS
supports SSM for configured group range as well as default SSM range.
show ipv6 pim ssm-range

e Display the non-default groups added using the SSM range feature.
Syntax show ipv6 pim ssm-range
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 42-1. show ipv6 pim ssm-range Command Example

FTOS(conf)#ipv6 pim ssm-range SSM_ACL
FTOS(conf)#ipv6 access-list SSM_ACL
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 any ff0e::225:1:2:0/112
FTOS(conf-ipv6-acl)#do show ipv6 pim ssm-range
Group Address / MaskLen
ff0e::225:1:2:0 / 112
1134 | PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)

43
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Overview
FTOS supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), as described by IEEE 802.3af, on C-Series and S-Series
systems (S25V and S50V models), as indicated by the c and s characters, respectively, that appear
below each command heading.
Commands
power budget
power inline
power inline priority
show power detail
show power inline
show power supply
power budget
s If an S25V or S50V model of the S-Series has an external power supply, this command allows the
external power supply of the specified stack member to be used for powering PoE ports. An external
DC power supply operates, by default, in backup mode. However, if the power supply is the 470W
Redundant Power Supply (catalog # S50-01-PSU-V) from Dell Force10, and it is attached to the
Current Sharing terminal, you can use this command to convert its use to load-sharing mode to support
additional PoE devices. Other external DC power supplies are not supported for PoE.
Syntax [no] power budget stack-unit 0-7 321-790

Enter no power budget stack-unit 0-7 to disable the use of power for PoE from the external power
supply on the designated stack member.
Parameters
0-7 Enter the stack unit ID, from 0 to 7, of the stack member that you want to configure.
321-790 After entering the stack unit number, enter a value representing the watts to be used
for PoE.
Range: 321 to 790
Defaults 320W (i.e., redundancy mode)
Power over Ethernet (PoE) | 1135

Command
History
Usage Setting a value above 320 causes a warning to be displayed that the device might lose power
Information redundancy.
power inline
cs Enable power to be supplied to a device connected to a port.
Syntax [no] power inline {auto [max_milliwatts] | static [max_milliwatts]}
To disable power to a port that has been enabled for PoE, use the no power inline command.
Parameters
auto Enter the keyword auto to allow the port to determine how much power the
connected Class 0,1, 2, 3, or 4 device requires, and supply it (up to 15.4 watts).
max_milliwatts (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of milliwatts to be the maximum amount of power
that a port can provide.
Range: 5000 to 15400 (milliwatts)
static Entering the keyword static without the max_milliwatts variable sets the amount
of power available on the selected port to the maximum (up to 15.4 watts).
Defaults no (power is disabled to the port)
Command
History
Usage Ports configured with power inline auto have a lower priority for access to power than those
Information configured with power inline static. As a second layer of priority setting, use the power inline
priority command.
FTOS treats powered devices rated as Class 0, 3, or 4 the same.
Related
power inline priority Set the PoE priority of the selected port.
Commands
show power inline Display the ports that are enabled with PoE and the amount of power that
each is consuming.
power inline priority

cs Set the PoE priority of the selected port.
Syntax [no] power inline priority {critical | high | low}
1136 | Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Parameters
critical Enter the keyword critical to set the PoE priority of the port to the highest level.
high Enter the keyword high to set the PoE priority of the port to the second highest level.
low Enter the keyword low to set the PoE priority of the port to the lowest level.
Defaults none
Command
History
Usage Power allocation is a function of per-port power priority settings, port TLVs, port IDs, which ports
Information request power first, and how much power is actually consumed by the active ports. Power priority is
allocated by this formula:
PoE_off_priority = static_or_auto_prio * 10000 + (user/LLDP-MED) priority * 1000 + slotId*100 + portId
where:
static_prio = 0
auto_prio = 1
The lower the value of PoE_off_priority for the selected port, the higher its power priority. So, if a port is
configured static (assigned a value of 0 in the formula), its priority is higher than a port configured as
auto (assigned a value of 1). Two ports with the same static/auto settings are then prioritized by their
user-set priorities and LLDP-MED values.
In a similar fashion, lower numbered slots/ports get a higher priority than higher numbered slots/ports.
For example, 0/1 has a higher priority than 1/10, which has a higher priority than 2/1. As the slot / port
number increases, the value of PoE_off_priority for the port increases and hence a lower priority.
Basically, priority is assigned in this order:

1 static/auto settings (using the power inline command)
2 user-set priorities (using this command)
3 LLDP-MED TLV, only if user priority is not configured (see Link Layer Detection Protocol
(LLDP).)
4 Slot ID (breaks tie of same-priority ports)
5 Port ID (breaks tie of same-priority ports in same slot)
Related
power inline Enable power to be supplied to a device connected to a port.
Commands
show power inline Display the ports that are enabled with PoE and the amount of power that
each is consuming.
show power detail

cs Display the total power consumption and power consumption by component.
Syntax show power detail

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Inline Power Used removed from output.
History
Example FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-0/1-48)#do show power detail

Unit Total Logic Inline Inline Inline Inline
Power Power Power Power Power Power
Available Consumed Available Allocated Consumed Remaining
(Watts) (Watts) (Watts) (Watts) (Watts) (Watts)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 470.00 150 320.00 308.00 190.00 12.00
Table 43-1. show power detail Command Output Fields

Unit (S-Series only) The stack member unit ID.
Catalog Name (C-Series only) Displays the components Dell Force10 catalog number.
Slot ID (C-Series only) Displays the slot number in which the line card or RPM is
installed.
Total Power Available The total power available in the stack member or chassis.
Note: On the S-Series a maximum of 790W can be allocated for PoE,
even if you add the 470W external power supply.
Logic Power Consumed The power consumed by the system logic.
Inline Power Available Power available for PoE (whatever was configured using the power-budget
command. Default: 320 watts
Inline Power Allocated Total power allocated to the ports.
Inline Power Consumed Total power consumed by connected devices.
Inline Power Remaining Difference between power available and power allocated.
Related
Commands
power inline priority Set the PoE priority of the selected port
show power inline

cs Display the ports that are enabled with PoE and the amount of power that each is consuming.
Syntax show power inline
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Operational Status removed from output.
History

Example FTOS(conf-if-range-gi-0/1-48)#do show power inline
Interface Admin Inline Power Inline Power Class User
Allocated Consumed Priority
(Watts) (Watts)
--------- ----- ------------ ------------ ----- ----------
Gi 0/1 auto 0.00 0.00 NO_DEVICE Low
Gi 0/2 auto 7.00 3.20 2 Low
Table 43-2. show power inline Command Output Field Description

Interface Displays the line card slot and port number.
Admin Displays the PoE mode of the port. The mode can be either auto or static. See
power budget.
Inline Power Allocated Displays the amount of power allocated to the port.
Inline Power Consumed Displays the amount of power that is consumed by the connected device.
Class Displays the power classification of the connected device. Valid classes are
0-4.
User Priority Displays the power configured by the user for the port (default is low). See
power inline priority.
Related
Commands
power inline priority Set the PoE priority of the selected port
show power supply

cs Display the power supply status.
Syntax show power supply
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
C-Series Figure 43-1. show power supply (C-Series) Command Example

Example
FTOS#show power supply
Power Model
Supply Number Type Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------
PEM0 Absent
PEM1 Absent
PEM2 CC-C-1200W-AC AC Active
PEM3 Absent
PEM4 CC-C-1200W-AC AC Powered Off
PEM5 CC-C-1200W-AC AC Active
FTOS#

Table 43-4 describes the nine possible power supply conditions.
Table 43-3. Power Supply Conditions

AC Fail The PSU is unplugged.
Active The PSU is supplying power to the chassis.
Fail The PSU has failed.
Not Present The PSU is not installed in the chassis.
Over Current Shutdown The PSU has turned off due to an high input current condition.
Over Temperature Shutdown The PSU has turned off due to an high temperature condition.
Over Temperature Warning The temperature of the PSU is greater than the recommended maximum
operating temperature.
Over Current Warning The current being supplied to the PSU is greater than the recommended
maximum input current.
Power Off The PSU is present but not on.
S-Series Figure 43-2. show power supply (S-Series) Command Example

Example
FTOS#show power supply
Unit Power Model Type Status
Supply Number
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 PS0 S50-PWR-AC AC Active
0 PS1 S50-PWR-DC DC Active
1 PS1 Not present
2 PS1 Not present
FTOS
Table 43-4 describes the nine possible power supply conditions.
Table 43-4. Power Supply Conditions

AC Fail The PSU is unplugged.
Active The PSU is supplying power to the chassis.
Fail The PSU has failed.
Not Present The PSU is not installed in the chassis.
Over Current Shutdown The PSU has turned off due to an high input current condition.
Over Temperature Shutdown The PSU has turned off due to an high temperature condition.
Over Temperature Warning The temperature of the PSU is greater than the recommended maximum
operating temperature.
Over Current Warning The current being supplied to the PSU is greater than the recommended
maximum input current.
Power Off The PSU is present but not on.

44
Port Monitoring
Overview
The Port Monitoring feature enables you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each
incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port.
The Remote Port Mirroring feature allows you to monitor traffic on multiple source ports on different
switches and transport mirrored packets on a dedicated L2 VLAN to multiple destination ports on
different switches.
The commands in this chapter are generally supported on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series, with
one exception, as noted in the Command History fields and by these symbols under the command
headings: c e s
Commands
description
flow-based enable
mode remote-port-mirroring
monitor session
show config
show monitor session
show running-config monitor session
source (port monitoring)
source (remote port mirroring)
source remote vlan (remote port mirroring)
tagged destination
untagged destination
Port Monitoring | 1141

On the E-Series, Port Monitoring is supported on TeraScale and ExaScale platforms.

Port Monitoring is supported on physical ports only. Logical interfaces, such as Port Channels and
VLANs, are not supported.
FTOS supports as many monitor sessions on a system as the number of port-pipes.
A SONET port can only be configured as a monitored port.
The monitoring (destination, MG) and monitored (source, MD) ports must be on the same
switch.
A monitoring port can monitor any physical port in the chassis.
Only one MG and one MD may be in a single port-pipe.
A monitoring port can monitor more than one port.
More than one monitored port can have the same destination monitoring port.
FTOS on the S-Series supports multiple source ports to be monitored by a single destination port
in one monitor session.
On the S-Series, one monitor session can have only one MG port. There is no restriction on the
number of source ports, or destination ports on the chassis.
Note: The monitoring port should not be a part of any other configuration.
Remote Port Mirroring is supported only on the E-Series ExaScale platform.
description
ces Enter a description of this monitoring session
Parameters
description Enter a description regarding this session(80 characters maximum).
Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID)
Command
History
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
Related
monitor session Enable a monitoring session.
Commands
1142 | Port Monitoring

flow-based enable
e Enable flow-based monitoring.
Syntax flow-based enable

To disable flow-based monitoring, use the no flow-based enable command.
Defaults Disabled, that is flow-based monitoring is not applied
Command
History
Usage To monitoring traffic with particular flows ingressing/egressing the interface, appropriate ACLs can be
Information applied in both ingress and egress direction.
Related
monitor session Create a monitoring session.
Commands

mode remote-port-mirroring
ex Configure a L2 VLAN as the VLAN used to transport mirrored traffic in a remote-port mirroring
session.
Syntax mode remote-port-mirroring
Defaults No default values or behaviors
Command Modes VLAN INTERFACE
Command
History
Example Figure 44-1. Command Example: mode remote-port-mirroring

FTOS(conf)# interface vlan 10
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)# mode remote-port-mirroring
Usage A remote port mirroring session mirrors Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic by prefixing the reserved VLAN
Information tag to monitored packets so that they are copied to the reserve VLAN.
Mirrored traffic is transported across the network using 802.1Q-in-802.1Q tunneling. The source
address, destination address and original VLAN ID of the mirrored packet are preserved with the
tagged VLAN header. Untagged source packets are tagged with the reserved VLAN ID.
There is no restriction on the VLAN IDs used for the reserved remote-monitoring VLAN. Valid VLAN
IDs are 1 to 4094. The default VLAN ID is not supported.
The reserved VLAN for remote port mirroring can be automatically configured in intermediate
switches by using GVRP.
MAC address learning in the reserved VLAN is automatically disabled.
To change the reserved VLAN used in a source session, you can remove the current VLAN by entering
the complete no source destination vlan vlan-id command. Then re-enter the source (remote port
mirroring) command to configure a new reserved VLAN for the source session.
Related
Commands
show monitor session Display the monitor session.
tagged destination Configure a tagged port to carry mirrored traffic in a reserved
VLAN.

monitor session
ces Create a session for monitoring traffic with port monitoring or remote port mirroring.
Syntax monitor session session-ID

To delete a session, use the no monitor session session-ID command.
To delete all monitor sessions, use the no monitor session all command.
Parameters
session-ID Enter a session identification number.
Range: 0 to 65535
Defaults No default values or behaviors
Command
Version 8.4.1.2 Support for remote port mirroring was added on the E-Series ExaScale.
History
Example Figure 44-2. Command Example: monitor session

FTOS(conf)# monitor session 60
FTOS(conf-mon-sess-60)
Usage The monitor command is saved in the running configuration at the Monitor Session mode level and
Information can be restored after a chassis reload.
In remote-port mirroring sessions:

Up to 4 source sessions are supported on a switch. Up to 128 ports are supported in a source
session, including all ports in source port channels and source VLANs.
Up to 64 destination sessions are supported on a switch. Up to 64 ports are supported in a
destination session.
Related
show monitor session Display the monitor session
Commands
show running-config monitor session Display the running configuration of a monitor session

show config
ces Display the current monitor session configuration.
Syntax show config
Command
History
Example
FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#show config
!
monitor session 11
source GigabitEthernet 10/0 destination GigabitEthernet 10/47 direction rx
FTOS#

show monitor session
ces Display the monitor information of a particular session or all sessions.
Syntax show monitor session {session-ID}

To display monitoring information for all sessions, use the show monitor session command.
Parameters
session-ID (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number.
Range: 0 to 65535
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 44-3. Commands Example: show monitor session

FTOS#show monitor session 11
SessionID Source Destination Direction Mode Type

--------- ------ ------------- --------- ------- ----------
11 Gi 10/0 Gi 10/47 rx interface Port-based
12 Po 1 remote-vlan 12 both Remote-Port-Mirroring Port-based
Related
monitor session Create a session for monitoring.
Commands

show running-config monitor session
ces Display the running configuration of all monitor sessions or a specific session.
Syntax show running-config monitor session {session-ID}

To display the running configuration for all monitor sessions, use just the show running-config
monitor session command.
Parameters
session-ID (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number.
Range: 0 to 65535
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example
FTOS#show running-config monitor session
!
monitor session 8
!
monitor session 11
FTOS#show running-config monitor session 11

!
monitor session 11
Usage The monitoring command is saved in the running configuration at the Monitor Session mode level and
Information can be restored after a chassis reload.
Related
monitor session Create a session for monitoring.
Commands
show monitor session Display a monitor session.

source (port monitoring)
ces Configure a port monitor source.
Syntax source interface destination interface direction {rx | tx | both}

To disable a monitor source, use the no source interface destination interface direction {rx | tx
| both} command.
Parameters
interface Enter the one of the following keywords and slot/port information:
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet followed by the
destination Enter the keyword destination to indicate the interface destination.
direction {rx | tx | both} Enter the keyword direction followed by one of the packet directional
indicators.
rx: to monitor receiving packets only
tx: to monitor transmitting packets only
both: to monitor both transmitting and receiving packets
Command
History
Example Figure 44-4. Command Example: Configuring a Port Monitor Source

FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#source gi 10/0 destination gi 10/47 direction rx
FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#
Usage
Information
Note: A SONET port can only be configured as a monitored port.

source (remote port mirroring)
ex Configure one or more source ports, the ingress/egress traffic to be mirrored, and the reserved L2
VLAN used to transport mirrored traffic.
Syntax source {single-interface | vlan vlan-id | range {interface-list | interface-range |

mixed-interface-list | vlan-list | vlan-range | mixed-vlan-list}} destination remote vlan vlan-id
direction {rx | tx | both}
Parameters
single-interface Specifies one of the following interface types:
1-Gigabit Ethernet: Enter gigabitethernet slot/port.
10-Gigabit Ethernet: Enter tengigabitethernet slot/port.
Port channel: Enter port-channel {1-511}.
vlan vlan-id Specifies a single VLAN ID. Range: 1-4094
range interface-list Specifies multiple interfaces separated by a comma and space:
single-interface, single-interface, single-interface...
For example: source range port-channel 2,
gigabitethernet 3/4
range interface-range Specifies one of the following interface ranges:
gigabitethernet slot/first_port - last_port
tengigabitethernet slot/first_port - last_port
port-channel first_number - last_number
A space is required before and after the dash (-).
For example: source range gigabitethernet 1/2 - 4
Or: source range port-channel 1 - 12
range mixed-interface-list Specifies single interfaces and interface ranges in any order: range
single-interface, interface-range, single-interface...
For example: source range port-channel 2,
gigabitethernet 3/4 - 5
range vlan-list Specifies multiple source VLANs separated by a comma and space:
range vlan vlan-id, vlan vlan-id, vlan vlan-id...
For example: source range vlan 2, vlan 12, vlan 22
range vlan-range Specifies a range of source VLANs in the format: range vlan
first_vlanID - last_vlanID.
For example: source range vlan 9-11
range mixed-vlan-list Specifies single VLANs and VLAN ranges in any order: range vlan
vlan-id, vlan first_vlanID - last_vlanID, vlan vlan-id...
For example: source range vlan 2, vlan 10 - 11, vlan
5
destination remote-vlan Associates the reserved L2 VLAN with the source ports used in the
vlan-id source session. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094. The default VLAN ID is
not supported.
direction {rx | tx | both} Specifies the direction of the traffic to be mirrored:
rx: incoming packets only
tx: outgoing packets only
both: both incoming and outgoing packets

Command
History
Example Figure 44-5. Command Example: Configuring a Source Port

FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#source gigabitethernet 10/0 destination remote-vlan 2
direction rx
Usage
Information You can configure physical ports, port-channels, and VLANs as sources in remote port mirroring and
use them in the same source session. You can use both Layer 2 (configured with the switchport
command) and Layer 3 ports as source ports.
In remote port mirroring:
Up to 4 source sessions are supported on a switch.

Up to 128 source ports are supported in a source session.
When you configure a port channel or VLAN in a source session, all ports in the port channel or
VLAN are used as source ports, up to a maximum of 128 source ports.
You can configure trunk ports and access ports as source ports.
You can configure trunk ports and non-trunk ports as source ports in a remote-port mirroring session.
You can use the default VLAN and native VLANs as a source VLAN. You cannot configure the
dedicated VLAN used to transport mirrored traffic as a source VLAN.
A destination port for remote port mirroring cannot be used as a source port, including the session in
which the port functions as the destination port. A source port channel or source VLAN, which has a
member port that is configured as a destination port, cannot be used as a source port channel or source
VLAN.
You can use ACLs on a source port. In a flow-based source session, packets sent from the RPM are not
monitored.
Rate-limiting tagged-VLAN egress traffic on a source port is supported.
To delete one or more monitored ports from a source session, enter the complete no source (remote
port mirroring) command.
The dedicated L2 VLAN used for remote port mirroring is configured with the mode
remote-port-mirroring command. To change the reserved VLAN used in a source session, you can
remove the current VLAN by entering the no source destination vlan vlan-id command. Then re-enter
the complete source (remote port mirroring) command as described above to configure a new reserved
VLAN for the source session.

source remote vlan (remote port mirroring)
ex Associate the reserved L2 VLAN used to transport mirrored traffic in remote port mirroring with a
destination session and configure the destination ports to which an analyzer is connected.
Syntax source remote vlan vlan-id destination {single-interface | range {interface-list |

interface-range | mixed-interface-list}}
Parameters
vlan-id VLAN ID of the reserved L2 VLAN used for remote port mirroring.
Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094. The default VLAN ID is not supported.
range interface-list Specifies multiple interfaces separated by a comma and space:
single-interface, single-interface, single-interface...
For example:
source remote-vlan 4 destination range gig 1/2,
tengig 3/4
range interface-range Specifies one of the following interface ranges:
gigabitethernet slot/first_port - last_port
For example:
source remote-vlan 4 destination range gig 1/2 - 4
range mixed-interface-list Specifies single interfaces and interface ranges in any order:
single-interface, interface-range, single-interface...
For example: source remote-vlan 4 destination range
gig 3/4 - 5, tengig 1/0
Command
History
Example Figure 44-6. Command Example: Associating the Reserved VLAN with a Destination
Session
FTOS(conf-mon-sess-11)#source remote vlan 10 destination gigabitethernet 10/0 - 2

Usage You can configure any port as a destination port. You cannot configure a VLAN, port-channel, or
Information SONET interface as a destination port
You can configure additional destination ports in an active session.
You can tunnel the mirrored traffic from multiple remote-port source sessions to the same destination
port.
You can configure a destination port to send only tagged or untagged traffic to the analyzer. By default,
the port sends untagged packets so that the reserved VLAN ID is removed and the original monitored
packet is analyzed.
By default, ingress traffic on a destination port is dropped.
A destination port for remote port mirroring cannot be used as a source port, including the session in
which the port functions as the destination port.
A destination port cannot be used in any spanning tree instance.
The dedicated L2 VLAN used for remote port mirroring is configured with the mode
remote-port-mirroring command.
To delete one or more destination ports from a destination session, enter the no source remote vlan
(remote port mirroring) command.
To change the reserved VLAN used in the destination session, you must first remove all destination
ports. Then delete the current VLAN by entering the no monitor session source remote vlan (remote
port mirroring) command and re-enter the monitor session source remote vlan (remote port mirroring)
command to configure the new VLAN ID.
tagged destination
ex Configure destination ports for remote port mirroring so that the reserved VLAN tag is added to
mirrored traffic sent to an analyzer.
Syntax tagged destination {single-interface | range interface-range}
Parameters
range Specifies one of the following interface ranges:
interface-range gigabitethernet slot/first_port - last_port
For example:
tagged destination range gigabitethernet 1/2 - 4
Defaults Destination ports send untagged packets to an analyzer so that the reserved VLAN ID is removed and
the original monitored packet is mirrored.

Command

History
Usage To reconfigure destination ports in a remote-port mirroring session as untagged ports, enter the
Information untagged destination command.
Related
Commands untagged Configure destination ports to remove the reserved VLAN tag from mirrored traffic.
destination
untagged destination
ex Configure destination ports for remote port mirroring so that the reserved VLAN tag is removed from
mirrored traffic sent to an analyzer.
Syntax untagged destination {single-interface | range interface-range}
Parameters
range Specifies one of the following interface ranges:
interface-range gigabitethernet slot/first_port - last_port
For example:
untagged destination range gigabitethernet 1/2 - 4
Defaults Destination ports send untagged packets to an analyzer so that the reserved VLAN ID is removed and
the original monitored packet is mirrored.
Command
History
Usage To configure destination ports in a remote-port mirroring session as tagged ports, enter the tagged
Information destination command.
Related
Commands tagged Configure destination ports to add the reserved VLAN tag to mirrored traffic.
destination

45
Private VLAN (PVLAN)
Overview
Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, the Private VLAN (PVLAN) feature of FTOS is available for the C-Series
and S-Series: c s
Commands
ip local-proxy-arp
private-vlan mode
private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan
show interfaces private-vlan
show vlan private-vlan
show vlan private-vlan mapping
switchport mode private-vlan
See also the following commands. The command output is augmented in FTOS 7.8.1.0 to provide
PVLAN data:
show arp in Chapter 24, IPv4 Routing

show vlan in Chapter 30, Layer 2
Private VLANs extend the FTOS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the
same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a
primary and secondary VLAN pair.
The FTOS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069.
Private VLAN Concepts

Primary VLAN:
The primary VLAN is the base VLAN and can have multiple secondary VLANs. There are two types of
secondary VLAN community VLAN and isolated VLAN:
A primary VLAN can have any number of community VLANs and isolated VLANs.
Private VLANs block all traffic to isolated ports except traffic from promiscuous ports. Traffic
received from an isolated port is forwarded only to promiscuous ports or trunk ports.
Private VLAN (PVLAN) | 1155

Community VLAN:
A community VLAN is a secondary VLAN of the primary VLAN:
Ports in a community VLAN can talk to each other. Also, all ports in a community VLAN can talk
to all promiscuous ports in the primary VLAN and vice-versa.
Devices on a community VLAN can communicate with each other via member ports, while
devices in an isolated VLAN cannot.
Isolated VLAN:
An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN of the primary VLAN:
Ports in an isolated VLAN cannot talk to each other. Servers would be mostly connected to
isolated VLAN ports.
Isolated ports can talk to promiscuous ports in the primary VLAN, and vice-versa.
Port types:
Community port: A community port is, by definition, a port that belongs to a community VLAN
and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with
promiscuous ports.
Isolated port: An isolated port is, by definition, a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate
with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN.
Promiscuous port: A promiscuous port is, by definition, a port that is allowed to communicate
with any other port type.
Trunk port: A trunk port, by definition, carries VLAN traffic across switches:
A trunk port in a PVLAN is always tagged.
Primary or secondary VLAN traffic is carried by the trunk port in tagged mode.
The tag on the packet helps identify the VLAN to which the packet belongs.
A trunk port can also belong to a regular VLAN (non-private VLAN).
ip local-proxy-arp
cs Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN.
Syntax [no] ip local-proxy-arp
To disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN, use the no ip
local-proxy-arp command in the INTERFACE VLAN mode for the primary VLAN.
To disable Layer 3 communication in a particular secondary VLAN, use the no ip local-proxy-arp

command in the INTERFACE VLAN mode for the selected secondary VLAN.
Note: Even after ip-local-proxy-arp is disabled (no ip-local-proxy-arp) in a secondary VLAN,

Layer 3 communication may happen between some secondary VLAN hosts, until the ARP timeout
happens on those secondary VLAN hosts.
Defaults Layer 3 communication is disabled between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN.
1156 | Private VLAN (PVLAN)

Command
History
Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary.
Commands
private-vlan mapping Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.
secondary-vlan
show arp Display the ARP table.
show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
show vlan private-vlan Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
switchport mode private-vlan Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.
private-vlan mode
cs Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary.
Syntax [no] private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary}

To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated |
primary} command syntax.
Parameters
community Enter community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN, as described above.
isolated Enter isolated to configure the VLAN as an isolated VLAN, as described above.
primary Enter primary to configure the VLAN as a primary VLAN, as described above.
Defaults none
Command
History
Usage The VLAN:

Information
Can be in only one mode, either community, isolated, or primary.
Mode can be set to community or isolated even before associating it to a primary VLAN. This
secondary VLAN will continue to work normally as a normal VLAN even though it is not
associated to a primary VLAN. (A syslog message indicates this.)
Must not have a port in it when the VLAN mode is being set.
Only ports (and port channels) configured as promiscuous, host, or PVLAN trunk ports (as described
above) can be added to the PVLAN. No other regular ports can be added to the PVLAN.
After using this command to configure a VLAN as a primary VLAN, use the private-vlan mapping
secondary-vlan command to map secondary VLANs to this VLAN.
Related
private-vlan mapping Set the mode of the selected VLAN to primary and then associate
Commands
secondary-vlan secondary VLANs to it.

show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.

private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan

cs Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.
Syntax [no] private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list
To remove specific secondary VLANs from the configuration, use the no private-vlan mapping
secondary-vlan vlan-list command syntax.
Parameters
vlan-list Enter the list of secondary VLANs to associate with the selected primary VLAN, as described
above. The list can be in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format, following the
convention for range input.
Defaults none
Command
History
Usage The list of secondary VLANs can be:

Information
Specified in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format.
Specified with this command even before they have been created.
Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list.
Related
Commands
show vlan private-vlan Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
mapping
show interfaces private-vlan

cs Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
Syntax show interfaces private-vlan [interface interface]
Parameters
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface, followed by the ID of the specific
interface for which to display PVLAN status.
Defaults none

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage This command has two types of display a list of all PVLAN interfaces or for a specific interface.
Information Examples of both types of output are shown below.
Examples Figure 45-1. show interfaces private-vlan Command Output

FTOS# show interfaces private-vlan
Interface Vlan PVLAN-Type Interface Type Status
--------- ---- ---------- -------------- --------
Gi 2/1 10 Primary Promiscuous Up
Gi 2/2 100 Isolated Host Down
Gi 2/3 10 Primary Trunk Up
Gi 2/4 101 Community Host Up
FTOS# show interfaces private-vlan Gi 2/2

Interface Vlan PVLAN-Type Interface Type Status
--------- ---- ---------- -------------- --------
Gi 2/2 100 Isolated Host Up
The table, below, defines the fields in the output, above.
Field Description
Interface Displays type of interface and associated slot and port number
Vlan Displays the VLAN ID of the designated interface
PVLAN-Type Displays the type of VLAN in which the designated interface resides
Interface Type Displays the PVLAN port type of the designated interface.
Status States whether the interface is operationally up or down.
Related
Commands
show vlan private-vlan

cs Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
Syntax show vlan private-vlan [community | interface | isolated | primary | primary_vlan |

interface interface]

Parameters
community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community to display VLANs

configured as community VLANs, along with their interfaces.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community to display VLANs
configured as community VLANs, along with their interfaces.
isolated (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isolated to display VLANs configured
as isolated VLANs, along with their interfaces.
primary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword primary to display VLANs configured
as primary VLANs, along with their interfaces.
primary_vlan (OPTIONAL) Enter a private VLAN ID or secondary VLAN ID to display
interface details about the designated PVLAN.
interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface and an interface ID to display
the PVLAN configuration of the designated interface.
Defaults none
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage Examples of all types of command output are shown below. The first type of output is the result of not
Information entering an optional keyword. It displays a detailed list of all PVLANs and their member VLANs and
interfaces. The other types of output show details about PVLAN subsets.
Examples Figure 45-2. show vlan private-vlan Command Output

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan
Primary Secondary Type Active Ports
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3
100 isolated Yes Gi 2/2
101 community Yes Gi 2/10
20 primary Yes Po 10, 12-13
Gi 3/1
200 isolated Yes Gi 3/2,4-6
201 community No
202 community Yes Gi 3/11-12
FTOS# show vlan private-vlan primary

------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
FTOS# show vlan private-vlan isolated

------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan community
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
20 primary Yes Po 10, 12-13
Gi 3/1
201 community No
FTOS# show vlan private-vlan interface Gi 2/1

------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
10 primary Yes Gi 2/1
If the VLAN ID is that of a primary VLAN, then the entire private VLAN output will be displayed, as
shown in Figure 45-3. If the VLAN ID is a secondary VLAN, only its primary VLAN and its particular
secondary VLAN properties will be displayed, as shown in Figure 45-4.
Figure 45-3. Output of show vlan private-vlan (primary)

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan 10
------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------
1020 isolated Yes Gi 0/4
Figure 45-4. Output of show vlan private-vlan (secondary)

FTOS#show vlan private-vlan 102

------- --------- --------- ------ ------------------------------------------
10 Primary Yes Po 1
Gi 0/2
102 Isolated Yes Gi 0/4
The table, below, defines the fields in the output, above.
Field Description
Primary Displays the VLAN ID of the designated or associated primary VLAN(s)
Secondary Displays the VLAN ID of the designated or associated secondary VLAN(s
Type Displays the type of VLAN in which the listed interfaces reside
Active States whether the interface is operationally up or down
Ports Displays the interface IDs in the listed VLAN.
Related
private-vlan mode Set the mode of the selected VLAN to either community or isolated.
Commands


show vlan private-vlan mapping

cs Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
Syntax show vlan private-vlan mapping
Defaults none
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The output of this command, shown below, displays the community and isolated VLAN IDs that are
Information associated with each primary VLAN.
Figure 45-5. show vlan private-vlan mapping Command Output

FTOS# show vlan private-vlan mapping
Private Vlan:
Primary : 100
Isolated : 102
Community : 101
Unknown : 200
Related
Commands
switchport mode private-vlan

cs Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.
Syntax [no] switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk}
To remove the PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan
command.
Parameters
host Enter host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a
PVLAN, as described above.

promiscuous Enter promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an
promiscuous interface, as described above.
trunk Enter trunk to configure the selected port or port channel as a trunk port in a PVLAN,
as described above.
Defaults disabled
Command
History
Usage The assignment of the various PVLAN port types to port and port channel (LAG) interfaces is
Information demonstrated below.
Example Figure 45-6. Examples of switchport mode private-vlan Command

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 2/1
FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/1)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/2)#switchport mode private-vlan host

FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/3)#switchport mode private-vlan trunk
FTOS(conf)#interface port-channel 10
FTOS(conf-if-gi-2/3)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
Related
Commands
private-vlan mapping Set the mode of the selected VLAN to primary and then associate
secondary-vlan secondary VLANs to it.

1164
|
Private VLAN (PVLAN)
46
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)
Overview
The FTOS implementation of PVST+ (Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus) is based on the IEEE 802.1d
standard Spanning Tree Protocol, but it creates a separate spanning tree for each VLAN configured.
PVST+ (Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus) is supported by FTOS on all Dell Force10 systems, as
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Commands
The FTOS PVST+ commands are:
disable
description
extend system-id
protocol spanning-tree pvst
show spanning-tree pvst
spanning-tree pvst
spanning-tree pvst err-disable
tc-flush-standard
vlan bridge-priority
vlan forward-delay
vlan hello-time
vlan max-age
Note: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line.
disable
ces Disable PVST+ globally.
Syntax disable
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+) | 1165

To enable PVST+, enter no disable.
Defaults PVST+ is disabled
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst)
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree pvst Enter PVST+ mode.
Commands
description
ces Enter a description of the PVST+
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).
Command Modes SPANNING TREE PVST+ (The prompt is config-pvst.)
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree pvst Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands
1166 | Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

extend system-id
ces Use Extend System ID to augment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST+ differentiate
between BPDUs for each VLAN. If for some reason on VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another
VLAN, PVST+ will then not detect a loop, and both ports can remain in forwarding state.
Syntax extend system-id
Defaults Disabled
Command Modes PROTOCOL PVST
Command
History
Example FTOS(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief
VLAN 5
Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.73f7
We are the root of Vlan 5
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
---------- -------- ---- ------ --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 0/10 128.140 128 200000 FWD 0 32773 0001.e832.73f7 128.140
Gi 0/12 128.142 128 200000 DIS 0 32773 0001.e832.73f7 128.142
Interface
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ------------------------
Gi 0/10 Desg 128.140 128 200000 FWD 0 P2P No
Gi 0/12 Dis 128.142 128 200000 DIS 0 P2P No
Related
protocol spanning-tree pvst Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands

ces Enter the PVST+ mode to enable PVST+ on a device.
Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst

To disable PVST+, use the disable command.
Defaults This command has no default value or behavior.
Command
History
Example Figure 46-1. Configuring with protocol spanning-tree pvst Command

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree pvst
FTOS(conf-pvst)#no disable
FTOS(conf-pvst)#vlan 2 bridge-priority 4096
FTOS(conf-pvst)#vlan 3 bridge-priority 16384
FTOS(conf-pvst)#
FTOS(conf-pvst)#show config
!
no disable
vlan 2 bridge-priority 4096
vlan 3 bridge-priority 16384
FTOS#
Usage Once PVST+ is enabled, the device runs an STP instance for each VLAN it supports.
Information
Related
disable Disable PVST+.
Commands
show spanning-tree pvst Display the PVST+ configuration.

show spanning-tree pvst
ces View the Per-VLAN Spanning Tree configuration.
Syntax show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [guard]
Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the PVST+
configuration information.
Interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the interface keywords along with the slot/port
information:
512 for ExaScale.
guard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard
enabled on a PVST interface and the current port state.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
E-Series TeraScale.
inconsistency and Port VLAN ID inconsistency.

Example 1 Figure 46-2. show spanning-tree pvst brief Command
FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 brief

VLAN 3
Bridge ID Priority 16384, Address 0001.e805.e306
---------- -------- ---- ------ --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 1/0 128.130 128 20000 FWD 20000 4096 0001.e801.6aa8 128.426
Gi 1/1 128.131 128 20000 BLK 20000 4096 0001.e801.6aa8 128.427
Gi 1/16 128.146 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e805.e306 128.146
Gi 1/17 128.147 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e805.e306 128.147
Interface
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ----
Gi 1/0 Root 128.130 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No
Gi 1/1 Altr 128.131 128 20000 BLK 20000 P2P No
Gi 1/16 Desg 128.146 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes
Gi 1/17 Desg 128.147 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes
Example 2 Figure 46-3. show spanning-tree pvst vlan Command

FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2
VLAN 2
Root Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e805.e306
Bridge Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e805.e306
We are the root of VLAN 2
Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e805.e306
Number of topology changes 3, last change occurred 00:57:00

Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06
BPDU sent 1567, received 3


The port is in the Edge port mode

The port is in the Edge port mode

Example 3 Figure 46-4. show spanning-tree pvst command with EDS and LBK
FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 interface gigabitethernet 1/0
GigabitEthernet 1/0 of VLAN 2 is LBK_INC discarding Loopback BPDU

Inconsistency
Edge port:no (default) port guard :none (default) (LBK_INC)
Link type: point-to-point (auto) bpdu filter:disable (default)
Bpdu guard :disable (default)
Bpdus sent 152, received 27562
--------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 1/0 128.1223 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e800.a12b 128.1223
Example 4 Figure 46-5. show spanning-tree pvst with EDS and PVID
FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 interface gigabitethernet 1/0
GigabitEthernet 1/0 of VLAN 2 is PVID_INC discarding Port VLAN ID (PVID)

Inconsistency
Edge port:no (default) port guard :none (default)
Link type: point-to-point (auto) bpdu filter:disable (default)
Bpdu guard :disable (default)
Bpdus sent 1, received 0
--------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 1/0 128.1223 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e800.a12b 128.1223
Example 5 Figure 46-6. show spanning-tree pvst guard Command

FTOS#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 guard
Interface
--------- -------- --------- ----------
Gi 0/3 5 EDS(Shut) Bpduguard
Table 46-1. show spanning-tree pvst guard Command Information
Field Description
Interface Name PVST interface
Instance PVST instance
Related
spanning-tree pvst Configure PVST+ on an interface.
Commands

spanning-tree pvst
ces Configure a PVST+ interface with one of these settings: edge port with optional Bridge Port Data Unit
(BPDU) guard, port disablement if an error condition occurs, port priority or cost for a VLAN range,
loop guard, or root guard.
Syntax spanning-tree pvst {edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]] | err-disable | vlan

vlan-range {cost number | priority value} | loopguard | rootguard}
Parameters
edge-port Enter the keyword edge-port to configure the interface as a PVST+ edge port.
bpduguard Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into forwarding
mode immediately after the root fails.
err-disable Enter the keyword err-disable to enable the port to be put into error-disable state
(EDS) if an error condition occurs.
vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN number(s).
Range: 1 to 4094
cost number Enter the keyword cost followed by the port cost value.
Range: 1 to 200000
Defaults:
priority value Enter the keyword priority followed the Port priority value in increments of 16.
Range: 0 to 240. Default: 128
loopguard Enter the keyword loopguard to enable loop guard on a PVST+ port or port-channel
interface.
rootguard Enter the keyword rootguard to enable root guard on a PVST+ port or port-channel
interface.

Command
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced the loopguard and rootguard options on the E-Series TeraScale,
C-Series, and S-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced hardware shutdown-on-violation option
Version 7.4.1.0 Added the optional Bridge Port Data Unit (BPDU) guard
Usage The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a
Information BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack. This option
places the port into an error disable state if a BPDU appears, and a message is logged so that the
administrator can take corrective action.
Note: A port configured as an edge port, on a PVST switch, will immediately transition to
the forwarding state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as an edge port.
Consider an edge port similar to a port with a spanning-tree portfast enabled.
Root guard and loop guard cannot be enabled at the same time on a port. For example, if you configure
loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured, the following error message is
displayed:

When used in a PVST+ network, loop guard is performed per-port or per-port channel at a VLAN
level. If no BPDUs are received on a VLAN interface, the port or port-channel transitions to a
loop-inconsistent (blocking) state only for this VLAN.
Example Figure 46-7. spanning-tree pvst vlan Command Example

FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 cost 18000
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#end
!
no ip address
switchport
spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 cost 18000
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#end
FTOS#
Related
show spanning-tree pvst View PVST+ configuration
Commands

spanning-tree pvst err-disable
ces Place ports in an err-disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members an untagged
VLAN.
Syntax spanning-tree pvst err-disable cause invalid-pvst-bpdu
Defaults Enabled; ports are placed in err-disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members
of an untagged VLAN.
Command
History
Usage Some non-Dell Force10 systems that have hybrid ports participating in PVST+ transmit two kinds of
Information BPDUs: an 802.1D BPDU and an untagged PVST+ BPDU.
Dell Force10 systems do not expect PVST+ BPDU on an untagged port. If this happens, FTOS places
the port in error-disable state. This behavior might result in the network not converging. To prevent
FTOS from executing this action, use the command no spanning-tree pvst err-disable cause
invalid-pvst-bpdu.
Related
show spanning-tree pvst View the PVST+ configuration.
Commands
tc-flush-standard
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage By default FTOS implements an optimized flush mechanism for PVST+. This helps in flushing the
Information MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often) allowing for faster convergence during topology

vlan bridge-priority
ces Set the PVST+ bridge-priority for a VLAN or a set of VLANs.
Syntax vlan vlan-range bridge-priority value

To return to the default value, enter no vlan bridge-priority command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
bridge-priority value Enter the keyword bridge-priority followed by the bridge priority value
in increments of 4096.
Range: 0 to 61440
Default: 32768
Defaults 32768
Command
History
Related
vlan forward-delay Change the time interval before FTOS transitions to the forwarding state
Commands
vlan hello-time Change the time interval between BPDUs
vlan max-age Change the time interval before PVST+ refreshes
show spanning-tree pvst Display the PVST+ configuration

vlan forward-delay
ces Set the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before
Syntax vlan vlan-range forward-delay seconds

To return to the default setting, enter no vlan forward-delay command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
forward-delay Enter the keyword forward-delay followed by the time interval, in seconds, that
seconds FTOS waits before transitioning PVST+ to the forwarding state.
Default: 15 seconds
Defaults 15 seconds
Command
History
Related
vlan bridge-priority Set the bridge-priority value
Commands

vlan hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of PVST+ Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs).
Syntax vlan vlan-range hello-time seconds

To return to the default value, enter no vlan hello-time command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
hello-time seconds Enter the keyword hello-time followed by the time interval, in seconds,
between transmission of BPDUs.
Default: 2 seconds
Defaults 2 seconds
Command
History
Related
Commands

vlan max-age
ces Set the time interval for the PVST+ bridge to maintain configuration information before refreshing that
information.
Syntax vlan vlan-range max-age seconds

To return to the default, use the no vlan max-age command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
max-age seconds Enter the keyword max-age followed by the time interval, in seconds, that
FTOS waits before refreshing configuration information.
Default: 20 seconds
Defaults 20 seconds
Command
History
Related
Commands

47
Quality of Service (QoS)
Overview
FTOS commands for Quality of Service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control.
QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell Force10 platforms. Support is indicated by
the c e and s characters under command headings.
Global Configuration Commands

Per-Port QoS Commands
Policy-Based QoS Commands
Queue-Level Debugging (E-Series Only)
Global Configuration Commands

qos-rate-adjust
qos-rate-adjust
ces By default, while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, FTOS does not include the Preamble, SFD, or
the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC Destination Address to the CRC
are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations. You can optionally
include overhead fields in rate metering calculations by enabling QoS Rate Adjustment.
Syntax qos-rate-adjustment overhead-bytes
Parameters
overhead-bytes Include a specified number of bytes of packet overhead to include in rate limiting,
policing, and shaping calculations.
E-Series Range: 1-144
Defaults QoS Rate Adjustment is disabled by default, and no qos-rate-adjust is listed in the
running-configuration
Command
History
Quality of Service (QoS) | 1179

Per-Port QoS Commands
Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows users to defined QoS configuration on a per-physical-port
basis. The commands include:
dot1p-priority
rate limit
rate police
rate shape
service-class dynamic dot1p
show interfaces rate
strict-priority queue
dot1p-priority
ces Assign a value to the IEEE 802.1p bits on the traffic received by this interface.
Syntax dot1p-priority priority-value

To delete the IEEE 802.1p configuration on the interface, enter no dot1p-priority.
Parameters
priority-value Enter a value from 0 to 7.
dot1p Queue Number
0 2
1 0
2 1
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
For the C-Series and S-Series, enter a value 0, 2, 4, or 6
dot1p Queue Number
0 1
1 0
2 0
3 1
4 2
5 2
6 3
7 3
Command
History
1180 | Quality of Service (QoS)

Usage The dot1p-priority command changes the priority of incoming traffic on the interface. The system
Information places traffic marked with a priority in the correct queue and processes that traffic according to its
queue.
When you set the priority for a Port Channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the Port Channel are
configured with the same value. You cannot assign a dot1p-priority command to individual interfaces
in a Port Channel.
rate limit
e Limit the outgoing traffic rate on the selected interface.
Syntax rate limit [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On the
E-Series, Dell Force10 recommends using a value greater than or equal to 512 as
lower values does not yield accurate results.The default granularity is Megabits per
second (Mbps).
Range: 0 to 10000000
committed-rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps
Range: 0 to 10000
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB.
Range: 16 to 200000
Default: 50
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by a number to specify the peak
rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID to limit traffic to
those specific VLANs.
Range: 1 to 4094
Defaults Granularity for committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on E-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from C-Series
Usage
Information Note: Per Port rate limit and rate police is supported for Layer 2 tagged and untagged
switched traffic and for Layer 3 traffic. Per VLAN rate limit and rate police is supported on
only tagged ports with Layer 2 switched traffic.
On one interface, you can configure the rate limit or rate police command for a VLAN or you can
configure the rate limit or the rate police command for the interface. For each physical interface, you
can configure six rate limit commands specifying different VLANS.

If you receive the error message:
%Error: Specified VLANs overlap with existing config.

after configuring VLANs in the rate police command, check to see if the same VLANs are used in rate
limit command on other interfaces. To clear the problem, remove the rate limit configuration(s), and
re-configure the rate police command. After the rate police command is configured, return to the other
interfaces and re-apply the rate limit configuration.
rate police
ces Police the incoming traffic rate on the selected interface.
Syntax rate police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]] [vlan
vlan-id]
Parameters
kbps Enter this keyword to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). On
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. On the E-Series,
Dell Force10 recommends using a value greater than or equal to 512 as lower
values does not yield accurate results. The default granularity is Megabits per
second (Mbps).
Range: 0 to 10000000
committed-rate Enter a number as the bandwidth in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000
burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the burst size in KB.
Range: 16 to 200000
Default: 50
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by a number to specify the peak
rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID to police traffic to
those specific VLANs.
Range: 1 to 4094
Defaults Granularity for committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on C-Series, E-Series, and Series.
Usage
Information Note: Per Port rate limit and rate police is supported for Layer 2 tagged and untagged
switched traffic and for Layer 3 traffic. Per VLAN rate limit and rate police is supported on
only tagged ports with Layer 2 switched traffic.

C-Series and S-Series
On one interface, you can configure the rate police command for a VLAN or you can configure the rate
police command for an interface. For each physical interface, you can configure three rate police
commands specifying different VLANS.
E-Series
On one interface, you can configure the rate limit or rate police command for a VLAN or you can
configure the rate limit or the rate police command for the interface.
For each physical interface, you can configure six rate police commands specifying different VLANS.
After configuring VLANs in the rate police command, if this error message appears:
%Error: Specified VLANs overlap with existing config.

Check to see if the same VLANs are used with the rate limit command on other interfaces. To clear
the problem, remove the rate limit configuration(s), and re-configure the rate police command. After
the rate police command is configured, return to the other interfaces and re-apply the rate limit
configuration.
Related
rate-police Police traffic output as part of the designated policy.
Commands
rate shape
ces Shape the traffic output on the selected interface.
Syntax rate shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB]
Parameters
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. The default
granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps).
Range: 0-10000000
rate Enter the outgoing rate in multiples of 10 Mbps.
Range: 10 to 10000
Range: 0 to 10000
Default: 10
Defaults Granularity for rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series and on C-Series
Usage On 40-port 10G line cards, if the traffic is shaped between 64 and 1000kbs, for some values the shaped
Information rate is much less than the value configured. Do not use values in this range for 10G interfaces.

Related
rate-shape Shape traffic output as part of the designated policy.

Commands
service-class dynamic dot1p

ces Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or
on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supersedes
INTERFACE mode entries.
Syntax service-class dynamic dot1p

To return to the default setting, enter no service-class dynamic dot1p.
Defaults All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless service-class dynamic dot1p is enabled. Then the
default mapping is as follows:
Table 47-1. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping
E-Series C-Series S-Series

dot1p Queue ID Queue ID Queue ID
0 2 1 1
1 0 0 0
2 1 0 0
3 3 1 1
4 4 2 2
5 5 2 2
6 6 3 3
7 7 3 3

CONFIGURATION (C-Series and S-Series only)
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Available globally on the C-Series and S-Series so that the configuration applies to all
History
ports.
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded command to permit configuration on port channels
Usage Enter this command to honor all incoming 802.1p markings, on incoming switched traffic, on the
Information interface. By default, this facility is not enabled (that is, the 802.1p markings on incoming traffic are
not honored).
This command can be applied on both physical interfaces and port channels. When you set the
service-class dynamic for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are
automatically configured; you cannot assign the service-class dynamic command to individual
interfaces in a port channel.

On the C-Series and S-Series all traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0. If you honor
dot1p on ingress, then you can create service classes based the queueing strategy using the command
service-class dynamic dot1p from INTERFACE mode. You may apply this queuing strategy to
all interfaces by entering this command from CONFIGURATION mode.
All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless service-class dynamic dot1p is enabled on an
interface or globally.
Layer 2 or Layer 3 service policies supercede dot1p service classes.
service-class bandwidth-weight
cs Specify a minimum bandwidth for queues
Syntax service-class bandwidth-weight queue0 number queue1 number queue2 number queue3
number
Parameters
number Enter the bandwidth-weight. The value must be a power of 2.
Range 1-1024.
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage Guarantee a minimum bandwidth to different queues globally using the command service-class
Information bandwidth-weight from CONFIGURATION mode. The command is applied in the same way as the
bandwidth-weight command in an output QoS policy. The bandwidth-weight command in
QOS-POLICY-OUT mode supersedes the service-class bandwidth-weight command.
show interfaces rate

e Display information of either rate limiting or rate policing on the interface.
Syntax show interfaces [interface] rate [limit | police]
Parameters
information.
limit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword limit to view the outgoing traffic rate.
police (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword police to view the incoming traffic rate.

Command Mode EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 47-1. show interfaces rate limit Command Example

FTOS#show interfaces gigabitEthernet 1/1 rate limit
Rate limit 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Traffic Monitor 0: normal 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Out of profile yellow 23386960 red 320605113
Traffic Monitor 1: normal NA peak NA
Total: yellow 23386960 red 320605113
Table 47-2. show interfaces Command Example Fields
Field Description
Rate limit Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
peak Peak rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the peak rate
Traffic monitor 0 Traffic coming to class 0
Normal Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
Out of profile Yellow Number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Out of profile Red Number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate
Total: yellow Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Total: red Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate

Figure 47-2. show interfaces rate police Command Example
FTOS#show interfaces gigabitEthernet 1/2 rate police
Rate police 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Traffic Monitor 0: normal 300 (50) peak 800 (50)
Total: yellow 23386960 red 320605113
Table 47-3. show interfaces police Command Example Fields
Field Description
Rate police Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
Normal Committed rate (Mbs) and burst size (KB) of the committed rate
Out of profile Yellow Number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Out of profile Red Number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate
Total: yellow Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured committed rate
Total: red Total number of packets that have exceeded the configured peak rate
strict-priority queue
ces Configure a unicast queue as a strict-priority (SP) queue.
Syntax strict-priority queue unicast number
Parameters
unicast number Enter the keyword unicast followed by the queue number.

Defaults No default behavior or value
Command
History
Usage Once a unicast queue is configured as strict-priority, that particular queue, on the entire chassis, is
Information treated as strict-priority queue. Traffic for a strict priority is scheduled before any other queues are
serviced. For example, if you send 100% line rate traffic over the SP queue, it will starve all other
queues on the ports on which this traffic is flowing.
Policy-Based QoS Commands

Policy-based traffic classification is handled with class maps. These maps classify unicast traffic into
one of eight classes in E-Series and one of four classes in C-Series and S-Series. FTOS enables you to
match multiple class maps and specify multiple match criteria. Policy-based QoS is not supported on
logical interfaces, such as port-channels, VLANS, or loopbacks. The commands are:
bandwidth-percentage
bandwidth-weight
class-map
clear qos statistics
description
match ip access-group
match ip dscp
match ip precedence
match mac access-group
match mac dot1p
match mac vlan
policy-aggregate
policy-map-input
policy-map-output
qos-policy-input
qos-policy-output
queue backplane ignore-backpressure
queue egress
queue ingress
rate-limit
rate-police
rate-shape
service-policy input
service-policy output
service-queue
set

show cam layer2-qos
show cam layer3-qos
show qos class-map
show qos policy-map
show qos policy-map-input
show qos policy-map-output
show qos qos-policy-input
show qos qos-policy-output
show qos statistics
show qos wred-profile
test cam-usage
threshold
trust
wred
wred-profile
bandwidth-percentage
e Assign a percentage of weight to class/queue.
Syntax bandwidth-percentage percentage

To remove the bandwidth percentage, use the no bandwidth-percentage command.
Parameters
percentage Enter the percentage assignment of weight to class/queue.
Range: 0 to 100% (granularity 1%)
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out)
Command
History
Usage The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1%. A bandwidth percentage of 0 is allowed and will disable the
Information scheduling of that class. If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds
100%, the bandwidth percentage will automatically scale down to 100%.
Related
qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy.
Commands
bandwidth-weight
cs Assign a priority weight to a queue.
Syntax bandwidth-weight weight

To remove the bandwidth weight, use the no bandwidth-weight command.

Parameters
weight Enter the weight assignment to queue.

Range: 1 to 1024 (in increments of powers of 2: 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256,
512, or 1024)
Command
History
Usage This command provides a minimum bandwidth guarantee to traffic flows in a particular queue. The
Information minimum bandwidth is provided by scheduling packets from that queue a certain number of times
relative to scheduling packets from the other queues using the Deficit Round Robin method.
Related
Commands
class-map
ces Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of
service policies to each class.
Syntax class-map {match-all | match-any} class-map-name [layer2]
Parameters
match-all Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist.
Enter the keyword match-all to determine that the packets must meet all
the match criteria in order to be considered a member of the class.
match-any Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist.
Enter the keyword match-any to determine that the packets must meet at
least one of the match criteria in order to be considered a member of the
class.
class-map-name Enter a name of the class for the class map in a character format (32
character maximum).
layer2 Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
Default: Layer 3
Defaults Layer 3
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Class-map names can be 32 characters. layer2 available on C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for Layer 2
Usage Packets arriving at the input interface are checked against the match criteria, configured using this
Information command, to determine if the packet belongs to that class. This command accesses the CLASS-MAP
mode, where the configuration commands include match ip and match mac options.

Related
ip access-list extended Configure an extended IP ACL.
Commands
ip access-list standard Configure a standard IP ACL.
match ip access-group Configure the match criteria based on the access control list (ACL)
match ip precedence Identify IP precedence values as match criteria
match ip dscp Configure the match criteria based on the DSCP value
match mac access-group Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on the contents of the
designated MAC ACL.
match mac dot1p Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on a dot1p value.
match mac vlan Configure a match criterion for a class map based on VLAN ID.
service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
show qos class-map View the current class map information.
clear qos statistics

ces Clears Matched Packets, Matched Bytes, and Dropped Packets. For TeraScale, clears Matched
Packets, Matched Bytes, Queued Packets, Queued Bytes, and Dropped Packets.
Syntax clear qos statistics interface-name.
Parameters
interface-name Enter one of the following keywords:
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage E-Series Only Behavior

Information
If a Policy QoS is applied on an interface when clear qos statistics is issued, it will clear the egress
counters in show queue statistics and vice versa. This behavior is due to the values being read
from the same hardware registers.
The clear qos statistics command clears both the queued and matched byte and packet counters if
the queued counters incremented based on classification of packets to the queues because of
policy-based QoS. If the queued counters were incremented because of some other reason and do not
reflect a matching QoS entry in CAM, then this command clears the matched byte and packet counters
only.
Related
show qos statistics Display qos statistics.
Commands

match ip access-group
ces Configure match criteria for a class map, based on the access control list (ACL).
Syntax match ip access-group access-group-name [set-ip-dscp value]

To remove ACL match criteria from a class map, enter no match ip access-group
access-group-name [set-ip-dscp value] command.
Parameters
access-group-name Enter the ACL name whose contents are used as the match criteria in
determining if packets belong to the class specified by class-map.
set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword set-ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP
value. The matched traffic will be marked with the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (config-class-map)
Command
Version 7.7.1.0 Added DSCP Marking option support on S-Series
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for DSCP Marking option
Usage You must enter the class-map command in order to access this command. Once the class map is
Information identified, you can configure the match criteria. For class-map match-any, a maximum of five
ACL match criteria are allowed. For class-map match-all, only one ACL match criteria is allowed.
Related
class-map Identify the class map.
Commands
description
ces Add a description to the selected policy map or QOS policy.
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the policies (80 characters maximum).
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output; conf-qos-policy-in and

conf-qos-policy-out; wred)
Command
History

Related
policy-map-input Create an input policy map.
Commands
policy-map-output Create an output policy map.
qos-policy-input Create an input QOS-policy on the router.
qos-policy-output Create an output QOS-policy on the router.
wred-profile Create a WRED profile.
match ip dscp
ces Use a DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) value as a match criteria.
Syntax match ip dscp dscp-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value]

To remove a DSCP value as a match criteria, enter no match ip dscp dscp-list [[multicast]
set-ip-dscp value] command.
Parameters
dscp-list Enter the IP DSCP value(s) that is to be the match criteria. Separate values by
commasno spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a hyphen
(1-3).
Range: 0 to 63
multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to match against multicast traffic.
Note: This option is not supported on C-Series or S-Series.
set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword set-ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP value.
The matched traffic will be marked with the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
Note: This option is not supported on S-Series.
Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (config-class-map)
Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added keyword multicast.
Added DSCP Marking option support on S-Series
Added support for DSCP Marking option
Information identified, you can configure the match criteria.
The match ip dscp and match ip precedence commands are mutually exclusive.
Up to 64 IP DSCP values can be matched in one match statement. For example, to indicate IP DCSP
values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7, enter either the command match ip dscp 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or match ip dscp
0-7.
Note: Only one of the IP DSCP values must be a successful match criterion, not all of the
specified IP DSCP values need to match.

Related

Commands
match ip precedence
ces Use IP precedence values as a match criteria.
Syntax match ip precedence ip-precedence-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value]

To remove IP precedence as a match criteria, enter no match ip precedence ip-precedence-list
[[multicast] set-ip-dscp value] command.
Parameters
ip-precedence-list Enter the IP precedence value(s) as the match criteria. Separate values by
commasno spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a
hyphen (1-3).
Range: 0 to 7
multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to match against multicast
traffic.
Note: This option is not supported on C-Series or S-Series.
set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword set-ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP
value. The matched traffic will be marked with the DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
Note: This option is not supported on S-Series.
Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (conf-class-map)
Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added keyword multicast.
Added DSCP marking option support for S-Series
Added support for DSCP Marking option
The match ip precedence command and the match ip dscp command are mutually exclusive.
Up to eight precedence values can be matched in one match statement. For example, to indicate the IP
precedence values 0 1 2 3 enter either the command match ip precedence 0-3 or match ip
precedence 0,1,2,3.
Note: Only one of the IP precedence values must be a successful match criterion, not all of
the specified IP precedence values need to match.
Related
Commands

match mac access-group
ces Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL.
Syntax match mac access-group {mac-acl-name}
Parameters
mac-acl-name Enter a MAC ACL name. Its contents will be used as the match criteria in the class map.
Command Modes CLASS-MAP
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Available on the C-Series and S-Series.
History
Related
Commands
match mac dot1p

ces Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on a dot1p value.
Syntax match mac dot1p {dot1p-list}
Parameters
dot1p-list Enter a dot1p value.
Range: 07
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Available on the C-Series and S-Series.
History
Related
Commands

match mac vlan
ces Configure a match criterion for a class map based on a VLAN ID.
Syntax match mac vlan {vlan-id | vlan-list | vlan-range | mixed-vlan-list}
Parameters
vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. Valid VLAN IDs are from 1 to 4094
vlan-list S25 and S50 only: Enter two or more VLAN IDs separated by a comma:
vlan-id,vlan-id,vlan-id,...
For example: match mac vlan 2,4,6
There is no space between VLAN IDs and the comma.
vlan-range S25 and S50 only: Enter a range VLAN IDs separated by a dash (-):
vlan-id-vlan-id
For example: match mac vlan 3-5
There is no space between VLAN IDs and the comma.
mixed-vlan-list S25 and S50 only: Enter single VLAN IDs and VLAN ranges in any order:
vlan-id,vlan-range,vlan-id...
For example: match mac vlan 1,3-5,8
Defaults None
Command
Version 8.4.2.4 Support for multiple VLAN IDs as match criteria was introduced on the S25 and S50.
History
Version 8.2.0.1 Introduced.
Usage You must first enter the class-map command in order to access this command. In a class map, you
Information can match and classify traffic using a VLAN ID.
Note: The use of multiple VLAN IDs (VLAN list or range) as match criteria in a class map is
supported only on the S25 and S50.
Related
class-map Create/access a class map.
Commands

policy-aggregate
ces Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps. An aggregate QoS policy is
part of the policy map (input/output) applied on an interface.
Syntax policy-aggregate qos-policy-name

To remove a policy aggregate configuration, use no policy-aggregate qos-policy-name command.
Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter the name of the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum)
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output)
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
History
Usage C-Series and S-Series

Information
Aggregate input/output QoS policy applies to all the port ingoing/outgoing traffic. Aggregate input/
output QoS policy can co-exist with per queue input/output QoS policies.
1. If only aggregate input QoS policy exists, input traffic conditioning configurations (rate-police)
will apply. Any marking configurations in aggregate input QoS policy will be ignored.
2. If aggregate input QoS policy and per class input QoS policy co-exist, then aggregate input QoS
policy will preempt per class input QoS policy on input traffic conditioning (rate-police). In other
words, if rate police configuration exists in aggregate QoS policy, the rate police configurations in
per class QoS are ignored. Marking configurations in per class input QoS policy still apply to each
queue.
E-Series
Aggregate input/output QoS policy applies to all the port ingoing/outgoing traffic. Aggregate input/
output QoS policy can co-exist with per queue input/output QoS policies.
1. If only an aggregate input QoS policy exists, input traffic conditioning configurations (rate-police)
will apply. Any marking configurations in the aggregate input QoS policy will be ignored.
2. If an aggregate input QoS policy and a per-class input QoS policy co-exist, then the aggregate
input QoS policy will preempt the per-class input QoS policy on input traffic conditioning
(rate-police). In other words, if a rate police configuration exists in the aggregate QoS policy, the
rate police configurations in the per-class QoS are ignored. Marking configurations in the per-class
input QoS policy still apply to each queue.
3. If only an aggregate output QoS policy exists, egress traffic conditioning configurations (rate-limit
and rate-shape) in the aggregate output QoS policy will apply. Scheduling and queuing configura-
tions in the aggregate output QoS policy (if existing) are ignored. Each queue will use default
scheduling and queuing configuration (Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) and Band-
width).
4. If the aggregate output QoS policy and per-queue output QoS policy co-exist, the aggregate output
QoS policy will preempt a per-queue output QoS policy on egress traffic conditioning (rate-limit).
In other words, if a rate limit configuration exists in the aggregate output QoS policy, the rate limit

configurations in per-queue output QoS policies are ignored. Scheduling and queuing configura-
tions (WRED and Bandwidth) in the per-queue output QoS policy still apply to each queue.
Related
policy-map-input Create an input policy map
Commands
policy-map-output Create an output policy map (E-Series Only)
policy-map-input
ces Create an input policy map.
Syntax policy-map-input policy-map-name [layer2]

To remove an input policy map, use the no policy-map-input policy-map-name [layer2]
command.
Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum).
layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
Default: Layer 3
Defaults Layer 3
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to add support for Layer 2
Usage Input policy map is used to classify incoming traffic to different flows using class-map, QoS policy, or
Information simply using incoming packets DSCP. This command enables policy-map-input configuration mode
(conf-policy-map-in).
Related
Commands
policy-aggregate Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps.
service-policy input Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.
policy-map-output
ces Create an output policy map.
Syntax policy-map-output policy-map-name

To remove a policy map, use the no policy-map-output policy-map-name command.

Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (16 characters
maximum).
Command
History
Usage Output policy map is used to assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy. This command enables
Information the policy-map-output configuration mode (conf-policy-map-out).
Related
Commands
policy-aggregate Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps.
service-policy output Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.
qos-policy-input
ces Create a QoS input policy on the router.
Syntax qos-policy-input qos-policy-name [layer2]

To remove an existing input QoS policy from the router, use no qos-policy-input qos-policy-name
[layer2] command.
Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter your input QoS policy name in character format (32 character
maximum).
Default: Layer 3
Defaults Layer 3
Command
History
Usage Use this command to specify the name of the input QoS policy. Once input policy is specified,
Information rate-police can be defined. This command enables the qos-policy-input configuration mode
(conf-qos-policy-in).

When changing a service-queue configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and
re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched
Packets value shown in the show qos statistics command is reset.
Note: On ExaScale, FTOS cannot classify IGMP packets on a Layer 2 interface using Layer 3
policy map. The packets always take the default queue, Queue 0, and cannot be rate-policed.
Related
rate-police Incoming traffic policing function
Commands
qos-policy-output
ces Create a QoS output policy.
Syntax qos-policy-output qos-policy-name

To remove an existing output QoS policy, use no qos-policy-output qos-policy-name command.
Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter your output QoS policy name in character format (32 character
maximum).
Command
History
Usage Use this command to specify the name of the output QoS policy. Once output policy is specified,
Information rate-limit, bandwidth-percentage, and WRED can be defined. This command enables the
qos-policy-output configuration mode(conf-qos-policy-out).
When changing a service-queue configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and
re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched
Packets value shown in the show qos statistics command is reset.
Related
Commands rate-limit Outgoing traffic rate-limit functionality
bandwidth-percentage Assign weight to class/queue percentage
bandwidth-weight Assign a priority weight to a queue.
wred Assign yellow or green drop precedence
queue backplane ignore-backpressure

e Reduce egress pressure by ignoring the ingress backpressure
Syntax queue backplane ignore-backpressure

To return to the default, use the no queue backplane ignore-backpressure command.

Command
History
queue egress
e Assign a WRED Curve to all eight egress Multicast queues or designate the percentage for the
Multicast bandwidth queue.
Syntax queue egress multicast linecard {slot number port-set number | all} [wred-profile name |
multicast-bandwidth percentage]
To return to the default, use the no queue egress multicast linecard {slot number port-set
number | all} [wred-profile name | multicast-bandwidth percentage] command.
Parameters
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a
E300.
port-set number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line cards port pipe.
Range: 0 or 1
all Enter the keyword all to apply to all line cards.
wred-profile name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by your WRED
profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the
pre-defined WRED profile names.
Pre-defined Profiles:
wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_g
multicast-bandwidth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast-bandwidth followed by the
percentage bandwidth percentage.
Range: 0 to 100%
Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Added support for multicast-bandwidth
History
Usage This command does not uniquely identify a queue, but rather identifies only a set of queues. The
Information WRED curve is applied to all eight egress Multicast queues.
Important Points to Remembermulticast-bandwidth option

A unique Multicast Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) setting can be applied only on a per port-pipe
basis. The minimum percentage of the multicast bandwidth assigned to any of the ports in the
port-pipe will take effect for the entire port-pipe.
If the percentage of multicast bandwidth is 0, control traffic going through multicast queues are
dropped.

The no form of the command without multicast-bandwidth and wred-profile, will remove
both the wred-profile and multicast-bandwidth configuration.

On 10 Gigabit ports only, the multicast bandwidth option will work only if the total unicast
bandwidth is more than the multicast bandwidth.
If strict priority is applied along with multicast-bandwidth, the effect of strict priority is on all
ports where unicast and multicast bandwidth are applied.
When multicast bandwidth is assigned along with unicast bandwidth, first multicast bandwidth
will be reserved for that port, then the remaining unicast bandwidth configured is adjusted
according to the bandwidth available after reserving for multicast bandwidth.
Related
Commands show queue statistics egress Display the egress queue statistics
queue ingress
e Assign a WRED Curve to all eight ingress Multicast queues or designate the percentage for the
Multicast bandwidth queue.
Syntax queue ingress multicast {linecard slot number port-set number | all} [wred-profile name]
To return to the default, use the no queue ingress multicast {linecard slot number port-set
number | all} [wred-profile name] command.
Parameters
E300.
Range: 0 or 1
all Enter the keyword all to apply to all line cards.
wred-profile name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by your WRED
profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the
pre-defined WRED profile names.
Command
History
Usage This command does not uniquely identify a queue, but rather identifies only a set of queues. The
Information WRED Curve is applied to all eight ingress Multicast queues.
Note: The multicast-bandwidth option is not supported on queue ingress. If you attempt to
use the multicast-bandwidth option, the following reject error message is generated:
% Error:Bandwidth-percent is not allowed for ingress
multicast

Related
Commands show queue statistics ingress Display the ingress queue statistics
rate-limit
e Specify the rate-limit functionality on outgoing traffic as part of the selected policy.
Syntax rate-limit [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]]
Parameters
the E-Series, Dell Force10 recommends using a value greater than or equal
to 512 as lower values does not yield accurate results. The default
Range: 0 to 10000000
committed-rate Enter the committed rate in Mbps.
Range: 0 to 10000 Mbps
Range: 16 to 200000 KB
Default: 50 KB
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by the peak rate in Mbps.
Default: Same as designated for committed-rate
Defaults Burst size is 50 KB. peak-rate is by default the same as committed-rate. Granularity for
committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.
Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT
Command
History
Version 8.2.1.0 Added kbps option on E-Series.
Version 7.7.1.0 Removed from C-Series
Related
rate limit Specify rate-limit functionality on the selected interface.
Commands

rate-police
ces Specify the policing functionality on incoming traffic.
Syntax rate-police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burst-KB]]
Parameters
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. On the E-Series,
Dell Force10 recommends using a value greater than or equal to 512 as lower values
does not yield accurate results. The default granularity is Megabits per second
(Mbps).
Range: 0 to 10000000
committed-rate Enter the committed rate in Mbps.
Range: 16 to 200000 KB
Default: 50 KB
peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak followed by the peak rate in Mbps.
Default: Same as designated for committed-rate
Defaults Burst size is 50 KB. peak-rate is by default the same as committed-rate. Granularity for
committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.
Command Modes QOS-POLICY-IN
Command
History
Related
rate police Specify traffic policing on the selected interface.
Commands
qos-policy-input Create a QoS output policy.
rate-shape
ces Shape traffic output as part of the designated policy.
Syntax rate-shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB]
Parameters
C-Series and S-Series make the following value a multiple of 64. The default
Range: 0-10000000

rate Enter the outgoing rate in multiples of 10 Mbps.
Range: 10 to 10000
Range: 0 to 10000
Default: 10
Defaults Burst size is 10 KB. Granularity for rate is Mbps unless the kbps option is used.
Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT
Command
History
Usage rate-shape can be applied only as an aggregate policy. If it is applied as a class-based policy, then
Information rate-shape will not take effect.
On 40-port 10G line cards, if the traffic is shaped between 64 and 1000kbs, for some values the shaped
rate is much less than the value configured. Do not use values in this range for 10G interfaces.
Related
rate shape Shape the traffic output of the selected interface.
Commands
service-policy input
ces Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.
Syntax service-policy input policy-map-name [layer2]

To remove the input policy map from the interface, use the no service-policy input
policy-map-name [layer2] command.
Parameters
maximum). You can identify an existing policy map or name one that
does not yet exist.
Default: Layer 3
Defaults Layer 3
Command
History

Usage A single policy-map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those
Information interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified.
Note: The service-policy commands are not allowed on a port channel.

The service-policy input policy-map-name command and the service-class dynamic
dot1p command are not allowed simultaneously on an interface. However, the service-policy
input command (without the policy-map-name option) and the service-class dynamic
dot1p command are allowed on an interface.
Related
policy-map-input Create an input policy map.
Commands
service-policy output
ces Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.
Syntax service-policy output policy-map-name

To remove the output policy map from the interface, use the no service-policy output
policy-map-name command.
Parameters
maximum). You can identify an existing policy map or name one that
does not yet exist.
Command
History
Usage A single policy-map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those
Information interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified.
Related
policy-map-output Create an output policy map.
Commands
service-queue
ces Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
Syntax service-queue queue-id [class-map class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name]

To remove the queue assignment, use the no service-queue queue-id [class-map
class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name] command.

Parameters
queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue.
Range: 0 to 7 on E-Series (eight queues per interface), 0-3 on C-Series and
S-Series (four queues per interface; four queues are reserved for control
traffic.)
class-map (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword class-map followed by the class map
class-map-name name assigned to the queue in character format (16 character maximum).
Note: This option is available under policy-map-input only.
qos-policy (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword qos-policy followed by the QoS policy
qos-policy-name name assigned to the queue in text format (16 characters maximum). This
specifies the input QoS policy assigned to the queue under policy-map-input
and output QoS policy under policy-map-output context.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in and conf-policy-map-out)
Command
History
Usage There are eight (8) queues per interface on the E-Series and four (4) queues per interface on the
Information C-Series and S-Series. This command assigns a class map or QoS policy to different queues.
Related
Commands
service-policy input Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.
service-policy output Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.
set
ces Mark outgoing traffic with a Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) or dot1p value.
Syntax set {ip-dscp value | mac-dot1p value}
Parameters
ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip-dscp followed by the IP DSCP value.
Range: 0 to 63
mac-dot1p value Enter the keyword mac-dot1p followed by the dot1p value.
Range: 0 to 7
On the C-Series and S-Series allowed values are:0,2,4,6
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-in)
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 mac-dot1p available on the C-Series and S-Series
History

Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for mac-dot1p

Usage C-Series and S-Series

Information
Once the IP DSCP bit is set, other QoS services can then operate on the bit settings.
E-Series
Once the IP DSCP bit is set, other QoS services can then operate on the bit settings. WRED (Weighted
Random Early Detection) ensures that high-precedence traffic has lower loss rates than other traffic
during times of congestion.
show cam layer2-qos

e Display the Layer 2 QoS CAM entries.
Syntax show cam layer2-qos {[linecard number port-set number] | [interface interface]}
[summary]
Parameters
E300.
Range: 0 or 1
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the keywords below and
port information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display only the total
number of CAM entries.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History

Example Figure 47-3. show cam layer2-qos interface Command Output
FTOS#show cam layer2-qos interface gigabitethernet 2/0
Cam Port Dot1p Proto SrcMac SrcMask DstMac DstMask Dot1p DSCP Queue
Index Marking Marking
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------
01817 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:cc:cc 00:00:00:00:ff:ff 00:00:00:00:dd:dd 00:00:00:00:ff:ff - - 7
01818 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:c0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 00:00:00:00:00:d0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 - 45 5
01819 0 4 0 00:00:00:a0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 00:00:00:b0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 4 - 4
01820 0 - 0x2000 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:b0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff - - 1
02047 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - 0
FTOS#
Example Figure 47-4. show cam layer2-qos linecard Command Output
FTOS#show cam layer2-qos linecard 2 port-set 0

Cam Port Dot1p Proto SrcMac SrcMask DstMac DstMask Dot1p DSCP Queue
Index Marking Marking
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=--
01817 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:cc:cc 00:00:00:00:ff:ff 00:00:00:00:dd:dd 00:00:00:00:ff:ff - - 7
01818 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:c0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 00:00:00:00:00:d0 00:00:00:00:00:f0 - 45 5
01819 0 4 0 00:00:00:a0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 00:00:00:b0:00:00 00:00:00:ff:00:00 4 - 4
01820 0 - 0x2000 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:b0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff - - 1
02047 0 - 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - 0
FTOS#
show cam layer3-qos

e Display the Layer 3 QoS CAM entries.
Syntax show cam layer3-qos {[linecard number port-set number] | [interface interface]}
[summary]
Parameters
E300.
Range: 0 or 1
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by one of the keywords below and
port information.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display only the total
number of CAM entries.
Command Modes EXEC

Command

History
Example Figure 47-5. show cam layer3-qos linecard interface Command Output
FTOS#sh cam layer3-qos interface gigabitethernet 2/1
Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue
Index Flag Port Port Marking
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
23488 1 0 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - TRUST-DSCP
FTOS#
In these figures outputs, note that:

The entry TRUST-DSCP in the Queue column indicates that the trust diffserv is configured on the
policy-map.
A hyphen (-) entry in the DSCP Marking column indicates that there is no DSCP marking.
In the Proto column (Protocol), IP, ICMP, UDP, and TCP strings are displayed. For other
protocols, the corresponding protocol number is displayed.
Example Figure 47-6. show cam layer3-qos linecard port-set Command Output
FTOS#show cam layer3-qos linecard 13 port-set 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24511 1 0 TCP 0x5 2 5 1.0.0.1/24 2.0.0.2/24 - TRUST-DSCP
24512 1 0 UDP 0x2 2 5 8.0.0.8/24 8.0.0.8/24 23 3
FTOS#
Example Figure 47-7. show cam layer3-qos linecard interface Command without Trust Output
FTOS#sh cam layer3-qos interface gigabitethernet 2/1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------
23488 1 56 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 7
23489 1 48 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 6
23490 1 40 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 5
23491 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 10.1.1.1/32 20.1.1.1/32 - 0
23492 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 10.1.1.1/32 20.1.1.2/32 - 0
24511 1 0 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 - 0
FTOS#
Example Figure 47-8. show cam layer3-qos summary Command Output
FTOS#show cam layer3-qos linecard 13 port-set 0 summary
Total number of CAM entries for Port-Set 0 is 100

FTOS#

show qos class-map
ces View the current class map information.
Syntax show qos class-map [class-name]
Parameters
class-name (Optional) Enter the name of a configured class map.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 47-9. show qos class-map Command Output

FTOS#show qos class-map
Class-map match-any CM
Match ip access-group ACL
Related
class-map Identify the class map
Commands

show qos policy-map
ces View the QoS policy map information.
Syntax show qos policy-map {summary [interface] | detail [interface]}
Parameters
summary interface To view a policy map interface summary, enter the keyword summary and
optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
information.
detail interface To view a policy map interface in detail, enter the keyword detail and optionally
one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information:
information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series only: Added Trust IPv6 diffserv
Example 1 Figure 47-10. show qos policy-map detail (IPv4) Command Output
FTOS#show qos policy-map detail gigabitethernet 0/0
Policy-map-input policy
Trust diffserv
Queue# Class-map-name Qos-policy-name
0 - q0
1 CM1 q1
2 CM2 q2
3 CM3 q3
4 CM4 q4
5 CM5 q5
6 CM6 q6
7 CM7 q7
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 47-11. show qos policy-map detail (IPv6) Command Output (E-Series only)
FTOS# show qos policy-map detail gigabitethernet 0/0
Policy-map-input pmap1
Trust ipv6-diffserv
0 c0 q0
1 c1 q1
2 c2 q2
3 c3 q3
4 c4 q4
5 c5 -
6 c6 q6
7 c7 q7
FTOS#
Example 3 Figure 47-12. show qos policy-map summary (IPv4) Command Output
FTOS# show qos policy-map summary
Interface policy-map-input policy-map-output

Gi 4/1 PM1 -
Gi 4/2 PM2 PMOut
FTOS#
show qos policy-map-input

ces View the input QoS policy map details.
Syntax show qos policy-map-input [policy-map-name] [class class-map-name] [qos-policy-input

qos-policy-name]
Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the policy map name.
class class-map-name Enter the keyword class followed by the class map name.
qos-policy-input Enter the keyword qos-policy-input followed by the QoS policy name.
qos-policy-name
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added Trust IPv6 diffserv

Example 1 Figure 47-13. show qos policy-map-input (IPv4) Command Output
FTOS#show qos policy-map-input
Policy-map-input PolicyMapInput
Aggregate Qos-policy-name AggPolicyIn
0 ClassMap1 qosPolicyInput
FTOS#
Example 2 Figure 47-14. show qos policy-map-input (IPv6) Command Output

FTOS# show qos policy-map-input
Policy-map-input pmap1
Trust ipv6-diffserv
0 c0 q0
1 c1 q1
2 c2 q2
3 c3 q3
4 c4 q4
5 c5 -
6 c6 q6
7 c7 q7
FTOS#
show qos policy-map-output

ces View the output QoS policy map details.
Syntax show qos policy-map-output [policy-map-name] [qos-policy-output qos-policy-name]
Parameters
policy-map-name Enter the policy map name.
qos-policy-output qos-policy-name Enter the keyword qos-policy-output followed by the
QoS policy name.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 47-15. show qos policy-map-output Command Output

FTOS#show qos policy-map-output
Policy-map-output PolicyMapOutput
Aggregate Qos-policy-name AggPolicyOut
Queue# Qos-policy-name
0 qosPolicyOutput
FTOS#

show qos qos-policy-input
ces View the input QoS policy details.
Syntax show qos qos-policy-input [qos-policy-name]
Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 47-16. show qos qos-policy-input Command Output

FTOS#show qos qos-policy-input
Qos-policy-input QosInput
Rate-police 100 50 peak 100 50
Dscp 32
FTOS#
show qos qos-policy-output

ces View the output QoS policy details.
Syntax show qos qos-policy-output [qos-policy-name]
Parameters
qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 47-17. show qos qos-policy-output Command Output

FTOS#show qos qos-policy-output
Qos-policy-output qosOut
Rate-limit 50 50 peak 50 50
Wred yellow 1
Wred green 1

show qos statistics
ces View QoS statistics.
Syntax show qos statistics {wred-profile [interface]} | [interface]
Parameters
wred-profile interface PlatformE-Series Only: Enter the keyword wred-profile and
optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number
information:
port information.
On the C-Series and E-Series, For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the
keyword FastEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
port information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The show qos statistics command can be used on the C-Series, but the wred-profile keyword
Information must be omitted in the syntax. The show qos statistics output differs from the ED and EE series line
cards and the EF series line cards. The QoS statistics for the EF series generates two extra columns,
Queued Pkts and Dropped Pkts, see Example 2.
Note: The show qos statistics command displays Matched Packets and Matched Bytes.
The show queue statistics egress command (E-Series only) displays Queued Packets and
Queued Bytes. The following example explains how these two displays relate to each other.
9000 byte size packets are sent from Interface A to Interface B.
The Matched Packets on Interface A are equal to the Queued Packets on Interface B.
Matched bytes on Interface A = matched packets *9000
Queued bytes on Interface B = queued packets *(9020)Each packet has an additional
header of 20 bytes.

Example 1 Figure 47-18. show qos statistics Command Output (ED and EE Series of E-Series)
FTOS#show qos statistics
Interface Gi 0/0
Queue# Queued Bytes Matched Pkts Matched Bytes
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
Interface Gi 0/1
Queue# Queued Bytes Matched Pkts Matched Bytes
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
Table 47-4. show qos statistics Command Example Fields (ED and EE Series)
Field Description
Queue # Queue Number
Queued Bytes Snapshot of the byte count in that queue.
Matched Pkts The number of packets that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched packet counters are not
incremented in this field.
Matched Bytes The number of bytes that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched byte counters are not
incremented in this field.
Example 2 Figure 47-19. show qos statistics Command Output (EF Series of E-Series)
FTOS#show qos statistics gig 0/1
Queue# Queued Queued Matched Matched Dropped

Bytes Pkts Pkts Bytes Pkts
(Cumulative) (Cumulative)
0 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
1 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
2 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
3 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
4 0 0 1883725 1883725000 0
5 0 0 1883724 1883724000 0
6 0 0 1883720 1883720000 0
7 0 0 1883720 1883720000 0
FTOS#
Table 47-5. show qos statistics Command Example Fields (EF Series)
Field Description
Queued Bytes Cumulative byte count in that queue
Queued Pkts Cumulative packet count in that queue.

Table 47-5. show qos statistics Command Example Fields (EF Series) (continued)
Field Description
Matched Pkts The number of packets that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched packet counters are not incremented in
this field.
Matched Bytes The number of bytes that matched the class-map criteria.
Note: When trust is configured, matched byte counters are not incremented in this
field.
Dropped Pkts The total of the number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile.
Example 3 Figure 47-20. show qos statistics wred-profile Command Output (ED, EE, and EF
Series)
FTOS#show qos statistics wred-profile
Interface Gi 5/11
Queue# Drop-statistic WRED-name Dropped Pkts
0 Green WRED1 51623

Yellow WRED2 51300
Out of Profile 0
1 Green WRED1 52082
Yellow WRED2 51004
Out of Profile 0
2 Green WRED1 50567
Yellow WRED2 49965
Out of Profile 0
3 Green WRED1 50477
Yellow WRED2 49815
Out of Profile 0
4 Green WRED1 50695
Yellow WRED2 49476
Out of Profile 0
5 Green WRED1 50245
Yellow WRED2 49535
Out of Profile 0
6 Green WRED1 50033
Yellow WRED2 49595
Out of Profile 0
7 Green WRED1 50474
Yellow WRED2 49522
Out of Profile 0
FTOS#
Table 47-6. show qos statistics wred-profile Command Example Fields (ED, EE, and EF
Series)
Field Description
Drop-statistic Drop statistics for green, yellow and out-of-profile packets
WRED-name WRED profile name
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile
Related
clear qos statistics Clears counters as shown in show qos statistics
Commands

show qos wred-profile
e View the WRED profile details.
Syntax show qos wred-profile wred-profile-name
Parameters
wred-profile-name Enter the WRED profile name to view the profile details.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 47-21. show qos wred-profile Command Output

FTOS#show qos wred-profile
Wred-profile-name min-threshold max-threshold

wred_drop 0 0
wred_ge_y 1024 2048
wred_ge_g 2048 4096
wred_teng_y 4096 8192
wred_teng_g 8192 16384
WRED1 2000 7000
test cam-usage
ces Check the Input Policy Map configuration for the CAM usage.
Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map linecard {[number port-set portpipe
number] | [all]}
Parameters
policy-map Enter the policy map name.
linecard number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card
slot number.
port-set portpipe number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the line cards port pipe
number.
Range: 0 or 1
linecard all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords linecard all to indicate all line
cards.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History

Example Figure 47-22. test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map linecard all Example
Command
FTOS# test cam-usage service-policy input pmap_l2 linecard all
For a L2 Input Policy Map pmap_l2, the output must be as follows,
Linecard | Portpipe | CAM Partition | Available CAM | Estimated CAM | Status

| | | | per Port | (Allowed ports)
0 0 L2ACL 500 200 Allowed (2)

0 1 L2ACL 100 200 Exception
1 0 L2ACL 1000 200 Allowed (5)
1 1 L2ACL 0 200 Exception

13 1 L2ACL 400 200 Allowed (2)
FTOS#
Note: In a Layer 2 Policy Map, IPv4/IPv6 rules are not allowed and hence the output
contains only L2ACL CAM partition entries.
Table 47-7. test cam-usage Command Example Fields
Field Description
Linecard Indicates the line card slot number.
Portpipe Indicates the portpipe number.
CAM Partition The CAM space where the rules are added.
Available CAM Indicates the free CAM space, in the partition, for the classification rules.
Note: The CAM entries reserved for the default rules are not
included in the Available CAM column; free entries, from the
default rules space, can not be used as a policy map for the
classification rules.
Estimated CAM per Port Indicates the number of free CAM entries required (for the classification
rules) to apply the input policy map on a single interface.
Note: The CAM entries for the default rule are not included in this
column; a CAM entry for the default rule is always dedicated to a
port and is always available for that interface.
Status (Allowed ports) Indicates if the input policy map configuration on an interface belonging
to a line card/port-pipe is successfulAllowed (n)or not successful
Exception.
The allowed number (n) indicates the number of ports in that port-pipe on
which the Policy Map can be applied successfully.
Usage This features allows you to determine if the CAM has enough space available before applying the
Information configuration on an interface.
An input policy map with both Trust and Class-map configuration, the Class-map rules are ignored and
only the Trust rule is programmed in the CAM. In such an instance, the Estimated CAM output column
will contain the size of the CAM space required for the Trust rule and not the Class-map rule.

threshold
e Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the configured WRED profiles.
Syntax threshold min number max number
To remove the threshold values, use the no threshold min number max number command.
Parameters
min number Enter the keyword min followed by the minimum threshold number for the
WRED profile.
Range: 1024 to 77824 KB
max number Enter the keyword max followed by the maximum threshold number for the
WRED profile.
Range: 1024 to 77824 KB
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (config-wred)
Command
History
Usage Use this command to configure minimum and maximum threshold values for user defined profiles.
Information Additionally, use this command to modify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the
pre-defined WRED profiles. If you delete threshold values of the pre-defined WRED profiles, the
profiles will revert to their original default values.
Table 47-8. Pre-defined WRED Profile Threshold Values

Pre-defined WRED Profile Name Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold
wred_drop 0 0
wred_ge_y 1024 2048
wred_ge_g 2048 4096
wred_teng_y 4096 8192
wred_teng_g 8192 16384
Related
wred-profile Create a WRED profile.
Commands
trust
ces Specify dynamic classification (DSCP) or dot1p to trust.
Syntax trust {diffserv [fallback]| dot1p [fallback]| ipv6-diffserv}
Parameters
diffserv Enter the keyword diffserv to specify trust of DSCP markings.
dot1p Enter the keyword dot1p to specify trust dot1p configuration.

fallback Enter this keyword to classify packets according to their DSCP value as a
secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps.
ipv6-diffserv On E-Series only, enter the keyword ipv6-diffserv to specify trust configuration of
IPv6 DSCP.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in)
Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 fallback available on the E-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 dot1p available on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version 7.4.1.0 Expanded to add support for dot1p and IPv6 DSCP
Usage When trust is configured, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the show qos
Information statistics command.
The trust diffserv feature is not supported on E-Series ExaScale when an IPv6 microcode is enabled.
Dynamic mapping honors packets marked according to the standard definitions of DSCP. The default
mapping table is detailed in the following table.
Table 47-9. Standard Default DSCP Mapping Table

DSCP/CP DSCP Definition Traditional IP Precedence E-Series C-Series and DSCP/CP
hex range Internal Queue S-Series Internal decimal
(XXX) ID Queue ID
111XXX Network Control 7 3

4863
110XXX Internetwork Control 6 3
101XXX EF (Expedited CRITIC/ECP 5 2
Forwarding)
3247
100XXX AF4 (Assured Flash Override 4 2
Forwarding)
011XXX AF3 Flash 3 1
1631
010XXX AF2 Immediate 2 1
001XXX AF1 Priority 1 0
015
000XXX BE (Best Effort) Best Effort 0 0

wred
e Designate the WRED profile to yellow or green traffic.
Syntax wred {yellow | green} profile-name

To remove the WRED drop precedence, use the no wred {yellow | green} [profile-name]
command.
Parameters
yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. DSCP value of xxx110 and
xxx100 maps to yellow.
Enter the keyword green for green traffic. DSCP value of xxx010 maps to
green.
profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character
maximum). Or use one of the 5 pre-defined WRED profile names.
wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Profile name character limit increased from 16 to 32.
History
Usage Use this command to assign drop precedence to green or yellow traffic. If there is no honoring enabled
Information on the input, all the traffic defaults to green drop precedence.
Related
wred-profile Create a WRED profile and name that profile
Commands
trust Define the dynamic classification to trust DSCP
wred-profile
e Create a WRED profile and name that profile.
Syntax wred-profile wred-profile-name

To remove an existing WRED profile, use the no wred-profile command.
Parameters
wred-profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or
use one of the pre-defined WRED profile names. You can configure up to 26
WRED profiles plus the 5 pre-defined profiles, for a total of 31 WRED profiles.
Defaults The five pre-defined WRED profiles. When a new profile is configured, the minimum and maximum
threshold defaults to predefined wred_ge_g values

Command

History
Usage Use the default pre-defined profiles or configure your own profile. You can not delete the pre-defined
Information profiles or their default values. This command enables the WRED configuration mode(conf-wred).
Related
threshold Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values of the WRED profile
Commands
Queue-Level Debugging
Queue-Level Debugging is an E-Series-only feature, as indicated by the e character that appears
below each command heading.
The following queuing statistics are available on both the EtherScale and TeraScale versions of
E-Series systems.
clear queue statistics egress
clear queue statistics ingress
show queue statistics egress
show queue statistics ingress
clear queue statistics egress

e Clear egress queue statistics.
Syntax clear queue statistics egress [unicast | multicast] [Interface]
Parameters
unicast | multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to clear only Multicast queue
statistics. Enter the keyword unicast to clear only Unicast queue statistics.
Default: Both Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are cleared.
Interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface
specific queue statistics.
information.
Fast Ethernet is not supported
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Usage If a Policy QoS is applied on an interface when clear queue statistics egress is issued, it will
Information clear the egress counters in show queue statistics and vice-versa. This behavior is due to the values
being read from the same hardware registers.
Related
Commands clear queue statistics egress Clear ingress queue statistics
show queue statistics egress Display egress queue statistics
show queue statistics ingress Display ingress queue statistics
clear queue statistics ingress

e Clear ingress queue statistics.
Syntax clear queue statistics ingress [unicast [src-card ID [dst-card ID ]] | [multicast] [src-card
ID ]]
Parameters
unicast [src-card ID (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword unicast to clear Unicast queue
[dst-card ID]] statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification (src-card ID)
and the destination card identification (dst-card ID) to clear the unicast
statistics from the source card to the destination card.
multicast [src-card ID] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to clear only Multicast
queue statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification
(src-card ID) to clear the multicast statistics from the source card.
Default: Both Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are cleared.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
Commands clear queue statistics egress Clear egress queue statistics
show queue statistics egress Display egress queue statistics
show queue statistics egress

e Display the egress queue statistics.
Syntax show queue statistics egress [unicast | multicast] [Interface] [brief]

Parameters
unicast | multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to display only Multicast
queue statistics. Enter the keyword unicast to display only Unicast queue
statistics.
Default: Both Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are displayed.
Interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface
specific queue statistics.
port information.
Fast Ethernet is not supported.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only ingress per link
buffering and egress per port buffering statistics.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage EtherScale systems display cumulative dropped packets, while TeraScale systems display cumulative
Information queued bytes (in KB), cumulative queued packets (in KB), and cumulative dropped packets (in KB).
The display area is limited to 80 spaces to accommodate the screen and for optimal readability.
Numbers, that is values, are limited to 12 characters. The numbering conventions are detailed in the
table below.
Table 47-10. Numbering Conventions for show queue egress statistics Output
Value Divide the number by Quotient Display Examples
(10^11) - (10^14) 1024 K 12345678901K
(10^14) - (10^17) 1024*1024 M 12345678901M
> (10^17) 1024*1024*1024 T 12345678901T
Note: The show queue statistics command displays Queued Packets and Queued Bytes.
The show qos statistics command displays Matched Packets and Matched Bytes. The
following example explains how these two outputs relate to each other.
header of 20 bytes.

Example 1 Figure 47-23. show queue statistics egress Command (TeraScale)
FTOS#show queue statistics egress unicast gigabitethernet 9/1
Interface Gi 9/1
Egress Queued Queued Packet Type Min Max Dropped

Port bytes packets KB KB packets
Queue#
0 281513847K 31959000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 30385770
1 99281660K 11271000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
2 99281660K 11271000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
3 38984440000 4322000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
4 99281660K 11271000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
5 39760160000 4408000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
6 39642900000 4395000 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
7 99274410K 11270177 Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
FTOS#
Table 47-11. show queue statistics egress Command Fields
Field Description
Egress Port Queue# Egress Port Queue Number
Queued bytes Cumulative byte count in that queue
Queued packets Cumulative packet count in that queue.
Packet type Green, yellow, and out-of-profile packets
Min KB Minimum threshold for WRED queue
Max KB Maximum threshold for WRED queue

Example 2 Figure 47-24. show queue statistics egress multicast Command Output (EtherScale)
FTOS#sho queue statistics egress multicast
Linecard 3 port pipe 0, multicast
Packet Type Min Max Dropped

KB KB packets
Green 8192 16384 0
Yellow 4096 8192 0
Out of Profile 0

KB KB packets
Green 8192 16384 0
Yellow 4096 8192 0
Out of Profile 0

KB KB packets
Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 0

KB KB packets
Green 2048 4096 0
Yellow 1024 2048 0
Out of Profile 0
FTOS#
Table 47-12. show queue statistics egress multicast Command Fields
Field Description

Example 3 Figure 47-25. show queue statistics egress brief Command Output
FTOS#show queue statistics egress brief
LC Portpipe Port Dropped

PortPipe packets
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 0 2 0
0 0 3 0
0 0 4 0
0 0 5 0
0 0 6 0
0 0 7 0
0 0 8 0
0 0 9 0
0 0 10 0
0 0 11 0
0 0 M 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
0 1 2 0
0 1 3 0
0 1 4 0
0 1 5 0
0 1 6 0
0 1 7 0
0 1 8 0
0 1 9 0
0 1 10 0
0 1 11 0
0 1 M 0
1 0 0 0
FTOS#
Table 47-13. show queue statistics egress brief Command Fields
Field Description
LC Line Card
Portpipe Portpipe number
Port Port Queue. Where M is Multicast queue
Related
clear queue statistics egress Clear egress queue statistics.
Commands
clear queue statistics ingress Clear ingress queue statistics.
show queue statistics ingress

e Display the ingress queue statistics.
Syntax show queue statistics ingress [unicast [src-card ID [dst-card ID]] | [multicast] [src-card
ID]] [brief]

Parameters
unicast [src-card ID (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword unicast to display Unicast queue
[dst-card ID]] statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification (src-card ID)
and the destination card identification (dst-card ID) to display the
unicast statistics from the source card to the destination card.
Destination card Identification: Range 0 to 13 or RPM
multicast [src-card ID] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword multicast to display only Multicast
queue statistics. Optionally, enter the source card identification
(src-card ID) to display the multicast statistics from the source card.
Default: Both Unicast and Multicast queue statistics are displayed.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only ingress per link
buffering and egress per port buffering statistics.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage EtherScale systems display cumulative dropped packets, while TeraScale systems display cumulative
Information queued bytes (in KB), cumulative queued packets (in KB), and cumulative dropped packets (in KB).
The display area is limited to 80 spaces to accommodate the screen and for optimal readability.
Numbers, that is values, are limited to 12 characters. The conventions are detailed in the following
table.
Table 47-14. Numbering Conventions for show queue statistics ingress Output
Value Divide the number by Quotient Display Examples
(10^11) - (10^14) 1024 K 12345678901K
(10^14) - (10^17) 1024*1024 M 12345678901M
> (10^17) 1024*1024*1024 T 12345678901T
Note: The show queue statistics command displays Queued Packets and Queued Bytes.
The show qos statistics command displays Matched Packets and Matched Bytes. The
following example explains how these two displays relate to each other.
header of 20 bytes.

Figure 47-26. show queue statistics ingress Command (EtherScale) Partial
FTOS#show queue statistics ingress unicast src-card 7 dst-card 3
Linecard 7 port pipe 0, to linecard 3 port pipe 0, unicast
SF Packet Type Min Max Dropped

Ingress KB KB packets
Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
Linecard 7 port pipe 0, to linecard 3 port pipe 1, unicast
Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0

Table 47-15. show queue statistics Command Fields
Field Description
SF Ingress Queue # Switch Fabric Queue Number

Example 2 Figure 47-27. show queue statistics ingress Multicast Command Output (EtherScale)
FTOS#show queue statistics ingress multicast src-card 7

Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0

Queue#
0 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
1 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
2 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
3 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
4 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
5 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
6 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
7 Green 4096 4096 0
Yellow 3276 3276 0
Out of Profile 0
FTOS#
Table 47-16. show queue statistics ingress Multicast Command Fields
Field Description
SF Ingress Queue # Switch Fabric Queue Number

Example 3 Figure 47-28. show queue statistics ingress brief Command Output
FTOS#show queue statistics ingress src-card 0 brief

Source Linecard 0
Dest LC Src Dest Dropped

Port set Port set packets
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 100
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 100
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 100
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 100
2 0 0 0
2 0 1 100
2 1 0 0
2 1 1 100
3 0 0 0
3 0 1 100
3 1 0 0
3 1 1 100
4 0 0 0
4 0 1 100
4 1 0 0
4 1 1 100
5 0 0 0
5 0 1 100
5 1 0 0
5 1 1 100
6 0 0 0
6 0 1 100
6 1 0 0
6 1 1 100
RPM 0 0
RPM 1 100
Multicast 0 0
Multicast 1 0
FTOS#
Table 47-17. show queue statistics ingress brief Command Fields
Field Description
Dest LC Destination Line Card
Src Port Set Source PortPipe Number
Dest Port Set Destination PortPipe Number
Dropped Pkts The number of packets dropped
Related
clear queue statistics egress Clear egress queue statistics.
Commands
clear queue statistics ingress Clear ingress queue statistics.
show queue statistics ingress Display egress queue statistics

48
Router Information Protocol (RIP)
Overview
Router Information Protocol (RIP) is a Distance Vector routing protocol. FTOS supports both RIP
version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2) on C-Series and E-Series and S-Series systems, as
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Note: The C-Series platform supports RIP with FTOS version 7.6.1.0 and later. The S-Series
platform supports RIP with FTOS version 7.8.1.0 and later. Prior to 7.6.1.0, only the E-Series
platform supported RIP.
The FTOS implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information
on configuring RIP, refer to FTOS Configuration Guide.
Commands
The following commands enable you to configure RIP:
auto-summary
clear ip rip
debug ip rip
default-metric
description
distance
distribute-list in
distribute-list out
ip poison-reverse
ip rip receive version
ip rip send version
ip split-horizon
maximum-paths
neighbor
network
offset-list
Router Information Protocol (RIP) | 1235

output-delay
passive-interface
redistribute
redistribute isis
redistribute ospf
router rip
show config
show ip rip database
show running-config rip
timers basic
version
auto-summary
ces Restore the default behavior of automatic summarization of subnet routes into network routes. This
command applies only to RIP version 2.
Syntax auto-summary
To send sub-prefix routing information, enter no auto-summary.
Default Enabled.
Command Modes ROUTER RIP
Command
History
clear ip rip
ces Update all the RIP routes in the FTOS routing table.
Syntax clear ip rip
Command
History
Usage This command triggers updates of the main RIP routing tables.
Information
debug ip rip
ces Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting.
1236 | Router Information Protocol (RIP)

Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | packet [interface] | trigger]
To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command.
Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and ID as one of the following:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Note: This option is available only on E-Series when entered as a standalone
option. It is available on both C-Series and E-Series as a sub-option.
database (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword database to display messages when there is a change
to the RIP database.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug only RIP protocol changes.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug only RIP protocol packets.
Note: This option is available only on C-Series.
trigger (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trigger to debug only RIP trigger extensions.
Command
History
ces Generate a default route for the RIP traffic.
Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [route-map map-name]
To return to the default values, enter no default-information originate.
Parameters
always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to enable the switch software to
always advertise the default route.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number as the
metric value.
Range: 1 to 16
Default: 1
configured route-map.

Defaults Disabled.
metric: 1
Command
History
Usage The default route must be present in the switch routing table for the default-information originate
Information command to take effect.
default-metric
ces Change the default metric for routes. Use this command with the redistribute command to ensure
that all redistributed routes use the same metric value.
To return the default metric to the original values, enter no default-metric.
Parameters
number Specify a number.
Range: 1 to 16.
The default is 1.
Default 1
Command
History
Usage This command ensures that route information being redistributed is converted to the same metric value.
Information
Related
redistribute Allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods.
Commands
description
ces Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the RIP protocol (80 characters maximum).

Command
History
pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced on E-Series
Related
router rip Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Commands
distance
ces Assign a weight (for prioritization) to all routes in the RIP routing table or to a specific route. Lower
weights (administrative distance) are preferred.
Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask [prefix-name]]

To return to the default values, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask] command.
Parameters
weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization).
The default is 120.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or
network to receive the new distance metric.
mask If you enter an IP address, you must also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted
decimal format or /prefix format (/x)
prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a configured prefix list name.
Defaults weight = 120
Command
History
Related
default-metric Assign one distance metric to all routes learned using the redistribute command.
Commands
distribute-list in
ces Configure a filter for incoming routing updates.
To delete the filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in command.

Parameters

number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
Related
ip prefix-list Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.
Commands
distribute-list out
ces Configure a filter for outgoing routing updates.
Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [interface | bgp | connected | isis | ospf | static]
To delete the filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out command.
Parameters
number:
ExaScale.
information.
connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to filter only directly connected
routes.

isis (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isis to filter only IS-IS routes.
Note: This option is only available on E-Series.
ospf (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ospf to filter all OSPF routes.
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to filter manually configured routes.
Command
History
Related
Commands
ip poison-reverse
ces Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value.
Syntax ip poison-reverse
To disable poison reverse, enter no ip poison-reverse.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
Related
ip split-horizon Set RIP routing updates to exclude routing prefixes.
Commands
ip rip receive version

ces Set the interface to receive specific versions of RIP. The RIP version you set on the interface overrides
the version command in the ROUTER RIP mode.
Syntax ip rip receive version [1] [2]
To return to the default, enter no ip rip receive version.
Parameters
1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 1 for RIP version 1.
Defaults RIPv1 and RIPv2.

Command
History
Usage If you want the interface to receive both versions of RIP, enter ip rip receive version 1 2.
Information
Related
ip rip send version Sets the RIP version to be used for sending RIP traffic on an interface.
Commands
version Sets the RIP version to be used for the switch software.
ip rip send version

ces Set the interface to send a specific version of RIP. The version you set on the interface overrides the
version command in the ROUTER RIP mode.
Syntax ip rip send version [1] [2]
To return to the default value, enter no ip rip send version.
Parameters
The default is RIPv1.
Defaults RIPv1.
Command
History
Usage To enable the interface to send both version of RIP packets, enter ip rip send version 1 2.
Information
Related
ip rip receive version Sets the RIP version for the interface to receive traffic.
Commands
version Sets the RIP version to be used for the switch software.
ip split-horizon
ces Enable split-horizon for RIP data on the interface. As described in RFC 2453, the split-horizon scheme
prevents any routes learned over a specific interface to be sent back out that interface.
Syntax ip split-horizon
To disable split-horizon, enter no ip split-horizon.

Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Related
ip poison-reverse Set the prefix for RIP routing updates.
Commands
maximum-paths
ces Set RIP to forward packets over multiple paths.

Parameters
number Enter the number of paths.
Range: 1 to 16.
The default is 4 paths.
Defaults 4
Command
History
Usage RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths.

Information
neighbor
ces Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information.
Syntax neighbor ip-address

To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of a router with which to exchange
information.

Command

History
Usage When a neighbor router is identified, unicast data exchanges occur. Multiple neighbor routers are
Information possible.
Use the passive-interface command in conjunction with the neighbor command to ensure that only
specific interfaces are receiving and sending data.
Related
passive-interface Sets the interface to only listen to RIP broadcasts.
Commands
network
ces Enable RIP for a specified network. Use this command to enable RIP on all networks connected to the
switch.
Syntax network ip-address

To disable RIP for a network, use the no network ip-address command.
Parameter
ip-address Specify an IP network address in dotted decimal format. You cannot specify a subnet.
Defaults No RIP network is configured.
Command
History
Usage You can enable an unlimited number of RIP networks.

Information
RIP operates over interfaces configured with any address specified by the network command.
offset-list
ces Specify a number to add to the incoming or outgoing route metrics learned via RIP.
Syntax offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface]

To delete an offset list, use the no offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface]
command.
Parameters
prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established Prefix list to determine which incoming routes will
be modified.

offset Enter a number from zero (0) to 16 to be applied to the incoming route metric
matching the access list specified.
If you set an offset value to zero (0), no action is taken.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
Usage When the offset metric is applied to an interface, that value takes precedence over an offset value that
Information is not extended to an interface.
Related
Commands
output-delay
ces Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor.
Syntax output-delay delay
To return to the switch software defaults for interpacket delay, enter no output-delay.
Parameters
delay Specify a number of milliseconds as the delay interval.
Range: 8 to 50.
Command
History

Usage This command is intended for low-speed interfaces.
Information
passive-interface
ces Suppress routing updates on a specified interface.
To delete a passive interface, use the no passive-interface interface command.
Parameters
interface Enter the following information:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
Information interface will still be included in RIP updates sent via other interfaces.
Related
neighbor Enable RIP for a specified network.
Commands
network Define a neighbor.
redistribute
ces Redistribute information from other routing instances.
Syntax redistribute {connected | static}

To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | static} command.

Parameters
connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on
interfaces is redistributed.
static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed.
Command
History
Usage To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command.
Information
Related
default-information Generate a default route for RIP traffic.
Commands
originate
redistribute isis
e Redistribute routing information from an IS-IS instance.
Syntax redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [route-map
map-name]
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric
metric-value] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process.
routes.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1
and Level-2 routes.
routes.
metric metric-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number as the metric
value.
Range: 0 to16
Command
History

Usage IS-IS is not supported on S-Series systems.
Information
redistribute ospf
ces Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process.
Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal | metric metric-value]
To disable redistribution, enter no redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match
internal | metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] command.
Parameters
process-id Enter a number that corresponds to the OSPF process ID to be redistributed.
Range: 1 to 65355.
match external {1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external followed by the numbers 1
| 2} or 2 to indicated that external 1 routes or external 2 routes should be redistributed.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to indicate that internal
routes should be redistributed.
metric (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric followed by a number as the metric
metric-value value.
Range: 0 to16
Command
History
router rip
ces Enter the ROUTER RIP mode to configure and enable RIP.
Syntax router rip

To disable RIP, enter no router rip.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History

Usage To enable RIP, you must assign a network address using the network command.
Information
Example Figure 48-1. router rip Command Example

FTOS(conf)#router rip
FTOS(conf-router_rip)#
Related
network Enable RIP.
Commands
exit Return to the CONFIGURATION mode.
show config
ces Display the changes you made to the RIP configuration. Default values are not shown.
Syntax show config
Command
History
Example Figure 48-2. show config Command Example in ROUTER RIP Mode
FTOS(conf-router_rip)#show config
!
router rip
network 172.31.0.0
passive-interface GigabitEthernet 0/1
FTOS(conf-router_rip)#
show ip rip database

ces Display the routes learned by RIP. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated.
Syntax show ip rip database [ip-address mask]
Parameters
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format to view RIP information on
that network only.
If you enter an IP address, you must also enter a mask for that IP address.
mask (OPTIONAL) Specify a mask, in /network format, for the IP address.
Command
History

Example Figure 48-3. show ip rip database Command Example (partial)
FTOS#show ip rip database

Total number of routes in RIP database: 1624
204.250.54.0/24
[50/1] via 192.14.1.3, 00:00:12, GigabitEthernet 9/15
204.250.54.0/24 auto-summary
203.250.49.0/24
[50/1] via 192.13.1.3, 00:00:12, GigabitEthernet 9/14
203.250.49.0/24 auto-summary
210.250.40.0/24
[50/2] via 1.1.18.2, 00:00:14, Vlan 18
[50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30
210.250.40.0/24 auto-summary
207.250.53.0/24
[50/2] via 1.1.120.2, 00:00:55, Port-channel 20
[50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30
[50/2] via 1.1.10.2, 00:00:18, Vlan 10
207.250.53.0/24 auto-summary
208.250.42.0/24
[50/2] via 1.1.120.2, 00:00:55, Port-channel 20
[50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30
[50/2] via 1.1.10.2, 00:00:18, Vlan 10
208.250.42.0/24 auto-summary
Table 48-1. Fields in show ip rip database Command Output
Field Description
Total number of routes in RIP Displays the number of RIP routes stored in the RIP database.
database
100.10.10.0/24 directly Lists the route(s) directly connected.
connected
150.100.0.0 redistributed Lists the routes learned through redistribution.
209.9.16.0/24... Lists the routes and the sources advertising those routes.

ces Use this feature to display the current RIP configuration.
Syntax show running-config rip
Example Figure 48-4. show running-config rip Command Example

!
router rip
distribute-list Test1 in
distribute-list Test21 out
network 10.0.0.0
passive-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0
neighbor 20.20.20.20
redistribute ospf 999
version 2

Command
timers basic
ces Manipulate the RIP timers for routing updates, invalid, holddown times and flush time.
Syntax timers basic update invalid holddown flush

To return to the default settings, enter no timers basic.
Parameters
update Enter the number of seconds to specify the rate at which RIP routing updates are sent.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
invalid Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval before routing updates are
declared invalid or expired. The invalid value should be at least three times the update
timer value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
holddown Enter the number of seconds to specify a time interval during which the route is marked as
unreachable but still sending RIP packets. The holddown value should be at least three
times the update timer value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
flush Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval during which the route is
advertised as unreachable. When this interval expires, the route is flushed from the routing
table. The flush value should be greater than the update value.
Range: zero (0) to 4294967295.
Default is 240 seconds.
Defaults update = 30 seconds; invalid = 180 seconds; holddown = 180 seconds; flush = 240 seconds.
Command
History
Usage If the timers on one router are changed, the timers on all routers in the RIP domain must also be
Information synchronized.

version
ces Specify either RIP version 1 or RIP version 2.
Syntax version {1 | 2}
To return to the default version setting, enter no version.
Parameters
1 Enter the keyword 1 to specify RIP version 1.
2 Enter the keyword 2 to specify RIP version 2.
Default The FTOS sends RIPv1 and receives RIPv1 and RIPv2.
Command
History
Related
ip rip receive version Set the RIP version to be received on the interface.
Commands
ip rip send version Set the RIP version to be sent out the interface.

49
Remote Monitoring (RMON)
Overview
FTOS RMON is implemented on all Dell Force10 switching platforms (C-Series, E-Series, and
S-Series), as indicated by the characters that appear below each command heading:
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
FTOS RMON is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring, and long-term
statistics collection. FTOS RMON supports the following RMON groups, as defined in RFC-2819,
RFC-3273, and RFC-3434:
Ethernet Statistics Table RFC-2819
Ethernet Statistics High-Capacity Table RFC-3273, 64bits
Ethernet History Control Table RFC-2819
Ethernet History Table RFC-2819
Ethernet History High-Capacity Table RFC-3273, 64bits
Alarm Table RFC-2819
High-Capacity Alarm Table (64bits) RFC-3434, 64bits
Event Table RFC-2819
Log Table RFC-2819
FTOS RMON does not support the following statistics:
etherStatsCollisions
etherHistoryCollisions
etherHistoryUtilization
Note: Only SNMP GET/GETNEXT access is supported. Configure RMON using the
RMON commands. Collected data is lost during a chassis reboot.
Commands
The FTOS Remote Network Monitoring RMON commands are:
rmon alarm
rmon collection history
rmon collection statistics
rmon event
Remote Monitoring (RMON) | 1253

rmon hc-alarm
show rmon
show rmon alarms
show rmon events
show rmon hc-alarm
show rmon history
show rmon log
show rmon statistics
rmon alarm
ces Set an alarm on any MIB object.
Syntax rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value
event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string]
To disable the alarm, use the no rmon alarm number command.
Parameters
number Enter the alarm integer number from 1 to 65535. The value must be unique
in the RMON Alarm Table.
variable The MIB object to monitor. The variable must be in the SNMP OID format,
for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 The object type must be a 32 bit integer.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the
alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is
the alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the
rising-threshold value Enter the keyword rising-threshold followed by the value (32bit) the
event-number rising-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the rising threshold exceeds its limit. This
value is the same as the alarmRisingEventIndex or alarmTable of the RMON
MIB. If there is no corresponding rising-threshold event, the value is zero.
falling-threshold value Enter the keyword falling-threshold followed by the value (32bit) the
event-number falling-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the falling threshold exceeds its limit.
This value is the same as the alarmFallingEventIndex or the alarmTable of
the RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding falling-threshold event, the
value is zero.
owner string (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the owner name to
specify an owner for the alarm. This is the alarmOwner object in the
alarmTable of the RMON MIB.
Default owner
1254 | Remote Monitoring (RMON)

Command
History
rmon collection history

ces Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface.
Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval
seconds]
To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection
history {controlEntry integer} command.
Parameters
controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics
using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the
RMON group of statistics. The integer value must be a unique index in the
RMON History Table.
owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the owner name to
record the owner of the RMON group of statistics.
buckets number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword buckets followed the number of buckets
for the RMON collection history group of statistics.
Bucket Range: 1 to 1000
Default: 50
interval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed the number of seconds
in each polling cycle.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if)
Command
History
rmon collection statistics

ces Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface.
Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name]

To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics
{controlEntry integer} command.

Parameters
controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics
using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the
RMON Statistic Table. The integer value must be a unique in the RMON
Statistic Table.
owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the owner name to
record the owner of the RMON group of statistics.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if)
Command
History
rmon event
ces Add an event in the RMON event table.
Syntax rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [ownername]
To disable RMON on an interface, use the no rmon event number [log] [trap community]
[description string] command.
Parameters
number Assign an event number in integer format from 1 to 65535. The number
value must be unique in the RMON Event Table.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to generate an RMON log entry. The
log entry is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or
log-and-trap.
Default: No log
trap community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trap followed by an SNMP community
string to configure the eventType setting in the RMON MIB. This sets either
snmp-trap or log-and-trap.
Default: public
description string (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword description followed by a string
describing the event.
owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed by the name of the
owner of this event.
Defaults as described above
Command
History

rmon hc-alarm
ces Set an alarm on any MIB object.
Syntax rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value
event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string]
To disable the alarm, use the no rmon hc-alarm number command.
Parameters
number Enter the alarm integer number from 1 to 65535. The value must be unique
in the RMON Alarm Table.
variable The MIB object to monitor. The variable must be in the SNMP OID format,
for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 The object type must be a 64 bit integer.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the
delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is
the alarmSampleType in the RMON Alarm table.
absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the
rising-threshold value Enter the keyword rising-threshold followed by the value (64 bit) the
event-number rising-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the rising threshold exceeds its limit. This
value is the same as the alarmRisingEventIndex or alarmTable of the RMON
MIB. If there is no corresponding rising-threshold event, the value is zero.
falling-threshold value Enter the keyword falling-threshold followed by the value (64 bit) the
event-number falling-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the
event-number to trigger when the falling threshold exceeds its limit. This
value is the same as the alarmFallingEventIndex or the alarmTable of the
RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding falling-threshold event, the value
is zero.
owner string (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner followed the owner name to
specify an owner for the alarm. This is the alarmOwner object in the
alarmTable of the RMON MIB.
Defaults owner
Command
History
show rmon
ces Display the RMON running status including the memory usage.
Syntax show rmon

Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 49-1. show rmon Command Example

FTOS# show rmon
RMON status
total memory used 218840 bytes.
ether statistics table: 8 entries, 4608 bytes
ether history table: 8 entries, 6000 bytes
alarm table: 390 entries, 102960 bytes
high-capacity alarm table: 5 entries, 1680 bytes
event table: 500 entries, 206000 bytes
log table: 2 entries, 552 bytes
FTOS#
show rmon alarms

ces Display the contents of the RMON Alarm Table.
Syntax show rmon alarms [index] [brief]
Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Alarm Table
in an easy-to-read format.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 49-2. show rmon alarms index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon alarm 1
RMON alarm entry 1
sample Interval: 5
object: 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
sample type: absolute value.
value: 255161
alarm type: rising or falling alarm.
rising threshold: 1, RMON event index: 1
falling threshold: 501, RMON event index: 501
alarm owner: 1
alarm status: OK
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 49-3. show rmon alarms brief Command Example
FTOS#show rmon alarm br
index SNMP OID
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
6 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
7 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
8 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
9 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
10 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
11 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
12 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
13 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
14 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
15 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
16 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
17 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
18 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
19 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
20 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
21 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
22 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
FTOS#
show rmon events

ces Display the contents of RMON Event Table.
Syntax show rmon events [index] [brief]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Event Table
in an easy-to-read format.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 49-4. show rmon event index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon event 1
RMON event entry 1
description: 1
event type: LOG and SNMP TRAP.
event community: public
event last time sent: none
event owner: 1
event status: OK
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 49-5. show rmon event brief Command Example
FTOS#show rmon event br

index description
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
FTOS#
show rmon hc-alarm

ces Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity Alarm Table.
Syntax show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON
High-Capacity Alarm Table in an easy-to-read format.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 49-6. show rmon hc-alarm brief Command Example

FTOS#show rmon hc-alarm brief
index SNMP OID
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 49-7. show rmon hc-alarm index Command Example
FTOS#show rmon hc-alarm 1
RMON high-capacity alarm entry 1
object: 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
sample interval: 5
sample type: absolute value.
value: 185638
alarm type: rising or falling alarm.
alarm rising threshold value: positive.
rising threshold: 1001, RMON event index: 1
alarm falling threshold value: positive.
falling threshold: 999, RMON event index: 6
alarm sampling failed 0 times.
alarm owner: 1
alarm storage type: non-volatile.
alarm status: OK
FTOS#
show rmon history

ces Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet History table.
Syntax show rmon history [index] [brief]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet
History table in an easy-to-read format.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 49-8. show rmon history index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon history 6001
RMON history control entry 6001
interface: ifIndex.100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
bucket requested: 1
bucket granted: 1
sampling interval: 5 sec
owner: 1
status: OK
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 49-9. show rmon history brief Command Example
FTOS#show rmon history brief

index ifIndex interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
6001 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
FTOS#
show rmon log

ces Display the contents of RMON Log Table.
Syntax show rmon log [index] [brief]
Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the log index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Log Table in
an easy-to-read format.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 49-10. show rmon log index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon log 2
RMON log entry, alarm table index 2, log index 1
log time: 14638 (THU AUG 12 22:10:40 2004)
description: 2
FTOS#
Example 2 Figure 49-11. show rmon log brief Command Example

FTOS#show rmon log br
eventIndex description
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 2
4 4
FTOS#
Usage The log table has a maximum of 500 entries. If the log exceeds that maximum, the oldest log entry is
Information purged to allow room for the new entry.

show rmon statistics
ces Display the contents of RMON Ethernet Statistics table.
Syntax show rmon statistics [index] [brief]
Parameters
index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index number to display just that entry.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet
Statistics table in an easy-to-read format.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example 1 Figure 49-12. show rmon statistics index Command Example

FTOS#show rmon statistics 6001
RMON statistics entry 6001
interface: ifIndex.100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0
packets dropped: 0
bytes received: 0
packets received: 0
broadcast packets: 0
multicast packets: 0
CRC error: 0
under-size packets: 0
over-size packets: 0
fragment errors: 0
jabber errors: 0
collision: 0
64bytes packets: 0
65-127 bytes packets: 0
owner: 1
status: OK
<high-capacity data>
HC packets received overflow: 0
HC packets received: 0
HC bytes received overflow: 0
HC bytes received: 0
HC 64bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 64bytes packets: 0
HC 65-127 bytes packets overflow: 0
HC 65-127 bytes packets: 0
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 49-13. show rmon statistics brief Command Example
FTOS#show rmon statistics br

index ifIndex interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------
FTOS#

50
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
Overview
The FTOS implementation of RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) is based on the IEEE 802.1w
standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged
LAN that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges.
RSTP is supported by FTOS on all Dell Force10 systems, as indicated by the characters that appear
below each command heading:
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Commands
The FTOS RSTP commands are:
bridge-priority
debug spanning-tree rstp
description
description
forward-delay
hello-time
max-age
protocol spanning-tree rstp
show config
show spanning-tree rstp
spanning-tree rstp
tc-flush-standard
bridge-priority
ces Set the bridge priority for RSTP.
Syntax bridge-priority priority-value

To return to the default value, enter no bridge-priority.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) | 1265

Parameters
priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value in increments of 4096.

Range: 0 to 61440.
Default: 32768
Defaults 32768
Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp)
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree rstp Enter the Rapid Spanning Tree mode
Commands
debug spanning-tree rstp

ces Enable debugging of RSTP and view information on the protocol.
Syntax debug spanning-tree rstp [all | bpdu interface {in | out} | events]
To disable debugging, enter no debug spanning-tree rstp.
Parameters
bpdu interface {in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug Bridge Protocol Data Units.
| out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface keyword along with the type slot/port of the interface
you want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Optionally, enter an in or out parameter in conjunction with the optional interface:
For Receive, enter in
For Transmit, enter out
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug RSTP events.
Command
History
1266 | Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

Example Figure 50-1. debug spanning-tree rstp bpdu Command Example

FTOS#debug spanning-tree rstp bpdu gigabitethernet 2/0 ?
in Receive (in)
out Transmit (out)
description
ces Enter a description of the Rapid Spanning Tree
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Rapid Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).
Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is config-rstp.)
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree rstp Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands
disable
ces Disable RSTP globally on the system.
Syntax disable
To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, enter no disable.
Defaults RSTP is disabled
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree rstp Enter the Rapid Spanning Tree mode
Commands

forward-delay
ces Configure the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds that FTOS waits before transitioning RSTP to the forwarding
state.
Range: 4 to 30
Default: 15 seconds
Defaults 15 seconds
Command
History
Related
Commands
max-age Change the wait time before RSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.
hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of RSTP Data Units (BPDUs).
Syntax hello-time [milli-second] seconds
Parameters
Default: 2 seconds.
milli-second Enter this keyword to configure a hello time on the order of milliseconds.
Range: 50 - 950 milliseconds
Defaults 2 seconds
Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added milli-second to S-Series.

Usage The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second. The standard minimum
Information hello time in seconds is 1 second, which is encoded as 256. Millisecond hello times are encoded using
values less than 256; the millisecond hello time equals (x/1000)*256.
When millisecond hellos are configured, the default hello interval of 2 seconds is still used for edge
ports; the millisecond hello interval is not used.
Related
forward-delay Change the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands
max-age Change the wait time before RSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.
max-age
ces Set the time interval for the RSTP bridge to maintain configuration information before refreshing that
information.
Parameters
max-age Enter a number of seconds the FTOS waits before refreshing configuration information.
Default: 20 seconds
Defaults 20 seconds
Command
History
Related
max-age Change the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands

ces Enter the RSTP mode to configure RSTP.
Syntax protocol spanning-tree rstp
To exit the RSTP mode, enter exit
Command
History
Example Figure 50-2. protocol spanning-tree rstp Command

FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp
FTOS(config-rstp)##no disable
Usage RSTP is not enabled when you enter the RSTP mode. To enable RSTP globally on the system, enter no
Information description from the RSTP mode.
Related
Commands
description Disable RSTP globally on the system.
show config
ces View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed.
Syntax show config
Command
History
Example Figure 50-3. show config Command for the RSTP Mode
FTOS(conf-rstp)#show config
!
no disable
bridge-priority 16384

show spanning-tree rstp
ces Display the RSTP configuration.
Syntax show spanning-tree rstp [brief] [guard]
Parameters
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the RSTP
guard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard
enabled on an RSTP interface and the current port state.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
E-Series TeraScale.
inconsistency
Example 1 Figure 50-4. show spanning-tree rstp brief Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree rstp brief
Root ID Priority 8192, Address 0001.e805.e306
---------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 4/0 128.418 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.418
Gi 4/1 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.419
Gi 4/8 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.130
Gi 4/9 128.427 128 20000 BLK 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.131
Interface
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ----
Gi 4/0 Desg 128.418 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes
Gi 4/1 Desg 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes
Gi 4/8 Root 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No
Gi 4/9 Altr 128.427 128 20000 BLK 20000 P2P No
FTOS#

Example 2 Figure 50-5. show spanning-tree rstp with EDS and LBK
FTOS#show spanning-tree rstp br

We are the root
---------- -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------- --------
Gi 0/0 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e801.6aa8 128.257
Interface
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ----
Gi 0/0 ErrDis 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 P2P No
FTOS#show spanning-tree rstp

Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
We are the root
Current root has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8
Number of topology changes 1, last change occured 00:00:31 ago on Gi 0/0
Port 257 (GigabitEthernet 0/0) is LBK_INC Discarding LBK_INC means
Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.257 Loopback BPDU
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8 Inconsistency
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8
BPDU : sent 27, received 9
Example 3 Figure 50-6. show spanning-tree rstp guard Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree rstp guard
Interface
--------- -------- --------- ----------
Gi 0/3 0 BLK Bpduguard
Table 50-1. show spanning-tree rstp guard Command Information
Field Description
Interface Name RSTP interface
Instance RSTP instance

spanning-tree rstp
ces Configure an RSTP interface with one of these settings: port cost, edge port with optional Bridge Port
Data Unit (BPDU) guard, port priority, loop guard, or root guard.
Syntax spanning-tree rstp {cost port-cost | edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]] |

priority priority | {loopguard | rootguard}}
Parameters
cost port-cost Enter the keyword cost followed by the port cost value.
Range: 1 to 200000
Defaults:
edge-port Enter the keyword edge-port to configure the interface as a Rapid Spanning Tree
edge port.
bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface
into forwarding mode immediately after the root fails.
priority priority Enter keyword priority followed by a value in increments of 16 as the priority.
Range: 0 to 240. Default: 128
loopguard Enter the keyword loopguard to enable loop guard on an RSTP port or port-channel
interface.
rootguard Enter the keyword rootguard to enable root guard on an RSTP port or port-channel
interface.
Command
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced the loopguard and rootguard options on the E-Series TeraScale,
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced hardware shutdown-on-violation options
Version 7.4.1.0 Added the optional Bridge Port Data Unit (BPDU) guard.

Usage The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a
Information BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack. This option
places the port into an error disable state if a BPDU appears, and a message is logged so that the
administrator can take corrective action.
Note: A port configured as an edge port, on an RSTP switch, will immediately transition to
the forwarding state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as edge ports.
Consider an edge port similar to a port with a spanning-tree portfast enabled.
STP root guard and loop guard cannot be enabled at the same time on a port. For example, if you
configure loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured, the following error message
is displayed:

Example Figure 50-7. spanning-tree rstp edge-port Command

FTOS(conf-if-gi-4/0)#spanning-tree rstp edge-port
!
no ip address
switchport
spanning-tree rstp edge-port
no shutdown
FTOS#

tc-flush-standard
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage By default FTOS implements an optimized flush mechanism for RSTP. This helps in flushing MAC
Information addresses only when necessary (and less often), allowing for faster convergence during topology


51
Security
Overview
Except for the Trace List feature (E-Series only), most of the commands in this chapter are available on
all three Dell Force10 platforms C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series (the S-Series models that run
FTOS), as noted by the following icons that appear under each command icon: c e s
Commands
This chapter contains various types of security commands in FTOS, in the following sections:
AAA Accounting Commands
Authorization and Privilege Commands
Authentication and Password Commands
RADIUS Commands
TACACS+ Commands
Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands
SSH Server and SCP Commands
Trace List Commands
Secure DHCP Commands
For configuration details, see the Security chapter in the FTOS Configuration Guide.
Note: Starting with FTOS v7.2.1.0, LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant is implemented.
AAA Accounting Commands

AAA Accounting enables tracking of services that users are accessing and the amount of network
resources being consumed by those services.When AAA Accounting is enabled, the network server
reports user activity to the TACACS+ security server in the form of accounting records. Each
accounting record is comprised of accounting AV pairs and is stored on the access control server.
As with authentication and authorization, you must configure AAA Accounting by defining named list
of accounting methods, and then apply that list to various interfaces. The commands are:
aaa accounting
aaa accounting suppress
Security | 1277
accounting
show accounting
aaa accounting
ces Enable AAA Accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function.
Syntax aaa accounting {system | exec | commands level} {name | default}{start-stop | wait-start
| stop-only} {tacacs+}
To disable AAA Accounting, use the no aaa accounting {system | exec | command level}
{name | default}{start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} command.
Parameters
system Enter the keyword system to send accounting information of any other AAA
configuration.
exec Enter the keyword exec to send accounting information when a user has logged in
to the EXEC mode.
commands level Enter the keyword command followed by a privilege level for accounting of
commands executed at that privilege level.
name | default Enter one of the following:
For name, a user-defined name of a list of accounting methods
default for the default accounting methods
start-stop Enter the keyword start-stop to send a start accounting notice at the beginning
of the requested event and a stop accounting notice at the end of the event.
wait-start Enter the keyword wait-start to ensure that the TACACS+ security server
acknowledges the start notice before granting the users process request.
stop-only Enter the keyword stop-only to instruct the TACACS+ security server to send a
stop record accounting notice at the end of the requested user process.
tacacs+ Enter the keyword tacacs+ to use TACACS+ data for accounting. FTOS currently
only supports TACACS+ accounting.
Defaults No default configuration or behavior
Command
History
Example Figure 51-1. aaa accounting Command Examples

FTOS(conf)# aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+
FTOS(conf)# aaa accounting command 15 default start-stop tacacs+
FTOS (config)#
Usage In the example above, TACACS+ accounting is used to track all usage of EXEC command and
Information commands on privilege level 15.
Privilege level 15 is the default. If you want to track usage at privilege level 1, for example, use aaa
accounting command 1.
1278 | Security
Related
enable password Change the password for the enable command.
Commands
login authentication Enable AAA login authentication on terminal lines.
password Create a password.
tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ server host.
aaa accounting suppress

ces Prevent the generation of accounting records of users with user name value of NULL.
Syntax aaa accounting suppress null-username

To permit accounting records to users with user name value of NULL, use the no aaa accounting
suppress null-username command
Defaults Accounting records are recorded for all users.
Command
History
Usage FTOS issues accounting records for all users on the system, including users whose username string,
Information due to protocol translation, is NULL. For example, a user who comes on line with the aaa
authentication login method-list none command is applied. Use aaa accounting suppress
command to prevent accounting records from being generated for sessions that do not have user names
associated to them.
accounting
ces Apply an accounting method list to terminal lines.
Syntax accounting {exec | commands level} method-list
Parameters
exec Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC level accounting method list.
commands level Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC and CONFIGURATION level
accounting method list.
method-list Enter a method list that you defined using the command aaa accounting
exec or aaa accounting commands.
Defaults None
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Security | 1279

Usage
aaa accounting Enable AAA Accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function.
Information
show accounting
ces Display the active accounting sessions for each online user.
Syntax show accounting
Defaults No default configuration or behavior
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 51-2. show accounting Command Example

FTOS#show accounting
Active accounted actions on tty2, User admin Priv 1
Task ID 1, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:39 Elapsed, service=shell
Active accounted actions on tty3, User admin Priv 1
Task ID 2, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:26 Elapsed, service=shell
FTOS#
Usage This command steps through all active sessions and then displays the accounting records for the active
Information account functions.
Authorization and Privilege Commands

Set command line authorization and privilege levels with the following commands:
authorization
aaa authorization commands
aaa authorization config-commands
aaa authorization exec
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode)
privilege level (LINE mode)
authorization
ces Apply an authorization method list to terminal lines.
Syntax authorization {exec | commands level} method-list
1280 | Security
Parameters
exec Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC level authorization method list.
commands level Enter this keyword to apply an EXEC and CONFIGURATION level
authorization method list.
method-list Enter a method list that you defined using the command aaa
authorization exec or aaa authorization commands.
Defaults None
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Usage
aaa authorization commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a users access to EXEC and
Information
CONFIGURATION level commands
aaa authorization exec Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a users access to EXEC level
commands.
aaa authorization commands

ces Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a users access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level
commands
Syntax aaa authorization commands level {name | default} {local || tacacs+ || none}
Undo a configuration with the no aaa authorization commands level {name | default} {local
|| tacacs+ || none} command syntax.
Parameters
commands level Enter the keyword commands followed by the command privilege
level for command level authorization.
name Define a name for the list of authorization methods.
default Define the default list of authorization methods.
local Use the authorization parameters on the system to perform authorization.
tacacs+ Use the TACACS+ protocol to perform authorization.
none Enter this keyword to apply no authorization.
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 6.1.1.0 Added support for RADIUS
Security | 1281
aaa authorization config-commands
e Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a users access to EXEC level commands.
Syntax aaa authorization config-commands
Disable authorization checking for CONFIGURATION level commands using the command no aaa
authorization config-commands.
Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands
Command
History
Usage By default, the command aaa authorization commands configures the system to check both
Information EXEC level and CONFIGURATION level commands. Use the command no aaa authorization
config-commands to enable only EXEC-level command checking.
aaa authorization exec

ces Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a users access to EXEC-level commands.
Syntax aaa authorization exec {name | default} {local || tacacs+ || if-authenticated || none}
Disable authorization checking for EXEC level commands using the command no aaa
authorization exec.
Parameters
name Define a name for the list of authorization methods.
default Define the default list of authorization methods.
local Use the authorization parameters on the system to perform authorization.
tacacs+ Use the TACACS+ protocol to perform authorization.
none Enter this keyword to apply no authorization.
Defaults None
Command
History
Version 6.1.1.0 Added support for RADIUS
1282 | Security
ces Change the access or privilege level of one or more commands.
Syntax privilege mode {level level | reset}

To delete access to a level and command, use the no privilege mode level level command.
Parameters
mode Enter one of the following keywords as the mode for which you are controlling access:
configure for the CONFIGURATION mode
exec for the EXEC mode
interface for the INTERFACE modes
line for the LINE mode
route-map for the ROUTE-MAP
router for the ROUTER OSPF, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER ISIS and ROUTER BGP
modes.
level level Enter the keyword level followed by a number for the access level.
Range: 0 to 15.
Level 1 is the EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes and commands.
reset Enter the keyword reset to return the security level to the default setting.
command Enter the commands keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can
enter one or all of the keywords
Command
History
Usage Use the enable password command to define a password for the level to which you are assigning
Information privilege or access.

ces Change the access level for users on the terminal lines.
Syntax privilege level level

To delete access to a terminal line, use the no privilege level level command.
Parameters
level level Enter the keyword level followed by a number for the access level.
Range: 0 to 15.
Level 1 is the EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes.
Defaults level = 15
Command Modes LINE
Security | 1283
Command

History
Authentication and Password Commands

This section contains the following commands controlling management access to the system:
aaa authentication enable
aaa authentication login
access-class
enable password
enable restricted
enable secret
login authentication
password
password-attributes
service password-encryption
show privilege
show users
timeout login response
username
aaa authentication enable

ces Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to the EXEC privilege mode (the Enable
access).
Syntax aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name} method [... method2]

To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication enable {default |
method-list-name} method [... method2] command.
Parameters
default Enter the keyword default followed by the authentication methods to use as
the default sequence of methods to be used for the Enable log-in.
Default: default enable
method-list-name Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) to name the list of enabled
authentication methods activated at log in.
1284 | Security
method Enter one of the following methods:
enable - use the password defined by the enable password command in
the CONFIGURATION mode.
line - use the password defined by the password command in the LINE
mode.
none - no authentication.
radius - use the RADIUS server(s) configured with the radius-server
host command.
tacacs+ - use the TACACS+ server(s) configured with the tacacs-server
host command.
... method2 (OPTIONAL) In the event of a no response from the first method, FTOS
applies the next configured method.
Defaults Use the enable password.
Command
History
Usage By default, the Enable password is used. If aaa authentication enable default is configured,
Information FTOS will use the methods defined for Enable access instead.
Methods configured with the aaa authentication enable command are evaluated in the order they
are configured. If authentication fails using the primary method, FTOS employs the second method (or
third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the
server key is invalid, FTOS proceeds to the next authentication method. The TACACS+ is incorrect,
but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method.
Related
enable password Change the password for the enable command.
Commands
login authentication Enable AAA login authentication on terminal lines.
radius-server host Specify a RADIUS server host.
aaa authentication login

ces Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to the EXEC mode (Enable log-in).
Syntax aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} method [... method4]

To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication login {method-list-name |
default} command.
Parameters
method-list-name Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of a user-configured
method list that can be applied to different lines.
default Enter the keyword default to specify that the method list specified is the
default method for all terminal lines.
Security | 1285
method Enter one of the following methods:

enable - use the password defined by the enable password command in the
CONFIGURATION mode.
line - use the password defined by the password command in the LINE
mode.
local - use the user name/password defined by the in the local
configuration.
none - no authentication.
radius - use the RADIUS server(s) configured with the radius-server host
command.
tacacs+ - use the TACACS+ server(s) configured with the tacacs-server
host command.
... method4 (OPTIONAL) Enter up to four additional methods. In the event of a no
response from the first method, FTOS applies the next configured method (up
to four configured methods).
Default Not configured (that is, no authentication is performed)
Command
History
Usage By default, the locally configured username password will be used. If aaa authentication login
Information default is configured, FTOS will use the methods defined by this command for login instead.
Methods configured with the aaa authentication login command are evaluated in the order they are
configured. If users encounter an error with the first method listed, FTOS applies the next method
configured. If users fail the first method listed, no other methods are applied. The only exception is the
local method. If the users name is not listed in the local database, the next method is applied. If the
correct user name/password combination are not entered, the user is not allowed access to the switch.
Note: If authentication fails using the primary method, FTOS employs the second method (or
third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable,
but the server key is invalid, FTOS proceeds to the next authentication method. The
TACACS+ is incorrect, but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method.
After configuring the aaa authentication login command, configure the login authentication command
to enable the authentication scheme on terminal lines.
Connections to the SSH server will work with the following login mechanisms: local, radius and
tacacs.
Related
login authentication Apply an authentication method list to designated terminal lines.
Commands
radius-server host Specify a RADIUS server host.
1286 | Security
access-class
ces Restrict incoming connections to a particular IP address in a defined IP access control list (ACL).
Syntax access-class access-list-name

To delete a setting, use the no access-class command.
Parameters
access-list-name Enter the name of an established IP Standard ACL.
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Related
line Apply an authentication method list to designated terminal lines.
Commands
ip access-list standard Name (or select) a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
ip access-list extended Name (or select) an extended access list based on IP addresses or protocols.
enable password
ces Change the password for the enable command.
Syntax enable password [level level] [encryption-type] password

To delete a password, use the no enable password [encryption-type] password [level level]
command.
Parameters
level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level followed by a number as the level of
access.
Range: 1 to 15
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 or 0 as the encryption type.
Enter a 7 followed by a text string as the hidden password. The text string must
be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Force10 router.
Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show
running-config file of another Dell Force10 router.
password Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password.
Defaults No password is configured. level = 15
Command
History
Security | 1287
Usage Use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level (CONFIGURATION
Information mode) command to control access to command modes.
Passwords must meet the following criteria:
Start with a letter, not a number.

Passwords can have a regular expression as the password. To create a password with a regular
expression in it, you must use CNTL + v prior to entering regular expression. For example, to
create the password abcd]e, you type abcd CNTL v ]e. When the password is created, you
do not use the CNTL + v key combination and enter abcd]e.
Note: The question mark (?) and the tilde (~) are not supported characters.
Related
show running-config View the current configuration.
Commands
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Control access to command modes within the switch.
enable restricted
ces Allows Dell Force10 technical support to access restricted commands.
Syntax enable restricted [encryption-type] password

To disallow access to restricted commands, enter no enable restricted.
Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 as the encryption type.
Enter 7 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a
password that was already encrypted by a Dell Force10 router.
Command Modes Not configured.
Command
History
Usage Only Dell Force10 Technical Support staff use this command.
Information
enable secret
ces Change the password for the enable command.
Syntax enable secret [level level] [encryption-type] password

To delete a password, use the no enable secret [encryption-type] password [level level]
command.
1288 | Security
Parameters
level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level followed by a number as the level of
access.
Range: 1 to 15
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 5 or 0 as the encryption type.
Enter a 5 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be
a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Force10 router.
Defaults No password is configured. level = 15
Command
History
Usage Use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level (CONFIGURATION
Information mode) command to control access to command modes.
Passwords must meet the following criteria:

Start with a letter, not a number.
Passwords can have a regular expression as the password. To create a password with a regular
expression in it, you must use CNTL + v prior to entering regular expression. For example, to
create the password abcd]e, you type abcd CNTL v ]e and when the password is created,
you do not use the CNTL + v key combination and enter abcd]e.
Note: The question mark (?) and the tilde (~) are not supported characters.
Related
Commands
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Control access to command modes within the E-Series.
login authentication
ces Apply an authentication method list to designated terminal lines.
Syntax login authentication {method-list-name | default}

To use the local user/password database for login authentication, enter no login authentication.
Parameters
method-list-name Enter the method-list-name to specify that method list, created in the aaa
authentication login command, to be applied to the designated terminal line.
default Enter the keyword default to specify that the default method list, created in the
aaa authentication login command, is applied to the terminal line.
Defaults No authentication is performed on the console lines, and local authentication is performed on the
virtual terminal and auxiliary lines.
Security | 1289
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Usage If you configure the aaa authentication login default command, then the login authentication default
Information command automatically is applied to all terminal lines.
Related
aaa authentication login Select login authentication methods.
Commands
password
ces Specify a password for users on terminal lines.
Syntax password [encryption-type] password

To delete a password, use the no password password command.
Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the password
entered. The options are:
0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored as clear text.
7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden.
password Enter a text string up to 32 characters long. The first character of the password
must be a letter.
You cannot use spaces in the password.
Defaults No password is configured.
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Usage FTOS prompts users for these passwords when the method for authentication or authorization used is
Information line.
Related
Commands
enable password Set the password for the enable command.
login authentication Configure an authentication method to log in to the switch.
service Encrypt all passwords configured in FTOS.
password-encryption
radius-server key Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the
RADIUS host server.
tacacs-server key Configure a key for communication between a TACACS+ server and client.
username Establish an authentication system based on user names.
1290 | Security
password-attributes
ces Configure the password attributes (strong password).
Syntax password-attributes [min-length number] [max-retry number] [character-restriction

[upper number] [lower number] [numeric number] [special-char number]]
To return to the default, use the no password-attributes [min-length number] [max-retry
number] [character-restriction [upper number] [lower number] [numeric number]
[special-char number]] command.
Parameters
min-length number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword min-length followed by the number of
characters.
Range: 0 - 32 characters
max-retry number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-retry followed by the number of
maximum password retries.
Range: 0 - 16
character-restriction (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword character-restriction to indicate a
character restriction for the password.
upper number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword upper followed the upper number.
Range: 0 - 31
lower number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lower followed the lower number.
Range: 0 - 31
numeric number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword numeric followed the numeric number.
Range: 0 - 31
special-char number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword special-char followed the number of
special characters permitted.
Range: 0 - 31
Command
History
Related
Commands
service password-encryption
ces Encrypt all passwords configured in FTOS.
Syntax service password-encryption

To store new passwords as clear text, enter no service password-encryption.
Defaults Enabled
Security | 1291
Command
History
Caution: Encrypting passwords with this command does not provide a high level of security.
When the passwords are encrypted, you cannot return them to plain text unless you
re-configure them. To remove an encrypted password, use the no password password
command.
Usage To keep unauthorized people from viewing passwords in the switch configuration file, use the service
Information password-encryption command. This command encrypts the clear-text passwords created for user
name passwords, authentication key passwords, the privileged command password, and console and
virtual terminal line access passwords.
To view passwords, use the show running-config command.
show privilege
ces View your access level.
Syntax show privilege
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 51-3. show privilege Command Output

FTOS#show privilege
Current privilege level is 15
FTOS#
Related
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Assign access control to different command modes.
Commands
show users
ces View information on all users logged into the switch.
Syntax show users [all]
Parameters
all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all terminal lines in the switch.
1292 | Security
Command
History
Example Figure 51-4. show users Command Example

FTOS#show user
Line User Host(s) Location
0 console 0 admin idle
* 3 vty 1 admin idle 172.31.1.4
FTOS#
Table 1 describes the information in the show users command example.
Table 1 show users Command Example Fields
Field Description
(untitled) Indicates with a * which terminal line you are using.
Line Displays the terminal lines currently in use.
User Displays the user name of all users logged in.
Host(s) Displays the terminal line status.
Location Displays the IP address of the user.
Related
username Enable a user.
Commands
timeout login response

ces Specify how long the software will wait for login input (for example, user name and password) before
timing out.
Syntax timeout login response seconds

To return to the default values, enter no timeout login response.
Parameters
seconds Enter a number of seconds the software will wait before logging you out.
Range:
VTY: 1 to 30 seconds, default: 30 seconds.
Console: 1 to 300 seconds, default: 0 seconds (no timeout).
AUX: 1 to 300 seconds, default: 0 seconds (no timeout).
Defaults see above
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Security | 1293
Usage The software measures the period of inactivity defined in this command as the period between
Information consecutive keystrokes. For example, if your password is password you can enter p and wait 29
seconds to enter the next letter.
username
ces Establish an authentication system based on user names.
Syntax username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret}

[encryption-type] password] [privilege level]
If you do not want a specific user to enter a password, use the nopassword option.
To delete authentication for a user, use the no username name command.
Parameters
name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters.
access-class Enter the keyword access-class followed by the name of a configured access
access-list-name control list (either a IP access control list or MAC access control list).
nopassword Enter the keyword nopassword to specify that the user should not enter a
password.
password Enter the keyword password followed by the encryption-type or the password.
secret Enter the keyword secret followed by the encryption-type or the password.
encryption-type Enter an encryption type for the password that you will enter.
0 directs FTOS to store the password as clear text. It is the default encryption
type when using the password option.
7 to indicate that a password encrypted using a DES hashing algorithm will
follow. This encryption type is available with the password option only.
5 to indicate that a password encrypted using an MD5 hashing algorithm will
follow. This encryption type is available with the secret option only, and is the
default encryption type for this option.
password Enter a string up to 32 characters long.
privilege level Enter the keyword privilege followed by a number from zero (0) to 15.
secret Enter the keyword secret followed by the encryption type.
Defaults The default encryption type for the password option is 0. The default encryption type for the secret
option is 0.
Command
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Added support for secret option and MD5 password encryption. Extended name
from 25 characters to 63.
Usage To view the defined user names, use the show running-config user command.
Information
1294 | Security
Related
Commands
RADIUS Commands
The RADIUS commands supported by FTOS. are:
debug radius
ip radius source-interface
radius-server deadtime
radius-server host
radius-server key
radius-server retransmit
radius-server timeout
debug radius
ces View RADIUS transactions to assist with troubleshooting.
Syntax debug radius

To disable debugging of RADIUS, enter no debug radius.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
ip radius source-interface
ces Specify an interfaces IP address as the source IP address for RADIUS connections.
Syntax ip radius source-interface interface

To delete a source interface, enter no ip radius source-interface.
Security | 1295
Parameters

zero (0) to 16838.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History
radius-server deadtime
ces Configure a time interval during which non-responsive RADIUS servers to authentication requests are
skipped.
Syntax radius-server deadtime seconds

To disable this function or return to the default value, enter no radius-server deadtime.
Parameters
seconds Enter a number of seconds during which non-responsive RADIUS servers are skipped.
Default: 0 seconds.
Defaults 0 seconds
Command
History
1296 | Security
radius-server host
ces Configure a RADIUS server host.
Syntax radius-server host {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [auth-port port-number]

[retransmit retries] [timeout seconds] [key [encryption-type] key]
Parameters
hostname Enter the name of the RADIUS server host.
ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X), of the
RADIUS server host.
auth-port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth-port followed by a number as
the port number.
The default port-number is 1812.
retransmit retries (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword retransmit followed by a number
as the number of attempts. This parameter overwrites the radius-server
retransmit command.
Default: 3 attempts
timeout seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timeout followed by the seconds the
time interval the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server. This
parameter overwrites the radius-server timeout command.
Range: 0 to 1000
Default: 5 seconds
key [encryption-type] key (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key followed by an optional
encryption-type and a string up to 42 characters long as the
authentication key. This authentication key is used by the RADIUS host
server and the RADIUS daemon operating on this switch.
For the encryption-type, enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type
for the key entered. The options are:
0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored
as clear text.
7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden.
Configure this parameter last because leading spaces are ignored.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6
History
Version 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters
Usage Use this command to configure any number of RADIUS server hosts for each server host that is
Information configured. FTOS searches for the RADIUS hosts in the order they are configured in the software.
Security | 1297
The global default values for timeout, retransmit, and key optional parameters are applied, unless those
values are specified in the radius-server host or other commands. If you configure timeout, retransmit,
or key values, you must include those keywords when entering the no radius-server host command
syntax to return to the global default values.
Related
login authentication Set the database to be checked when a user logs in.
Commands
radius-server key Set a authentication key for RADIUS communications.
radius-server retransmit Set the number of times the RADIUS server will attempt to send
information.
radius-server timeout Set the time interval before the RADIUS server times out.
radius-server key
ces Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS host server.
Syntax radius-server key [encryption-type] key

To delete a password, enter no radius-server key.
Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered.
The options are:
0 is the default and means the key is not encrypted and stored as clear text.
7 means that the key is encrypted and hidden.
key Enter a string that is the key to be exchanged between the switch and RADIUS
servers. It can be up to 42 characters long.
Command
History
Usage The key configured on the switch must match the key configured on the RADIUS server daemon.
Information
If the key parameter in the radius-server host command is configured, the key configured with the
radius-server key command is the default key for all RADIUS communications.
Related
radius-server host Configure a RADIUS host.
Commands
1298 | Security
radius-server retransmit
ces Configure the number of times the switch attempts to connect with the configured RADIUS host server
before declaring the RADIUS host server unreachable.
Syntax radius-server retransmit retries
To configure zero retransmit attempts, enter no radius-server retransmit. To return to the default
setting, enter radius-server retransmit 3.
Parameters
retries Enter a number of attempts that FTOS tries to locate a RADIUS server.
Default: 3 retries.
Defaults 3 retries
Command
History
Related
Commands
radius-server timeout
ces Configure the amount of time the RADIUS client (the switch) waits for a RADIUS host server to reply
to a request.
Syntax radius-server timeout seconds

To return to the default value, enter no radius-server timeout.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds between an unsuccessful attempt and the FTOS times
out.
Range: zero (0) to 1000 seconds.
Default: 5 seconds.
Defaults 5 seconds
Command
History
Related
Commands
Security | 1299
TACACS+ Commands
FTOS supports TACACS+ as an alternate method for login authentication.

debug tacacs+
ip tacacs source-interface
tacacs-server host
tacacs-server key
debug tacacs+
ces View TACACS+ transactions to assist with troubleshooting.
Syntax debug tacacs+

To disable debugging of TACACS+, enter no debug tacacs+.
Defaults Disabled.
Command
History
ip tacacs source-interface
ces Specify an interfaces IP address as the source IP address for TACACS+ connections.
Syntax ip tacacs source-interface interface

To delete a source interface, enter no ip tacacs source-interface.
1300 | Security
Parameters
For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number
from zero (0) to 16838.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to
4094.
Command
History
tacacs-server host
ces Specify a TACACS+ host.
Syntax tacacs-server host {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [port number] [timeout

seconds] [key key]
Parameters
hostname Enter the name of the TACACS+ server host.
ipv4-address | Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X), of the
ipv6-address TACACS+ server host.
port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port followed by a number as the port to be
used by the TACACS+ server.
Default: 49
Security | 1301
timeout seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timeout followed by the number of seconds
the switch waits for a reply from the TACACS+ server.
Range: 0 to 1000
Default: 10 seconds
key key (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key followed by a string up to 42 characters
long as the authentication key. This authentication key must match the key
specified in the tacacs-server key for the TACACS+ daemon.
Configure this parameter last because leading spaces are ignored.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6
History
Usage To list multiple TACACS+ servers to be used by the aaa authentication login command, configure this
Information command multiple times.
If you are not configuring the switch as a TACACS+ server, you do not need to configure the port,
timeout and key optional parameters. If you do not configure a key, the key assigned in the
tacacs-server key command is used.
Related
aaa authentication login Specify the login authentication method.
Commands
tacacs-server key Configure a TACACS+ key for the TACACS server.
tacacs-server key
ces Configure a key for communication between a TACACS+ server and client.
Syntax tacacs-server key [encryption-type] key

To delete a key, use the no tacacs-server key key
Parameters
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered.
The options are:
0 is the default and means the key is not encrypted and stored as clear text.
7 means that the key is encrypted and hidden.
key Enter a text string, up to 42 characters long, as the clear text password.
Leading spaces are ignored.
1302 | Security
Command
History
Usage The key configured with this command must match the key configured on the TACACS+ daemon.
Information
Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands

The 802.1X Port Authentication commands are:
dot1x auth-server
dot1x guest-vlan
dot1x max-eap-req
dot1x port-control
dot1x quiet-period
dot1x reauth-max
dot1x tx-period
An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the
authentication, only EAPOL (Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN) traffic is allowed through
the port to which a client is connected. Once authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through
the port.
FTOS supports RADIUS and Active Directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.

FTOS limits network access for certain users by using VLAN assignments. 802.1X with VLAN
assignment has these characteristics when configured on the switch and the RADIUS server.
802.1X is supported on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series.
802.1X is not supported on the LAG or the channel members of a LAG.
If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1X authorization is disabled, the port is
configured in its access VLAN after successful authentication.
If 802.1X authorization is enabled but the VLAN information from the RADIUS server is not
valid, the port returns to the unauthorized state and remains in the configured access VLAN. This
prevents ports from appearing unexpectedly in an inappropriate VLAN due to a configuration
error. Configuration errors create an entry in Syslog.
Security | 1303
If 802.1X authorization is enabled and all information from the RADIUS server is valid, the port is
placed in the specified VLAN after authentication.

If port security is enabled on an 802.1X port with VLAN assignment, the port is placed in the
RADIUS server assigned VLAN.
If 802.1X is disabled on the port, it is returned to the configured access VLAN.
When the port is in the force authorized, force unauthorized, or shutdown state, it is placed in the
configured access VLAN.
If an 802.1X port is authenticated and put in the RADIUS server assigned VLAN, any change to
the port access VLAN configuration will not take effect.
The 802.1X with VLAN assignment feature is not supported on trunk ports, dynamic ports, or
with dynamic-access port assignment through a VLAN membership.

ces Enable dot1x globally; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.

To disable dot1x on an globally, use the no dot1x authentication command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface
Commands

ces Enable dot1x on an interface; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.

To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Related
dot1x authentication (Configuration) Enable dot1x globally
Commands
1304 | Security
ces Configure a authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication.
Syntax dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts number]

To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id
[max-attempts number] command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
max-attempts number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-attempts followed number of
attempts desired before authentication fails.
Range: 1 to 5
Default: 3
Defaults 3 attempts
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series and S-Series
History
Usage If the host responds to 802.1X with an incorrect login/password, the login fails. The switch will
Information attempt to authenticate again until the maximum attempts configured is reached. If the authentication
fails after all allowed attempts, the interface is moved to the authentication failed VLAN.
Once the authentication VLAN is assigned, the port-state must be toggled to restart authentication.
Authentication will occur at the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).
Related
dot1x port-control Enable port-control on an interface
Commands
dot1x guest-vlan Configure a guest VLAN for non-dot1x devices
show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X information on an interface
dot1x auth-server
ces Configure the authentication server to RADIUS.
Syntax dot1x auth-server radius
Command
History
Security | 1305
dot1x guest-vlan
ces Configure a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable.
Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id

To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command.
Parameters
Range: 1 to 4094
Command
History
Usage 802.1X authentication is enabled when an interface is connected to the switch. If the host fails to
Information respond within a designated amount of time, the authenticator places the port in the guest VLAN.
If a device does not respond within 30 seconds, it is assumed that the device is not 802.1X capable.
Therefore, a guest VLAN is allocated to the interface and authentication, for the device, will occur at
the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication).
If the host fails authentication for the designated amount of times, the authenticator places the port in
authentication failed VLAN (dot1x auth-fail-vlan).
Note: Layer 3 portion of guest VLAN and authentication fail VLANs can be created
regardless if the VLAN is assigned to an interface or not. Once an interface is assigned a guest
VLAN (which has an IP address), then routing through the guest VLAN is the same as any
other traffic. However, interface may join/leave a VLAN dynamically.
Related
Commands dot1x auth-fail-vlan Configure a VLAN for authentication failures
dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic re-authentication
show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X information on an interface
dot1x max-eap-req
ces Configure the maximum number of times an EAP (Extensive Authentication Protocol) request is
transmitted before the session times out.
Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command.
Parameters
number Enter the number of times an EAP request is transmitted before a session time-out.
Range: 1 to 10
Default: 2
Defaults 2
1306 | Security
Command
History
Related
interface range Configure a range of interfaces
Commands
dot1x port-control
ces Enable port control on an interface.
Syntax dot1x port-control {force-authorized | auto | force-unauthorized}
Parameters
force-authorized Enter the keyword force-authorized to forcibly authorize a port.
auto Enter the keyword auto to authorize a port based on the 802.1X operation
result.
force-unauthorized Enter the keyword force-unauthorized to forcibly de-authorize a port.
Command
History
Usage The authenticator performs authentication only when port-control is set to auto.
Information
dot1x quiet-period
ces Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a
client.
Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds

To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
Security | 1307
ces Enable periodic re-authentication of the client.
Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds]

To disable periodic re-authentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command.
Parameters
interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval followed by the interval time, in seconds,
after which re-authentication will be initiated.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 3600 (1 hour)
Defaults 3600 seconds (1 hour)
Command
History
Related
interface range Configure a range of interfaces
Commands
dot1x reauth-max
ces Configure the maximum number of times a port can re-authenticate before the port becomes
unauthorized.
Syntax dot1x reauth-max number

To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command.
Parameters
number Enter the permitted number of re-authentications.
Range: 1 - 10
Default: 2
Defaults 2
Command
History
ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time out.
Syntax dot1x server-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x server-timeout command.
1308 | Security
Parameters
Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
ces Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time out.
Syntax dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x supplicant-timeout command.
Parameters
Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
dot1x tx-period
ces Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs are transmitted by the Authenticator PAE.
Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds

To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command.
Parameters
seconds Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted.
Range: 1 to 31536000 (1 year)
Default: 30
Defaults 30 seconds
Command
History
Security | 1309
ces Display the 802.1X information on an interface.
Syntax show dot1x interface interface
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 51-5. show dot1x interface command Example

FTOS#show dot1x int Gi 2/32

-----------------------------
Port Control: AUTO
Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED
Untagged VLAN id: None
Guest VLAN: Enable
Guest VLAN id: 10
Auth-Fail VLAN: Enable
Auth-Fail VLAN id: 11
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: 3
ReAuth Max: 2
Max-EAP-Req: 2
Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST
Auth PAE State: Initialize

Backend State: Initialize
FTOS#
SSH Server and SCP Commands

FTOS supports SSH Protocol versions 1.5 and 2.0. Secure Shell (SSH) is a protocol for
secure remote login over an insecure network. SSH sessions are encrypted and use
authentication.
crypto key generate
1310 | Security
debug ip ssh
ip scp topdir
ip ssh authentication-retries
ip ssh connection-rate-limit
ip ssh hostbased-authentication
ip ssh key-size
ip ssh password-authentication
ip ssh pub-key-file
ip ssh rhostsfile
ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config)
ip ssh rsa-authentication (EXEC)
ip ssh server
show crypto
show ip ssh
show ip ssh client-pub-keys
show ip ssh rsa-authentication
ssh
crypto key generate

ces Generate keys for the SSH server.
Syntax crypto key generate {rsa | rsa1}
Parameters
rsa Enter the keyword rsa followed by the key size to generate a SSHv2 RSA
host keys.
Range: 1024 to 2048
Default: 1024
rsa1 Enter the keyword rsa1 followed by the key size to generate a SSHv1 RSA
host keys.
Range: 1024 to 2048
Default: 1024
Defaults Key size 1024
Command
History
Example Figure 51-6. crypto key generate rsa1 command example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#crypto key generate rsa1
Enter key size <1024-2048>. Default<1024>: 1024
Host key already exists. Do you want to replace. [y/n] :y

FTOS(conf)#
Security | 1311
Usage The host keys are required for key-exchange by the SSH server. If the keys are not found when the
Information server is enabled (ip ssh server enable), the keys are automatically generated.
This command requires user interaction and will generate a prompt prior to overwriting any existing
host keys.
Note: Only a user with superuser permissions should generate host-keys.
Related
ip ssh server Enable the SSH server.
Commands
show crypto Display SSH host public keys
debug ip ssh
ces Enables collecting SSH debug information.
Syntax debug ip ssh {client | server}

To disable debugging, use the no debug ip ssh {client | server} command.
Parameters
client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the
client.
server Enter the keyword server to enable collecting debug information on the
server.
Defaults Disabled on both client and server
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Usage Debug information includes details for key-exchange, authentication, and established session for each
Information connection.
ip scp topdir
ces Identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer.
Syntax ip scp topdir directory

To return to the default setting, enter no ip scp topdir command.
Parameters
directory Enter a directory name.
Defaults The internal flash (flash:) is the default directory.
1312 | Security
Command
History
Usage To configure the switch as a SCP server, use the ip ssh server command.
Information
Related
ip ssh server Enable SSH and SCP server on the switch.
Commands
ip ssh authentication-retries
ces Configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user.
Syntax ip ssh authentication-retries 1-10
Parameters
1-10 Enter the number of maximum retries to authenticate a user.
Range: 1 to 10
Default: 3
Defaults 3
Command
History
Usage This command specifies the maximum number of attempts to authenticate a user on a SSH connection
Information with the remote host for password authentication. SSH will disconnect when the number of password
failures exceeds authentication-retries.
ip ssh connection-rate-limit
ces Configure the maximum number of incoming SSH connections per minute.
Syntax ip ssh connection-rate-limit 1-10
Parameters
1-10 Enter the number of maximum number of incoming SSH connections allowed per
minute.
Range: 1 to 10 per minute
Default: 10 per minute
Defaults 10 per minute
Security | 1313
Command

History
ip ssh hostbased-authentication
ces Enable hostbased-authentication for the SSHv2 server.
Syntax ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable

To disable hostbased-authentication for SSHv2 server, use the no ip ssh
hostbased-authentication enable command.
Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable hostbased-authentication for SSHv2 server.
Defaults Disable by default
Command
History
Usage If this command is enabled, clients can login without a password prompt. This provides two levels of
Information authentication:
rhost-authentication is done with the file specified in the ip ssh rhostfile command
checking client host-keys is done with the file specified in the ip ssh pub-key-file command
If no ip ssh rsa-authentication enable is executed, host-based authentication is disabled.
Note: Administrators must specify the two files (rhosts and pub-key-file) to configure
host-based authentication.
Related
ip ssh pub-key-file Public keys of trusted hosts from a file.
Commands
ip ssh rhostsfile Trusted hosts and users for rhost authentication.
ip ssh key-size
ces Configure the size of the server-generated RSA SSHv1 key.
Syntax ip ssh key-size 512-869
Parameters
512-869 Enter the key-size number for the server-generated RSA SSHv1 key.
Range: 512 to 869
Default: 768
Defaults Key size 768
1314 | Security
Command
History
Usage The server-generated key is used for SSHv1 key-exchange.

Information
ip ssh password-authentication
ces Enable password authentication for the SSH server.
Syntax ip ssh password-authentication enable

To disable password-authentication, use the no ip ssh password-authentication enable.
Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable password-authentication for the SSH server.
Defaults enabled
Command
History
Usage With password authentication enabled, users can authenticate using local, RADIUS, or TACACS+
Information password fallback order as configured.
ip ssh pub-key-file
ces Specify the file to be used for host-based authentication.
Syntax ip ssh pub-key-file {WORD}
Parameters
WORD Enter the file name for the host-based authentication.
Command
History
Security | 1315
Example Figure 51-7. ip ssh pub-key-file Command Example
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh pub-key-file flash://knownhosts
FTOS(conf)#
Usage This command specifies the file to be used for the host-based authentication. The file creates/
Information overwrites the file flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/knownhosts and deletes the user specified file. Even
though this is a global configuration command, it will not appear in the running configuration since
this command needs to be run just once.
The file contains the OpenSSH compatible public keys of the host for which host-based authentication
is allowed. An example known host file format:
poclab4,123.12.1.123 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAox/

QQp8xYhzOxn07yh4VGPAoUfgKoieTHO9G4sNV+ui+DWEc3cgYAcU5Lai1MU2ODrzhCwyDNp05tKBU3t
ReG1o8AxLi6+S4hyEMqHzkzBFNVqHzpQc+Rs4p2urzV0F4pRKnaXdHf3Lk4D460HZRhhVrxqeNxPDpEn
WIMPJi0ds= ashwani@poclab4
Note: For rhostfile and pub-key-file, the administrator must FTP the file to the chassis.
Related
show ip ssh client-pub-keys Display the client-public keys used for the host-based authentication.
Commands
ip ssh rhostsfile
ces Specify the rhost file to be used for host-based authorization.
Syntax ip ssh rhostsfile {WORD}
Parameters
WORD Enter the rhost file name for the host-based authentication.
Command
History
Example Figure 51-8. ip ssh rhostsfile Command Example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh rhostsfile flash://shosts
FTOS(conf)#
Usage This command specifies the rhost file to be used for host-based authentication. This file creates/
Information overwrites the file flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/shosts and deletes the user specified file. Even though this
is a global configuration command, it will not appear in the running configuration since this command
needs to be run just once.
1316 | Security
This file contains hostnames and usernames, for which hosts and users, rhost-authentication can be
allowed.
Note: For rhostfile and pub-key-file, the administrator must FTP the file to the switch.
ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config)

ces Enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server.
Syntax ip ssh rsa-authentication enable

To disable RSA authentication, use the no ip ssh rsa-authentication enable command.
Parameters
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server.
Defaults RSA authentication is disabled by default
Command
History
Usage Enabling RSA authentication allows the user to login without being prompted for a password. In
Information addition, the OpenSSH compatible SSHv2 RSA public key must be added to the list of authorized keys
(ip ssh rsa-authentication my-authorized-keys device://filename command).
Related
ip ssh rsa-authentication (EXEC) Add keys for RSA authentication.
Commands
ip ssh rsa-authentication (EXEC)

ces Add keys for the RSA authentication.
Syntax ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys WORD}

To delete the authorized keys, use the no ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys}
command.
Parameters
my-authorized-keys WORD Enter the keyword my-authorized-keys followed by the file
name of the RSA authorized-keys.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Security | 1317
Usage If you want to log in without being prompted for a password, log in through RSA authentication. To do
Information that, you must first add the SSHv2 RSA public keys to the list of authorized keys. This command adds
the specified RSA keys to the following file:
flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorized-keys-username (where username is the user associated with
this terminal).
Note: The no form of this command deletes the file flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/

authorized-keys-username
Related
show ip ssh rsa-authentication Display RSA authorized keys.
Commands
ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) Enable RSA authentication.
ip ssh server
ces Configure an SSH server.
Syntax ip ssh server {enable | port port-number} [version {1 | 2}]

To disable SSH server functions, enter no ip ssh server enable command.
Parameters
enable Enter the key word enable to start the SSH server.
port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port followed by the port number of the
listening port of the SSH server.
Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 22
[version {1 | 2}] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version followed by the SSH version 1
or 2 to specify only SSHv1 or SSHv2.
Defaults Default listening port is 22
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Expanded to include specifying SSHv1 or SSHv2; Introduced for C-Series
Usage This command enables the SSH server and begins listening on a port. If a port is not specified, listening
Information is on SSH default port 22.
Example Figure 51-9. ip ssh server port Command Example

FTOS# conf
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh server port 45
FTOS(conf)# ip ssh server enable
FTOS#
Related
show ip ssh Display the ssh information
Commands
1318 | Security
show crypto
ces Display the public part of the SSH host-keys.
Syntax show crypto key mypubkey {rsa | rsa1}
Parameters
Key Enter the keyword key to display the host public key.
mypubkey Enter the keyword mypubkey to display the host public key.
rsa Enter the keyword rsa to display the host SSHv2 RSA public key.
rsa1 Enter the keyword rsa1 to display the host SSHv1 RSA public key.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 51-10. show crypto Command Examples

FTOS#show crypto key mypubkey rsa
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAtzkZME/
e8V8smnXR22EJGQhCMkEOkuisa+OILVoMYU1ZKGfj0W5BPCSvF/
x5ifqYFFwUzJNOcsJK7vjSsnmMhChF2YSvXlvTJ6h971FJAQlOsgd0ycpocsF+DNLKfJnx7SAjhakFQMwG
g/g78ZkDT3Ydr8KKjfSI4Bg/WS8B740=
FTOS#show crypto key mypubkey rsa1

1024 35
1310600154808733989532575153972496578500722064442949636740809356830889610203172266
7988956754966765265006379622189779927609278523638839223055081819166009928132616408
6643457746022192295189039929663345791173742247431553750501676929660273790601494434
050000015179864425629613385774919236081771341059533760063913083
FTOS#
Usage This command is useful if the remote SSH client implements Strict Host Key Checking. You can copy
Information the host key to your list of known hosts.
Related
crypto key generate Generate SSH keys.
Commands
show ip ssh
ces Display information about established SSH sessions.
Syntax show ip ssh
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Security | 1319
Example Figure 51-11. show ip ssh Command Example
FTOS#show ip ssh
SSH server : enabled.
SSH server version : v1 and v2.
Password Authentication : enabled.
Hostbased Authentication : disabled.
RSA Authentication : disabled.
Vty Encryption Remote IP
0 3DES 172.16.1.162
1 3DES 172.16.1.162
2 3DES 172.16.1.162
FTOS
Related
ip ssh server Configure an SSH server.
Commands
show ip ssh client-pub-keys Display the client-public keys.
show ip ssh client-pub-keys

ces Display the client public keys used in host-based authentication.
Syntax show ip ssh client-pub-keys
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 51-12. show ip ssh client-pub-keys Command Example

FTOS#show ip ssh client-pub-keys
poclab4,123.12.1.123 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAox/

QQp8xYhzOxn07yh4VGPAoUfgKoieTHO9G4sNV+ui+DWEc3cgYAcU5Lai1MU2ODrzhCwyDNp05tKBU3tReG1
o8AxLi6+S4hyEMqHzkzBFNVqHzpQc+Rs4p2urzV0F4pRKnaXdHf3Lk4D460HZRhhVrxqeNxPDpEnWIMPJi0
ds= ashwani@poclab4
FTOS#
Usage This command displays the contents of the file flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/knownhosts

Information
Related
ip ssh pub-key-file Configure the file name for the host-based authentication
Commands
show ip ssh rsa-authentication

ces Display the authorized-keys for the RSA authentication.
Syntax show ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys}
1320 | Security
Parameters
my-authorized-keys Display the RSA authorized keys.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 51-13. show ip ssh rsa-authentication Command Example

FTOS#show ip ssh rsa-authentication my-authorized-keys
ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAyB17l4gFp4r2DRHIvMc1VZd0Sg5GQxRV1y1X1JOMeO6Nd0WuYyzrQMM
4qJAoBwtneOXfLBcHF3V2hcMIqaZN+CRCnw/
zCMlnCf0+qVTd1oofsea5r09kS0xTp0CNfHXZ3NuGCq9Ov33m9+U9tMwhS8vy8AVxdH4x4km3c3t5Jvc=
freedom@poclab4
FTOS#
Usage This command displays the contents of the file flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorized-keys.username.

Information
Related
ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) Configure the RSA authorized keys.
Commands
ssh
ces Open an SSH connection specifying the hostname, username, port number and version of the SSH
client.
FTOS supports both inbound and outbound SSH sessions using IPv4 or IPv6 addressing. Inbound SSH
supports accessing the system through the management interface as well as through a physical Layer 3
interface.
Syntax ssh {hostname | ipv4 address | ipv6 address} [-l username | -p port-number | -v {1 | 2}]
Parameters
hostname (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address or the hostname of the remote device.
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf following by the VRF
Instance name to open a SSH connection to that instance.
ipv4 address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format A.B.C.D.
prefix-length prefix length in the /x format.
Range: /0 to /128
-l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l followed by the user name used in this SSH
session.
Default: The user name of the user associated with the terminal.
Security | 1321
-p port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -p followed by the port number.

Range: 1 to 65536
Default: 22
-v {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -v followed by the SSH version 1 or 2.
Default: The version from the protocol negotiation
Defaults As above.
Command
History
Version 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 support; Introduced for C-Series
Example Figure 51-14. ssh Command Example

FTOS#ssh 123.12.1.123 -l ashwani -p 5005 -v 2
Trace List Commands

IP trace lists create an Access Control List (ACLs) to trace all traffic into the E-Series switch. This
feature is useful for tracing Denial of Service (DOS) attacks.
Note: For other Access Control List commands, see the chapters Chapter 10, ACL VLAN
Group and Chapter 9, Access Control Lists (ACL).
clear counters ip trace-group

deny
deny tcp
deny udp
ip trace-group
ip trace-list
permit
permit tcp
permit udp
seq
show config
show ip accounting trace-lists
clear counters ip trace-group

e Erase all counters maintained for trace lists.
Syntax clear counters ip trace-group [trace-list-name]
1322 | Security
Parameters
trace-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured trace list.
deny
e Configure a filter that drops IP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] | log] [order number]

or
Parameters
specifies that the access list will deny all IP protocols.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to deny based on the protocol identified in the IP
protocol header.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
address.
filter.
bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count only bytes processed by the
filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in a
Trace-list log file.
order number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order followed by a number from 0 to 7 as
the order number.
Command Modes TRACE LIST
Related
deny tcp Assign a trace list filter to deny TCP packets.
Commands
deny udp Assign a trace list filter to deny UDP packets.
ip trace-group Create a trace list.
Security | 1323
deny tcp
e Configure a filter that drops TCP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax deny tcp {source address mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]]
{destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | log] [order
number]

or
Use the no deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host
ip-address} command.
Parameters
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
command parameter.)
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range
logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535.
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count only bytes processed by the filter.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in a Trace-list log
file.
order number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order followed by a number from 0 to 7 as the
order number.
Related
deny Assign a trace list filter to deny IP traffic.
Commands
deny udp Assign a trace list filter to deny UDP traffic.
1324 | Security
deny udp
e Configure a filter to drop UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any
| host ip-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | log] [order number]

or
Use the no deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
Parameters
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
Range: 0 to 65535
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count only bytes
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to have the information kept in a Trace-list
log file.
order number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order followed by a number from 0 to 7 as the
order number.
Related
deny Assign a trace list filter to deny IP traffic.
Commands
deny tcp Assign a trace list filter to deny TCP traffic.
Security | 1325
ip trace-group
e Assign a trace list globally to process all incoming packets to the switch.
Syntax ip trace-group trace-list-name

To delete an trace list configuration, use the no ip trace-group trace-list-name command.
Parameters
trace-list-name Enter the name of a configured trace list.
Usage You can assign one Trace list to the chassis.

Information
If there are unresolved next-hops and a Trace-list is enabled, there is a possibility that the traffic hitting
the CPU will not be rate-limited.
Related
ip trace-list Configure a trace list ACL.
Commands
ip trace-list
e Configure a trace list, based on IP addresses or protocols, to filter all traffic on the E-Series.
Syntax ip trace-list trace-list-name

To delete a trace list, use the no ip trace-list trace-list-name command.
Parameters
trace-list-name Enter a string up to 16 characters long as the access list name.
Example Figure 51-15. ip trace-list Command Example

FTOS(conf)#ip trace-list suzanne
FTOS(config-trace-acl)#
Usage After you create a trace list, you must apply it to the E-Series using the ip trace-group command in the
Information CONFIGURATION mode.
Related
Commands ip trace-group View the current configuration.
1326 | Security
permit
e Configure a filter to pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax permit {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [count [byte]| log]

or
Parameters
specifies that the access list will permit all IP protocols.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to permit based on the protocol identified in the
IP protocol header.
address.
filter.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count only bytes processed by the
filter.
Related
Commands ip trace-list Create a trace list.
permit tcp Assign a trace list filter to forward TCP packets.
permit udp Assign a trace list filter to forward UDP packets.
permit tcp
e Configure a filter to pass TCP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | log] [order number]
Security | 1327
or
Use the no permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
Parameters
address.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
parameter.)
Range: 0 to 65535.
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
filter.
filter.
the order number.
Related
Commands ip trace-list Create a trace list.
permit Assign a trace list filter to forward IP packets.
permit udp Assign a trace list filter to forward UDP packets.
1328 | Security
permit udp
e Configure a filter to pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Syntax permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask |
any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] | log] [order number]

or
Use the no permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any |
Parameters
address.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
parameter.)
Range: 0 to 65535
filter.
filter.
the order number.
Related
Commands ip trace-list Configure a trace list.
permit Assign a trace list filter to forward IP packets.
permit tcp Assign a trace list filter to forward TCP packets.
Security | 1329
seq
e Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in a trace list while creating the filter.
Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ip-protocol-number | ip | tcp | udp} {source mask |
any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]]
[precedence precedence] [tos tos-value] [count [byte] | log]
Parameters
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting
this condition.
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets
meeting this criteria.
ip-protocol-number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to filter based on the protocol identified in
the IP protocol header.
ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword
ip specifies that the access list will permit all IP protocols.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a TCP access list filter.
udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a UDP access list filter.
source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were
sent.
address.
eq = equal to
neq = not equal to
gt = greater than
lt = less than
port parameter.)
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port
numbers if using the range logical operand.
Range: 0 to 65535
23 = Telnet
20 and 21 = FTP
25 = SMTP
169 = SNMP
precedence precedence Enter the keyword precedence followed by a number from 0 to 7 as
the precedence value.
tos tos-value Enter the keyword tos followed by a number from 0 to 15 as the TOS
value.
the filter.
1330 | Security
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count only bytes processed by
the filter.
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Deprecated established keywordnot supported on TeraScale line
cards.
Related
Commands deny Configure a filter to drop packets.
show config
e View the current IP trace list configuration.
Syntax show config
Example Figure 51-16. show config Command Example in TRACE LIST Mode
FTOS(config-trace-acl)#show config
!
ip trace-list suzanne
seq 5 deny tcp any any
FTOS(config-trace-acl)#
show ip accounting trace-lists

e View the trace lists created on the switch and the sequence of filters.
Syntax show ip accounting trace-lists [trace-list-name [linecard number]]
Parameters
trace-list-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the trace list to be displayed.
linecard number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card number to
view the Trace list information on that line card.
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0-7on the C300
E-Series Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Security | 1331
Example Figure 51-17. show ip accounting trace-lists Command Example
FTOS#show ip accounting trace-list suzanne

Trace List suzanne
seq 5 deny ip any any count (0x00 packets)
seq 10 permit tcp 10.1.1.0 /24 any count bytes (0x00 bytes)
FTOS#
Secure DHCP Commands

DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a
suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks.

ip dhcp relay
ip dhcp snooping

cs Clear the DHCP binding table.
Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding
Default None
Command
History
Related
Commands
ip dhcp relay
cs Enable Option 82.
Syntax ip dhcp relay information-option [trust-downstream]
Parameters
trust-downstream Configure the system to trust Option 82 when it is received from the
previous-hop router.
1332 | Security
Default Disabled
Command
History
ip dhcp snooping
cs Enable DHCP Snooping globally.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping
Default Disabled
Command
History
Usage When enabled, no learning takes place until snooping is enabled on a VLAN. Upon disabling DHCP
Information Snooping the binding table is deleted, and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection
are disabled.
Related
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
Commands

cs Delay writing the binding table for a specified time.
Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write-delay minutes
Parameters
minutes Range: 5-21600
Default None
Command
History

cs Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface type
slot/port lease number
Security | 1333
Parameters
mac address Enter the keyword mac followed by the MAC address of the host to which the
server is leasing the IP address.
vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan-id followed by the VLAN to which the host belongs.
Range: 2-4094
ip ip-address Enter the keyword ip followed by the IP address that the server is leasing.
interface type Enter the keyword interface followed by the type of interface to which the host is
connected.
For an 10/100 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastethernet.
For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword gigabitethernet.
For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet.
tengigabitethernet.
lease time Enter the keyword lease followed by the amount of time the IP address will be
leased.
Range: 1-4294967295
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Default None
Command
History
Related
Commands

cs Renew the binding table.
Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Default None
Command
History

cs Configure an interface as trusted.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust
1334 | Security
Default Untrusted
Command
History
cs Enable IP Source Guard.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation
Default Disabled
Command
History

cs Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name
Parameters
name Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping.
Default Disabled
Command
History
Usage When enabled the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLAN(s). Note
Information that learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN.
Related
Commands
ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted.

cs Display the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Syntax show ip dhcp snooping binding
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Security | 1335
Default None
Command
History
Related
clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Commands
1336 | Security
52
Service Provider Bridging
Overview
Service Provider Bridging is composed of VLAN Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider
Backbone Bridging as described in the FTOS Configuration Guide Service Provider Bridging chapter.
This chapter includes CLI information for FTOS Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables
protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. L2PT is available in FTOS for the C-Series c, E-Series
e, and S-Series s.
L2PT is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.2.1.0. and later.
Refer to Chapter 61, VLAN Stacking or Chapter 58, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Chapter 20,
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) for further information related to those features.
Commands
The L2PT commands are:
debug protocol-tunnel
protocol-tunnel
protocol-tunnel destination-mac
protocol-tunnel enable
protocol-tunnel rate-limit
show protocol-tunnel

L2PT is enabled at the interface VLAN-Stack VLAN level. For details on Stackable VLAN
(VLAN-Stacking) commands, see Chapter 61, VLAN Stacking.
The default behavior is to disable protocol packet tunneling through the 802.1q tunnel.
Rate-limiting is required to protect against BPDU attacks.
A port channel (including through LACP) can be configured as a VLAN-Stack access or trunk
port.
ARP packets work as expected across the tunnel.
FEFD works the same as with Layer 2 links.
Protocols that use Multicast MAC addresses (OSPF for example) work as expected and carry over
to the other end of the VLAN-Stack VLAN.
Service Provider Bridging | 1337

debug protocol-tunnel
ces Enable debugging to ensure incoming packets are received and rewritten to a new MAC address.
Syntax debug protocol-tunnel interface {in | out | both} [vlan vlan-id] [count value]
To disable debugging, use the no debug protocol-tunnel interface {in | out | both} [vlan
vlan-id] [count value] command.
Parameters
interface Enter one of the following interfaces and slot/port information:
number:
ExaScale.
information.
in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing
interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID.
Range: 1 to 4094
count value Enter the keyword count followed by the number of debug outputs.
Range: 1 to 100
Defaults Debug Disabled
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series and E-Series ExaScale.
History
protocol-tunnel
ces Enable protocol tunneling per VLAN-Stack VLAN.
Syntax protocol-tunnel stp

To disable protocol tunneling, use the no protocol-tunnel stp command.
Parameters
stp Enter the keyword stp to enable protocol tunneling on a spanning tree, including STP, MSTP, RSTP,
and PVST.
Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN
1338 | Service Provider Bridging

Command
History
Example Figure 52-1. Protocol-tunneling Command Example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#interface vlan 2
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#vlan-stack compatible
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#member Gi1/2-3
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#protocol-tunnel stp
FTOS(conf-if-vl-2)#
Usage
Information Note: When VLAN-Stacking is enabled, no protocol packets are tunneled.
Related
show protocol-tunnel Display tunneling information for all VLANs
Commands
protocol-tunnel destination-mac
ces Overwrite the BPDU destination MAC address with a specific value.
Syntax protocol-tunnel destination-mac xstp address
Parameters
stp Change the default destination MAC address used for L2PT to another value.
Defaults The default destination MAC is 01:01:e8:00:00:00.
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
History
Usage When VLAN-Stacking is enabled, no protocol packets are tunneled.

Information
Related
Commands
protocol-tunnel enable
ces Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system.
Syntax protocol-tunnel enable

To disable protocol tunneling, use the no protocol-tunnel enable command.
Defaults Disabled

Command

History
Usage FTOS must have the default CAM profile with the default microcode before you enable L2PT.
Information
protocol-tunnel rate-limit
ces Enable traffic rate limiting per box.
Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate

To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command.
Parameters
rate Enter the rate in frames per second.
Range: 75 to 3000
Default: 75
Defaults 75 Frames per second
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series Terascale, and E-Series ExaScale. Maximum rate
History
limit on E-Series reduced from 4000 to 3000.
Example Figure 52-2. protocol-tunnel rate-limit Command Example

FTOS#
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#protocol-tunnel rate-limit 1000
FTOS(conf)#
Related
Commands
show running-config Display the current configuration.
show protocol-tunnel
ces Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN.
Syntax show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id]
Parameters
vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display information
for the one VLAN.
Range: 1 to 4094
Command Modes EXEC
1340 | Service Provider Bridging

Command
History
Example Figure 52-3. show protocol-tunnel Command Example

FTOS#show protocol-tunnel
System Rate-Limit: 1000 Frames/second
Interface Vlan Protocol(s)
Gi1/2 2 STP, PVST
Gi1/3 3 STP, PVST
Po35 4 STP, PVST
FTOS#
Example Figure 52-4. show protocol-tunnel command example for a specific VLAN
FTOS#show protocol-tunnel vlan 2
System Rate-Limit: 1000 Frames/second
Interface Vlan Protocol(s)
Gi1/2 2 STP, PVST
FTOS#
Related
show running-config Display the current configuration.
Commands

1342
|
Service Provider Bridging
53
sFlow
Overview
sFlow commands are supported on these platforms: c e s.
FTOS sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. The sFlow Agent
combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the
sFlow Collector. The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different
devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.

Dell Force10 recommends that the sFlow Collector be connected to the Dell Force10 chassis
through a line card port rather than the RPM Management Ethernet port.
FTOS exports all sFlow packets to the sFlow Collector. A small sampling rate can equate to a
large number of exported packets. A backoff mechanism will automatically be applied to reduce
this amount. Some sampled packets may be dropped when the exported packet rate is high and the
backoff mechanism is about to or is starting to take effect. The dropEvent counter, in the sFlow
packet, will always be zero.
sFlow sampling is done on a per-port basis.
Community list and local preference fields are not filled up in the extended gateway element in the
sFlow datagram.
The 802.1P source priority field is not filled up in the extended switch element in the sFlow
datagram.
Only Destination and Destination Peer AS numbers are packed in the dst-as-path field in the
extended gateway element.
If the packet being sampled is redirected using PBR (Policy-Based Routing), the sFlow datagram
may contain incorrect extended gateway/router information.
sFlow does not support packing extended information for IPv6 packets. Only the first 128 bytes of
the IPv6 packet is shipped in the datagram.
The source VLAN field in the extended switch element will not be packed in case of a routed
packet.
The destination VLAN field in the extended switch element will not be packed in case of a
multicast packet.
The maximum number of packets that can be sampled and processed per second is:
7500 packets when no extended information packing is enabled
7500 packets when only extended-switch information packing is enabled
(see sflow extended-switch enable)
1600 packets when extended-router and/or extended-gateway information
packing is enabled (see Figure and sflow extended-gateway enable)
sFlow | 1343
Commands
The sFlow commands are:

sflow collector
sflow enable (Global)
sflow enable (Interface)
sflow extended-gateway enable
sflow extended-router enable
sflow extended-switch enable
sflow polling-interval (Global)
sflow polling-interval (Interface)
sflow sample-rate (Global)
sflow sample-rate (Interface)
show sflow
show sflow linecard
1344 | sFlow
sflow collector
ces Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded.
Syntax sflow collector {ipv4-address | ipv6-address} agent-addr {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}

[number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number]
Parameters
sflow collector ipv4-address | Enter the IPv4 (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the
ipv6-address sFlow collector device.
agent-addr ipv4-address | Enter the IPv4 (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the
ipv6-address sFlow agent in the router.
number (OPTIONAL) Enter the UDP port number (User Datagram

Protocol).
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 6343
max-datagram-size number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword max-datagram-size
followed by the size number in bytes.
Range: 400 to 1500
Default: 1400
Command
Version 8.4.2.3 Support for IPv6 sFlow collectors and agents was added on the E-series TeraScale,
History
Version 8.4.1.1 Support for IPv6 sFlow collectors and agents was added on the E-series ExaScale.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduces on S-Series Stacking
Version 6.5.1.0 Expanded the no form of the command to mirror the syntax used to configure
Usage You can configure up to two sFlow collectors (IPv4 or IPv6). If two collectors are configured, traffic
Information samples are sent to both.
The sFlow agent address is carried in a field in SFlow packets and is used by the collector to identify
the sFlow agent.
IPv6 sFlow collectors and agents are supported on E-Series (ExaScale and TeraScale), C-Series, and
S-Series routers.
To delete a configured collector, enter the no sflow collector {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}

agent-addr {ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] |
[max-datagram-size number] command.
sFlow | 1345
As part of the sFlow-MIB, if the SNMP request originates from a configured collector, FTOS will
return the corresponding configured agent IP in MIB requests. FTOS checks to ensure that two entries
are not configured for the same collector IP with a different agent IP. Should that happen, FTOS
generates the following error:
%Error: Different agent-addr attempted for an existing collector
sflow enable (Global)

ces Enable sFlow globally.
Syntax sflow enable

To disable sFlow, use the no sflow enable command.
Defaults sFlow is disabled by default
Command
History
Usage sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, sFlow needs to be enable on individual
Information interfaces where sFlow sampling is desired.
Related
sflow enable (Interface) Enable sFlow on Interfaces.
Commands
sflow enable (Interface)

ces Enable sFlow on Interfaces.
Syntax sflow enable

To disable sFlow, use the no sflow enable command.
Defaults sFlow is disabled by default on all interfaces
Command
History
1346 | sFlow
Usage When sFlow is enable on an interface, flow sampling is done on any traffic going out of the interface.
Information
Note: Once a physical port is a member of a LAG, it will inherit the sFlow configuration
from the LAG port.
Related
sflow enable (Global) Turn sFlow on globally
Commands
sflow extended-gateway enable

e Enable packing information on an extended gateway.
Syntax sflow extended-gateway [extended-router] [extended-switch] enable

To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-gateway [extended-router]
[extended-switch] enable command.
Parameters
extended-router Enter the keyword extended-router to collect extended router
information.
extended-switch Enter the keyword extended-switch to collect extended switch
information.
enable Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage The show sflow command displays the configured global extended information.
Information
FTOS 7.8.1.0 and later enhances the sFlow implementation for real time traffic analysis on the
E-Series to provide extended gateway information in cases where the destination IP addresses are
learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where the destination is reachable over ECMP.
Example Figure 53-1. show sflow Command Output

FTOS#show sflow
sFlow services are enabled
Global default sampling rate: 64
Global default counter polling interval: 1000
Global extended information enabled: gateway, router, switch
1 collectors configured
Collector IP addr: 20.20.20.2, Agent IP addr: 10.11.201.7, UDP port: 6343
1732336 UDP packets exported
0 UDP packets dropped
12510225 sFlow samples collected
0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling
FTOS#
Related
show sflow Display the sFlow configuration
Commands
sFlow | 1347
sflow extended-router enable
e Enable packing information on a router and switch.
Syntax sflow extended-router [extended-switch] enable

To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-router [extended-switch] enable
command.
Parameters
extended-switch Enter the keyword extended-switch to collect extended switch information.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage FTOS 7.8.1.0 and later enhances the sFlow implementation for real time traffic analysis on the
Information E-Series to provide extended gateway information in cases where the destination IP addresses are
Related
sflow extended-gateway enable Enable packing information on an extended gateway
Commands
sflow extended-switch enable Enable packing information on a switch.
sflow extended-switch enable

ces Enable packing information on a switch only.
Syntax sflow extended-switch enable

To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-switch [enable] command.
Parameters
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
1348 | sFlow
Usage FTOS 7.8.1.0 and later enhances the sFlow implementation for real time traffic analysis on the
Information E-Series to provide extended gateway information in cases where the destination IP addresses are
Related
sflow extended-gateway enable Enable packing information on an extended gateway.
Commands
sflow extended-router enable Enable packing information on a router.
sflow polling-interval (Global)

ces Set the sFlow polling interval at a global level.
Syntax sflow polling-interval interval value

To return to the default, use the no sflow polling-interval interval command.
Parameters
interval value Enter the interval value in seconds.
Default: 20 seconds
Defaults 20 seconds
Command
History
Usage The polling interval for an interface is the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of
Information counters to be sent to the collector. This command changes the global default counter polling (20 seconds)
interval. You can configure an interface to use a different polling interval.
Related
sflow polling-interval (Interface) Set the polling interval for an interface
Commands
sflow polling-interval (Interface)

ces Set the sFlow polling interval at an interface (overrides the global-level setting.)
Syntax sflow polling-interval interval value

To return to the default, use the no sflow polling-interval interval command.
sFlow | 1349
Parameters
interval value Enter the interval value in seconds.

Default: The global counter polling interval
Defaults The same value as the current global default counter polling interval
Command
History
Usage This command sets the counter polling interval for an interface.
Information
Related
sflow polling-interval (Global) Globally set the polling interval
Commands
sflow sample-rate (Global)

ces Change the global default sampling rate.
Syntax sflow sample-rate value

To return to the default sampling rate, enter the no sflow sample-rate.
Parameters
value Enter the sampling rate value.
Range: C-Series and S-Series: 256 to 8388608 packets
E-Series TeraScale and ExaScale: 2 to 8388608
Enter values in powers of 2 only, for example 4096, 8192, 16384 etc.
Default: 32768 packets
Defaults 32768
Command
History
1350 | sFlow
Usage Sample-rate is the average number of packets skipped before the sample is taken. This command
Information changes the global default sampling rate. You can configure an interface to use a different sampling
rate than the global sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command
generates an error message with the previous and next power of 2 value. Select one of these two packet
numbers and re-enter the command.
Related
sflow sample-rate (Interface) Change the Interface sampling rate.
Commands
sflow sample-rate (Interface)

ces Change the Interface default sampling rate.
Syntax sflow sample-rate value

To return to the default sampling rate, enter the no sflow sample-rate.
Parameters
value Enter the sampling rate value.
Range: C-Series and S-Series: 256 to 8388608 packets
E-Series TeraScale and ExaScale: 2 to 8388608 packets
Enter values in powers of 2 only, for example 4096, 8192, 16384 etc.
Default: 32768 packets
Defaults The Global default sampling
Command
History
Usage This command changes the sampling rate for an Interface. By default, the sampling rate of an interface
Information is set to the same value as the current global default sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct
power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power-of-2 value.
Select one of these two number and re-enter the command.
Related
sflow sample-rate (Global) Change the sampling rate globally.
Commands
show sflow
ces Display the current sFlow configuration
Syntax show sflow [interface]
sFlow | 1351
Parameters
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback followed by a number from 0
to 16383.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 53-2. show sflow Command Example

FTOS#show sflow
sFlow services are enabled
Global default sampling rate: 32768
Global default counter polling interval: 20
1 collectors configured
Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.116, UDP port: 6343
0 UDP packets exported
0 UDP packets dropped
165 sFlow samples collected
0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling This count is always zero (0)
Linecard 1 Port set 0 H/W sampling rate 8192

Gi 1/16: configured rate 8192, actual rate 8192, sub-sampling rate 1
Linecard 3 Port set 1 H/W sampling rate 16384

FTOS#
Usage The dropEvent counter (sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling) shown in the figure above will
Information always display a value of zero.
show sflow linecard

ces Display the sFlow information on a line card.
Syntax show sflow linecard {slot number}
Parameters
slot number (OPTIONAL) Enter a slot number to view information on the line card in that slot.
Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
Command Modes EXEC
1352 | sFlow
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 53-3. show sflow linecard Command Example

FTOS#show sflow linecard 1
Linecard 1
Samples rcvd from h/w :165
Samples dropped for sub-sampling :0
Total UDP packets exported :0
UDP packets exported via RPM :77
UDP packets dropped :
FTOS#
sFlow | 1353
1354
|
sFlow
54
SNMP and Syslog
Overview
This chapter contains commands to configure and monitor SNMP v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. Both features
are supported on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series platforms, as indicated by the following symbols
under each of the command headings: c e s
The chapter contains the following sections:

SNMP Commands
Syslog Commands
SNMP Commands
The SNMP commands available in FTOS are:
show snmp
show snmp engineID
show snmp group
show snmp user
snmp ifmib ifalias long
snmp-server community
snmp-server contact
snmp-server enable traps
snmp-server engineID
snmp-server group
snmp-server host
snmp-server location
snmp-server packetsize
snmp-server trap-source
snmp-server user
snmp-server view
snmp trap link-status
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used to communicate management information
between the network management stations and the agents in the network elements. FTOS supports
SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3, supporting both read-only and read-write modes. FTOS sends SNMP
traps, which are messages informing an SNMP management system about the network. FTOS supports
up to 16 SNMP trap receivers.
SNMP and Syslog | 1355

Typically, 5-second timeout and 3-second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both
LAN and WAN applications. If you experience a timeout with these values, the recommended best
practice on Dell Force10 switches (to accommodate their high port density) is to increase the
timeout and retry values on your SNMP server to the following:
SNMP Timeoutgreater than 3 seconds
SNMP Retry countgreater than 2 seconds
If you want to query an E-Series switch using SNMP v1/v2/v3 with an IPv6 address, configure the
IPv6 address on a non-management port on the switch.
If you want to send SNMP v1/v2/v3 traps from an E-Series using an IPv6 address, use a
non-management port.
SNMP v3 informs are not currently supported with IPv6 addresses.
If you are using ACLs in SNMP v3 configuration, group ACL overrides user ACL if the user is
part of that group.
SNMP operations are not supported on a VLAN.
show snmp
ces Display the status of SNMP network elements.
Syntax show snmp
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 54-1. show snmp Command Example

FTOS#show snmp
32685 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
96988 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
31681 Get-request PDUs
968 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
61727 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors (Maximum packet size 1500)
9 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
32649 Response PDUs
29078 Trap PDUs
FTOS#
Related
snmp-server community Enable SNMP and set community string.
Commands
1356 | SNMP and Syslog

show snmp engineID
ces Display the identification of the local SNMP engine and all remote engines that are configured on the
router.
Syntax show snmp engineID
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 54-2. show snmp engineID Command

FTOS#show snmp engineID
Local SNMP engineID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8
Remote Engine ID IP-addr Port
80001F88043132333435 172.31.1.3 5009
80001F88043938373635 172.31.1.3 5008
FTOS#
Related
snmp-server engineID Configure local and remote SNMP engines on the router
Commands
show snmp group

ces Display the group name, security model, status, and storage type of each group.
Syntax show snmp group
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage The following example displays a group named ngroup. The ngroup has a security model of version 3
Information (v3) with authentication (auth), the read and notify name is nview with no write view name
specified, and finally the row status is active.
Example Figure 54-3. show snmp group Command Example

FTOS#show snmp group
groupname: ngroup security model: v3 auth

readview : nview writeview: no write view specified
notifyview: nview
row status: active
FTOS#

Related
snmp-server group Configure an SNMP server group

Commands
show snmp user

ces Display the information configured on each SNMP user name.
Syntax show snmp user
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 54-4. show snmp user Command Example

FTOS#show snmp user
User name: v1v2creadu
Engine ID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8
storage-type: nonvolatile active
Authentication Protocol: None
Privacy Protocol: None
FTOS#
Command
History
snmp ifmib ifalias long

ces Display the entire description string through the Interface MIB, which would be truncated otherwise to
63 characters.
Syntax snmp ifmib ifalias long
Defaults Interface description truncated beyond 63 characters
Command
History
unknown Introduced for E-Series

Example Figure 54-5. snmp ifmib ifalias long Command Example
!------command run on host connected to switch: --------------!
> snmpwalk -c public 10.10.10.130 .1.3.6.1.2.1.31 | grep -i alias | more
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134530304 = STRING: This is a port connected to Router2. This is a
port connected to
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134792448 = STRING:
!------command run on FTOS switch: --------------!

FTOS#snmp ifmib ifalias long
!------command run on server connected to switch: --------------!

> snmpwalk -c public 10.10.10.130 .1.3.6.1.2.1.31 | grep -i alias | more
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134530304 = STRING: This is a port connected to Router2. This is a
port connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2. This is a port
connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2.
IF-MIB::ifAlias.134792448 = STRING:
snmp-server community
ces Configure a new community string access for SNMPv1, v2, and v3.
Syntax snmp-server community community-name {ro | rw} [ipv6 ipv6-access-list-name [ipv6

ipv6-access-list-name | access-list-name | security-name name] | security-name name
[ipv6 ipv6-access-list-name | access-list-name | security-name name] | access-list-name
[ipv6 ipv6-access-list-name | access-list-name | security-name name]]]
To remove access to a community, use the no snmp-server community community-string {ro |
rw} [security-name name [access-list-name | ipv6 access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6
access-list-name]] command.
Parameters
community-name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) to act as a password for SNMP.
ro Enter the keyword ro to specify read-only permission.
rw Enter the keyword rw to specify read-write permission.
ipv6 access-list-name (Optional) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by a an IPv6 ACL name (a
string up to 16 characters long).
security-name name (Optional) Enter the keyword security-name followed by the security
name as defined by the community MIB.
access-list-name (Optional) Enter a standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16
characters long).
Command
History
pre-Version. Introduced on E-Series
6.2.1.1
Usage The example below configures a community named public that is mapped to the security named
Information guestuser with Read Only (ro) permissions.

Example Figure 54-6. snmp-server community Command Example
FTOS#config
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server community public ro
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server community guest ro security-name guestuser
FTOS(conf)#
The security-name parameter maps the community string to an SNMPv3 user/security name as
defined by the community MIB.
If a community string is configured without a security-name (for example, snmp-server

community public ro), the community is mapped to a default security-name/group:
v1v2creadu / v1v2creadg maps to a community with ro permissions
v1v2cwriteu/ v1v2cwriteg maps to a community with rw permissions
This command is indexed by the community-name parameter.
If the snmp-server community command is not configured, you cannot query SNMP data. Only
Standard IPv4 ACL and IPv6 ACL is supported in the optional access-list-name.
The command options ipv6, security-name, and access-list-name are recursive. In other words,
each option can, in turn, accept any of the three options as a sub-option, and each of those sub-options
can accept any of the three sub-options as a sub-option, and so forth. The following example
demonstrates the creation of a standard IPv4 ACL called snmp-ro-acl and then assigning it to the
SNMP community guest:
Example Figure 54-7. snmp-server community Command Example

FTOS(conf)# ip access-list standard snmp-ro-acl
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#seq 5 permit host 10.10.10.224
FTOS(config-std-nacl)#seq 10 deny any count
!
FTOS(conf)#snmp-server community guest ro snmp-ro-acl

FTOS(conf)#
Note: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP; TCP, ICMP rules are
not valid for SNMP. In IPv6 ACLs port rules are not valid for SNMP.
Related
ip access-list standard Name (or select) a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
Commands
ipv6 access-list Configure an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protocols.
show running-config snmp Display the current SNMP configuration and defaults.
snmp-server contact
ces Configure contact information for troubleshooting this SNMP node.
Syntax snmp-server contact text

To delete the SNMP server contact information, use the no snmp-server contact command.
Parameters
text Enter an alphanumeric text string, up to 55 characters long.

Command
History
snmp-server enable traps

ces Enable and configure SNMP traps.
Syntax snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option]

To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option]
command.
Parameters
notification-type Enter the type of notification from the list below:
bgpNotification of changes in BGP process
envmonFor Dell Force10, device notifications when an environmental
threshold is exceeded
snmpNotification of RFC 1157 traps.
stp Notification of state change in Spanning Tree protocol (RFC 1493)
vrrpNotification of state change in a VRRP group
xstpNotification of state change in MSTP (802.1s), RSTP (802.1w), and
PVST+
notification-option For the envmon notification-type, enter one of the following optional
parameters:
fan
supply
temperature
For the snmp notification-type, enter one of the following optional parameters:
authentication
coldstart
linkdown
linkup
Command
Version 8.4.2.5 New format for VRRP traps was introduced on the C-Series. New STP, RSTP, and
History
PVST+ traps for root and topology changes were added on the C-Series.
Version 8.4.1.3 New format for VRRP traps was introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. New STP, RSTP,
and PVST+ traps for root and topology changes were added on the E-Series ExaScale.
Version 8.4.1.0 Support was added for VRRP traps.
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series; Added support for STP and xSTP traps.


Usage FTOS supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers.

Information
If this command is not configured, no traps controlled by this command are sent. If you do not specify
a notification-type and notification-option, all traps are enabled.
Related
snmp-server community Enable SNMP and set the community string.
Commands
snmp-server engineID
ces Configure name for both the local and remote SNMP engines on the router.
Syntax snmp-server engineID [local engineID] [remote ip-address udp-port port-number

engineID]
To return to the default, use the no snmp-server engineID [local engineID] [remote ip-address
udp-port port-number engineID] command
Parameters
local engineID Enter the keyword local followed by the engine ID number that identifies
the copy of the SNMP on the local device.
Format (as specified in RFC 3411): 12 octets.
The first 4 octets are set to the private enterprise number.
The remaining 8 octets are the MAC address of the chassis.
remote ip-address Enter the keyword remote followed by the IP address that identifies the
copy of the SNMP on the remote device.
udp-port port-number Enter the keyword udp-port followed by the UDP (User Datagram
engineID Protocol) port number on the remote device.
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 162
Defaults As above
Command
History
Usage Changing the value of the SNMP Engine ID has important side effects. A user's password (entered on
Information the command line) is converted to an MD5 (Message Digest Algorithm) or SHA (Secure Hash
Algorithm) security digest. This digest is based on both the password and the local Engine ID. The
command line password is then destroyed, as required by RFC 2274. Because of this deletion, if the
local value of the Engine ID changes, the security digests of SNMPv3 users will be invalid, and the
users will have to be reconfigured.
For the remote Engine ID, the host IP and UDP port are the indexes to the command that are matched
to either overwrite or remove the configuration.

Related
Display SNMP engine and all remote engines that are configured on the
Commands show snmp engineID
router
show running-config snmp Display the SNMP running configuration
snmp-server group
ces Configure a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views.
Syntax snmp-server group [group_name {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}] [read name] [write
name] [notify name] [access-list-name | ipv6 access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6
access-list-name]]
To remove a specified group, use the no snmp-server group [group_name {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth
| noauth | priv}}] [read name] [write name] [notify name] [access-list-name | ipv6
access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6 access-list-name]] command.
Parameters
group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group.
Defaults: The following groups are created for mapping to read/write
community/security-names.
v1v2creadg maps to a community/security-name with ro
permissions
1v2cwriteg maps to a community/security-name rw
permissions
1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3).
1 is the least secure version
3 is the most secure of the security modes.
2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for
integers twice the width of what is normally allowed.
Default: 1
auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet
without encryption.
noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a
packet.
priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and
then scrambling of the packet.
read name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword read followed by a name (a string of up
to 20 characters long) as the read view name.
Default: GlobalView is set by default and is assumed to be every object
belonging to the Internet (1.3.6.1) OID space.
write name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword write followed by a name (a string of up
to 20 characters long) as the write view name.
notify name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword notify followed by a name (a string of up
to 20 characters long) as the notify view name.
access-list-name (Optional) Enter the standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16
characters long).
ipv6 access-list-name (Optional) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the IPv6 access list name (a
string up to 16 characters long)
access-list-name ipv6 (Optional) Enter both an IPv4 and IPv6 access list name.
access-list-name

Defaults As defined above
Command
History
Usage The following example specifies the group named harig as a version 3 user requiring both
Information authentication and encryption and read access limited to the read named rview.
Note: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP; TCP, ICMP rules are
Example Figure 54-8. snmp-server group Command Example

FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server group harig 3 priv read rview
FTOS#
Note: The number of configurable groups is limited to 16 groups.
Related
Display the group name, security model, view status, and storage type of
Commands show snmp group
each group.
snmp-server host
ces Configure the recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
Syntax snmp-server host ip-address | ipv6-address [traps | informs] [version 1 | 2c | 3] [auth | no

auth | priv] [community-string] [udp-port port-number] [notification-type]
To remove the SNMP host, use the no snmp-server host ip-address [traps | informs] [version
1 | 2c | 3] [auth | noauth | priv] [community-string] [udp-port number] [notification-type]
command.
Parameters
ip-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IP address of the host (configurable
hosts is limited to 16).
ipv6-address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the
x:x:x:x::x format.
traps (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword traps to send trap notifications to the
specified host.
Default: traps
informs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword informs to send inform notifications to the
specified host.
Default: traps

version 1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version to specify the security model
followed by the security model version number 1, 2c, or 3.
Version 1 is the least secure version
version 3 is the most secure of the security modes.
Version 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for
integers twice the width of what is normally allowed.
Default: Version 1
without encryption.
noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a
packet.
priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then
scrambling of the packet.
community-string Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the SNMP
community.
Note: For version 1 and version 2c security models, this string represents
the name of the SNMP community. The string can be set using this
command, however it is recommended that you set the community string
using the snmp-server community command before executing this
command. For version 3 security model, this string is the USM user
security name.
udp-port (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords udp-port followed by the port number of
port-number the remote host to use.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Default: 162
notification-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords for the type of trap to be sent
to the host:
bgp - BGP state change
envmon - Environment monitor trap
snmp - SNMP notification (RFC 1157)
stp - Spanning Tree protocol notification (RFC 1493)
vrrp - State change in a VRRP group
xstp - State change in MSTP (802.1s), RSTP (802.1w), and PVST+
Default: All trap types are sent to host.
Defaults As shown
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Support was added for VRRP traps.
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for S-Series; Added support for STP and xSTP notification types.
Usage In order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server
Information host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host. If
you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.
In order to enable multiple hosts, you must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each
host. You can specify multiple notification types in the command for each host.

When multiple snmp-server host commands are given for the same host and type of notification
(trap or inform), each succeeding command overwrites the previous command. Only the last
snmp-server host command will be in effect. For example, if you enter an snmp-server host
inform command for a host and then enter another snmp-server host inform command for the
same host, the second command will replace the first.
The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server enable command.
Use the snmp-server enable command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a
host to receive most notifications, at least one snmp-server enable command and the
snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled.
Note: For v1 / v2c trap configuration, if the community-string is not defined using the
snmp-server community command prior to using this command, the default form of the
snmp-server community command will automatically be configured, with the
community-name the same as specified in the snmp-server host command.
Configuring Informs
To send an inform, follow the step below.
1. Configure a remote engine ID.
2. Configure a remote user.
3. Configure a group for this user with access rights.
4. Enable traps.
5. Configure a host to receive informs.
Related
snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps.
Commands
snmp-server community Configure a new community SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
snmp-server location
ces Configure the location of the SNMP server.
Syntax snmp-server location text

To delete the SNMP location, enter no snmp-server location.
Parameters
text Enter an alpha-numeric text string, up to 55 characters long.
Command
History

snmp-server packetsize
ces Set the largest SNMP packet size permitted when the SNMP server is receiving a request or generating
a reply, use the snmp-server packetsize global configuration command.
Syntax snmp-server packetsize byte-count
Parameters
byte-count Enter one of the following values 8, 16, 24 or 32. Packet sizes are 8000 bytes, 16000 bytes,
32000 bytes, and 64000 bytes.
Defaults 8
Command
History
snmp-server trap-source
ces Configure a specific interface as the source for SNMP traffic.
Syntax snmp-server trap-source interface

To disable sending traps out a specific interface, enter no snmp trap-source.
Parameter
information.
Defaults The IP address assigned to the management interface is the default.
Command
History
Usage For this snmp-server trap-source command to be enabled, you must configure an IP address on the
Information interface and enable the interface configured as an SNMP trap source.
Related
snmp-server community Set the community string.
Commands

snmp-server user
ces Configure a new user to an SNMP group.
Syntax snmp-server user name {group_name remote ip-address udp-port port-number} [1 | 2c | 3]

[encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password] [priv des56 priv password] [access-list-name
| ipv6 access-list-name | access-list-name ipv6 access-list-name]
To remove a user from the SNMP group, use the no snmp-server user name {group_name
remote ip-address udp-port port-number} [1 | 2c | 3 ] [encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha}
auth-password] [priv des56 priv password] [access-list-name | ipv6 access-list-name |
access-list-name ipv6 access-list-name] command.
Parameters
name Enter the name of the user (not to exceed 20 characters), on the host, that
connects to the agent.
group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group.
Defaults: The following groups are created for mapping to read/write
community/security-names.
v1v2creadu maps to a community with ro permissions
1v2cwriteu maps to a community rw permissions
remote ip-address Enter the keyword remote followed by the IP address that identifies the copy of
the SNMP on the remote device.
udp-port Enter the keyword udp-port followed by the UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
port-number port number on the remote device.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Default: 162
1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3).
1 is the least secure version
3 is the most secure of the security modes.
2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers
twice the width of what is normally allowed.
Default: 1
encrypted (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword encrypted to specify the password appear in
encrypted format (a series of digits, masking the true characters of the string).
without encryption.
md5 | sha (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword md5 or sha to designate the authentication
level.
md5 Message Digest Algorithm
sha Secure Hash Algorithm
auth-password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that will
enable the agent to receive packets from the host.
Minimum: 8 characters long
priv des56 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv des56 to initiate a privacy
authentication level setting using the CBC-DES privacy authentication algorithm
(des56).
priv password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that will
enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message it sends to the agent.
Minimum: 8 characters long

access-list-name (Optional) Enter the standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16 characters
long).
ipv6 (Optional) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the IPv6 access list name (a
access-list-name string up to 16 characters long)
access-list-name (Optional) Enter both an IPv4 and IPv6 access list name.
ipv6
access-list-name
Defaults As above
Command
History
Usage
Information Note: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP; TCP, ICMP rules are
No default values exist for authentication or privacy algorithms and no default password exist. If you
forget a password, you cannot recover it; the user must be reconfigured. You can specify either a
plain-text password or an encrypted cypher-text password. In either case, the password will be stored
in the configuration in an encrypted form and displayed as encrypted in the show running-config
command.
If you have an encrypted password, you can specify the encrypted string instead of the plain-text
password. The following command is an example of how to specify the command with an encrypted
string:
Examples Figure 54-9. snmp-server user Command Example

FTOS# snmp-server user privuser v3group v3 encrypted auth md5
9fc53d9d908118b2804fe80e3ba8763d priv des56 d0452401a8c3ce42804fe80e3ba8763d
The following command is an example of how to enter a plain-text password as the string
authpasswd for user authuser of group v3group.
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server user authuser v3group v3 auth md5 authpasswd
The following command configures a remote user named n3user with a v3 security model and a
security level of authNOPriv.
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)# snmp-server user n3user ngroup remote 172.31.1.3 udp-port 5009 3 auth
md5 authpasswd
Note: The number of configurable users is limited to 16.
Related
Commands
show snmp user Display the information configured on each SNMP user name.

snmp-server view
ces Configure an SNMPv3 view.
Syntax snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded}

To remove an SNMPv3 view, use the no snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included |
excluded} command.
Parameters
view-name Enter the name of the view (not to exceed 20 characters).
oid-tree Enter the OID sub tree for the view (not to exceed 20 characters).
included (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword included to include the MIB family in
the view.
excluded (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword excluded to exclude the MIB family in
the view.
Command
History
Usage The oid-tree variable is a full sub-tree starting from 1.3.6 and can not specify the name of a sub-tree or
Information a MIB. The following example configures a view named rview that allows access to all objects under
1.3.6.1:
Example Figure 54-10. snmp-server view Command Example

FTOS# conf
FTOS#(conf) snmp-server view rview 1.3.6.1 included
Related
Commands
snmp trap link-status

ces Enable the interface to send SNMP link traps, which indicate whether the interface is up or down.
Syntax snmp trap link-status

To disable sending link trap messages, enter no snmp trap link-status.
Defaults Enabled.
Command
History

Usage If the interface is expected to flap during normal usage, you could disable this command.
Information
Syslog Commands
The following commands allow you to configure logging functions on all Dell Force10 switches:
clear logging
default logging buffered
default logging console
default logging monitor
default logging trap
logging
logging buffered
logging console
logging facility
logging history
logging history size
logging monitor
logging on
logging source-interface
logging synchronous
logging trap
show logging
show logging driverlog stack-unit (S-Series)
terminal monitor
clear logging
ces Clear the messages in the logging buffer.
Syntax clear logging
Defaults None.
Command
History
Related
show logging Display logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer.
Commands

default logging buffered
ces Return to the default setting for messages logged to the internal buffer.
Syntax default logging buffered
Defaults size = 40960; level = 7 or debugging
Command
History
Related
logging buffered Set the logging buffered parameters.
Commands
default logging console

ces Return the default settings for messages logged to the console.
Syntax default logging console
Defaults level = 7 or debugging
Command
History
Related
logging console Set the logging console parameters.
Commands
default logging monitor

ces Return to the default settings for messages logged to the terminal.
Syntax default logging monitor
Defaults level = 7 or debugging
Command
History

Related
logging monitor Set the logging monitor parameters.
Commands
terminal monitor Send system messages to the terminal/monitor.
default logging trap

ces Return to the default settings for logging messages to the Syslog servers.
Syntax default logging trap
Defaults level = 6 or informational
Command
History
Related
logging trap Limit messages logged to the Syslog servers based on severity.
Commands
logging
ces Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages will be sent. Multiple
logging servers of both IPv4 and/or IPv6 can be configured.
Syntax logging {ipv4-address | ipv6-address | hostname}

To disable logging, enter no logging.
Parameters
ipv4-address | Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) address.
ipv6-address
hostname Enter the name of a host already configured and recognized by the switch.
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6.
History
Related
logging on Enables the logging asynchronously to logging buffer, console, Syslog server, and
Commands
terminal lines.
logging trap Enables logging to the Syslog server based on severity.

logging buffered
ces Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages
are logged to the internal buffer.
Syntax logging buffered [level] [size]

To return to the default values, enter default logging buffered. To disable logging stored to an
internal buffer, enter no logging buffered.
Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following
equivalent words: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications,
informational, or debugging.
Default: 7 or debugging.
size (OPTIONAL) Indicate the size, in bytes, of the logging buffer. The number of
messages buffered depends on the size of each message.
Range: 40960 to 524288.
Default: 40960 bytes.
Defaults level = 7; size = 40960 bytes
Command
History
Usage When you decrease the buffer size, all messages stored in the buffer are lost. Increasing the buffer size
Information does not affect messages stored in the buffer.
Related
clear logging Clear the logging buffer.
Commands
default logging buffered Returns the logging buffered parameters to the default setting.
show logging Display the logging setting and system messages in the internal buffer.
logging console
ces Specify which messages are logged to the console.
Syntax logging console [level]

To return to the default values, enter default logging console. To disable logging to the console, enter
no logging console.
Parameters
level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies,
alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging.
Default: 7 or debugging.
Defaults 7 or debugging

Command
History
Related
clear logging Clear logging buffer.
Commands
default logging console Returns the logging console parameters to the default setting.
show logging Display logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer.
logging facility
ces Configure the Syslog facility, used for error messages sent to Syslog servers.
Syntax logging facility [facility-type]

To return to the default values, enter no logging facility.
Parameters
facility-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following parameters.
auth (authorization system)
cron (Cron/at facility)
deamon (system deamons)
kern (kernel)
local0 (local use)
local1 (local use)
local2 (local use)
local3 (local use)
local4 (local use)
local5 (local use)
local6 (local use)
local7 (local use)
lpr (line printer system)
mail (mail system)
news (USENET news)
sys9 (system use)
sys10 (system use)
sys11 (system use)
sys12 (system use)
sys13 (system use)
sys14 (system use)
syslog (Syslog process)
user (user process)
uucp (Unix to Unix copy process)
The default is local7.
Defaults local7

Command

History
Related
logging Enable logging to a Syslog server.
Commands
logging on Enables logging.
logging history
ces Specify which messages are logged to the history table of the switch and the SNMP network
management station (if configured).
Syntax logging history level

To return to the default values, enter no logging history.
Parameters
level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following equivalent words:
emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or
debugging.
The default is 4.
Defaults 4 or warnings
Command
History
Usage When you configure the snmp-server trap-source command, the system messages logged to the history
Information table are also sent to the SNMP network management station.
Related
show logging history Display information logged to the history buffer.
Commands
logging history size

ces Specify the number of messages stored in the FTOS logging history table.
Syntax logging history size size

To return to the default values, enter no logging history size.
Parameters
size Indicate a value as the number of messages to be stored.
Range: 0 to 500.
Default: 1 message.
Defaults 1 message

Command
History
Usage When the number of messages reaches the limit you set with the logging history size command, older
Information messages are deleted as newer ones are added to the table.
Related
show logging history Display information logged to the history buffer.
Commands
logging monitor
ces Specify which messages are logged to Telnet applications.
Syntax logging monitor [level]

To disable logging to terminal connections, enter no logging monitor.
Parameters
level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts,
critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging.
The default is 7 or debugging.
Defaults 7 or debugging
Command
History
Related
default logging monitor Returns the logging monitor parameters to the default setting.
Commands
logging on
ces Specify that debug or error messages are asynchronously logged to multiple destinations, such as
logging buffer, Syslog server, or terminal lines.
Syntax logging on
To disable logging to logging buffer, Syslog server and terminal lines, enter no logging on.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History


Usage When you enter no logging on, messages are logged only to the console.
Information
Related
logging Enable logging to Syslog server.
Commands
logging buffered Set the logging buffered parameters.
logging console Set the logging console parameters.
logging monitor Set the logging parameters for the terminal connections.
logging source-interface
ces Specify that the IP address of an interface is the source IP address of Syslog packets sent to the Syslog
server.
Syntax logging source-interface interface

To disable this command and return to the default setting, enter no logging source-interface.
Parameters
zero (0) to 16383.
ManagementEthernet followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is
0-1 and the port range is 0.
number:
ExaScale.
information.
Command
History

Usage Syslog messages contain the IP address of the interface used to egress the router. By configuring the
Information logging source-interface command, the Syslog packets contain the IP address of the interface
configured.
Related
logging Enable the logging to another device.
Commands
logging synchronous
ces Synchronize unsolicited messages and FTOS output.
Syntax logging synchronous [level level | all] [limit number-of-buffers]

To disable message synchronization, use the no logging synchronous [level level | all] [limit
number-of-buffers] command.
Parameters
all Enter the keyword all to ensure that all levels are printed asynchronously.
level level Enter the keyword level followed by a number as the severity level. A
high number indicates a low severity level and visa versa.
Range: 0 to 7.
Default: 2
all Enter the keyword all to turn off all
limit number-of-buffers Enter the keyword limit followed by the number of buffers to be queued
for the terminal after which new messages are dropped
Range: 20 to 300
Default: 20
Defaults Disabled. If enabled without level or number-of-buffers options specified, level = 2 and
number-of-buffers = 20 are the defaults.
Command Modes LINE
Command
History
Usage When logging synchronous is enabled, unsolicited messages appear between software prompts and
Information outputs. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level are sent to the console.
If the message queue limit is reached on a terminal line and messages are discarded, a system message
appears on that terminal line. Messages may continue to appear on other terminal lines.
Related
Commands

logging trap
ces Specify which messages are logged to the Syslog server based the message severity.
Syntax logging trap [level]

To return to the default values, enter default logging trap. To disable logging, enter no logging
trap.
Parameters
level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts,
critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging.
The default is 6.
Defaults 6 or informational
Command
History
Related
logging Enable the logging to another device.
Commands
show logging
ces Display the logging settings and system messages logged to the internal buffer of the switch.
Syntax show logging [number | history [reverse] [number] | reverse [number] | summary]
Parameters
number (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of message to be displayed on the output.
Range: 1 to 65535
history (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword history to view only information in the Syslog history
table.
reverse (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword reverse to view the Syslog messages in FIFO (first in,
first out) order.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table showing the number of
messages per type and per slot.
Slots *7* and *8* represent RPMs.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
History
Figure 54-11. show logging Command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled
Console logging: level debugging
Monitor logging: level debugging
Buffer logging: level debugging, 5604 Messages Logged, Size (524288 bytes)
Trap logging: level informational
Oct 8 09:25:37: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 223.80.255.254 closed. Hold time
expired
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.200.13.2 Up
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Session closed by neighbor 1.1.10.2 (Hold time expired)
Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 1.1.11.2 closed. Neighbor recycled
Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 1.1.14.2 closed. Neighbor recycled
--More--
Figure 54-12. show logging history Command Example

FTOS#show logging history
Syslog History Table: 1 maximum table entries,
saving level Warnings or higher
SNMP notifications not Enabled
%RPM:0:0 %CHMGR-2-LINECARDDOWN - Line card 3 down - IPC timeout
FTOS#
show logging driverlog stack-unit (S-Series)

s Display the driver log for the specified stack member.
Syntax show logging driverlog stack-unit unit#
Parameters
stack-unit unit# Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the stack member ID of the switch for
which you want to display the driver log.
Range: 0 to 1

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage This command displays internal software driver information, which may be useful during
Information troubleshooting switch initialization errors, such as a downed Port-Pipe.
terminal monitor
ces Configure the FTOS to display messages on the monitor/terminal.
Syntax terminal monitor
To return to default settings, enter terminal no monitor.
Defaults Disabled.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Related
logging monitor Set the logging parameters on the monitor/terminal.
Commands

55
SONET
Overview
FTOS supports RFC 2558 Definitions of Managed Objects for the SONET/SDH Interface and RFC
2615 PPP-over-SONET/SDH only on the E-Series platform, as indicated by this character under
each command heading in this chapter: e
Commands
This chapter contains the commands to configure Packet Over SONET/SDH (POS/SDH) interfaces
and features, including Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) encapsulation.
ais-shut
alarm-report
clock source
debug ppp
delay triggers
down-when-looped
encap
flag
framing
interface sonet
keepalive
loopback
ppp authentication
ppp chap hostname
ppp chap password
ppp chap rem-hostname
ppp chap rem-password
ppp next-hop
ppp pap hostname
ppp pap password
ppp pap rem-hostname
ppp pap rem-password
scramble-atm
show controllers
SONET | 1383
show interfaces
sonet-port-recover detection-interval
speed
ais-shut
e Enable an alarm indication signal (AIS) when the SONET interface is shutdown.
Syntax ais-shut
To disable the AIS, enter no ais-shut.
Defaults Disabled.
alarm-report
e Specify which POS/SDH alarms to report to the remote SNMP server.
Syntax alarm-report {lais | lrdi | pais | plop | prdi | sd-ber | sf-ber | slof | slos}
To disable an alarm, use the no alarm-report {lais | lrdi | pais | plop | prdi | sd-ber | sf-ber | slof
| slos} command.
Parameters
lais Enter the keyword lais to report line alarm indication signal.
lrdi Enter the keyword lrdi to report line remote defect indicator.
pais Enter the keyword pais to report path alarm indication signal.
plop Enter the keyword plop to report path loss of pointer.
prdi Enter the keyword prdi to report the path remote defect indication.
sd-ber Enter the keyword sd-ber to report signal degradation BER errors.
sf-ber Enter the keyword sf-ber to report signal failure BER errors.
slof Enter the keyword slof to report section loss of frame.
slos Enter the keyword slos to report section loss of signal.
Defaults Disabledno alarm reporting for all alarms
Usage Alarm reporting is available with this command. SNMP traps are available; however, syslogs are not
Information generated. To display active alarms and defects, use the show controllers command. The table below
defines the alarms that can be enabled by this command. If enabled for reporting, the alarms will
generate reports on a trap receiver.
1384 | SONET
Table 55-1. Alarm Definitions
Alarm Description
lais Line Alarm Indication Signal
lrdi Line Remote Defect Indication
pais Path Alarm Indication Signal
plop Path loss of Pointer
prdi Path Remote Defect Indication
LBIP BER in excess of Signal Degradation threshold. The default SD

sd-ber
alarm value is 10^-6, this value can not be changed.
LBIP BER in excess of Signal Failure threshold. The default SF alarm

sf-ber
value is 10^-3, this value can not be changed.
slof Section Loss of Frame
slos Section Loss of Signal
Related
show controllers Display alarms and defects
Commands
clock source
e Configure the clock source for each POS/SDH interface.
Syntax clock source {internal | line}
To return to the default setting, enter no clock source.
Parameters
internal Enter the keyword internal to use the internal clock from the interface.
line Enter the keyword line to use the recovered clock from the interface.
Defaults line
debug ppp
e Display traffic and information in a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) network.
Syntax debug ppp [authentication | error | negotiation | packet] interface sonet slot/port
To disable debugging, enter no debug ppp.
SONET | 1385
Parameters
authentication (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword authentication to display PPP authentication

exchanges (Challenge Authentication Protocol (CHAP) packet exchanges and
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) exchanges) and traffic.
error (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword error to display PPP error statistics and protocol
errors.
negotiation (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword negotiation to display PPP settings negotiated
at startup.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to display low-level packet dumps.
interface sonet Enter the keywords interface sonet followed by the slot and port information.
slot/port
Usage If you enter debug ppp without parameters, all parameters are enabled.
Information
delay triggers
e Delay triggering the line or path alarms with a 100ms delay.
Syntax delay triggers {line [lrdi | sd-ber | sf-ber] | path [pais | prdi]}
To disable delay trigger (the default), enter no delay triggers {line [lrdi | sd-ber | sf-ber] | path
[pais | prdi]} command.
Parameters
line Enter the keyword line to delay the specified line alarm.
lrdi (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lrdi to specify line remote defect
indicator.
sd-ber (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword sd-ber to specify signal degradation
BER errors.
sf-ber (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword sf-ber to specify signal failure BER
errors.
path Enter the keyword path to delay the specified path alarm.
pais (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword pais to specify path alarm indication
signal.
prdi (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prdi to specify the path remote defect
indication.
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 7.4.2.0 Added path option
History
Usage By default, certain alarms (LOS, LOF, LAIS, PLOP) bring the line protocol down immediately. Use
Information this command, with the line option, to delay that trigger event by 100ms.
By default, path alarms (AIS, RDI, LOP) do not cause (or trigger) the interface line protocol to go
down. This command, with the path option, can be used to trigger this action with a delay of 100ms.
1386 | SONET
down-when-looped
e Set the interface to send a system message when it detects a loopback condition and goes down.
Syntax down-when-looped
To disable notification, enter no down-when-looped.
Defaults Enabled
encap
e Configure encapsulation for a PPP interface.
Syntax encap ppp
To remove encapsulation, enter no encap.
Parameters
ppp Enter the keyword ppp for Point-to-Point Protocol encapsulation.
Usage When you enter the no encap command, you administratively shutdown the interface and
Information configuration information (such as IP address) is deleted from the interface. A SONET interface
without encapsulation is always operationally down.
When you enable encapsulation on the interface, PPP negotiation begins after you enable the interface
(no shutdown command). You can enable authentication and other related commands once negotiation
is completed.
Note: Encapsulation must be configured before the interface is enabled for traffic.
flag
e Set the overhead bytes in the frame header to ensure interoperability between different vendor
equipment.
Syntax flag {c2 | j0} value
To return to the default value, use no flag {c2 | j0} command.
SONET | 1387
Parameters
c2 value Enter the keyword c2 followed by value to set the path signal byte.
Range: 0x00 to 0xFF hexadecimal (0-255 decimal)
Default: 0xCF in hexidecimal (207 in decimal)
j0 value Enter the keyword j0 to set the section trace byte.
Range: 0x00 to 0xFF hexadecimal (0-255 decimal)
Default: 0xCC (204 in decimal)
Defaults as above
Usage You enter the flag C2 and J0 values in decimal, but the FTOS displays the values in hexidecimal in the
Information show controllers sonet command output.
framing
e Set the type of framing used on a POS/SDH interface.
Syntax framing {sdh | sonet}
To return to the default, enter no framing.
Parameters
sdh Enter the keyword sdh to specify Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) framing.
Default: Sonet
sonet Enter the keyword sonet to specify SONET framing.
Default: Sonet
Defaults sonet
Usage Framing should be changed only when the interfaces are shutdown.
Information
hardware monitor mac action-on-error port-shutdown

e Shut down and bring back up the port (flap).
Syntax hardware monitor mac action-on-error port-shutdown
Command
History
1388 | SONET
interface sonet
e Enter the INTERFACE mode to configure a POS/SDH interface.
Syntax interface sonet slot/port
Parameters
slot/port Enter the slot/port information.
Example Figure 55-1. interface sonet Command Example

FTOS(conf)#interface sonet 8/2
FTOS(conf-if-so-8/2)#
Usage You cannot delete POS/SDH interfaces. By default, POS/SDH interfaces are disabled (shutdown). Use
Information the encap command to enable encapsulation on the interface.
Related
encap Configure PPP encapsulation.
Commands
keepalive
e Send SONET keepalive packets periodically to keep an interface alive when it is not transmitting data.
Syntax keepalive [seconds]
To stop sending SONET keepalive packets, enter no keepalive.
Parameters
seconds (OPTIONAL) For POS/SDH interfaces with encapsulation enabled, enter the number of
seconds between keepalive packets.
Range: 0 to 32767
Default: 10 seconds
Defaults Enabled.
Usage When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured
Information interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up. When you configure no keepalive, the
system does not send keepalive packets and so the local end of a WAN link remains up even if the
remote end is down.
loopback
e Troubleshoot a POS/SDH interface by looping back traffic through the interface or the line.
SONET | 1389
Syntax loopback {internal | line}
To delete a loopback setting, use the no loopback {internal | line} command.
Parameters
internal Enter the keyword internal to test the physical interface by sending incoming traffic
back through the interface.
line Enter the keyword line to test connectivity to the network by sending incoming traffic
back to the network.
Usage Use the show config command in the INTERFACE mode to determine if the loopback command was
Information configured.
Related
Commands
show config Display the interface configuration.
ppp authentication
e Enable Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) and/or Password Authentication
Protocol (PAP) authentication on the interface.
Syntax ppp authentication {chap | chap pap | pap | pap chap}
To remove all PPP authentication, enter no ppp authenticate.
Parameters
chap Enter the keyword chap to enable CHAP authentication only.
chap pap Enter the keywords chap pap to enable CHAP on one side and PAP on the other.
pap Enter the keyword pap to enable PAP authentication only.
pap chap Enter the keywords pap chap to enable PAP on one side and CHAP on the other
side.
Usage Once you configure this command, the remote device must prove its identity before the FTOS sends
Information traffic.
The two authentication types differ slightly:
With CHAP authentication, the E-Series sends a challenge to the remote device, which must
encrypt the response with a shared value and return it to the E-Series with a username. The
E-Series checks the local database for a match on the shared value and username.
With PAP authentication, the remote device must send a username/password set which the FTOS
checks against the local database. PAP passwords are sent as clear text and could be intercepted
and used.
1390 | SONET
After you enable PPP authentication, you must configure remote hostnames and passwords to initiate
authentication on the E-Series.
Related
ppp chap hostname Configure a hostname for CHAP authentication.
Commands
ppp chap password Configure a password for CHAP authentication.
ppp chap rem-hostname Configure a remote hostname for CHAP authentication.
ppp chap rem-password Configure a remote password for CHAP authentication.
ppp pap hostname Configure a hostname for PAP authentication.
ppp pap password Configure a password for PAP authentication.
ppp pap rem-hostname Configure a remote hostname for PAP authentication.
ppp pap rem-password Configure a remote password for PAP authentication.
ppp chap hostname

e Configure a hostname to be used in the CHAP authentication process
Syntax ppp chap hostname name

To remove the CHAP hostname, enter no ppp chap hostname.
Parameters
name Enter a character string up to 32 characters long.
Usage For peers to successfully negotiate authentication on both sides of the link, you must configure a
Information hostname, password, remote hostname and remote password for CHAP authentication.
Related
ppp authentication Enable CHAP or PAP or both authentication.
Commands
ppp chap password

e Configure a password to be used in the CHAP authentication process
Syntax ppp chap password password
To remove the CHAP password, enter no ppp chap password.
Parameters
password Enter a character string up to 32 characters long.
SONET | 1391
Related
Commands
ppp chap rem-hostname

e Configure a remote hostname to be used in the CHAP authentication process.
Syntax ppp chap rem-hostname name
To remove the remote hostname, enter no ppp chap rem-hostname.
Parameters
Related
Commands
ppp chap rem-password

e Configure a remote password for CHAP authentication.
Syntax ppp chap rem-password password
To remove a password, enter no ppp chap rem-password.
Parameters
Defaults Not configure.
Usage For peers to successfully negotiate authentication, you must configure a hostname, password, remote
Information hostname and remote password for CHAP authentication.
1392 | SONET
Related
Commands
ppp chap rem-hostname Configure a remote host name for CHAP authentication.
ppp next-hop
e Assign an IP address as the next hop for this interface.
Syntax ppp next-hop ip-address
To delete a next hop address, enter no ppp next-hop.
Parameters
ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Usage This IP address must match the peers IP address or the link is not established. A peer will configure
Information this IP address.
ppp pap hostname

e Configure a host name for PAP authentication.
Syntax ppp pap hostname name
To delete a host name, enter no ppp pap hostname.
Parameters
Information hostname and remote password for PAP authentication.
Related
Commands
SONET | 1393
ppp pap password
e Configure a password for PAP authentication.
Syntax ppp pap password password
To delete a password, enter no ppp pap password.
Parameters
Related
Commands
ppp pap hostname Configure a host name for PAP authentication.
ppp pap rem-hostname

e Configure a remote PAP hostname.
Syntax ppp pap rem-hostname hostname
To delete a remote PAP host name, enter no ppp pap rem-hostname.
Parameters
hostname Enter a character string up to 32 characters long.
Related
Commands
ppp pap rem-password Configure remote password for PAP authentication.
ppp pap rem-password

e Configure a remote PAP password.
1394 | SONET
Syntax ppp pap rem-password password
To delete a remote PAP password, enter no ppp pap rem-password.
Parameters
Related
Commands
scramble-atm
e Enable POS/SDH payload scrambling on the interface.
Syntax scramble-atm
To disable scrambling, enter no scramble-atm.
Defaults Disabled
Usage You must either enable payload scrambling or disable scambling on both ends of the link.
Information
show controllers
e Display troubleshooting information, such as the clock source, SONET alarms and error rates, and
registers values.
Syntax show controllers interface
Parameters
interface Enter the one of the following interface keywords and slot/port information:
information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
SONET | 1395
Command
Version 7.4.2.0 Added support for Ten Gigabit Ethernet

History
Example Figure 55-2. show controllers sonet Command Example
FTOS#show controllers sonet

Interface is SONET 1/2
SECTION
LOF = 0 LOS = 0 BIP(B1) = 0
LINE
AIS = 0 RDI = 0 FEBE = 0 BIP(B2) = 0
PATH
AIS = 0 RDI = 0 LOP = 0 FEBE = 0 BIP(B3) = 0
Active Defects: NONE

Enabled Alarms are listed here (default is none)
Active Alarms: NONE
Alarm reporting enabled for: SLOS SLOF B1-TCA LAIS LRDI B2-TCA PAIS PRDI PLOP B3-TCA SD SF
Framing is SDH, AIS-shut is enabled

Scramble-ATM is enabled, Down-when-looped is enabled
Loopback is disabled, Clock source is internal, Speed is Oc48
CRC is 32-bits, Flag C2 is 0x16, Flag J0 is 0xcc, Flag S1S0 is 0x2
FTOS#
Example Figure 55-3. show controllers tengigabitethernet Command Example
FTOS#show controllers te 4/1
Interface is TenGigabitEthernet 4/1
SECTION
LOF = 0 LOS = 0 BIP(B1) = 13
LINE
AIS = 0 RDI = 1 FEBE = 7633 BIP(B2) = 19264
PATH
AIS = 0 RDI = 0 LOP = 0 FEBE = 8554 BIP(B3) = 15685
Active Defects: LRDI
Active Alarms: LRDI
Alarm reporting enabled for: SLOS SLOF B1-TCA LAIS LRDI B2-TCA PAIS PRDI PLOP B3-TCA SD SF
Framing is SONET, AIS-shut is enabled

Loopback is disabled, Clock source is line, Speed is Oc192
CRC is 32-bits, Flag C2 is 0x1a, Flag J0 is 0xcc, Flag S1S0 is 0x0
FTOS#
Table 55-2. Lines in show controllers interface Command Example
Line Description
interface is... Displays the interface type and the slot and port number information.
SECTION Displays the section loss of frame (LOF) error.
LOF This error is detected when a severely error framing (SEF) defect on the incoming
interface signal persist for 3 milliseconds
1396 | SONET
Table 55-2. Lines in show controllers interface Command Example (continued)
Line Description
LOS Displays the loss of signal (LOS) error.
This error is detected when an all-zeros pattern on the incoming interface signal
lasts 19 plus or minus 3 microseconds or longer. This defect might also be reported
if the received signal level drops below the specified threshold.
BIP(B1) Displays the bit interleaved parity error for the B1 byte.
For B1, the report is calculated by comparing the BIP-8 code with the BIP-8 code
extracted from the B1 byte of the following frame. Differences indicate
section-level errors.
LINE Displays the alarm indication signal.
AIS This signal is sent by the section terminating equipment (STE) to alert the
downstream line terminating equipment (LTE) that a LOS or LOF defect has been
detected on the incoming interface section.
Path alarm indication signal is sent by the LTE to alert the downstream path
terminating equipment (PTE) that it has detected a defect on its incoming line
signal.
RDI Displays remote defect indication.
This indication is reported by the downstream LTE when it detects LOF, LOS, or
AIS conditions.
For B2, the report is calculated by comparing the BIP-8/24 code with the BIP-8
code extracted from the B2 byte of the following frame.Differences indicate
line-level errors.
PATH Displays the alarm indication signal.
AIS This signal is sent by the section terminating equipment (STE) to alert the
downstream line terminating equipment (LTE) that a LOS or LOF defect has been
detected on the incoming SONET section.
Path alarm indication signal is sent by the LTE to alert the downstream path
terminating equipment (PTE) that it has detected a defect on its incoming line
signal.
RDI Displays remote defect indication.
This indication is reported by the downstream LTE when it detects LOF, LOS, or
AIS conditions.
For B3, the bit interleaved parity error report is calculated by comparing the BIP-8
code with the BIP-8 code extracted from the B3 byte of the following frame.
Differences indicate path-level errors.
Active Defects: Lists the current interface defects.
Active Alarms List the current interface alarms as enforced the interface Alarm Hierarchy.
Alarm reporting enabled List the alarms enabled. Enabled alarms generate trap reports.
for:
show interfaces
e Display detailed information on the Sonet or 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Syntax show interfaces interface
SONET | 1397
Parameters
interface Enter the one of the following interface keywords and slot/port information:
information.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Example Figure 55-4. show interfaces sonet with PPP Encapsulation Command Example
(EtherScale)
FTOS>show interfaces sonet 2/0
SONET 2/0 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is SONET, address is 00:01:e8:00:03:ff
Encapsulation PPP, Framing is SONET, AIS-shut is enabled
Loopback is disabled, Clock source is internal, Speed is Oc48
CRC is 32-bits, Flag C2 is 0x16, Flag J0 is 0xcc, Flag S1S0 is 0x0
Keepalive Set (10 Sec)
LCP State: OPENED
IPCP State: OPENED

LineSpeed 2488 Mbit
ARP type: ARPA, ARP timeout 04:00:00
Last clearing of show interfaces counters 17:08:10
91425052815 packets input, 6188485730919 bytes
Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
55176128354 packets output, 3677188351652 bytes, 474 underruns
Output 173858 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 55175954550 Unicasts
Rate info (interval 299 minutes):
Input 1604.04Mbits/sec, 2583270 packets/sec
Output 1169.30Mbits/sec, 1913510 packets/sec
FTOS>
Table 55-3. Fields in the show interfaces sonet with PPP Encapsulation
Field Description
Sonet 2/0... Displays the interfaces type, slot/port and physical and line protocol status.
Hardware is... Displays the interfaces hardware information and its assigned MAC address.
Encapsulation is... Displays the encapsulation method, the framing, and if the ais-shut command
is enabled.
Scramble-ATM is enabled States whether the scramble-atm and the down-when-looped commands are
enabled.
Loopback is... States whether the loopback, clock source, and speed, and flag commands are
configured.
This information is displayed over 2 lines.
Keepalive Set Displays the number of seconds between keepalive messages.
LCP State: States if LCP was successfully negotiated.
1398 | SONET
Table 55-3. Fields in the show interfaces sonet with PPP Encapsulation (continued)
Field Description
IPCP State: States if IPCP was successfully negotiated.
is displayed.
Peer address Displays the PPP peers IP address.
MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU.
LineSpeed Displays interfaces line speed.
Queuing strategy. States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.
0 packets... Displays the number of packets and bytes into the interface.
Input 0 IP packets... Displays the number of packets with IP headers, VLAN tagged headers and
MPLS headers.
The number of packets may not add correctly because a VLAN tagged IP
packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an IP packet.
0 64-byte... Displays the size of packets and the number of those packets entering that
interface.
Any PPP packet less than 64 bytes in length will be padded out to 64 bytes
upon reception. This padding will be counted by the ingress byte counter.
Received 0... Displays the type and number of error or other specific packets received.
Output 0... Displays the type and number of packets sent out the interface.
Time since... Displays the time since the last change in the configuration of this interface.
Related
show interfaces switchport Displays Layer 2 information about the interfaces.
Commands
sonet-port-recover detection-interval
e Recovery interval to automatically clear a condition that could cause a SONET port to hang, and stop
sending and receiving data.
Syntax sonet-port-recover detection-interval interval
Parameters
interval Interval for SONET port recovery (in seconds(15-600)
Defaults 60 seconds
Privilege Level 15 sys-hidden
SONET | 1399
Command

History
Usage When enabled, FTOS continuously polls status registers on SONET line cards. A port hang is declared
Information when backpressure is detected on the port, and the port is brought down and then back up to clear the
condition.
To keep a port in shutdown use the hardware monitor mac action-on-error port-shutdown command.
speed
e Set the speed of the SONET interface.
Syntax speed {155 | 622 | 2488}

To return to the default value, enter no speed.
Parameters
155 Enter 155 to set the interface as OC3.
Defaults 2488
Command
Version 7.4.1.0 Added support for 2488 (OC48)
History
1400 | SONET
56
S-Series Stacking Commands
Overview
All commands in this chapter are specific to the S-Series platform, as indicated by the s character
that appears below each command heading. The commands are always available and operational,
whether or not the S-Series has a stacking module inserted. You can use the commands to
pre-configure a switch, so that the configuration settings are invoked when the switch is attached to
other S-Series units.
For details on using the S-Series stacking feature, see the chapter Stacking S-Series Switches in the
Note: S-Series Stacking is not supported on the S60 system
Commands
The commands in this chapter are used for managing the stacking of S-Series systems:
redundancy force-failover stack-unit
reset stack-unit
show redundancy
show system stack-ports
stack-unit priority
stack-unit provision
stack-unit renumber
upgrade system stack-unit (S-Series stack member)
s Prevent the S-Series stack management unit and standby unit from rebooting if they fails.
Syntax redundancy disable-auto-reboot [stack-unit | all]

To return to the default, enter no redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit.
Defaults Disabled (the failed switch is automatically rebooted).
S-Series Stacking Commands | 1401

Command
History
Version 8.3.1.0 Added the all option
Usage Enabling this command keeps the failed switch in the failed state. It will not reboot until it is manually
Information rebooted. When enabled, it is not displayed in the running-config. When disabled, it is displayed in the
running-config.
Related
show redundancy Display the current redundancy status.
Commands
redundancy force-failover stack-unit

s Force the backup unit in the stack to become the management unit.
Syntax redundancy force-failover stack-unit
Defaults Not enabled
reset stack-unit
s Reset any designated stack member except the management unit (master unit).
Syntax reset stack-unit 0-7 hard
Parameters
0-7 Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
hard Reset the stack unit if the unit is in a problem state.
Default none
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Added hard reset option.
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Augmented to run on the standby unit in order to reset the standby unit directly.
Usage Resetting the management unit is not allowed, and an error message will be displayed if you try to do
Information so. Resetting is a soft reboot, including flushing the forwarding tables.
Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0, you can run this command directly on the stack standby unit (standby
master) to reset the standby. You cannot reset any other unit from the standby unit.
1402 | S-Series Stacking Commands

Example Figure 56-1. Using the reset stack-unit Command on the Stack Standby Unit
FTOS#show system brief
Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:51:4e:f8
-- Stack Info --
Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Member online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
4 Standby online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
6 Mgmt online S50N S50N 4.7.7.117 52
FTOS(standby)#reset ? <<Standby management unit

stack-unit Unit number
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit ?
<0-7> Unit number id
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit 6
% Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed. <<Resetting master not allowed
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit 0
% Error: Reset of stack units from standby is not allowed.<<no reset of other member
FTOS(standby)#
FTOS(standby)#reset stack-unit 4 <<Resetting standby unit success!
00:02:50: %STKUNIT4-S:CP %CHMGR-5-STACKUNIT_RESET: Stack unit 4 being reset
00:02:50: %STKUNIT4-S:CP %CHMGR-2-STACKUNIT_DOWN: Stack unit 4 down - reset
00:02:50: %STKUNIT4-S:CP %IFMGR-1-DEL_PORT: Removed port: Gi 4/1-48
FTOS(standby)#rebooting
U-Boot 1.1.4 (Mar 6 2008 - 00:00:04)
Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
upgrade (S-Series management unit) Reset the designated S-Series stack member.
show redundancy
s Display the current redundancy configuration (status of automatic reboot configuration on stack
management unit).
Syntax show redundancy
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 56-2. show redundancy Command Output
FTOS#show redundancy
-- SSeries Redundancy Configuration --

------------------------------------------------
Auto reboot : Enabled
-- Stack-unit Status --
------------------------------------------------
Mgmt ID: 0
Stack-unit ID: 0
Stack-unit Redundancy Role: Primary
Stack-unit State: Active
Stack-unit SW Version: 7.7.1.0
Link to Peer: Up
-- PEER Stack-unit Status --

------------------------------------------------
Stack-unit State: Standby
Peer stack-unit ID: 1
Stack-unit SW Version: 7.7.1.0
-- Stack-unit Redundancy Configuration --

------------------------------------------------
Primary Stack-unit: mgmt-id 0
Auto reboot Stack-unit: Enabled
-- Stack-unit Failover Record --

------------------------------------------------
Failover Count: 0
Last failover timestamp: None
Last failover Reason: None
Last failover type: None
-- Last Data Block Sync Record: --

------------------------------------------------
Line Card Config: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
Start-up Config: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
Runtime Event Log: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
Running Config: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
ACL Mgr: succeeded Mar 07 1996 00:27:39
Related
redundancy disable-auto-reboot Prevent the system from auto-rebooting if it fails.
Commands
show system stack-ports

s Display information about the stacking ports on all switches in the S-Series stack.
Syntax show system stack-ports [status | topology]
Parameters
status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the command output without the
Connection field.
topology (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword topology to limit the table to just the Interface and
Connection fields.

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 56-3. show system stack-ports Command Example

FTOS# show system stack-ports
Topology: Ring
Interface Connection
Link Speed Admin Link
(Gb/s) Status Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0/49 1/49 12 up up
0/50 12 up down
0/51 2/49 24 up up
1/49 0/49 12 up up
1/50 2/51 12 up up
2/49 0/51 24 up up
2/51 1/50 12 up up
2/52 12 up down
FTOS#
Example Figure 56-4. show system stack-ports status Command Example

FTOS# show system stack-ports status
Topology: Ring
Interface Link Speed Admin Link

(Gb/s) Status Status
-------------------------------------------------
0/49 12 up up
0/50 12 up down
0/51 24 up up
1/49 12 up up
1/50 12 up up
2/49 24 up up
2/51 12 up up
2/52 12 up down
FTOS#
Example Figure 56-5. show system stack-ports topology Command Example

FTOS# show system stack-ports topology
Topology: Ring
Interface Connection
----------------------
0/49 1/49
0/50
0/51 2/49
1/49 0/49
1/50 2/51
2/49 0/51
2/51 1/50
2/52
FTOS#
Field Description
Topology Lists the topology of stack ports connected: Ring, Daisy chain, or Standalone
Interface The unit/port ID of the connected stack port on this unit

Field Description
Link Speed Link Speed of the stack port (12 or 24) in Gb/s
Admin The only currently listed status is Up.
Status
Connection The stack port ID to which this units stack port is connected
Related
reset stack-unit Reset the designated S-Series stack member.
Commands
show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the
designated component of the designated stack member.
show system (S-Series) Display the current status of all stack members or a specific member.
upgrade (S-Series Upgrade the bootflash image or system image of the S-Series management
management unit) unit.
stack-unit priority
s Configure the ability of an S-Series switch to become the management unit of a stack.
Syntax stack-unit 0-7 priority 1-14
Parameters
0-7 Enter the stack member unit identifier, from 0 to 7, of the switch on which you want to set the
management priority.
1-14 This preference parameter allows you to specify the management priority of one backup switch
over another, with 0 the lowest priority and 14 the highest.
The switch with the highest priority value will be chosen to become the management unit if the
active management unit fails or on the next reload.
Defaults 1
Command
Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands

stack-unit provision
s Pre-configure a logical stacking ID of a switch that will join the stack. This is an optional command
that is executed on the management unit.
Syntax stack-unit 0-7 provision {S25N|S25P|S25V|S50N|S50V}
Parameters
0-7 Enter a stack member identifier, from 0 to 7, of the switch that you want to add to the
stack.
S25N|S25P|S25V|| Enter the S-Series model identifier of the switch to be added as a stack member. This
S50N|S50V identifier is also referred to as the provision type.
Defaults When this value is not set, a switch joining the stack is given the next available sequential stack
member identifier.
Command
History
Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
stack-unit renumber
s Change the stack member ID of any stack member or a stand-alone S-Series.
Syntax stack-unit 0-7 renumber 0-7
Parameters
0-7 The first instance of this value is the stack member unit identifier, from 0 to 7, of the
switch that you want add to the stack.
The second instance of this value is the desired new unit identifier number.
Defaults none
Command
History
Usage You can renumber any switch, including the management unit or a stand-alone unit.
Information
You cannot renumber a unit to a number of an active member in the stack.
When executing this command on the master, the stack reloads. When the members are renumbered,
only that specific unit will reset and come up with the new unit number.

Example Figure 56-6. stack-unit renumber Command Example
S50V_7.7#stack-unit 0 renumber 2
Renumbering master unit will reload the stack. Proceed to renumber [confirm yes/
no]:
Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
upgrade system stack-unit (S-Series stack member)

s Copy the boot image or FTOS from the management unit to one or more stack members.
Syntax upgrade {boot | system} stack-unit {all | 0-7}
Parameters
boot Enter this keyword to copy the boot image from the management unit to the
designated stack members.
system Enter this keyword to copy the FTOS image from the management unit to the
designated stack members.
all Enter this keyword to copy the designated image to all stack members.
0-7 Enter the unit ID of the stack member to which to copy the designated image.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Usage You must reload FTOS after using the upgrade command.
Information
Related
reload Reboot FTOS.
Commands
show version Display the current FTOS version information on the system.
upgrade (S-Series management Upgrade the bootflash image or system image of the S-Series management
unit) unit.

57
Storm Control
Overview
The FTOS Storm Control feature allows users to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm
(Broadcast/Unknown Unicast Rate Limiting, or Multicast on the C-Series and S-Series).
Support for particular Dell Force10 platforms (C-Series, E-Series, or S-Series) is indicated by the
characters that appear below each command heading:
C-Series: c
E-Series: e
S-Series: s
Commands
The Storm Control commands are:
show storm-control broadcast
show storm-control multicast
show storm-control unknown-unicast
storm-control broadcast (Configuration)
storm-control broadcast (Interface)
storm-control multicast (Configuration)
storm-control multicast (Interface)
storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration)
storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface)

Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (VLANs and LAG interfaces are
not supported).
An INTERFACE-level command only support storm control configuration on ingress.
An INTERFACE-level command overrides any CONFIGURATION-level ingress command for
that physical interface, if both are configured.
The CONFIGURATION-level storm control commands can be applied at ingress or egress and are
supported on all physical interfaces.
When storm control is applied on an interface, the percentage of storm control applied is
calculated based on the advertised rate of the line card. It is not based on the speed setting for the
line card.
Storm Control | 1409

Do not apply per-VLAN QoS on an interface that has storm control enabled (either on an interface
or globally).
When broadcast storm control is enabled on an interface or globally on ingress, and DSCP
marking for a DSCP value 1 is configured for the data traffic, the traffic will go to queue 1 instead
of queue 0.
Similarly, if unicast storm control is enabled on an interface or globally on ingress, and DSCP
marking for a DSCP value 2 is configured for the data traffic, the traffic will go to queue 2 instead
of queue 0.
Note: Bi-directional traffic (unknown unicast and broadcast), along with egress storm
control, causes the configured traffic rates to be split between the involved ports. The
percentage of traffic that each port receives after the split is not predictable. These ports can
be in the same/different port pipes, or the same/different line cards.
show storm-control broadcast

ces Display the storm control broadcast configuration.
Syntax show storm-control broadcast [interface]
Parameters
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm
control configuration.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 57-1. show storm-control broadcast Command Example (E-Series)

FTOS#show storm-control broadcast gigabitethernet 11/11
Broadcast storm control configuration
Interface Direction Percentage Wred Profile

--------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 11/11 Ingress 5.6
Gi 11/11 Egress 5.6 -

FTOS#
1410 | Storm Control

Example Figure 57-2. show storm-control broadcast Command Example (C-Series)
FTOS#show storm-control broadcast gigabitethernet 3/24
Broadcast storm control configuration
Interface Direction Packets/Second

-----------------------------------------------
Gi 3/24 Ingress 1000
FTOS#
show storm-control multicast

cs Display the storm control multicast configuration.
Syntax show storm-control multicast [interface]
Parameters
For Fast Ethernet, enter the keyword Fastethernet followed by the slot/port
information.
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 57-3. show storm-control multicast Command Example

FTOS#show storm-control multicast gigabitethernet 1/0
Multicast storm control configuration

-----------------------------------------------
Gi 1/0 Ingress 5
FTOS#
show storm-control unknown-unicast

ces Display the storm control unknown-unicast configuration
Syntax show storm-control unknown-unicast [interface]

Parameters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.5.10 Introduced on C-Series
Example Figure 57-4. show storm-control unknown-unicast Command Example (E-Series)

E-Series
FTOS#show storm-control unknown-unicast gigabitethernet 11/1
Unknown-unicast storm control configuration
Interface Direction Percentage Wred Profile

--------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 11/1 Ingress 5.9 -
Gi 11/1 Egress 5.7 w8
FTOS#
Example Figure 57-5. show storm-control unknown-unicast Command Example (C-Series)

C-Series
FTOS#show storm-control unknown-unicast gigabitethernet 3/0
Unknown-unicast storm control configuration

-----------------------------------------------
Gi 3/0 Ingress 1000
FTOS#
storm-control broadcast (Configuration)

ces Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the network.
Syntax storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value in | out] | [wred-profile name]]

[packets_per_second in]
To disable broadcast rate-limiting, use the storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value
in | out] | [wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in] command.

Parameters
percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the
decimal_value in | network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example,
out 55.5%.
Percentage: 0 to 100
0 % blocks all related traffic
100% allows all traffic into the interface
Decimal Range: 0.1 to 0.9
wred-profile name E-Series Only: (Optionally) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by the
profile name to designate a wred-profile.
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic
in allowed into the network.
Range: 0 to 33554431
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added percentage decimal value option
Usage Broadcast storm control is valid on Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces only. Layer 2 broadcast traffic is treated
Information as unknown-unicast traffic.
storm-control broadcast (Interface)

ces Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only).
Syntax storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value in] |[wred-profile name]]

To disable broadcast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control broadcast
[percentage {decimal_value} in] |[wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in] command.
Parameters
percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in to the
decimal_value in network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example,
55.5%.
Range: 0 to 33554431

Command
History
storm-control multicast (Configuration)

cs Configure the packets per second (pps) of multicast traffic allowed in to the C-Series and S-Series
networks only.
Syntax storm-control multicast packets_per_second in

To disable storm-control for multicast traffic into the network, use the no storm-control multicast
packets_per_second in command.
Parameters
packets_per_second C-Series and S-Series Only: Enter the packets per second of multicast traffic
in allowed into the network followed by the keyword in.
Range: 0 to 33554431
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series only
History
Usage Broadcast traffic (all 0xFs) should be counted against broadcast storm control meter, not against the
Information multicast storm control meter. It is possible, however, that some multicast control traffic may get
dropped when storm control thresholds are exceeded.
storm-control multicast (Interface)

cs Configure the percentage of multicast traffic allowed on an C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress
only) network only.
Syntax storm-control multicast packets_per_second in

To disable multicast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control multicast
packets_per_second in command.
Parameters
Range: 0 to 33554431

Command
History
storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration)

ces Configure the percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed in or out of the network.
Syntax storm-control unknown-unicast [percentage decimal_value [in | out]] | [wred-profile

name]] [packets_per_second in]
To disable storm control for unknown-unicast traffic, use the no storm-control unknown-unicast
[percentage decimal_value [in | out] | [wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in]
command.
Parameters
percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the
decimal_value [in | network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for
out] example, 55.5%.
wred-profile name E-Series Only: (Optionally) Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by
the profile name to designate a wred-profile.
Range: 0 to 33554431
Command
History
Usage Unknown Unicast Storm-Control is valid for Layer 2 and Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces.
Information
storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface)

ces Configure percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only).
Syntax storm-control unknown-unicast [percentage decimal_value in] | [wred-profile name]]

To disable unknown-unicast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control
unknown-unicast [percentage decimal_value in] | [wred-profile name]]
[packets_per_second in] command.

Parameters
percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in to the
decimal_value in network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example,
55.5%.
Range: 0 to 33554431
Command
History

58
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Overview
The commands in this chapter configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree protocol (STP)
and are supported on all three Dell Force10 switch/routing platforms, as indicated by the c, e, and
s characters under the command headings:
Commands
bridge-priority
debug spanning-tree
description
disable
forward-delay
hello-time
max-age
protocol spanning-tree
show config
show spanning-tree 0
spanning-tree 0
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) | 1417

cs Use the Provider Bridge Group address in Spanning Tree or GVRP PDUs.
Syntax bpdu-destination-mac-address [stp | gvrp] provider-bridge-group
Parameters
stp Force STP, RSTP, and MSTP to use the Provider Bridge Group address as the
destination MAC address in its BPDUs.
gvrp Forces GVRP to use the Provider Bridge GVRP Address as the destination
MAC address in its PDUs.
Defaults The destination MAC address for BPDUs is the Bridge Group Address.
Command
History
bridge-priority
ces Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree.
Syntax bridge-priority {priority-value | primary | secondary}

To return to the default value, enter no bridge-priority.
Parameters
priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Default: 32768.
primary Enter the keyword primary to designate the bridge as the root bridge.
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to designate the bridge as a secondary root
bridge.
Defaults priority-value = 32768
Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is config-stp.)
Command
History
debug spanning-tree
ces Enable debugging of Spanning Tree Protocol and view information on the protocol.
Syntax debug spanning-tree {stp-id [all | bpdu | config | events | exceptions | general | root] |
protocol}
To disable debugging, enter no debug spanning-tree.
1418 | Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Parameters
stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one Spanning Tree group with a group ID of 0.
protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp.
bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug Bridge Protocol Data Units.
config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug configuration information.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug STP events.
general (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword general to debug general STP operations.
root (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword root to debug STP root transactions.
Command
History
Usage When you enable debug spanning-tree bpdu for multiple interfaces, the software only sends
Information information on BPDUs for the last interface specified.
Related
protocol spanning-tree Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands
description
ces Enter a description of the Spanning Tree
To remove the description from the Spanning Tree, use the no description {description} command.
Parameters
description Enter a description to identify the Spanning Tree (80 characters maximum).
Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is config-stp.)
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree Enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Commands
disable
ces Disable Spanning Tree Protocol globally on the switch.
Syntax disable
To enable Spanning Tree Protocol, enter no disable.

Defaults Enabled (that is, Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled.)
Command Modes SPANNING TREE
Command
History
Related
protocol spanning-tree Enter SPANNING TREE mode.
Commands
forward-delay
ces The amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before

Parameters
seconds Enter the number of seconds the FTOS waits before transitioning STP to the
forwarding state.
Range: 4 to 30
Defaults 15 seconds
Command
History
Related
max-age Change the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information.
Commands
hello-time
ces Set the time interval between generation of Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs).
Syntax hello-time seconds

Parameters
Range: 1 to 10.
Default: 2 seconds.

Defaults 2 seconds
Command
History
Related
forward-delay Change the wait time before STP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands
max-age Change the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information.
max-age
ces Set the time interval for the Spanning Tree bridge to maintain configuration information before
refreshing that information.

Parameters
seconds Enter a number of seconds the FTOS waits before refreshing configuration
information.
Range: 6 to 40
Defaults 20 seconds
Command
History
Related
forward-delay Change the wait time before STP transitions to the Forwarding state.
Commands
protocol spanning-tree
ces Enter the SPANNING TREE mode to enable and configure the Spanning Tree group.
Syntax protocol spanning-tree stp-id

To disable the Spanning Tree group, enter no protocol spanning-tree stp-id command.
Parameters
stp-id Enter zero (0). FTOS supports one Spanning Tree group, group 0.

Command
History
Example Figure 58-1. protocol spanning-tree Command Example

FTOS(conf)#protocol spanning-tree 0
FTOS(config-stp)#
Usage STP is not enabled when you enter the SPANNING TREE mode. To enable STP globally on the
Information switch, enter no disable from the SPANNING TREE mode.
Related
Commands
disable Disable Spanning Tree group 0. To enable Spanning Tree group 0, enter no disable.
show config
ces Display the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed.
Syntax show config
Command
History
Example Figure 58-2. show config Command for the SPANNING TREE Mode
FTOS(config-stp)#show config
protocol spanning-tree 0
no disable
FTOS(config-stp)#

show spanning-tree 0
ces Display the Spanning Tree group configuration and status of interfaces in the Spanning Tree group.
Syntax show spanning-tree 0 [active | brief | guard | interface interface | root | summary]
Parameters
0 Enter 0 (zero) to display information about that specific Spanning Tree group.
active (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword active to display only active interfaces in Spanning Tree
group 0.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display a synopsis of the Spanning Tree group
guard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an STP
interface and the current port state.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface and the type slot/port of the interface you
interface want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following:
information.
ExaScale.
root (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword root to display configuration information on the
Spanning Tree group root.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to only the number of ports in the Spanning
Tree group and their state.
Usage You must enable Spanning Tree group 0 prior to using this command.
Information
Command
History
E-Series TeraScale.

Example Figure 58-3. show spanning-tree 0 Command Example
FTOS#show spann 0
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.0a56
We are the root of the spanning tree
Current root has priority 32768 address 0001.e800.0a56
Topology change flag set, detected flag set
Number of topology changes 1 last change occurred 0:00:05 ago
from GigabitEthernet 1/3
Timers: hold 1, topology change 35
hello 2, max age 20, forward_delay 15
Times: hello 1, topology change 1, notification 0, aging 2
Port 26 (GigabitEthernet 1/1) is Forwarding

Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56
Timers: message age 0, forward_delay 0, hold 0
BPDU: sent:18, received 0


FTOS#
Table 58-1. show spanning-tree 0 Command Information
Field Description
Bridge Identifier. Lists the bridge priority and the MAC address for this STP
bridge.
Configured hello... Displays the settings for hello time, max age, and forward
delay.
We are... States whether this bridge is the root bridge for the STG.
Current root... Lists the bridge priority and MAC address for the root
bridge.
Topology flag. States whether the topology flag and the detected flag were
set.
Number of... Displays the number of topology changes, the time of the
last topology change, and on what interface the topology
change occurred.
Timers Lists the values for the following bridge timers:
hold time, topology change, hello time, max age, and
forward delay.

Table 58-1. show spanning-tree 0 Command Information
Field Description
Times List the number of seconds since the last:
hello time
topology change
notification
aging
Port 1... Displays the Interface type slot/port information and the
status of the interface (Disabled or Enabled).
Port path... Displays the path cost, priority, and identifier for the
interface.
Designated root... Displays the priority and MAC address of the root bridge of
the STG that the interface belongs.
Designated port... Displays the designated port ID
Figure 58-4. show spanning-tree 0 brief Command Example

FTOS#show span 0 brief
Root ID Priority 32768
Address 0001.e800.0a56
Bridge ID Priority 32768,
Address 0001.e800.0a56
-------------- ------ ---- ---- --- ----- ----------------- ------
Gi 1/1 8.26 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0a56 8.26
Gi 1/2 8.27 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0a56 8.27
Gi 1/3 8.28 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0a56 8.28
FTOS#
Figure 58-5. show spanning-tree 0 guard Command Example

FTOS#show spanning-tree 0 guard
Interface
--------- -------- --------- ----------
Gi 0/2 0 LIS Loopguard
Gi 0/3 0 EDS (Shut) Bpduguard
Table 58-2. show spanning-tree 0 guard Command Example Information
Field Description
Interface Name STP interface
Instance STP 0 instance

spanning-tree 0
ces Assigns a Layer 2 interface to STP instance 0 and configures a port cost or port priority, or enables
loop guard, root guard, or the Portfast feature on the interface.
Syntax spanning-tree stp-id {cost cost | {loopguard | rootguard} |

portfast [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]] | priority priority}
Parameters
stp-id Enter the STP instance ID. Range: 0
cost cost Enter the keyword cost followed by a number as the cost.
Range: 1 to 65535
Defaults:
Port Channel interface with 100 Mb/s Ethernet = 18
Port Channel interface with 1-Gigabit Ethernet = 3
Port Channel interface with 10-Gigabit Ethernet = 1
loopguard Enter the keyword loopguard to enable STP loop guard on a port or port-channel
interface.
rootguard Enter the keyword rootguard to enable STP root guard on a port or port-channel
interface.
portfast Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into forwarding
[bpduguard mode immediately after the root fails.
[shutdown-on- Enter the optional keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
violation]] Enter the optional keyword shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an
interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
priority priority Enter keyword priority followed by a number as the priority.
Range: zero (0) to 15. Default: 8
Defaults cost = depends on the interface type; priority = 8
Command
History
Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced the loopguard and rootguard options on the E-Series TeraScale, C-Series,
and S-Series.
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced shutdown-on-violation option.
Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on S-Series.
Version 6.2.1.1 Introduced.

Usage If you enable portfast bpduguard on an interface and the interface receives a BPDU, the software
Information disables the interface and sends a message stating that fact. The port is in ERR_DISABLE mode, yet
appears in the show interface commands as enabled. If shutdown-on-violation is not enabled,
BPDUs will still be sent to the RPM CPU.
STP loop guard and root guard are supported on a port or port-channel enabled in any Spanning Tree
mode: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Multiple Spanning Tree
Protocol (MSTP), and Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+).
Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel except when used as a stacking port.
When enabled on a port, root guard applies to all VLANs configured on the port.
STP root guard and loop guard cannot be enabled at the same time on a port. For example, if you
configure loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured, the following error message
is displayed:
Do not enable Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port. Enabling both features
may result in a port that remains in a blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it. For
example, when Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard are both configured:
To display the type of STP guard (Portfast BPDU, root, or loop guard) enabled on a port, enter the
show spanning-tree 0 command.


59
Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Overview
The commands in this chapter configure time values on the system, either using FTOS, or the
hardware, or using the Network Time Protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to
an NTP clock host. For details, see the Network Time Protocol section of the Management chapter in
the FTOS Configuration Guide.
The commands in this chapter are generally supported on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series, with
some exceptions, as noted in the Command History fields and by these symbols under the command
headings: c e s
Commands
calendar set
clock read-calendar
clock set
clock summer-time date
clock summer-time recurring
clock timezone
clock update-calendar
debug ntp
ntp authenticate
ntp authentication-key
ntp broadcast client
ntp disable
ntp multicast client
ntp server
ntp source
ntp trusted-key
ntp update-calendar
show calendar
show clock
show ntp associations
show ntp status
Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) | 1429

calendar set
ces Set the time and date for the switch hardware clock.
Syntax calendar set time month day year
Parameters
time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, for
example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm.
month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month
year.
year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.
Command
History
Example Figure 59-1. calendar set Command Example

FTOS#calendar set 08:55:00 june 18 2006
FTOS#
Usage You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day
Information month year.
In the switch, the hardware clock is separate from the software and is called the calendar. This
hardware clock runs continuously. After the hardware clock (the calendar) is set, the FTOS
automatically updates the software clock after system bootup.You cannot delete the hardware clock
(calendar).
To manually update the software with the hardware clock, use the command clock read-calendar.
Related
clock read-calendar Set the software clock based on the hardware clock.
Commands
clock set Set the software clock.
clock update-calendar Set the hardware clock based on the software clock.
show clock Display clock settings.
clock read-calendar
ces Set the software clock on the switch from the information set in hardware clock (calendar).
Syntax clock read-calendar
1430 | Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Command
History
Usage In the switch, the hardware clock is separate from the software and is called the calendar. This
Information hardware clock runs continuously. After the hardware clock (the calendar) is set, the FTOS
automatically updates the software clock after system bootup.
You cannot delete this command (that is, there is not a no version of this command).
clock set
ces Set the software clock in the switch.
Syntax clock set time month day year
Parameters
time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15:00 is 5:15 pm.
month Enter the name of one of the 12 months, in English.
You can enter the number of a day and change the order of the display to time day month
year.
day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time month day
year.
year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.
Command
History
Example Figure 59-2. clock set Command Example

FTOS#clock set 16:20:00 19 may 2001
FTOS#
Usage You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day
Information month year. You cannot delete the software clock.

The software clock runs only when the software is up. The clock restarts, based on the hardware clock,
when the switch reboots.
Dell Force10 recommends that you use an outside time source, such as NTP, to ensure accurate time on
the switch.
Related
ntp update-calendar Set the switch using the NTP settings.
Commands
clock summer-time date

ces Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight savings time on a one-time basis.
Syntax clock summer-time time-zone date start-month start-day start-year start-time end-month
end-day end-year end-time [offset]
To delete a daylight savings time zone configuration, enter no clock summer-time.
Parameters
time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock
output.
start-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
year.
start-day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
year.
start-year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.
start-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15 is 5:15 pm.
end-day Enter the number of the day.
Range: 1 to 31.
year.
end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
year.
end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15 is 5:15 pm.
end-year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Range: 1993 to 2035.
offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period.
Range: 1 to1440.
Default: 60 minutes

Command
History
Related
calendar set Set the hardware clock.
Commands
clock summer-time recurring Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight savings
time each year.
show clock Display the current clock settings.
clock summer-time recurring

ces Set the software clock to convert to daylight savings time on a specific day each year.
Syntax clock summer-time time-zone recurring [start-week start-day start-month start-time

end-week end-day end-month end-time [offset]]
To delete a daylight savings time zone configuration, enter no clock summer-time.
Parameters
time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock
output.
You can enter up to eight characters.
start-week (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight savings begins and then
enter values for start-day through end-time:
week-number: Enter a number from 1-4 as the number of the week in the month to
start daylight savings time.
first: Enter this keyword to start daylight savings time in the first week of the month.
last: Enter this keyword to start daylight savings time in the last week of the month.
start-day Enter the name of the day that you want daylight saving time to begin. Use English three
letter abbreviations, for example, Sun, Sat, Mon, etc.
Range: Sun Sat
start-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
start-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format, example,
17:15 is 5:15 pm.
end-week Enter the one of the following as the week that daylight savings ends:
week-number: enter a number from 1-4 as the number of the week to end daylight
savings time.
first: enter the keyword first to end daylight savings time in the first week of the
month.
last: enter the keyword last to end daylight savings time in the last week of the
month.
end-day Enter the weekday name that you want daylight saving time to end. Enter the weekdays
using the three letter abbreviations, for example Sun, Sat, Mon etc.
Range: Sun to Sat
end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.

end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format,
example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm.
offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period.
Range: 1 to 1440.
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Updated the start-day and end-day options to allow for using the three-letter
abbreviation of the weekday name.
Related
Commands
clock summer-time date Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight savings
time on a one-time basis.
show clock Display the current clock settings.
clock timezone
ces Configure a timezone for the switch.
Syntax clock timezone timezone-name offset

To delete a timezone configuration, enter no clock timezone.
Parameters
timezone-name Enter the name of the timezone. You cannot use spaces.
offset Enter one of the following:
a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to UTC for the
timezone.
a minus sign (-) followed by a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours
Command
History
Usage Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time
Information standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, you must
include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the
Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8.

clock update-calendar
ces Set the switch hardware clock based on the software clock.
Syntax clock update-calendar
Command
History
Usage Use this command only if you are sure that the hardware clock is inaccurate and the software clock is
Information correct. You cannot delete this command (that is, there is not a no form of this command).
Related
Commands
debug ntp
ces Display Network Time Protocol (NTP) transactions and protocol messages for troubleshooting.
Syntax debug ntp {adjust | all | authentication | events | loopfilter | packets | select | sync}
To disable debugging of NTP transactions, use the no debug ntp {adjust | all | authentication |
events | loopfilter | packets | select | sync} command.
Parameters
adjust Enter the keyword adjust to display information on NTP clock adjustments.
all Enter the keyword all to display information on all NTP transactions.
authentication Enter the keyword authentication to display information on NTP authentication
transactions.
events Enter the keyword events to display information on NTP events.
loopfilter Enter the keyword loopfilter to display information on NTP local clock frequency.
packets Enter the keyword packets to display information on NTP packets.
select Enter the keyword select to display information on the NTP clock selection.
sync Enter the keyword sync to display information on the NTP clock synchronization.
Command
History

ntp authenticate
ces Enable authentication of NTP traffic between the switch and the NTP time serving hosts.
Syntax ntp authenticate

To disable NTP authentication, enter no ntp authentication.
Command
History
Usage You also must configure an authentication key for NTP traffic using the ntp authentication-key
Related
ntp authentication-key Configure authentication key for NTP traffic.
Commands
ntp trusted-key Configure a key to authenticate
ntp authentication-key
ces Specify a key for authenticating the NTP server.
Syntax ntp authentication-key number md5 [0 | 7] key
Parameters
number Specify a number for the authentication key.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.
This number must be the same as the number parameter configured in the ntp trusted-key
command.
md5 Specify that the authentication key will be encrypted using MD5 encryption algorithm.
0 Specify that authentication key will be entered in an unencrypted format (default).
7 Specify that the authentication key will be entered in DES encrypted format.
key Enter the authentication key in the previously specified format.
Defaults NTP authentication is not configured by default. If you do not specify the option [0 | 7], 0 is selected
by default.
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Added options [0 | 7] for entering authentication key.
History

Usage After configuring the ntp authentication-key command, configure the ntp trusted-key command to
Information complete NTP authentication.
FTOS versions 8.2.1.0 and later use an encryption algorithm to store the authentication key that is
different from previous FTOS versions; beginning in version 8.2.1.0, FTOS uses DES encryption to
store the key in the startup-config when you enter the command ntp authentication-key. Therefore,
if your system boots with a startup-configuration from an FTOS versions prior to 8.2.1.0 in which you
have configured ntp authentication-key, the system cannot correctly decrypt the key, and cannot
authenticate NTP packets. In this case you must re-enter this command and save the running-config to
the startup-config.
Related
ntp authenticate Enables NTP authentication.
Commands
ntp trusted-key Configure a trusted key.
ntp broadcast client

ces Set up the interface to receive NTP broadcasts from an NTP server.
Syntax ntp broadcast client

To disable broadcast, enter no ntp broadcast client.
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
ntp disable
ces Prevent an interface from receiving NTP packets.
Syntax ntp disable

To re-enable NTP on an interface, enter no ntp disable.
Default Disabled (that is, if an NTP host is configured, all interfaces receive NTP packets)
Command
History

ntp multicast client
e Configure the switch to receive NTP information from the network via multicast.
Syntax ntp multicast client [multicast-address]

To disable multicast reception, use the no ntp multicast client [multicast-address] command.
Parameters
multicast-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a multicast address. Enter either an IPv4 address in dotted
decimal format or an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. If you do not enter a
multicast address, the address 224.0.1.1 is configured if the interface address is
IPv4 or ff05::101 is configured if the interface address is IPv6.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 multicast addresses.
History
ntp server
ces Configure an NTP time-serving host.
Syntax ntp server {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [key keyid] [prefer] [version number]
Parameters
ipv4-address | Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X).
ipv6-address
hostname Enter the hostname of the server.
key keyid (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key and a number as the NTP peer key.
Range: 1 to 4294967295
prefer (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefer to indicate that this peer has priority over other
servers.
version (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version and a number to correspond to the NTP
number version used on the server.
Range: 1 to 3
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Added IPv6 support.
History
Usage You can configure multiple time serving hosts (up to 250). From these time serving hosts, the FTOS
Information will choose one NTP host with which to synchronize. Use the show ntp associations to determine
which server was selected.

Since a large number of polls to NTP hosts can impact network performance, Dell Force10
recommends that you limit the number of hosts configured.
Related
show ntp associations Displays NTP servers configured and their status.
Commands
ntp source
ces Specify an interfaces IP address to be included in the NTP packets.
Syntax ntp source interface

To delete the configuration, enter no ntp source.
Parameters
zero (0) to 16383.
For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword lag followed by a number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 32 for EtherScale, 1to 255 for TeraScale
For SONET interface types, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port
information.
Command
History
ntp trusted-key
ces Set a key to authenticate the system to which NTP will synchronize.
Syntax ntp trusted-key number

To delete the key, use the no ntp trusted-key number command.
Parameters
number Enter a number as the trusted key ID.
Range: 1 to 4294967295.

Command
History
Usage The number parameter in the ntp trusted-key command must be the same number as the number
Information parameter in the ntp authentication-key command. If you change the ntp authentication-key command,
you must also change the ntp trusted-key command.
Related
ntp authentication-key Set an authentication key for NTP.
Commands
ntp authenticate Enable the NTP authentication parameters you set.
ntp update-calendar
ces Configure the FTOS to update the calendar (the hardware clock) with the NTP-derived time.
Syntax ntp update-calendar [minutes]

To return to default setting, enter no ntp update-calendar.
Parameters
minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes between updates from NTP to the hardware
clock.
Range: 1 to 1440.
Command
History
show calendar
ces Display the current date and time based on the switch hardware clock.
Syntax show calendar
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 59-3. show calendar Command Example
FTOS#show calendar
16:33:30 UTC Tue Jun 26 2001
FTOS#
Related
show clock Display the time and date from the switch software clock.
Commands
show clock
ces Display the current clock settings.
Syntax show clock [detail]
Parameters
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view the source information of the clock.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 59-4. show clock Command Example

FTOS#show clock
11:05:56.949 UTC Thu Oct 25 2001
FTOS#
Example Figure 59-5. show clock detail Command Example

FTOS#show clock detail
12:18:10.691 UTC Wed Jan 7 2009
Time source is RTC hardware
Summer time starts 02:00:00 UTC Sun Mar 8 2009
Summer time ends 02:00:00 ABC Sun Nov 1 2009
FTOS#
Related
clock summer-time recurring Display the time and date from the switch hardware clock.
Commands
show calendar Display the time and date from the switch hardware clock.
show ntp associations

ces Display the NTP master and peers.
Syntax show ntp associations

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 59-6. show ntp associations Command Example

FTOS#show ntp associations
remote ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp
==========================================================================
10.10.120.5 0.0.0.0 16 - 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0
*172.16.1.33 127.127.1.0 11 6 16 377 -0.08 -1499.9 104.16
172.31.1.33 0.0.0.0 16 - 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0
192.200.0.2 0.0.0.0 16 - 256 0 0.00 0.000 16000.0
* master (synced), # master (unsynced), + selected, - candidate
FTOS#
Table 59-1. show ntp associations Command Fields
Field Description
(none) One or more of the following symbols could be displayed:
* means synchronized to this peer
# means almost synchronized to this peer
+ means the peer was selected for possible synchronization
- means the peer is a candidate for selection
~ means the peer is statically configured
remote Displays the remote IP address of the NTP peer.
ref clock Displays the IP address of the remote peers reference clock.
st Displays the peers stratum, that is, the number of hops away from the external time source. A
16 in this column means the NTP peer cannot reach the time source.
when Displays the last time the switch received an NTP packet.
poll Displays the polling interval (in seconds).
reach Displays the reachability to the peer (in octal bitstream).
delay Displays the time interval or delay for a packet to complete a round-trip to the NTP time source
(in milliseconds).
offset Displays the relative time of the NTP peers clock to the switch clock (in milliseconds).
disp Displays the dispersion.
Related
show ntp status Display current NTP status.
Commands
show ntp status

ces Display the current NTP status.
Syntax show ntp status

Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 59-7. show ntp status Command Example

FTOS#sh ntp status
Clock is synchronized, stratum 2, reference is 100.10.10.10
frequency is -32.000 ppm, stability is 15.156 ppm, precision is 4294967290
reference time is BC242FD5.C7C5C000 (10:15:49.780 UTC Mon Jan 10 2000)
clock offset is clock offset msec, root delay is 0.01656 sec
root dispersion is 0.39694 sec, peer dispersion is peer dispersion msec
peer mode is client
FTOS#
Table 59-2. show ntp status Command Example Information
Field Description
Clock is... States whether or not the switch clock is synchronized,
which NTP stratum the system is assigned and the IP
address of the NTP peer.
frequency is... Displays the frequency (in ppm), stability (in ppm) and
precision (in Hertz) of the clock in this system.
reference time is... Displays the reference time stamp.
clock offset is... Displays the system offset to the synchronized peer and
the time delay on the path to the NTP root clock.
root dispersion is... Displays the root and path dispersion.
peer mode is... State what NTP mode the switch is. This should be
client mode.
Related
show ntp associations Display information on NTP master and peer configurations.
Commands


60
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)
Overview
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used
with NIC teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
Uplink Failure Detection is supported on platform: s (S50 only).
Commands
clear ufd-disable
debug uplink-state-group
description
downstream
downstream auto-recover
downstream disable links
enable
show running-config uplink-state-group
show uplink-state-group
uplink-state-group
upstream
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) | 1445

clear ufd-disable
s S50 only Re-enable one or more downstream interfaces on the switch/router that are in a UFD-disabled error
state so that an interface can send and receive traffic.
Syntax clear ufd-disable {interface interface | uplink-state-group group-id}
Parameters
interface interface Specifies one or more downstream interfaces.
For interface, enter one of the following interface types:
Fast Ethernet: fastethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
1-Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port |slot/port-range}
10-Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/port |slot/port-range}
Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | port-channel-range}
Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports
separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any
order; for example:
gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12
port-channel 1-3,5
A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry.
uplink-state-group Re-enables all UFD-disabled downstream interfaces in the group.
group-id Valid group-id values are 1 to 16.
Defaults A downstream interface in an uplink-state group that has been disabled by UFD is disabled and in a
UFD-disabled error state.
Command
Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
History
Related
Commands
downstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream
interface.
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream
links.
1446 | Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)

debug uplink-state-group
s S50 only Enable debug messages for events related to a specified uplink-state group or all groups.
Syntax debug uplink-state-group [group-id]
Parameters
group-id Enables debugging on the specified uplink-state group. Valid group-id values
are 1 to 16.
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage To turn off debugging event messages, enter the no debug uplink-state-group [group-id] command.
Information
Related
Commands
clear ufd-disable Re-enable downstream interfaces that are in a UFD-disabled error state.
description
s S50 only Enter a text description of an uplink-state group.
Parameters
text Text description of the uplink-state group.
Maximum length: 80 alphanumeric characters.
Defaults None
Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP
Command
History
Related
Commands
links.
Example Figure 60-1. description Command Example

FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# description test
FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)#

downstream
s S50 only Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.
Syntax downstream interface
Parameters
interface Enter one of the following interface types:
1-Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated
by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example:
port-channel 1-3,5
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group.
Information
You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Each interface assigned to an uplink-state
group must be configured as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both.
You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group. An uplink-state group can
contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself, but not both.
To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no downstream interface command.
Related
Commands
upstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream
interface.
links.
downstream auto-recover
s S50 only Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in an uplink-state group automatically
come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up.
Syntax downstream auto-recover
Defaults The auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled.

Command
History
Usage To disable auto-recovery on downstream links, enter the no downstream auto-recover command.
Information
Related
Commands
interface.
links.
downstream disable links

s S50 only Configure the number of downstream links in the uplink-state group that will be disabled if one
upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down.
Syntax downstream disable links {number |all}
Parameters
number Enter the number of downstream links to be brought down by UFD.
Range: 1 to 1024.
all Brings down all downstream links in the group.
Defaults No downstream links are disabled when an upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down.
Command
History
Usage A user-configurable number of downstream interfaces in an uplink-state group are put into a link-down
Information state with an UFD-Disabled error message when one upstream interface in an uplink-state group goes
down.
If all upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group go down, all downstream interfaces in the same
uplink-state group are put into a link-down state.
To revert to the default setting, enter the no downstream disable links command.
Related
Commands
interface.
links.

enable
s S50 only Re-enable upstream-link tracking for an uplink-state group after it has been disabled.
Syntax enable
Parameters
group-id Enables debugging on the specified uplink-state group. Valid group-id values
are 1 to 16.
Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group.
Command
History
Usage To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, enter the no enable
Related
Commands
links.
show running-config uplink-state-group

s S50 only Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups.
Syntax show running-config uplink-state-group [group-id]
Parameters
group-id Displays the current configuration of all uplink-state groups or a specified
group. Valid group-id values are 1 to 16.
Defaults None
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 60-2. show running-config uplink-state-group Command Example

FTOS#show running-config uplink-state-group
!
no enable
uplink state track 1
downstream GigabitEthernet 0/2,4,6,11-19
upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/48, 52
upstream PortChannel 1
!
uplink state track 2
downstream GigabitEthernet 0/1,3,5,7-10
upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/56,60

Related
Commands
show uplink-state-group Display status information on a specified uplink-state group or all
groups.
links.
show uplink-state-group
s S50 only Display status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups.
Syntax show uplink-state-group [group-id] [detail]
Parameters
group-id Displays status information on a specified uplink-state group or all
groups. Valid group-id values are 1 to 16.
detail Displays additional status information on the upstream and
downstream interfaces in each group
Defaults None
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 60-3. show uplink-state-group Command Examples
FTOS# show uplink-state-group
Uplink State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Up

Uplink State Group: 5 Status: Enabled, Down
Uplink State Group: 16 Status: Disabled, Up
FTOS# show uplink-state-group 16

Uplink State Group: 16 Status: Disabled, Up
FTOS#show uplink-state-group detail

(Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled
Uplink State Group : 1 Status: Enabled, Up

Upstream Interfaces :
Downstream Interfaces :

Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/46(Up) Gi 0/47(Up)
Downstream Interfaces : Te 13/0(Up) Te 13/1(Up) Te 13/3(Up) Te 13/5(Up)
Te 13/6(Up)
Uplink State Group : 5 Status: Enabled, Down

Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/0(Dwn) Gi 0/3(Dwn) Gi 0/5(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Te 13/2(Dis) Te 13/4(Dis) Te 13/11(Dis) Te 13/12(Dis)
Te 13/13(Dis) Te 13/14(Dis) Te 13/15(Dis)


Uplink State Group : 16 Status: Disabled, Up

Upstream Interfaces : Gi 0/41(Dwn) Po 8(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Gi 0/40(Dwn)
Related
Commands
show running-config Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups.
uplink-state-group
links.

uplink-state-group
s S50 only Create an uplink-state group and enabling the tracking of upstream links on a switch/router.
Syntax uplink-state-group group-id
Parameters
group-id Enter the ID number of an uplink-state group. Range: 1-16.
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage After you enter the command, you enter uplink-state-group configuration mode to assign upstream and
Information downstream interfaces to the group.
An uplink-state group is considered to be operationally up if at least one upstream interface in the

group is in the link-up state.
An uplink-state group is considered to be operationally down if no upstream interfaces in the group are
in the link-up state. No uplink-state tracking is performed when a group is disabled or in an
operationally down state.
To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no uplink-state-group group-id command.
To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, enter the no enable
command in uplink-state-group configuration mode.
Related
Commands
show running-config Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups.
uplink-state-group
show uplink-state-group Display status information on a specified uplink-state group or all
groups.
Example Figure 60-4. uplink-state-group Command Example

FTOS(conf)#uplink-state-group 16
FTOS(conf)#
02:23:17: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_UP: Changed uplink state group Admin state
to up: Group 16

upstream
s S50 only Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface.
Syntax upstream interface
Parameters
interface Enter one of the following interface types:
1-Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range}
Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated
by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example:
port-channel 1-3,5
Defaults None
Command
History
Usage You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group.
Information
You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Each interface assigned to an uplink-state
group must be configured as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both.
You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group. An uplink-state group can
contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself, but not both.
To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no upstream interface command.
Related
Commands
interface.
links.
Example Figure 60-5. upstream Command Example

FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# upstream gigabitethernet 1/10-15
FTOS(conf-uplink-state-group-16)#

61
VLAN Stacking
Overview
With the VLAN-Stacking feature (also called Stackable VLANs and QinQ), available on all Dell
Force10 platforms (C-Series c, E-Series e, and S-Series s) that are supported by this version of
FTOS, you can stack VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently.
VLAN Stacking is supported on E-Series ExaScale ex with FTOS 8.2.1.0. and later.
Commands
The commands included are:
dei enable
dei honor
dei mark
member
show interface dei-honor
show interface dei-mark
vlan-stack access
vlan-stack compatible
vlan-stack dot1p-mapping
vlan-stack protocol-type
vlan-stack trunk
For information on basic VLAN commands, see Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands in the chapter
Layer 2.

If Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is not enabled across the Stackable VLAN network, STP BPDUs
from the customers networks are tunneled across the Stackable VLAN network.
If STP is enabled across the Stackable VLAN network, STP BPDUs from the customers networks
are consumed and not tunneled across the Stackable VLAN network unless protocol tunneling is
enabled.
Note: For details on protocol tunneling on the E-Series, see Chapter 52, Service Provider Bridging.
Layer 3 protocols are not supported on a Stackable VLAN network.
VLAN Stacking | 1455

Assigning an IP address to a Stackable VLAN is supported when all the members are only
Stackable VLAN trunk ports. IP addresses on a Stackable VLAN-enabled VLAN is not supported
if the VLAN contains Stackable VLAN access ports. This facility is provided for SNMP
management over a Stackable VLAN enabled VLAN containing only Stackable VLAN trunk
interfaces. Layer 3 routing protocols on such a VLAN are not supported.
It is recommended that you do not use the same MAC address, on different customer VLANs, on
the same Stackable VLAN.
Interfaces configured using Stackable VLAN access or Stackable VLAN trunk commands will not
switch traffic for the default VLAN. These interfaces will switch traffic only when they are added
to a non-default VLAN.
Starting with FTOS 7.8.1 for C-Series and S-Series (FTOS 7.7.1 for E-Series, 8.2.1.0 for E-Series
ExaScale), a vlan-stack trunk port is also allowed to be configured as a tagged port and as an
untagged port for single-tagged VLANs. When the vlan-stack trunk port is also a member of an
untagged vlan, the port should be in hybrid mode. See portmode hybrid.
dei enable
cs Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
Syntax dei enable
Defaults Packets are colored green; no packets are dropped.
Command
History
dei honor
cs Honor the incoming DEI value by mapping it to an FTOS drop precedence. You may enter the
command once for 0 and once for 1.
Syntax dei honor {0 | 1} {green | red | yellow}
Parameters
0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color.
green | Choose a color:
red | Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
yellow Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as best-effort.
Red: Lowest priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion
status).
Defaults Disabled; Packets with an unmapped DEI value are colored green.
Command
History
1456 | VLAN Stacking

Usage You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect.
Information
Related
dei enable
Commands
dei mark
cs Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet.
Syntax dei mark {green | yellow} {0 | 1}
Parameters
0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color.
green | Choose a color:
yellow Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as best-effort.
Defaults All the packets on egress will be marked with DEI 0.
Command
History
Usage You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect.
Information
Related
dei enable
Commands
member
ces Assign a Stackable VLAN access or trunk port to a VLAN. The VLAN must contain the vlan-stack
compatible command in its configuration.
Syntax member interface

To remove an interface from a Stackable VLAN, use the no member interface command.
Parameters
Command Mode CONF-IF-VLAN

Command

History
Version 7.6.1.0 Support added for C-Series and S-Series
Usage You must enable the Stackable VLAN (using the vlan-stack compatible command) on the VLAN prior
Information to adding a member to the VLAN.
Related
vlan-stack compatible Enable Stackable VLAN on a VLAN.
Commands
show interface dei-honor

cs Display the dei honor configuration.
Syntax show interface dei-honor [interface slot/port | linecard number port-set number]
Parameters
interface slot/port Enter the interface type followed by the line card slot and port
number.
linecard number Enter linecard followed by the line card slot number, then enter port-set
port-set number followed by the port-pipe number.
Command
History
Example FTOS#show interface dei-honor
Default Drop precedence: Green

Interface CFI/DEI Drop precedence
-------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 0/1 0 Green
Gi 0/1 1 Yellow
Gi 8/9 1 Red
Gi 8/40 0 Yellow
Related
dei honor
Commands
show interface dei-mark

cs Display the dei mark configuration.
Syntax show interface dei-mark [interface slot/port | linecard number port-set number]
Parameters
interface slot/port Enter the interface type followed by the line card slot and port
number.
linecard number Enter linecard followed by the line card slot number, then enter port-set
port-set number followed by the port-pipe number.

Command
History
Example FTOS#show interface dei-mark
Default CFI/DEI Marking: 0

Interface Drop precedence CFI/DEI
------------------------------------------------
Gi 0/1 Green 0
Gi 0/1 Yellow 1
Gi 8/9 Yellow 0
Gi 8/40 Yellow 0
Related
dei mark
Commands
vlan-stack access
ces Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as an access port to the Stackable VLAN network.
Syntax vlan-stack access

To remove access port designation, enter no vlan-stack access.
Command
History
Usage Prior to enabling this command, you must enter the switchport command to place the interface in
Information Layer 2 mode.
To remove the access port designation, the port must be removed (using the no member interface
command) from all Stackable VLAN enabled VLANs.
ces Enable the Stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN.
Syntax vlan-stack compatible

To disable the Stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN, enter no vlan-stack compatible.
Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN
Command
History


Usage You must remove the members prior to disabling the Stackable VLAN feature.
Information
To view the Stackable VLANs, use the show vlan command in the EXEC Privilege mode. Stackable
VLANs contain members, designated by the M in the Q column of the command output.
Figure 61-1. show vlan Command Example with Stackable VLANs

FTOS#show vlan
NUM Status Q Ports

* 1 Inactive
2 Active M Gi 13/13
M Gi 13/0-2
3 Active M Po1(Gi 13/14-15)
M Gi 13/18
M Gi 13/3
M Gi 13/18
M Gi 13/4
M Gi 13/18
M Gi 13/5
FTOS#
vlan-stack dot1p-mapping
cs Map C-Tag dot1p values to a S-Tag dot1p value. C-Tag values may be separated by commas, and
dashed ranges are permitted. Dynamic Mode CoS overrides any Layer 2 QoS configuration in case of
conflicts.
Syntax vlan-stack dot1p-mapping c-tag-dot1p values sp-tag-dot1p value
Parameters
c-tag-dot1p value Enter the keyword followed by the customer dot1p value that will be mapped to
a service provider do1p value.
Range: 0-7
sp-tag-dot1p value Enter the keyword followed by the service provider dot1p value.
Range: 0-7
Defaults None
Command
History

vlan-stack protocol-type
ces Define the Stackable VLAN Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) for the outer VLAN tag (also called the
VMAN tag). If you do not configure this command, FTOS assigns the value 0x9100.
Syntax vlan-stack protocol-type number
Parameters
number Enter the hexadecimal number as the Stackable VLAN tag.
On the E-Series: FTOS accepts the Most Significant Byte (MSB) and then appends zeros for
the Least Significant Byte (LSB).
On the C-Series and S-Series: You may specify both bytes of the 2-byte S-Tag TPID.
E-Series Range: 0-FF
C-Series and S-Series Range: 0-FFFF
Default: 9100
Defaults 0x9100
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. C-Series and S-Series accept both bytes of the
History
2-byte S-Tag TPID.
Usage See the FTOS Configuration Guide for specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID.
Information
On E-Series TeraScale, the two characters you enter in the CLI for number become the MSB, as
shown in Table 61-1.
Table 61-1. Configuring a TPID on the E-Series TeraScale
number Resulting TPID
1 0x0100
10 0x1000
More than two characters. Configuration rejected.
On E-Series ExaScale, C-Series, and S-Series, four characters you enter in the CLI for number are
interpreted as follows:
Table 61-2. Configuring a TPID on the E-Series ExaScale, C-Series

and S-Series
number Resulting TPID
1 0x0001
10 0x0010
81 0x0081
8100 0x8100

Related
portmode hybrid Set a port (physical ports only) to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port
Commands
configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
vlan-stack trunk Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network.
vlan-stack trunk
ces Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network.
Syntax vlan-stack trunk

To remove a trunk port designation from the selected interface, enter no vlan-stack trunk.
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Functionality augmented for C-Series and S-Series to enable multi-purpose use of the
port. See Usage Information, below.
Version 7.7.1.0 Functionality augmented for E-Series to enable multi-purpose use of the port. See
Usage Information, below.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced for C-Series and S-Series
Usage Prior to using this command, you must execute the switchport command to place the interface in
Information Layer 2 mode.
To remove the trunk port designation, the port must first be removed (using the no member interface
command) from all Stackable VLAN-enabled VLANs.
Starting with FTOS 7.7.1.0 for E-Series, the VLAN-Stack trunk port can transparently tunnel, in a
service provider environment, customer-originated xSTP control protocol PDUs. See Chapter 52,
Service Provider Bridging.
Starting with FTOS 7.8.1.0 for C-Series and S-Series (FTOS 7.7.1 for E-Series), a VLAN-Stack trunk
port is also allowed to be configured as a tagged port and as an untagged port for single-tagged
VLANs. When the VLAN-Stack trunk port is also a member of an untagged VLAN, the port should be
in hybrid mode. See portmode hybrid.
In Example 1 below, a VLAN-Stack trunk port is configured and then also made part of a single-tagged
VLAN.
In Example 2 below, the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) is set to 8848. The Gi 3/10 port is configured
to act as a VLAN-Stack access port, while the TenGi 8/0 port will act as a VLAN-Stack trunk port,
switching Stackable VLAN traffic for VLAN 10, while also switching untagged traffic for VLAN 30
and tagged traffic for VLAN 40. (To allow VLAN 30 traffic, the native VLAN feature is required, by
executing the portmode hybrid command. See portmode hybrid in Interfaces.

Example 1 Figure 61-2. Adding a Stackable VLAN Trunk Port to a Tagged VLAN
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/42)#switchport
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/42)#vlan-stack trunk
!
no ip address
switchport
vlan-stack trunk
no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-0/42)#interface vlan 100
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100)#vlan-stack compatible
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#member gigabitethernet 0/42
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#show config
!
interface Vlan 100
no ip address
member GigabitEthernet 0/42
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-vl-100-stack)#interface vlan 20
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged gigabitethernet 0/42
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#show config
!
interface Vlan 20
no ip address
tagged GigabitEthernet 0/42
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-vl-20)#do show vlan


* 1 Inactive
20 Active T Gi 0/42
100 Active M Gi 0/42
Example 2 Figure 61-3. Adding a Stackable VLAN Trunk Port to Tagged and Untagged VLANs
FTOS(config)#vlan-stack protocol-type 88A8
FTOS(config)#interface gigabitethernet 3/10
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#switchport
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#vlan-stack access
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/10)#exit
FTOS(config)#interface tenGigabitethernet 8/0

FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#no shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#portmode hybrid
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#switchport
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#vlan-stack trunk
FTOS(conf-if-te-10/0)#exit
FTOS(config)#interface vlan 10
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#vlan-stack compatible
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#member Gi 7/0, Gi 3/10, TenGi 8/0
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#exit
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#untagged TenGi 8/0
FTOS(config)#
FTOS(conf-if-vlan)#tagged TenGi 8/0
FTOS(config)#

1464
|
VLAN Stacking
62
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)
Overview
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist on the
same router at the same time.
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) is supported on the E-Series TeraScale and ExaScale
platforms. This is noted in the Command History fields and by the symbol under the command
headings: e
Commands
cam-profile (E-Series Exascale only)
cam-profile ipv4-vrf (E-Series Terascale only)
cam-profile ipv4-v6-vrf (E-Series Terascale only)
ip vrf
ip vrf forwarding
ip vrf-vlan-block
show ip vrf
show run vrf
start-vlan-id
cam-profile
ex (E-Series Exascale only) Set the VRF CAM size. The default CAM size is 40M which supports both
IPv4 and IPv6. You can also configure 10M CAM which supports only IPv4.
Syntax cam-profile name [10M-CAM]
Parameters
name Enter the name for the VRF CAM profile. Maximum: 16 characters.
10M-CAM Set the CAM size to 10M.
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series Exascale.
History
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) | 1465

Example
FTOS(conf)#cam-profile test
FTOS(conf-cam-prof-test)#microcode vrf
FTOS(conf-cam-prof-test)#enable
CAM profile 'abc' is currently enabled.
Do you want to disable it and continue? [yes/no]: y
Updating the cam-profile will need a chassis reboot.
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: y
Nov 3 21:57:27: %RPM0-P:CP %FILEMGR-5-FILESAVED: Copied running-config to
startup-config in flash by default
Synchronizing data to peer RPM
!!!!!
Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: y
Reload the system after
setting the CAM Profile.
FTOS# show cam-profile
CamSize : 40-Meg
: Current Settings
Profile Name : test
Microcode Name : VRF
L2FIB : 15K entries
Learn : 1K entries
L2ACL : 5K entries
System Flow : 102 entries
Qos : 500 entries
Frrp : 102 entries
L2pt : 266 entries
IPv4FIB : 256K entries
IPv4ACL : 16K entries
IPv4Flow : 24K entries
Mcast Fib/Acl : 9K entries
Pbr : 1K entries
Qos : 10K entries
System Flow : 4K entries
EgL2ACL : 2K entries
EgIpv4ACL : 4K entries
Mpls : 60K entries
IPv6FIB : 12K entries
IPv6ACL : 6K entries
IPv6Flow : 6K entries
Mcast Fib/Acl : 3K entries
Pbr : 0K entries
Qos : 1K entries
System Flow : 2K entries
EgIpv6ACL : 1K entries
GenEgACL : 0.5K entries
IPv4FHOP : 4K entries
IPv6FHOP : 4K entries
IPv4/IPv6NHOP : 12K entries
Usage After you set the CAM size on an Exascale platform, you must select and enable VRF microcode, and
Information reload the system to activate the CAM profile (see the example above).
Related
Commands
cam-profile ipv4-v6-vrf Set the VRF CAM profile for IPv4 and IPv6 on the
E-Series Terascale.
1466 | Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)

cam-profile ipv4-vrf
et (E-Series Terascale only) Set the VRF CAM profile for IPv4 only.
Syntax cam-profile ipv4-vrf microcode ipv4-vrf
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series Terascale.
History
Example
FTOS(conf)#cam-profile ipv4-vrf microcode ipv4-vrf
FTOS(conf)#do reload Must reload the system
-- Chassis CAM Profile -- after setting the CAM Profile.
CamSize : 18-Meg
Profile Name : ipv4-vrf : ipv4-vrf
MicroCode Name : Ipv4-Vrf : Ipv4-Vrf
-- Line card 1 - per Port Pipe --

CamSize : 18-Meg
FTOS(conf)#
Usage Reload the system after entering this command to activate the CAM profile.
Information
Do not use this command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Related
Commands
cam-profile ipv4-v6-vrf Set the VRF CAM profile for IPv4 and IPv6 on the
E-Series Terascale.

cam-profile ipv4-v6-vrf
et (E-Series Terascale only) Set the VRF CAM profile for IPv4 and IPv6.
Syntax cam-profile ipv4-v6-vrf microcode ipv4-v6-vrf
Command
Version 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series Terascale.
History
Example
FTOS(conf)#cam-profile ipv4-v6-vrf microcode ipv4-v6-vrf
FTOS(conf)#do reload Must reload the system after
setting the CAM Profile
FTOS(conf)#do show cam-profile
CamSize : 18-Meg
Profile Name : ipv4-v6-vrf : ipv4-v6-vrf
MicroCode Name : Ipv4-V6-Vrf : Ipv4-V6-Vrf

CamSize : 18-Meg
Profile Name : ipv4-v6-vrf : ipv4-v6-vrf
MicroCode Name : Ipv4-V6-Vrf : Ipv4-V6-Vrf
FTOS(conf)#
Usage Reload the systems after entering this command to activate the CAM profile.
Information
Related
Commands cam-profile ipv4-vrf Set the VRF CAM profile for IPv4 only.

cam-profile ipv4-vrf
e (E-Series Exascale only) Set the VRF CAM profile for IPv4 only.
Syntax cam-profile ipv4-vrf microcode ipv4-vrf
Command
History
Example
FTOS(conf)#cam-profile ipv4-vrf microcode ipv4-vrf
FTOS(conf)#do reload Must reload the system
-- Chassis CAM Profile -- after setting the CAM Profile.
CamSize : 18-Meg

CamSize : 18-Meg
FTOS(conf)#
Usage Reload the system after entering this command to activate this CAM profile.
Information
Do not use this command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Related
Commands
cam-profile ipv4-v6-vrf Set the VRF CAM Profile for IPv4 and IPv6.

ip vrf
e Create a non-default VRF instance by specifying the VRF name and ID.
Note: Starting in FTOS 8.4.2.1, when VRF microcode is loaded on an E-Series ExaScale or TeraScale
router, the ip vrf {default-vlan | vrf-name} command is deprecated, and is replaced by the ip vrf vrf-name
vrf-id command.
Syntax ip vrf vrf-name vrf-id
To remove a VRF, enter no ip vrf vrf-name.
Parameters
vrf-name Enter the name of the VRF instance. Maximum: 32 characters.
vrf-id Enter the VRF ID number.
VRF ID range: 1 to 14 and 0 (default VRF)
Command
Version 8.4.2.1 The ip vrf {default-vlan | vrf-name} is deprecated and replaced by the ip vrf
History
vrf-name vrf-id command.
Example
FTOS(conf)#ip vrf East Named VRF Instance East
FTOS(conf-vr-East)#exit
! Default VRF Instance
FTOS(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf You must enter the name
FTOS(conf-vr-default-vrf)# default-vrf to implement it.
Usage VRF is enabled by default. The default VRF 0 is automatically configured when a router with VRF
Information loaded in CAM boots up.
FTOS supports up to 15 VRF instances on an E-Series router: 1 to 14 and the default VRF 0.

ip vrf forwarding
e Assign this interface to the VLAN specified.
Syntax ip vrf forwarding vrf-name
Parameters
vrf-name Enter the name of the VRF instance to which this interface will belong.
If no name is entered, default-vrf is assigned.
Command
History
Usage There must be no prior Layer 3 configuration on the interface when configuring VRF.
Information
VRF must be enabled prior to implementing this command.
Starting in release 8.4.1.0, you can configure an IP subnet or address on a physical or VLAN interface
that overlaps the same IP subnet or address configured on another interface only if the interfaces are
assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure
overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them.
Example
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/1)#int gi 1/10
!
interface GigabitEthernet 1/10 No configuration on
no ip address this interface
shutdown
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/10)#ip vrf ?
FTOS(conf-if-gi-1/10)#ip vrf forwarding East
!
ip vrf forwarding East
no ip address
shutdown
Related
Commands
ip vrf Set the name of the VRF instance the VRF, or specify the default-vrf.
ip vrf-vlan-block Configure the total number of VLANs that can be configured per VRF.
start-vlan-id Set the starting VLAN ID for a VRF instance.

ip vrf-vlan-block
e Configure the total number of VLANs that can be configured per VRF.
router, the ip vrf-vlan-block number command is deprecated.
Syntax ip vrf-vlan-block number
To remove the VLAN block configuration, enter no vrf-vlan-block.
Parameters
number Total number of VLANs allotted for VRF instances.
Expressed in power of 2 (2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096)
Command
Version 8.4.2.1 The ip vrf-vlan-block number command is deprecated.
History
Example
FTOS#conf
FTOS(conf)#ip vrf-vlan-block 1024 Enter the number as a power of 2.
FTOS(conf)#
Usage The total block number of VLANs applies to every configured VRF process. You cannot set different
Information blocks for different VRF processes.
All VLAN member ports must be removed from the VLAN before the VLAN is deleted from a VRF
instance.
Related
Commands
start-vlan-id Set the starting VLAN ID for a VRF instance.

show ip vrf
e Display the interfaces assigned to VRF instances.
Syntax show ip vrf [vrf-name]
Parameters
vrf-name Enter the name of a non-default VRF instance. To display information on all VRF
instances (including the default VRF 0), do not enter a value.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example
FTOS#show ip vrf
VRF-Name VRF-ID Interfaces
default-vrf 0 So 0/0 So 0/1 So 0/2 So 0/3 Gi 1/0 Gi 1/1

Gi 1/2 Gi 1/3 Gi 1/4 Gi 1/6 Gi 1/7 Gi 1/8 Gi 1/9 Gi 1/11 Gi 1/12 Gi 1/13 Gi 1/14
Gi 1/15 Gi 1/16 Gi 1/17 Gi 1/18 Gi 1/19 Gi 1/20 Gi 1/21 Gi 1/22 Gi 1/23 Gi 1/24 Gi
1/25 Gi 1/26 Gi 1/27 Gi 1/28 Gi 1/29 Gi 1/30 Gi 1/31 Gi 1/32 Gi 1/33 Gi 1/34 Gi 1/
35 Gi 1/36 Gi 1/37 Gi 1/38 Gi 1/39 Gi 1/40 Gi 1/41 Gi 1/42 Gi 1/43 Gi 1/44 Gi 1/45
Gi 1/46 Gi 1/47 Ma 0/0 Ma 1/0 Nu 0 Vl 1 Vl 100 Vl 111 Vl 112
East 1 Gi 1/10
North 2 Gi 1/5
West 3
show run vrf

e View information about the current running VRF instances.
Syntax show run vrf [vrf-name]
Parameters
vrf-name Enter the name of the VRF instance you want to view.
<CR> displays information on the default-vrf.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example
FTOS#show run vrf
!
ip vrf default-vrf
start-vlan-id 32
!
ip vrf East
start-vlan-id 1
!
ip vrf North
!
ip vrf West
start-vlan-id 96
FTOS#

start-vlan-id
e Set the starting VLAN ID for a VRF instance.
router, the start vlan-id vlan-start-id command is deprecated.
Syntax start-vlan-id vlan-start-id
Parameters
vlan-start-id The starting VLAN ID number for this VRF instance.
The system takes this number and adds up the number of VLANs assigned in
ip-vrf-vlan-block to set the start and end range for the VRF VLANs.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-VRF
Command
Version 8.4.2.1 The start vrf-vlan-id vlan-start-id command is deprecated.
History
Example
FTOS(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf
FTOS(conf-vr-default-vrf)#start-vlan-id 32
FTOS(conf-vr-default-vrf)#
!
FTOS(conf-vr-default-vrf)#ip vrf East
FTOS(conf-vr-East)#start-vlan-id 1
FTOS(conf-vr-East)#ip vrf West
!
FTOS(conf-vr-West)#start-vlan-id 96
FTOS(conf-vr-West)#
Usage If a given VLAN is not in the range of any VRF, no VRF command can be configured for that VLAN.
Information
All VLAN member ports must be removed from the VLAN before the VLAN is deleted from a VRF
instance. This also applies when moving a VLAN from one VRF to another: delete all member ports,
then delete the VLAN prior to adding it to another VRF.
Related
Commands
ip vrf forwarding Assign this interface to the VLAN specified.
ip vrf-vlan-block Configure the total number of VLANs that can be configured per VRF.
show run vrf View information about the current running VRF instances.

63
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is available on platforms: c e s
IPv6 VRRP (VRRP version 3) is available on platforms: c e s
Overview
This chapter has the following sections:
IPv4 VRRP Commands on page 1475

IPv6 VRRP Commands on page 1489
IPv4 VRRP Commands

advertise-interval
authentication-type
clear counters vrrp
debug vrrp
description
disable
hold-time
preempt
priority
show config
show vrrp
track
virtual-address
vrrp-group
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) | 1475

advertise-interval
ces Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements.
Syntax advertise-interval time
Parameters
time Enter a number of in seconds for IPv4 or centiseconds for IPv6.
Range: 1 to 255, in increments of 25 for IPv6.
IPv4 Default: 1 second.
IPv6 Default: 100 centiseconds
Defaults 1 second for IPv4 and 100 centiseconds for IPv6
Command Modes INTERFACE-VRRP
Command
Version 8.3.2.0 Introduced for IPv6 on E-Series TeraScale
History
Usage Dell Force10 recommends that you keep the default setting for this command. If you do change the
Information time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, you must change it on all routers.
authentication-type
ces Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges.
Syntax authentication-type simple [encryption-type] password
Parameters
simple Enter the keyword simple to specify simple authentication.
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers:
0 (zero) for an unencrypted (clear text) password
7 (seven) for hidden text password.
password Enter a character string up to 8 characters long as a password. If you do not enter an
encryption-type, the password is stored as clear text.
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History
Usage The password is displayed in the show config output if the encryption-type is unencrypted or clear text.
Information If you choose to encrypt the password, the show config displays an encrypted text string.
1476 | Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

clear counters vrrp
ces Clear the counters recorded for IPv4 VRRP operations.
Syntax clear counters vrrp [vrid | vrf instance]
Parameters
vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the VRRP group ID.
Range: 1 to 255
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series only: Enter the name of a VRF instance (32 characters maximum)
to clear the counters of all VRRP groups in the specified VRF.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Support was added for VRRP groups in non-default VRF instances.
History
debug vrrp
ce Allows you to enable debugging of IPv4 VRRP.
Syntax debug vrrp interface [vrid] {all | packets | state | timer}
Parameters
ExaScale.
For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID. The VLAN
ID range is from 1 to 4094.
vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID.
all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups.
bfd Enter the keyword bfd to enable debugging of all VFFP BFD interactions
packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets.
state Enter the keyword state to enable debugging of VRRP state changes.
timer Enter the keyword timer to enable debugging of the VRRP timer.
Command
History

Usage If no options are specified, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups.
Information
description
ces Configure a short text string describing the VRRP group.
Parameters
text Enter a text string up to 80 characters long.
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History
disable
ces Disable a VRRP group.
Syntax disable
Defaults C and S-Series default: VRRP is enabled.
E-Series default: VRRP is disabled.
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History
Usage To enable VRRP traffic, assign an IP address to the VRRP group using the virtual-address command
Information and enter no disable.
Related
virtual-address Specify the IP address of the Virtual Router.
Commands

hold-time
ces Specify a delay (in seconds) before a switch becomes the MASTER virtual router. By delaying the
initialization of the VRRP MASTER, the new switch can stabilize its routing tables.
Syntax hold-time time
Parameters
time Enter a number of seconds for IPv4 or centiseconds for IPv6.
Range: 0 to 65535, in multiples of 25 for IPv6
Default: 0
Defaults zero (0) seconds
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History
Usage If a switch is a MASTER and you change the hold timer, you must disable and re-enable VRRP for the
Information new hold timer value to take effect.
Related
disable Disable a VRRP group.
Commands
preempt
ces Permit a BACKUP router with a higher priority value to preempt or become the MASTER router.
Syntax preempt
Defaults Enabled (that is, a BACKUP router can preempt the MASTER router).
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History

priority
ces Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group. This value is used by the VRRP protocol during
the MASTER election process.
Syntax priority priority
Parameters
priority Enter a number as the priority. Enter 255 only if the routers virtual address is the same as
the interfaces primary IP address (that is, the router is the OWNER).
Range: 1 to 255.
Default: 100.
Defaults 100
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History
Usage To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP groups virtual address with
Information same IP address as the interfaces primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to
255.
If you set the priority to 255 and the virtual-address is not equal to the interfaces primary IP address,
an error message appears.
show config
ces View the non-default VRRP configuration.
Syntax show config [verbose]
Parameters
verbose (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword verbose to view all VRRP group configuration
information, including defaults.
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History

FTOS(conf-if-vrid-4)#show config
vrrp-group 4
virtual-address 119.192.182.124

show vrrp
ces Display information on the IPv4 and IPv6 VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active,
the FTOS returns the message: No Active VRRP group.
Syntax show vrrp [ipv6] [vrid] [vrf instance | interface] [brief]
Parameters
ipv6 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 to display information on IPv6 VRRP groups.
vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter a Virtual Router identifier to display information on only the specified
VRRP group. Range: 1 to 255.
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and the name of a VRF instance to display
information only on VRRP groups in the specified VRF. If no VRF instance is entered,
information on VRRP groups in all VRFs is displayed.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter any of the following keywords and slot/port or number:
ExaScale.
For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet followed by the slot/port.
followed by the slot/port.
brief (OPTIONAL) E-Series only: Enter the keyword brief to display summary information on
VRRP groups.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Support was added for displaying the VRRP groups in a non-default VRF instance.
History
Example Figure 63-2. Command Example: show vrrp brief
FTOS> show vrrp brief

Interface Grp Pri Pre State Master addr Virtual addr(s) Description
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gi 10/37 1 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.201
Gi 10/37 2 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.202 200.200.200.203
Gi 10/37 3 100 Y Master 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2
Gi 10/37 4 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.206 200.200.200.207
Gi 10/37 254 254 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.204 200.200.200.205

Table 63-1. Command Example Description: show vrrp brief
Item Description
Interface Lists the interface type, slot and port on which the VRRP group is
configured.
Grp Displays the VRRP group ID.
Pri Displays the priority value assigned to the interface.
If the track command is configured to track that interface and the interface
is disabled, the cost is subtracted from the priority value assigned to the
interface.
Pre States whether preempt is enabled on the interface.
Y = Preempt is enabled.
N = Preempt is not enabled.
State Displays the operational state of the interface by using one of the
following:
NA/IF (the interface is not available).
MASTER (the interface associated with the MASTER router).
BACKUP (the interface associated with the BACKUP router).
Master addr Displays the IP address of the MASTER router.
Virtual addr(s) Displays the virtual IP addresses of the VRRP routers associated with the
interface.

Figure 63-3. Command Example: show vrrp
FTOS>show vrrp
------------------
GigabitEthernet 12/3, VRID: 1, Net: 10.1.1.253
VRF: 0 default-vrf
State: Master, Priority: 105, Master: 10.1.1.253 (local)
Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec
Adv rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1862, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0
Virtual MAC address:
00:00:5e:00:01:01
Virtual IP address:
10.1.1.252
Authentication: (none)
Tracking states for 1 interfaces:
Up GigabitEthernet 12/17 priority-cost 10
------------------
GigabitEthernet 12/4, VRID: 2, Net: 10.1.2.253
VRF: 0 default-vrf
Adv rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1862, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0
00:00:5e:00:01:02
Virtual IP address:
10.1.2.252
Tracking states for 2 interfaces:
------------------
GigabitEthernet 7/30, IPv6 VRID: 3, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe01:95cc
VRF: 0 default-vrf
State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe01:95cc (local)
Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec
Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec
Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 310
00:00:5e:00:02:01
Virtual IP address:
2007::1 fe80::1
Tracking states for 2 resource Ids:
2 - Up IPv6 route, 2040::/64, priority-cost 20, 00:02:11
3 - Up IPv6 route, 2050::/64, priority-cost 30, 00:02:11
Table 63-2. Command Example Description: show vrrp

GigabitEthernet... Displays the Interface, the VRRP group ID, and the network address.
If the interface is no sending VRRP packets, 0.0.0.0 appears as the network
address.
VRF VRF instance to which the interface (on which the VRRP group is configured) belongs
State: master... Displays the interfaces state:
Na/If (not available),
master (MASTER virtual router)
backup (BACKUP virtual router)
the interfaces priority and the IP address of the MASTER.
Hold Down:... This line displays additional VRRP configuration information:
Hold Down displays the hold down timer interval in seconds.
Preempt displays TRUE if preempt is configured and FALSE if preempt is not
configured.
AdvInt displays the Advertise Interval in seconds.

Table 63-2. Command Example Description: show vrrp
Adv rcvd:... This line displays counters for the following:

Adv rcvd displays the number of VRRP advertisements received on the
interface.
Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface.
Gratuitous ARP sent displays the number of gratuitous ARPs sent.
Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group.
Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected.
Authentication:... States whether authentication is configured for the VRRP group. If it is, the
authentication type and the password are listed.
Tracking states... Displays information on the tracked interfaces or objects configured for a VRRP group
(track command), including:
UP or DOWN state of the tracked interface or object (Up or Dn)
Interface type and slot/port or object number, description, and time since the last
change in the state of the tracked object
Cost to be subtracted from the VRRP group priority if the state of the tracked
interface/object goes DOWN

track
ces Monitor an interface or a configured object and, optionally, reconfigure the cost value subtracted from
the VRRP group priority if the tracked interface or object goes down. You can assign up to 12 tracked
interfaces and up to 20 tracked objects per virtual group.
Syntax track {interface | object-id} [priority-cost cost]
Parameters
port-number.
For a Loopback interface, enter loopback number, where valid loopback interface
numbers are from 0 to 16383.
For a Port Channel interface, enter port-channel number, where valid port-channel
numbers are:
For SONET interfaces, enter sonet slot-number/port-number.
port-number
For a VLAN interface, enter vlan id-number, where valid VLAN IDs are from 1 to
4094.
object-id Enter the ID number of an object (for example, IPv4/IPv6 route or Layer 2/Layer 3
interface) configured with one of the track object-id commands.
Range: 1 to 65535.
cost (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the cost amount to be subtracted from the VRRP priority
value.
Range: 1 to 254. Default: 10.
Defaults cost = 10
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History
Version 8.4.1.0 Support for the object-id variable was added.
Usage The sum of the costs of all tracked interfaces and objects cannot equal or exceed the priority of the
Information VRRP group.
If the VRRP group is configured as the Owner router (priority 255), tracking for the group is disabled,
irrespective of the state of tracked interfaces and objects. The priority of the owner group always
remains as 255 and does not change.
If the specified interface or object goes down or is disabled, the cost value is subtracted from the
priority value. As a result, a new MASTER election may occur if the resulting priority value is lower
than the priority value in the BACKUP virtual routers.

virtual-address
ces Configure up to 12 IP addresses of virtual routers in the VRRP group. You must set at least one virtual
address for the VRRP group to start sending VRRP packets. For IPv4 addresses multiple addresses can
be entered in the same command line. For IPv6 addresses, each address must be entered separately.
Syntax virtual-address address1 [...address12]
Parameters
address1 Enter an IPv4 address or IPv6 address for the virtual router.
The IP address must be on the same subnet as the interfaces primary IP address.
... address12 For IPv4 addresses only: Enter up 11 additional IP addresses of virtual routers in
dotted decimal format. Separate the IP addresses with a space.
The IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the interfaces primary IP address.
Command Modes VRRP
Command
History
Version 7.4.1.0 Introduced support for telnetting to the VRRP group IP address assigned using this
command
Usage The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is
Information configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets.
A system message appears after you enter or delete the virtual-address command.
To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP groups virtual address with
the same IP address as the interfaces primary IP address. The priority of the VRRP group is then
automatically set to 255 and the interface becomes the MASTER/OWNER router of the VRRP group.
You can also configure a priority for the group even if the group is owned. The configured priority is
saved but only applied as the run-time priority when the last virtual address is removed from the group.
You can ping the virtual addresses configured in all VRRP groups.

vrrp-group
ces Assign an interface to a VRRP group.
Syntax vrrp-group vrid
Parameters
vrid Enter the virtual-router ID number of the VRRP group.
VRID range (C-Series and S-Series): 1-255.
VRID range (E-Series): 1-255 when VRF microcode is not loaded and 1-15 when VRF
microcode is loaded.
Command
Version 8.4.2.1 When VRF microcode is loaded in CAM, the range of valid VRID values on the
History
E-Series changed to 1-15.
Version 8.4.1.0 Support was added for configuring a VRRP group on an interface in a non-default
VRF instance.
Usage The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is
Starting in release 8.4.1.0, you can configure a VRRP group on an interface in a non-default VRF
instance.
E-Series ExaScale only: You can configure up to 16 VRRP groups per VLAN and up to 511 groups
on all VLANs.
E-Series ExaScale and TeraScale only: Starting in release 8.4.2.1, you can configure up to 255
VRRP groups per interface if VRF microcode is not loaded, and up to 15 groups if VRF microcode is
loaded.
E-Series ExaScale and TeraScale only: Starting in release 8.4.2.1, the VRID used by the VRRP
protocol changes according to whether VRF microcode is loaded or not:
When VRF microcode is not loaded in CAM, the VRID for a VRRP group is the same as the
VRID number configured with the vrrp-group or vrrp-ipv6-group command.
When VRF microcode is loaded in CAM, the VRID for a VRRP group is equal to 16 times the
vrrp-group or vrrp-ipv6-group vrid number plus the ip vrf vrf-id number.
For example, if VRF microcode is loaded and VRRP group 10 is configured in VRF 2, the VRID
used for the VRRP group is (16 x 10) + 2, or 162. This VRID value is used in the lowest byte of
the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group and is also used for VRF routing.

Figure 63-4 shows how the actual VRID used by a VRRP group is displayed:
Below the command line - when VRF microcode is loaded and you enter the vrrp-group or
vrrp-ipv6-group command in VRRP-group configuration mode.
In show vrrp command output.
Important: You must configure the same VRID on neighboring routers (Dell Force10 or
non-Dell Force10) in the same VRRP group in order for all routers to interoperate.
Figure 63-4. VRID used when VRF microcode is loaded

FTOS(conf)#ip vrf orange 2
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/0)#ip vrf forwarding orange
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/0)#ip address 1.1.1.1/24
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/0)#vrrp-group 10
% Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 10 in VRF 2 is 162.
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/0-vrid-162)#virtual-ip 1.1.1.10
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/0-vrid-162)#exit
When VRF microcode is loaded, the
FTOS(conf-if-gi-3/0)#no shutdown
the VRID used for the VRRP group
is different from the VRID configured
FTOS#show vrrp
with the vrrp-group command.
------------------
GigabitEthernet 3/0, IPv4 Vrrp-group: 10, VRID: 162, Version: 2, Net: 1.1.1.1
VRF: 2 orange
Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 76, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1
00:00:5e:00:01:a2
Virtual IP address:
1.1.1.10
Related
virtual-address Assign up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group.
Commands

IPv6 VRRP Commands
clear counters vrrp ipv6

debug vrrp ipv6
show vrrp ipv6
vrrp-ipv6-group
The following commands apply to IPv4 and IPv6:
advertise-interval
description
disable
hold-time
preempt
priority
show config
track
virtual-address
clear counters vrrp ipv6

ecs Clear the counters recorded for IPv6 VRRP groups.
Syntax clear counters vrrp ipv6 [vrid | vrf instance]
Parameters
vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of an IPv6 VRRP group. Range: 1 to 255
vrf instance (OPTIONAL) E-Series only: Enter the name of a VRF instance (32 characters maximum)
to clear the counters of all IPv6 VRRP groups in the specified VRF.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale, C-Series, and S-Series. Support was added for
History
IPv6 VRRP groups in non-default VRF instances.

debug vrrp ipv6
ecs Allows you to enable debugging of VRRP.
Syntax debug vrrp ipv6 interface [vrid] {all | packets | state | timer}
Parameters
number:
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID.
all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups.
bfd Enter the keyword bfd to enable debugging of all VFFP BFD interactions
database Enter the keyword database to display changes related to group, prefix, and interface
entries in the VRRP table.
packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets.
state Enter the keyword state to enable debugging of VRRP state changes.
timer Enter the keyword timer to enable debugging of the VRRP timer.
Command
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale, C-Series, and S-Series.
History
Usage If no options are specified, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups.
Information

show vrrp ipv6
ecs View the IPv6 VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the FTOS returns No
Active VRRP group.
Syntax show vrrp ipv6 [vrid] [interface] [brief]
Parameters
vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the Virtual Router Identifier for the VRRP group to view only that
group.
Range: 1 to 255.
E-Series Range: 1 to 255 for TeraScale
information.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information on the VRRP groups
on the E-Series.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Figure 63-5. Command Example: show vrrp ipv6
FTOS#show vrrp ipv6
------------------
GigabitEthernet 5/6, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net:
fe80::201:e8ff:fe7a:6bb9
VRF: 0 default-vrf
State: Master, Priority: 101, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe7a:6bb9 (local)
Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec
Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec
Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 64
00:00:5e:00:02:ff
Virtual IP address:
1::255 fe80::255
Table 63-3. Command Example Description: show vrrp ipv6

GigabitEthernet... Displays the Interface, the VRRP group ID, and the network address.
If the interface is no sending VRRP packets, 0.0.0.0 appears as the network
address.
VRF VRF instance to which the interface (on which the VRRP group is configured) belongs

Table 63-3. Command Example Description: show vrrp ipv6
State: master... Displays the interfaces state:

Na/If (not available),
master (MASTER virtual router)
backup (BACKUP virtual router)
the interfaces priority and the IP address of the MASTER.
Hold Down:... This line displays additional VRRP configuration information:
Hold Down displays the hold down timer interval in seconds.
Preempt displays TRUE if preempt is configured and FALSE if preempt is not
configured.
AdvInt displays the Advertise Interval in seconds.
Adv rcvd:... This line displays counters for the following:
Adv rcvd displays the number of VRRP advertisements received on the
interface.
Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface.
Bad pkts rcvd displays the number of invalid packets received on the
interface.
Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group.
Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected.
Tracking states... Displays information on the tracked interfaces or objects configured for a VRRP group
(track command), including:
UP or DOWN state of the tracked interface or object (Up or Dn)
Interface type and slot/port or object number, description, and time since the last
change in the state of the tracked object
Cost to be subtracted from the VRRP group priority if the state of the tracked
interface/object goes DOWN

vrrp-ipv6-group
ecs Assign an interface to a VRRP group.
Syntax vrrp-ipv6-group vrid
Parameters
vrid Enter the virtual-router ID number of the VRRP group.
VRID range (C-Series and S-Series): 1-255.
VRID range (E-Series): 1-255 when VRF microcode is not loaded and 1-15 when VRF
microcode is loaded.
Command
Version 8.4.2.1 The range of valid VRID values on the E-Series when VRF microcode is loaded in
History
CAM changed to 1-15.
Version 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale, C-Series, and S-Series.
Usage The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a link-local virtual IP address is
E-Series ExaScale and TeraScale only: Starting in release 8.4.2.1, you can configure up to 255
VRRP groups per interface if VRF microcode is not loaded, and up to 15 groups if VRF microcode is
loaded.
E-Series ExaScale and TeraScale only: Starting in release 8.4.2.1, the VRID used by the VRRP
protocol changes according to whether VRF microcode is loaded or not:
When VRF microcode is not loaded in CAM, the VRID for a VRRP group is the same as the
VRID number configured with the vrrp-group or vrrp-ipv6-group command.
When VRF microcode is loaded in CAM, the VRID for a VRRP group is equal to 16 times the
vrrp-group or vrrp-ipv6-group vrid number plus the ip vrf vrf-id number.
For example, if VRF microcode is loaded and VRRP group 10 is configured in VRF 2, the VRID
used for the VRRP group is (16 x 10) + 2, or 162. This VRID value is used in the lowest byte of
the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group and is also used for VRF routing.
Important: You must configure the same VRID on neighboring routers (Dell Force10 or non-Dell
Force10) in the same VRRP group in order for all routers to interoperate.
Related
virtual-address Assign up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group.
Commands


64
C-Series Diagnostics and Debugging
Overview
Inter-process Communication Commands
RPM Management Port Commands
Data Path Debugging Commands
Interface Troubleshooting Commands
Advanced ASIC Debugging Commands
ACL and System-Flow Debug Commands
Interface Management Debug Commands
Layer 2 Debug Command
Trace Logging Commands
Offline Diagnostic Commands
PoE Hardware Status Commands
Buffer Tuning Commands
Inter-process Communication Commands

The following are Inter-Process Communication (IPC) commands. IPC commands display receive and
transmit frame counters for the party-bus switch and CPU interfaces. These interfaces are the interfaces
over which FTOS task-to-task control messages are exchanged.
clear hardware cpu party-bus

clear hardware rpm mac counters
hardware monitor linecard
hardware monitor mac
hardware watchdog
show hardware cpu party-bus
show hardware rpm mac
clear hardware cpu party-bus

c Clear the receive, transmit, and error counters for the party-bus port on the CPU of the specified line
card or RPM.
Syntax clear hardware {linecard | rpm} number cpu party-bus statistics
C-Series Diagnostics and Debugging | 1495

Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to clear counters on a line card.

rpm Enter the keyword rpm to clear counters on an RPM.
number Enter a number after the following keywords:
After the keyword rpm:
Range: 0-1
After the keyword linecard:
Range: 0-7 for the C300
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version7.5.1.0 Introduction
History
Usage
Information Warning: Commands in this chapter with this Warning symbol should be used only
when you are working directly with Dell Force10 TAC (Technical Assistance Center)
while troubleshooting a problem. To contact Dell Force10 TAC for assistance:
E-mail Direct Support: support@Force10networks.com
Web: www.force10networks.com/support/
Telephone support:
US and Canada customers: 866-965-5800
International customers: 408-965-5800

Clear receive and transmit Ethernet statistics for all ports on the party-bus switch of the specified RPM.
Syntax clear hardware rpm number mac counters
Parameters
number Enter the RPM slot number.
Range: 0-1
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.5.10 Introduction
History
Usage
Information Warning: Use this command only when you are working directly with a technical
support representative to troubleshoot a problem. Do not use this command
unless a technical support representative instructs you to do so.
1496 | C-Series Diagnostics and Debugging

e Configure the system to take an action upon a line card hardware error.
Syntax hardware monitor linecard asic {btm [action-on-error {card-problem | card-reset |

card-shutdown}] | fpc [action-on-error | parity-correction]}
Parameters
action-on-error Enter the keyword action-on-error to further specify actions that should be
taken in the event of a hardware error.
btm Enter the keyword btm to configure the system to take an action upon a Buffer
Traffic Manager hardware error.
fpc Enter the keyword fpc to configure the system to take an action upon a Flexible
Packet Classifier hardware error.
card-problem Enter the keyword card-problem to place a line card in a card-problem state
upon a hardware error.
card-reset Enter the keyword card-reset to reset a line card upon a hardware error.
card-shutdown Enter the keyword card-shutdown to shutdown a line card upon a hardware
error.
parity-correction Enter the keyword parity-correction to enable automatic parity corrections for
SRAM. The line card must be reloaded before the feature becomes operational.
Defaults None
Command
History

e Configure the system to shut down all ports on a line card upon a MAC hardware error.
Defaults None
Command
History
hardware watchdog
c Set the watchdog timer to trigger a reboot and restart the system.
Syntax hardware watchdog
Defaults Enabled

Command
History
Usage This command enables a hardware watchdog mechanism that automatically reboots an FTOS switch/
Information router with a single unresponsive RPM. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual
power cycle.
show hardware cpu party-bus

c View advanced debugging counters for the party-bus port on the CPU of the specified line card or
RPM.
Syntax show hardware {linecard | rpm} number cpu party-bus statistics
Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to view debugging counters for a
line card.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to view cpu debugging counters for an
RPM.
Range: 0-1
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduction
History

Example Figure 64-1. show hardware linecard Command Example
FTOS#show hardware linecard 1 cpu party-bus statistic
ACTIVE EMAC DEVICE:2 STATISTICS
Num of Pkts. Tx Requested = 2788452, Number of Pkts Transmitted = 2788452
Num of Pkts. Received = 139662, Number of Pkts Given to MUX = 139662
Transmit Errors due to no Data = 0
Transmit Errors due to exceed num of Desc = 0
Transmit Block Count (Stall Count) = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to Bad Pkts Rx = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to more than one Buf = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to out of Mem = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to out of CBlk = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to out of MBlk = 0
ALTERNATIVE EMAC DEVICE:3 STATISTICS
Num of Pkts. Tx Requested = 0, Number of Pkts Transmitted = 0
Num of Pkts. Received = 0, Number of Pkts Given to MUX = 0
Transmit Errors due to no Data = 0
Transmit Errors due to exceed num of Desc = 0
Transmit Block Count (Stall Count) = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to Bad Pkts Rx = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to more than one Buf = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to out of Mem = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to out of CBlk = 0
Recv Pkts Dropped due to out of MBlk = 0
value = 0 = 0x0
Usage
Related
clear hardware cpu party-bus Clear the receive, transmit, and error counters and for the party-bus port
Commands
on the CPU of the specified RPM.
show hardware rpm mac

c View receive and transmit counters for the party-bus switch in the IPC subsystem.
Syntax show hardware rpm number mac {counters | port-statistics {linecard number | rpm
number}}
Parameters
counters Enter the keyword counters to view high-level receive and transmit counters.
port-statistics Enter the keyword port-statistics to view detailed Ethernet statistics for the
specified port on the party-bus switch.
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to view information about a particular line card.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to view information about a particular RPM.
Range: 0-1
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command

History
Example Figure 64-2. show hardware rpm mac counters Command Example
FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 mac counters
Received and Transmitted Packets without Errors
SLOT ID# Rx Counter TxCounter
RSM SLOTS:
0 1 17
1 0 0
LCM SLOTS:
0 0 0
1 17 1
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
6 0 0
Table 64-1. show hardware rpm mac counters Output Description
Slot ID # Port number on the party-bus control switch.

RX Frames Number of packets received by the party-bus switch from the processor in the specified slot.
Note: Verify the counters are incrementing.
TX Frames Number of packets sent by the party-bus switch to the processor in the specified slot.
Note: Verify the counters are incrementing.
Figure 64-3. show hardware rpm mac port-statistics Command Example

FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 mac port-statistics linecard 1
IPC Switch Port Number :7
snmpIfInOctets : 2471340
snmpIfInUcastPkts : 2410
snmpIfOutOctets : 16046
snmpIfOutUcastPkts : 99
snmpDot1dTpPortInFrames : 2410
snmpDot1dTpPortOutFrames : 99
snmpEtherStatsPkts128to255Octets : 491
snmpEtherStatsOctets : 2487386
snmpEtherStatsPkts : 2509
snmpEtherStatsTXNoErrors : 99
snmpEtherStatsRXNoErrors : 2410
snmpIfHCInOctets : 2471340
snmpIfHCInUcastPkts : 2410
snmpIfHCOutOctets : 16046
snmpIfHCOutUcastPkts : 99
Usage
Related
clear hardware rpm mac counters Clear the receive, transmit, and error counters and for the
Commands
party-bus port on the CPU of the specified RPM.

RPM Management Port Commands
show hardware rpm cpu management

c View standard Ethernet receive and transmit counters as well as auto-negotiation debugging
information for the external management interface.
Syntax show hardware rpm number cpu management statistics
Parameters
number Enter the RPM slot number.
Range: 0-1
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 64-4. show hardware rpm Command Example
FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 cpu management statistics
Port #0 MIB Counters
GoodFramesReceived = 4214683
BadFramesReceived = 2
BroadcastFramesReceived = 275828
MulticastFramesReceived = 3787188
GoodOctetsReceived = 0x0000303000000000
GoodFramesSent = 9539
BroadcastFramesSent = 0
MulticastFramesSent = 0
GoodOctetsSent = 128
FC Control Counters
UnrecogMacControlReceived = 0
GoodFCFramesReceived = 0
BadFCFramesReceived = 0
FCFramesSent = 0
RX Errors
BadOctetsReceived = 260
UndersizeFramesReceived = 0
FragmentsReceived = 0
OversizeFramesReceived = 0
JabbersReceived = 0
MacReceiveErrors = 0
BadCrcReceived = 0
Rx Discarded packets counter= 0
Rx Overrun packets counter = 0
TX Errors
TxMacErrors = 0
TxExcessiveCollisions = 0
TxCollisions = 2
TxLateCollisions = 0
10 BASE-T half-duplex
Auto-negotiation is complete
The PHY Port power is normal

ethGiga #0 port Status: 0x2444 = 0x00000402
Link=UP, Speed=10, Duplex=HALF, RxFlowControl=DISABLE, padLen=136

RxCoal = 0 usec, TxCoal = 0 usec
MacAddr (0x3bc75e54) = 00:01:e8:2e:2f:20
RX Queue #0: base=0x42000000, free=1024
TX Queue #0: base=0x42008020, free=2048

MANAGEMENT PHY REGISTER VALUES
0x00: 0x1000 0x01: 0x796D 0x02: 0x0143 0x03: 0xBCB1
0x04: 0x0021 0x05: 0x41E1 0x06: 0x0065 0x07: 0x2001
0x08: 0x0000 0x09: 0x0000 0x0A: 0x0000 0x0B: 0x0000
0x0C: 0x0000 0x0D: 0x0000 0x0E: 0x0000 0x0F: 0x3000
0x10: 0x0000 0x11: 0x0100 0x12: 0x0000 0x13: 0x0000
0x14: 0x0000 0x15: 0x0101 0x16: 0x0000 0x17: 0x0F04
0x18: 0x0400 0x19: 0x8114 0x1A: 0x0000 0x1B: 0xFFFF
0x1C: 0x38A3 0x1D: 0x06CD 0x1E: 0x0000 0x1F: 0x0000
MII Control Register

SpeedSelection: 10Mbps
--More--
Usage

Data Path Debugging Commands
Data path refers to external data and control packets that are sent to an RPM or line card, or processed
by FP and forwarded through the system.
show hardware drops
show hardware cpu data-plane
show hardware drops

c View internal packet-drop counters on a line card or RPM.
Syntax show hardware {linecard number | rpm number} drops [unit number] [port number]
Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to view information about a line
card.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to view information about an RPM.
unit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword unit to view information about a
unit.
Range: 0-3
port (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port to view information about
a port.
Range: 1-8
Range: 0-1
After the keyword unit, enter the number of CSF or FP ASIC.
After the keyword port, enter the port number.
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 64-5. show hardware drops Command Example
FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 drops
UNIT No: 0
Total Ingress Drops :0

Total IngMac Drops :0
Total Mmu Drops :0
Total EgMac Drops :0
Total Egress Drops :0
UNIT No: 1

Total Mmu Drops :0
UNIT No: 2

Total Mmu Drops :0
UNIT No: 3

Total Mmu Drops :0
The figure below shows the command to display dropped packers per unit, in other words, dropped
packets for a particular FP or CSF ASIC.
Figure 64-6. show hardware drops unit Command Example

FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 drops unit 0
Port# :Ingress Drops :IngMac Drops :Total Mmu Drops :EgMac Drops :Egress
Drops
1 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 0 0
The figure below shows the command to display dropped packets for a particular port on a unit.

Figure 64-7. show hardware drops unit port Command Example
FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 drops unit 0 port 1
--- Ingress Drops ---
Unknown HiGig HDR :0
Unknown HiGig OPCODE :0
Unknown HiGig HDR Format :0
RX EgressBlockMask :0
Rx LinkBlockCntr :0
Rx SrcModBlockCntr :0
IBP CBP FullDrops :0
Rx AgedCounter :0
--- Ingress MAC Drops ---
IngressMacDrops :0
--- MMU Drops ---
HOL DROPS on COS0 :0
--- Egress MAC counters ---
egressMACDrops :0
--- Egress Drops ---
Tx AgedCounter :0
Tx ErrCounter :0
Tx MacUnderFlow :0
Usage
show hardware cpu data-plane

c View the driver statistics on the CPU of the specified line card or RPM.
Syntax show hardware {linecard | rpm} number cpu data-plane statistics
Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to view cpu data plane statistics for a
line card.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to view cpu data plane statistics for an
RPM.
Range: 0-1
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example 1 Figure 64-8. show hardware linecard Command Example
FTOS#show hardware linecard 1 cpu data-plane statistics
-----SOCEND driver statistics for device 4-----

rxHandle :0
noBuff :0
noMblk :0
noClblk :0
recvd :0
dropped :0
recvToMux :0
txInt :0
transmitted :0
txRequested :0
noTxDesc :0
txError :0
txWrongIntf :0
txNotInit :0
txReqTooLarge :0
txInternalError :0
rxError :0
Socend Driver Pool Statistics for device 4
-----------------------------------------
poolMBlkGetCnt = 0
poolMClGetCnt = 0
poolClBlkGetCnt = 0
poolClusterGetCnt = 0
poolMBlkFreeCnt = 0
poolMBlkClFreeCnt = 0
poolClBlkFreeCnt = 0
poolClFreeCnt = 0
poolClPoolIdGetCnt = 1
-----------------------------------------
Example 2 Figure 64-9. show hardware rpm Command Example

FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 cpu data-plane statistics
-----SOCEND driver statistics for device 2-----

rxHandle :0
noBuff :0
noMblk :0
noClblk :0
recvd :0
dropped :0
recvToMux :0
txInt :0
transmitted :0
txRequested :0
noTxDesc :0
Usage
Interface Troubleshooting Commands

This command provides additional information related to standard show interface commands.
See also in Chapter 23, Interfaces:

show interfaces phy

show hardware interface phy
c View MAC- and PHY-related registers and link status information, including the transmitted and
received auto-negotiation control words.
Syntax show hardware interface interface phy [registers]
Parameters
phy Enter the keyword phy to display sent and received
auto-negotiation and Layer 1 link status information.
registers (OPTIONAL) Use the registers keyword to display a dump of
the PHY registers in hexadecimal.
TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port
information.
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 64-10. show hardware interface Command Example
FTOS#show hardware interface gig 1/0 phy

MII Control Register
SpeedSelection: 1000Mbps
AutoNeg: ON
Loopback: False
PowerDown: Flase
Isolate: Flase
DuplexMode: Full
MII Status Register :
AutoNegComplete: False
RemoteFault: False
LinkStatus: False
JabberDetect: False
PHY Identifier Register :
PHY Identifier Register :
Auto-Negotiation Advertisement Register
10MegFullDplx: True
10MegHalfDplx: True
Asym Pause: False
Sym Pause: True
Auto-Negotiation Link Partenr Register :
Asym Pause: False
Sym Pause: False
1000Base-T Control Register:
Master/Slave Mode: Auto
1000Base-T Status Register
Master/Slave Fault: No
Master/Slave: Slave
Local RX OK: False
Remote RX OK: False
Link Partner 1000MegFullDplx: False
Link Partner 1000MegHalfDplx: False
Idle Error Count: 0
1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T IEEE Extnd Status Register
1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T PHY Extnd Control Register
Automatic MDI Crossover Mode: Enable
1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T PHY Extnd Status Register
Automatic MDI Crossover State: Crossover
Table 64-2. show hardware rpm number mac Output Description
Mode Control Indicates whether auto-negotiation is enabled and the selected speed and duplex.
Mode Status Displays auto-negotiation fault information. The AutoNegComplete shows True
and the LinkStatus field says OK when the interface completes auto-negotiation
successfully.
AutoNegotiation Advertise Displays the control words advertised by the local interface during negotiation.
The duplex can be full-duplex or half-duplex. The "AsymPause" and
"SymPause" describes the types of flow control supported by the local interface.
AutoNegotiation Remote Displays the control words advertised by the remote interface during
Partner's Ability negotiation. The duplex can be full-duplex or half-duplex. The "AsymPause"
and "SymPause" fields describe the types of flow control supported by the
remote interface.
AutoNegotiation Expansion Parallel detection refers to a handshaking scheme in which the link partners
continuously transmit an "idle" data packet using the Fast Ethernet MLT-3
waveform. Equipment that does not support auto-negotiation must be configured
to exactly match the mode of operation as the link partner, or else no link can be
established.

Table 64-2. show hardware rpm number mac Output Description
1000Base-T Control 1000Base-T requires auto-negotiation. The IEEE Ethernet standard does not
support setting the speed to 1000 Mbps with the speed command without
auto-negotiation. C-Series line cards support both full-duplex and half-duplex
1000BaseT.
Automatic MDI Crossover Indicates whether Automatic MDI crossover mode is enabled or disabled
Control
Automatic MDI Crossover Indicates whether Automatic MDI crossover state is crossover or normal.
State
Usage Use the show hardware interface interface phy command when you are troubleshooting a link
Information issue, such as when the show interfaces interface command is reporting an auto-negotiation
mismatch (there is an Auto-neg Error string in the output, as shown below.
Figure 64-11. Auto-negotiation Mismatch Example

FTOS#show interfaces gigabit 0/3
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:07:16:b3
LineSpeed auto, Mode full duplex, Auto-neg Error
[output omitted]
The no auto-negotiation command disables auto-negotiation on an interface. Dell Force10

recommends keeping auto-negotiation enabled.
If the remote interface is not configured for auto-negotiation, the Dell Force10 interface can detect the
speed at which the remote device is operating by the type of electrical signal that is arriving.
If the local and remote interfaces are configured differently for auto-negotiationfor example, one
side is configured for auto-negotiation and the other side is configured for a particular speedthe link
does no not come up. Both sides of the link must be configured for auto-negotiation (recommended) or
else the same speed.
1000Base-T requires auto-negotiation. The IEEE Ethernet standard does not support setting the speed
manually to 1000 Mbps.

Advanced ASIC Debugging Commands
clear hardware unit

show cpu-interface-stats
show hardware unit
show revision
clear hardware unit

c Clear debugging information on the internal Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the CSF and FP ASICs.
Syntax clear hardware {linecard number | rpm number} unit number counters
Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to clear information about a line
card.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to clear information about an RPM.
number Enter a number:
Range: 0-1
After the unit keyword:
For a line card: Range: 0 - 3
For an RPM: Range 0 - 4
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
c The command provides an immediate snapshot of the health of the internal RPM and line card CPU.
Generally this command is used in concert with Dell Force10 Technical Support engineers.
Syntax show cpu-interface-stats {cp | lp | rp1 | rp2}
Parameters
cp Enter the keyword cp to display the CP's interface statistics.
lp Enter the keyword lp to display the LP's interface statistics

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 64-12. show cpu-interface-stats lp Command Example (Partial)

FTOS#show cpu-interface-stats lp 1
-- Dataplane PP1 interface statistics --
Link state : Up
Recv Interrupts/Polls: 0
Recv Packets : 9807 Transmit Packets : 9808
...
Link state : Up
Recv Desc Error : 0 Transmit Desc Error : 0
...
-- Partybus RPM0 interface statistics --
Link state : Up
...
Link state : Up
Recv Out of Mem : 0 Transmit Out of Mem : 0
Recv Upper Layer Full: 0 Transmit Pause Pkts : 0
Recv Other Error : 0 Transmit Other Error: 0
Recv Restarts : 0
Recv Restarts Fatal : 0
FTOS#

Example Figure 64-13. show cpu-interface-stats cp Command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show cpu-interface-stats cp
-- Partybus ethernet statistics --
Link state : Down
...
-- Dataplane ethernet statistics --
Link state : Down
...
-- OOB ethernet statistics --
Link state : Up
...
-- Partybus switch statistics --
Dropped cells : 0
Dropped packets: 0
LC0 : Ingress: 0 Egress: 1780
...
CP : Ingress: 292114 Egress: 440141
RP1 : Ingress: 61250 Egress: 66663
IRC : Ingress: 0 Egress: 1780
-- Partybus ethernet rate statistics --
- 0: Peak rate at Thu Dec 6 18:20:32 2007 -
Total rate (bps) : 1634400
Total Size (bytes): 4086
Total Arp (bytes): 0
From 127.10.10.23:0 2128 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:9093 1500 bytes
From 127.10.10.12:4233 368 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:0 2128 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:9093 1500 bytes
From 127.10.10.12:4233 368 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:0 2128 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:9093 1500 bytes
From 127.10.10.11:4229 368 bytes
-- IRC Statistics --
irc phy: DOWN
-- Helios Statistics --
ACL Fpga Cp dataplane packets:9875 denied:0 dropped:0
ACL Fpga Rp1 dataplane packets:39125 denied:0 dropped:0
ACL Fpga Mgmt packets:19441 denied:0 dropped:0
FTOS#

show hardware unit
c View advanced debugging information on the internal Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the CSF and FP
ASICs.
Syntax show hardware {linecard number | rpm number} unit number {counters | details |
port-stats | register}
Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to view information about a line
card.
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to view information about an RPM.
Range: 0-1
After the keyword unit, enter the number of CSF or FP ASIC.
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
show revision
c Displays the currently loaded FPGA images.
Syntax show revision
Command
History

Example Figure 64-14. show revision Command Example
FTOS#show revision
-- RPM 0 --
C300 RPM FPGA : 3.8
Required FPGA version : 3.8
-- Secondary RPM --
C300 RPM FPGA : 3.8
-- Line card 3 --
48 Port 1G LCM FPGA : 2.6
-- Line card 7 --
48 Port 1G LCM FPGA : 2.6
FTOS#
ACL and System-Flow Debug Commands

clear hardware system-flow
show hardware acl
show hardware layer3 qos linecard port-set
show hardware system-flow layer2 linecard port-set

c Clear system-flow entry counters.
Syntax clear hardware system-flow layer2 linecard number port-set number counters
Parameters
After the keyword port-set, enter the Port-Pipe/FB ID.
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage

Related
show hardware system-flow layer2 linecard port-set View system-flow entries.
Commands
show hardware acl

c View Layer 2 or Layer 3 access control list entries.
Syntax show hardware {layer2 | layer 3} acl linecard number port-set number
Parameters
layer2 Enter the keyword layer2 to view Layer 2 access control list
entries for the specified line card.
layer3 Enter the keyword layer3 to view Layer 3 access control list
entries for the Forwarding Processor of the specified line card.
Range: 0-7 for the C300; 03 for the C150
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
show hardware layer3 qos linecard port-set

c View Layer 3 QoS messages.
Syntax show hardware layer3 qos linecard port-set
Parameters
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Usage
show hardware system-flow layer2 linecard port-set

c View system-flow entries.
Syntax show hardware system-flow layer2 linecard number port-set number [counters]
Parameters
counters Enter the keyword counters to view counters of system-flow
entries.
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
Related
clear hardware system-flow Clear system-flow entry counters.
Commands
Interface Management Debug Commands

These commands display advanced debugging information related to the Interface Manager (IFM)
process.
debug ifm trace-flags
show software ifm

debug ifm trace-flags
c Turn on IFM internal trace-flags.
Syntax debug ifm trace-flags trace-flag
Disable this command using the no debug ifm trace-flags command.
Parameters
trace-flag Enter a hexadecimal number representing the trace-flag.
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage Turning on a trace flag does not result in an output to the console/terminal. It prints trace information
Information to the trace buffer, which is viewed using the show trace history command.
Warning: Use this command only when you are working directly with a technical
show software ifm

c View interface management information.
Syntax show software ifm {clients [summary] | ifagt number | ifcb interface | linecard number |
trace-flags}
Parameters
clients (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword clients to view information on IFM clients.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view show brief information
of IFM clients.
ifagt Enter the keyword ifagt to view software pipe and IPC statistics for IFAGT.
ifcb Enter the keyword ifcb to view information about the Interface Control Block.
linecard Enter the keyword linecard view interface management information for line
cards.
trace-flags Enter the keyword trace-flags to view interface management
information for internal trace flags.

For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FastEthernet followed
For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback followed by a
ManagementEthernet followed by the slot/port information. The slot
range is 0-1 and the port range is 0.
by a number:
number Enter the linecard slot number.
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
Layer 2 Debug Command
show software macagent

c This command displays tables and advanced debugging information related to the MAC Agent
process.
Syntax show software macagent {configs | mac-addr-table {dump | count} | port interface
interface | port-channel number | stg number | vlan number} line-card number
Parameters
configs The keyword configs shows the initial configurations of the MAC Agent.
mac-addr-table The keyword mac-addr-table shows the number of MAC addresses in the MAC
Agent software.
dump The keyword dump shows the MAC addresses present in the software.
count The keyword count shows the number of MAC addresses present in the software.

port interface The keywords port interface show Layer 2 information for a port on a particular
line card.
stg The keyword stg shows the state of each port in a particular Spanning Tree Group
on a line card.
vlan The keyword vlan shows Layer 2 information in the MAC Agent for a VLAN on a
particular line card.
Range: 0-7 for the C300; 0-3 for the C150
After the port-channel keyword, enter the port-channel number.
Range: 1-128
After the keyword stg, enter the Spanning Tree Group number.
After the keyword vlan:
Range: 1 - 4095 for the C300
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
Trace Logging Commands

Trace logging is a critical debugging tool most often used by the Dell Force10 Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to isolate and resolve both software and hardware issues.
show console lp
show hardware linecard fpga
show hardware rpm fpga

c Enable the collection of CPU traffic statistics.
Syntax debug cpu-traffic-stats [linecard {all | number}]

To disable debugging, execute the no debug cpu-traffic-stats command.
Parameters
linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard to view CPU traffic statistics for a particular
line card.
all Enter the keyword all to specify all line cards.
number Enter a line card number
Defaults Disabled
Command
History
Usage This command can be used to turn on CPU traffic statistics collection either on a specific linecard or on
Information all linecards. The statistics currently collected are:
Numbers of packets trapped due to Egress MTU violation
Numbers of packets trapped due to TTL 1 or IP Options
Numbers of packets trapped due to TTL 0
Note: Use show cpu-traffic-stats to view traffic statistics.
This command enables (and disables) the collection of CPU traffic statistics from the time this
command is executed, not from system boot). However, excessive traffic received by a CPU will
automatically turn on the collection of CPU traffic statics. The message is an indication that collection
of CPU traffic is automatically turned on:
Excessive traffic is received by CPU and traffic will be rate controlled.
Note: This command must be enabled before the show cpu-traffic-stats command will
display traffic statistics. Dell Force10 recommends that you disable debugging (no debug
cpu-traffic-stats) once troubleshooting is complete.
Related
show cpu-traffic-stats Display CPU traffic statistics.
Commands
c View a buffered time-stamped log of all commands entered by all users.
Syntax show command-history
Parameters None
Defaults None

Command Mode EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage One trace log message is generated for each command. No password information is saved to this file.
Information
A command-history trace log is saved to a file upon an RPM failover. This file can be analyzed by the
Dell Force10 TAC to help identify the root cause of an RPM failover.
show console lp
c View the buffered console log for a line card.
Syntax show console lp number
Parameters
lp Enter the keyword lp to view buffered console messages for a line card processor.
number Enter a line card number.
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage This log displays initialization messages while the line card is going through the steps to reach
Information check-in status.
c View traffic statistics for a line card CPU.
Syntax show cpu-traffic-stats [linecard {all | number}]
Parameters
linecard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard to view CPU traffic statistics for a particular
line card.
all Enter the keyword all to specify all line cards.
number Enter a line card number
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
H

History
Example Figure 64-15. show cpu-traffic-stats linecard Command Example

FTOS#show cpu-traffic-stats linecard all
Stats for Line card 2, Port pipe 0, Port 0
----------------------------------------------
Numbers of packets trapped due to Egress MTU violation : 1
Numbers of packets trapped due to TTL 1 or IP Options : 0
Numbers of packets trapped due to TTL 0 : 0
Usage The statistics are displayed only if at least one of the counters is non-zero for any linecard, Port-Pipe,
Information or port combination.
show hardware linecard fpga

c Display internal information about the line card FPGA.
Syntax show hardware linecard slot fpga {errorlog | registers | stats}
Parameters
slot Enter the line card slot number.
Range: 0 to 7
errorlog (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword errorlog to dump the FPGA Error Log.
registers (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword registers to dump the FPGA Registers.
stats (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stats to dump the FPGA Interrupt
Statistics.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Usage
show hardware rpm fpga

c Display internal RPM FPGA information.
Syntax show hardware rpm slot fpga {errorlog | linecard {slot registers} | registers | stats |
standby-rpm registers}

Parameters
rpm slot Enter the keyword rpm followed by the RPM slot number.
Range: 0 or 1
errorlog (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword errorlog to dump the FPGA Error Log.
linecard slot registers Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number and the
keyword registers to dump the line cards FPGA registers.
registers (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword registers to dump the FPGA Registers.
stats (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stats to dump the FPGA Interrupt
Statistics.
standby-rpm register (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords standby-rpm register to display the
stand-by RPMs registers.
Command Modes EXEC
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Added support for Stand-by RPM Registers
History
Usage
Example Figure 64-16. show hardware rpm fpga registers (C-Series Command Example)
FTOS>show hardware rpm 0 fpga registers
***************************************************
Local Memory Dump
0x0000: 00010401 5a5a1234 01200b11 00000111 00000011 0000000f 000003ff 00000000

0x0020: 00000000 00000000 00010000 00000001 00fffffe 00000104 00000104 00000104
0x0040: 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104
0x0060: 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104 00000104
0x0080: 00000002 0000003f 0000ff01 0000008a 00000000 0000008b 00000089 0000008b
0x00a0: 0000008b 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
0x00c0: 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
0x00e0: 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
0x0100: 00000000 000000ff 00000003 00000003 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008
0x0120: 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008
0x0140: 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008
0x0160: 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008 00000008
0x0180: 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000
0x01a0: 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000
0x01c0: 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000
0x01e0: 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000
0x0200: 00000000 00000000 000001cc 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
0x0220: 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
0x0240: 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
0x0260: 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
FTOS>

Example Figure 64-17. show hardware rpm fpga stats (C-Series Command Example)
orce10#show hardware rpm 1 fpga stats
DUMPING FPGA INTERRUPT STATISTICS
FAN Interrupts received - 0

PSU Interrupts received - 0
Card Presence Interrupts received - 0
I2C[0] Interrupts received - 0
I2C[0] Interrupts handled - 0
...
HDLC[0] Interrupts received - 0
HDLC[0] Interrupts handled - 0
...
SPI Interrupts received - 0
SMI Write Interrupts received - 0
LM 80 Interrupts received - 0
LCLK Interrupts received - 0
Mastership change Interrupts received - 1
Over temperature Interrupts received - 0
Low temperature Interrupts received - 0
XFP[0] Interrupts received - 0
POE[0] Interrupts received - 0
PCI Reset Interrupts received - 0
Spurious interrupts received - 0
FTOS>

diag linecard
offline
online
show diag
The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The tests results
are written to a file in flash memory and can be displayed on screen. Detailed statistics for all tests are
collected. These statistics include:
last execution time
first and last test pass time
first and last test failure time
total run count
total failure count
consecutive failure count
error code
diag linecard
c Run offline diagnostics on a line card.
Syntax diag linecard number {alllevels | level0 | level1 | level2}
Parameters
alllevels Enter the keyword alllevels to run the complete diagnostics test suite.
level0 Enter the keyword level0 to check the device inventory and verify the existence of the
devices (e.g., device ID test).
leve1 Enter the keyword level1 to verify that the devices are accessible via the designated paths
(e.g., line integrity tests) and test the internal parts (e.g., registers) of the devices.
level2 Enter the keyword level2 to perform on-board loopback tests on various data paths (e.g., data
Port-Pipe and Ethernet).
number Enter a number:
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage
Information Warning: Do not use this command when a line card is in a booting state.

offline
c Place a line card or SFM in an offline state.
Syntax offline {linecard number | sfm standby}
Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to place the linecard in an offline
state.
sfm standby Enter the keywords sfm standby to place the RPM in an offline
state.
number After the keyword linecard:
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage
online
c Place a linecard or RPM in an online state.
Syntax online {linecard number | sfm standby}
Parameters
linecard Enter the keyword linecard to place the linecard in an online state.
sfm standby Enter the keywords sfm standby to place the RPM in an online state.
number After the keyword linecard:
Defaults None
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage

show diag
c View diagnostics information.
Syntax show diag {information | linecard number | summary | detail}
Parameters
information Enter the keyword information to view diagnostics processes
by line card.
linecard Enter the keyword linecard for diagnostics information for a
particular line card.
number Enter a line card number.
summary Enter the keyword summary brief diagnostics information.
detail Enter the keyword detail for detailed diagnostics information.
Defaults None.
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Usage
PoE Hardware Status Commands

Inspect C-Series line card internal commands with regard to Power over Ethernet (PoE).
show hardware linecard poe-status

cs Display the status of the four C-Series PoE controllers and the entire registers associated with each
controller.
Syntax show hardware linecard number poe-status
Parameters
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History

Example Figure 64-18. show hardware linecard (C-Series Command Example)
FTOS#show hardware linecard 7 poe-status
HW Status for POE Controller 0
The HW Status is
----------------
The Internal address is - 0x0000
The I2C address is - 0x003c
Is Master - Yes
The I2C Mode is - I2C
The mode is configured properly
The address is configured properly
The Controller and I2C is configured properly
FTOS#
Usage If the command is executed on a non-POE line card, the following error message is generated:
Information
FTOS#sh hardware linecard 6 poe-status
% Error: POE is not supported for this card.
Related
show power supply Display the power supply status.
Commands

The buffer tuning commands are:
buffer (Buffer Profile)
buffer (Configuration)
buffer-profile (Configuration)
buffer-profile (Interface)
show buffer-profile
show buffer-profile interface
Warning: Altering the buffer allocations is a sensitive operation. Do not use any
buffer tuning commands without first contacting the Dell Force10 Technical
Assistance Center.

cs Allocate an amount of dedicated buffer space, dynamic buffer space, or packet pointers to queues 0 to
3.
Syntax buffer [dedicated | dynamic | packet-pointers] queue0 number queue1 number queue2
number queue3 number
Parameters
dedicated Enter this keyword to configure the amount of dedicated buffer space per
queue.
dynamic Enter this keyword to configure the amount of dynamic buffer space per
Field Processor.
packet-pointers Enter this keyword to configure the number of packet pointers per queue.

queue0 number Enter this keyword to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers
to Queue 0.
Dedicated Buffer Range: 0-2013
Dynamic Buffer Range:
FP: 0-2013
CSF: 0-131200 (in multiples of 80)
Packet Pointer Range: 0-2047
to Queue 1.
FP: 0-2013
to Queue 2.
FP: 0-2013
to Queue 3.
FP: 0-2013
Defaults None
Command Mode BUFFER PROFILE
Command
H

History
Related
buffer-profile (Configuration) Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.
Commands
cs Apply a buffer profile to all Field or Switch Fabric processors in a port-pipe.
Syntax buffer [csf | fp-uplink] linecard slot port-set port-pipe buffer-policy buffer-profile
Parameters
csf Enter this keyword to apply a buffer profile to all Switch Fabric processors
in a port-pipe.
fp-uplink Enter this keyword to apply a buffer profile to all Field Processors in a a
port-pipe.

linecard slot Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
port-set port-pipe Enter the keyword port-set followed by the port-pipe number.
Range: 0-3 on C-Series, 0-1 on S-Series
buffer-policy Enter the keyword buffer-policy followed by the name of a buffer profile
buffer-profile you created.
Defaults None
Command
H

History
Usage If you attempt to apply a buffer profile to a non-existent port-pipe, FTOS displays the following
Information message. However, the configuration still appears in the running-config.
%DIFFSERV-2-DSA_BUFF_CARVING_INVALID_PORT_SET: Invalid FP port-set 2 for

linecard 2. Valid range of port-set is <0-1>
Related
Commands
cs Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.
Syntax buffer-profile {{fp | csf} profile-name | global {1Q|4Q}
Parameters
fp Enter this keyword to create a buffer profile for the Field Processor.
csf Enter this keyword to create a buffer profile for the Switch Fabric Processor.
profile-name Create a name for the buffer profile.
global Apply one of two pre-defined buffer profiles to all of the port-pipes in the
system.
1Q Enter this keyword to choose a pre-defined buffer profile for single queue
(i.e non-QoS) applications.
4Q Enter this keyword to choose a pre-defined buffer profile for four queue (i.e
QoS) applications.
Defaults global 4Q
Command
H
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added global keyword.

Usage When you remove a buffer-profile using the command no buffer-profile [fp | csf] from
Information CONFIGURATION mode, the buffer-profile name still appears in the output of show buffer-profile
[detail | summary]. After a line card reset, the buffer profile correctly returns to the default values,
but the profile name remains. Remove it from the show buffer-profile [detail | summary]
command output by entering no buffer [fp-uplink | csf] linecard port-set buffer-policy from
CONFIGURATION mode and no buffer-policy from INTERFACE mode.
Related
Commands
buffer (Buffer Profile) Allocate an amount of dedicated buffer space, dynamic buffer space,
or packet pointers to queues 0 to 3.
reload Reboot the system.
Usage The buffer-profile global command fails if you have already applied a custom buffer-profile on an
Information interface. Similarly, when buffer-profile global is configured, you cannot not apply buffer-profile on
any interface.
If the default buffer-profile (4Q) is active, FTOS displays an error message instructing you to remove
the default configuration using the command no buffer-profile global.
You must reload the system for the global buffer-profile to take effect.
Note: When you removed a buffer-profile using the command no buffer-profile [fp | csf]
from CONFIGURATION mode, the buffer-profile name still appears in the output of show
buffer-profile [detail | summary]. After a line card reset, the buffer profile correctly returns
to the default values, but the profile name remains. Remove it from the output using the
command no buffer [fp |csf] linecard port-set buffer-policy from CONFIGURATION
mode.
cs Apply a buffer profile to an interface.
Syntax buffer-profile profile-name
Parameters
profile-name Enter the name of the buffer profile you want to apply to the interface.
Defaults None
Command
H

History
Usage When you move to a different chassis a line card that has a buffer profile applied at interface level on
Information the fp-uplink, the line card retains the buffer profile. To return the line card to the default buffer profile,
remove the current profile using the command no buffer-profile fp-uplink linecard from
INTERFACE mode, and then reload the chassis.
Related
Commands

show buffer-profile
cs Display the buffer profile that is applied to an interface.
Syntax show buffer-profile {detail | summary} {csf | fp-uplink}
Parameters
detail Display the buffer allocations of the applied buffer profiles.
summary Display the buffer-profiles that are applied to line card port-pipes in the
system.
csf Display the Switch Fabric Processor buffer profiles that you have applied to
line card port-pipes in the system.
fp-uplink Display the Field Processor buffer profiles that you have applied to line card
port-pipes in the system.
Defaults None
Command
History
Example Figure 64-19. show buffer-profile Command Example

FTOS#show buffer-profile summary fp-uplink
Linecard Port-set Buffer-profile
0 0 test1
4 0 test2
FTOS#
Related
Commands

Syntax show buffer-profile {detail | summary} interface interface slot/port
Parameters
detail Display the buffer allocations of a buffer profile.
summary Display the Field Processors and Switch Fabric Processors that are applied
to line card port-pipes in the system.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type, either
gigabitethernet or tengigabitethernet.
Defaults None

Command
H

History
Example Figure 64-20. show buffer-profile interface Command Example

FTOS#show buffer-profile detail csf linecard 4 port-set 0
Linecard 4 Port-set 0
Buffer-profile test
Queue# Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets
(Bytes)
0 36960 718
1 18560 358
2 18560 358
3 18560 358
4 9600 64
5 9600 64
6 9600 64
7 9600 63
FTOS#
Related
Commands


65
E-Series Debugging and Diagnostics
Overview
FTOS supports an extensive suite of protocol-specific debug commands for packet- and event-level
debugging. These commands are described throughout this document. In addition, FTOS supports
commands for diagnosing suspected hardware issues.

Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands
Hardware Commands
Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands

The diagnostics and monitoring commands are:
dataplane-diag disable loopback
dataplane-diag disable sfm-bringdown
dataplane-diag disable sfm-walk
dataplane-diag disable dfo-reporting
diag linecard
diag sfm
ip control-plane egress-filter-traffic
ipv6 control-plane egress-filter-traffic
logging coredump kernel disable
logging coredump kernel server
logging coredump linecard
power-off/on sfm
reset linecard
reset sfm
show console
show diag sfm
show processes ipc
show processes ipc
show revision
E-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1535

show tech-support
In addition to these debug commands, FTOS supports diagnostics, monitoring, and fault isolation
commands to assist in gathering information.

Unless otherwise noted, these commands are available on TeraScale systems only.
The trace-log file captures failure information on most failure events.
The RPM-SFM runtime loopback test failure initiates an SFM walk. The system automatically
places each SFM (in sequential order) in an offline state, runs the loopback test, and then places
the SFM back in an active state. This continues until the system determines a working SFM
combination. If no working combination is found, the system restores to the pre-walking SFM
state
If the line card runtime loopback test fails, the system does not launch an SFM walk.
Note: SFM walking assumes a chassis with the maximum number of SFMs in an active state.
dataplane-diag disable loopback

e Disable the runtime loopback test on the primary RPM and line cards.
Syntax dataplane-diag disable loopback

To re-enable, use the no dataplane-diag disable loopback command.
Defaults Enabled
Command
Related
show diag sfm Display the loopback test results
Commands
dataplane-diag disable sfm-bringdown Disable the automatic SFM bringdown
dataplane-diag disable sfm-walk Diable the automatic SFM walk
1536 | E-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Usage The runtime dataplane loopback test, by default, runs in the background. Every 10 seconds, the
Information primary RPM and each line card sends packets through the SFMs and back again (loopback) to
monitor the overall health status of the dataplane at a system level. This command disables that
automatic runtime loopback test. Execute the show diag sfm command to view the diagnostics
results (see Figure 65-1).
Note: Only the Primary RPM can perform runtime dataplane loopback test.
Example Figure 65-1. show diag sfm Command Example

FTOS#show diag sfm
Switch Fabric Module Loopback Test: enabled

SFM Walk-Through in Loopback Test: enabled
SFM Bring-Down in Loopback Test: enabled
Switch Fabric Module Loopback State: on
-- Route Processor Modules --

Slot Test Status Last Result Time Stamp
------------------------------------------------------
0 off none
1 on pass Feb 16 2007 15:50:26
-- Line cards --
------------------------------------------------------
0 off none
1 off none
2 on pass Feb 16 2007 15:50:26
3 off none
4 on pass Feb 16 2007 15:50:26
5 off none
6 off none
FTOS#
dataplane-diag disable sfm-bringdown

e Disable the automatic bring down of the single faulty SFM identified by the SFM walk during the
RPM-SFM runtime loopback test.
Syntax dataplane-diag disable sfm-bringdown

To re-enable the automatic SFM bring down, use the no dataplane-diag disable sfm-bringdown
command.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Usage If a full set of SFMs are online during the runtime loopback test and a failure occurs, an automatic
Information SFM walk is launched in an attempt to determine if the failure is due to a single faulty SFM. If
confirmed, the single faulty SFM is identified and disabled by default. This command disables the
automatic bring down of that suspect SFM.
Related
dataplane-diag disable loopback Disable the runtime dataplane loopback test
Commands

dataplane-diag disable sfm-walk Diable the automatic SFM walk

dataplane-diag disable sfm-walk

e Disable the automatic SFM walk that is launched after an RPM-SFM runtime loopback test failure.
Syntax dataplane-diag disable sfm-walk

To re-enable the automatic SFM walk, use the no dataplane-diag disable sfm-walk command.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Usage If a full set of SFMs are online during the runtime loopback test and a failure occurs, an automatic
Information SFM walk is launched in an attempt to determine if the failure is due to a faulty SFM. This command
disables the automatic SFM walk.
Related
dataplane-diag disable loopback Disable the runtime dataplane loopback test
Commands
dataplane-diag disable sfm-bringdown Disable the automatic SFM bringdown.
dataplane-diag disable dfo-reporting

e Disable the per-channel DFO (deskew FIFO overflow) reporting via event logging.
Syntax dataplane-diag disable dfo-reporting

To re-enable, use the no dataplane-diag disable dfo-reporting command.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Usage The per-channel DFO error reporting via event logging is enabled by default on TeraScale chassis. The
Information error reporting issues a warning when a temporary dataplane glitch occurs or when a persistent
malfunction is detected.
When a DFO error is detected, no automatic action is initiated by the system. The message issued is
similar to:
%RPM1-P:CP %CHMGR-2-SFM_PCDFO: PCDFO error detected for SFM4
This command disables the per-channel DFO reporting.

Related
diag sfm Initiate a manual dataplane loopback test.
Commands
Note: This command is not supported on the E600i chassis.
diag linecard
e Run a diagnosis on a linecard.
Syntax diag linecard [slot] [alllevels | level0 | level1 | level2 | terminate]
Parameters
slot Enter the slot number of the card you with to diagnose.
alllevels | level0 | (OPTIONAL) Enter the level of diagnostic desired.
level1 | level2 |
terminate Enter the keyword terminate to stop the test
Defaults Level 0-2
Command
History
Related
reset linecard Reset the line card and bring it back online.
Commands
diag sfm
e Execute a manual dataplane loopback test.
Syntax diag sfm [all-loopback | rpm-loopback]
Parameters
all-loopback (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all-loopback to execute a dataplane
loopback test from the RPMs and all line cards.
rpm-loopback (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rpm-loopback to execute a dataplane
loopback test on the RPMs only.
Command
History
Usage If the RPM-SFM or line card-SFM loopback test detects an SFM failure, an attempt is made to isolate
Information a single faulty SFM by automatically walking the SFMs. For this failure case, error messages similar to
the runtime loopback test error are generated.

If the test passes when the switch fabric is down and there are at least (max-1) SFMs in the chassis,
then the system will bring the switch fabric back up automatically. Like the runtime loopback test, the
manual loopback test failure will not bring the switch fabric down.
Note: Line card-SFM loopback test failure, during the manual test, will trigger an SFM walk.
Related
reset sfm Reset the SFM and bring it back online.
Commands
ip control-plane egress-filter-traffic
e Apply Layer 3 egress ACLs to the CPU generated traffic.
Syntax ip control-plane egress-filter-traffic

To disable, use the no ip control-plane egress-filter-traffic command.
Defaults Disabled
Command
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series only
History
Usage CPU ACLs are useful for troubleshooting packet flow that has bypassed the hardware-based
Information distributed forwarding path and is traveling directly to the RPM CPU. This command is useful in
debugging the CPU originated control traffic. You can use the egress ACL with count option to verify
if the control traffic sent by the CPU made it to the line card egress or not.
Using permit rules with the count option, you can track, on a per-flow basis, whether CPU-generated
packets were transmitted successfully. In addition, you can block certain CPU-generated and
soft-forwarded traffic.
This feature also allows you to configure an extended ACL that matches ICMP packets using the count
option, apply the ACL to an egress physical interface, and then ping through that interface to the
remote device.
Note: Only Layer 3 traffic goes through the ACLi.e. BPDUs will not be captured.
ipv6 control-plane egress-filter-traffic

e Apply Layer 3 egress ACLs to the CPU generated traffic.
Syntax ipv6 control-plane egress-filter-traffic

To disable, use the no ipv6 control-plane egress-filter-traffic command.
Defaults Disabled

Command
History
Usage CPU ACLs are useful for troubleshooting packet flow that has bypassed the hardware-based
Information distributed forwarding path and is traveling directly to the RPM CPU. This command is useful in
debugging the CPU originated control traffic. You can use the egress ACL with count option to verify
if the control traffic sent by the CPU made it to the line card egress or not.
Using permit rules with the count option, you can track, on a per-flow basis, whether CPU-generated
packets were transmitted successfully. In addition, you can block certain CPU-generated and
soft-forwarded traffic.
This feature also allows you to configure an extended ACL that matches ICMP packets using the count
option, apply the ACL to an egress physical interface, and then ping through that interface to the
remote device.
Note: Only Layer 3 traffic goes through the ACLi.e. BPDUs will not be captured.
logging coredump kernel disable

e Disable kernel core-dump logging to the CORE_DUMP_DIR on the flash.
Syntax [no] logging coredump kernel disable

To re-enable kernel core-dump logging (return to the default), use the no logging coredump
kernel disable command.
Defaults Enabled (core-dump logging is enabled)
Command
History
Usage By default, the kernel core-dump is enable and stored in the flash directory:
Information
Storage Directory Name: flash:CORE_DUMP_DIR
Kernel core-dump naming convention is: f10rpProcessorID.kcore.gz
For example: F10rp1.kcore.gz
Application core-dump naming convention is:
rpProcessorID _ApplicationName_timestamp.core.gz
For example: rp1_ospf_060307172608.core.gz
Multiple core-dumps
Application core-dumps are timestamp embedded and are not overwritten by default.
Manually delete the older core-dumps to allow more space on the flash.
Kernel core-dumps are overwritten whenever there is a new core-dump.

Should a crash occur, the large crash kernel file may take more than ten minutes to upload and may
require more space on the flash than is available. The HA module is aware of a core-dump in process
and will wait until the upload is complete before rebooting the RPM.
Note: Application core-dumps are also automatically uploaded to flash. If there is not enough
available space for the kernel core-dump on the flash, the kernel upload will terminate.
Related
logging coredump linecard Enable core-dump logging on line cards
Commands
logging coredump kernel server Save core-dump logging files to an alternate server
logging coredump kernel server

e Designate the logging core-dump files to be saved to a remote server rather than flash.
Syntax logging coredump kernel server

To save the logging core-dump files to flash (the default), use the no logging coredump kernel
server command.
Defaults Saved on flash
Command
History
Related
logging coredump linecard Enable core-dump logging on line cards
Commands
logging coredump kernel disable Disable kernel core-dump logging
logging coredump linecard

e Enable line card core-dump logging on a specific line card or on all line cards.
Syntax logging coredump linecard {slot_number [port-shutdown | no-port-shutdown] | all}

To disable line card coredump logging, use the no logging coredump linecard [slot_number |
all] command.
Parameters
linecard slot number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number to enable core-dump
logging line card details.
Range: 0 to 13 on the E1200; 0 on 6 for E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on the E300.
port-shutdown Enter the keyword port-shutdown to configure the system to shutdown the
physical interfaces during a software exception and the subsequent core dump.
no-port-shutdown Enter the keyword no-port-shutdown to configure the system so that the
physical interfaces remain up during a software exception and the subsequent
core dump. This is an undo feature for the port-shutdown option.
linecard all Enter the keyword linecard all to enable core-dump logging details on all line
cards.

Defaults Disabled (core-dump logging is off)
Command
History
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced the port-shutdown and no-port-shutdown variables
Usage The line card core-dump is stored on flash in a directory:

Information
Storage Directory Name: flash:CORE_DUMP_DIR
Line Card core-dump naming convention is: f10lpSlot_Number.core.gz
For example: f10lp6.core.gz
Multiple core-dumps
If multiple line cards crash, the core-dump files will upload simultaneously. However, a
second core-dump from the same line card slot will overwrite the first core-dump.
During a line card core-dump, the line card interface remains up while the core-dump is being
written to the directory. Use the port-shutdown option to shutdown the physical interfaces
during the core dump, allowing for a failover to a backup system.
Related
logging coredump kernel server Save core-dump logging files to an alternate server.
Commands
logging coredump kernel disable Disable kernel core-dump logging.
power on/off linecard

e Power on or off a specified line card.
Syntax power-{off | on} linecard slot-number
Parameters
power-off Enter the keyword power-off to power off the SFM.
power-on Enter the keyword power-on to power on the SFM
sfm slot-number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the slot number of the SFM to
power on/off.
Range: 0 to 6
Command
History
Related
show linecard Display the current line card status.
Commands

power-off/on sfm
e Power on or off a specified SFM.
Syntax power-{off | on} sfm slot-number
Parameters
power-off Enter the keyword power-off to power off the SFM.
power-on Enter the keyword power-on to power on the SFM
sfm slot-number Enter the keyword sfm followed by the slot number of the SFM to power
on/off.
Range: 0 to 7
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Usage This command is used for diagnostic purposes to isolate and identify a failed SFM when
Information troubleshooting issues related to the chassis dataplane.
Note: Execute this command only during an offline diagnostics; this command may bring
down the switch fabric.
When there are a full set of SFMs online, powering down one SFM will reduce the total bandwidth
supported by the chassis, and may affect data flow. A warning message is issued at the command line
that requires user confirmation to proceed with the command (Figure 65-2).
Example Figure 65-2. power-off sfm Command Example with Data Traffic Warning Message
FTOS#power-off sfm 0
SFM0 is active. Powering it off it might impact the data traffic.
Proceed with power-off [confirm yes/no]:yes
Feb 15 23:52:53: %RPM1-P:CP %CHMGR-2-MINOR_SFM: Minor alarm: only eight working SFM
FTOS#
Since this command is for diagnostic purposes, you can power off more than one SFM causing a switch
fabric module to go down. A warning message is issued at the command line and requires user
confirmation to proceed with the command (Figure 65-3).
Example Figure 65-3. power-off sfm Command Example with Switch Fabric Down Warning
Message
FTOS#power-off sfm 1
WARNING!! SFM1 is active. Powering it off it will cause Switch Fabric to go down!!
Proceed with power-off [confirm yes/no]:yes
Feb 16 00:03:19: %RPM1-P:CP %TSM-6-SFM_SWITCHFAB_STATE: Switch Fabric: DOWN
Feb 16 00:03:20: %RPM1-P:CP %CHMGR-0-MAJOR_SFM: Major alarm: Switch fabric down
FTOS#
Once the SFM is powered off, the SFM status indicates that the SFM has been powered off by the user.
Use the show sfm all command to display the status (Figure 65-4).

Example Figure 65-4. show sfm all Command Example
FTOS#show sfm all
Switch Fabric State: down (Not enough working SFMs)
Switch Mode: SFM

Slot Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 power off (SFM powered off by user)
3 active
4 active
5 active
FTOS#
Related
show sfm Display the current SFM status.
Commands
e Display the trace command history log.
Syntax show command-history line number
Parameters
line number (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the most recent command history lines (commands).
For example, if you want to view the most recent ten command, enter the number 10.
Defaults No default behaviors or values
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 65-5. show command-history Command Example
orce10#show command-history 15
[1/15 14:59:27]: CMD-(CLI):[enable]by default from console
[1/15 15:9:15]: CMD-(CLI):[show linecard all]by default from console
[1/15 15:11:51]: CMD-(CLI):[show startup-config]by default from console
[1/15 15:24:24]: CMD-(TEL46):[enable]by admin from vty0 (peer RPM)
[1/15 15:24:39]: CMD-(TEL46):[show version]by admin from vty0 (peer RPM)
[1/15 15:25:23]: CMD-(TEL46):[show interfaces managementethernet 1]by admin from vty0
(peer RPM)
[1/15 15:25:45]: CMD-(CLI):[configure]by default from console
- Repeated 1 time.
[1/15 15:25:56]: CMD-(CLI):[username mari password ******]by default from console
[1/15 15:26:33]: CMD-(CLI):[configure]by default from console
- Repeated 1 time.
[1/15 15:26:47]: CMD-(CLI):[ip ssh server enable]by default from console
[1/15 15:26:59]: CMD-(SSH47):[enable]by mari from vty0 (10.11.9.207)
[1/15 15:27:8]: CMD-(SSH47):[show command-history 15]by mari from vty0 (10.11.9.207)
FTOS#
Usage The command history output includes:

Information
[username name password *******] when the command is executed via telnet
[by default from console] when the command is executed via console

[by admin from vty0 (peer RPM)] with brackets, when the command is executed to primary
rpm via standby rpm using telnet-peer-rpm command.

Each command contains up to 50 characters in the display output. FTOS compares the first 50
characters of each command and if the characters are the same (i.e. the same command was issued),
then the display output indicates the duplicate entry with Repeated X times (see Figure 65-5).
All commands executed by all users, except password related commands, are captured in the trace
command history log. Each command has a date and time stamp (see Figure 65-5). The trace-log file
has a separate 3000 line buffer to hold command history on a FIFO basis. When the buffer is full, the
contents wraps (i.e. the first line is automatically deleted to make room for the last command line).This
file can be analyzed by the Dell Force10 Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to assist in
troubleshooting.
Note: No password information is saved to the trace command history log.
show console
e Display, onto the console, background resets, calls, initialization etc. of the designated line card.
Syntax show console lp slot-number
Parameters
lp slot-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp and the slot number to view information on the
line-card processor in that slot.
Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on a E300.
Command
History
Example Figure 65-6. show console lp 0 command Example

FTOS#show console lp 0
MINI FIFO CONTROL = 0x0a
MINI FIFO RPM POINTER = 0x000
MINI FIFO CPU POINTER = 0xb0b
Default case. type = 5
frrpaProcessIfmNotif(): Default case. type = 69
FTOS#

reset linecard
e Reset a specific line card module (power-off and then power-on).
Syntax reset linecard slot-number
Parameters
slot-number Enter the slot number of the SFM to reset.
Range: 0 to 6
Command
History
Related
power on/off linecard Power on/off a line card
Commands
reset sfm
e Reset a specific SFM module (power-off and then power-on).
Syntax reset sfm slot-number
Parameters
slot-number Enter the slot number of the SFM to reset.
Range: 0 to 7
Command
History
Usage When an error is detected on an SFM module, this command is a manual recovery mechanism. Since
Information this command can be used with live traffic running, the switch fabric will not go down if the switch
fabric is in an UP state. When there is a full set of SFMs online in the chassis, resetting one SFM will
reduce the total bandwidth supported by the chassis and may affect data flow. A warning message is
issued at the command line and requires user confirmation to proceed (Figure 65-7).
Example Figure 65-7. reset sfm Command Example with Warning Message
FTOS#reset sfm 0
SFM0 is active. Resetting it might temporarily impact data traffic.
Proceed with reset [confirm yes/no]:yes
Feb 16 00:39:30: %RPM1-P:CP %TSM-5-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 0
FTOS#
This command does not permit resetting any SFM when the system has (max-1) SFM and switch fabric
is up (Figure 65-8).

Example Figure 65-8. reset sfm error message
FTOS#reset sfm 1
% Error: SFM1 is active. Resetting it will impact data traffic.
FTOS#
Note: Resetting an SFM in a power-off state is not permitted. Use the command power-on
sfm to bring the SFM back to a power-on state.
Related
power-off/on sfm Power on/off an SFM
Commands
show diag sfm

e Display the results and status of the last chassis runtime/onetime loopback test.
Syntax show diag sfm
Command Modes EXEC
Command
History
Example Figure 65-9. show diag sfm command Example

FTOS#show diag sfm
Switch Fabric Module Loopback Test: enabled

SFM Walk-Through in Loopback Test: enabled
SFM Bring-Down in Loopback Test: enabled
Switch Fabric Module Loopback State: on
-- Route Processor Modules --

------------------------------------------------------
0 on pass Mar 26 2007 12:41:56
1 off none
-- Line cards --
------------------------------------------------------
0 off none
1 off none
2 on pass Mar 26 2007 12:41:56
3 off none
4 off none
5 off none
6 off none
7 off none
8 off none
9 off none
10 off none
11 on pass Mar 26 2007 12:41:56
12 off none
13 off none
FTOS#

show processes ipc
e Display IPC messaging used internally between FTOS processes.
Syntax show processes ipc [recv-stats | send-stats] [cp | rp1 | rp2 | lp linecard-number]
Parameters
recv-stats (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword recv-stat to display the receiver-side
details of the IPC messages.
send-stats (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword send-stats to display the sender-side
details of the IPC messages.
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view the Control Processors swpq
statistics.
rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view the Control Processors swpq
statistics on Route Processor 1.
lp linecard-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp followed by the line card number to
view the Control Processors swpq statistics on the specified line card.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 65-10. show processes ipc recv-stats Command Example
FTOS#show processes ipc recv-stats lp 0

IPC Receive Statistics on LP 0
Memory Used by Recv DB on this processor: 6825992 bytes
SeqNo - Last successfull Guaranteed IPC Pkt Seq No delivered from source to destination
HiWtmk - Highest socket watermark reached for destination
M-SkSize - Max socket size of destination
NonG-Rcvd - No of non-guaranteed IPC pkts received
Pri-Dr - Priority drops done for non-guaranteed pkts due to socket almost-full condition
SkFull-Dr - Any IPC packet dropped because of socket full condition
Source-> Destination SeqNo HiWtmk(%) M-SkSize NonG-Rcvd Pri-Dr SkFull-Dr

TME: 0 -> TME: 3 0 0 41600 1 0 0
TME: 3 -> LCMGR: 0 0 0 41600 1 0 0
IPC: 0 -> IPC: 3 37557 0 41600 6376 0 0
IPC: 3 -> TME: 3 16215 0 41600 0 0 0
CLI: 0 -> SYSADMTSK: 3 11483 0 41600 0 0 0
FTOS#

Example Figure 65-11. show processes ipc send-stats Command Example
FTOS#show processes ipc send-stats

IPC Send Statistics on CP
Memory Used by Send DB on this processor: 2303000 bytes
SeqNo - Last sent guaranteed IPC pkt sequence no from this source to destination
Success - No of successfull guaranteed IPC packets sent from source to destination
1st-R - No of first retry attempts
2nd-R - No of second retry attempts
Fails - No of guaranteed IPC pkts that could not be transmitted
RTT(ms) - Avg. Round Trip time for guaranteed IPC packets in millisecs
NonG-S - No of non-guaranteed IPC pkts succesfully sent. This does not include those sent by SWP
NonG-F - No of non-guaranteed IPC pkt transmission failures
SWP-S - No of non-guaranteed SWP IPC pkts succesfully sent
SWP-F - No of non-guaranteed SWP IPC pkt transmission failures
Source-> Destination SeqNo Success 1st-R 2nd-R Fails RTT(ms) NonG-S NonG-F SWP-S SWP-F
TME: 0 -> TME: 1 15868 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
FTOS#
Usage These commands should be used only when you are working directly with Dell Force10 TAC
Information (Technical Assistance Center) while troubleshooting a problem.

e Display the Single Window Protocol Queue (swpq) statistics.
Syntax show processes ipc flow-control [cp | rp1 | rp2 | lp linecard-number]
Parameters
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view the Control Processors swpq
statistics.
lp linecard-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lp followed by the line card number to
view the Control Processors swpq statistics on the specified line card.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 65-12. show processes ipc flow-control rp Command Example
FTOS# show processes ipc flow-control rp2
[qid] Source->Dest Cur High #of #of #msg #msg Retr total
Len Mark to Retr Sent Ackd
--------------------------------------------------------------------
[1] unknown2->unknown2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3
[2] l2pm0->spanMgr0 0 2 0 0 2298 2298 25 25
[3] fvrp0->macMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[4] l2pm0->fvrp0 0 2 0 0 1905 1905 25 25
[5] fvrp0->l2pm0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[6] stp0->l2pm0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[7] spanMgr0->macMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
[8] spanMgr0->ipMgr0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
FTOS#
Example Figure 65-13. show processes ipc flow-control lp Command Example
FTOS#show processes ipc flow-control lp 10

Q Statistics on LP 10
TxProcess RxProcess Cur High Time Retries Msg Ack Aval Max
Len Mark Out Sent Rcvd Retra Retra
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ACL_AGENT10 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
ACL_AGENT10 PIM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20
FRRPAGT10 FRRP0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 30
IFAGT10 IFMGR0 0 1 0 0 1 1 8 8
LPDMACAGENT10 MACMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25
FTOS#

Table 65-1. show processes ipc flow-control Display Definitions
Field Description
TxProcess Sender Process
RxProcess Receiver Process
Cur Len The number of messages, in the sender process, waiting to be sent to the receiver process
High Mark The maximum number of accumulated messages (over the life of the queue), in the sender
process, waiting to be sent out to the receiver process
Time Out The time period the sender process waits for acknowledgement from the receiver process
before attempting to resend the queued messages
Retries The number of successive attempts (retries) the sender process will make to send the
messages to the receiver process
Msg Sent The accumulated number of messages sent between the sender and receiver processes
from the time the queue was created.
Ack Rcvd The number of acknowledgements received from the receiver process
Aval Retrans The current number of attempts, for retransmission, available in the event an
acknowledgement is not received. This value decrements on every retry and may fall
below the initial value, of Max Retrans to zero, in case the receiver is not responding.
This count is reset dynamically to Max Retrans value in case the queue starts to function
after experiencing some acknowledgement loss
Max Retrans The max number of retransmission attempts configured for a sender - receiver pair
Usage The Single Window Protocol (SWP) provides flow-control-based reliable communication between the
Information sending and receiving software tasks.

A sending task enqueues messages into the SWP queue3 for a receiving task and waits for an
acknowledgement.
If no response is received within a period of time, the SWP time-out mechanism re-submits the
message at the head of the FIFO queue.
After retrying several times, the following time-out message is generated:
SWP-2-NOMORETIMEOUT
In the display output in Figure 65-13, a retry (Retries) value of zero indicates that the SWP
mechanism reached the maximum number of retransmissions without an acknowledgement.
show revision
e Display revision numbers of all line card, RPM, and SFM components.
Syntax show revision
Command
History

Example Figure 65-14. show revision Command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show revision
-- RPM 0 --
panda : ASIC - 0x72632000
bedrock : 0x34
helio : 0x13
tabby : 0x7
willow : 0x13
-- Line card 0 --
lc pic 0 : 1.0
lc pic 1 : 1.0
marvel serdes : 0x0
aquarius : 0x15
galle : 0x11
lynx : 0x7
mini : 0x22
pandora : 0xd
-- Line card 1 --
lc pic 0 : 1.1
lc pic 1 : 1.1
marvel serdes : 0xcd4
aquarius : 0x15
galle : 0x11
lynx : 0x7
mini : 0x25
pandora : 0x9
-- SFM 0 --
simba : 0x1
faith : 0xc
-- SFM 1 --
simba : 0x1
faith : 0xc
-- SFM 2 --
simba : 0x1
faith : 0xc
-- SFM 3 --
simba : 0x1
faith : 0xc
-- SFM 4 --
simba : 0x1
faith : 0xc
show tech-support
e Display a collection of data from other show commands, the information necessary for Dell Force10
technical support to perform troubleshooting.
Syntax show tech-support [linecard | page] {display | except | find | grep | no-more | save}
Parameters
(linecard <0-6> (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the linecard number to
view information relating to a specific linecard.
page (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword page to view 24 lines of text at a time. Press the
SPACE BAR to view the next 24 lines. Press the ENTER key to view the next line of
text

display, except, When using the pipe command ( | ), enter one of these keywords to filter command
find, grep, output. Refer to CLI Basics in the FTOS Command Reference Guide for details on
no-more filtering commands
save: Enter the save keyword (following the pipe) to save the command output.
flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename (max 20 chars))
slot0: Save to local file system (slot0://filename (max 20 chars))
Command
Version 7.8.1.0 Added save option
History
Version 6.5.4.0 Show clock included in display
Usage The display output is an accumulation of the same information that is displayed when you execute one
Information of the following show commands:
show cam-profile
show cam-ipv4flow
show chassis
show clock
show environment
show file-system
show interface
show inventory
show ip protocols
show processes cpu
show redundancy
show rpm
show running-conf
show sfm
show version
Without the page option, the command output is continuous, use CNTL-z to interrupt the command
output.

Example Figure 65-15. show tech-support (E-Series Command Example) Partial Output
FTOS#show tech-support
----------------------------------- show version -------------------------------
System image file is "flash://FTOS-EF-6.5.4.1.bin"
Chassis Type: E600

Control Processor: IBM PowerPC 750FX (Rev D2.2) with 536870912 bytes of memory.
Route Processor 1: IBM PowerPC 750FX (Rev D2.2) with 1073741824 bytes of memory.
Route Processor 2: IBM PowerPC 750FX (Rev D2.2) with 1073741824 bytes of memory.
1 Route Processor Module

9 Switch Fabric Module
1 48-port GE line card with SFP optics (EF)
1 4-port 10GE LAN/WAN PHY line card with XFP optics (EF)
1 48-port 10/100/1000Base-T line card with RJ-45 interfaces (EF)
------------------------------------ show clock -------------------------------
18:23:19.799 UTC Fri Mar 16 2007
----------------------------------- show HA information ----------------------
-- RPM Status --
------------------------------------------------
RPM Slot ID: 0
RPM State: Active
Link to Peer: Down
Peer RPM: not present

------------------------------------------------
Primary RPM: rpm0
Auto reboot RPM: Disabled
-- RPM Failover Record --

------------------------------------------------
Failover Count: 0
Last failover timestamp: None
Last failover Reason: None
----------------------------------- show running-config ------------------------

! Version 6.5.4.1
!
!
redundancy auto-failover-limit count 3 period 60
redundancy auto-synchronize full
redundancy disable-auto-reboot rpm
redundancy primary rpm0
!
hostname E600-TAC-3
!
cam-ipv4flow multicast-fib 9 pbr 1 qos 8 system-flow 5 trace-list 1
!
...
Related
Commands

show environment (C-Series Display system component status.

and E-Series)
(C-Series and E-Series)

The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The tests results
are written to a file in flash memory and can be displayed on screen. Detailed statistics for all tests are
collected.
These statistics include:

last execution time
first test pass time and last test pass time
first test failure time and last test failure time
total run count
total failure count
consecutive failure count
error code
The offline diagnostics commands are:
diag linecard
offline
online
show diag
diag linecard
e Run offline diagnostics on a line card(s).
Syntax diag linecard number {alllevels | level0 | level1 | level2} | {terminate}

To terminate the offline diagnostics, use the diag linecard number terminate command.
Parameters
number Enter the line card slot number.
alllevels Enter the keyword alllevels to run the complete offline diagnostic test.
level0 Enter the keyword level0 to check the device inventory and verify the
existence of the devices.
level1 Enter the keyword Level1 to verify that the devices are accessible via the
designated paths (line integrity tests) and test the internal registers of the
devices.
level2 Enter the keyword level2 to perform on-board loopback tests on various
data paths (data Port-Pipe and Ethernet).
terminate Enter the keyword terminate to stop the offline diagnostics tests.

Defaults All Levels (alllevels)
Command Modes EXEC
EXEC Privilege
Command
History
offline
e Place a line card in an offline state.
Syntax offline {linecard number}
Parameters
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
online
e Place a line card in an online state.
Syntax online {linecard number | rpm number}
Parameters
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History

show diag
e Display current diagnostics information.
Syntax show diag {information} [linecard number [detail | periodic | summary]]
Parameters
information Enter the keyword information to view current diagnostics information in the
system.
linecard number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot
number.
detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed diagnostics information.
periodic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword periodic to display diagnostics results
periodically.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of the
diagnostics information.
Defaults summary
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
H

History
Hardware Commands
These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC.
Warning: These commands should be used only when you are working directly
with Dell Force10 TAC (Technical Assistance Center) while troubleshooting a
problem. Do not use these command without the assistance of a Dell Force10 TAC
representative. To contact Dell Force10 TAC for assistance:
E-mail Direct Support: support@Force10networks.com
Web: www.force10networks.com/support/
Telephone support:
US and Canada customers: 866-965-5800
International customers: 408-965-5800

clear hardware btm
hardware watchdog
show hardware btm

show hardware fpc forward
show hardware fpc lookup detail
show hardware rpm cp
show hardware rpm mac counters
show hardware rpm rp1/rp2
show interfaces link-status
show logging driverlog
show running-config hardware-monitor
See also in Chapter 23, Interfaces:
show interfaces phy
clear hardware btm

e Clear the Buffer Traffic Manager (BTM) error counters and status registers.
Syntax clear hardware {rpm | linecard} number port-set pipe-number btm {egress | ingress | all}
{errors | status}
Parameters
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to clear BTM error counters or status registers on
the RPM.
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number to clear
BTM error counters or status registers on the specified line card.
Range: 0 to 13 on a E1200, 0 to 6 on a E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on an E300
port-set pipe-number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the number of the line card or
RPMs Port-Pipe.
Range: 0 to 1
egress errors | status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords egress errors or egress status to
clear egress BTM error counters or ingress BTM status registers.
ingress errors | status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ingress errors or ingress status
to clear ingress BTM error counters or ingress BTM status registers.
all errors | status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords all errors or all status to clear both
egress and ingress BTM error counters and status registers.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 65-16. clear hardware linecard Command Example
FTOS#clear hardware linecard 2 port-set 0 btm ingress errors

FTOS#clear hardware rpm 1 port-set 0 btm ingress errors
FTOS#clear hardware rpm 0 port-set 0 btm ingress errors
% Error: RPM 0 is not active.
FTOS#
Related
show hardware btm Display the BTM counters
Commands

e Clear the MAC counters for the party-bus control switch on the IPC subsystem of the RPM.
Syntax clear hardware rpm slot-number mac counters
Parameters
slot-number Enter the RPM slot number.
Range: 0 -1
Command Mode EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

e Configure the system to take an action upon a line card hardware error.
Syntax hardware monitor linecard asic {btm [action-on-error {card-problem | card-reset |

card-shutdown}] | fpc [action-on-error | parity-correction]}
Parameters
action-on-error Enter the keyword action-on-error to further specify actions that should be
taken in the event of a hardware error.
btm Enter the keyword btm to configure the system to take an action upon a Buffer
Traffic Manager hardware error.
fpc Enter the keyword fpc to configure the system to take an action upon a Flexible
Packet Classifier hardware error.
card-problem Enter the keyword card-problem to place a line card in a card-problem state
upon a hardware error.
card-reset Enter the keyword card-reset to reset a line card upon a hardware error.
card-shutdown Enter the keyword card-shutdown to shutdown a line card upon a hardware
error.
parity-correction Enter the keyword parity-correction to enable automatic parity corrections for
SRAM. The line card must be reloaded before the feature becomes operational.

Defaults None
Command
History

e Configure the system to shut down all ports on a line card upon a MAC hardware error.
Defaults None
Command
History
hardware watchdog
e Set the watchdog timer to trigger a reboot and restart the system.
Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Information router with a single unresponsive RPM. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual
power cycle.
e The command provides an immediate snapshot of the health of the internal RPM and line card CPU.
Generally this command is used in concert with Dell Force10 Technical Support engineers.
Syntax show cpu-interface-stats {cp | lp | rp1 | rp2}
Parameters
cp Enter the keyword cp to display the CP's interface statistics.
lp Enter the keyword lp to display the LP's interface statistics
rp1 Enter the keyword rp1 to display the RP1's interface statistics
rp2 Enter the keyword rp2 to display the RP2s interface statistics.

Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 65-17. show cpu-interface-stats lp Command Example

FTOS#show cpu-interface-stats lp 1
Link state : Up
Recv Restarts : 0
Link state : Up
Recv Restarts : 0
Link state : Up
Recv Restarts : 0
Link state : Up
Recv Restarts : 0
FTOS#

Example Figure 65-18. show cpu-interface-stats cp command Example (Partial)
FTOS#show cpu-interface-stats cp
-- Partybus ethernet statistics --
Link state : Down
...
-- Dataplane ethernet statistics --
Link state : Down
...
-- OOB ethernet statistics --
Link state : Up
...
-- Partybus switch statistics --
Dropped cells : 0
Dropped packets: 0
...
CP : Ingress: 292114 Egress: 440141
IRC : Ingress: 0 Egress: 1780
-- Partybus ethernet rate statistics --
From 127.10.10.23:0 2128 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:9093 1500 bytes
From 127.10.10.12:4233 368 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:0 2128 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:9093 1500 bytes
From 127.10.10.12:4233 368 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:0 2128 bytes
From 127.10.10.23:9093 1500 bytes
From 127.10.10.11:4229 368 bytes
-- IRC Statistics --
irc phy: DOWN
-- Helios Statistics --
ACL Fpga Cp dataplane packets:9875 denied:0 dropped:0
ACL Fpga Mgmt packets:19441 denied:0 dropped:0Force10#
FTOS#
show hardware btm

e Display the Buffer Traffic Manager (BTM) error counters, status registers, or packet queue.
Syntax show hardware {rpm | linecard} number port-set pipe-number btm {egress | ingress | all}
{errors | status | queues} {register starting-value [number_of_registers]}

Parameters
rpm Enter the keyword rpm to display RPM error counters, status registers, or
packet queue from the BTM.
linecard number Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number to
display BTM error counters, status registers, or packet queue on the
specified line card.
port-set pipe-number Enter the keyword port-set followed by the number of the line cards
Port-Pipe.
Range: 0 to 1
egress errors | status | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords egress errors, egress status, or
queues egress queues to view egress BTM error counters, status registers, or
packet queue.
ingress errors | status | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ingress errors, ingress status,
queues or ingress queues to view ingress BTM error counters, status registers,
or packet queue.
all errors | status | (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords all errors, all status, or all
queues queues to view all BTM error counters, status registers, or packet queue
register starting-value Enter the keyword register followed by the starting value of the register to
[number_of_registers] read from.
Range: 0 to 16777212
Optionally, enter the number of registers to read from. If no value is
specified, only one line is displayed.
Range: 1 to 512
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 65-19. show hardware linecard (E-Series) Command Example

FTOS#show hardware linecard 1 port-set 2 btm all errors
Output for portpipe 0 Ingress
PC_SPI4_BADPORT_CNTR [0x000230] = 16777216
PC_SPI4_EOP_ABORT_CNTR [0x000234] = 33554432
PC_SPI4_MISS_SOP_CNTR [0x00238] = 50331648
Output for portpipe 0 Egress
FC_BAD_CRC_ERR_CNTR [0x000250] = 150994944
FTOS#
Related
clear hardware btm Clear the btm counters
Commands

show hardware fpc forward
e Display receive and transmit counters, error counters and status registers for the forwarding functional
area of the FPC (flexible packet classification engine).
Syntax show hardware linecard number port-set pipe-number fpc forward {counters | drops |
spi {err-counters | spichannel# counters} | status}
Parameters
Range: 0 to 13 on E1200, 0 to 6 on E600/E600i, and 0 to 5 on E300
Port-Pipe.
Range: 0 to 1
counters (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display the FPC receive and
transmit packet, byte counters, and error counters.
drops (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword drops to display FPC drop-related error
counters.
spi err-counters (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords spi err-counters to display the FPC
System Packet Interface (SPI) receive and transmit packet, byte counters, error
counters, and key status registers on the ingress and egress paths.
spi spichannel# (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords spi spichannel# counters to display
counters the FPC System Packet Interface level 4 (SPI4) counters.
status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords status to display FPC status registers.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 65-20. show hardware fpc forward drops Command Example
FTOS#show hardware linecard 4 port-set 0 fpc forward drops
SPI 0
ICMP Drops : 0x0
ACL Drops : 0x0
IBC_DROP : 0
EBC_DROP : 0
IFA_DROP_CNT : 0
EFA_DROP_CNT : 0
CMB_IC_DROP : 0
CMB_LG_DROP : 0
CMB_SF_DROP : 0
CMB_IPM_DROP : 0
CMB_OPM_DROP : 0
SPI 1
ICMP Drops : 0x0
ACL Drops : 0x0
IBC_DROP : 0
EBC_DROP : 0
IFA_DROP_CNT : 0
EFA_DROP_CNT : 0
CMB_IC_DROP : 0
CMB_LG_DROP : 0
CMB_SF_DROP : 0
CMB_IPM_DROP : 0
CMB_OPM_DROP : 0
FTOS#

Example Figure 65-21. show hardware fpc forward counters Command Example
FTOS#show hardware linecard 4 port-set 0 fpc forward counters

Portpipe 0
Ingress Counters SPI 0
SPI4_ABORT : 0
MAC_2_T2_DIP2 : 0
MAC_2_T2_DIP4 : 0
SPI4_LOSS_CNT : 0
MAC_2_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_CRC : 0
MAC_2_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_LO : 0
MAC_2_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_HI : 0
IBC_DROP : 0
IFA_TX_PKT_LO : 0
IFA_TX_PKT_HI : 0
Egress Counters SPI 0
SPI4_ABORT : 0
C2_TO_T2_DIP2 : 0
C2_TO_T2_DIP4 : 0
SPI4_LOSS_CNT1 : 0
C2_TO_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_CRC : 0
C2_TO_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_LO : 0
C2_TO_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_HI : 0
EBC_DROP : 0
EFA_TX_PKT_LO : 0
EFA_TX_PKT_HI : 0
EGRESS_DROP_COUNT : 0
CMB_IC_DROP : 0
CMB_LG_DROP : 0
CMB_SF_DROP : 0
CMB_IPM_DROP : 0
CMB_OPM_DROP : 0
Portpipe 0
Ingress Counters SPI 1
SPI4_ABORT : 0
MAC_2_T2_DIP2 : 0
MAC_2_T2_DIP4 : 0
SPI4_LOSS_CNT : 0
MAC_2_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_CRC : 0
MAC_2_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_LO : 0
MAC_2_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_HI : 0
IBC_DROP : 0
IFA_TX_PKT_LO : 0
IFA_TX_PKT_HI : 0
Egress Counters SPI 1
SPI4_ABORT : 0
C2_TO_T2_DIP2 : 0
C2_TO_T2_DIP4 : 0
SPI4_LOSS_CNT1 : 0
C2_TO_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_CRC : 0
C2_TO_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_LO : 0
C2_TO_T2_RX_PKT_COUNTER_HI : 0
EBC_DROP : 0
EFA_TX_PKT_LO : 0
EFA_TX_PKT_HI : 0
EGRESS_DROP_COUNT : 0
CMB_IC_DROP : 0
CMB_LG_DROP : 0
CMB_SF_DROP : 0
CMB_IPM_DROP : 0
CMB_OPM_DROP : 0
FTOS#
Related
show hardware fpc lookup detail Display fpc lookup information.
Commands

show hardware fpc lookup detail
e Display diagnostic and debug information related to the lookup functional area of the Flexible Packet
Classification (FPC).
Syntax show hardware linecard number port-set pipe-number fpc lookup detail
Parameters
Port-Pipe.
Range: 0 to 1
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 65-22. show hardware linecard Command Example
FTOS#show hardware linecard 0 port-set 0 fpc lookup detailed
Summary of Error Registers

------- -- ----- ---------
0 Counters Enabled :
Cyclone 1.5 ChassisMap : 0x00000000
Cyclone 1.5 MixedMode : 0x00000000
T2L party Status : No Errors
partyType ErrorCount
---------- ----------
Summary of Last 16 CamSearches

=========================================================
I CamKey P T R P E N
n a a P o g W
d r b I r r r
e i l D t e I
x t e I s n
y T d s d
y e
p x
21554 50697065.5f302045.72726f72.2026204d.61736b20 0x52656769
0x73746572 0x2044756d 1879719229 1027423549 1027423549
Summary of Last 16 CamHits

==========================================
I Hit0/ Hit1/ S R P E N
n Index0 Index1 r P o g W
d c I r r r
e H D t e I
x C I s n
o d s d
d e
e x
0 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
1 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
2 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
3 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
4 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
5 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
6 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
7 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
8 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
9 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
10 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
11 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
12 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
13 0/0x00000 0/0x00000 0x00 0x00 00 0 00
FTOS#
Related
show hardware fpc forward Display information related to FPC forward.
Commands
show hardware rpm cp

e Display advanced debugging information for the RPM processors.
Syntax show hardware rpm slot-number cp {data-plane | management-port} | party-bus}

{counters | statistics}
Parameters
slot-number Enter the RPM slot number 0 or 1.
data-plane (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords data-plane to display information
about the dataplane interface on the control processor of the specified RPM.

management-port (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords management-port to display
information about the management-port interface of the control processor on
the specified RPM.
party-bus (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords party-bus to display control processor
information on the party-bus of the specified RPM.
counters (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display the standard
Ethernet counters.
statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword statistics to display driver-related
counters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 65-23. show hardware rpm Command Examples

FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 cp data-plane counters
Input statistics
31262 Bytes, 319 Frames,
31262 Total Bytes, 319 Total Frames,
0 Broadcasts, 0 Multicasts,
0 CRC, 0 Oversize,
0 Fragments, 0 Jabber,
0 64-byte Frames, 638 127-byte Frames,
0 255-byte Frames, 0 511-byte Frames,
0 1023-byte Frames, 0 Max Frames,
0 Error, 0 Dropped,
0 Undersized
Output statistics
31262 Bytes, 319 Frames, 357822480 Total Bytes,
0 Collisions, 0 Late collisions,
0 Broadcasts, 0 Multicasts
FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 cp data-plane statistics

Input statistics
640 Interrupts, 0 Ticks,
0 DMA Errors, 0 Stopped,
0 Cleanup, 0 Throttle Drops,
0 Status Error, 0 Too Large,
0 Buff Err0, 320 Receive Interrupts,
320 Readied for Protocols, 0 Jumbo,
0 Jumbo Error, 0 Ignored,
0 Jumbo Missing first, 0 Jumbo Dup First,
0 Jumbo Mget Failed,
0 Jumbo ClGet Failed, 0 No Mem,
0 Overflow fix count,
0 Mget Failed, 0 ClGet Failed
Output statistics
0 Pause, 0 Watchdog,
0 Late Collision, 0 Underrun,
0 Retransmit Limit, 0 Out Frames,
0 No Mem, 0 Phy Syncs
FTOS#

show hardware rpm mac counters
e Display receive- and transmit-counters for the party-bus control switch on the IPC subsystem of the
RPM.
Syntax show hardware rpm slot-number mac counters [port port-number]
Parameters
port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port followed by the port number of the
parity-bus control switch.
Range: 0 to 24
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Example Figure 65-24. show hardware rpm mac counters Command Example
FTOS#show hardware rpm 0 mac counters
PORT# RX Frames TX Frames
--------------------------------------
0 [LC0 ] 0 5
1 [LC1 ] 25171 2119
2 [LC2 ] 13967 2108
3 [LC3 ] 13964 2108
4 [LC4 ] 0 5
5 [LC5 ] 25134 2108
6 [LC6 ] 0 5
7 [LC7 ] 0 5
8 [LC8 ] 0 5
9 [LC9 ] 0 5
10 [LC10 ] 0 5
11 [LC11 ] 0 5
12 [LC12 ] 0 5
13 [LC13 ] 0 5
20 [LOC-CP ] 23232 101339
21 [LOC-RP1] 5248 1097
22 [LOC-RP2] 5250 1104
23 [UNUSED ] 0 0
24 [REM-RPM] 12617 12630
FTOS#
Table 65-2. show hardware rpm mac counters Command Example Information
Slot ID # Port number on the party-bus control switch.

RX Frames Number of packets received by the party-bus switch from the processor in the specified slot.
TX Frames Number of packets sent by the party-bus switch to the processor in the specified slot.

show hardware rpm rp1/rp2
e Display advanced debugging information for the RPM processors.
Syntax show hardware rpm slot-number {rp1 | rp2} {data-plane | party-bus} {counters |
statistics}
Parameters
rp1 | rp2 Enter either the keyword rp1 or rp2 to designate which route processor
debug information to display.
data-plane (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords data-plane to display control
processor information on the dataplane of the specified RPM.
party-bus (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords party-bus to display control processor
information on the party-bus of the specified RPM.
counters (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display the standard
Ethernet counters.
statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword statistics to display driver-related
counters
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Usage If the dropped cell field is non-zero, look for a pattern such as burstiness when the counters
Information increment. It is normal to see a small number of continuous cell drops. Burstiness may indicate
congestion on the internal switch at a particular point in time.
Command
History
show interfaces link-status

e Displays 10-Gigabit Ethernet link fault signaling and port status information.
Syntax show interfaces tenGigabitEthernet slot/port link-status
Parameters
tenGigabitEthernet Enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port
information.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History

Example Figure 65-25. show interfaces tengigabitethernet Command Example
FTOS#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 4/0 link-status

Port Status
Loss of Signal : FALSE (XFP has power)
RX Signal Lock Error : TRUE (Lock detected)
PCS Link State : Down
Link Faults
Remote : None (No Fault)
Local : Fault (Fault present)
Idle Error : False (Not received)
Illegal Symbol : False (Not received)
Error Symbol : False (Not received)
FTOS#
Table 65-3. Lines in show interfaces tengigabitethernet Command Example
Line Description
Loss of Signal Indicates if the interface has detected the required number of digital bit
transitions (from 1 to 0 and 0 to 1) on the incoming signal. A 10 GE link must
detect a certain number of such transitions for proper synchronization.
Rx Signal Lock Error Indicates a loss of timing condition. The receive clock must be recovered
from the incoming data stream to allow the receiving physical layer to
synchronize with the incoming electrical pulses.
PCS Link State Display the state of the PCS (Physical Coding sub-layer). The state is either
up or down.
Link Fault Remote. Indicates if the remote device has detected a fault, is inhibiting transmission
of frames, and may be continuously transmitting idle messages.
Link Fault Local. Indicates if a local fault is detected that may inhibit transmission of frames,
and may be continuously transmitting remote fault signals.
Link Fault Idle Error Indicates the detections of a non-idle symbol during an idle period.
Link Fault Illegal Symbol Indicates the detections of an illegal symbol, other than an error symbol,
while receiving data frames.
Link Fault Error Symbol. Indicates the detections of an error symbol while receiving data frames.
show logging driverlog

e Display the driver log for the RPM CP processor or for the line card CPU in the specified slot.
Syntax show logging driverlog [linecard number]
Parameters
linecard number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number
to display the driver log for the specified line card.
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege

Command
History
Usage This command displays internal software driver information which may be useful during
Information troubleshooting line card initialization errors, such as downed Port-Pipe.
show running-config hardware-monitor

e Display the hardware-monitor action-on-error settings.
Syntax show running-config hardware-monitor
Command
History
Example Figure 65-26. show running-config hardware-monitor Command Example

FTOS#show running-config hardware-monitor
!
hardware monitor mac action-on-error port-shutdown
hardware monitor linecard asic BTM action-on-error card-reset
hardware monitor linecard asic FPC action-on-error card-problem
FTOS#


66
S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics
This chapter contains three sections:
Hardware Commands

The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are
running, FTOS results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory. This show
file command is available only on master and standby.

Offline diagnostics can only be run when the unit is offline.
You can only run offline diagnostics on a unit to which you are connected via console.
In other words, you cannot run diagnostics on a unit to which you are connected via a stacking
link.
Diagnostic results are printed to the screen. FTOS does not write them to memory.
Diagnostics only test connectivity, not the entire data path.
The offline diagnostics commands are:
diag stack-unit
offline stack-unit
online stack-unit
diag stack-unit
s Run offline diagnostics on a stack unit.
Syntax diag stack-unit number [alllevels | level0 | level1 | level2] verbose testname
Parameters
number Enter the stack-unit number.
Range: 0 to 7
alllevels Enter the keyword alllevels to run the complete set of offline diagnostic tests.
level0 Enter the keyword level0 to run Level 0 diagnostics. Level 0 diagnostics check for the
presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, they
verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics | 1575

level1 Enter the keyword Level1 to run Level 1 diagnostics. Level 1 diagnostics is a smaller set of
diagnostic tests with support for automatic partitioning. They perform status/self test for all
the components on the board and test their registers for appropriate values. In addition, they
perform extensive tests on memory devices (e.g., SDRAM, flash, NVRAM, EEPROM, and
CPLD) wherever possible. There are no tests on 10G links. At this level, stack ports are shut
down automatically.
level2 Enter the keyword level2 to run Level 2 diagnostics. Level 2 diagnostics is a full set of
diagnostic tests with no support for automatic partitioning. Level 2 diagnostics are used
primarily for on-board loopback tests and more extensive component diagnostics. Various
components on the board are put into loop back mode, and test packets are transmitted
through those components. These diagnostics also perform snake tests using VLAN
configurations. You must physically remove the unit from the stack to test 10G links.
verbose Enter the keyword verbose to run the diagnostic in verbose mode. Verbose mode gives
more information in the output than standard mode.
testname Enter the keyword level2 to run a specific test case. Enclose the test case name in double
quotes ( ). For example: diag stack-unit 1 level1 testname first
Defaults None
Command
Version 8.3.1.0 Introduced the verbose option.
History
offline stack-unit
s Place a stack unit in the offline state.
Syntax offline stack-unit number
Parameters
number Enter the stack unit number.
Range: 0 to 7
Defaults None
Command
H
Version 8.2.1.0 Added warning message to off-line diagnostic

History
Related
H
show environment (S-Series) View S-Series system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).
Commands
Usage You cannot enter this command on a Master or Standby unit.

Information
The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process. A warning
message appears when the offline stack-unit command is implemented.
Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after

completion of diags.
Proceed with Offline-Diags [confirm yes/no]:y
1576 | S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

online stack-unit
s Place a stack unit in the online state.
Syntax online stack-unit number
Parameters
number Enter the stack unit number.
Range: 0 to 7
Defaults None
Command
H

History
Related
show environment (S-Series) View S-Series system component status (for example, temperature, voltage).
Commands

The buffer tuning commands are:

show buffer-profile
Warning: Altering the buffer allocations is a sensitive operation. Do not use any
buffer tuning commands without first contacting the Dell Force10 Technical
Assistance Center.

cs Allocate an amount of dedicated buffer space, dynamic buffer space, or packet pointers to queues 0 to
3.
Syntax buffer [dedicated | dynamic | packets-pointers] queue0 number queue1 number queue2
number queue3 number
Parameters
dedicated Enter this keyword to configure the amount of dedicated buffer space per
queue.
dynamic Enter this keyword to configure the amount of dynamic buffer space per
Field Processor.
packets-pointers Enter this keyword to configure the number of packet pointers per queue.

to Queue 0.
FP: 0-2013
to Queue 1.
FP: 0-2013
to Queue 2.
FP: 0-2013
to Queue 3.
FP: 0-2013
Defaults None
Command
H

History
Related
Commands
cs Apply a buffer profile to all Field or Switch Fabric processors in a port-pipe.
buffer [csf | fp-uplink] linecard slot port-set port-pipe buffer-policy buffer-profile
Parameters
csf Enter this keyword to apply a buffer profile to all Switch Fabric processors
in a port-pipe.
fp-uplink Enter this keyword to apply a buffer profile to all Field Processors in a a
port-pipe.

linecard slot Enter the keyword linecard followed by the line card slot number.
port-set port-pipe Enter the keyword port-set followed by the port-pipe number.
Range: 0-3 on C-Series, 0-1 on S-Series
buffer-policy Enter the keyword buffer-policy followed by the name of a buffer profile
buffer-profile you created.
None
Usage If you attempt to apply a buffer profile to a non-existent port-pipe, FTOS displays the following
Information message. However, the configuration still appears in the running-config.
%DIFFSERV-2-DSA_BUFF_CARVING_INVALID_PORT_SET: Invalid FP port-set 2 for linecard 2.

Valid range of port-set is <0-1>
Usage When you remove a buffer-profile using the command no buffer-profile [fp | csf] from
Information CONFIGURATION mode, the buffer-profile name still appears in the output of show buffer-profile
[detail | summary]. After a line card reset, the buffer profile correctly returns to the default values,
but the profile name remains. Remove it from the show buffer-profile [detail | summary]
command output by entering no buffer [fp-uplink | csf] linecard port-set buffer-policy from
CONFIGURATION mode and no buffer-policy from INTERFACE mode.
Command
H

History
Related
Commands
cs Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.
Syntax buffer-profile {{fp | csf} profile-name | global {1Q|4Q}
Parameters
fp Enter this keyword to create a buffer profile for the Field Processor.
csf Enter this keyword to create a buffer profile for the Switch Fabric Processor.
profile-name Create a name for the buffer profile.
global Apply one of two pre-defined buffer profiles to all of the port-pipes in the
system.
1Q Enter this keyword to choose a pre-defined buffer profile for single queue
(i.e non-QoS) applications.
4Q Enter this keyword to choose a pre-defined buffer profile for four queue (i.e
QoS) applications.
Defaults global 4Q

Command
H
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Added global keyword.
Related
Commands
buffer (Buffer Profile) Allocate an amount of dedicated buffer space, dynamic buffer space,
or packet pointers to queues 0 to 3.
Usage The buffer-profile global command fails if you have already applied a custom buffer-profile on an
Information interface. Similarly, when buffer-profile global is configured, you cannot not apply buffer-profile on
any interface.
If the default buffer-profile (4Q) is active, FTOS displays an error message instructing you to remove
the default configuration using the command no buffer-profile global.
You must reload the system for the global buffer-profile to take effect.
cs Apply a buffer profile to an interface.
Syntax buffer-profile profile-name
Parameters
profile-name Enter the name of the buffer profile you want to apply to the interface.
Defaults None
Command
H

History
Related
Commands
show buffer-profile
Syntax show buffer-profile {detail | summary} {csf | fp-uplink}
Parameters
detail Display the buffer allocations of the applied buffer profiles.
summary Display the buffer-profiles that are applied to line card port-pipes in the
system.
csf Display the Switch Fabric Processor buffer profiles that you have applied to
line card port-pipes in the system.
fp-uplink Display the Field Processor buffer profiles that you have applied to line card
port-pipes in the system.

Defaults None
Command
History
Example Figure 66-1. show buffer-profile Command Example

FTOS#show buffer-profile summary fp-uplink
Linecard Port-set Buffer-profile
0 0 test1
4 0 test2
FTOS#
Related
Commands

Syntax show buffer-profile {detail | summary} interface interface slot/port
Parameters
detail Display the buffer allocations of a buffer profile.
summary Display the Field Processors and Switch Fabric Processors that are applied
to line card port-pipes in the system.
interface interface Enter the keyword interface followed by the interface type, either
gigabitethernet or tengigabitethernet.
Defaults None
Command
H

History

Example Figure 66-2. show buffer-profile interface Command Example
FTOS#show buffer-profile detail csf linecard 4 port-set 0

Linecard 4 Port-set 0
Buffer-profile test
Queue# Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets
(Bytes)
0 36960 718
1 18560 358
2 18560 358
3 18560 358
4 9600 64
5 9600 64
6 9600 64
7 9600 63
FTOS#
Related
Commands
Hardware Commands
These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC.
The commands are:

hardware watchdog
show hardware layer2 acl
show hardware layer3
show hardware stack-unit
show hardware system-flow
clear hardware stack-unit

s Clear statistics from selected hardware components.
Syntax clear hardware stack-unit 07 {counters | unit 01 counters | cpu data-plane statistics |
cpu party-bus statistics | stack-port 052}
Parameters
stack-unit 0-7 Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by 0 to 7 to select a particular
stack member and then enter one of the following command options
to clear a specific collection of data.
counters Enter the keyword counters to clear the counters on the selected stack
member.
unit 01 counters Enter the keyword unit along with a port-pipe number, from 0 to 1,
followed by the keyword counters to clear the counters on the selected
port-pipe.
Note: S25 models (S25N, S25P, S25V, etc.) have only port-pipe 0.

cpu data-plane Enter the keywords cpu data-plane statistics to clear the data plane
statistics statistics.
cpu party-bus statistics Enter the keywords cpu party-bus statistics to clear the management
statistics.
stack-port 052 Enter the keyword stack-port followed by the port number of the stacking
port to clear the statistics of the particular stacking port.
Range: 0 to 52
Note: You can identify stack port numbers by physical inspection of
the rear modules. The numbering is the same as for the 10G ports.
You can also inspect the output of the show system stack-ports
command.
Command
History
Related
Commands

s Clear system-flow statistics from selected hardware components.
Syntax clear hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit 0-7 port-set 0-1 counters
Parameters
stack member and then enter one of the following command options
to clear a specific collection of data.
port-set 01 counters Enter the keyword port-set along with a port-pipe number, from 0 to 1,
followed by the keyword counters to clear the system-flow counters on
the selected port-pipe.
Note: S25 models (S25N, S25P, S25V, etc.) have only port-pipe 0.
Command
History
Related
Commands
hardware watchdog
s Set the watchdog timer to trigger a reboot and restart the system.

Defaults Enabled
Command
History
Information router with a single unresponsive unit. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual
power cycle.
show hardware layer2 acl

s Display Layer 2 ACL data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe.
Syntax show hardware layer2 acl stack-unit 0-7 port-set 0-1
Parameters
stack-unit 0-7 Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by 0 to 7 to select a stack ID.
port-set 0-1 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number 0 or 1. The S25 models of
the S-Series have only port-pipe 0.
Command
History
show hardware layer3

s Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe.
Syntax show hardware layer3 {acl | qos} stack-unit 0-7 port-set 0-1
Parameters
acl | qos Enter either the keyword acl or the keyword qos to select between
ACL or QoS data.
stack-unit 0-7 Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by a numeral from 0 to 7 to
select a stack ID.
port-set 0-1 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number 0 or 1. The S25
models of the S-Series have only port-pipe 0.
Command
History

show hardware stack-unit
s Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of
the designated stack member.
Syntax show hardware stack-unit 0-7 {cpu data-plane statistics [stack-port 0-52] | cpu
party-bus statistics | drops [unit 0-1 [port 0-27]] | stack-port 0-52 | unit 0-1 {counters |
details | port-stats [detail] | register}}
Parameters
{command-option} stack member and then enter one of the following command options
to display a collection of data based on the option entered.
cpu data-plane Enter the keywords cpu data-plane statistics, optionally followed by
statistics the keywords stack port and its number 0 to 52 to display the data
plane statistics, which shows the Higig port raw input/output counter
statistics to which the stacking module is connected.
cpu party-bus statistics Enter the keywords cpu party-bus statistics, to display the
Management plane input/output counter statistics of the pseudo party bus
interface.
drops [unit 0-1 [port Enter the drops keyword to display internal drops on the selected
0-27]] stack member. Optionally, use the unit keyword with 0 or 1 to select
port-pipe 0 or 1, and then use port 0-27 to select a port on that
port-pipe.
stack-port 0-52 Enter this keyword and a stacking port number to select a stacking
port for which to display statistics. Identify the stack port number as
you would to identify a 10G port that was in the same place in one of
the rear modules.
Note: You can identify stack port numbers by physical inspection of
the rear modules. The numbering is the same as for the 10G ports.
You can also inspect the output of the show system stack-ports
command.
unit 0-1 {counters | Enter the unit keyword followed by 0 or 1 for port-pipe 0 or 1, and
details | port-stats then enter one of the following keywords to troubleshoot errors on
[detail] | register} the selected port-pipe and to give status on why a port is not coming
up to register level: counters, details, port-stats [detail], or
register
Command Modes EXEC

EXEC Privilege
Command
History
Version 7.8.1.0 Modified: stack-port keyword range expanded from 49-52 to 0-52; output modified
for the cpu data-plane statistics option; the following options were added:
drops [unit 0-1 [port 0-27]] ; unit 0-1 {counters | details | port-stats
[detail] | register}

Example 1 Figure 66-3. show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics Command Example
FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 cpu data-plane statistics stack-port 49

Input Statistics:
Output Statistics:
0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec
FTOS#
Example 2 Figure 66-4. show hardware stack-unit cpu party-bus statistics Command Example
FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 cpu party-bus statistics
Input Statistics:
0 dropped, 0 errors
Output Statistics:
0 errors
FTOS#
Example 3 Figure 66-5. show hardware stack-unit drops Command Example

FTOS#show hardware stack-unit 0 drops unit 1 port 27
--- Ingress Drops ---
Ingress Drops : 0
IBP CBP Full Drops : 0
PortSTPnotFwd Drops : 0
IPv4 L3 Discards : 0
Policy Discards : 0
Packets dropped by FP : 0
(L2+L3) Drops : 0
Port bitmap zero Drops : 0
Rx VLAN Drops : 0
--- Ingress MAC counters---
Ingress FCSDrops : 0
Ingress MTUExceeds : 0

TCS CLI 8.4.2.7 Oct-01-2012

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TCS CLI 8.4.2.7 Oct-01-2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FTOS Command Line

Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.

5 Control and Monitoring

9 Access Control Lists (ACL)

10 ACL VLAN Group

11 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)

12 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)

13 Content Addressable Memory (CAM)

15 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

16 Equal Cost Multi-Path

17 Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD)

18 FTOS Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)

19 FTOS Service Agent

21 High Availability (HA)

22 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

25 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs)

28 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)

29 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

31 Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP)

32 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)

33 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)

34 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

38 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)

39 Policy-based Routing (PBR)

40 PIM-Dense Mode (PIM-DM)

41 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM)

42 PIM-Source Specific Mode (PIM-SSM)

43 Power over Ethernet (PoE)

45 Private VLAN (PVLAN)

46 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree plus (PVST+)

47 Quality of Service (QoS)

48 Router Information Protocol (RIP)

49 Remote Monitoring (RMON)

50 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

Trace List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1322

52 Service Provider Bridging

54 SNMP and Syslog

56 S-Series Stacking Commands

58 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

59 Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP)

62 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)

63 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

64 C-Series Diagnostics and Debugging

65 E-Series Debugging and Diagnostics

Offline Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1575

A ICMP Message Types

About this Guide

This chapter includes:

Table 1-1. Information Symbols

Symbol Brief Description

FTOS Configuration Guide

This chapter covers the following topics:

Accessing the Command Line

Figure 2-1 is an example of a successful Telnet login session.

% Warning: The following users are currently configuring the system:

User "" on line console0

% Warning: User admin on line vty2 172.16.1.210 is in configuration

Navigating the Command Line Interface

Table 2-1. Command Prompt and Corresponding Command Mode

Prompt CLI Command Mode

Prompt CLI Command Mode

Type a partial keyword followed by a ?

Figure 2-3. Partial Keyword Example